Asme NM.3.1-18 PDF

ASME NM.3.
1-2018
Nonmetallic Materials
Part 1 — Thermoplastic
Material Specifications
ASME Standards for Nonmetallic
Pressure Piping Systems
A N A M E R I C A N N AT I O N A L STA N DA R D
ASME NM.3.1-2018
Nonmetallic Materials
Part 1 — Thermoplastic
Material Specifications
x
ASME Standards for Nonmetallic

Pressure Piping Systems
AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
x
Date of Issuance: May 31, 2019
The next edition of this Standard is scheduled for publication in 2020. This Standard will become effective 6 months after the
Date of Issuance.
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretations of technical aspects of this Standard. Periodically certain
actions of the ASME NPPS Committee may be published as Cases. Cases and interpretations are published on the ASME website
under the Committee Pages at http://cstools.asme.org/ as they are issued.
Errata to codes and standards may be posted on the ASME website under the Committee Pages to provide corrections to
incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors in codes and standards. Such errata shall be used
on the date posted.
The Committee Pages can be found at http://cstools.asme.org/. There is an option available to automatically receive an e-mail
notification when errata are posted to a particular code or standard. This option can be found on the appropriate Committee
Page after selecting “Errata” in the “Publication Information” section.
ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards. The Standards
Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an
opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity
for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items mentioned in this
document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor
assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the
risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government or industry
endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME procedures
and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2019 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Committee Roster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
ASTM Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Correspondence With the NPPS Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Specifications Listed by Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
SD-1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SD-1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 7
SD-2116 Specification for FEP-Fluorocarbon Molding and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SD-2239 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SD-2241 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) . . . . . 33
SD-2464 Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 43
SD-2466 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 . . . . . 49
SD-2467 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 . . . . . 57
SD-2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings . . . . . . . 67
SD-2683 Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled
Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SD-2737 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SD-2846/SD- Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
2846M Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SD-3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
SD-3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and
Coating Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
SD-3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SD-3307 Specification for Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)-Fluorocarbon Resin Molding and Extrusion
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SD-3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SD-4101 Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SD-4894 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
SD-4895 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced From Dispersion . . 191
SD-4976 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . 207
SD-5575 Classification System for Copolymers of Vinylidene Fluoride (VDF) With Other
Fluorinated Monomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
SD-6779 Classification System for and Basis of Specification for Polyamide Molding and Extrusion
Materials (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
iii
SF-437 Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
SF-438 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
SF-439 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SF-441/SF- Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and
441M 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
SF-442/SF- Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) . . . . 279
442M
SF-714 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter 289
SF-1055 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter
Controlled Polyethylene and Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing . . . 301
SF-1483 Specification for Oriented Poly(Vinyl Chloride), PVCO, Pressure Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
SF-1673 Specification for Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems 319
SF-1733 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyamide (PA) Plastic Fitting for Polyamide (PA)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
SF-1924 Specification for Plastic Mechanical Fittings for Use on Outside Diameter Controlled
Polyethylene Gas Distribution Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SF-1970 Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for Use in Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems . . . . 341
SF-2206 Specification for Fabricated Fittings of Butt-Fused Polyethylene (PE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SF-2389 Specification for Pressure-Rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SF-2600 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyamide-11 Fittings for Outside Diameter
Controlled Polyamide-11 Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
SF-2619/SF- Specification for High-Density Polyethylene (PE) Line Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
2619M
SF-2623 Specification for Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) SDR 9 Tubing . . . . . . 395
SF-2769 Specification for Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Plastic Hot and Cold-
Water Tubing and Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SF-2880 Specification for Lap-Joint Type Flange Adapters for Polyethylene Pressure Pipe in
Nominal Pipe Sizes 3/4 in. to 65 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
SF-2945 Specification for Polyamide 11 Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . 425
Mandatory Appendices
I Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
II Guidelines on Acceptable ASTM Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
III Guidelines on Multiple Marking of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
IV Guideline on the Approval of New Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Tables
I-1 Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
II-1 Acceptable ASTM Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
iv
FOREWORD
In 2011, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) established the Committee on Nonmetallic Pressure
Piping Systems (NPPS) to develop standards for the construction of nonmetallic pressure piping systems. This
Committee’s goal was to specify construction1 requirements for nonmetallic piping and piping products; such require-
ments were not adequately defined in existing standards.
Prior to the development of the ASME Standards for Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems, nonmetallic pressure piping
requirements were contained within several existing standards. The nonmetallic piping requirements of the ASME B31
Code for Pressure Piping varied across Sections, with some Sections having no requirements for nonmetallic components
at all. Other standards and codes, such as ASME RTP-1 and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section X,
included requirements for reinforced thermoset plastic (RTP) corrosion-resistant equipment but not for piping and
piping components. ASME BPVC, Section III did have a few Code Cases that addressed requirements for some nonmetallic
piping and piping components, including those made from glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin (FRP) and a few
thermoplastics, e.g., high density polyethylene (HDPE) and poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC). However, the scope of these Code
Cases was very limited, and in some cases the methodology was nearly 30 years old. The ASME NPPS Standards now serve
as a centralized location for NPPS requirements and are developed by committees whose members are experts in this
field. The NPPS Committee’s functions are to establish requirements related to pressure integrity for the construction of
nonmetallic pressure piping systems, and to interpret these requirements when questions arise regarding their intent.
ASME and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) have cooperated for more than 50
years in the preparation of material specifications adequate for safety in the field of pressure equipment. This cooperative
effort originated with metallic materials in ASME BPVC, Section II.
The evolution of this cooperative effort is described in Professor A. M. Greene’s “History of the ASME Boiler Code,” which
was published as a series of articles in Mechanical Engineering from July 1952 through August 1953. The following
quotations, which are based on the minutes of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee, are taken from
Professor Greene’s history and illustrate the cooperative nature of the specifications found in ASME BPVC, Section
II, Material Specifications:
“General discussion of material specifications comprising [Paragraphs] 1 to 112 of Part 2 and the
advisability of having them agree with ASTM specifications.” (1914)
“An ASME Subcommittee . . . was appointed to confer with the American Society for Testing
Materials.” (1916)
“Because of this co-operation the specifications of the 1918 Edition of the ASME Boiler Code were
more nearly in agreement with ASTM specifications. . . . In the 1924 Edition of the Code, ten speci-
fications were in complete agreement with ASTM specifications, four in substantial agreement, and
two covered materials for which the American Society for Testing Materials had no corresponding
specifications. . . .
“In Section II, Material Specifications, the paragraphs were given new numbers, beginning with S-
1 and extending to S-213.” (1925)
“Section II was brought into agreement with changes made in the latest ASTM specifications since
1921.” (1932)
“The Subcommittee on Material Specifications . . . arranged for the introduction of the revisions of
many of the specifications so that they would agree with the latest form of the earlier ASTM
Specifications.” (1935)
1
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, erection, examination, inspection, testing,
and overpressure protection.
v
This cooperation has continued with the ASME NPPS Standards. ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 contain many material
specifications that are similar to the corresponding ASTM specifications but that have been modified for use in accordance
with an ASME construction standard.2 Many of these specifications are published in dual format, i.e., they include both U.S.
Customary units and SI units. The metrication protocols followed in the specifications are those adopted by ASTM, and
they usually conform to the requirements of IEEE/ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for the Use of the International System of
Units (SI): The Modern Metric System.
In 1992, the ASME Board of Pressure Technology Codes and Standards endorsed the use of non-ASTM material for
ASME BPVC applications with the intent that ASME’s procedures and practices for the adoption of ASTM material be used
for the adoption of non-ASTM materials. ASME committees continue to consider materials for use in ASME applications;
see Mandatory Appendix IV for guidance on the approval of new materials.
ASME material specifications identical to those of the originating organization are identified by both the ASME symbol
and the originating organization’s symbol. The specifications prepared and copyrighted by ASTM and other originating
organizations are reproduced in this Standard with the permission of the respective organization. The NPPS Committee
has carefully considered each new and revised specification, and has made such changes as deemed necessary to adapt the
specification for use in accordance with an ASME construction standard. In addition, ASME has furnished ASTM with the
basic requirements that should govern many proposed new specifications. Joint action will continue an effort to make the
ASTM and ASME specifications identical.
ASME NM.3.1-2018 was approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on August 16, 2018.
2
ASME construction standards include the ASME B16 series of standards, the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping, ASME BPVC, ASME NM.1, ASME
NM.2, and ASME RTP-1.
vi
ASME NPPS COMMITTEE
Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems
(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Standard.)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

J. Eisenman, Chair
C. Henley, Vice Chair
C. Ramcharran, Secretary
STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

R. Appleby, ExxonMobil Pipeline Co. D. Keeler, Dow Chemical Co.
D. Burwell, Dudley Burwell Consulting W. Lundy, U.S. Coast Guard
M. Clark, Consultant D. McGriff, ISCO Industries, Inc.
B. R. Colley, Ashland, LLC T. Musto, Sargent & Lundy, LLC
R. Davis, Ershigs, Inc. C. Ramcharran, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
J. Eisenman, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
M. Engelkemier, Cargill L. Vetter, Sargent & Lundy, LLC
B. Hebb, RPS Composites, Inc. F. Volgstadt, Volgstadt & Associates, Inc.
C. Henley, Kiewit Engineering Group, Inc. V. D. Holohan, Contributing Member, U.S. Department of
L. Hutton, Plasticwelding, LLC Transportation — PHMSA
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NONMETALLIC MATERIALS

T. Musto, Chair, Sargent & Lundy, LLC M. Nayyar, NICE
L. Hutton, Vice Chair, Plasticwelding, LLC C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
C. O’Brien, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers D. Woods, Woods Scientific Consulting, LLC
F. L. Brown, Consultant D. Burwell, Contributing Member, Dudley Burwell Consulting
B. R. Colley, Ashland, LLC M. Cudahy, Contributing Member, Plastic Pipe and Fittings
R. Davis, Ershigs, Inc. Association
B. Hauger, Bryan Hauger Consulting, Inc. C. Moore, Contributing Member, NOV Fiberglass Systems
D. Keller, Equistar Chemicals, LP A. Sakr, Contributing Member, Specialist Engineer
NM-2-FRP AND NM-3-NMM SUBGROUP ON MATERIALS

B. R. Colley, Chair, Ashland, LLC J. Ness, AOC LLC
P. K. Gilbert, Vice Chair, NOV Fiber Glass Systems D. Olson, Daniel Co.
M. Beneteau, Owens Corning C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
J. L. Bustillos, Bustillos & Associates, LLC G. A. Van Beek, Southern Co. Services
L. J. Craigie, Consultant K. Wachholder, Sargent & Lundy, LLC
R. Davis, Ershigs, Inc. P. R. Wilt, All Plastics and Fiberglass, Inc.
B. L. Hutton, Lubrizol Advanced Materials L. E. Hunt, Contributing Member, L. E. Hunt and Associates, LLC
THERMO SUBGROUP ON MATERIALS

L. Hutton, Chair, Plasticwelding, LLC G. Morgan, Viega, LLC
J. Leary, Vice Chair, Widos, LLC V. Rohatgi, Chevron Phillips Chemical Co.
C. Eastman, Kiewit Power Constructors D. R. Townley, Alternate, Lubrizol Advanced Materials
L. Gill, Ipex USA, LLC V. D. Holohan, Contributing Member, U.S. Department of
F. Hampton III, Lubrizol Advanced Materials Transportation — PHMSA
J. Kalnins, Crane Resistoflex
vii
ASTM Personnel
(Cooperating in the Development of the Specifications Herein)
As of April 23, 2019
D20 COMMITTEE ON PLASTICS

M. L. Lavach, Chair K. T. Okamoto, Vice Chair (Products)
W. G. McDonough, Vice Chair (Planning) D. R. Root, Vice Chair (Membership)
J. Smith, Vice Chair (Programs) P. Eiselt, Secretary
H. E. Yohn, Vice Chair (Methods) A. Fick, Staff Manager
J. K. Stieha, Vice Chair (Materials) J. Huffnagle, Administrative Assistant
A. D. Kupfer, Vice Chair (Liaison-Research) S. Bailey, Editor
F17 COMMITTEE ON PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEMS

R. R. Geoffroy, Chair M. Pluimer, Membership Secretary
J. B. Goddard, Division I Chair M. A. Clark, Program Secretary
W. G. Jee, Division II Chair R. Morgan, Staff Manager
S. D. Sandstrum, Division III Chair J. Dicicco, Administrative Assistant
P. Spirkowyc, Secretary E. Whealen, Editor
viii
CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE NPPS COMMITTEE
General. ASME Standards are developed and maintained with the intent to represent the consensus of concerned
interests. As such, users of this Standard may interact with the Committee by requesting interpretations, proposing
revisions or a case, and attending Committee meetings. Correspondence should be addressed to:
Secretary, NPPS Standards Committee

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
http://go.asme.org/Inquiry
Proposing Revisions. Revisions are made periodically to the Standard to incorporate changes that appear necessary
or desirable, as demonstrated by the experience gained from the application of the Standard. Approved revisions will be
published periodically.
The Committee welcomes proposals for revisions to this Standard. Such proposals should be as specific as possible,
citing the paragraph number(s), the proposed wording, and a detailed description of the reasons for the proposal,
including any pertinent documentation.
Proposing a Case. Cases may be issued to provide alternative rules when justified, to permit early implementation of
an approved revision when the need is urgent, or to provide rules not covered by existing provisions. Cases are effective
immediately upon ASME approval and shall be posted on the ASME Committee web page.
Requests for Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information. The request should identify the
Standard and the paragraph, figure, or table number(s), and be written as a Question and Reply in the same format as
existing Cases. Requests for Cases should also indicate the applicable edition(s) of the Standard to which the proposed
Case applies.
Interpretations. Upon request, the NPPS Standards Committee will render an interpretation of any requirement of the
Standard. Interpretations can only be rendered in response to a written request sent to the Secretary of the NPPS
Standards Committee.
Requests for interpretation should preferably be submitted through the online Interpretation Submittal Form. The
form is accessible at http://go.asme.org/InterpretationRequest. Upon submittal of the form, the Inquirer will receive an
automatic e-mail confirming receipt.
If the Inquirer is unable to use the online form, he/she may mail the request to the Secretary of the NPPS Standards
Committee at the above address. The request for an interpretation should be clear and unambiguous. It is further rec-
ommended that the Inquirer submit his/her request in the following format:
Subject: Cite the applicable paragraph number(s) and the topic of the inquiry in one or two words.
Edition: Cite the applicable edition of the Standard for which the interpretation is being requested.
Question: Phrase the question as a request for an interpretation of a specific requirement suitable for
general understanding and use, not as a request for an approval of a proprietary design or
situation. Please provide a condensed and precise question, composed in such a way that a
“yes” or “no” reply is acceptable.
Proposed Reply(ies): Provide a proposed reply(ies) in the form of “Yes” or “No,” with explanation as needed. If
entering replies to more than one question, please number the questions and replies.
Background Information: Provide the Committee with any background information that will assist the Committee in
understanding the inquiry. The Inquirer may also include any plans or drawings that are
necessary to explain the question; however, they should not contain proprietary names or
information.
ix
Requests that are not in the format described above may be rewritten in the appropriate format by the Committee prior
to being answered, which may inadvertently change the intent of the original request.
Moreover, ASME does not act as a consultant for specific engineering problems or for the general application or
understanding of the Standard requirements. If, based on the inquiry information submitted, it is the opinion of
the Committee that the Inquirer should seek assistance, the inquiry will be returned with the recommendation
that such assistance be obtained.
ASME procedures provide for reconsideration of any interpretation when or if additional information that might affect
an interpretation is available. Further, persons aggrieved by an interpretation may appeal to the cognizant ASME
Committee or Subcommittee. ASME does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary
device, or activity.
Attending Committee Meetings. The NPPS Standards Committee regularly holds meetings and/or telephone confer-
ences that are open to the public. Persons wishing to attend any meeting and/or telephone conference should contact the
Secretary of the NPPS Standards Committee.
x
SPECIFICATIONS LISTED BY MATERIALS
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC), Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO), and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
SD-1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SD-1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 . . . 7
SD-2241 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) . . . . . . . . 33
SD-2464 Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 43
SD-2466 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 . . . . . . . . 49
SD-2467 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 . . . . . . . . 57
SD-2846/SD-2846M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SF-437 Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
SF-438 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fit-
tings, Schedule 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
SF-439 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SF-441/SF-441M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and
80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
SF-442/SF-442M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) . . . . . . 279
SF-1483 Specification for Oriented Poly(Vinyl Chloride), PVCO, Pressure Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
SF-1970 Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for Use in Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems . . . . . . . 341
Perfluoro-Ethylene-Propylene Copolymer (FEP)

SD-2116 Specification for FEP-Fluorocarbon Molding and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Perfluoroalkoxy Alkane (PFA)

SD-3307 Specification for Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)-Fluorocarbon Resin Molding and Extrusion Ma-
terials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Polyamide (PA)
SD-6779 Classification System for and Basis of Specification for Polyamide Molding and Extrusion
Materials (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
SF-1733 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyamide (PA) Plastic Fitting for Polyamide (PA)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
SF-2600 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyamide-11 Fittings for Outside Diameter Con-
trolled Polyamide-11 Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
SF-2945 Specification for Polyamide 11 Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Polyethylene (PE)
SD-2239 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SD-2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . 67
SD-2683 Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled
Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SD-2737 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
xi
SD-3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
SD-3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SD-3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SD-4976 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
SF-1055 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Con-
trolled Polyethylene and Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . 301
SF-1924 Specification for Plastic Mechanical Fittings for Use on Outside Diameter Controlled
Polyethylene Gas Distribution Pipe and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SF-2206 Specification for Fabricated Fittings of Butt-Fused Polyethylene (PE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SF-2619/SF-2619M Specification for High-Density Polyethylene (PE) Line Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
SF-2880 Specification for Lap-Joint Type Flange Adapters for Polyethylene Pressure Pipe in
Nominal Pipe Sizes 3/4 in. to 65 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
SF-714 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter . . 289
Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT)

SF-2623 Specification for Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) SDR 9 Tubing . . . . . . . . . 395
SF-2769 Specification for Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Plastic Hot and Cold-Water
Tubing and Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Polypropylene (PP)
SD-4101 Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SF-2389 Specification for Pressure-Rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
SD-4894 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
SD-4895 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced From Dispersion . . . . 191
Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF)

SD-3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and
Coating Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
SD-5575 Classification System for Copolymers of Vinylidene Fluoride (VDF) with Other Fluori-
nated Monomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
SF-1673 Specification for Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems . . 319
xii
INTRODUCTION
The ASME Standards for Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems (NPPS) are
NM.1 Thermoplastic Piping Systems: This Standard contains requirements for piping and piping components that are
produced using thermoplastic resins or compounds. Thermoplastics are a specific group of nonmetallic
materials that, for processing purposes, are capable of being repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and
hardened by decrease of temperature.
NM.2 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Piping Systems: This Standard contains requirements for piping and
piping components that are produced using glass-fiber reinforcement embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin.
NM.3 Nonmetallic Materials: This Standard includes specifications for nonmetallic materials (except wood, nonfibrous
glass, and concrete) and, in conformance with the requirements of the individual construction standards,
methodologies, design values, limits, and cautions on the use of materials. This Standard is divided into three
Parts:
– NM.3.1, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 1 —Thermoplastic Material Specifications: This Part contains thermoplastic
material specifications identical to or similar to those published by the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM International) and other recognized national or international organizations.
– NM.3.2, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 2 — Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Material Specifications: This Part contains
reinforced thermoset plastic material specifications identical to or similar to those published by ASTM and other
recognized national or international organizations.
– NM.3.3, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 3 — Properties: This Part provides tables and data sheets for allowable
stresses, mechanical properties (e.g., tensile and yield strength), and physical properties (e.g., coefficient of
thermal expansion and modulus of elasticity) for nonmetallic materials.
It is the owner’s responsibility to select the piping standard that best applies to the proposed piping installation. Factors
to be considered by the owner include limitations of the standard, jurisdictional requirements, and the applicability of
other standards. All applicable requirements of the selected standard shall be met. For some installations, more than one
standard may apply to different parts of the installation. The owner is also responsible for imposing requirements
supplementary to those of the standard if such requirements are necessary to ensure safe piping for the proposed
installation.
Certain piping within a facility may be subject to other codes and standards, including but not limited to the following:
ASME B31.1, Power Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in electric power generating
stations, industrial and institutional plants, geothermal heating systems, and central and district heating and cooling
systems.
ASME B31.3, Process Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in petroleum refineries; onshore
and offshore petroleum and natural gas production facilities; chemical, pharmaceutical, textile, paper, ore-processing,
semiconductor, and cryogenic plants; food- and beverage-processing facilities; and related processing plants and
terminals.
ASME B31.4, Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquids and Slurries: This code contains requirements for piping
transporting products that are predominately liquid between plants and terminals, and within terminals and pumping,
regulating, and metering stations.
ASME B31.5, Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components: This code contains requirements for piping for
refrigerants and secondary coolants.
ASME B31.8, Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems: This code contains requirements for piping transporting
products that are predominately gas between sources and terminals, including compressor, regulating, and metering
stations; and gas gathering pipelines.
ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in industrial,
institutional, commercial, and public buildings, and in multi-unit residences, which does not require the range of sizes,
pressures, and temperatures covered in ASME B31.1.
xiii
ASME B31.12, Hydrogen Piping and Pipelines: This code contains requirements for piping in gaseous and liquid hydrogen
service, and pipelines in gaseous hydrogen service.
National Fuel Gas Code: This code contains requirements for piping for fuel gas from the point of delivery to the
connection of each fuel utilization device.
NFPA 99, Health Care Facilities: This standard contains requirements for medical and laboratory gas systems.
NFPA Fire Protection Standards: These standards contain requirements for fire protection systems using water, carbon
dioxide, halon, foam, dry chemicals, and wet chemicals.
The ASME NPPS Standards specify engineering requirements deemed necessary for safe design and construction of
nonmetallic pressure piping. These Standards contain mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmanda-
tory guidance for construction activities. These Standards do not address all aspects of these activities, and those aspects
that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. While safety is the overriding consideration, this
factor alone will not necessarily govern the final specifications for any piping installation. With few exceptions, the
requirements do not, of practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service
related to specific service fluids or external operating environments. These Standards are not design handbooks.
Many decisions that must be made to produce a safe piping installation are not specified in detail within these
Standards. These Standards do not serve as substitutes for sound engineering judgment by the owner and the designer.
The phrase engineering judgment refers to technical judgments made by knowledgeable designers experienced in the
application of these Standards. Engineering judgments must be consistent with the philosophy of these Standards, and
such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific prohibitions of these Standards.
To the greatest possible extent, Standard requirements for design are stated in terms of basic design principles and
formulas. These are supplemented as necessary with specific requirements to ensure uniform application of principles
and to guide selection and application of piping elements. These Standards prohibit designs and practices known to be
unsafe and contain warnings where caution, but not prohibition, is warranted.
These Standards generally specify a simplified approach for many of their requirements. A designer may choose to use a
more rigorous analysis to develop design and construction requirements. When the designer decides to take this
approach, he or she shall provide to the owner details and calculations demonstrating that design, fabrication, exam-
ination, inspection, testing, and overpressure protection are consistent with the criteria of these Standards. These details
shall be adequate for the owner to verify the validity of the approach and shall be approved by the owner. The details shall
be documented in the engineering design.
The designer is responsible for complying with requirements of these Standards and demonstrating compliance with
the equations of these Standards when such equations are mandatory. These Standards neither require nor prohibit the
use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements of these Standards. However,
designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they are responsible for all
technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and for the application of these programs to their design.
These Standards do not fully address tolerances. When dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified with
tolerances, the values of these parameters are considered nominal, and allowable tolerances or local variances may be
considered acceptable when based on engineering judgment and standard practices as determined by the designer.
Suggested requirements of good practice are provided for the care and inspection of in-service nonmetallic pressure
piping systems only as an aid to owners and their inspectors.
The requirements of these Standards are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any proprie-
tary or specific design or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any form of
construction that conforms to the requirements of these Standards.
It is intended that editions of the ASME NPPS Standards not be retroactive. Unless agreement is specifically made
between contracting parties to use another edition, or the regulatory body having jurisdiction imposes the use of another
edition, the latest edition issued at least 6 months prior to the original contract date for the first phase of activity covering a
piping installation shall be the governing document for all design, materials, fabrication, erection, examination, inspec-
tion, testing, and overpressure protection for the piping until the completion of the work and initial operation. Revisions
to material specifications included in ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 are originated by ASTM and other recognized
national or international organizations, and are usually adopted by ASME. However, those revisions do not necessarily
indicate that materials produced to earlier editions of specifications are no longer suitable for ASME construction. Both
ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 include a Mandatory Appendix, “Guideline on Acceptable ASTM Editions,” that lists the
latest edition of material specifications adopted by ASME as well as other editions considered by ASME to be identical for
ASME construction.
Users of these Standards are cautioned against making use of revisions to these Standards without assurance that they
are acceptable to the proper authorities in the jurisdiction where the piping is to be installed.
xiv
The specifications for materials published in ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 are identical or similar to those published
by ASTM and other recognized national or international organizations. When reference is made in an ASME material
specification to a non-ASME specification for which a companion ASME specification exists, the reference shall be inter-
preted as applying to the ASME specification.
Not all materials included in the specifications in ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 have been approved for use in ASME
construction. Use is limited to those materials and grades approved by at least one of the ASME construction standards1
for application under its requirements. Material produced to an acceptable material specification is not limited as to
country of origin.
1
ASME construction standards include the ASME B16 series of standards, the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping, ASME BPVC, ASME NM.1, ASME
NM.2, and ASME RTP-1.
xv
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1784
SPECIFICATION FOR RIGID POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE)

(PVC) COMPOUNDS AND CHLORINATED POLY(VINYL
CHLORIDE) (CPVC) COMPOUNDS
SD-1784
(Identical with ASTM D1784-11 except for additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 14 and 15.)
1
SD-1784 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
1. Scope 1.4 The text of this specification references notes and

1.1 This specification covers rigid PVC and CPVC com- footnotes that provide explanatory material. These notes and
pounds intended for general purpose use in extruded or molded footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be
form—including pressure piping applications and nonpressure considered as requirements of this specification.
piping applications—composed of poly(vinyl chloride), chlo- 1.5 Rigid PVC recycle plastics meeting the requirements of
rinated poly(vinyl chloride), or vinyl chloride copolymers this specification may be used in some applications. Refer to
containing at least 80 % vinyl chloride, and the necessary the specific requirements in the materials and manufacture
compounding ingredients. The compounding ingredients shall section of the applicable product standard.
be permitted to consist of lubricants, stabilizers, non-poly(vinyl 1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
chloride) resin modifiers, pigments, and inorganic fillers. standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
NOTE 1—Selection of specific compounds for particular end uses or only.
applications requires consideration of other characteristics such as thermal 1.7 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
properties, optical properties, weather resistance, etc. Specific require-
ments and test methods for these properties should be by mutual test methods portion, Section 11, of this specification: This
agreement between the purchaser and the seller. standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
NOTE 2—Selection of compounds for pressure piping applications if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
requires consideration of material stress ratings that are required for of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
determining pressure ratings, but are not addressed in this specification.
Requirements for long-term material stress ratings in accordance with
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
recognized stress rating standards, such as HDB in accordance with Test tions prior to use.
Method D2837 for pressure piping, should be included in specifications NOTE 4—This specification is similar in content (but not technically
for pressure piping products or systems. equivalent) to ISO 1163-1:1985 and ISO 1163-2:1980.
NOTE 3—The list of compounding ingredients in 1.1 is not meant to be
an exhaustive list of allowable compound ingredients. In addition to the
compounding ingredients listed, others may also be used. The list of 2. Referenced Documents
compounding ingredients in 1.1 does not imply that every ingredient listed 2.1 ASTM Standards:
is a required ingredient. Some compounds may not contain all the D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
ingredients listed in 1.1.
Impact Resistance of Plastics
1.2 For applications involving special chemical resistance D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
see Classification D5260. D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
1.3 The requirements in this specification are intended for Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
the quality control of compounds used to manufacture finished D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
products. These properties are based on data obtained using D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
standard test specimens tested under specified conditions. They Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
are not directly applicable to finished products. See the D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
applicable ASTM standards for requirements for finished D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
products. tics
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
2
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1784
D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis 5. Ordering Information
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis 5.1 The purchase order, or inquiry, for these materials shall
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products state the specification number and identify the class selected,
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic for example, D1784, Class 12454.
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
D5260 Classification for Chemical Resistance of Poly(Vinyl 5.2 Further definition, as may be required for the following,
Chloride) (PVC) Homopolymer and Copolymer Com- shall be on the basis of agreement between the purchaser and
pounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) the seller:
Compounds 5.2.1 Physical form and particle size (see 6.1),
5.2.2 Contamination level (see 6.2),
2.2 ISO Standards:
5.2.3 Color (see 6.3),
ISO 1163-1:1985
5.2.4 Other supplementary definition if necessary, and
ISO 1163-2:1980
5.2.5 Inspection (see 12.1).
3. Terminology
6. Materials and Manufacture
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 and abbreviations with Terminology D1600 6.1 Materials supplied under this specification shall be PVC
unless otherwise indicated. and CPVC compounds in the form of cubes, granules, free-
flowing powder blends, or compacted powder blends.
4. Classification 6.2 Materials shall be of uniform composition and size and
4.1 Means for selecting and identifying rigid PVC and shall be free of foreign matter to such level of contamination as
CPVC compounds are provided in Table 1. The properties may be agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller.
enumerated in Table 1 and the tests defined are expected to 6.3 Color and transparency or opacity of molded or ex-
provide identification of the compounds selected. They are not truded articles formed under the conditions recommended by
necessarily suitable for direct application in design because of the seller shall be comparable within commercial match
differences in shape of part, size, loading, environmental tolerances to the color and transparency or opacity of standard
conditions, etc. molded or extruded samples of the same thickness supplied in
4.2 Classes are designated by the cell number for each advance by the seller of the material.
property in the order in which they are listed in Table 1.
7. Physical Requirements
NOTE 5—The manner in which selected materials are identified by this
classification system is illustrated by a Class 12454 rigid PVC compound 7.1 Test values for specimens of the material prepared as
having the following requirements (see Table 1). The two-digit cell limits specified in Section 9 and tested in accordance with Section 10
10 and 11 are rarely used, only for special high-temperature grades of shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1 for the class
CPVC compound: selected.
Class 1 2 4 5 4
Identification:
Poly(vinyl chloride) 8. Sampling
homopolymer
8.1 A batch or lot shall be considered as a unit of manufac-
Property and Minimum Value:
Izod ture and may consist of a blend of two or more production runs
(34.7 J/m (0.65 ft·lbf/in.)) of material.
under notch
Tensile strength 8.2 Sample using a statistically acceptable procedure.
(48.3 MPa (7000 psi))
Modulus of elasticity in
tension
9. Conformance Testing
(2758 MPa (400 000 psi)) 9.1 The minimum properties identified by the class desig-
Deflection temperature under
load nations in Table 1 specified in the purchase order (see 5.1) shall
(70°C (158°F)) be verified by the tests described in Section 11.
9.2 Conformance with this specification shall be determined
NOTE 6—The cell-type format provides the means for identification and with one set of test results. If there are multiple test results, the
close characterization and specification of material properties, alone or in
combination, for a broad range of materials. This type format, however, is average value for all test samples shall be used to determine
subject to possible misapplication since unobtainable property combina- conformance.
tions can be selected if the user is not familiar with commercially available
9.3 If the average test value produces values below the
materials. The manufacturer should be consulted.
minimum property values of the Class designation in Table 1,
4.3 Product application chemical resistance when specified the material does not conform to this specification.
shall be classified in accordance with the classification section
of Classification D5260. 10. Specimen Preparation
10.1 Compliance with the designated requirements chosen
from Table 1 shall be determined with compression-molded,
extruded, or injection-molded test specimens for Izod impact
3
SD-1784 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Class Requirements for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
NOTE 1—The minimum property value will determine the cell number although the maximum expected value may fall within a higher cell.
Desig- Cell Limits
nation
Property and Unit
Order
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Base resin unspecified poly(vinyl chlorinated vinyl co-

chloride) poly polymer
homo- (vinyl
polymer chloride)
2 Impact resistance
(Izod), min:
J/m of notch unspecified <34.7 34.7 80.1 266.9 533.8 800.7
under notch
ft·lb/in. of notch <0.65 0.65 1.5 5.0 10.0 15.0
under notch
3 Tensile strength,
min:
MPa unspecified <34.5 34.5 41.4 48.3 55.2
psi <5 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000
4 Modulus of
elasticity in
tension, min:
MPa unspecified <1930 1930 2206 2482 2758 3034
psi <280 000 280 000 320 000 360 000 400 000 440 000
5 Deflection
temperature
under load, min,
1.82 MPa
(264 psi):
°C unspecified <55 55 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
°F <131 131 140 158 176 194 212 230 251 266 284
A A A A A A A A A A A A
Flammability
A
All compounds covered by this specification, when tested in accordance with Test Method D635, shall yield the following results: average extent of burning of <25 mm;
average time of burning of <10 s.
resistance, tensile strength, tensile modulus of elasticity, de- and 50 6 5 % relative humidity. In cases of disagreement, the
flection temperature under load, and flammability. Specimens tolerances shall be 61°C (61.8°F) and 62 % relative humid-
cut from laminates of compression-molded or extruded sec- ity.
tions (see Practice D4703) shall not be used unless it can be
shown by test that complete fusion is obtained. It is understood 11.3 Tensile Strength and Modulus of Elasticity—Test
that a material shall not be tested without also specifying the Method D638, using Type I specimens of 3.2 6 0.4 mm (0.13
method of specimen preparation. When comparative tests of 6 0.02 in.) thickness and testing speed of 5.1 mm (0.20
materials are desired, the greatest care shall be taken to ensure in.)/min 6 25 %. Report tensile strength at the yield point if the
that all specimens are prepared in exactly the same way used to material yields, otherwise at break.
certify the cell class of the compound. Procedures used in
11.4 Impact Resistance (Izod)—Method A of Test Method
preparing the test specimens shall be as recommended by the
D256, using 3.2-mm (0.125-in.) thick specimens. The speci-
supplier for each specific compound.
mens may be compression-molded, extruded, or injection-
NOTE 7—It is possible that a specimen taken from a finished product molded with the provision that compression-molded or ex-
will not produce the same results as a specimen prepared by the method truded specimens built up as laminates in which complete
used for purposes of cell class testing and certification.
fusion is obtained shall be acceptable. Complete fusion means
11. Test Methods there shall be no evidence of fraying or delamination at the
break.
11.1 Conditioning—The test specimen for deflection tem-
perature (Test Method D648) shall be conditioned in accor- 11.5 Deflection Temperature—Test Method D648–Method
dance with Procedure B of Practice D618, except that the A- using 127 mm (5 in.) long, 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) wide, and 3.2
minimum conditioning time in the circulating air oven shall be mm (0.125 in.) thick specimens under 1.82 MPa (264 psi) fiber
24 h. All other molded test specimens shall be conditioned in stress. Materials that require high-temperature annealing prior
accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618. The minimum to testing shall be annealed at 50°C (122°F) for 24 h or at the
conditioning time shall be 24 h. manufacturer’s recommendation. Specimens shall be cooled in
11.2 Test Conditions—Unless otherwise specified in the test accordance with Procedure B of Practice D618. The test report
methods or in this specification, tests shall be conducted in the for annealed specimens shall include the time and temperature
standard laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) of annealing used.
4
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1784
11.6 Flammability—Test Method D635. All compounds acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
covered by this specification, when tested in accordance with at the lowest rate to the point of delivery, unless otherwise
Test Method D635, shall yield the following results: average specified in the contract or order.
extent of burning of <25 mm; average time of burning of <10 14.2 Marking—Unless otherwise agreed upon between the
s. purchaser and the seller, shipping containers shall be marked
with the name of the material and the name of the manufac-
12. Inspection turer; class, batch, or lot number; quantity contained therein, as
12.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon defined by the contract or order under which shipment is made;
between the purchaser and the seller as part of the purchase the name of the seller; and the number of the contract or order.
contract. 14.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
13. Certification
13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1. 15. Keywords
15.1 chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) (CPVC); CPVC com-
14. Packaging and Package Marking pounds; poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC); PVC compounds; recycle
14.1 Packaging—The material shall be packaged in stan- plastics; rigid PVC
dard commercial containers, so constructed as to ensure
A1. CERTIFICATION
The producer or supplier shall furnish a certificate of compliance stating that the material was manufactured, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with the Specification, including year date, the Supplementary Requirements, and
any other requirement designated in the purchase order or contract, and that the results met the requirements of that
Specification, the Supplementary Requirements, and the other requirements. A signature or notarization is not required
on the certificate of compliance, but the document shall be dated and shall clearly identify the organization submitting
the certificate. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature or notarization, the certifying organization is responsible for
the contents of the document.
5
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
SPECIFICATION FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

PLASTIC PIPE, SCHEDULES 40, 80, AND 120
SD-1785
(Identical with ASTM D1785-12 except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking re-
quirements in para. 10.2.1.4, renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been
made mandatory.)
7
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,
and 120
1. Scope if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
pipe made in Schedule 40, 80, and 120 sizes and pressure-rated practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
for water (see Appendix X1). Included are criteria for classi- tions prior to use. A specific precautionary statement is given
fying PVC plastic pipe materials and PVC plastic pipe, a in Note 9.
system of nomenclature for PVC plastic pipe, and requirements NOTE 3—CPVC plastic pipes, Schedules 40 and 80, which were
and test methods for materials, workmanship, dimensions, formerly included in this specification, are now covered by Specification
sustained pressure, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion F441/F441M.
NOTE 4—The sustained and burst pressure test requirements, and the
quality. Methods of marking are also given. pressure ratings in the Appendix X1, are calculated from stress values
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended obtained from tests made on pipe 4 in. (100 mm) and smaller. However,
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which tests conducted on pipe as large as 24-in. (600-mm) diameter have shown
these stress values to be valid for larger diameter PVC pipe.
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to NOTE 5—PVC pipe made to this specification is often belled for use as
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- line pipe. For details of the solvent cement bell, see Specification D2672
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some and for details of belled elastomeric joints, see Specifications D3139 and
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. D3212.
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for
2. Referenced Documents
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing.
NOTE 1—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases 2.1 ASTM Standards:
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious saftey D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
hazards should a system fail for any reason. D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
NOTE 2—This standard specifies dimensional, performance and test
requirements for plumbing and fluid handling applications, but does not Under Constant Internal Pressure
address venting of combustion gases. D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall tics
not be considered as requirements of the specification. D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded (CPVC) Compounds
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only moplastic Pipe and Fittings
and are not considered standard. D2152 Test Method for Adequacy of Fusion of Extruded
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Molded Fittings by
test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This Acetone Immersion
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, D2672 Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using
Solvent Cement
D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
8
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis 3.2.4 standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products code—the pipe materials designation code shall consist of the
D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes abbreviation PVC for the type of plastic, followed by the
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM type and grade in Arabic numerals and the design stress
D3212 Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic in units of 100 psi (0.7 MPa) with any decimal figures dropped.
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals When the design stress code contains less than two figures, a
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems cipher shall be used before the number. Thus a complete
F441/F441M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chlo- material code shall consist of three letters and four figures for
ride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 PVC plastic pipe materials (see Section 5).
2.2 Federal Standard:
4. Classification
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
2.3 Military Standard: 4.1 General—This specification covers PVC pipe made to
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage and marked with one of six type/grade/design stress designa-
2.4 NSF Standards: tions (see X1.2) in Schedule 40, 80, and 120 wall sizes.
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related 4.2 Hydrostatic Design Stresses—This specification covers
Materials pipe made from PVC plastics as defined by four hydrostatic
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water System Components— design stresses which have been developed on the basis of
Health Effects long-term tests (Appendix X1).
3. Terminology 5. Materials and Manufacture

3.1 Definitions:—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- 5.1 General—Poly(vinyl chloride) plastics used to make
nology F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi- pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are catego-
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for rized by means of two criteria, namely, (1) short-term strength
poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is PVC. tests and (2) long-term strength tests.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: NOTE 6—The PVC pipe intended for use in the transport of potable
3.2.1 hydrostatic design stress—the estimated maximum water should be evaluated and certified as safe for this purpose by a testing
tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding continu- agency acceptable to the local health authority. The evaluation should be
in accordance with requirements for chemical extraction, taste, and odors
ously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe
that are no less restrictive than those included in NSF Standard No. 14.
will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal The seal or mark of the laboratory making the evaluation should be
hydrostatic water pressure is applied. included on the pipe. See pipe marking requirement for reclaimed water
3.2.2 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum water systems.
pressure the pipe is capable of withstanding continuously with 5.2 Basic Materials—This specification covers pipe made
a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. from PVC plastics having certain physical and chemical
3.2.3 relation between dimensions, design stress, and pres- properties as described in Specification D1784.
sure rating—the following expression, commonly known as 5.3 Compound—The PVC compounds used for this pipe
the ISO equation, is used in this specification to relate shall equal or exceed the following classes described in
dimensions, hydrostatic design stress, and pressure rating: Specification D1784; PVC 12454, or 14333.
2S/P 5 ~ D 0 /t ! 2 1 5.4 Rework Material—The manufacturer shall use only his
own clean rework pipe material and the pipe produced shall
where:
meet all the requirements of this specification.
S = hydrostatic design stress, psi (or MPa),
P = pressure rating, psi (or MPa), 6. Requirements
D0 = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), and 6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm). 6.1.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be as shown in Table
1 and Table 2 when measured in accordance with Test Method
D2122. The tolerances for out-of-roundness shall apply only to
pipe prior to shipment.
6.2 Sustained Pressure—The pipe shall not fail, balloon,
burst, or weep as defined in Test Method D1598, at the test
pressures given in Tables 3-5 when tested in accordance with
8.4.
9
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PVC Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80, and 120, in. (mm)
Tolerances
Maximum Out-of-Roundness (maximum minus minimum
diameter)
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Schedule 40 sizes 31⁄2 in. and Schedule 40 sizes 3 in. and
Average over; Schedule 80 sizes 8 in. less;
and over Schedule 80 sizes 6 in. and
less;
Schedule 120 sizes all
⁄
18 0.405 (10.29) ±0.004 (±0.10) ... 0.016 (0.41)
⁄
14 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (±0.10) ... 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄ 8 0.675 (17.14) ±0.004 (±0.10) ... 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄ 2 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (±0.10) ... 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄ 4 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (±0.10) ... 0.020 (0.51)
1 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (±0.13) ... 0.020 (0.51)
1 1⁄ 4 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (±0.13) ... 0.024 (0.61)
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (±0.15) ... 0.024 (0.61)
2 2.375 (60.32) ±0.006 (±0.15) ... 0.024 (0.61)
2 1⁄ 2 2.875 (73.02) ±0.007 (±0.18) ... 0.030 (0.76)
3 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (±0.20) ... 0.030 (0.76)
3 1⁄ 2 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (±0.20) 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)
4 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (±0.23) 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)
5 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.100 (2.54) 0.060 (1.52)
6 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (±0.28) 0.100 (2.54) 0.070 (1.78)
8 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.090 (2.29)
10 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.100 (2.54)
12 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.120 (3.05)
14 14.000 (355.60 ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.200 (5.08) ...
16 16.000 (406.40) ±0.019 (±0.48) 0.320 (8.13) ...
18 18.000 (457.20) ±0.019 (±0.48) 0.360 (9.14) ...
20 20.000 (508.00) ±0.023 (±0.58) 0.400 (10.2) ...
24 24.000 (609.60) ±0.031 (±0.79) 0.480 (12.2) ...
TABLE 2 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120,A,B in. (mm)
Wall ThicknessA
Nominal Pipe
Schedule 40 Schedule 80 Schedule 120
Size
Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
⁄
18 0.068 (1.73) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.095 (2.41) +0.020 (+0.51) ... ...
1⁄4 0.088 (2.24) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.119 (3.02) +0.020 (+0.51) ... ...
3⁄8 0.091 (2.31) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.126 (3.20) +0.020 (+0.51) ... ...
1⁄2 0.109 (2.77) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.147 (3.73) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.170 (4.32) +0.020 (+0.51)
3⁄4 0.113 (2.87) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.154 (3.91) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.170 (4.32) +0.020 (+0.51)
1 0.133 (3.38) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.179 (4.55) +0.021 (+0.53) 0.200 (5.08) +0.024 (+0.61)
1 1⁄ 4 0.140 (3.56) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.191 (4.85) +0.023 (+0.58) 0.215 (5.46) +0.026 (+0.66)
1 1⁄ 2 0.145 (3.68) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.200 (5.08) +0.024 (+0.61) 0.225 (5.72) +0.027 (+0.68)
2 0.154 (3.91) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.218 (5.54) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.250 (6.35) +0.030 (+0.76)
2 1⁄ 2 0.203 (5.16) +0.024 (+0.61) 0.276 (7.01) +0.033 (+0.84) 0.300 (7.62) +0.036 (+0.91)
3 0.216 (5.49) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.300 (7.62) +0.036 (+0.91) 0.350 (8.89) +0.042 (+1.07)
3 1⁄ 2 0.226 (5.74) +0.027 (+0.68) 0.318 (8.08) +0.038 (+0.96) 0.350 (8.89) +0.042 (+1.07)
4 0.237 (6.02) +0.028 (+0.71) 0.337 (8.56) +0.040 (+1.02) 0.437 (11.10) +0.052 (+1.32)
5 0.258 (6.55) +0.031 (+0.79) 0.375 (9.52) +0.045 (+1.14) 0.500 (12.70) +0.060 (+1.52)
6 0.280 (7.11) +0.034 (+0.86) 0.432 (10.97) +0.052 (+1.32) 0.562 (14.27) +0.067 (+1.70)
8 0.322 (8.18) +0.039 (+0.99) 0.500 (12.70) +0.060 (+1.52) 0.718 (18.24) +0.086 (+2.18)
10 0.365 (9.27) +0.044 (+1.12) 0.593 (15.06) +0.071 (+1.80) 0.843 (21.41) +0.101 (+2.56)
12 0.406 (10.31) +0.049 (+1.24) 0.687 (17.45) +0.082 (+2.08) 1.000 (25.40) +0.120 (+3.05)
14 0.437 (11.10) +0.053 (+1.35) 0.750 (19.05) +0.090 (+2.29) ... ...
16 0.500 (12.70) +0.060 (+1.52) 0.843 (21.41) +0.101 (+2.57) ... ...
18 0.562 (14.27) +0.067 (+1.70) 0.937 (23.80) +0.112 (+2.84) ... ...
20 0.593 (15.06) +0.071 (+1.80) 1.031 (26.19) +0.124 (+3.15) ... ...
24 0.687 (17.45) +0.082 (+2.08) 1.218 (30.94) +0.146 (+3.71) ... ...
A
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the pipe at any cross section. The maximum permitted wall thickness, at any cross section, is the minimum wall thickness
plus the stated tolerance. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement.
B
These dimensions conform to nominal IPS dimensions, with the exception that Schedule 120 wall thickness for pipe sizes 1⁄2 to 31⁄2 in. (12.5 to 87.5 mm), inclusive, are
special PVC plastic pipe sizes.
6.2.1 Accelerated Regression Test—The accelerated regres- intercept that meets the hydrostatic design basis category
sion test shall be used in place of both the sustained and burst requirement (see Tables 3-5 and Test Method D2837) for the
pressure tests, at the option of the manufacturer. The test shall PVC material used in its manufacture. (Example: PVC 1120
be conducted in accordance with 8.4.1. The pipe shall demon- pipe must have a minimum 100 000-h projection of 3830 psi
strate a hydrostatic design basis projection at the 100 000-h (26.40 MPa) and 85 % lower confidence limit (LCL).
10
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
TABLE 3 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F TABLE 4 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F
(23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 (23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedule 80
Pressure Required for TestA Pressure Required for TestA
Nominal
Nominal Pipe PVC1120 PVC1120
Pipe
Size PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC2112 PVC2110 PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC2112 PVC2110
Size
PVC2120 PVC2120
in. psi in. psi
1⁄ 8 1690 1360 1130 930 1⁄8 2570 2060 1720 1410
1⁄ 4 1640 1310 1090 900 1⁄4 2370 1900 1580 1300
3⁄ 8 1310 1050 870 720 3⁄8 1930 1540 1290 1060
1⁄ 2 1250 1000 840 690 1⁄2 1780 1430 1190 980
3⁄ 4 1010 810 680 550 3⁄4 1440 1160 960 790
1 950 760 630 520 1 1320 1060 880 720
1 1⁄ 4 770 620 520 420 11⁄4 1090 870 730 600
1 1⁄ 2 690 560 460 380 11⁄2 990 790 660 540
2 580 470 390 320 2 850 680 570 460
2 1⁄ 2 640 510 430 350 21⁄2 890 710 590 490
3 590 440 370 300 3 790 630 520 430
3 1⁄ 2 500 400 340 280 31⁄2 730 580 480 400
4 470 370 310 260 4 680 540 450 370
5 410 330 270 220 5 610 490 400 330
6 370 300 250 200 6 590 470 390 320
8 330 260 220 180 8 520 410 340 280
10 300 240 200 160 10 490 390 330 270
12 280 220 180 150 12 480 380 320 260
14 270 220 180 150 14 470 380 320 260
16 270 220 180 150 16 470 370 310 260
18 270 220 180 150 18 460 370 310 250
20 260 210 170 140 20 460 370 300 250
24 250 200 170 140 24 450 360 300 250
in. MPa in. MPa
1⁄ 8 11.65 9.38 7.79 6.41 1⁄8 17.72 14.21 11.86 9.72
1⁄ 4 11.31 9.03 7.52 6.21 1⁄4 16.34 13.10 10.90 8.96
3⁄ 8 9.03 7.24 6.00 4.96 3⁄8 13.31 10.62 8.89 7.31
1⁄ 2 8.62 6.89 5.79 4.76 1⁄2 12.27 9.86 8.20 6.76
3⁄ 4 6.96 5.58 4.69 3.79 3⁄4 9.93 8.00 6.62 5.45
1 6.55 5.24 4.34 3.59 1 9.10 7.31 6.07 4.96
1 1⁄ 4 5.31 4.27 3.59 2.90 11⁄4 7.52 6.00 5.03 4.14
1 1⁄ 2 4.76 3.86 3.17 2.62 11⁄2 6.83 4.96 4.55 3.72
2 4.00 3.24 2.69 2.21 2 5.86 4.69 3.93 3.17
2 1⁄ 2 4.41 3.52 2.96 2.41 21⁄2 6.14 4.90 4.07 3.38
3 4.07 3.03 2.55 2.07 3 5.45 4.34 3.59 2.96
3 1⁄ 2 3.45 2.76 2.34 1.93 31⁄2 5.03 4.00 3.31 2.76
4 3.24 2.55 2.14 1.79 4 4.69 3.72 3.10 2.55
5 2.83 2.28 1.86 1.52 5 4.21 3.38 2.76 2.28
6 2.55 2.07 1.72 1.38 6 4.07 3.24 2.69 2.21
8 2.28 1.79 1.52 1.24 8 3.59 2.83 2.34 1.93
10 2.07 1.65 1.38 1.10 10 3.38 2.69 2.28 1.86
12 1.93 1.52 1.24 1.03 12 3.31 2.62 2.21 1.79
14 1.89 1.54 1.26 1.05 14 3.29 2.66 2.24 1.82
16 1.89 1.54 1.26 1.05 16 3.29 2.59 2.17 1.82
18 1.89 1.54 1.26 1.05 18 3.22 2.59 2.17 1.75
20 1.82 1.47 1.19 0.98 20 3.22 2.59 2.10 1.75
24 1.75 1.40 1.19 0.98 24 3.15 2.52 2.10 1.75
A A
The fiber stresses used to derive these test pressures are as follows: The fiber stresses used to derive these test pressures are as follows:
psi MPa psi MPa

PVC1120 4200 29.0 PVC1120 4200 29.0
PVC1220 4200 29.0 PVC1220 4200 29.0
PVC2120 4200 29.0 PVC2120 4200 29.0
PVC2116 3360 23.2 PVC2116 3360 23.2
PVC2112 2800 19.3 PVC2112 2800 19.3
PVC2110 2300 15.9 PVC2110 2300 15.9
6.3 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressures for PVC

plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 6, when determined in 6.4 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting,
accordance with Test Method D1599. cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
with 8.6.
NOTE 7—Times greater than 60 s may be needed to bring large size
specimens to burst pressure. The test is more difficult to pass using greater 6.5 Extrusion Quality—The pipe shall not flake or disinte-
pressurizing times. grate when tested in accordance with Test Method D2152.
11
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 5 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F (23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedule 120
Pressure Required for TestA
Nominal Pipe PVC1120
Size PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC2112 PVC2110
PVC2120
in. psi
1⁄ 2 2130 1710 1420 1170
3⁄ 4 1620 1300 1080 890
1 1510 1200 1000 830
1 1⁄ 4 1250 1000 830 680
1 1⁄ 2 1130 900 750 620
2 990 790 660 540
2 1⁄ 2 980 780 650 540
3 930 750 620 510
3 1⁄ 2 810 640 540 440
4 900 720 600 490
5 830 660 550 450
6 780 620 520 430
8 760 610 510 420
10 770 620 510 420
12 710 570 480 390
in. MPa
1⁄ 2 14.69 11.79 9.79 8.07
3⁄ 4 11.17 8.96 7.45 6.14
1 10.41 8.27 6.89 5.72
1 1⁄ 4 8.62 6.89 5.72 4.69
1 1⁄ 2 7.79 6.21 5.17 4.27
2 6.83 5.45 4.55 3.72
2 1⁄ 2 6.76 5.38 4.48 3.72
3 6.41 5.17 4.27 3.52
3 1⁄ 2 5.58 4.41 3.72 3.03
4 6.21 4.96 4.14 3.38
5 5.72 4.55 3.79 3.10
6 5.38 4.27 3.59 2.96
8 5.24 4.21 3.52 2.90
10 5.31 4.27 3.52 2.90
12 4.90 3.93 3.31 2.69
A
The fiber stresses used to derive these test pressures are as follows:
psi MPa
PVC1120 4200 29.0
PVC1220 4200 29.0
PVC2120 4200 29.0
PVC2116 3360 23.2
PVC2112 2800 19.3
PVC2110 2300 15.9
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance of no prior agreement, any sample selected by the testing
7.1 The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The 8.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in color, mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
opacity, density, and other physical properties. the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away from
NOTE 8—Color and transparency or opacity should be specified in the an end closure.
contract or purchase order.
8.4 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at
8. Test Methods random. Test individually with water at the internal pressures
8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 given in Tables 3-5, six specimens of pipe, each specimen at
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less least ten times the nominal diameter in length, but not less than
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of 10 in. (250 mm) or more than 3 ft (1 m) between end closures
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. and bearing the permanent marking on the pipe. Maintain the
specimens at the pressure indicated for a period of 1000 h.
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the standard labora- Hold the pressure as closely as possible, but within 610 psi
tory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % (670 kPa). Condition the specimens at the test temperature of
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth- 73.4°F (23°C) to within 3.6°F (62°C). Test in accordance with
ods or in this specification. Test Method D1598, except maintain the pressure at the values
8.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of given in Tables 3-5 for 1000 h. Failure of two of the six
pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and seller. In case specimens tested shall constitute failure in the test. Failure of
12
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
TABLE 6 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
Min Burst PressuresA
Schedule 40 Schedule 80 Schedule 120
Nominal Pipe Size PVC1120 PVC2112 PVC1120 PVC2112 PVC1120 PVC2112
PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC1220 PVC2116
PVC2120 PVC2110 PVC2120 PVC2110 PVC2120 PVC2110
in. psi
1⁄8 2580 2020 3920 3060 ... ...
1⁄4 2490 1950 3620 2830 ... ...
3⁄8 1990 1560 2940 2300 ... ...
1⁄2 1910 1490 2720 2120 3250 2540
3⁄4 1540 1210 2200 1720 2470 1930
1 1440 1130 2020 1580 2300 1790
1 1⁄ 4 1180 920 1660 1300 1900 1490
1 1⁄ 2 1060 830 1510 1180 1720 1340
2 890 690 1290 1010 1510 1180
2 1⁄ 2 970 760 1360 1060 1490 1170
3 840 660 1200 940 1420 1110
3 1⁄ 2 770 600 1110 860 1230 960
4 710 560 1040 810 1380 1080
5 620 390 930 720 1260 990
6 560 440 890 700 1190 930
8 500 390 790 620 1160 910
10 450 350 750 580 1170 920
12 420 330 730 570 1090 850
14 410 320 720 570 ... ...
16 410 320 710 560 ... ...
18 410 320 700 550 ... ...
20 390 310 700 540 ... ...
24 380 300 680 530 ... ...
in. MPa
1⁄8 17.79 13.93 27.03 21.10 ... ...
1⁄4 17.17 13.45 24.96 19.52 ... ...
3⁄8 13.72 10.76 20.27 15.86 ... ...
1⁄2 13.17 10.27 18.76 14.62 22.41 17.52
3⁄4 10.62 8.34 15.17 11.86 17.03 13.31
1 9.93 7.79 13.93 10.89 15.86 12.34
1 1⁄ 4 8.14 6.34 11.45 8.96 13.10 10.27
1 1⁄ 2 7.31 5.72 10.41 8.14 11.86 9.24
2 6.14 4.76 8.89 6.96 10.41 8.14
2 1⁄ 2 6.69 5.24 9.38 7.31 10.27 8.07
3 5.79 4.55 8.27 6.48 9.79 7.65
3 1⁄ 2 5.31 4.14 7.65 5.93 8.48 6.62
4 4.90 3.86 7.17 5.58 9.51 7.45
5 4.27 2.69 6.41 4.96 8.69 6.83
6 3.86 3.03 6.14 4.83 8.20 6.41
8 3.45 2.69 5.45 4.27 8.00 6.27
10 3.10 2.41 5.17 4.00 8.07 6.34
12 2.90 2.28 5.03 3.93 7.52 5.86
14 2.87 2.24 5.04 3.99 ... ...
16 2.87 2.24 4.97 3.92 ... ...
18 2.87 2.24 4.90 3.85 ... ...
20 2.73 2.17 4.90 3.78 ... ...
24 2.66 2.10 4.76 3.71 ... ...
A
psi MPa
PVC1120 6400 44.1
PVC1220 6400 44.1
PVC2120 6400 44.1
PVC2116 5000 34.5
PVC2112 5000 34.5
PVC2110 5000 34.5
one of the six specimens tested in retest shall constitute failure tested. Test three specimens at a single pressure that will result
in the test. Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in in failures at or below 0.10 h. Test an additional three
Test Method D1598. specimens at a single pressure that will result in failures at
8.4.1 Accelerated Regression Test—Test in accordance with about 200 h. Generating additional data points to improve the
procedures in Test Method D1598, using either free end or LTHS or LCL, or both, is acceptable. No points shall be
restrained end fittings. A minimum of six samples shall be excluded unless an obvious defect is detected in the failure area
13
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
of the test sample, or there was a malfunction of the equipment. 10.2.1.3 Schedule (40, 80, or 120, whichever is applicable)
Characterize the data using the least squares regression de- and the pressure rating in pounds per square inch (megapas-
scribed in Test Method D2837. cals) for water at 73°F (23°C) shown as the number followed
8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure by psi (for example, 200 psi (1.4 MPa)). When the indicated
with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method pressure rating is lower than that calculated in accordance with
D1599. The time of testing of each specimen shall be between 3.2.3 (see Appendix X1), this shall be indicated by placing a
60 and 70 s. star after the pressure rating,
10.2.1.4 ASME SD-1785 or both ASME SD-1785 and
8.6 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe each at ASTM D1785,
least 2 in. (50 mm) long, between parallel plates in a suitable 10.2.1.5 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark),
press until the distance between the plates is 40 % of the 10.2.1.6 Production code with which the manufacturer can
outside diameter of the pipe or the walls of the pipe touch, trace the year, month, day, shift, plant and extruder of manu-
whichever occurs first. The rate of loading shall be uniform and facture for this product, and
such that the compression is completed within 2 to 5 min. On 10.2.1.7 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water
removal of the load examine the specimens for evidence of shall also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
splitting, cracking, or breaking. evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the
9. Retest and Rejection laboratory.
9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements NOTE 9—Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must
obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only NOTE 10—It is common practice to dual mark Schedule 40 piping for
by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such potable water and DWV usage in which compliance with each applicable
agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered, standard is met.
changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre- 11. Quality Assurance
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
specification. manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
with this specification and has been found to meet the
10. Product Marking
requirements of this specification.
10.1 Quality of Marking—The marking shall be applied to
the pipe in such a manner that it remains legible (easily read) 12. Certification
after installation and inspection. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
10.2 Content of Marking:
10.2.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following, 13. Keywords
spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m): 13.1 pressure pipe; PVC pipe; Schedule 40 pipe; Schedule
10.2.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in. (50 mm)), 80 pipe; Schedule 120 pipe
10.2.1.2 Type of plastic pipe material in accordance with the
designation code prescribed in 3.2.4, for example, PVC1120,
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
This requirement applies whenever a regulatory authority or user calls for product to be used to
convey or to be in contact with potable water.
S1. Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and latory authority having jurisdiction.
certified for conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard No. 61 or
the health effects portion of NSF Standard No. 14 by an
This requirement applies only to pipe to be used in systems that have not established other provisions for identification.
S2.Pipe Marking Requirement for Reclaimed Water stripes printed lengthwise on opposite sides of the pipe. The
Systems—Color identification of pipe shall be by (1) use of pipe shall be marked RECLAIMED WATER at intervals of 5
purple (violet) PVC material or (2) by use of continuous purple ft. or less.
14
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
GOVERNMENT/MILITARY PROCUREMENT
These requirements apply only to federal/military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.
S1. Pipe for Reclaimed-Water System—Pipe used in these S3. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure-
systems shall be purple (violet) in color and it shall be marked ment:
Reclaimed Water. S3.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the
S2. Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- contract, the materials shall be packaged in accordance with
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer is respon- the supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require- destination in satisfactory condition and which will be accept-
ments specified herein. The producer may use his own or any able to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall
other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection comply with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National
and test requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser Motor Freight Classification rules.
disapproves. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any S3.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material 129 for military agencies.
conforms to prescribed requirements. NOTE S3.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
NOTE S2.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
inspection. uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ANNEX
(Mandatory Information)
A1. CERTIFICATION
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. SOURCE OF HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESSES
X1.1 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the X1.2.3 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic
Plastics Pipe Institute are used to pressure rate PVC plastic design stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC2120.
pipe. These hydrostatic design stresses are 2000 psi (14 MPa), X1.2.4 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic
1600 psi (11 MPa), 1250 psi (9 MPa), and 1000 psi (7 MPa) for design stress of 1600 psi (11.2 MPa), designated as PVC2116.
water at 73°F (23°C). These hydrostatic design stresses apply
only to pipe meeting all the requirements of this specification. X1.2.5 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic
design stress of 1250 psi (8.7 MPa), designated as PVC2112.
X1.2 Six PVC pipe materials are included based on the X1.2.6 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic
requirements of Specification D1784 and the PPI- design stress of 1000 psi (7.0 MPa), designated as PVC2110.
recommended hydrostatic design stresses as follows:
X1.2.1 Type I, Grade 1 (12454-B), with a hydrostatic design X1.3 The standard method for obtaining hydrostatic basis
stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC1120. for thermoplastic pipe materials is Test Method D2837. Addi-
tional information regarding the test method and other criteria
X1.2.2 Type I, Grade 2 (12454-C), with a hydrostatic design
stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC1220.
15
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
used in developing these hydrostatic design stresses may be Lower pressure ratings than those calculated in accordance
obtained from the Plastics Pipe Institute, a division of The with 3.2.3 may be recommended, at the option of the pipe
Society of the Plastics Industry, 355 Lexington Ave., New manufacturer, in which case the SDR shall be included in the
York, NY 10017. These hydrostatic design stresses may not be marking. Experience of the industry indicates that PVC plastic
suitable for materials that show a wide departure from a pipe meeting the requirements of this specification gives
straight-line plot of log stress versus log time to failure. All the satisfactory service under normal conditions for a long period
data available to date on PVC pipe materials made in the at these pressure ratings. The sustained pressure requirements
United States exhibit a straight-line plot under these plotting are related to these ratings through the slopes of the strength-
conditions. time plots of these materials in pipe form.
X1.4 The pipe is rated for use with water at 73°F (23°C) at X1.5 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the
the maximum internal pressures shown in Tables X1.1-X1.3. Plastics Pipe Institute are based on tests made on pipe ranging
in size from 1⁄2 to 21⁄2 in. (12.5 to 63.5 mm).
TABLE X1.1 Water Pressure Ratings at 73°F (23°C) for Schedule 40 PVC Plastic Pipe
Pressure RatingsA
Nominal
B
Pipe PVC1120
Size PVC1220 PVC2116 PVC2112B PVC2110B
PVC2120
in. psi
1⁄ 8 810 650 500 400
1⁄ 4 780 620 490 390
3⁄ 8 620 500 390 310
1⁄ 2 600 480 370 300
3⁄ 4 480 390 300 240
1 450 360 280 220
11⁄4 370 290 230 180
11⁄2 330 260 210 170
2 280 220 170 140
21⁄2 300 240 190 150
3 260 210 160 130
31⁄2 240 190 150 120
4 220 180 140 110
5 190 160 120 100
6 180 140 110 90
8 160 120 100 80
10 140 110 90 70
12 130 110 80 70
14 130 100 80 60
16 130 100 80 60
18 130 100 80 60
20 120 100 80 60
24 120 90 70 60
in. MPa
1⁄ 8 5.58 4.48 3.45 2.76
1⁄ 4 5.38 4.27 3.38 2.69
3⁄ 8 4.27 3.45 2.69 2.14
1⁄ 2 4.14 3.31 2.55 2.07
3⁄ 4 3.31 2.69 2.07 1.65
1 3.10 2.48 1.93 1.52
11⁄4 2.55 2.04 1.59 1.24
11⁄2 2.28 1.79 1.45 1.17
2 1.93 1.52 1.17 0.97
21⁄2 2.07 1.65 1.31 1.03
3 1.79 1.45 1.10 0.90
31⁄2 1.65 1.31 1.03 0.83
4 1.52 1.24 0.97 0.76
5 1.31 1.10 0.83 0.69
6 1.24 0.97 0.76 0.62
8 1.10 0.83 0.69 0.55
10 0.97 0.76 0.62 0.48
12 0.90 0.76 0.55 0.48
14 0.91 0.70 0.56 0.42
16 0.91 0.70 0.56 0.42
18 0.91 0.70 0.56 0.42
20 0.84 0.70 0.56 0.42
24 0.84 0.63 0.49 0.42
A
These pressure ratings apply only to unthreaded pipe. The industry does not recommend threading PVC plastic pipe in Schedule 40 dimensions in nominal pipe sizes
6 in. (150 mm) and smaller.
B
See Appendix X1 for code designation.
16
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-1785
Nominal psi
Pipe PVC1120,
Size, PVC1220, PVC2116 PVC2112 PVC2110
in. PVC2120
Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded
⁄
18 1230 610 980 490 770 380 610 310
⁄
14 1130 570 900 450 710 350 570 280
⁄
38 920 460 730 370 570 290 460 230
⁄
12 850 420 680 340 530 260 420 210
⁄
34 690 340 550 280 430 210 340 170
1 630 320 500 250 390 200 320 160

1 1⁄ 4 520 260 420 210 320 160 260 130
1 1⁄ 2 470 240 380 190 290 150 240 120
2 400 200 320 160 250 130 200 100

2 1⁄ 2 420 210 340 170 260 130 210 110
3 370 190 300 150 230 120 190 90

3 1⁄ 2 350 170 280 140 220 110 170 90
4 320 160 260 130 200 100 160 80

5 290 140 230 120 180 90 140 70
6 280 140 220 110 170 90 140 70
8 250 120 200 100 150 80 120 60
10 230 120 190 90 150 70 120 60
12 230 110 180 90 140 70 110 60
14 220 ... 180 ... 140 ... 110 ...
16 220 ... 180 ... 140 ... 110 ...
18 220 ... 180 ... 140 ... 110 ...
20 220 ... 170 ... 140 ... 110 ...
24 210 ... 170 ... 130 ... 110 ...
MPa
⁄
18 8.48 4.21 6.76 3.38 5.31 2.62 4.21 2.14
⁄
14 7.79 3.93 6.21 3.10 4.90 2.41 3.93 1.93
⁄
38 6.34 3.17 5.03 2.55 3.93 2.00 3.17 1.59
⁄
12 5.86 2.90 4.69 2.34 3.65 1.79 2.90 1.45
⁄
34 4.76 2.34 3.79 1.93 2.96 1.45 2.34 1.17
1 4.34 2.21 3.45 1.72 2.69 1.38 2.21 1.10

1 1⁄ 4 3.59 1.79 2.90 1.45 2.21 1.10 1.79 0.90
1 1⁄ 2 3.24 1.65 2.62 1.31 2.0 1.03 1.65 0.83
2 2.76 1.38 2.21 1.10 1.72 0.90 1.38 0.69

2 1⁄ 2 2.90 1.45 2.34 1.17 1.79 0.90 1.45 0.76
3 2.55 1.31 2.07 1.03 1.59 0.83 1.31 0.62

3 1⁄ 2 2.41 1.17 1.93 0.97 1.52 0.76 1.17 0.62
4 2.21 1.10 1.79 0.90 1.38 0.69 1.10 0.55

5 2.00 0.97 1.59 0.83 1.24 0.62 0.97 0.48
6 1.93 0.97 1.52 0.76 1.17 0.62 0.97 0.48
8 1.72 0.83 1.38 0.69 1.03 0.55 0.83 0.41
10 1.59 0.83 1.31 0.62 1.03 0.48 0.83 0.41
12 1.59 0.76 1.24 0.62 0.97 0.48 0.76 0.41
14 1.54 ... 1.26 ... 0.98 ... 0.77 ...
16 1.54 ... 1.26 ... 0.98 ... 0.77 ...
18 1.54 ... 1.26 ... 0.98 ... 0.77 ...
20 1.54 ... 1.19 ... 0.98 ... 0.77 ...
24 1.47 ... 1.19 ... 0.91 ... 0.77 ...
17
SD-1785 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Nominal psi
Pipe PVC1120, PVC1220,
PVC2116 PVC2112 PVC2110
Size, PVC2120
in. Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded Unthreaded Threaded
⁄
12 1010 510 810 410 630 320 510 250
3⁄ 4 770 390 620 310 480 240 390 190
1 720 360 570 290 450 220 360 180
1 1 ⁄4 600 300 480 240 370 190 300 150
1 1 ⁄2 540 270 430 210 340 170 270 130
2 470 240 380 190 290 150 240 120
2 1 ⁄2 470 230 370 190 290 150 230 120
3 440 220 360 180 280 140 220 110
3 1 ⁄2 380 190 310 150 240 120 190 100
4 430 220 340 170 270 130 220 110
5 400 200 320 160 250 120 200 100
6 370 190 300 150 230 120 190 90
8 380 180 290 140 230 110 180 90
10 370 180 290 140 230 110 180 90
12 340 170 270 140 210 110 170 80
MPa
⁄
12 6.96 3.52 5.58 2.83 4.34 2.21 3.52 1.72
3⁄ 4 5.31 2.69 4.27 2.14 3.31 1.65 2.69 1.31
1 4.96 2.48 3.93 2.00 3.10 1.52 2.48 1.24
1 1 ⁄4 4.14 2.07 3.31 1.65 2.55 1.31 2.07 1.03
1 1 ⁄2 3.72 1.86 2.96 1.45 2.34 1.17 1.86 0.90
2 3.24 1.65 2.62 1.31 2.00 1.03 1.65 0.83
2 1 ⁄2 3.24 1.59 2.55 1.31 2.00 1.03 1.59 0.83
3 3.03 1.52 2.48 1.24 1.93 0.97 1.52 0.76
3 1 ⁄2 2.62 1.31 2.14 1.03 1.65 0.83 1.31 0.69
4 2.96 1.52 2.34 1.17 1.86 0.90 1.52 0.76
5 2.76 1.38 2.21 1.10 1.72 0.83 1.38 0.69
6 2.55 1.31 2.07 1.03 1.59 0.83 1.31 0.62
8 2.62 1.24 2.00 0.97 1.59 0.76 1.24 0.62
10 2.55 1.24 2.00 0.97 1.59 0.76 1.24 0.62
12 2.34 1.17 1.86 0.97 1.45 0.76 1.17 0.55
18
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2116
SPECIFICATION FOR FEP-FLUOROCARBON MOLDING

AND EXTRUSION MATERIALS
SD-2116
(Identical with ASTM D2116-07(R12) except for revisons in para. 7.1 and section 13, additional requirements in section
14 and Annex A1, and renumbering of section 15.)
19
SD-2116 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
FEP-Fluorocarbon Molding and Extrusion Materials
1. Scope D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

1.1 This specification covers melt processable molding and tics
extrusion materials of FEP-fluorocarbon resin. This specifica- D3295 Specification for PTFE Tubing, Miniature Beading
tion does not cover recycled FEP materials. These FEP resins and Spiral Cut Tubing
are copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene and hexafluoropropylene D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
or modified FEP-fluorocarbon resins containing not more than thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
2 % by weight of other fluoromonomers. Differential Scanning Calorimetry
1.2 The values stated in SI units as detailed in IEEE/ E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
ASTM SI-10 are to be regarded as the standard. The values Determine the Precision of a Test Method
given in parentheses are for information only. IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Use of the International System of Units
NOTE 1—Although this specification and ISO 12086-1 and (SI): The Modern Metric System
ISO 12086-2 differ in approach or detail, data obtained using either are
2.2 ISO Standards:
technically equivalent.
ISO 12086-1 Plastics—Fluoropolymer Dispersions and
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the Moulding and Extrusion Materials—Part 1
test methods portion, Section 11, of this specification. This ISO 12086-2 Plastics—Fluoropolymer Dispersions and
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Moulding and Extrusion Materials—Part 2
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 3. Terminology
tions prior to use. 3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—The definitions given in Terminology D883
2. Referenced Documents are applicable to this specification.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1.2 lot, n—one production run or a uniform blend of two
D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit- or more production runs.
tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
3.2 Abbreviated Terms:
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 3.2.1 General—The abbreviated terms given in Terminol-
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela- ogy D1600 are applicable to this specification.
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics 4. Classification
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics 4.1 This specification covers four types of FEP-
by Extrusion Plastometer fluorocarbon resin supplied in pellet form classified according
to their melt flow rate.
4.2 A one-line system shall be used to specify materials
covered by this specification. The system uses predefined cells
to refer to specific aspects of this specification, illustrated as
follows:
20
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2116
Specification 7. Sampling
Standard Number : Type : Special 7.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy re-
Block : : notes
: : :
quirements of Annex A1.
–––––––––––– ––– ,––––
Example: Specification D2116 – XX, I 8. Test Specimens
8.1 Prepare a molded sheet 1.5 6 0.3 mm (0.060 6 0.010
For this example, the line callout would be Specification
in.) thick. Use a picture-frame-type chase having a suitable
D2116 – XX, I and would specify an FEP-fluorocarbon resin
blanked-out section and thickness to produce the desired sheet.
that has all of the properties listed for that type, grade, and class
Use clean aluminum foil, 0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.005 to 0.007 in.)
in the appropriate specified properties or tables, or both, in the
thick, in contact with the resin. A high-temperature mold
specification identified. A comma is used as the separator
release agent shall be sprayed on the aluminum foil to help
between the standard number and the type. A provision for
prevent the foil from sticking to the sheet. Use steel molding
special notes is included so that other information can be
plates at least 1.0 mm (0.040 in.) thick and of an area adequate
provided when required. When special notes are used, precede
to cover the chase.
them with a comma.
8.2 Lay down and smoothly cover one plate with a sheet of
5. General Requirements aluminum foil. Place the mold chase on top of this assembly.
5.1 The materials shall be of uniform composition and so Place within the mold chase sufficient molding material to
prepared as to conform to the requirements of this specifica- produce the required sheet in such a manner that the polymer
tion. charge is a mound in the middle of the chase. Place a second
sheet of aluminum foil on top of the granules and add the top
5.2 The material described in this specification shall be free mold plate. Place the assembly in a compression molding press
of foreign matter to such a contamination level as is agreed having platens that have been heated to 372 6 5°C (702 6
upon between the purchaser and the seller. 9°F).
8.3 Bring the platens to incipient contact with the mold
TABLE 1 Detail Requirements for Test on Molding Materials assembly. Hold for 2 to 4 min without pressure. Apply
Type Type Type Type
approximately 1 MPa (145 psi) and hold for 1 to 1.5 min. Then
I II III IV apply 2 to 4 MPa (290 to 580 psi) and hold for 1 to 1.5 min.
Melt flow rate, g/10 min: Maintain the press at 372 6 5°C (702 6 9°F) during these
Load, 5000 g: steps. Remove the assembly from the press and place between
Min 4.0 >12.0 0.8 2.0
Max 12.0 ... 2.0 3.9
two 20 6 7-mm (0.75 6 0.25-in.) steel plates whose tempera-
ture is less than 40°C (104°F).
8.4 When the sheet is cool enough to touch (about 50 to
60°C (122 to 140°F)), remove aluminum foil from the sheet. (If
6. Detail Requirements the sheet is allowed to cool to room temperature, the aluminum
6.1 The average test result of the lot shall conform to the foil cannot be pulled free.)
requirements prescribed in Table 1 and Table 2 when tested by
9. Conditioning
the procedures specified herein. Table 2 lists those tests
requiring a specimen molded as described in Section 8. 9.1 For tests of specific gravity and tensile properties,
condition the molded test specimens in accordance with
Procedure A of Practice D618 for a period of at least 4 h prior
to test. The other tests require no conditioning.
TABLE 2 Detail Requirements for Molded Test Specimens

Type I Type II Type III Type IV
Specific gravity 23/23°C (73/73°F)
Min 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12
Max 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17
Melting point, °C 260 ± 20 260 ± 20 260 ± 20 260 ± 20
Tensile strength, 23°C (73°F), min:
MPa 17.3 14.5 20.7 18.7
psi 2500 2100 3000 2700
Elongation, 23°C (73°F), min, % 275 240 275 275
Dielectric constant, max:
At 103 Hz 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15
At 106 Hz 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15
Dissipation factor, max:
At 103 Hz 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003
At 106 Hz 0.0007
0.0007 0.0009 0.0007
21
SD-2116 ASME NM.3.1-2018
9.2 Conduct tests at the Standard Laboratory Temperature of 11.4 Tensile Properties—Cut five bars with the microtensile
23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) for determination of specific gravity die shown in Fig. 1. The die shall be of the steel rule or solid
and tensile properties only. Since this resin does not absorb metal type of curvature of 5 6 0.5 mm (0.2 6 0.02 in.).
water, the maintenance of constant humidity during testing is Average the test results. Determine the tensile properties in
not necessary. Conduct tests for melt flow rate and melting accordance with the procedures described in Test Method
point under ordinary laboratory conditions. D638, except that the specimens used shall be as detailed in
Section 8, the initial jaw separation shall be 22.2 6 0.13 mm
10. Packaging and Marking (0.875 6 0.005 in.), and the speed of testing shall be 50 6 5
mm/min (2 6 0.2 in./min). Clamp the specimen with essen-
10.1 Packaging—The resin pellets shall be packaged in
tially equal lengths in each jaw. Determine the elongation from
standard commercial containers so constructed as to ensure
the chart, expressing it as a percentage of the initial jaw
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
separation.
to the point of delivery, unless otherwise specified in the
contract or order. NOTE 2—In determining elongation from the chart, drop a perpendicu-
lar from the break point to the time axis. Measure the distance along the
10.2 Marking—Shipping containers shall be marked with time axis from the foot of this perpendicular to the beginning of the
the name of the material, type, and quantity contained therein. load-time curve. Then,
10.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of Elongation, % 5 100d/ ~ 22.2 or 0.875! m (1)
where:
11. Test Methods d = distance on chart, mm (in.),
m = chart speed magnification,
11.1 Melt Flow Rate: = chart speed/crosshead speed (both in same units),
11.1.1 Principle of Test Method—The melt flow rate is and
determined at 372 6 1°C using Procedure A or B described in 22.2 = factor when d is in millimetres, or
Test Method D1238. The extrusion plastometer to be used is 0.875 = factor when d is in inches.
described in Test Method D1238 modified by use of corrosion
In making the test for tensile properties a full-scale load of 22.5 kg (50
resistant alloy for the barrel lining, orifice, piston tip, and orfice lb) has been found suitable. If specimens break quickly, increase the chart
securing device. Use pellets or pieces of approximately the speed so that each curve covers at least 51 mm (2 in.) on the time axis of
same size cut from molded or extruded forms. Strips about 6 the chart.
mm (1⁄4 in.) by 76 mm (3 in.) long also load readily into the 11.5 Precision and Bias:
barrel. Refer to Table 2 or Table 3 of Test Method D1238 for 11.5.1 Precision—Table 3 is based on a round robin con-
the amount of charge which shall be adjusted accordingly with ducted in 1985–1986 in accordance with Practice E691,
melt density of FEP being used. Usually the charge amount is involving seven materials tested by six laboratories. For each
5 to 15 g. Flow rate is measured using a load of 5000 g. Collect material, the sheeting from which the test specimens were to be
five successive cuts for the manual method. cut was obtained from one source. Using a steel rule die, one
11.2 Specific Gravity—Determine the specific gravity on a set of test specimens for each laboratory was cut by one of the
specimen approximately 25.4 by 38 mm (1 by 1.5 in.) blanked laboratories. Sheeting and a duplicate die were furnished each
or cut from the molded plaque (Section 8) in accordance with participating laboratory and used to cut a second set of test
the procedures described in Test Methods D792. Add 2 drops specimens. Each test result was the average of five individual
of a wetting agent to the water in order to reduce the surface determinations. Each laboratory obtained four test results on
tension and ensure complete wetting of the specimen. each material, two test results each on the specimens furnished
and two on the specimens cut by the laboratory doing the
11.3 Melting Point:
testing.
11.3.1 Melting Characteristics by Thermal Analysis—Use 11.5.1.1 The properties used in the analysis are tensile
differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) as described in Test strength and elongation at break. (Warning—The following
Method D3418 for this determination. For specification explanations of Ir and IR (11.5.1.4-11.5.1.6) are intended only
purposes, the test shall be run on a 10 6 2-mg specimen cut to present a meaningful way of considering the approximate
from a pellet of the resin as sold or received. The heating rate precision of this test method. Do not apply rigorously the data
shall be 10 6 1°C (18 6 1.8°F)/min. Two peaks during the in Table 3 to the acceptance or rejection of material as those
initial melting test are observed occasionally. In this case, the data are specific to the round robin and may not be represen-
peak temperatures shall be reported as Tl for the lower tative of other lots, conditions, materials, or laboratories.)
temperature and Tu for the upper temperature. The peak 11.5.1.2 Users of this test method shall apply the principles
temperature of the peak largest in height shall be reported as outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
the melting point if a single value is required. If a peak laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories. The
temperature is difficult to discern from the curves, that is, if the principles of 11.5.1.4-11.5.1.6 would then be valid for such
peak is rounded rather than pointed, straight lines shall be data.
drawn tangent to the sides of the peak. The temperature
corresponding to the point where these lines intersect beyond
the peak shall be taken as the peak temperature.
22
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2116
NOTE 1—All Dimensions are in millimetres.

FIG. 1 Microtensile Die
11.5.1.3 Concept of Ir and IR—If CVr and CVR have been same equipment on the same day, the two test results shall be
calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test judged not equivalent if they differ by more than the Ir value for
results: that material.
11.5.1.4 Ir: Repeatability—In comparing two test results for 11.5.1.5 IR: Reproducibility—In comparing two test results
the same material, obtained by the same operator using the for the same material, obtained by different operators using
23
SD-2116 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Precision Summary, Tensile Strength and Elongation at average result of the samples tested shall conform to the
Break requirements of this specification.
NOTE 1—Ir = 2.8 × CVr ; IR = 2.8 CRR.
Tensile Strength 13. Inspection
Material Mean, CVr, CVR, Ir , IR,
psi % % % %
13.1 Inspection of the material supplied under this spec-
FEP 4144 2.98 7.98 8.34 22.34 ification shall be for conformance to the requirements
Percentage Elongation at Break specified herein.
Material Mean, CVr, CVR, Ir , IR,
%E % % % %
13.1.1 Lot-Acceptance Inspection—Lot-acceptance inspec-
FEP 319 2.21 7.60 6.19 21.28 tion shall be the basis on which acceptance or rejection of the
lot is made. The lot-acceptance inspection shall consist of the
melt flow rate test.
different equipment on different days, the two test results shall 13.1.2 Periodic-Check Inspection—The periodic-check in-
be judged not equivalent if they differ by more than the IR value spection shall consist of the tests specified for all requirements
for that material. of the material under this specification.
11.5.1.6 Any judgment in accordance with 11.5.1.4 and 13.1.3 Reports—A report of the test results shall be
11.5.1.5 would have an approximate 95 % (0.95) probability of furnished. The report shall consist of results of the lot-
being correct. acceptance inspection for the shipment.
11.5.2 Bias—Bias is systematic error that contributes to the
difference between a test result and a true (or reference) value. 14. Certification
There are no recognized standards on which to base an estimate
14.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
of bias for this test procedure.
11.6 Dielectric Constant—Determine dielectric constant 15. Keywords
and dissipation factor in accordance with Test Methods D150. 15.1 extrusion material; FEP fluorocarbon polymer; fluoro-
12. Number of Tests carbon polymer; fluoropolymers; melt-processible fluorocar-
bon polymer; recycled; tetrafluoroethylene copolymers
12.1 One set of test specimens as prescribed in Section 8
shall be considered sufficient for testing each sample. The
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
24
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2239
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC

PIPE (SIDR-PR) BASED ON CONTROLLED INSIDE
DIAMETER
SD-2239
(Identical with ASTM D2239-12a except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised requirements
in para. 9.1.5, renumbering of section 12, and quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.)
25
SD-2239 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers polyethylene (PE) pipe made 2.1 ASTM Standards:
in standard inside dimension ratios (SIDR) and pressure rated D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
for water (see appendix). Included are requirements for PE D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
compounds and requirements and test methods for D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
workmanship, dimensions, elevated temperature sustained by Extrusion Plastometer
pressure, burst pressure, and marking. D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Under Constant Internal Pressure
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
and are not considered standard.
tics
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, D1603 Test Method for Carbon Black Content in Olefin
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These Plastics
notes and footnotes shall not be considered as requirements of D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
the specification. Notes and footnotes in tables and figures, and moplastic Pipe and Fittings
Supplementary Requirements are requirements of the specifi- D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In-
cation. tended for Outdoor Applications
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
test methods portion, Section 7, of this specification: This for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health tings Materials
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- D4218 Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black
tions prior to use. Content in Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-
Furnace Technique
NOTE 1—References and PE compound descriptions for PE2305, F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
PE2406, PE3306, PE3406, and PE3408 have been removed due to G154 Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for
changes in Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3. For removed designations,
refer to previous editions of Specification D2239, Specification D3350, UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
PPI TR-3 and PPI TR-4. The removal of these PE compounds does not G155 Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for
affect pipelines that are in service. PE compounds and material designa- Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials
tions resulting from changes in Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3 are
addressed in Section 5. 2.2 APWA Standard:
APWA Uniform Color Code
26
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2239
2.3 NSF Standards: dimension ratios and pressure rated for water. Pressure ratings
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components for water are dependent on the PE compound in accordance
and Related Materials with the following relationship:
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems 2 3 HDS
Components—Health Effects PR 5 (1)
~ SIDR11 !
2.4 PPI Standards:
PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro- Where:
static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), PR = pressure rating for water, psi (kPa)
Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required HDS = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73°F (23°C),
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate- psi (kPa)
rials or Pipe SIDR = standard inside dimension ratio
PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List- NOTE 2—PR and HDS must have the same units. See Appendix X1 for
ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design maximum pressure ratings for water.
Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum
Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Pip- 5. Materials
ing Materials or Pipe 5.1 Polyethylene Compound—Polyethylene compounds
suitable for use in the manufacture of pipe under this specifi-
3. Terminology cation shall meet thermoplastic materials designation codes
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- PE1404 or PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall
nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi- meet Table 1 requirements for PE1404 or PE2708 or PE3608
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall meet thermal stability,
polyethylene plastic is PE. brittleness temperature and elongation at break requirements in
accordance with Specification D3350.
4. Pipe Classification 5.1.1 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—Per Table
4.1 General—This specification covers inside diameter con- 1, polyethylene compounds shall meet Specification D3350
trolled PE pipe made from PE compounds in standard inside code C, D or E. In addition, Code C polyethylene compounds
shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon black, and Code D or E
polyethylene compounds shall have sufficient UV stabilizer to
protect pipe from deleterious UV exposure effects during
unprotected outdoor shipping and storage for at least eighteen
(18) months.
TABLE 1 Polyethylene Compound Requirements

Material Designation
Requirement PE1404 PE2708 PE3608 PE4608 PE4710
Required Value
Minimum HDB at 140°F (60°C),
psi (MPa), A
800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B
per Test Method D2837
and PPI TR-3
HDS for water at

73°F (23°C)
psi (MPa), per 400 (2.76) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
Test Method D2837
and PPI TR-3
Melt flow rate per 1.0 to 0.4 g/10 #0.40 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min
Test Method D1238 min Cond. 190/2.16 or Cond. 190/2.16 or Cond. 190/2.16 or Cond. 190/2.16 or
Cond. 190/2.16 #20 g/10 min #20 g/10 min #20 g/10 min #20 g/10 min
Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6
Specification D3350
Cell Classification Required Value
Property Requirement
Density 1 2 3 4 4
(natural base resin)
SCG Resistance 4 7 6 6 7
Color and C C, D or E C, D or E C, D or E C, D or E
UV Stabilizer CodeC
A
HDB at 140°F (60°C) not required. Contact manufacturer about pipe use at temperatures other than 73°F (23°C).
B
Contact manufacturer or see PPI TR-4 for listed value.
C
See 5.1.1.
27
SD-2239 ASME NM.3.1-2018
NOTE 3—Pipe users should consult with the pipe manufacturer about 6.3 Bond—For pipe produced by simultaneous multiple
the outdoor exposure life of the product under consideration. Evaluation extrusion, the bond between the layers shall be strong and
of UV stabilizer in Code E color PE compound using Practice D2565 or
Practice G154 or Practice G155 may be useful for this purpose.
uniform. It shall not be possible to cleanly separate any two
layers with a probe or point of a knife blade at any point.
5.1.2 Colors for solid color, an external color layer or color
stripes—In accordance with the APWA Uniform Color Code, 6.4 Carbon Black—Polyethylene pipe produced using Code
blue shall identify potable water service; green shall identify C polyethylene compound per 5.1.1 shall contain 2 to 3 %
sewer service; and purple (lavender) shall identify reclaimed carbon black when tested in accordance with 7.5.
water service. Yellow identifies gas service and shall not be 6.5 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressure for pipe
used. shall be in accordance with Table 4, when determined in
5.2 Potable Water Requirement—PE compound intended accordance with 7.7. In addition, the failure shall be ductile.
for contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and 6.6 Sustained Pressure—Pipe made from PE1404 com-
certified for conformance with NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 or pound shall be tested twice annually in accordance with 7.6.
the health effects portion of NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 by a The average failure time shall be ≥80 hours at 580 psi (4.00
certifying organization acceptable to the regulatory authority MPa) test pressure hoop stress, or ≥150 hours at 435 psi (3.00
having jurisdiction. MPa) test pressure hoop stress.
5.3 Rework Material—Clean polyethylene compound from 6.7 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure—Except as
the manufacturer’s own pipe production that met 5.1 through provided in 6.6, elevated temperature sustained pressure tests
5.2 as new PE compound is suitable for re-extrusion into pipe for each polyethylene compound designation per Table 1 used
when blended with new PE compound having the same in production at the facility shall be conducted twice annually
material designation. Pipe containing rework material shall per 7.8.
meet all the requirements of this specification. 6.8 Inside Surface Ductility for Pipe—Pipe shall be tested
6. Requirements for inside surface ductility in accordance with 7.9 or 7.10.
6.1 Workmanship—The pipe shall be homogeneous NOTE 4—Tensile elongation testing per 7.10 provides a quantifiable
result and is used for referee testing and in cases of disagreement.
throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions,
or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially 7. Test Methods
practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physical prop-
erties. See 5.1.2. 7.1 Conditioning—Condition as specified in the test
method. Where conditioning is not specified in the test method,
6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C)
6.2.1 Inside Diameters—The inside diameters and toler- without regard to humidity for not less than 4 h in accordance
ances shall be as shown in Table 2 when measured in with Procedure A of Practice D618, or at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6
accordance with Test Method D2122. 2°C) for not less than 1 h in accordance with Procedure D of
6.2.2 Wall Thicknesses—Subject to 6.2.3, wall thickness and Practice D618.
tolerance shall be as shown in Table 3 when measured in
accordance with 7.4. Wall thickness shall be inclusive of all 7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in accordance with the
extruded concentric layers. conditions specified in the test method, or if not specified in the
6.2.3 Wall Thickness Range—The wall thickness variation test method, at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) without regard to
shall not exceed 12 % when measured in accordance with 7.4. relative humidity.
6.2.4 Thickness of Outer Layer—For pipe produced by 7.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of
simultaneous multiple extrusion, that is, pipe containing two or pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller. In
more concentric layers, the outer layer shall be at least case of no prior agreement, any sample selected by the testing
0.020-in. (0.5 mm) thick. laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
TABLE 2 Inside Diameters and Tolerances for SIDR-PR PE Plastic Pipe, in.
Pipe Inside Tolerance
Size Diameter
1⁄2 0.622 +0.010
–0.010
⁄
34 0.824 +0.010
–0.015
1 1.049 +0.010
–0.020
1⁄
14 1.380 +0.010
–0.020
1⁄
12 1.610 +0.015
–0.020
2 2.067 +0.015
–0.020
3 3.068 +0.015
–0.030
28
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2239
TABLE 3 Wall Thickness and Tolerance for SIDR-PR PE Plastic Pipe, in.
Wall ThicknessA
Pipe
SIDR 19 SIDR 15 SIDR 11.5 SIDR 9 SIDR 7 SIDR 5.3
Size
Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
⁄
12 0.060 +0.020 0.060 +0.020 0.060 +0.020 0.069 +0.020 0.089 +0.020 0.117 +0.020
3⁄4 0.060 +0.020 0.060 +0.020 0.072 +0.020 0.092 +0.020 0.118 +0.020 0.155 +0.020
1 0.060 +0.020 0.070 +0.020 0.091 +0.020 0.117 +0.020 0.150 +0.020 0.198 +0.024
1 1⁄ 4 0.073 +0.020 0.092 +0.020 0.120 +0.020 0.153 +0.020 0.197 +0.024 0.260 +0.031
1 1⁄ 2 0.085 +0.020 0.107 +0.020 0.140 +0.020 0.179 +0.020 0.230 +0.028 0.304 +0.036
2 0.109 +0.020 0.138 +0.020 0.180 +0.022 0.230 +0.028 0.295 +0.035 0.390 +0.047
3 ... ... 0.205 +0.020 0.267 +0.032 ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
plus the stated tolerance. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement. Wall thickness variation shall be in accordance with 6.2.3.
B
The 21⁄2 to 6-in. pipe with a pressure rating of 0.70 MPa (100 psi) is not included.
TABLE 4 Minimum Burst Pressure for SIDR Pipe

Minimum Burst PressureA
SIDR PE1404 PE2708 PE3608, PE4608, PE4710
psi (kPa) psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
5.3 400 (2759) 800 (5517) 921 (6352)
7 320 (2207) 630 (4345) 725 (5000)
9 250 (1724) 504 (3476) 580 (4000)
11.5 ... ... 403 (2779) 464 (3200)
15 ... ... 315 (2174) 363 (2503)
19 ... ... 252 (1738) 290 (2000)
A
Minimum burst pressure calculated in accordance with
2S
PB 5 11
Di
t
Where:
PB = burst test pressure, psi (kPa)
S = minimum hoop fiber stress, psi. (kPa)
S = 1260 psi (8690 kPa) for PE1404 compound
S = 2520 psi (17,370 kPa) for PE2708 compound
S = 2900 psi (20,000 kPa) for PE3608, PE4608 and PE4710 compound
Di = measured average inside diameter, in. (mm)
t = measured minimum wall thickness, in (mm).
Test temperature tolerance ±3.6ºF (± 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa)
7.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test specimens tested in retest constitutes failure in the test. Failure
specimens required for any pressure test shall have at least a of the pipe shall be as defined in Test Method D1598.
part of the marking in their central sections. The central section
is that portion of the pipe sample that is at least one pipe 7.7 Burst Pressure—The test equipment, procedures and
diameter away from an end closure. The entire marking shall failure definitions shall be as specified in Test Method D1599.
be documented in testing records. 7.8 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—
7.4 Dimensions and Tolerances—Use any length of pipe to Elevated temperature sustained pressure tests for each Table 1
determine the dimensions. Inside diameter, wall thickness and material designation used in production of pipe in accordance
wall thickness range shall be measured in accordance with Test with this specification at the facility shall be conducted per Test
Method D2122. Method D1598, and Table 5 using water as the pressurizing
7.5 Carbon Black—For all pipe manufactured with Code C medium. The “test sample” shall be three specimens of any
polyethylene compound, determine in duplicate the carbon pipe size or SIDR. One Table 5 Condition for the applicable
black content in accordance with Test Method D1603 or Test material designation shall be selected for the test.
Method D4218. 7.8.1 For the selected Table 5 Condition, passing results are
7.6 Sustained Pressure Test—Select six PE1404 pipe test (a) non-failure for all three specimens at a time equal to or
specimens. Test in accordance with Test Method D1598 with greater than the Table 5 minimum average time before failure,
water at 176°F (80°C). Internal test pressure shall be deter- or (b) not more than one ductile specimen failure and the
mined in accordance with the equation in Table 5, footnote A. average time before failure for all three specimens shall be
Failure of two of the six specimens tested constitutes failure in greater than the specified Table 5 minimum average time
the test. Failure of one of six specimens tested is cause for before failure for the selected Table 5 Condition, or (c)
retest of six additional specimens. Failure of one of six successful retest per 7.8.3.
29
SD-2239 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure TestA Requirements

PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
Test
Test Pressure Minimum Average Time Test Pressure Minimum Average Time
Condition Temperature,
Hoop Before Failure, hours Hoop Before Failure, hours
°F (°C)
Stress, psi (kPa) Stress, psi (kPa)
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
A Calculate internal test pressure in accordance with
2S
P5 11
Di
t
Where:
P = test pressure, psi (kPa)
S = test pressure hoop stress, psi. (kPa)
Di = measured average inside diameter, in. (mm)
t = measured minimum wall thickness, in (mm)
Test temperature tolerance ± 3.6ºF (± 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
NOTE-Table 5 conditions are based on PE validation requirements per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 test pressure hoop stress and six times
greater minimum average time before failure. Conditions 2 through 5 are linear stress and time interpolations between Conditions 1 and 6. The intent of multiple conditions
is to maintain equivalent performance criteria, but provide for retest in the event of ductile failure. The test pressure hoop stress levels for Conditions 2-5 are linear
interpolations for arbitrarily chosen time increments. An equivalent performance requirement, however, may be determined by arbitrarily choosing a test pressure hoop
stress between Conditions 1 and 6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For example for PE3710 and PE4710 compound designations, at
670 psi test pressure hoop stress, the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours:
S
927 5 2001 s 750 2 670d 3
s 1200 2 200d
s 750 2 640d D
7.8.2 For the selected Table 5 Condition, failure to meet this 7.10 Elongation-at-Break Test Method:
requirement is (a) brittle failure of any specimen when tested 7.10.1 Five Test Method D638 Type III or Type IV speci-
at Table 5 Condition 1 through 6, or (b) ductile failure of all mens cut in the longitudinal direction from locations equally
three specimens, or (c) unsuccessful retest per 7.8.3. spaced around the circumference of the pipe shall be condi-
7.8.3 Provision for Retest for Table 5 Conditions 1 through tioned per 7.1 and tested in accordance with Test Method
5—If a second ductile failure occurs before the Table 5 D2565 at a cross-head separation speed of 2 in. (50.8 mm) per
minimum average time before failure, it is permissible to min. If the specimen thickness must be reduced by machining,
conduct one retest at a Table 5 Condition of lower stress and the pipe ID surface shall be left unaltered.
longer minimum average time before failure for the material 7.10.2 The percent elongation at break for each test speci-
designation. The retest sample shall be three additional specimen shall exceed 400 %.
mens of the same pipe size and material designation from the
same time frame as the test sample per 7.8. For the retest, any NOTE 5—Specimen machining that produces smooth surfaces and
uniform thickness is necessary. Surface cuts or scratches and non-uniform
specimen failure before the Table 5 minimum average time thickness in the specimen gage length can detrimentally affect test results.
before failure at the retest condition constitutes failure to meet
this requirement. For Table 5 Condition 6 no retest is permis- 8. Retest and Rejection
sible
8.1 Except as provided in 7.8.3, if the results of any test(s)
7.9 Bend-back Test Method: do not meet the requirements of this specification, the test(s)
7.9.1 Squarely cut four 1 1⁄8 to 1 3⁄8 in. (29 to 35 mm) wide shall be conducted again only by agreement between the
rings from pipe. Condition the rings per 7.1. purchaser and the seller. Under such agreement, minimum
7.9.2 Split each ring longitudinally so that when reverse requirements shall not be lowered, changed, or modified, nor
bent per 7.9.3, the pipe ID for each quadrant around the pipe shall specification limits be changed. If upon retest, failure
will be tested. occurs, the quantity of product represented by the test(s) does
7.9.3 In a well-lit area, perform the following procedure not meet the requirements of this specification.
within 5 min: (a) Bend each split ring specimen so that the pipe
inside surface is on the outside surface of the bend. (b) Using 9. Marking
an apparatus such as a bench vise or other suitable equipment,
close the legs of the specimen together. When the specimen 9.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following infor-
legs are closed together, the top of the bend-back specimen mation. Marking shall be spaced at intervals of not more than
shall extend above the point of closure by 3 6 1⁄2 times the 5 ft (1.5 m). Marking shall be applied such that legibility is
minimum wall thickness per Table 3. (c) With the unaided maintained after normal handling and installation.
(naked) eye, visually examine the reverse-bent pipe ID surface. 9.1.1 Pipe size (for example, 2).
7.9.4 Visible brittle cracking or crazing indicates failure. 9.1.2 Pipe SIDR (for example SIDR 7).
30
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2239
9.1.3 The material designation code per Table 1 (for NOTE 6—Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must
example, PE3608). obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
9.1.4 In accordance with 4.1, the pressure rating for water
10. Quality Assurance
in psi or kPa (for example, 100 psi or 690 kPa).
9.1.5 ASME SD-2239 or both ASME SD-2239 and ASTM 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
D2239. manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
9.1.6 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and a code that with this specification and has been found to meet all require-
identifies manufacturing location, PE compound source, manu- ments of this specification.
facturing date and relevant production information such as
extrusion line and shift. Upon request the manufacturer shall 11. Certification
provide an explanation of the code. 11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
9.1.7 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water shall
also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the 12. Keywords
evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the 12.1 ID controlled pipe; IDR; inside diameter controlled
laboratory. pipe; PE pipe; plastic pipe; polyethylene pipe; potable water
pipe; service pipe; SIDR; water pipe; water service pipe
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
APPENDIX
X1.1 Maximum pipe pressure ratings for use with water or for variations of internal or external conditions or for other
may be determined using PPI recommended hydrostatic design temperatures.
stress (HDS) ratings for the PE compound per Table 1.
Maximum internal pressure ratings for water are shown in X1.2 Information on HDS is available in Table 3, Test
Table X1.1. At the option of the pipe manufacturer, other Method D2837, PPI TR-3 and PPI TR-4.
pressure ratings may be recommended for water or other media
31
SD-2239 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE X1.1 Maximum Pressure Rating, PR, for SIDR-PR PE Pipe for Use With Water
Minimum Burst PressureA,B psi (kPa)
PE1404 PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
SIDR
psi (kPa) psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
5.3 125 (860) 250 (1725) 315 (2170)
7 100 (690) 200 (1380) 250 (1725)
9 80 (550) 160 (1100) 200 (1380)
11.5 ... ... 130 (895) 160 (1100)
15 ... ... 100 (690) 125 (860)
19 ... ... 80 (550) 100 (690)
A
2HDS
PR 5
s SDIR11 d
Where:
PR = burst test pressure, psi (kPa)
HDS = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73°F (23°C), psi. (kPa) (Table 1)
SIDR = standard inside dimension ratio
B
Table values rounded to nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
32
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2241

PRESSURE-RATED PIPE (SDR SERIES)
SD-2241
quirements in para. 10.1.5, renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made
mandatory.)
33
SD-2241 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR
Series)
1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
pipe made in standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratios and practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
pressure rated for water (see appendix). Included are criteria tions prior to use. A specific precautionary statement is given
for classifying PVC plastic pipe materials and PVC plastic in Note 7.
pipe, a system of nomenclature for PVC plastic pipe, and NOTE 3—CPVC plastic pipe (SDR-PR), which was formerly included
requirements and test methods for materials, workmanship, in this specification, is now covered by Specification F442/F442M.
dimensions, sustained pressure, burst pressure, flattening, and
extrusion quality. Methods of marking are also given. pressure ratings in the appendix, are calculated from stress values obtained
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended from tests made on pipe 4 in. (100 mm) and smaller. However, tests
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which conducted on pipe as large as 24 in. (600 mm) in diameter have shown
these stress values to be valid for larger diameter PVC pipe.
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- NOTE 5—PVC pipe made to this specification is often belled for use as
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases, some line pipe. For details of the solvent cement bell, see Specification D2672
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. and for details of belled elastomeric joints, see Specifications D3139 and
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D3212.
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. 2. Referenced Documents
NOTE 1—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious safety 2.1 ASTM Standards:
hazards should a system fail for any reason. D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
NOTE 2—This standard specifies dimensional, performance and test D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
requirements for plumbing and fluid handling applications, but does not
address venting of combustion gases. Under Constant Internal Pressure
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes,
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall
tics
not be considered as requirements of the specification.
D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical (CPVC) Compounds
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
and are not considered standard. moplastic Pipe and Fittings
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the D2152 Test Method for Adequacy of Fusion of Extruded
test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Molded Fittings by
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Acetone Immersion
D2444 Test Method for Determination of the Impact Resis-
tance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a
34
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2241
Tup (Falling Weight) increased to 0.060in. (1.52 mm). The SDR values shall be
D2672 Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using rounded to the nearest 0.5.
Solvent Cement 3.2.5 standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation
D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis code—The pipe materials designation code shall consist of the
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis abbreviation PVC for the type of plastic, followed by the
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products ASTM type and grade in Arabic numerals and the design stress
D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes in units of 100 psi (0.7 MPa) with any decimal figures dropped.
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals When the design stress code contains less than two figures, a
D3212 Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic cipher shall be used before the number, thus a complete
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals material code shall consist of three letters and four figures for
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems PVC plastic pipe materials.
F442/F442M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chlo-
ride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR–PR) 4. Classification
2.2 NSF Standards: 4.1 General—This specification covers PVC pipe made and
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related marked with one of six Type/Grade/Design Stress designations
Materials (see X1.2) in eleven standard dimension ratios.
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components—
Health Effects 4.2 Standard Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratios
(SDR)—This specification covers PVC pipe in eleven standard
3. Terminology dimension ratios, namely, 13.5, 17, 21, 26, 32.5, 41, and 64 (in
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- the body of the document) and 11, 35, 51 and 81 (in Annex
nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi- A1.) Standard dimension ratios are uniform for all nominal
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for pipe sizes for each material and pressure rating. These are
poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is PVC. referred to as SDR 11, SDR13.5, SDR17, SDR21, SDR26,
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: SDR32.5, SDR35, SDR41, SDR51, SDR64, and SDR81,
3.2.1 hydrostatic design stress—the estimated maximum respectively. The pressure rating is uniform for all nominal
tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding continu- pipe sizes for a given PVC pipe material and SDR (see Table
ously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe X1.1).
will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal 4.3 Hydrostatic Design Stresses—This specification covers
hydrostatic water pressure is applied. pipe made from PVC plastics defined by four hydrostatic
3.2.2 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum water design stresses developed on the basis of long-term tests
pressure the pipe is capable of withstanding continuously with (appendix).
a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur.
5. Materials
3.2.3 relation between standard dimension ratio, hydro-
static design stress, and pressure rating—The following ex- 5.1 General—Poly(vinyl chloride) plastics used to make
pression, commonly known as the ISO equation, is used in pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are catego-
this specification to relate standard dimension ratio, hydrostatic rized by means of two criteria, namely, (1) short-term strength
design stress, and pressure rating: tests, and (2) long-term strength tests.
2S/P5R21 or 2 S/P5 ~ D 0 /t ! 21 (1) NOTE 6—The PVC pipe intended for use in the transport of potable
water should be evaluated and certified as safe for this purpose by a testing
where: agency acceptable to the local health authority. The evaluation should be
in accordance with requirements for chemical extraction, taste, and odor
S = hydrostatic design stress, psi (or MPa), that are no less restrictive than those included in NSF Standard No. 14.
P = pressure rating, psi (or MPa), The seal or mark of the laboratory making the evaluation should be
D0 = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), included on the pipe. See pipe marking requirement for reclaimed water
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm), and systems.
R = standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (D0/t for 5.2 Basic Materials—This specification covers pipe made
PVC pipe), also known as SDR. from PVC plastics having certain physical and chemical
3.2.4 standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (SDR)— properties as described in Specification D1784.
the ratio of pipe diameter to wall thickness. For PVC pipe it is
5.3 Compound—The PVC compounds used for this pipe
calculated by dividing the average outside diameter of the pipe
shall equal or exceed one of the following classes described in
in inches or millimetres by the minimum wall thickness in
Specification D1784: PVC 12454 or 14333.
inches or millimetres. If the wall thickness calculated by this
formula is less than 0.060 in. (1.52 mm), it shall be arbitrarily 5.4 Rework Material—The manufacturer shall use only his
own clean rework pipe material and the pipe produced shall
meet all the requirements of this specification.
6. Requirements
6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
35
SD-2241 ASME NM.3.1-2018
6.1.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler- 6.4 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting,
ances shall be as shown in Table 1 when measured in cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
accordance with Test Method D2122. The tolerances for with 8.6.
out-of-roundness shall apply only on pipe prior to shipment. 6.5 Extrusion Quality—The pipe shall not flake or disinte-
6.1.2 Wall Thickness—The wall thicknesses and tolerances grate when tested in accordance with Test Method D2152.
shall be as shown in Table 2 when measured in accordance
with Test Method D2122. 6.6 Impact Resistance—The minimum impact resistance for
PVC plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 5, when determined
6.2 Sustained Pressure—The pipe shall not fail, balloon, in accordance with 8.7.
burst, or weep as defined in Test Method D1598 at the test
pressures given in Table 3 when tested in accordance with 8.4. NOTE 7—The impact resistance test is intended for use only as a quality
control test, not as a simulated service test. This test has been found to
6.2.1 Accelerated Regression Test—The accelerated regres- have no quality control significance in sizes over 12 in. (305 mm).
sion test shall be used in place of both the sustained and burst
pressure tests, at the option of the manufacturer. The test shall 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
be conducted in accordance with 8.4.1. The pipe shall demon- 7.1 The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free
strate a hydrostatic design basis projection at the 100 000-h from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects.
intercept that meets the hydrostatic design basis category The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
requirement (see the table for “Hydrostatic Design Basis color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
Categories” of Test Method D2837) for the PVC material used
in its manufacture. (Example: PVC 1120 pipe must have a NOTE 8—Color and transparency or opacity should be specified in the
contract or purchase order.
minimum 100 000-h projection of 3830 psi and 85 % lower
confidence limit (LCL).) 8. Test Methods
6.3 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressures for PVC 8.1 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified in the appli-
plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 4, when determined in cable test method, condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F
accordance with 8.5. (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less than 40
TABLE 1 IPS PVC Pipe—Outside Diameters and Tolerances

Tolerances, in. (mm)
Maximum Out-of-Roundness
(Maximum – Minimum Diameter)
Nominal Pipe Average Outside Diameter, SDR64,
Size, in. in. (mm) For Average SDR41,
SDR17,
SDR32.5,
SDR13.5
SDR26,
SDR21
⁄
18 0.405 (10.29) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
⁄
14 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
⁄
38 0.675 (17.14) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄ 2 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄ 4 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.020 (0.51)

1 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.030 (0.76) 0.020 (0.51)
1 1⁄ 4 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.030 (0.76) 0.024 (0.61)
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.060 (1.52) 0.024 (0.61)
2 2.375 (60.32) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.060 (1.52) 0.024 (0.61)

2 1⁄ 2 2.875 (73.02) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.060 (1.52) 0.030 (0.76)
3 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.060 (1.52) 0.030 (0.76)
3 1⁄ 2 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)
4 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)

5 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.100 (2.54) 0.060 (1.52)
6 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.100 (2.54) 0.070 (1.78)
8 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.090 (2.29)
10 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.100 (2.54)

12 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.120 (3.05)
14 14.000 (355.60) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.200 (5.08) 0.150 (3.81)
16 16.000 (406.40) ±0.019 (0.48) 0.320 (8.13) 0.160 (4.06)
18 18.000 (457.20) ±0.019 (0.48) 0.360 (9.14) 0.180 (4.57)

20 20.000 (508.00) ±0.023 (0.58) 0.400 (10.2) 0.200 (5.08)
24 24.000 (609.60) ±0.031 (0.79) 0.480 (12.2) 0.240 (6.10)
30 30.000 (762.00) ±0.041 (1.04) 0.600 (15.2) 0.300 (7.62)
36 36.000 (914.40) ±0.050 (1.27) 0.720 (18.3) 0.360 (9.14)
36
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2241
TABLE 2 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for PVC Plastic Pipe with IPS Outside Diameters
Wall Thickness,A in.B
Nominal
SDR64 SDR41 SDR32.5 SDR26 SDR21 SDR17 SDR13.5
Pipe
Size, in. Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler-
mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance
⁄
18 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020
⁄
14 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020
3⁄ 8 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020
1⁄ 2 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.062 +0.020
3⁄ 4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.062 +0.020 0.078 +0.020
1 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.063 +0.020 0.077 +0.020 0.097 +0.020
1 1⁄ 4 ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.064 +0.020 0.079 +0.020 0.098 +0.020 0.123 +0.020
1 1⁄ 2 ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.073 +0.020 0.090 +0.020 0.112 +0.020 0.141 +0.020
2 ... ... ... ... 0.073 +0.020 0.091 +0.020 0.113 +0.020 0.140 +0.020 0.176 +0.020
2 1⁄ 2 ... ... ... ... 0.088 +0.020 0.110 +0.020 0.137 +0.020 0.169 +0.020 0.213 +0.026
3 ... ... 0.085 +0.020 0.108 +0.020 0.135 +0.020 0.167 +0.020 0.206 +0.025 0.259 +0.031
3 1⁄ 2 ... ... 0.098 +0.020 0.123 +0.020 0.154 +0.020 0.190 +0.023 0.235 +0.028 0.296 +0.036
4 0.070 +0.020 0.110 +0.020 0.138 +0.020 0.173 +0.020 0.214 +0.026 0.265 +0.032 0.333 +0.040
5 0.087 +0.020 0.136 +0.020 0.171 +0.021 0.214 +0.027 0.265 +0.032 0.327 +0.039 0.412 +0.049
6 0.104 +0.020 0.162 +0.020 0.204 +0.024 0.255 +0.031 0.316 +0.038 0.390 +0.047 0.491 +0.059
8 0.135 +0.020 0.210 +0.025 0.265 +0.032 0.332 +0.040 0.410 +0.049 0.508 +0.061 ... ...
10 0.168 +0.020 0.262 +0.031 0.331 +0.040 0.413 +0.050 0.511 +0.061 0.632 +0.076 ... ...
12 0.199 +0.024 0.311 +0.037 0.392 +0.047 0.490 +0.059 0.606 +0.073 0.750 +0.090 ... ...
14 ... ... 0.341 +0.048 0.430 +0.052 0.538 +0.064 0.666 +0.080 0.823 +0.099 ... ...
16 ... ... 0.390 +0.055 0.492 +0.059 0.615 +0.074 0.762 +0.091 0.941 +0.113 ... ...
18 ... ... 0.439 +0.061 0.554 +0.066 0.692 +0.083 0.857 +0.103 1.059 +0.127 ... ...
20 ... ... 0.488 +0.068 0.615 +0.074 0.769 +0.092 0.952 +0.114 1.176 +0.141 ... ...
24 ... ... 0.585 +0.082 0.738 +0.088 0.923 +0.111 1.143 +0.137 1.412 +0.169 ... ...
30 ... ... 0.732 +0.102 0.923 +0.111 1.154 +0.138 1.428 +0.171 1.765 +0.212 ... ...
36 ... ... 0.878 +0.123 1.108 +0.133 1.385 +0.166 1.714 +0.205 2.118 +0.254 ... ...
A
B
1 in. = 25.4 mm (exact).
TABLE 3 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F (23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe
PressureA Required for Test
PVC 1120,
SDR PVC 1220,
PVC 2120 PVC 2116 PVC 2112 PVC 2110
psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar)
13.5 670 4.62 (46.2) 540 3.72 (37.2) 450 3.10 (31.0) 370 2.55 (25.5)
17 530 3.65 (36.5) 420 2.90 (29.0) 350 2.41 (24.1) 290 2.00 (20.0)
21 420 2.90 (29.0) 340 2.34 (23.4) 280 1.93 (19.3) 230 1.59 (15.9)
26 340 2.34 (23.4) 270 1.86 (18.6) 220 1.52 (15.2) 180 1.24 (12.4)
32.5 270 1.86 (18.6) 210 1.45 (14.5) 180 1.24 (12.4) 150 1.03 (10.3)
41 210 1.45 (14.5) 170 1.17 (11.7) 140 0.97 (9.7) 120 0.83 (8.3)
64 130 0.90 (9.0) 110 0.76 (7.6) 90 0.62 (6.2) 70 0.48 (4.8)
A
psi MPa (bar)
PVC 1120, PVC 1220, PVC 2120 4200 29.0 (290)

PVC 2116 3360 23.2 (232)
PVC 2112 2800 19.3 (193)
PVC 2110 2300 15.9 (159)
Some minor adjustments have been made to keep the test pressures uniform to simplify testing.
h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618 8.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
for those tests where conditioning is required. mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the standard the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
laboratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away from
5 % relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test an end closure.
methods or in this specification. 8.4 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at
8.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of random. Test individually with water at the internal pressures
pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller. In given in Table 3, six specimens of pipe, each specimen at least
case of no prior agreement, any sample selected by the testing ten times the nominal diameter in length, but not less than 10
laboratory shall be deemed adequate. in. (250 mm) or more than 3 ft (1000 mm) between end
37
SD-2241 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) D1599, having the lengths specified in 8.4. The time of testing
for PVC Plastic Pipe of each specimen shall be not less than 60 s.
NOTE 9—Times greater than 60 s may be needed to bring large size
PVC 1120, PVC 2116,
SDR PVC 1220, PVC 2112,
specimens to the burst pressure. The test is more difficult to pass using
PVC 2120 PVC 2110 greater pressurizing times.
psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar) 8.6 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe, 2 in.
13.5 1000 6.89 (68.9) 800 5.52 (55.2) (50 mm) long, between parallel plates in a suitable press until
17 800 5.52 (55.2) 630 4.34 (43.4) the distance between the plates is 40 % of the outside diameter
21 630 4.34 (43.4) 500 3.45 (34.5)
26 500 3.45 (34.5) 400 2.76 (27.6) of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and such that
32.5 400 2.76 (27.6) 315 2.17 (21.7) the compression is completed within 2 to 5 min. On removal of
41 315 2.17 (21.7) 250 1.72 (17.2) the load, examine the specimens for evidence of splitting,
64 200 1.38 (13.8) 160 1.10 (11.0)
A
cracking, or breaking.
The fiber stresses used to derive these test
pressures are as follows: 8.7 Impact Resistance—Determine the impact resistance in
psi MPa (bar)
accordance with the specification requirement section of Test
PVC 1120, PVC 1220, PVC 2120 6400 44.1 (441)
Method D2444. Test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (236 2°C) using a Tup B
PVC 2116, PVC 2112, PVC 2110 5000 34.5 (345) and flat plate support. Use a 20-lb (9-kg) tup.
8.7.1 Test Specimens—Specimens of pipe for impact testing
shall be cut to lengths required in Test Method D2444.
TABLE 5 Impact Resistance at 73°F (23°C) for PVC Plastic Pipe 8.7.2 Test Requirements (1⁄4 to 12 in.)—For pipe sizes 1⁄4
Size, in.
Impact Resistance,
Size, in.
Impact Resistance, in. (6 mm) through 12 in. (300 mm), ten specimens shall be
ft·lbf (J) All SDRs ft·lbf (J) All SDRs tested. If nine or more pass, the lot passes. If two or more fail,
⁄
14 10 (13.6) 21⁄2 40 (54.2) the lot fails.
⁄
12 10 (13.6) 3 60 (81.3)
3⁄ 4 15 (20.3) 31⁄2 70 (94.9)
1 20 (27.1) 4 90 (122.0) 9. Retest and Rejection
1 1⁄ 4 20 (27.1) 5 100 (135.6)
1 1⁄ 2 30 (40.7) 6 120 (162.7)
9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
2 30 (40.7) 8 or larger 160 (216.9) of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such
agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered,
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
closures and bearing the permanent marking on the pipe. sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
Maintain the specimens at the pressure indicated for a period of specification.
1000 h. Hold the pressure as closely as possible, but within
610 psi (670 kPa). Condition the specimens at the test 10. Product Marking
temperature of 73.4°F (23°C) to within 63.6°F (2°C). Main- 10.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following,
tain the test temperature at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C). Test in spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m):
accordance with Test Method D1598, except maintain the 10.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in. (50 mm)),
pressure at the values given in Table 3 for 1000 h. Failure of 10.1.2 The outside diameter system (IPS or PIP) on sizes 14
two of the six specimens tested shall constitute failure in the in. (350 mm) and over (for example, IPS 14 in. (350 mm) or
test. Failure of one of the six specimens tested is cause for PIP 21 in. (500 mm)),
retest of six additional specimens. Failure of one of the six 10.1.3 Type of plastic pipe material in accordance with the
specimens tested in retest shall constitute failure in the test. designation code given in 3.2.5 (for example, PVC1120),
Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in Test 10.1.4 Standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio in ac-
Method D1598. cordance with the designation code given in 3.2.4 (for ex-
8.4.1 Accelerated Regression Test—Test in accordance with ample, SDR21), or the pressure rating in pounds per square
procedures in Test Method D1598, using either free end or inch for water at 73°F (23°C) shown as the number followed
restrained end fittings. A minimum of six specimens shall be by psi (for example, 200 psi (1.4 MPa)), except that when
tested. Test three specimens at a single pressure that result in intended for pressure applications, the pressure rating shall be
failures at or below 0.10 h. Test an additional three specimens shown (for example, 200 psi (1.4 MPa)). When the indicated
at a single pressure that will result in failures at about 200 h. pressure rating is lower than that calculated in accordance with
Generating additional data points to improve the LTHS or 3.2.3 (see appendix), the SDR shall also be included in the
LCL, or both, is acceptable. No points shall be excluded unless marking code,
an obvious defect is detected in the failure area of the test 10.1.5 ASME SD-2241 or both ASME SD-2241 and
sample, or there was a malfunction of test equipment. Charac- ASTM D2241,
terize the data using the least squares regression described in 10.1.6 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark),
Test Method D2837. 10.1.7 Production code with which the manufacturer can
8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure trace the year, month, day shift, plant and extruder of manu-
with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method facture for this product, and
38
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2241
10.1.8 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water shall factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with this
also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the specification and has been found to meet the requirements of
evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the this specification.
laboratory.
NOTE 10—Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must 12. Certification
obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A2.
13. Keywords
11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was manu-
13.1 pressure pipe; pressure rated; PVC; SDR
S1. Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for the health effects portion of NSF Standard No. 14 by an
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
certified for conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard No. 61 or latory authority having jurisdiction.
This requirement applies only to pipe to be used in systems that have not established other provisions for identification.
S2. Pipe Marking Requirement for Reclaimed Water stripes printed lengthwise on opposite sides of the pipe. The
Systems—Color Identification of pipe shall be by: (1) use of pipe shall be marked RECLAIMED WATER at intervals of 5
purple (violet) PVC material or (2) by use of continuous purple ft. or less.
ANNEXES
A1. PVC PRESSURE RATED PIPES HAVING OTHER THAN IPS OUTSIDE DIAMETERS
A1.1 As the use of PVC pipe has expanded, a need for pipe
diameters and dimension ratios other than those listed in the
main body of this specification has developed. These include TABLE A1.1 CTS Outside Diameters and Tolerance for PVC
Plastic Pipe
small diameter (2-in. and under) CTS sizes and larger diameter
(6 in. and over) PIP sizes. The IPS outside diameter pipes and Tolerances, in. (mm)
Nominal Tube Average Outside
Maximum
the standard dimension ratios included in the body of this Size, in. Diameter, in. (mm) Average
Out-of-Roundness
specification provide the format onto which these additional ⁄
12 0.625 (15.9) ± 0.003 (0.08) 0.008 (0.20)
sizes are fitted. ⁄
34 0.875 (22.2) ± 0.003 (0.08) 0.010 (0.26)
1 1.125 (28.6) ± 0.003 (0.08) 0.012 (0.30)
A1.2 Pipe sizes listed in this Annex shall be tested to verify 11⁄4 1.375 (34.9) ± 0.003 (0.08) 0.014 (0.36)
11⁄2 1.625 (41.3) ± 0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.40)
they meet the requirements shown in Tables A1.1-A1.7 and all 2 2.125 (54.0) ± 0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.50)
other requirements of the specification.
39
SD-2241 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE A1.2 PIP Outside Diameters and Tolerance for PVC

Plastic Pipe
Tolerances, in. (mm)
Nominal Tube Average Outside
Size, in. Diameter, in. (mm) Maximum
Average
Out-of-Roundness
6 6.140 (155.96) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.100 (2.54)
8 8.160 (207.26) ±0.15 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81)
10 10.200 (259.08) ±0.15 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81)
12 12.240 (310.90) ±0.15 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81)
15 15.300 (388.62) ± .016 (0.41) 0.294 (7.46)
18 18.701 (475.00) ± .020 (0.51) 0.360 (9.14)
21 22.047 (559.99) ± .025 (0.64) 0.420 (10.66)
24 24.803 (629.99) ± .032 (0.81) 0.480 (12.20)
27 27.953 (710.00) ± .038 (0.96) 0.540 (13.72)
TABLE A1.3 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water 73.4°F

(23°C) for PVC Plastic PipeA
Pressure Required for Test—PVC 1120
SDR psi MPa Bars
11 840 5.79 57.9
35 247 1.70 17.0
51 168 1.16 11.6
81 105 0.725 7.25
A
The fiber stress used to derive this test was 4200 psi (29.0 MPa).
TABLE A1.4 Burst Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73.4°F

(23°C) for PVC Plastic PipeA
Pressure Required for Test—PVC 1120
SDR psi MPa Bars
11 1280 8.82 88.2
35 380 2.62 26.2
51 260 1.79 17.9
81 160 1.085 10.85
A
The fiber stress used to derive this test was 6400 psi (44.1 MPa).
TABLE A1.5 Water Pressure Ratings (PR) at 73°F (23°C) for

Nonthreaded PVC Plastic Pipe
PVC 1120
PVC 1220
SDR PVC 2120
psi MPa Bars
11 400 2.75 27.5
35 118 0.81 8.1
51 80 0.55 5.5
81 50 0.34 3.4
40
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2241
TABLE A1.6 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for PVC Plastic pipe with CTS Outside DiametersA
Wall Thickness, in. (mm)B
Nominal Tube
SDR 21 SDR 17 SDR 13.5 SDR 11
Size, in.
Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
⁄12 ... ... ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.060 +0.020
⁄34 ... ... 0.060 +0.020 0.065 +0.020 0.080 +0.020
1 0.060 +0.020 0.066 +0.020 0.083 +0.020 0.102 +0.020
1 1 ⁄4 0.065 +0.020 0.081 +0.020 0.102 +0.020 0.125 +0.020
1 1 ⁄2 0.077 +0.020 0.096 +0.020 0.120 +0.020 0.148 +0.020
2 0.101 +0.023 0.125 +0.023 0.157 +0.023 0.193 +0.023
A
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the pipe at any cross section. The maximum permitted wall thickness, at any cross-section, is the minimum wall thickness
plus the stated tolerance. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum tolerance.
B
1 in. = 25.4 mm (exact).
TABLE A1.7 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for PVC Plastic Pipe with PIP Outside DiametersA
Wall Thickness, in. (mm)B
Nominal
SDR81 SDR51 SDR41 SDR35 SDR32.5 SDR26 SDR21
Pipe
Size, in. Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler- Mini- Toler-
mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance mum ance
6 0.076 +0.020 0.120 +0.020 0.150 +0.020 ... ... 0.189 +0.023 ... ... ... ...
8 0.101 +0.020 0.160 +0.020 0.199 +0.024 ... ... 0.251 +0.030 ... ... ... ...
10 0.126 +0.020 0.200 +0.024 0.249 +0.030 ... ... 0.314 +0.038 ... ... ... ...
12 0.151 +0.020 0.240 +0.029 0.299 +0.036 ... ... 0.377 +0.045 ... ... ... ...
15 0.189 +0.023 0.300 +0.042 0.373 +0.052 0.437 +0.052 0.471 +0.056 0.588 +0.070 0.728 +0.087
18 ... ... 0.366 +0.051 0.456 +0.064 0.534 +0.064 0.575 +0.069 0.719 +0.086 ... ...
21 ... ... 0.432 +0.060 0.538 +0.075 0.630 +0.076 0.678 +0.081 0.848 +0.102 ... ...
24 ... ... 0.486 +0.068 0.605 +0.085 0.709 +0.085 0.763 +0.092 0.954 +0.115 ... ...
27 ... ... 0.548 +0.077 0.682 +0.095 0.799 +0.096 0.860 +0.103 1.075 +0.129 ... ...
A
1 in. = 25.4 mm (exact).
B
A2. CERTIFICATION
41
SD-2241 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1.1 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the tional information regarding the criteria used in developing
Plastics Pipe Institute are used to pressure rate PVC plastic these hydrostatic design stresses may be obtained from the
pipe. These hydrostatic design stresses are 2000 psi (14 MPa), Plastics Pipe Institute. These hydrostatic design stresses may
1600 psi (11.0 MPa), 1250 psi (8.6 MPa), and 1000 psi (6.9 not be suitable for materials that show a wide departure from
MPa) for water at 73.4°F (23°C). These hydrostatic design a straight line plot of log stress versus log time to failure. All
stresses apply only to pipe meeting all the requirements of this the data available to date on PVC pipe materials made in the
specification. United States exhibit a straight-line plot under these plotting
conditions.
X1.2 Six PVC pipe materials are included based on the
requirements of Specification D1784 and the PPI- X1.4 The pipe is rated for use with water in 73°F (23°C) at
recommended hydrostatic design stresses as follows: the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.1. Lower
X1.2.1 Type I, Grade 1 (12454-B), with a hydrostatic design pressure ratings than those calculated in accordance with 3.2.3
stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC1120. may be recommended, at the option of the pipe manufacturer,
in which case the SDR shall be included in the marking.
X1.2.2 Type I, Grade 2 (12454-C), with a hydrostatic design Experience of the industry indicates that PVC plastic pipe
stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC1220. meeting the requirements of this specification give satisfactory
X1.2.3 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic service under normal conditions for a long period at these
design stress of 2000 psi (14 MPa), designated as PVC2120. pressure ratings. The sustained pressure requirements (6.3) are
X1.2.4 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic related to these ratings through the slopes of the strength-time
design stress of 1600 psi (11.0 MPa), designated as PVC2116. plots of these materials in pipe form.
X1.2.5 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic X1.5 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the
design stress of 1250 psi (8.6 MPa), designated as PVC2112. Plastic Pipe Institute are based on tests made on pipe ranging
in size from 1⁄2 to 21⁄2 in. (12.5 to 50 mm).
X1.2.6 Type II, Grade 1 (14333-D), with a hydrostatic
design stress of 1000 psi (7 MPa), designated as PVC2110.
X1.3 The standard method for obtaining hydrostatic basis
for thermoplastic pipe materials is Test Method D2837. Addi-
TABLE X1.1 Standard Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratios (SDR) and Water Pressure Ratings (PR) at 73°F (23°C) for Nonthreaded
PVC Plastic PipeA
Pressure Rating of PVC Pipe MaterialsA
SDR PVC 1120, PVC 2116 PVC 2112 PVC 2110
PVC 1220,
PVC 2120
psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar) psi MPa (bar)
13.5 315 2.17 (21.7) 250 1.72 (17.2) 200 1.38 (13.8) 160 1.10 (11.0)
17 250 1.72 (17.2) 200 1.38 (13.8) 160 1.10 (11.0) 125 0.86 (8.6)
21 200 1.38 (13.8) 160 1.10 (11.0) 125 0.86 (8.6) 100 0.69 (6.9)
26 160 1.10 (11.0) 125 0.86 (8.6) 100 0.69 (6.9) 80 0.55 (5.5)
32.5 125 0.86 (8.6) 100 0.69 (6.9) 80 0.55 (5.5) 63 0.43 (4.3)
41 100 0.69 (6.9) 80 0.55 (5.5) 63 0.43 (4.3) 50 0.34 (3.4)
C
64 63 0.43 (4.3) 50 0.34 (3.4) NPR NPRC NPRC NPRC
Pressure RatingABC Standard Dimension Ratio of PVC Pipe Materials
psi MPa (bar) PVC 1120, PVC 2116 PVC 2112 PVC 2110
PVC 1220,
PVC 2120
315 27.17 (21.7) 13.5 ... ... ...
250 1.72 (17.2) 17 13.5 ... ...
200 1.38 (13.8) 21 17 13.5 ...
160 1.10 (11.0) 26 21 17 13.5
125 0.86 (8.6) 32.5 26 21 17
100 0.69 (6.9) 41 32.5 26 21
80 0.55 (5.5) ... 41 32.5 26
63 0.43 (4.3) 64 ... 41 32.5
50 0.34 (3.4) ... 64 ... 41
A
These pressures ratings do not apply for threaded pipe.
B
See 3.2.5 and 5.3 for code designation.
C
NPR = not pressure rated.
42
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2464
SPECIFICATION FOR THREADED POLY(VINYL

CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE
80
SD-2464
quirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.)
43
SD-2464 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80

1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) 2.1 ASTM Standards:
threaded Schedule 80 pipe fittings. Included are requirements D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
for materials, workmanship, dimensions, and burst pressure. D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
NOTE 1—Threaded CPVC plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 80, which D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
were formerly included in this standard, are now covered by Specification tics
F437. D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which (CPVC) Compounds
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- moplastic Pipe and Fittings
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for F437 Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious safety plastic Pipe and Fittings
hazards should a system fail for any reason. 2.2 Federal Standard:
2.3 Military Standard:
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall 2.4 NSF Standard:
not be considered as requirements of the specification. Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Materials
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components—
for information only. Health Effects
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the 3. Terminology
test method portion, Section 7, of this specification. This 3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminol-
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, ogy F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminol-
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user ogy D1600, unless otherwise indicated. The abbreviation for
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is PVC.
tions prior to use.
44
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2464
4. Classification shown in Table 1, and is not included in the center-to-end or

4.1 General—This specification covers threaded Schedule end-to-end dimensions.
80 PVC pipe fittings, made from four PVC plastic compounds 6.1.2 Fittings Not Illustrated—All fittings, whether illus-
and intended for use with threaded Iron Pipe Size (IPS) trated in Table 1 and Table 2 or not, shall have wall thicknesses
outside-diameter plastic pipe. and thread dimensions conforming to 6.1 and 6.2.
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally 6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads,
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, unions, bushings, threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in
caps, nipples, etc., shall be molded or machined from extruded accordance with 8.4.
stock. 6.3 Burst Pressure:
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by back welding or butt fusion are 6.3.1 The burst strength of the fittings shall be not less than
not included in this specification. that calculated for the size and wall thickness of the pipe with
which it is to be used, when calculated from the following
equation:
5.1 This specification covers PVC pipe fittings made from
S 5 P ~ D O t ! /2t (1)
two PVC plastics as classified in Specification D1784. These
are cell classifications 12454 and 14333. where:
NOTE 3—Mechanical strength, heat deflection temperature, and flam- S = hoop stress, psi (or MPa),
mability requirements are covered in Specification D1784. P = internal pressure, psi (or MPa),
DO = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), and
5.2 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm).
their own clean rework fitting material and the fittings pro-
duced shall meet all the requirements of this specification. Fittings tested in accordance with 8.4 shall withstand the
minimum burst pressure shown in Table 3.
6. Requirements 6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances: not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
6.1.1 The dimensions and tolerances of the fittings shall be used only as an indication of quality.
as shown in Table 1 and Table 2 when measured in accordance
with Test Method D2122. Minimum dimensions have zero 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
negative tolerances. Bushings shall have thread lengths appli- 7.1 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free
cable to the corresponding sizes. Counterbore is optional, is not of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
TABLE 1 Dimensions of 90° Ells, Tees, Crosses, 45° Elbows and Couplings (Straight Sizes), in. (mm)A
Center to Thread Length of Thread End to

Center to Thread
Nominal End, 90° Elbows, Inside Diameter Nominal Wall Outside Diameter
Thread, T, End, 45° Elbow,B K, Thread End of
Pipe Size Tees, Crosses,B H, min min of Fitting, D, min Thickness, F, min of Hub, M, min
Coupling, L, min
min
⁄
18 0.688 (17.48) 0.38 (9.65) 0.625 (15.88) 0.171 (4.34) 0.108 (2.74) 0.645 (16.40) 0.813 (20.65)
⁄
14 0.812 (20.63) 0.50 (12.70) 0.688 (17.48) 0.258 (6.55) 0.135 (3.43) 0.840 (21.30) 1.063 (27.00)
3⁄ 8 0.938 (23.83) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.379 (9.63) 0.144 (3.66) 1.000 (25.40) 1.063 (27.00)
1⁄ 2 1.125 (28.58) 0.64 (16.26) 0.750 (19.05) 0.502 (12.75) 0.198 (5.03) 1.280 (32.50) 1.344 (34.14)
3⁄ 4 1.250 (31.75) 0.65 (16.51) 1.000 (25.40) 0.698 (17.73) 0.207 (5.26) 1.500 (38.10) 1.500 (38.10)
1 1.500 (38.10) 0.81 (20.57) 1.125 (28.58) 0.911 (23.14) 0.225 (5.72) 1.810 (45.97) 1.688 (42.88)
1 1⁄ 4 1.750 (44.45) 0.85 (21.59) 1.313 (33.35) 1.227 (31.17) 0.261 (6.63) 2.200 (55.88) 1.750 (44.45)
1 1⁄ 2 1.938 (49.23) 0.85 (21.54) 1.438 (36.53) 1.446 (36.73) 0.270 (6.86) 2.500 (63.50) 2.000 (50.80)
2 2.250 (57.15) 0.90 (22.86) 1.625 (41.28) 1.881 (47.78) 0.297 (7.54) 3.000 (76.20) 2.063 (52.40)
2 1⁄ 2 2.688 (68.28) 1.21 (30.73) 1.938 (49.23) 2.250 (57.15) 0.315 (8.00) 3.580 (90.42) 2.625 (66.68)
3 3.063 (77.80) 1.30 (33.02) 2.125 (53.48) 2.820 (71.65) 0.405 (10.29) 4.300 (104.22) 2.750 (69.85)
4 3.625 (92.08) 1.38 (35.05) 2.625 (66.68) 3.737 (94.92) 0.450 (11.43) 5.430 (137.92) 3.000 (76.20)
6 5.125 (130.18) 1.50 (38.10) 3.250 (82.55) 5.646 (143.41) 0.504 (12.80) 7.625 (193.68) 3.250 (82.55)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings shown are illustrative only.
B
This dimension locates the end of the fitting.
45
SD-2464 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Dimensions of Plugs and Caps, in.A
Length of Length of Width of Nominal Wall Outside Diameter

Nominal Height of Head, Cap Height,
Pipe Size
Male Thread, Female Thread, Flats,B Thickness,
R, min W, min
of Hub,
S, min T, min Q, min F, min M, min
⁄
18 0.31 (7.87) 0.38 (9.65) 0.469 (11.19) 0.108 (2.74) 0.188 (4.76) 0.625 (15.88) 0.645 (16.38)
⁄
14 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) 0.135 (3.43) 0.188 (4.76) 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34)
3⁄ 8 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (14.05) 0.144 (3.66) 0.188 (4.76) 0.688 (17.48) 1.000 (25.40)
1⁄ 2 0.53 (13.45) 0.64 (16.26) 0.938 (23.83) 0.198 (5.03) 0.188 (4.76) 0.875 (22.23) 1.280 (32.51)
3⁄ 4 0.55 (13.97) 0.65 (16.51) 1.125 (28.58) 0.207 (5.26) 0.219 (5.56) 1.000 (25.40) 1.450 (36.80)
1 0.68 (17.27) 0.81 (20.57) 1.375 (34.93) 0.225 (5.72) 0.219 (5.56) 1.188 (30.18) 1.810 (45.97)
1 1⁄ 4 0.71 (18.03) 0.85 (21.59) 1.750 (44.45) 0.261 (6.63) 0.281 (7.14) 1.250 (31.75) 2.200 (55.88)
1 1⁄ 2 0.72 (18.29) 0.85 (21.59) 1.875 (47.63) 0.270 (6.86) 0.313 (7.95) 1.250 (31.75) 2.450 (62.23)
2 0.76 (19.30) 0.90 (22.86) 1.875 (47.63) 0.297 (7.54) 0.313 (7.45) 1.375 (34.93) 3.000 (76.20)
2 1⁄ 2 1.14 (28.96) 1.21 (30.73) 1.875 (47.63) 0.369 (9.37) 0.375 (9.53) 1.625 (41.28) 3.560 (90.42)
3 1.20 (30.48) 1.30 (33.02) 2.000 (50.80) 0.405 (10.29) 0.375 (9.53) 1.750 (44.45) 4.250 (107.90)
4 1.30 (33.02) 1.38 (35.05) 2.000 (50.80) 0.450 (11.43) 0.375 (9.53) 2.000 (50.80) 5.350 (134.62)
6 1.44 (36.58) 1.50 (38.10) 2.000 (50.80) 0.504 (12.80) 0.500 (12.70) 2.125 (53.98) 7.625 (193.00)
A
B
At the manufacturer’s option the head of the plug shall be hexagonal, octagonal, square, or round.
TABLE 3 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora-
for PVC Threaded Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 tory Atmosphere of 73 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
Minimum Burst StrengthA relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
Nominal
Size, in.
Class 12454 Class 14333 ods or in this specification.
psi MPa psi MPa
8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed
⁄
14 3620 (24.96) 2830 (19.51) upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at
3⁄ 8 2940 (20.27) 2300 (15.86)
1⁄ 2
random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
2720 (18.75) 2120 (14.62)
the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
⁄
34 2200 (15.17) 1720 (11.86)
1 2020 (13.93) 1580 (10.89) NOTE 4—For individual orders or specifications where supplemental
1 1⁄ 4 1660 (11.44) 1300 (8.96) tests are required, only those tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed
upon between purchaser and supplier need be conducted.
1 1⁄ 2 1510 (10.41) 1180 (8.14)
2 1290 (8.89) 1010 (6.96)
8.4 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
2 1⁄ 2 1360 (8.38) 1060 (7.31) with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method
D1599. Join the fittings to the pipe sufficiently strong and in
3 1200 (8.27) 940 (6.48)
4 1040 (7.17) 810 (5.51)
such a manner that no failures shall occur in the assembly at a
6 890 (6.19) 700 (4.83) pressure less than the pressure requirement given in Table 3.
A
This table was calculated for Schedule 80 pipe using the ISO formula and the The time of testing each assembly shall be between 60 and 70
stress levels for materials as follows: s.
psi MPa 9. Retest and Rejection

Class 12454 6400 44.1 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
Class 14333 5000 34.5 of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
changed or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. specification.
8. Test Methods 10. Product Marking

8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 10.1 Quality of Marking—The marking shall be applied to
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less the fittings in such a manner that they remain legible under
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of normal handling and installation practices.
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. 10.2 Content of Marking:
46
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2464
10.2.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following: 10.4 Markings or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or
10.2.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark, applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as
10.2.1.2 Material identification PVC I for cell classification printing.
12454 or PVC II for cell classification 14333, 10.5 Where recessed marking is used, care shall be taken to
10.2.1.3 The seal or mark of the laboratory making the see that in no case marking causes cracks or reduces the wall
evaluation for potable water contact. thickness below the minimum specified.
10.2.1.4 Size, and
10.2.1.5 ASME SD-2464 or both ASME SD-2464 and 11. Quality Assurance
ASTM D2464. 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
10.3 Where the size of the fittings does not allow complete manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
marking, omit identification marking in the following se- with this specification and has been found to meet the
quence: size, material designation, manufacturer’s name or requirements of this specification.
trademark.
12. Certification
12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A!1.
The following requirements apply only to federal/military procurement, not domestic sales or
transfers.
S1. Responsibility for Inspection —Unless otherwise speci- S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer is respon- contract, the materials shall be packaged in accordance with
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require- the supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
ments specified herein. The producer may use his own or any destination in satisfactory condition and which will be accept-
other suitable facilities for performance of the inspection and able to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall
test requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser disap- comply with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National
proves. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the Motor Freight Classification rules.
inspections and tests set forth in this specification where such
S2.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material
dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD
conforms to prescribed requirements.
129 for military agencies.
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for
inspection. NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure- ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ment:
47
SD-2464 ASME NM.3.1-2018
POTABLE WATER REQUIREMENT
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to convey or to be in contact
with potable water.
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested and acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
48
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2466

PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 40
SD-2466
quirements in para. 10.1.5, renumbering of section 13 and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made
mandatory.)
49
SD-2466 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
40
1. Scope of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health

1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
Schedule 40 pipe fittings. Included are requirements for tions prior to use.
materials, workmanship, dimensions, and burst pressure. 2. Referenced Documents
NOTE 1—Socket-type CPVC plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40, which 2.1 ASTM Standards:
were formerly included in this standard, are now covered by Specification D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
F438. D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to tics
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases, some Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. (CPVC) Compounds
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. moplastic Pipe and Fittings
NOTE 2—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious saftey F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
hazards should a system fail for any reason. F438 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
1.3 Fitting such as unions, flanges, special plastic-to-metal Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
transitions and appurtenances intended for use with PVC F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
piping are covered under specification F1970. plastic Pipe and Fittings
F1970 Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appur-
tenances or Valves for use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems
2.2 NSF Standards:
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components—
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Health Effects
3. Terminology
1.6 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to
the test method portion, Section 7, of this specification. This 3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminol-
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, ogy F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminol-
poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is PVC.
50
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2466
4. Classification 6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads,

4.1 General—This specification covers Schedule 40 PVC threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in
pipe fittings, made from four PVC plastic compounds and accordance with 8.4.
intended for use with Iron Pipe Size (IPS) outside-diameter 6.3 Burst Pressure:
plastic pipe. 6.3.1 The minimum burst strength of the fittings shall be not
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally less than that calculated for the size and wall thickness of the
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, bushings, caps, pipe with which it is to be used, when calculated from the
nipples, etc., shall be molded or machined from extruded stock. following equation:
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by welding are not included in this S 5 P ~ D O 2 t ! /2t (1)
specification.
where:
5. Materials S = hoop stress, psi (or MPa),
5.1 This specification covers PVC pipe fittings made from P = internal pressure, psi (or MPa),
DO = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), and
five PVC plastics as classified in Specification D1784. These
are PVC 12454, 12454, 13354, 11443, and 14333.
Fittings tested in accordance with 8.5 shall withstand the
5.2 Compound—The PVC plastic compound shall meet the minimum burst pressure shown in Table 4.
requirements of PVC 12454, 12454, 11443, or 14333, as 6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
described in Specification D1784. not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
NOTE 3—Mechanical strength, heat resistance, flammability, and used only as an indication of quality.
chemical resistance requirements are covered in Specification D1784.
5.3 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
their own clean rework fitting material and the fittings pro- 7.1 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free
duced shall meet all the requirements of this specification. of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
6. Requirements color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
8. Test Methods
6.1.1 Fitting sockets inside diameters (waterways), mini-
mum wall thicknesses, and dimensions shall be as shown in 8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73 6
Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3 when measured in accordance 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less
with Test Method D2122. than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
6.1.2 When multistep reducer bushings are cored out, the Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required.
inner socket shall be reinforced from the outer wall by a 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora-
minimum of three ribs extending from the top of the inner tory Atmosphere of 73 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
socket to the deepest extremity of the coring. The transition relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
from D to DJ (Table 3) shall be straight, tapered as shown, or ods or in this specification.
radiused. A positive taper in the same direction of the taper in
the socket on the outside diameter of the bushing is optional 8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed
(See XA/XB in Table 3). Any point measured along the outside upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at
diameter of the bushing (between points XA and XB) shall not random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
fall below minimum pipe OD. the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
6.1.3 The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be 125 % NOTE 4—For individual orders or specifications, only those tests and
of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size of numbers of tests specifically agreed upon between the purchaser and the
Schedule 40 pipe for which they are designed to be used, seller need be conducted.
except that for the socket, the wall thickness shall be at least 8.4 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
equal to the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size accordance with Specification F1498.
of Schedule 40 pipe. For any threaded fitting the minimum wall 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
thickness of the threaded portion shall be at least equal to the in accordance with Test Method D1599. The pressure shall be
thickness of material under the thread root of threaded Sched- applied at a uniform rate such that the minimum allowable
ule 80 pipe of the same size. burst pressure is attained in 60 or 70 s.
6.1.4 The minimum inside diameter of the fittings shall be
not less than the minimum specified inside diameter of the NOTE 5—The time-to-failure may exceed 70 s.
corresponding size of Schedule 40 pipe. Any fitting having a 8.5.1 Apparatus—Fittings shall be tested while held in a
male thread shall have an internal diameter not larger than test jig constructed in such a manner as to seal the socket by
Schedule 80 pipe of the same size. means of O-rings, or gaskets but not to reinforce or support the
6.1.5 Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance. fittings, except where contact is necessary because of the shape
Tolerances on other dimensions are shown in Table 1 and Table of the fitting to keep the fitting in the test jig. Such contact shall
3. be held to the minimum. The socket plug portion of the test
51
SD-2466 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Tapered Sockets for PVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40, in.A
A B Wall Thickness, min Entrance, min

Socket Entrance Diameter Socket Bottom Diameter CB DC Min
Nominal
Socket Inside Outside
Pipe Tolerance Max Tolerance Max Length, Diameter, Diameter
Size Diameter on Out-of- Diameter on Out-of- min min E F EW EX, EZ
of Hub, M
Diameter Round Diameter Round
18 ⁄ 0.417 ±0.004 0.016 0.401 ±0.004 0.016 0.500 0.225 0.068 0.085 0.526 ⁄
1 64 ⁄
1 64
(0.41) (0.41)
14 ⁄ 0.552 ±0.004 0.016 0.536 ±0.004 0.016 0.500 0.320 0.088 0.110 0.672 ⁄
1 64 ⁄
1 64
(0.41) (0.41)
38 ⁄ 0.687 ±0.004 0.016 0.671 ±0.004 0.016 0.594 0.449 0.091 0.114 0.821 ⁄
1 32 ⁄
1 32
(0.41) (0.41)
12 ⁄ 0.848 ±0.004 0.016 0.836 ±0.004 0.016 0.688 0.578 0.109 0.136 0.998 ⁄
1 32 ⁄
1 32
(0.41) (0.41)
34 ⁄ 1.058 ±0.004 0.020 1.046 ±0.004 0.020 0.719 0.740 0.113 0.141 1.221 ⁄
1 32 ⁄
1 32
(0.51) (0.51)
1 1.325 ±0.005 0.020 1.310 ±0.005 0.020 0.875 0.990 0.133 0.166 1.504 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
(0.51) (0.51)
1 1 ⁄4 1.670 ±0.005 0.024 1.655 ±0.005 0.024 0.938 1.335 0.140 0.175 1.871 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
(0.61) (0.61)
1 1 ⁄2 1.912 ±0.006 0.024 1.894 ±0.006 0.024 1.094 1.564 0.145 0.181 2.127 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
(0.61) (0.61)
2 2.387 ±0.006 0.024 2.369 ±0.006 0.024 1.156 2.021 0.154 0.193 2.634 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
(0.61) (0.61)
2 1 ⁄2 2.889 ±0.007 0.030 2.868 ±0.007 0.030 1.750 2.414 0.203 0.254 3.170 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄
(0.76) (0.76)
3 3.516 ±0.008 0.030 3.492 ±0.008 0.030 1.875 3.008 0.216 0.270 3.841 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄
(0.76) (0.76)
3 1 ⁄2 4.016 ±0.008 0.030 3.992 ±0.008 0.030 2.000 3.486 0.226 0.283 4.374 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄
(0.76) (0.76)
4 4.518 ±0.009 0.030 4.491 ±0.009 0.030 2.000 3.961 0.237 0.296 4.907 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄
(0.76) (0.76)
5 5.583 ±0.010 0.060 5.553 ±0.010 0.060 3.000 4.975 0.258 0.323 6.039 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄
(1.52) (1.52)
6 6.647 ±0.011 0.060 6.614 ±0.011 0.060 3.000 5.986 0.280 0.350 7.203 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16
(1.52) (1.52)
8 8.655 ±0.015 0.090 8.610 ±0.015 0.090 4.000 7.888 0.322 0.403 9.320 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16
(2.29) (2.29)
10 10.780 ±0.015 0.100 10.735 ±0.015 0.100 5.000 9.917 0.365 0.456 11.614 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16
(3.05) (3.05)
12 12.780 ±0.015 0.120 12.735 ±0.015 0.120 6.000 11.825 0.406 0.508 13.786 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16
(3.81) (3.81)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only.
B
Socket depth, measured from socket entrance face to socket bottom face.
C
See 6.1.4.
fixture must extend one third to two thirds of the socket depth. If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
Failure of any part of the test apparatus does not constitute sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
failure of the fittings. specification.
9. Retest and Rejection 10. Marking
9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements 10.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
of this specification, the tests(s) shall be conducted again only 10.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such 10.1.2 Material designation PVC I for PVC 12454-B, PVC
agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered, 12 for PVC 12454-C, PVC 13 for PVC 13354-C and 11443-B,
changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed. and PVC II for PVC 14333-D,
52
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2466
TABLE 2 Minimum Dimension from Center to End of Sockets 10.1.3 Fittings intended for the transport of potable water
(Laying Length) for Couplings, Tees, 90° and 45° Elbows, PVC shall include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40, in.A
evaluation for this purpose.
10.1.4 Size, and
10.1.5 ASME SD-2466 or both ASME SD-2466 and ASTM
D2466.
10.2 Where the size of the fitting does not allow complete
marking, omit identification marking in the following se-
quence: size, material designation, manufacturer’s name or
trademark.
10.3 Markings or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or
applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as
printing.
10.4 Where recessed marking is used, care shall be taken to
Nominal G, min J, min N, min
Pipe Size see that in no case marking causes cracks or reduces the wall
⁄
18 ⁄
14 ⁄
18 ⁄
1 16 thickness below the minimum specified.
⁄
14 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
5 32 ⁄
1 16
3⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄16 3⁄32
1⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄4 3⁄32 11. Quality Assurance

3⁄4 9⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄32
1 11⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄32 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
1 1⁄ 4 7⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄32
manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
1 1⁄ 2 1 7⁄16 3⁄32
2 11⁄4 5⁄8 3⁄32

2 1⁄ 2 11⁄2 11⁄16 3⁄16 requirements of this specification.
3 113⁄16 3⁄4 3⁄16
3 1⁄ 2 21⁄8 1 3⁄16
4 25⁄16 1 3⁄16 12. Certification

5 3 13⁄8 3⁄16
6 31⁄2 13⁄4 1⁄4 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.

8 41⁄2 2 1⁄4
10 513⁄16 29⁄16 1⁄4
12 615⁄16 31⁄16 1⁄4

13. Keywords
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only. 13.1 fittings; pressure; PVC; Sch 40; sockets; threads
53
SD-2466 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Dimensions of Reducer Bushings, PVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40,A in. (mm)
Nominal Size Outside Diameter Tolerance on Outside Diameter Tolerance on Maximum Out-of-Roundness
XA Outside Diameter XB Outside Diameter (max, minus min.)
1⁄4 by 1⁄8 0.540 (13.72) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
38⁄ by 1⁄4, 1⁄8 0.675 (17.41) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.675 (17.41) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 by 3⁄8, 1⁄4 0.840 (21.34) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 1⁄4 1.050 (26.67) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51)
1 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4 1.315 (33.40) +0.008 – 0.005 (0.20 – 0.13) 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1 1.660 (42.16) +0.008 – 0.005 (0.20 – 0.13) 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4 1.900 (48.26) +0.010 – 0.006 (0.25 – 0.15) 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2 2.375 (60.33) +0.010 – 0.006 (0.25 – 0.15) 2.375 (60.33) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
21⁄2 by 2 2.875 (73.03) +0.012 – 0.007 (0.30 – 0.18) 2.875 (73.03) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76)
3 by 21⁄2, 2 3.500 (88.90) +0.013 – 0.008 (0.33 – 0.20) 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
31⁄2 by 21⁄2, 2 4.000 (101.60) +0.013 – 0.008 (0.33 – 0.20) 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
4 by 31⁄2, 3, 21⁄2, 2 4.500 (114.30) +0.015 – 0.009 (0.38 – 0.23) 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76)
5 by 4 5.563 (141.30) +0.017 – 0.010 (0.43 – 0.25) 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52)
6 by 5 6.625 (168.28) +0.018 – 0.011 (0.46 – 0.28) 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.070 (1.78)
8 by 6 8.625 (219.08) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29)
10 by 6 10.750 (273.05) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
10 by 8 10.750 (273.05) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
12 by 6 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 8 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 10 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only, see Symbols D2749.
TABLE 4 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C)

for PVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
Min Burst Strength,A
Nominal
Classes 12454, 13354-C, and 11443 Class 14333
Size, in.
psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
⁄
18 2580 (17.79) 2020 (13.93)
1⁄ 4 2490 (17.17) 1950 (13.44)
3⁄ 8 1990 (13.72) 1560 (10.76)
⁄
12 1910 (13.17) 1490 (10.27)
⁄
34 1540 (10.62) 1210 (8.34)
1 1440 (9.93) 1130 (7.79)
1 1⁄ 4 1180 (8.14) 920 (6.34)

1 1⁄ 2 1060 (7.31) 830 (5.72)
2 890 (6.14) 690 (4.76)
2 1⁄ 2 970 (6.69) 760 (5.24)

3 840 (5.79) 660 (4.55)
3 1⁄ 2 770 (5.31) 600 (4.14)
4 710 (4.90) 560 (3.86)

5 620 (4.27) 490 (3.38)
6 560 (3.86) 440 (3.03)
8 500 (3.45) 390 (2.69)
10 450 3.10 ... ...
12 420 2.90 ... ...
A
This table was calculated for Schedule 40 pipe using the formula and the stress levels for materials as follows:
psi MPa
Classes 11443, 13354-C, and 12454 6400 44.1
Class 1433 5000 34.5
54
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2466
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to
S1. Products intended for contact with potable water shall Standard No. 14 by an acceptable certifying organization when
be evaluated, tested and certified for conformance with ANSI/ required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
NSF Standard No. 61 or the health effects portion of NSF
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
55
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2467

PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 80
SD-2467
(Identical with ASTM D2467-13a except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking re-
quirements in paras. 10.2.4 and 10.3, renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has
been made mandatory.)
57
SD-2467 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80

1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) 2.1 ASTM Standards:
Schedule 80 pipe fittings. Included are requirements for D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
materials, workmanship, dimensions, and burst pressure. D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
NOTE 1—CPVC plastic pipe fittings, which were formerly included in D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
this standard, are now covered in Specification F439. tics
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to (CPVC) Compounds
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- D1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases, some Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for moplastic Pipe and Fittings
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
contain large amounts of stored energy, which present serious safety F439 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
hazards should a system fail for any reason. (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, plastic Pipe and Fittings
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These 2.2 Federal Standard:
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
not be considered as requirements of this specification. 2.3 National Sanitation Foundation Standards:
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Materials
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components—
and are not considered standard. Health Effects
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification. This 3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminol-
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, ogy F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminol-
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is PVC.
tions prior to use.
58
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2467
4. Classification 6.3 Burst Pressure:

4.1 General—This specification covers Schedule 80 PVC 6.3.1 The minimum burst strength of the fittings shall be
pipe fittings, socket-type, made from four PVC plastic com- not less than that calculated for the size and wall thickness of
pounds and intended for use with Iron Pipe Size (IPS) the pipe with which it is to be used, when calculated from the
outside-diameter plastic pipe. (See Specification D1785.) following equation and using a stress of 6400 psi for 8-in. and
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally smaller fittings, and a stress of 5100 psi for fittings larger than
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, unions, bushings, 8-in. when the cell class is 12454, 13354 and 11443. When the
caps, nipples, and the like, shall be molded or machined from cell class is 14333 a stress of 5000 psi is used in the equation
extruded stock. for fittings 8-in. and smaller:
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by back welding or butt fusion are S 5 P ~ D O 2 t ! /2t (2)
not included in this specification.
S 5 hoop stress, psi ~ MPa!
5. Materials and Manufacture P 5 internal pressure, psi ~ MPa! ,
Do 5 average outside diameter, in. ~ mm! , and
5.1 This specification covers PVC pipe fittings made from
t 5 minimum wall thickness, in. ~ mm!
five PVC plastics as classified in Specification D1784. These
are PVC 12454, 11443, and 14333. Fittings tested in accordance with 8.5 shall withstand the
5.2 Compound—The PVC plastic compound shall meet the minimum burst pressure shown in Table 6.
requirements of PVC 12454, 11443, or 14333, as described in 6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
Specification D1784. not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
used only as an indication of quality.
5.3 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only
their own clean rework fitting material and the fittings pro- 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
duced shall meet all the requirements of this specification.
7.1 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free
6. Requirements of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances: color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
6.1.1 Fitting sockets inside diameters (waterways), mini-
mum wall thicknesses, and dimensions shall be as shown in 8. Test Methods
Tables 1-5 when measured in accordance with Test Method
8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6
D2122.
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less
6.1.2 When multistep reducer bushings are cored out, the
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
inner socket shall be reinforced from the outer wall by a
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required.
minimum of three ribs extending from the top of the inner
socket to the deepest extremity of the coring. The transition 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora-
from D to DJ (Table 4) shall be straight, tapered as shown, or tory Atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
radiused. A positive taper in the same direction of the taper in relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
the socket on the outside diameter of the bushing is optional ods or in this specification.
(see XA/XB in Table 3). Any point measured along the outside 8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed
diameter of the bushing (between points XA and XB) shall not upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at
fall below minimum pipe OD. random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
6.1.3 The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be 125 % the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size of
NOTE 3—For individual orders or specifications where supplemental
Schedule 80 pipe for which they are designed to be used,
tests are required, only those tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed
except that for the socket, the wall thickness shall be at least upon between purchaser and seller need be conducted.
equal to the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size
8.4 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
of Schedule 80 pipe.
accordance with Specification F1498.
6.1.4 The minimum inside diameter of the fittings shall
be not less than the minimum specified inside diameter of the 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
corresponding size of Schedule 80 pipe. This is calculated as in accordance with Test Method D1599, Procedure B. The
follows: pressure shall be applied at a uniform rate such that the
minimum allowable burst pressure is attained in 60 to 70 s.
~ minimum OD! 2 2 3 ~ maximum wall! 5 minimum ID (1)
6.1.5 Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance. 9. Retest and Rejection
Tolerances on other dimensions are shown in Table 1 and Table 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
3. of this specification, the tests(s) shall be conducted again only
6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads, by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such
threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered,
accordance with 8.4. changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
59
SD-2467
TABLE 1 Tapered Sockets for PVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80, in. (mm)A
A B
Wall Thickness, min Entrance, min
Socket Entrance Diameter Socket Bottom Diameter CB DC
Nominal
Tolerance on Tolerance on Socket Inside
Pipe Size Max Out-of- Max Out-of- Length, min Diameter, min
Diameter Nominal Diameter Nominal E F EW EX EZ
Round Round
Diameter Diameter
⁄
18 0.417 (10.59) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.401 (10.18) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.500 (12.7) 0.171 (4.34) 0.095 (2.41) 0.118 (3.00) ⁄
1 64 (0.40) ⁄
1 64 (0.40) ⁄
1 64 (0.40)
⁄
14 0.552 (14.02) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.536 (13.61) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.625 0.258 (6.55) 0.119 (3.02) 0.149 (3.78) ⁄
1 64 (0.40) ⁄
1 64 (0.40) ⁄
1 64 (0.40)
(15.88)
⁄
38 0.687 (17.45) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.671 (17.04) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.750 0.379 (9.63) 0.126 (3.20) 0.160 (4.06) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79)
(19.05)
⁄
12 0.848 (21.54) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.836 (21.23) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.875 0.502 (12.75) 0.147 (3.73) 0.185 (4.70) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79)
(22.22)
ASME NM.3.1-2018
⁄
34 1.058 (26.87) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 1.046 (26.57) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 1.000 0.698 (17.73) 0.154 (3.91) 0.195 (4.95) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79)
(25.40)
1 1.325 (33.65) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 1.310 (33.27) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 1.125 0.911 (23.14) 0.179 (4.55) 0.225 (5.72) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59)
(28.58)
60
1⁄ 14 1.670 (42.42) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 1.655 (42.04) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 1.250 1.227 (31.17) 0.191 (4.85) 0.239 (6.07) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59)
(31.75)
1 1⁄ 2 1.912 (48.56) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.894 (48.11) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.375 1.446 (36.73) 0.200 (5.08) 0.250 (6.35) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59)
(34.93)
2 2.387 (60.63) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 2.369 (60.17) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.500 1.881 (47.78) 0.218 (5.54) 0.275 (6.99) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59) ⁄
1 16 (1.59)
(38.10)
2 1⁄ 2 2.889 (73.38) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 2.868 (72.85) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 1.750 2.250 (57.15) 0.276 (7.01) 0.345 (8.76) ⁄
3 32 (2.38) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄ (3.18)
18
(44.45)
3 3.516 (89.31) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 3.492 (88.70) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 1.875 2.820 (71.63) 0.300 (7.62) 0.375 (9.53) ⁄
3 32 (2.38) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄ (3.18)
18
(47.63)
3 1⁄ 2 4.016 (102.01) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 3.992 (101.4) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 2.125 3.280 (83.31) 0.318 (8.08) 0.400 (10.16) ⁄
3 32 (2.38) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄ (3.18)
18
(53.98)
4 4.518 (114.76) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76) 4.491 (114.1) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76) 2.250 3.737 (94.92) 0.337 (8.56) 0.420 (10.67) ⁄
3 32 (2.38) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄ (3.18)
18
(57.15)
5 5.583 (141.81) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 5.553 (141.0) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 2.625 4.703 0.375 (9.53) 0.470 (11.94) ⁄
3 32 (2.38) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄ (3.18)
18
(66.68) (119.46)
6 6.647 (168.83) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 6.614 (168.0) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 3.000 5.646 0.432 (10.97) 0.540 (13.72) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄
3 16 (4.76) ⁄
3 16 (4.76)
(76.20) (143.41)
8 8.655 (219.84) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29) 8.610 (218.7) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29) 4.000 7.490 0.500 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄
3 16 (4.76) ⁄
3 16 (4.76)
(101.60) (190.25)
10 10.780 ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54) 10.735 ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54) 5.000 9.407 0.593 (15.06) 0.741 (18.82) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄
3 16 (4.76) ⁄
3 16 (4.76)
(273.81) (272.67) (127.00) (238.94)
12 12.780 ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05) 12.735 ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05) 6.000 11.197 0.687 (17.45) 0.859 (21.82) ⁄ (3.18)
18 ⁄
3 16 (4.76) ⁄
3 16 (4.76)
(324.61) (323.47) (152.40) (284.40)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only (taken from Symbols D2749).
B
C
See 6.1.4.
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2467
TABLE 2 Dimensions of 90° Ells, Tees, Crosses, 45° Elbows and Couplings (Straight Sizes), in. (mm)A
Center to Thread Length of Center to Thread Thread End to

Nominal Nominal Wall
End, 90° Elbows, Thread, T, End, 45° Elbow,B Inside Diameter Outside Diameter Thread End of
Pipe K, min Thickness, F,
Tees, min of Fitting, D, min of Hub, M, min Coupling, L, min
Size min
Crosses,B H, min
! 0.688 (17.48) 0.38 (9.65) 0.625 (15.88) 0.215 (5.46) 0.118 0.645 (16.40) 0.813 (20.65)
14⁄ 0.812 (20.63) 0.50 (12.70) 0.688 (17.48) 0.302 (7.67) 0.149 0.840 (21.30) 1.063 (27.00)
3 ⁄8 0.938 (23.83) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.423 (10.74) 0.160 1.000 (25.40) 1.063 (27.00)
1 ⁄2 1.125 (28.58) 0.64 (16.26) 0.750 (19.05) 0.550 (13.97) 0.185 1.280 (32.50) 1.344 (34.14)
3 ⁄4 1.250 (31.75) 0.65 (16.51) 1.000 (25.40) 0.750 (19.05) 0.195 1.500 (38.10) 1.500 (38.10)
1 1.500 (38.10) 0.81 (20.57) 1.125 (28.58) 0.960 (24.38) 0.225 1.810 (45.97) 1.688 (42.88)
1 1⁄4 1.750 (44.45) 0.85 (21.59) 1.313 (33.35) 1.280 (32.51) 0.261 2.200 (55.88) 1.750 (44.45)
1 1⁄2 1.938 (49.23) 0.85 (21.54) 1.438 (36.53) 1.500 (38.10) 0.270 2.500 (63.50) 2.000 (50.80)
2 2.250 (57.15) 0.90 (22.86) 1.625 (41.28) 1.940 (49.28) 0.297 3.000 (76.20) 2.063 (52.40)
2 1⁄2 2.688 (68.28) 1.21 (30.73) 1.938 (49.23) 2.320 (58.93) 0.345 3.580 (90.42) 2.625 (66.68)
3 3.063 (77.80) 1.30 (33.02) 2.125 (53.48) 2.900 (73.66) 0.405 4.300 (104.22) 2.750 (69.85)
4 3.625 (92.08) 1.38 (35.05) 2.625 (66.68) 3.830 (97.28) 0.450 5.430 (137.92) 3.000 (76.20)
6 5.125 (130.18) 1.50 (38.10) 3.250 (82.55) 5.761 (146.33) 0.540 7.625 (193.68) 3.250 (82.55)
A
B
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre- 10.4 Marking or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as
specification. printing.
10. Product Marking 10.5 Where recessed marking is used, care shall be taken to
10.1 Quality of Marking—The markings shall be applied to see that in no case does marking cause cracks or reduce the
the fittings in such a manner that they remain legible under wall thickness below the minimum specified.
normal handling and installation practices.
10.2 Content of Marking—Fittings shall be marked with the 11. Quality Assurance
following: 11.1 Quality Assurance— The manufacturer affirms that the
10.2.1 Material designation PVC I for PVC 12454, PVC 13 product was inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with
11443, and PVC II for PVC–14333, this specification and has been found to meet the requirements
10.2.2 The seal or mark of the laboratory making the of this specification.
evaluation for potable water contact,
10.2.3 Size, and
12. Certification
10.2.4 ASME SD-2467 or both ASME SD-2467 and ASTM
D2467. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
marking, omit identification marking in the following se- 13. Keywords
quence: size, material designation, manufacturer’s name 13.1 blunt start thread; fittings; IPS; PVC; Schedule 80;
or trademark. sockets; thread
61
SD-2467 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Minimum Dimensions from Center to End of Sockets

(Laying Length) for Couplings, Tees, 90° and 45° Elbows, PVC
Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80, in. (mm)A
Nominal G, min J, min N, min

Pipe Size
18⁄ 14 ⁄ (6.35) ! (3.18) ⁄ (1.59)
1 16
14⁄ ⁄ (7.94)
5 16 ⁄ (3.97)
5 32 ⁄ (1.59)
1 16
3⁄8 " (9.53) 3⁄16 (4.76) ⁄ (2.38)

3 32
1⁄2 1⁄2 (12.70) 1⁄4 (6.35) 3⁄32 (2.38)
3⁄4 9⁄16 (14.29) 5⁄16 (7.94) 3⁄32 (2.38)
1 11⁄16 (17.46) 5⁄16 (7.94) 3⁄32 (2.38)
11⁄4 $ (22.22) " (9.53) 3⁄32 (2.38)
11⁄2 1 (25.40) 7⁄16 (11.11) 3⁄32 (2.38)
2 11⁄4 (31.75) # (15.88) 3⁄32 (2.38)
21⁄2 11⁄2 (38.10) 11⁄16 (17.46) 3⁄16 (4.76)
3 113⁄16 (46.04) 3⁄4 (19.05) 3⁄16 (4.76)
31⁄2 2! (53.98) 1 (25.40) 3⁄16 (4.76)
4 25⁄16 (58.74) 1 (25.40) 3⁄16 (4.76)
5 3 (76.20) 1" (34.93) 3⁄16 (4.76)
6 31⁄2 (88.90) 13⁄4 (44.45) 1⁄4 (6.35)
8 41⁄2 (114.30) 2 (50.80) 1⁄4 (6.35)
10 511⁄16 (144.46) 21⁄4 (57.15) 1⁄4 (6.35)
12 6$ (174.63) 21⁄2 (63.50) " (9.53)

A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only (taken from Symbols
D2749).
62
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2467
TABLE 4 Symbols for Dimensions of Reducer Bushings, PVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80,A in. (mm)
Nominal Size Outside Diameter Tolerance on Outside Diameter Tolerance on Maximum Out-of-Roundness
XA Outside Diameter XB Outside Diameter (max., minus min.)
1⁄4 by 1⁄8 0.540 (13.72) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
⁄ by 1⁄4, 1⁄8
38 0.675 (17.41) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.675 (17.41) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 by 3⁄8, 1⁄4 0.840 (21.34) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 1⁄4 1.050 (26.67) +0.007 – 0.004 (0.18 – 0.10) 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51)
1 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4 1.315 (33.40) +0.008 – 0.005 (0.20 – 0.13) 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1 1.660 (42.16) +0.008 – 0.005 (0.20 – 0.13) 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4 1.900 (48.26) +0.010 – 0.006 (0.25 – 0.15) 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2 2.375 (60.33) +0.010 – 0.006 (0.25 – 0.15) 2.375 (60.33) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
21⁄2 by 2 2.875 (73.03) +0.012 – 0.007 (0.30 – 0.18) 2.875 (73.03) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76)
3 by 21⁄2, 2 3.500 (88.90) +0.013 – 0.008 (0.33 – 0.20) 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
31⁄2 by 21⁄2, 2 4.000 (101.60) +0.013 – 0.008 (0.33 – 0.20) 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
4 by 31⁄2, 3, 21⁄2, 2 4.500 (114.30) +0.015 – 0.009 (0.38 – 0.23) 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76)
5 by 4 5.563 (141.30) +0.017 – 0.010 (0.43 – 0.25) 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52)
6 by 5 6.625 (168.28) +0.018 – 0.011 (0.46 – 0.28) 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.070 (1.78)
8 by 6 8.625 (219.08) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29)
10 by 6 10.750 (273.05) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
10 by 8 10.750 (273.05) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
12 by 6 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 8 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 10 12.750 (323.85) +0.025 – 0.015 (0.64 – 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only (taken from Symbols D2749).
TABLE 5 Dimensions of Plugs and Caps, in.
Nominal Length of Length of Width of Nominal Wall Height of Head, Cap Height, Outside Diameter
Pipe Size Male Thread, Female Thread, Flats,A Thickness, R, min W, min of Hub,
S, min T, min Q, min F, min M, min
⁄
18 0.31 (7.87) 0.38 (9.65) 0.469 (11.19) 0.108 (2.74) 0.188 (4.76) 0.625 (15.88) 0.645 (16.38)
⁄
14 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) 0.135 (3.43) 0.188 (4.76) 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34)
3⁄ 8 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (14.05) 0.144 (3.66) 0.188 (4.76) 0.688 (17.48) 1.000 (25.40)
1⁄ 2 0.53 (13.45) 0.64 (16.26) 0.938 (23.83) 0.198 (5.03) 0.188 (4.76) 0.875 (22.23) 1.280 (32.51)
3⁄ 4 0.55 (13.97) 0.65 (16.51) 1.125 (28.58) 0.207 (5.26) 0.219 (5.56) 1.000 (25.40) 1.450 (36.80)
1 0.68 (17.27) 0.81 (20.57) 1.375 (34.93) 0.225 (5.72) 0.219 (5.56) 1.188 (30.18) 1.810 (45.97)
1 1⁄ 4 0.71 (18.03) 0.85 (21.59) 1.750 (44.45) 0.261 (6.63) 0.281 (7.14) 1.250 (31.75) 2.200 (55.88)
1 1⁄ 2 0.72 (18.29) 0.85 (21.59) 1.875 (47.63) 0.270 (6.86) 0.313 (7.95) 1.250 (31.75) 2.450 (62.23)
2 0.76 (19.30) 0.90 (22.86) 1.875 (47.63) 0.297 (7.54) 0.313 (7.45) 1.375 (34.93) 3.000 (76.20)
2 1⁄ 2 1.14 (28.96) 1.21 (30.73) 1.875 (47.63) 0.369 (9.37) 0.375 (9.53) 1.625 (41.28) 3.560 (90.42)
3 1.20 (30.48) 1.30 (33.02) 2.000 (50.80) 0.405 (10.29) 0.375 (9.53) 1.750 (44.45) 4.250 (107.90)
4 1.30 (33.02) 1.38 (35.05) 2.000 (50.80) 0.450 (11.43) 0.375 (9.53) 2.000 (50.80) 5.350 (134.62)
6 1.44 (36.58) 1.50 (38.10) 2.000 (50.80) 0.504 (12.80) 0.500 (12.70) 2.125 (53.98) 7.625 (193.00)
A
At the manufacturer’s option the head of the plug may be hexagonal, octagonal, square, or round. The sketches and designs of fittings shown are illustrative only.
63
SD-2467 ASME NM.3.1-2018

for PVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Minimum Burst Strength
Nominal Classes 12454, 13354, and Class 14333
Size, in. 11443
psi MPa psi MPa
⁄
18 3920 27.03 3060 21.10
1⁄ 4 3620 24.96 2830 19.51
3⁄ 8 2940 20.27 2300 15.86
1⁄ 2 2720 18.75 2120 14.62
3⁄ 4 2200 15.17 1720 11.36
1 2020 13.93 1580 10.89
1 1 ⁄4 1660 11.44 1300 8.96
1 1 ⁄2 1510 10.41 1180 8.14
2 1290 8.89 1010 6.96
2 1 ⁄2 1360 9.38 1060 7.31
3 1200 8.27 940 6.48
3 1 ⁄2 1110 7.65 860 5.93
4 1040 7.17 810 5.58
5 930 6.41 720 4.96
6 890 6.14 700 4.83
8 790 5.45 620 4.27
10 600 4.14 ... ...
12 580 4.00 ... ...
GOVERNMENT / MILITARY PROCUREMENT
These requirements apply only to Federal / Military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.
S1. Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the
other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection able to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall
and test requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser comply with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National
disapproves. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any Motor Freight Classification rules.
of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where S2.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
conforms to prescribed requirements. 129 for military agencies.
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2.1— The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
inspection. ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
uses or endorses the products described in this document.
S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure-
ment:
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to convey or to be in contact with
potable water.
64
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2467
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
65
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) GAS

PRESSURE PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
SD-2513
(Identical with ASTM D2513-14e1 except for additional requirements in section 9 and Annex A3, revision to para. 1.4,
revised marking requirements in paras. 7.1, 7.2 and 7.5, changes from "ANSI" to "ASME" in paras. 2.2, 3.2, and 5.15 and
paras. X1.3.4, X1.5.1, and X1.6.1, and quality assurance requirement in para. 8.1 has been made mandatory.)
67
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
1. Scope standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
1.1 This specification covers requirements and test methods if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
for material dimensions and tolerances, hydrostatic burst of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
strength, chemical resistance, and rapid crack resistance of practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
polyethylene pipe, tubing, and fittings for use in fuel gas mains tions prior to use.
and services for direct burial and reliner applications. The pipe 2. Referenced Documents
and fittings covered by this specification are intended for use in
the distribution of natural gas. Requirements for the qualifying 2.1 ASTM Standards:
of polyethylene systems for use with liquefied petroleum gas 2.1.1 Terminology:
are also covered. D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
1.1.1 This specification does not cover threaded pipe. De- tics
sign considerations are discussed in Appendix X1. In-plant F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
quality control programs are specified in Annex A1 and Annex 2.1.2 Test Methods for:
A2. D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
1.1.2 See Specification F2619/F2619M for polyethylene D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
piping for pressure or non-pressure oil and gas producing by Extrusion Plastometer
applications to convey fluids such as oil, dry or wet gas, D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
multiphase fluids, and non-potable oilfield water. Under Constant Internal Pressure
1.2 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall moplastic Pipe and Fittings
not be considered as requirements of the specification. D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
and are not considered standard. for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
1.4 The following is an index of the annexes and appendix F1473 Test Method for Notch Tensile Test to Measure the
in this specification: Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
and Resins
Annex Subject
Annex A1 In-Plant Quality Control for all materials up to 12 in. 2.1.3 Practices for:
Annex A2 In-Plant Quality Control for PE materials 14 in. and larger D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Annex A3 Certification
Chemical Reagents
Appendixes Subject D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
Appendix Design Consideration
X1 D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)
test method portion, Section 6, of this specification. This
68
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
D2774 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplas- ISO 12162 Thermoplastic Materials for Pipes and Fittings
tic Pressure Piping for Pressure Applications—Classification and
D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In- Designation—Overall Service (Design) Coefficient
tended for Outdoor Applications ISO 13477 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of
F2620 Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe fluids – Determination of resistance to rapid crack propa-
and Fittings gation (RCP) – Small scale steady-state test (S4 test)
G155 Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for ISO 13478 Thermoplastics pipe for the conveyance of fluids
Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials – Determination of resistance to rapid crack propagation
2.1.4 Specification for: (RCP) – Full-scale test (FST)
D2683 Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings 2.6 Plastic Pipe Institute
for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and PPI TR-3 HDB/HDS /PDB/ SDB/MRS Policies
Tubing PPI TR-4 HDB/HDS/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials
D3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) PPI TR-33 Generic Butt Fusion Joining for Polyethylene
Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Gas Pipe
Tubing PPI TR-41 Generic Saddle Fusion Joining Procedure for
D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit- Polyethylene Gas Piping
tings Materials PPI TN-30/2006 Requirements for the Use of Rework Ma-
F1055 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene terials in Polyethylene Gas Pipe
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene PPI TR-9 Recommended Design Factors and Design Coef-
and Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing ficients for Thermoplastic Pressure pipe
F1563 Specification for Tools to Squeeze-off Polyethylene 2.7 Other Documents:
(PE) Gas Pipe or Tubing National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 58 Storage and
F2138 Specification for Excess Flow Valves for Natural Gas Handling Liquefied Petroleum Gases
Service
F2619/F2619M Specification for High-Density Polyethylene 3. Terminology
(PE) Line Pipe 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
F2897 Specification for Tracking and Traceability Encoding nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
System of Natural Gas Distribution Components (Pipe, nology D1600, unless otherwise specified.
Tubing, Fittings, Valves, and Appurtenances) 3.2 The gas industry terminology used in this specification
2.2 ASME Standards: is in accordance with ASME B31.8 or OPS 49 CFR Part 192,
B 16.40 Manually Operated Thermoplastic Gas Shutoffs unless otherwise indicated.
and Valves in Gas Distribution Systems
3.3 The term pipe used herein refers to both pipe and tubing
B 31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
unless specifically stated otherwise.
2.3 Federal Specifications:
3.4 re-rounding equipment—equipment used to reform the
pipe and permanently reduce ovality to 5 % or less.
OPS 49 CFR Part 192 Title 49, Code of Federal Regula-
tions 3.5 rounding equipment—equipment, devices, clamps, and
2.4 Military Standards: so forth, used to temporarily hold the pipe round while
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage out-of-roundness measurements are made, or a joining proce-
MIL-STD-1235 (ORD) Single- and Multi-Level Continuous dure (heat fusion, electrofusion, or mechanical) is performed.
Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attri- 3.6 pipe material designated code—the pipe material des-
butes ignation code shall consist of the abbreviation for the type of
2.5 ISO Standards: plastic (PE) followed by Arabic numerals which describe the
ISO 4437 Buried polyethylene (PE) pipes for the supply of short term properties in accordance with applicable Specifica-
gaseous fuels-Metric series-Specifications tion D3350, the hydrostatic design stress for water at 73.4°F
ISO 9080 Thermoplastics Pipes for the Transport of (23°C) in units of 100 psi with any decimal figures dropped.
Fluids—Methods of Extrapolation of Hydrostatic Stress Where the hydrostatic design stress code contains less than two
Rupture Data to Determine Long-Term Hydrostatic figures, a zero is used before the number. Thus, a complete
Strength of Thermoplastic Pipe Materials material designation code shall consist of PE and four figures
for PE materials. For example, PE2708 is a grade PE27
polyethylene with an 800psi design stress for water at 73.4°F
(23°C). The hydrostatic design stresses for gas are not used in
this designation code.
69
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
3.7 dimension ratio (DR)—the ratio of pipe diameter to wall affect the pipelines that are in service. They can still be used for gas
thickness. It is calculated by dividing the specified outside distribution. The main reason for removing these materials from this
standard is to reflect the current state of the art in PE gas distribution
diameter of the pipe, in inches (mm), by the minimum specified piping.
wall thickness, in inches (mm). The standard dimension ratio
(SDR) is a common numbering system which is derived from 4.5 Resistance to Slow Crack Growth (SCG)—Use Test
the ANSI preferred number series R 10. Method F1473 on compression molded plaques at a stress of
2.4 MPa based on the unnotched area and a test temperature of
3.8 toe-in—a small reduction of the outside diameter at the 80°C. Notch depth shall be in accordance with Table 1 in Test
cut end of a length of thermoplastic pipe. Method F1473. Materials shall meet the Slow Crack Growth
4. Materials Resistance requirements in Table 1.
4.1 General—The PE used to make pipe and fittings shall be 4.6 Additive Classes—Polyethylene material compounds
PE or reworked PE (see 4.2 and 4.4) and shall have a Plastics shall meet Specification D3350 code C or E. Code C material
Pipe Institute (PPI) long-term hydrostatic design stress and compounds shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon black. Code E
hydrostatic design basis rating. material compounds shall be yellow with UV stabilizer.
4.2 Rework Material—Clean rework material of the same 4.7 Thermal Stability—The PE material shall contain suffi-
commercial designation, generated from the manufacturer’s cient antioxidant so that the minimum induction temperature
own pipe and fitting production shall not be used unless the shall be 428°F (220°C) when tested in accordance with
pipe and fitting produced meet all the requirements of this Specification D3350. The sample shall be representative of the
specification. The use of these rework materials shall be cross section of the pipe or fittings.
governed by the requirements of 4.3 and PPI TN-30/2006. In 4.8 Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) Substantiation —The
pipe, rework materials shall be limited to a maximum of 30 % HDB for PE materials at 73°F (23°C) shall be substantiated to
by weight. be linear to 50 years as per Test Method D2837, Section 5.7.
NOTE 1—The requirements for rework materials herein are intended to NOTE 3—The long-term hydrostatic strength at 50 years in accordance
incorporate prudent specifications to ensure that the potential for contami- with Test Method D2837 is not to be used for any pressure rating
nation in gas piping products, that meet this specification, is reduced to the calculations. The MAOP is still calculated using the HDB obtained from
extent possible. It is imperative to emphasize that rework materials have Test Method D2837 long-term hydrostatic strength at 100 000 h. PE
not been identified as the cause of any field failures. The requirements for compounds with a thermoplastic pipe material designation code of PE
rework materials were developed by the consensus of interested parties 2708 and PE 4710 as well as those compounds denoted in PPI TR-4 with
including product manufacturers, gas utility companies, and regulatory an asterisk (*) meet the substantiation requirement of Test Method D2837.
agencies.
4.9 Resistance to Rapid Crack Propagation (RCP) for
4.3 Documentation—A documentation system to allow for Material —The PE material classification (formulation) used in
traceability of raw materials including percentage and material the manufacture of pipe and fittings under this specification
classification (or designation, if applicable) of rework materials shall be tested for resistance to failure by RCP in accordance
used in the manufacture of the pipe product meeting the with the procedures set forth in ISO 13477 (S4 Test) or ISO
requirements of this specification shall exist and be supplied to 13478 (Full Scale Test (FST)). The data obtained shall be made
the purchaser, if requested. available upon request without limitations on disclosure, and
4.4 Classification—Polyethylene materials suitable for use shall not subsequently be subject to disclosure limitations when
in the manufacture of pipe and fittings under this specification used by others. The values obtained are applicable to all pipes
shall meet Table 1 requirements for the applicable pipe with the wall thickness of the pipe tested and all thinner wall
material designation code. pipes. In case of conflict, the RCP results of ISO 13478 shall
apply.
NOTE 2—References and material descriptions for PE 2306, PE 2406,
PE 2606, PE 3306, PE 3406, PE 3408, PE 3608, PE 3710, and PE 4608 NOTE 4—While S4 or FST testing of any combination of outside
have been removed from D2513. Elimination of these materials does not diameter and SDR is permitted in fulfillment of the requirement for testing

Pipe Material Designation Code
PE 2708 PE 4710
Density Cell Classification per Specification 2 4
D3350
SCG Resistance Cell Classification per 7 7
Specification D3350
HDS for water at 73°F (23°C) per Test 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
Method D2837 and PPI TR-3, psi (MPa)
Color and UV Stabilizer Code per Speciif- C or E C or E
cation D3350
Melt flow rate per Test Method D1238, g/10 #0.40 Cond. 190/2.16 or #0.15 Cond. 190/2.16 or
min #20 Cond. 190/21.6 #20 Cond. 190/21.6
HDB at 73ºF (23ºC) per Test Method 1250 (8.6) 1600 (11.0)
D2837 and PPI TR-3, psi (MPa)
Minimum HDB at 140ºF (60ºC) per Test 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5)
Method D2837 and PPI TR-3, psi (MPa)
70
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
PE material resistance to RCP, S4 testing of SDR 9 or SDR 11 PE pipe 5. Requirements

specimens is currently the most common industry practice.
NOTE 5—Caution should be exercised in applying the RCP test results
5.1 General—Pipe shall be supplied in either coils or
obtained on one SDR or DR of pipe across a series of pipe SDR’s or DR’s straight lengths. Any pipe supplied in coils must meet the same
produced from the same PE material classification (formulation). Indus- requirements before and after coiling.
trial research to clarify the relationships between FST and S4 testing is
5.2 Workmanship—The pipe and fittings shall be homoge-
ongoing at this time, particularly as it relates to the applicability of RCP
test results obtained on one SDR or DR of pipe to other SDR’s or DR’s of neous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign
pipe produced from the same PE material classification (formulation). inclusion, blisters, and dents, or other injurious defects. The
Consult the resin manufacturer regarding the applicability of RCP test pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practi-
results across diameters or SDR’s, or both. Additional information cable in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
regarding the use of RCP data is presented in ISO 4437.
5.3 Pipe and Tubing Dimensions and Tolerances:
4.10 UV Resistance—PE materials shall be Code C or E as 5.3.1 Dimension—The dimensions shall be specified by
defined in Specification D3350. Code C material shall contain wall thickness and outside diameter.
2 to 3 percent well dispersed carbon black, and due to the 5.3.1.1 Diameters—The outside diameter shall meet the
absorptive properties of the carbon black, is considered to be requirements given in Table 2 or Table 3 when measured in
stabilized against deterioration from unprotected exposure to accordance with 6.5.
UV for not less than 10 years. Code E material shall be 5.3.1.2 Toe-In—When measured in accordance with 6.5.1.1,
stabilized and protected against deterioration from unprotected the outside diameter at the cut end of the pipe shall not be more
UV exposure for not less than 3 years. than 1.5 % smaller than the undistorted outside diameter.
4.10.1 PE compounds designated as Code C containing 2 to Measurement of the undistorted outside diameter shall be made
3% carbon black shall be considered stabilized against dete- no closer than 1.5 pipe diameters or 11.8 in. (300 mm),
rioration for not less than 10 years without the need for whichever distance is less, from the cut end of the pipe.
additional testing. Undistorted outside diameter shall meet the requirements of
4.10.2 PE compounds designated as Code E shall be con- Table 2 or Table 3.
sidered stabilized against deterioration from unprotected expo- 5.3.1.3 Wall Thickness—The wall thickness shall be as
sure to UV for not less than 3 years when meeting the specified in Table 3 or Table 4 when measured in accordance
with 6.5.1.2. The minimum wall thickness at any point of
following criteria following exposure to actual outdoor (natural
measurement shall be not less than the minimum wall thickness
sunlight) weathering for up to 3 years in accordance with
specified in Table 3 or Table 4.
Practice D1435 or accelerated weathering in accordance with
5.3.1.4 Wall Thickness Eccentricity Range—The wall thick-
Practice D2565 and Practice G155 for the equivalent of at least
ness eccentricity range shall be within 12 % when measured in
3 years natural sunlight: (a) all tensile bar specimens tested in
accordance with 6.5.1.3.
accordance with Test Method D638 shall have an elongation at
5.3.1.5 Ovality—The ovality (cross section) of 3 in. IPS
break value greater than 400% indicating the equivalency of
(88.9 mm) and smaller pipe shall not exceed 5 % when
the PE material before and after UV exposure against the measured in accordance with 6.5.3. Measurements of coiled
elongation at break requirement in Specification D3350; and pipe shall be made on a sample cut from the coil, and in case
(b) all tensile bar specimens tested in accordance with Test of disagreement, conditioned per 6.3.
Method D638 shall retain a minimum of 50% of their original
elongation at break values. Test data shall be made available NOTE 9—Other factors, that is, installation compaction, static soil
loading, and dynamic vehicular loads may increase the ovality; therefore,
from the manufacturer upon request. 5 % was chosen as the limit for the amount contributed by manufacturing,
packing, in-plant storage, and shipping. For further information, see (1).
NOTE 6—Studies have shown HDPE exposed to Xenon Arc via Practice
G155-A Cycle 1 give approximately 4.4 times the acceleration to outdoor (1) Before or during installation, coiled pipe larger than 3
Florida exposure. Therefore approximately 2000 hours Xenon Arc testing in. IPS (88.9 mm) shall be processed by the installer through
would equal about 1-year outdoor exposure in Florida or 2-years in re-rounding equipment that corrects ovality to 5 % or less.
southern Canada. NOTE 10—Ovality is a packaging condition that occurs when roundable
NOTE 7—The determination for UV resistance is often based on pipe is wound into a coil—the pipe flattens out as it is coiled. Ovality is
measuring the ductility properties of the pipe material exposed to artificial corrected when joining equipment is applied to roundable pipe, or by field
weathering. These requirements and test methods are based on expected processing roundable pipe through re-rounding and straightening equip-
UV exposure levels in North America. Alternate requirements and ment during installation.
alternate determination methods may be appropriate in other regions of the 5.3.1.6 Length—The pipe shall be supplied in straight
world. As an example ISO 4437 standard requires a minimum resistance
to an accumulation of 3.6GJ for non-black polyethylene materials.
lengths or coils as agreed upon between the manufacturer and
the purchaser. The length shall not be less than the minimum
4.11 Qualification for LPG Service—Materials that qualify length agreed upon when corrected to 73°F (23°C).
for natural gas service and that carry a recommended HDB for 5.3.1.7 When sizes other than those listed in Table 2, Table
140°F in accordance with 5.6, also qualify for LPG service 3 or Table 4 are used, tolerances shall be: for outside diameter,
without the need for further testing.
NOTE 8—The terms LPG and LPG gas are synonymous and only apply
to a particular kind of fuel gas. For compositions and properties of LPG
gases see NFPA 58, Appendix B.
71
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for Plastic Pipe, in. (mm)
Nominal Maximum Out-of-Roundness

Pipe Outside Diameter Tolerance SDR 17
Size SDR 32.5 SDR 26 SDR 21 SDR 13.5
SDR 11
⁄
12 0.840 (21.3) ±0.004 (±0.102) ... ... 0.03(0.762) 0.016(0.406)
⁄
34 1.050 (26.7) ±0.004 (±0.102) ... ... 0.03(0.762) 0.02(0.508)
1 1.315 (33.4) ±0.005 (±0.127) ... ... 0.03(0.762) 0.02(0.508)
1 ⁄4
1 1.660 (42.1) ±0.005 (±0.127) ... ... 0.03(0.762) 0.024(0.61)
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 (48.3) ±0.006 (±0.152) ... ... 0.06(1.524) 0.024(0.61)
2 2.375 (60.3) ±0.006 (±0.152) ... ... 0.06(1.524) 0.024(0.61)
2 1⁄ 2 2.875 (73.0) ±0.007 (±0.179) ... ... 0.06(1.524) 0.03(0.762)
3 3.500 (88.9) ±0.008 (±0.203) ... ... 0.06(1.524) 0.03(0.762)
3 1⁄ 2 4.000 (101.6) ±0.008 (±0.203) ... ... 0.1(2.5) 0.03(0.762)
4 4.500 (114.3) ±0.009 (±0.229) ... ... 0.1(2.5) 0.03(0.762)
5 5.563 (141.3) ±0.010 (±0.254) ... ... 0.1(2.5) 0.06(1.524)
6 6.625 (168.3) ±0.011 (±0.279) 0.12(3) 0.11(2.74) 0.1(2.5) 0.07(1.778)
8 8.625 (219.1) ±0.013 (±0.330) 0.24(6.1) 0.16(4.06) 0.12(3) 0.08(2.04)
10 10.750 (273.0) ±0.015 (±0.381) 0.24(6.1) 0.2(5.08) 0.14(3.58) 0.1(2.5)
12 12.750 (323.8) ±0.017 (±0.432) 0.28(7.12) 0.2(5.08) 0.14(3.58) 0.1(2.5)
14 14.000 (355.6) ±0.063 (±1.60) 0.308(7.82) 0.224(5.68) 0.154(3.91) 0.112(2.84)
16 16.000 (406.4) ±0.072 (±1.83) 0.352(8.94) 0.256(6.50) 0.176(4.47) 0.128(3.25)
18 18.000 (457.2) ±0.081 (±2.06) 0.396(10.05) 0.288(7.31) 0.198(5.02) 0.144(3.65)
20 20.000 (508.0) ±0.090 (±2.29) 0.44(11.1) 0.32(8.12) 0.22(5.58) 0.16(4.06)
22 22.000 (558.8) ±0.099 (±2.51) 0.484(12.29) 0.352(8.94) 0.242(6.14) 0.176(4.47)
24 24.000 (609.6) ±0.108 (±2.74) 0.528(13.41) 0.384(9.75) 0.264(6.70) 0.192(4.87)
TABLE 3 PE Tubing-Diameters, Wall Thicknesses, and NOTE 11—The requirements in 5.3.1.1 and 5.3.1.3 are for laboratory
Tolerances, in. (mm) proof testing only and should not be interpreted as applicable to on-site
Nominal Minimum Wall testing for acceptance of installed systems larger than 12 in. See
Outside
Tubing Tolerance Wall Thickness appropriate installation standards or manufacturer’s recommendations for
Diameter
Size (CTS) Thickness Tolerance field test procedures.
⁄
14 0.375 (9.52) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58) +0.006 (+0.15)
⁄
38 0.500 (12.7) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58) +0.006 (+0.15) 5.5 Chemical Resistance—The pipe and fittings shall not
1⁄ 2 0.625 (15.9) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58) +0.006 (+0.15) increase in weight more than 0.5 % (1.0 % for toluene in
1⁄ 2 0.625 (15.9) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.27) +0.009 (+0.23)
1⁄ 2 0.625 (15.9) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.104 (2.64) +0.010 (+0.25)
methanol). Where the test specimen is a pipe ring, the material
3⁄ 4 0.875 (22.2) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58) +0.006 (+0.15) shall not change more than 612 % in apparent tensile yield
3⁄ 4 0.875 (22.2) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.077 (1.95) +0.008 (+0.20)
3⁄ 4
strength when measured in accordance with 6.9. Where the test
0.875 (22.2) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.27) +0.009 (+0.23)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.062 (1.58) +0.007 (+0.18) specimen is a plaque, the material shall not change more than
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.090 (2.27) +0.011 (+0.28) 612 % in tensile strength at yield when measured in accor-
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.099 (2.51) +0.012 (+0.31)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.101 (2.56) +0.012 (+0.31)
dance with Test Method D638.
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.121 (3.07) +0.015 (+0.38)
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.9) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.062 (1.58) +0.007 (+0.18) NOTE 12—This pipe test is only an indication of what will happen as a
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.9) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.090 (2.27) +0.011 (+0.28) result of short term exposure to these chemicals. For longterm results,
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.9) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.121 (3.07) +0.015 (+0.38) additional testing is required.
1 3⁄ 4 1.875 (47.6) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.062 (1.58) +0.007 (+0.18)
5.6 Melt Index—Melt index is the flow rate of PE material
when measured in accordance with Test Method D1238,
use same tolerance of next smaller size; for wall thickness, use condition 190/2.16 (formerly Condition E). Materials that
same tolerance percentage as shown in the tables. record zero flow under condition 190/2.16 shall be measured in
5.4 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure/Apparent Tensile accordance with condition 190/21.6 (formerly condition F).
Strength (Quick Burst)—The pipe or system shall fail in a The melt index of pipe/fitting shall meet the designated
ductile manner when tested in accordance with Test Method category in Table 5. The sample shall be representative of the
D1599. For pipe sizes above 4-in. nominal diameter, the testing cross section of the pipe or fitting and diced to an appropriate
lab shall be allowed to replace the quick burst test (Test size by a method not producing heat.
Method D1599) by the apparent ring tensile strength test (Test
5.7 Sustained Pressure 73°F (23°C)—Fittings shall not fail
Method D2290). The minimum apparent tensile strength at
in less than 1000 h when tested in accordance with Test
yield when determined in accordance with 6.8 shall be 2520 psi
Method D1598. For PE 2708 materials, the stress shall be 1320
(17.4 MPa) for PE 2708 pipe or 2900 psi (20.0 MPa) for PE
4710 pipe. psi, for PE 4710 materials, the stress shall be 1600 psi.
72
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
TABLE 4 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for Plastic Pipe, in (mm)A,B

Nominal Pipe Size
DRC Minimum Tolerance
(IPS)
D
⁄
12 0.062 (1.58) +0.007 (+0.178)
11.0 0.076 (1.93) +0.009 (+0.229)
9.33 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
D
⁄
34 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
11.0 0.095 (2.41) +0.011 (+0.279)
Sch 40 0.113 (2.87) +0.014 (+0.356)
D
1 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
13.5 0.097 (2.46) +0.012 (+0.305)
11.0 0.120 (3.05) +0.014 (+0.356)
9.9 0.133 (3.38) +0.016 (+0.406)
9.33 0.140 (3.56) +0.017 (+0.432)
D
11⁄4 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
17.0 0.098 (2.49) +0.012 (+0.305)
13.5 0.123 (3.12) +0.015 (+0.381)
Sch 40 0.140 (3.56) +0.017 (+0.432)
11.0 0.151 (3.84) +0.018 (+0.457)
10.0 0.166 (4.22) +0.020 (+0.508)
9.33 0.178 (4.52) +0.021 (+0.533)
6.0 0.277 (7.04) +0.033 (+0.838)
D
11⁄2 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
17 0.112 (2.85) +0.013 (+0.330)
13.5 0.141 (3.58) +0.017 (+0.432)
Sch 40 0.145 (3.68) +0.017 (+0.432)
11 0.173 (4.39) +0.021 (+0.533)
2 21 0.113 (2.87) +0.014 (+0.356)

17 0.140 (3.56) +0.017 (+0.432)
Sch 40 0.154 (3.91) +0.018 (+0.457)
13.5 0.176 (4.47) +0.021 (+0.533)
11 0.216 (5.49) +0.026 (+0.660)
9.33 0.255 (6.48) +0.031 (+0.787)
21⁄2 21 0.137 (3.48) +0.016 (+0.406)

17 0.169 (4.29) +0.020 (+0.508)
13.5 0.213 (5.41) +0.026 (+0.660)
11 0.261 (6.63) +0.031 (+0.787)
3 21 0.167 (4.24) +0.020 (+0.508)

17 0.206 (5.23) +0.025 (+0.635)
Sch 40 0.216 (5.49) +0.026 (+0.660)
13.5 0.259 (6.58) +0.031 (+0.787)
11.5 0.304 (7.72) +0.036 (+0.914)
11 0.318 (8.08) +0.038 (+0.965)
9.33 0.375 (9.53) +0.045 (+1.143)
31⁄2 21 0.190 (4.83) +0.023 (+0.584)

17 0.236 (5.99) +0.028 (+0.711)
13.5 0.296 (7.52) +0.036 (+0.914)
11 0.363 (9.22) +0.044 (+1.118)
4 21 0.214 (5.44) +0.026 (+0.660)
19 0.237 (6.02) +0.028 (+0.711)
17 0.265 (6.73) +0.032 (+0.813)
13.5 0.333 (8.46) +0.040 (+1.016)
11.5 0.391 (9.93) +0.047 (+1.194)
11.0 0.409 (10.39) +0.049 (+1.246)
9.33 0.482 (12.24) +0.058 (+1.473)
5 21.6 0.258 (6.55) +0.031 (+0.787)

21 0.265 (6.73) +0.032 (+0.813)
17 0.327 (8.31) +0.039 (+0.991)
13.5 0.412 (10.46) +0.050 (+1.270)
11 0.506 (12.85) +0.061 (+1.549)
6 32.5 0.204 (5.18) +0.024 (+0.610)

26 0.255 (6.48) +0.031 (+0.787)
23.7 0.280 (7.11) +0.034 (+0.864)
21 0.315 (8.00) +0.038 (+0.965)
17 0.390 (9.91) +0.047 (+1.194)
13.5 0.491 (12.47) +0.059 (+1.499)
73
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Continued
Nominal Pipe Size C
DR Minimum Tolerance
(IPS)
11.5 0.576 (14.63) +0.069 (+1.753)

11.0 0.602 (15.29) +0.072 (+1.829)
8 32.5 0.265 (6.73) +0.032 (+0.813)

26 0.332 (8.43) +0.040 (+1.016)
21 0.411 (10.44) +0.049 (+1.245)
17 0.507 (12.90) +0.061 (+1.549)
13.5 0.639 (16.23) +0.077 (+1.956)
11.5 0.750 (19.05) +0.090 (+2.286)
11 0.784 (19.91) +0.094 (+2.388)
10 32.5 0.331 (8.41) +0.040 (+1.016)

26 0.413 (10.49) +0.050 (+1.270)
21 0.512 (13.00) +0.061 (+1.549)
17 0.632 (16.05) +0.076 (+1.930)
13.5 0.796 (20.22) +0.096 (+2.438)
11.5 0.935 (23.75) +0.112 (+2.845)
11 0.977 (24.82) +0.117 (+2.972)
12 32.5 0.392 (9.96) +0.047 (+1.194)

26 0.490 (12.45) +0.059 (+1.499)
21 0.607 (15.42) +0.073 (+1.854)
17 0.750 (19.05) +0.090 (+2.286)
13.5 0.944 (23.98) +0.113 (+2.870)
11.5 1.109 (28.17) +0.133 (+3.378)
11 1.159 (29.44) +0.139 (+3.531)
14† 32.5 0.431 (10.942) +0.052 (+1.313)

26 0.538 (13.677) +0.065 (+1.641)
21 0.667 (16.933) +0.080 (+2.032)
17 0.824 (20.918) +0.099 (+2.510)
13.5 1.037 (26.341) +0.124 (+3.161)
11.5 1.217 (30.922) +0.146 (+3.711)
11 1.273 (32.327) +0.153 (+3.879)
16 32.5 0.492 (12.505) +0.059 (+1.501)

26 0.615 (15.631) +0.074 (+1.876)
21 0.762 (19.352) +0.091 (+2.322)
17 0.941 (23.906) +0.113 (+2.869)
13.5 1.185 (30.104) +0.142 (+3.612)
11.5 1.391 (35.339) +0.167 (+4.241)
11 1.455 (36.945) +0.175 (+4.433)
18 32.5 0.554 (14.068) +0.066 (+1.688)

26 0.692 (17.585) +0.083 (+2.110)
21 0.857 (21.771) +0.103 (+2.613)
17 1.059 (26.894) +0.127 (+3.227)
13.5 1.333 (33.867) +0.160 (+4.064)
11.5 1.565 (39.757) +0.188 (+4.771)
11 1.636 (41.564) +0.196 (+4.988)
20 32.5 0.615 (15.631) +0.074 (+1.876)

26 0.769 (19.538) +0.092 (+2.345)
21 0.952 (24.190) +0.114 (+2.903)
17 1.176 (29.882) +0.141 (+3.586)
13.5 1.481 (37.630) +0.178 (+4.516)
11.5 1.739 (44.174) +0.209 (+5.301)
11 1.818 (46.182) +0.218 (+5.542)
22 32.5 0.677 (17.194) +0.081 (+2.063)

26 0.846 (21.492) +0.102 (+2.579)
21 1.048 (26.610) +0.126 (+3.193)
17 1.294 (32.871) +0.155 (+3.944)
13.5 1.630 (41.393) +0.196 (+4.967)
11.5 1.913 (48.591) +0.230 (+5.831)
11 2.000 (50.800) +0.240 (+6.096)
24 32.5 0.738 (18.757) +0.089 (+2.251)

26 0.923 (23.446) +0.111 (+2.814)
21 1.143 (29.029) +0.137 (+3.483)
74
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
TABLE 4 Continued
Nominal Pipe Size C
DR Minimum Tolerance
(IPS)
17 1.412 (35.859) +0.169 (+4.303)

13.5 1.778 (45.156) +0.213 (+5.419)
11.5 2.087 (53.009) +0.250 (+6.361)
11 2.182 (55.418) +0.262 (+6.650)
A
The sizes listed in Table 4 are those commercially available sizes used by the gas industry.
B
C
The DR shown are designations commonly accepted by the gas industry and do not calculate exactly.
D
These wall thicknesses are minimum and are not a function of the dimension ratios.
†
Nominal pipe sizes 14–24 were editorially added in April 2014.
TABLE 5 Pipe Category

Category
Property Test Method
A B C D E F G H
Temperature, ... 100 (38) 120 (49) 140 (60) 160 (71) 180 (82)
200 (93) ... ...
°F (°C)
Hydrostatic D2837 400 (2.8) 500 (3.4) 630 (4.3) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9) 1250 (8.6) 1600 (11.0) 2000 (13.8)
Design
Basis, psi
(MPa)
Melt IndexA D1238 >0.5 0.2–0.5 0.01–0.3 <0.01B C
... ... ...
Examples: CDB - At 140ºF (60ºC) the HDB is 800 psi (5.5 MPa). The approximate melt index range is 0.2 to 0.5 g/10 min for this PE pipe.
A
DF - At 160ºF (71ºC) the HDB is 1250 psi (8.6 MPa) .
A
The Melt Index information in this table is intended to provide guidance relating to heat fusion joining of PE materials, not for classification of materials. This property
is not applicable to non-PE materials or to mechanical fittings. See 7.5.
B
Typically melt flow measured under condition 190/21.6 is less than 4.01 g/10 min.
C
When a PE pipe or fitting is marked per 7.2 or 7.5 with the letter “E,” it affirms that the manufacturer has verified the applicability of generic fusion joining with their products
in accordance with PPI TR-33 and PPI TR-41 by joining to itself and to other “E” materials and testing the joints in accordance with applicable regulations. However,
qualification of joining procedures by operators in accordance with applicable regulations may still be required. Information about manufacturers who have verified PPI
TR-33 and PPI TR-41 generic fusion joining with their products is found in PPI TR-33 and PPI TR-41. Consult PPI and the manufacturer for additional information.
5.8 Elevated Temperature Service—piping materials in- (S4 Test) or ISO 13478 (Full Scale Test (FST)) shall be
tended for use at temperatures above 100°F (38°C) shall have conducted. In cases of conflict, the RCP results of ISO 13478
the PPI hydrostatic design basis (HDB) determined at the shall apply. The data obtained shall be made available upon
specific temperature in accordance with Test Method D2837. request without limitations on disclosure, and shall not subse-
The 100 000-h intercept (long-term strength) shall be catego- quently be subject to disclosure limitations when used by
rized in accordance with Table 5 and be listed as the “hydro- others.
static design basis of XXX psi at XXX °F (C°) for (compound
NOTE 15—The requirements and testing for resistance to RCP specified
name).” in this specification do not provide information for all possible conditions
NOTE 13—Many design factors for elevated temperature service cannot of use. The user should consult with the manufacturer and other
be covered in this specification. Users should consult applicable codes for appropriate sources such as resin suppliers, research, academia, etc., to
limitations on pertinent maximum temperatures. determine that the RCP resistance provided by the pipe producer is
NOTE 14—In the absence of an HDB established at the specified sufficient for the intended use.
temperature, the HDB of a higher temperature may be used in determining 5.11 Inside Surface Ductility for Pipe—The inside surface
a design pressure rating at the specified temperature by arithmetic of pipe shall be ductile as shown by testing in accordance with
interpolation.
5.11.1, 5.11.2, and 5.11.3. Before testing, specimens shall be
5.9 HDB Validation for PE Pipe—The 73°F (23°C) Hydro- conditioned in accordance with Practice D618 for 40 h at 73.4
static Design Basis (HDB) of PE pipe shall be validated by the 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 % relative humidity.
pipe producer using the PE validation procedure as outlined in
Test Method D2837. For MDPE materials, the HDB of 1250 NOTE 16—ID ductility testing may also be conducted for quality control
purposes, however, there is no known data that identifies one test as
psi shall be validated; for HDPE materials, the HDB of 1600 inferior, equal, or superior to the others, therefore, results from one test
psi shall be validated. should not be evaluated against the results from either of the other two
5.10 Resistance to Rapid Crack Propagation (RCP) for tests.
Pipe—Additional testing for resistance to RCP is required 5.11.1 Bend-back Test Method:
when the wall thickness of the pipe being produced in 5.11.1.1 From the pipe, squarely cut a ring of pipe with a
accordance with this standard exceeds that of the pipe used to minimum width of 11⁄4 (32 mm). The entire wall thickness may
establish the resistance to RCP for the PE compound. In these be tested, or material may be removed from the OD surface of
circumstances, additional testing for resistance to failure by the pipe, while maintaining an undisturbed ID surface, to
RCP in accordance with the procedures set forth in ISO 13477 produce a ring with 3⁄8-in. (9.5-mm) wall thickness.
75
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
NOTE 17—The ring may be tested in its entirety, or may be cut into 5.13.1.1 Heat fusion joints of thermoplastic pipe and fittings
representative sectors to produce bend-back test specimens. shall be made in accordance with Practice F2620 and the user’s
5.11.1.2 In a well-lit area at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) written procedure.
perform the following procedure within 5 min: (a) Bend the 5.13.1.2 PE butt fusion joining shall be between compo-
specimen inside-out (reverse-bend so that the pipe ID surface nents (pipes, fittings, or valves) having the same SDR or DR.
is on the outside surface of the bent specimen). (b) Using an Butt fusion between unlike SDR or DR components shall be
apparatus such as a vise or other suitable bending equipment, allowed only if it has been demonstrated that long term
close the legs of the specimen together. When the specimen performance is not adversely affected. The minimum require-
legs are closed together, the top of the bend-back specimen ment to demonstrate long term performance shall be the
shall protrude 1 to 11 ⁄4 in. (25 to 32 mm) or two wall validation procedure for PE in Test Method D2837. The
thicknesses, whichever is greater, above the point of closure Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of the PE material shall be
(jaws). (c) With the unaided (naked) eye, visually examine the validated using specimens containing butt fusion joints result-
protruding reverse-bent pipe ID surface for signs of brittle ing from different SDRs or DRs. Pipe/pipe joints of the given
cracking or crazing. PE material that pass shall validate pipe/pipe, pipe/fitting, or
5.11.1.3 Any indication of brittle cracking or crazing indi- fitting/fitting joints of the same SDR ratio for that PE material.
cates failure. 5.13.2 Mechanical—Mechanical fittings shall be installed in
5.11.2 Elongation-at-Break Test Method : accordance with the user’s written procedures and the fitting
manufacturer’s installation instructions. The joint shall be
5.11.2.1 Five Test Method D638 Type IV specimens cut in
tested in accordance with the specific design category as
the longitudinal direction from locations equally spaced around
outlined in 6.10.
the circumference of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with
Test Method D638 at a cross-head separation speed of 2 in. 5.13.3 Electrofusion—Electrofusion joints shall be made in
(50.8 mm) min, and at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C). If the accordance to user’s written procedures and the fitting manu-
specimen thickness must be reduced by machining, the pipe ID facturer’s installation instructions.
surface shall be left unaltered. 5.14 Fittings:
5.14.1 Socket-type fusion fittings shall meet the require-
NOTE 18—If the specimen thickness is reduced, the machined side of
the specimen must be smooth and the thickness of the specimen in the
ments of Specification D2683.
gage length must be uniform. Surface cuts or scratches and nonuniform 5.14.2 Butt-type fusion fittings shall meet the requirements
thickness in the specimen gage length can detrimentally affect test results. of Specification D3261.
5.11.2.2 The percent elongation at break for each test 5.14.3 Electrofusion fittings should meet the requirements
specimen shall exceed 400 %. of Specification F1055.
5.11.3 Thermal Stability Test Method—Specimens of the 5.15 PE Valves—All PE gas valves shall meet the require-
pipe inside wall surface not more than 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) ments of ASME Standard B 16.40.
thick shall demonstrate a minimum induction temperature of 5.16 Excess Flow Valves—All excess flow valves shall meet
428°F (220°C) when tested in accordance with the Test Method the requirements of Specification F2138.
for Thermal Stability in Specification D3350.
5.12 Squeeze-Off—This requirement is limited to pipe sizes, 6. Test Methods
wall thicknesses, squeeze procedures, and conditions deemed 6.1 General—The test methods in this specification cover
suitable for squeeze-off in service by the pipe manufacturer. plastic pipe and fittings to be used for gas distribution. Test
There shall be no leakage or visual evidence of splitting, methods that are applicable from other specifications will be
cracking, breaking or reduction in 1000-h sustained pressure referenced in the paragraph pertaining to that particular test.
category when pipe is tested as follows:
6.2 Sampling—Take a representative sample of the pipe and
5.12.1 Prepare six randomly selected pipe specimens in
fittings sufficient to determine conformance with this specifi-
accordance with Test Method D1598 except they shall be
cation. About 40 ft (12 m) of pipe is required to perform all the
unfilled.
tests prescribed. The number of fittings required varies, de-
5.12.2 The squeeze-off shall be effected at the mid-point of pending upon the size and type of fitting. A sampling plan shall
the test specimen, 90° to the point of the measured minimum be agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
wall thickness. Close the squeeze bars to the gap stop in Practice D1898).
Specification F1563 and hold in constraint for 4 h. Remove 6.2.1 Pipe Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test
squeeze bars and reround pipe by closing squeeze bars at a specimens required for any pressure test shall have at least a
point 90° from the squeeze area. part of the marking in their central sections. The central section
5.12.3 Immediately upon removal of the squeeze-off tool, is that portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away
fill the specimens with ambient temperature water, that is, 67 6 from an end closure.
10°F (19.4 6 5.6°C), condition, and test in accordance with
6.6. 6.3 Conditioning—For those tests where conditioning is
required or unless otherwise specified, condition the specimens
5.13 Joints: prior to testing for a minimum of 1h in water or 4h in air at 73.4
5.13.1 Heat Fusion: 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C).
76
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
6.4 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard labo- shall be tested at both 73°F (23°C) and the maximum design
ratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % temperature. The test fiber stress shall be 90 % of the hydro-
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. static design basis (HDB).
6.5 Dimensions and Tolerances: NOTE 20—Air, methane, or nitrogen may be substituted for water as the
6.5.1 Pipe—Any length of pipe is used to determine the test medium.
dimensions. Coiled pipe shall be measured in the natural 6.6.2 Maintain the specimens at the pressures required, held
springback condition, unless specified otherwise. to 610 psi (0.07 MPa), for a period of 1000 h at the test
6.5.1.1 Diameter—Measure the diameter of the pipe in temperature 63.6°F (62°C) as specified in 6.6.1.
accordance with Test Method D2122. The average outside 6.6.3 Failure of two of the six specimens tested shall
diameter for nonroundable pipe is the arithmetic average of the constitute failure in the test. Failure of one of the six specimens
maximum and minimum diameters at any cross section on the tested is cause for retest of six additional specimens. Failure of
length of the pipe. For roundable pipe, out-of-roundness one of the six specimens in retest shall constitute failure in the
tolerance applies to measurements made while the pipe is test. Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in Test
rounded with the manufacturer’s recommended equipment. Method D1598.
Measure out-of-roundness within one-half pipe diameter or 2
6.7 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure (Quick Burst)—
in. (50 mm), whichever is closer, of the rounding equipment.
The test equipment, procedures, and failure definitions shall be
See Test Method D2122 for definitions of nonroundable and
as specified in Test Method D1599. Pressures shall be calcu-
roundable pipe.
lated using the pipe’s actual measured minimum wall
(1) The pipe surface shall be free of gross imperfections such
thickness, outside diameter, and the applicable fiber stress,
as, deep scratches, grooves, or high or low (flat) spots around
whichever is greater.
the pipe circumference.
6.8 Apparent Tensile Properties—The procedure and test
NOTE 19—Excessive out-of-roundness may be caused by manufactur- equipment shall be as specified in Test Method D2290,
ing irregularities around the circumference of the pipe, such as deep
scratches, gouges, flat spots, and high spots. Such defects could detrimen- Procedure B. The speed of testing shall be 0.5 in. (12.7
tally affect joining. To simulate field joining of roundable pipe, out-of- mm)/min. Cut “ring” specimens from pipe. Test a minimum of
roundness is checked by fitting a rounding device on the pipe, then five specimens. This method is applicable to all pipe of
measuring diameter. nominal 3⁄4-in. (19.0-mm) outside diameter and larger.
6.5.1.2 Wall Thickness—Make a minimum of six measure- 6.9 Chemical Resistance—Determine the resistance to the
ments at each cross section in accordance with Test Method following chemicals in accordance with Test Method D543.
D2122. Where available, the test specimen shall be a ring 2 in. SDR 11
6.5.1.3 Wall Thickness Eccentricity Range—Measure in a pipe cut to the ring dimensions specified in 6.8. For materials
manner such that the maximum, A, and the minimum, B, wall that are not readily available as 2 in. SDR 11 pipe, the test
thickness at single points of each cross section measured are specimen shall be a plaque of material 1⁄4 by 2 by 4 in. (6.3 by
obtained. Calculate the wall thickness eccentricity range, E, in 50.8 by 101.6 mm) with a 1 in. (25.4 mm) wide reduced
percent for each cross section as follows: section.
E 5 @ ~ A 2 B ! /A # 3 100 (1) Chemicals Concentration (% by volume)
Mineral oil (USP) 100
6.5.1.4 Length—Measure pipe length and other linear di- Tertiary-butyl mercaptan 5 in mineral oil
mensions with a steel tape or other device, accurate to 61⁄32 in. Antifreeze agents (at least one shall be used):
Methanol, or 100
(61 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). Ethylene glycol 100
6.5.2 Fittings—Measure the dimensions of fittings in accor- Toluene 15 in methanol
dance with Test Method D2122. Test five specimens with each chemical. Weigh the speci-
6.5.3 Ovality—Determine percent ovality in accordance mens to the nearest 0.005 g and completely immerse them in
with Test Method D2122. the chemicals for 72 h. On removal from the chemicals, wipe
6.6 Sustained Pressure Test: the specimens with a clean dry cloth. Condition in air for 2 to
6.6.1 Select six test specimens of pipe at random, condition 21⁄4 h and reweigh. Calculate the increase in weight to the
at the standard laboratory test temperature and humidity, and nearest 0.01 % on the basis of initial weight. Test the specimen
pressure test in accordance with Test Method D1598. in tension in accordance with 6.8 within 1⁄2 h after weighing.
6.6.1.1 Test specimens shall be prepared so that the mini- Examine the weight and apparent tensile strength of each
mum length of pipe on each side of the fitting is equal to 5 specimen for conformance to the requirement in 5.5.
times the diameter of the pipe but in no case less than 12 in. (Warning—Because of the possible toxicity of these reagents,
(304 mm) for sizes less than 6 in. For sizes 6 in. and larger, the refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet on each of these
minimum length shall be equal to 3 times the diameter or 30 in. reagents before using or handling them.)
(762 mm), whichever is shorter. 6.10 Categorization of Mechanical Joints—The following
6.6.1.2 Pressures used shall be calculated using the pipe’s test methods provide a uniform procedure for qualification or
actual measured minimum wall thickness, outside diameter, categorization of mechanical joints using short term pullout
and the applicable fiber stress, whichever is greater. Piping resistance tests and burst tests. The mechanical joint categories
intended for use at temperatures of 100°F (38°C) and higher and test methods are as follows:
77
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
6.10.1 Category 1—A mechanical joint design that provides NOTE 22—Earlier editions of Specification D2513 included PE material
a seal plus a resistance to a force on the pipe end equal to or designations PE2406 and PE3408. Changes to Specification D3350 led to
changes in the PE material designation codes that resulted in the PE
greater than that which will cause a permanent deformation of material designations PE2406 and PE3408 being superceded by newer
the pipe. material designations. Additionally, OPS 49 CFR Part 192 may not
6.10.1.1 The apparatus and report shall be as specified in reference the most current version of D2513 and as a result may require
Test Method D638. The test shall be conducted at ambient marking with material designation codes that are no longer included in this
temperatures, that is, 67 6 10°F (19.4 6 5.6°C). The speed of Specification. For these reasons two material designations may be present.
For example, PE4710 pipes were previously described as PE3408 pipes
the testing shall be 0.2 in. (5 mm)/min 625 %. Five specimens and may be marked PE3408/4710. Similarly PE2708 pipes were previ-
shall be prepared following the manufacturer’s published ously described as PE2406 pipes and may be marked PE2406/2708.
installation instructions. Length of the specimens shall be such 7.1.1 In addition to 7.1, the pipe marking shall include a
that the unreinforced distance between the grip of the apparatus coding that will enable the manufacturer to determine the
and the end of the stiffener is at least five times the nominal location of manufacture, pipe production and resin lots, and
outside diameter of the pipe size being tested. Apply a load any additional information which is agreed upon between the
until permanent deformation (yield) occurs in the unreinforced manufacturer and purchaser. The manufacturer shall maintain
area of the piping. such records for fifty years or for the design service life of the
6.10.1.2 Results obtained from the above method pertain pipe, whichever is longer.
only to the specific outside diameter, wall thickness, and 7.1.2 All the markings in 7.1 and 7.1.1 shall be repeated at
compound of the piping used in the test and specific fitting intervals not exceeding 2 ft (0.61 m). For indented printing,
design tested. either the indented print line shall be in a color that contrasts
NOTE 21—The ability to restrain pipe to its yield as specified above with that of the pipe, or a separate print line shall be in a color
does not guarantee that a properly installed joint will prevent pullout under that contrasts with the pipe. When color is applied such as with
actual long-term field conditions. Joints that cannot pass this test would be color stripes, a color shell or solid color pipe, yellow color shall
expected to pullout under actual long term field conditions. To date, this
be used.
test is the best available for disqualifying unsound joints.
6.10.2 Category 2—A mechanical joint design that provides 7.2 Pipe intended for natural gas service at elevated tem-
a seal only (see Appendix X1.5.5). A mechanical joint designed peratures greater than 73°F (23°C) shall be marked with
for this category excludes any provisions in the design or additional code letters from Table 5 (the first code letter to
installation of the joint to resist any axial pullout forces; identify the temperature of pressure rating, the second code
therefore, tensile tests are not required. letter to identify HDB at highest rated temperature, and the
third code letter to identify the melt index).
6.10.2.1 The test assembly shall meet the burst test require-
ments of 5.5 when tested in accordance with Test Method NOTE 23—The non-mandatory, preferred order for all the items required
D1599 with end closures designed in accordance with Test in the print line in the marking sections 7.1 and 7.2 are:
Method D1599. (1) Pipe size including sizing system (IPS, CTS or OD),
(2) SDR (DR) or minimum wall thickness,
6.10.3 Category 3—A mechanical joint design that provides (3) Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
a seal plus a pipe restraint rating equivalent to the anticipated (4) GAS,
thermal stresses occurring in a pipeline (see Appendix X1.4). (5) Pipe material designation code,
This category has a manufacturer’s rated pipe end restraint less (6) Elevated temperature code from Table 5,
(7) ASME SD-2513 or both ASME SD-2513 and ASTM D2513,
than the value required to yield the pipe as outlined in 6.10.1 (8) Manufacturer’s lot code (includes date of manufacture in some cases),
(Category 1). and
6.10.3.1 The procedures and testing shall be the same as (9) Additional information, including date of manufacture, coil number
outlined in 6.10.1 (Category 1) except the test tensile values sequential footage, third party certification mark etc.
Example: 2 in. IPS SDR 11 MANUFACTURER NAME GAS PE 2708
shall meet the rated values published by the mechanical fitting
CEC ASME SD-2513 LOT CODE INFO 02JAN98 coil #506.
manufacturer.
7.3 PE pipe shall be marked with the melt index category in
7. Marking accordance with Table 5 in addition to the marking require-
ments of 7.1.
7.1 Pipe—All required marking shall be legible, visible,
and permanent. To ensure permanence, marking shall be 7.4 Markings for potable water, sewer, reclaimed water,
applied so it can only be removed by physically removing part communications or electrical use are prohibited.
of the pipe wall. The marking shall (1) not reduce the wall 7.5 Fittings—Fittings shall be marked ASME SD-2513
thickness to less than the minimum value for the pipe, (2) not or both ASME SD-2513 and ASTM D2513, as well as
have any effect on the long-term strength of the pipe, and (3) with the applicable fitting specification. All fittings shall be
not provide leakage channels when elastomeric gasket com- marked on the body or hub. The markings shall consist at least
pression fittings are used to make the joints. These marking of the manufacturer’s name or trademark, or both, the size, the
shall consist of the word GAS, the designation ASME symbol for the type of material, and the three-letter code from
SD-2513 or both ASME SD-2513 and ASTM D2513, Table 5 (as described in 7.2). In addition, the fittings markings
the manufacturer’s name or trademark, the nominal pipe size shall include code that will enable the manufacturer to deter-
including the sizing system used (IPS, CTS, or OD), DR or mine the date of manufacture, the location of manufacture,
minimum wall thickness, material designation, and date of fitting production and resin lots, and any additional information
manufacture. which may be agreed upon between the manufacturer and
78
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
purchaser. The manufacturer shall maintain such records for 50 minimum bar thickness value of 0.005 in. or an alternative 1D
years or for the design service life of the fittings, whichever is or 2D bar code symbology as agreed upon between manufac-
longer. turer and end user. All fittings shall have the 16-character codes
marked or affixed to the product, product packaging, or any
NOTE 24—7.5 is applicable to fusion type fittings only. The marking manner agreed upon between manufacturer and end user.
requirements in 7.5 are not applicable to mechanical fittings.
7.6 All PE pipe, tubing, and fusion fittings meeting the 8. Quality Assurance
requirements of this specification for gas distribution systems 8.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
shall be marked with the 16-character gas distribution compo- manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
nent tracking and traceability identifier in accordance with with this specification and has been found to meet the
Specification F2897. The 16-character code shall be expressed requirements of this specification.
in alphanumeric format and Code 128 bar code format with a
9. Certification
S1. Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the contract,
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer is respon- the materials shall be packaged in accordance with the suppli-
sible for performance of all inspection and test requirements er’s standard practices in a manner ensuring arrival at destina-
specified herein. The producer shall use his own or any other tion in satisfactory condition and which will be acceptable to
suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection and test the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall comply
requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser disap- with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National Motor
proves. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the Freight Classification rules.
inspections and tests set forth in this specification where such
inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material
dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD
ment:
ANNEXES
A1. IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR PE PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS UP TO
AND INCLUDING 12 IN. NOMINAL DIAMETER
A1.1 Quality Control particular commercial plastic resin initially, and at least twice
A1.1.1 The following in-plant quality control program shall a year thereafter for material and extrusion process qualifica-
be used to assure compliance with this specification. The pipe tion and not as a quality control on the product. This test shall
and fittings producers shall maintain records on all aspects of be made in accordance with A1.2.1.1 using any of the test
this program and supply these to the purchaser, if requested. conditions in Table A1.1.
A1.1.2 In-Plant Quality Control Test Methods—Test meth- A1.2.1.1 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test
ods other than those specified in Section 6 are used as long as Method—Select six random specimens produced at the manu-
they provide equivalent results. In case of disagreement, those facturer’s facility using the Table A1.1 polyethylene pipe
test methods in the applicable ASTM standard shall be used. material designation code. Test these pipe samples in accor-
dance with Test Method D1598 using water as the internal test
A1.2 Pipe Tests medium.
A1.2.1 Material and Extrusion Process Qualification— A1.2.1.2 Passing results are (1) non-failure for all six
Sustained pressure tests shall be made on one pipe size in the specimens at a time equal to or greater than the Table A1.1
range of 2 in., or less, and on one pipe size in the range of 21⁄2 “minimum average time before failure,” or (2) not more than
in., or greater. This test shall also be made on pipe from each one ductile specimen failure and the average time before
79
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE A1.1 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test RequirementsA

Test Temperature Pipe Material Designation Code Pipe Material Designation Code
Condition °F (°C) PE 2708 PE 4710
Test Temperature Hoop Minimum Average Time Test Pressure Hoop StressA , Minimum Average Time
StressA , Before Failure, psi (kPa)B Before Failure,
psi (kPa)B Hours Hours
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
Calculate internal test pressure in accordance with :
2S
P5
S Do
t
21 D
Where:
P = test pressure, psig (kPa);
DO = measured outside diameter, in. (mm)
B
Test temperature tolerance ±3.6°F (±2°C). Test pressure tolerance ± 5psi (±35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
TABLE A1.2 Product Quality Control Tests

failure for all specimens shall be greater than the specified
“minimum average time before failure” for the selected Table Property Frequency
A1.1 Condition. If more than one ductile failure occurs before Diameter Once every hour or every coil,
whichever is less frequent
the Table A1.1 “minimum average time before failure,” it is
permissible to conduct one retest at a Table A1.1 Condition of Wall thickness Once every hour or every coil,
lower stress and longer minimum average time before failure
for the material designation except that for Table A1.1 Condi- Ring tensile or burst pressure Testing shall commence at the
tion 6 no retest is permissible. Brittle failure of any specimen beginning of production of a
particular pipe or tubing size, and
in the test sample when tested at Table A1.1 Condition 1 shall continue weekly thereafter. If
through 6 constitutes failure to meet this requirement and no production is interrupted, testing shall
retest is allowed. recommence after the interruption as
though at the beginning of
A1.2.1.3 Provision for retest (if needed)—The retest sample production.
shall be six specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and
material designation from the same time frame as the test
sample per A1.2.1.2. For the retest, any specimen failure
before the “minimum average time before failure” at the retest
the requirement. Pipe that does not meet the requirement shall be rejected.
condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time NOTE A1.3—For pipe sizes above 4-in. nominal diameter, the quick
before failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement. burst test (Test Method D1599) may be replaced by the Apparent Ring
Tensile Strength Test (Test Method D2290) if agreed to between the
NOTE A1.1—Table A1.1 conditions are based on PE validation require- purchaser and the manufacturer.
ments per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 test
pressure hoop stress and six times greater minimum average time before A1.3 Fittings Tests
failure. Conditions 2 through 5 are linear stress and time interpolations
between Conditions 1 and 6. The intent of multiple conditions is to A1.3.1 The fittings tests listed in the following sub-
maintain equivalent performance criteria, but provide for retest in the paragraphs shall be conducted at the frequencies indicated.
event of ductile failure. The test pressure hoop stress levels for Conditions
2-5 are linear interpolations for arbitrarily chosen time increments. An NOTE A1.4—When any fitting fails to meet the requirements of this
equivalent performance requirement, however, may be determined by specification, or the applicable referenced fitting specification, additional
arbitrarily choosing a test pressure hoop stress between Conditions 1 and tests should be made on fittings produced back to previous acceptable
6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For result to select the fittings produced in the interim that do meet the
example for PE 4710 material, at 670 psi test pressure hoop stress, the requirements. Fittings that do not meet the requirements shall be rejected.
minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 –
670) × ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
A1.3.2 Dimensions:
A1.3.2.1 Socket Fittings:
A1.2.2 Product Quality Control (Note A1.2) The tests in (a) Socket Entrance, Bottom and Minimum Internal
Table A1.2 shall be made per size per extrusion die at the Diameters—Once an hour or one out of ten fittings, whichever
denoted frequencies and the test results recorded and filed for is less frequent.
inspection on request.
NOTE A1.2—When the pipe fails to meet this specification in any test,
additional tests shall be made on the pipe produced back to the previous
acceptable result to select the pipe produced in the interim that does pass
80
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
(b) Wall Thickness—At the beginning of each production [1] Crushing a fitting, or a portion of a fitting, in a manner
setup for each cavity. that applies load in the direction normal to the knit line. See
A1.3.2.2 Butt Fusion Fittings:(a) Outside Diameter and Note A1.5.
Wall Thickness—Once an hour or one out of ten fittings, [2] Apparent tensile strength tests of a ring cut from a fitting,
whichever is less frequent. with the load oriented normal to the knit line. See Note A1.6.
A1.3.3 Other Tests: [3] Burst testing of the fitting. See Note A1.6.
A1.3.3.1 PE Fittings—At the start of each production run, (b) The integrity of at least one part from each mold cavity
whenever production conditions have changed, or when the shall be verified, using a method selected by the manufacturer
resin lot is changed, but not less frequently than once per 500 as appropriate for this specific product and process.
fittings thereafter, the following tests shall be made: NOTE A1.5—Separation in the knit constitutes a failure.
(a) The knit line strength for at least one fitting from each NOTE A1.6—In tests 2 and 3 the strength requirements shown in the
cavity shall be demonstrated by one of the following tests: annexes must be met.
A2. IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR 14-IN. AND LARGER DIAMETER
POLYETHYLENE PIPE
A2.1 Visual inspection of every length of pipe for work- A2.3 Manufacturers of pipe shall conduct such other quality
manship defects shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s control tests as are appropriate to their manufacturing opera-
plant. Measurements of outside diameter and wall thickness tions that will provide assurance that the product requirements
shall be made for each hour’s production or each length of of Section 5 will be met in place of the actual performance of
pipe, whichever is less frequent. the specified tests.
NOTE A2.1—The pressure tests required under product requirements are
A2.2 Lengths of pipe that are shorter than standard shipping tests for performance. These tests are not adaptable to in-plant quality
lengths are butt-fused to produce standard lengths. Such control. Quality control tests have not been standardized because the
build-up lengths must otherwise meet all of the product requirements for such tests vary substantially from one manufacturing
requirements of this specification. plant to another.
A3. CERTIFICATION
81
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
X1.1 General NOTE X1.2—In some countries, the ISO MRS method is used to
determine the maximum operating pressure (MOP) using the formula
X1.1.1 The design of a PE piping system for natural gas MOP = 2 MRS/(DR-1) C, which incorporates the pipe DR (dimension
service must include consideration of the combined effects of ratio), the MRS (minimum required strength) of the pipe material as
time, internal and external stress, and environment as an determined by ISO 9080 and ISO 12162 and the design coefficient (C).
overall basis for selecting a specific kind and size of PE pipe. Guidance on selection for the value of C is provided in the following
The design stress for PE pipe used for distribution of natural references: ISO 4437, ISO 12162, and PPI TR-9.
gas and petroleum fuels is regulated by the U.S. Department of
Transportation as published in OPS 49 CFR Part 192 of the X1.3 Design Stress and Internal Pressure for Natural
Code of Federal Regulations. Gas
X1.2 Design Equations X1.3.1 The design stresses for natural gas pipe are based on
the hydrostatic design basis at 73°F (23°C) obtained in
X1.2.1 Relationship Between Pipe Stress and Pressure—
accordance with Test Method D2837. The test medium should
The following expression is used to relate stress, pressure, pipe
be natural gas or simulated natural gas except that water may
size, and wall thickness:
be used where previous tests have shown that for the particular
P 5 2S/ ~ DR 2 1 ! (X1.1) type of plastic, water and natural gas give essentially the same
test results. The hydrostatic design basis of the PE presently
or
included in the applicable ASTM specifications are as follows:
2S/ @ ~ D o /t ! 2 1 # PE Pipe Hydrostatic Design
Material Designation Basis at
where: 73°F (23°C), psi (MPa)
PE2708 1250 (8.6)
S = stress in the circumferential or hoop direction, psi PE4710 1600 (11.0)
(MPa),
P = internal pressure, psig (MPa), X1.3.2 The design stresses for natural gas at service tem-
DR = dimension ratio, peratures above 73°F (23°C) should be based on hydrostatic
Do = average outside diameter, in. (mm), and design basis of the pipe that are applicable for the particular use
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm). temperature.
X1.2.2 The following expression can be used to determine X1.3.3 The design stress for PE pipe for fuel gases other
the burst pressure or sustained pressures needed in testing: than natural gas should be based on hydrostatic design basis
categories that have been established with the intended gas as
P b 5 2S y / ~ DR 2 1 ! (X1.2)
the pressurizing medium (see X1.7.2 for information on the
where: effect of common LPG fuels on the long-term strength of PE
Pb = burst pressure, psig (MPa), pipes).
Sy = yield stress, psi (MPa), and
DR = dimension ratio. NOTE X1.3—Water may be used in lieu of a particular fuel gas where
previous tests have shown that the results obtained with water are
P s 5 2S f / ~ DR 2 1 ! (X1.3) equivalent.
where: X1.3.4 The design stresses for natural gas are obtained by
Ps = sustained pressure, psig (MPa), multiplying the hydrostatic design basis by design factors or
Sf = fiber stress psi (MPa), and service factors according to the class of location as described in
DR = dimension ratio. Chapter IV of ASME B31.8, or, for gas operators in the United
States, Subpart C of the Minimum Federal Safety Standards for
X1.2.3 Relation between Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline, OPS 49
and Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS)—The HDS is determined CFR Part 192.
by multiplying the HDB by a design factor, f. The design factor,
f, has a value less than 1.0. X1.3.5 For liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) applications, a
maximum operating pressure of 30 psig (206 kPa) is recom-
HDS 5 ~ HDB! ~ f ! (X1.4) mended in NFPA 58 by the members of the National Liquefied
NOTE X1.1—The actual choice of design factor for a given installation Petroleum Gas Association. Liquefied petroleum gas has a
must be reviewed by the design engineer taking into account federal, state, higher condensation temperature than does natural gas; this
and local code requirements. For example, the design factor for gas maximum pressure is recommended to ensure that plastic pipe
pipelines under the jurisdiction of the Department of Transportation is
0.32. is not subjected to excessive exposure to LPG condensates.
(See X1.7.1.)
82
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2513
X1.4 Thermal Stress X1.5.2.1 Mains and service lines installed by insertion are
X1.4.1 Calculate the longitudinal stress (theoretical) in- considered to approximate unrestrained conditions inside the
duced in a pipe member between fixed points as follows: casing pipe except at end connections. Direct-burial pipe is
considered to be partially restrained by passive soil pressures
S 5 E 3 C 3 ∆t (X1.5) except in the vicinity of joints.
where: X1.5.3 Internal pressure, earth settlement, ground
S = stress, psi (MPa), movement, and thermal contraction impose stresses on the pipe
E = modulus of elasticity, psi (MPa), instantaneous, at that can be transmitted to joints. These stresses are additive.
73°F (23°C), Installation practices should reflect the need for continuous
C = coefficient of expansion, in./in./°F, (mm/mm/°C), and support and containment of the pipe through suitable bedding
∆t = maximum temperature minus minimum temperature, and backfilling procedures. Attention should be given to all
°F (°C). joints, particularly to transition joints between PE and metal
X1.4.1.1 The measured stress has been determined to be pipe.
less than that calculated. This difference is caused by the stress X1.5.4 It is desirable to have pipe joints that are as strong as
relaxation in viscoelastic materials. the pipe itself in the longitudinal (axial) direction. Thermal
X1.4.2 Calculate the theoretical force sustained at the fixed fusion, and mechanical joints outlined in 6.10, Category 1 can
points (typically joints) in a pipe member as follows: provide such joint strength. The joint strength is a function of
the assembly procedure, the design of the fitting, and the pipe
F 5 S 3A (X1.6)
material and dimensions (see X1.5.5).
where: X1.5.5 For those mechanical devices that are not designed
F = force, lbf (N), to restrain the pipe against pullout forces, provisions must be
S = stress, psi (MPa), and made in the field to prevent pullout, keeping in mind that
A = cross-sectional pipe wall area, in.2 (mm2). mechanical joints are vulnerable to the effects of internal
X1.4.3 Calculate pipe contraction in unrestrained pipe pressure, temperature changes, earth settlement, and ground
caused by a reduction in temperature as follows: movement. A somewhat limited alternative is to use long
∆L 5 k 3 L 3 C 3 ∆t (X1.7)
sleeve-type fittings that permit limited movement without loss
of pressure seal. Otherwise, provisions must be made in the
where: field to prevent pullout through suitable anchoring at the joint.
∆L = change in length, X1.5.6 Plastic pipe joined with mechanical connectors that
k = 1000 for ∆L (mm), L (m), C (°C−1), ∆ t (°C), or utilize a compression-type gasket must be reinforced by means
k = 12 for ∆L (in.), L (ft), C (°F−1), ∆ t (°F), of a tubular stiffener that extends at least under the section of
L = original length,
pipe being compressed by the gasket and the gripping device
C = coefficient of linear expansion, and
∆t = temperature change. (where used). The stiffener shall be nonsplit-type design to
meet the performance requirements recommended by the
X1.5 Installation Procedure manufacturer of the fitting in which it is used, and the joint
shall meet the test requirements outlined in 6.10.
X1.5.1 It is recognized that certain minimum requirements
exist for the support of earth loads from backfill and other X1.5.7 Kinks found in the pipe shall be cut out. Pipe with
external forces. Proper installation techniques can be used with kinks shall not be placed in service.
flexible conduit (as defined by Marston and Spangler (2)) to X1.6 Repair Considerations
support relatively large earth loads without excessive deflec-
tion by mobilizing lateral passive soil forces. Proper installa- X1.6.1 Repairs may be made to PE pipe under appropriate
tion technique ensures that the necessary passive soil pressure circumstances. Selection and installation considerations for the
at the side of the pipe will be developed and maintained. It is use of full encirclement band clamps are available in ASTM
also recognized that internal pressures may be valuable in Guide F1025. Additional information on repair of PE pipe may
minimizing the deflection caused by earth loads. Installation be found in manufacturers’ literature, the AGA Plastic Pipe
procedures described in Recommended Practice D2774, Manual for Gas Service, ASME B31.8 Gas Transmission and
ASME B31.8, and the AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas Distribution Piping Systems, and in the ASME Guide for Gas
Service are recommended. Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
X1.5.2 Unrestrained PE pipe expands and contracts from X1.7 Environmental Effects
thermal change significantly more than metallic pipe. This ratio X1.7.1 Natural Gas—The natural gas of commerce consists
may be of the magnitude of ten to one. Typical coefficients of of methane as the principal constituent with minor amounts of
thermal expansion for unrestrained pipe for PE is 9.0 × 10-5
(in./in.)/°F 24.30 (mm/mm)°C.
83
SD-2513 ASME NM.3.1-2018
other gases, which can include other hydrocarbons (for both minimizes the possible occurrence of condensates and
example, ethane, propane, butane, pentane), inert gases (for gives adequate consideration of the effect of LPG fuels on the
example, nitrogen, carbon dioxide), and odorants. The long long-term strength of PE piping.
term effect of natural gas (methane, but with minor amounts of X1.7.2.2 It has been reported (8,9) and (10), that during the
other gases) at 73°F (23°C) has been shown (3,4) to be heat fusion joining of PE piping that has been in service
essentially equivalent to that of water at 73°F (23°C) for PE conveying fuel gases that consist of, or that include heavier
pipe. hydrocarbons, the PE surfaces being heated in preparation for
fusion sometimes exhibit a bubbly appearance. This bubbling
X1.7.2 Other Fuel Gases—In accordance with this
is the result of the rapid expansion (by heat) and passage of
specification, PE materials must have not less than a 1250 psi
absorbed heavier hydrocarbon gases through the molten mate-
HDB for 73.4°F, for methane. It has been shown (5, 6, and 7)
rial. Heat fusion (butt, socket, saddle, or electrofusion) joint
that aliphatic gaseous fuels of higher molecular weights than
strength may be reduced by the presence of the heavier
methane (natural gas) somewhat reduce the long-term strength
hydrocarbons. Pimputkar et al (8) conclude that for a system
of PE pipe materials compared to when using methane or water
operating at 50psi and conveying a mixture of as high as 16
as the pressurizing medium. The reduction in PE’s long-term
volume percent in methane the propane concentration in PE
strength caused by gaseous propane, propylene and butane is
will be under 0.2 percent, sufficient to sometimes show some
modest, well under 20 %. On this basis one report (5) considers
bubbling, but not high enough to effect any significant degra-
an HDB of 1000 psi, for 73.4°F, as a reasonable and conser-
dation in fusion strength. However, if the concentration of
vative design basis for PE piping materials intended for LPG
propane in PE exceeds 0.2 percent, there is the risk of a rapid
fuel gas service.
and large drop in fusion strength. Field tests to verify the level
X1.7.2.1 However, it has also been shown by the above of contamination and subsequent degradation of joint strength
referenced studies that propane, propylene and butane, when in are not currently available. Therefore, in the case of PE pipe
the liquid phase, can cause a greater reduction in long-term that has previously been installed in these types of services,
strength, up to 40 %. Accordingly, the use of PE piping to one should use mechanical fittings to join or repair the pipe.
convey LPG gaseous fuels should recognize this effect and the
design and operation of such piping should consider the NOTE X1.4—PPI Technical Report TR 22–88 (5) lists maximum
operating pressures for various minimum operating temperatures at which
possibility for the occurrence of condensates. Extensive expe- condensates will not form in LPG systems in which the primary fuels are
rience has shown that the NFPA maximum recommended propane and butane.
operating pressure of 30 psig for LPG systems (see X1.3.4)
84
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2683
SPECIFICATION FOR SOCKET-TYPE POLYETHYLENE

FITTINGS FOR OUTSIDE DIAMETER-CONTROLLED
POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND TUBING
SD-2683
quirements in para. 9.1.5, and quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.)
85
SD-2683 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-
Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
1. Scope D2657 Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe

1.1 This specification covers polyethylene socket-type fit- and Fittings
tings for use with outside diameter-controlled polyethylene D3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
pipe as specified by Specifications D3035 and D2513. Require- PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
ments for materials, workmanship, dimensions, and pressure D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
performance are included. Where applicable in this tings Materials
specification, “ pipe” shall mean “pipe and tubing.” F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
2.4 Plastic Pipe Institute
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro-
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB),
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate-
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health rials or Pipe7
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List-
tions prior to use. ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design
2. Referenced Documents Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum
Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Pip-
2.1 ASTM Standards: ing Materials or Pipe
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe 3. Terminology
Under Constant Internal Pressure 3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation of polyethylene
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- plastic is PE.
tics
D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther- 3.2 standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (SDR)—
moplastic Pipe and Fittings the ratio of pipe outside diameter to wall thickness. It is
D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure calculated by dividing the average outside diameter of the pipe
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings by the minimum wall thickness.
4. Classification
4.1 This specification covers polyethylene fittings of the
socket type made as specified in 5.1 and 5.2
86
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2683
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally 6.1.1.1 Laying Lengths—Laying lengths shall be in accor-
molded. In-line fittings such as couplings, unions, bushings, dance with manufacturer’s specifications.
caps, nipples, etc., may be extruded or machined from extruded 6.1.2 The maximum angular variation of any opening shall
stock. Special fittings such as transition fittings and tapping not be more than 2° off the true centerline axis.
teets shall be assembled and fabricated in accordance with 6.1.3 The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be 125 %
procedures agreed upon between the manufacturer and the of the minimum wall thickness of the pipe with which they are
purchaser. designed to be joined. For reducing fittings, the smallest size
4.1.2 Fittings covered by this specification are intended to wall thickness shall be 125 % of the smallest pipe wall.
be joined by heat fusion to PE pipe.
4.1.3 Fittings intended for use in the distribution of natural 6.2 System Pressure Test Requirements:
gas or petroleum fuels shall also meet the requirements of 6.2.1 Short-Term Rupture Strength—The minimum short-
Specification D2513. term rupture strength of the fitting and fused pipe shall not be
less than the minimum short-term rupture strength of the pipe
5. Materials or tubing in the system when tested in accordance with 8.5.2.
The test pressures shall be as shown in Table 4. Test specimens
5.1 Polyethylene Compound—Polyethylene material com-
shall be prepared for testing as described in 8.5.1.
pounds suitable for use in the manufacture of fittings under this
6.2.2 Sustained Pressure—The fitting(s) and fused pipe or
specification shall meet Specification D3350 and shall meet the
tubing shall not fail (as defined in the Descriptions of Terms
Specification D3350 classification and property requirements
Section of Test Method D1598) at the test pressures given in
in Table 1, and shall have PPI TR-4 HDB and HDS listings at
Table 5 when tested in accordance with 8.5.3. To ensure
73°F (23°C) and HDB listings 140°F (60°C) in accordance
uniformity in preparation of assemblies for sustained pressure
with Table 1.
evaluation, all test joints shall be made in accordance with heat
5.2 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—Polyethylene fusion practices found in D2657.
material compounds shall meet Specification D3350 code C or
E. Code C material compounds shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
black. Code E material compounds shall be colored with UV
stabilizer. 7.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
with good commercial practice so as to produce fittings
5.3 Rework Material—Clean polyethylene compound from meeting the requirements of this specification. Fittings shall be
the manufacturer’s own production that met 5.1 and 5.2 as homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign
virgin material is suitable for remolding into fittings, either inclusions, or injurious defects. The fittings shall be as uniform
alone or blended with new compound of the same cell as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and
classification or material designation. Fittings containing the other physical properties.
rework material shall meet the material and product require-
ments of this specification. 8. Test Methods
6. Requirements 8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for 40 h minimum prior to test in accordance
with Procedure A of Methods D618, for those tests where
6.1.1 Fittings, sockets, dimensions, and tolerances shall be
conditioning is required and in all cases of disagreement.
with 8.4. For reducing fittings, socket and inside diameter 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests at the standard labora-
minimums for the appropriate size shall apply. tory temperature of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C).
TABLE 1 Specification D3350 Classification of Polyethylene Fittings Materials

Physical Properties Cell Classification and Properties for Polyethylene Pipe Materials
PE2606 PE2706 PE2708 PE3608 PE3708 PE3710 PE4708 PE4710
Density 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
Melt Index 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 4 4 4 4 4
Flexural modulus $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $5
Tensile Strength $3 $3 $3 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4
Slow crack growth resistance 6 7 7 6 7 7 7 7
(F1473)
Hydrostatic strength classifica- 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
tion
Color and UV StabilizerA C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E
B B B B B B B B
HDB at 140°F (60°C), PPI TR-4,
psi (MPa)
HDB at 73°F (23°C), PPI TR-4, 630 (4.34) 630 (4.34) 800 (5.52) 800 (5.52) 800 (5.52) 1000 800 (5.52) 1000
psi (MPa) (6.90) (6.90)
A
See 5.2.
B
Listing required; consult manufacturer for listed value.
87
SD-2683 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene PipeA
A Socket Entrance DiameterB B Socket Bottom DiameterC,D C D

Maximum Maximum Socket Inside Diameter
Nominal Average Tolerance Average Tolerance on
Out-of- Out-of- Depth,
Pipe Diameter on Diameter Diameter Diameter min max
Round Round min
Size, in.,
in. (mm)
⁄
12 0.810 +0.005 ±0.008 0.804 +0.005 ±0.008 0.625 0.648 0.804
(20.57) (+0.127) (±0.203) (20.42) (+0.127) (±0.203) (15.88) (16.46) (20.42)
−0.010 −0.026
(−0.254) (−0.660)
⁄
34 1.020 ±0.008 ±0.010 1.012 +0.008 ±0.010 0.625 0.814 1.020
(25.91) (±0.203) (±0.254) (25.70) (+0.203) (±0.254) (15.88) (20.68) (25.91)
−0.012
(−0.305)
1 1.275 ±0.008 ±0.010 1.267 +0.008 ±0.010 0.687 1.020 1.275
(32.38) (±0.203) (±0.254) (32.18) (+0.203) (±0.254) (17.4) (25.91) (32.38)
−0.012
(−0.305)
11⁄4 1.620 ±0.008 ±0.012 1.612 +0.008 ±0.012 0.875 1.301 1.620
(41.15) (±0.203) (±0.305) (40.94) (+0.203) (±0.305) (22.22) (33.04) (41.15)
−0.016
(−0.406)
11⁄2 1.860 ±0.010 ±0.012 1.849 +0.010 ±0.012 0.875 1.496 1.859
(47.24) (±0.254) (±0.305) (46.96) (+0.254) (±0.305) (22.22) (38.0) (47.22)
−0.020
(−0.508)
2 2.335 ±0.010 ±0.012 2.324 +0.010 ±0.012 0.875 1.885 2.334
(59.31) (±0.254) (±0.305) (59.03) (+0.254) (±0.305) (22.22) (47.88) (59.28)
−0.020
(−0.508)
3 3.455 ±0.015 ±0.015 3.439 +0.015 ±0.015 1.000 2.780 3.454
(87.76) (±0.381) (±0.381) (87.35) (+0.381) (±0.381) (25.4) (70.61) (87.73)
−0.025
(−0.635)
4 4.450 ±0.015 ±0.015 4.434 +0.015 ±0.015 1.125 3.575 4.449
(113.03) (±0.381) (±0.381) (112.62) (+0.381) (±0.381) (28.58) (90.80) (113.00)
−0.035
(−0.889)
A
Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance. The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only. Entrance chamfer or radius is optional.
B
Measured at top of socket wall taper, just below entrance radius.
C
Dimensions of tools should be checked for consistency with fittings used. Socket bottom diameter must be equal to or smaller than entrance diameter.
D
Measured at bottom of socket wall taper, just above bottom radius.
8.3 Sampling—Select at random sufficient quantity of fit- 8.5.1 Prepare test assemblies in such a manner that each,
tings from each lot of shipment and test to determine that the whether individual fittings or groups of fittings, is a system
basic properties and dimensions are in conformance with this incorporating at least one length of pipe or tubing and one or
specification. more fittings in addition to end closures. Fuse all fittings’
outlets with the appropriate size pipe or tubing. One piece of
NOTE 1—For individual orders or specifications, only those tests and
numbers of tests specifically agreed upon between the purchaser and the pipe in the system shall have a minimum length equal to five
manufacturer need be conducted. pipe diameters.
8.4 Dimensions—Measure in accordance with Test Method 8.5.2 Short-Term Rupture Test—The test equipment,
D2122. procedures, and failure definition shall be as specified in Test
8.4.1 Maximum out-of-round tolerance on sockets applies Method D1599. Increase the hydrostatic pressure at a uniform
to the actual measured average inside diameter. rate such that the specimen fails between 60 and 70 s from the
start of the test. Minimum failure pressures are shown in Table
NOTE 2—Example—In the 1-in. IPS size, if the actual measured 4.
average inside socket entrance diameter was 1.281 in. (32.54 mm) then the
extreme measured diameters due to ovality can be 1.291 in. (32.79 mm) 8.5.3 Sustained Pressure Test—Prepare six fitting specimens
maximum and 1.271 in. (32.28 mm) minimum when the out-of-round as prescribed in 8.5.1
tolerance is 60.010 in. (2.54 mm). 8.5.3.1 Sustained pressure tests shall be conducted in accor-
8.5 Pressure Test: dance with Table 5 and Test Method D1598 using water as the
88
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2683
TABLE 3 Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene TubingA
A Socket Entrance DiameterB B Socket Bottom DiameterC,D C D

Maximum Maximum Socket Inside Diameter
Nominal Average Tolerance Average Tolerance on
Out-of- Out-of- Depth,
Tubing Diameter on Diameter Diameter Diameter min max
Round Round min
Size,in.
in. (mm)
12 ⁄ 0.585 +0.010 ±0.010 0.575 +0.010 ±0.010 0.625 0.500 0.585
(14.86) (+0.25) (±0.25) (14.61) (+0.25) (±0.25) (15.88) (12.70) (14.86)
−0.007 −0.007
(−0.18) (−0.18)
34 ⁄ 0.835 ±0.010 ±0.010 0.825 ±0.010 ±0.010 0.625 0.750 0.835
(21.21) (±0.25) (±0.25) (20.96) (±0.25) (±0.25) (15.88) (19.05) (21.21)
1 1.075 ±0.008 ±0.008 1.070 +0.008 ±0.008 0.625 0.850 1.078
(27.30) (±0.20) (±0.20) (27.18) (+0.20) (±0.20) (15.88) (21.59) (27.38)
−0.012
(−0.30)
11⁄4 1.330 ±0.008 ±0.010 1.322 ±0.008 ±0.010 0.687 1.250 1.330
(33.78) (±0.20) (±0.25) (33.58) (±0.20) (±0.25) (17.45) (31.75) (33.78)
A
Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance. The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only. Entrance chamfer or radius is optional.
B
Measured at top of socket wall taper, just below entrance radius.
C
Dimensions of tools should be checked for consistency with fittings used. Socket bottom diameter must be equal to or smaller than entrance diameter.
D
Measured at bottom of socket wall taper, just above bottom radius.
before the Table 5 “minimum average time before failure”

TABLE 4 Quick Burst Minimum Hoop Stress Requirements for constitutes failure to meet this requirement and no retest is
Water At 73°F (23°C) for SDR-PR PE Plastic Pipe FittingsA ,B
allowed.
Material psi (MPa)
Density Class 2 materials 2500 (17.24) 8.5.3.3 Provision for retest (if needed). The retest sample
Density Class 3 and 4 materials 2900 (20.00) shall be three specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and
A
For outside diameter controlled pipe, calculate internal test pressure in accor- material designation from the same time frame as the “test
dance with the following formula: sample”. For the retest, any specimen failure before the
2S “minimum average time before failure” at the retest condition
P5
S Do
t
21 D of lower stress and longer minimum average time before
failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement.
Where:
P = test pressure, psig (kPa) 9. Packaging and Package Marking
DO = measured outside diameter, in. (mm), and 9.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
9.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
B
Fiber Stress listed are to be calculated on the pipe being used in the test, not the 9.1.2 Material designation (such as, PE 27086, PE 3608, or
fitting.
PE 4710),
NOTE 3—Earlier editions of Specification D2683 included PE material
designations PE2406, PE3406, PE3407 and PE3408. Changes to Specifi-
pressurizing medium. The “test sample” shall be three speci- cation D3350 and PPI TR-3 led to changes in thermoplastic material
mens. Select one Table 5 Condition for the material designa- designation codes, resulting in material designation PE2406 being super-
tion and test the three specimen test sample. seded by material designations PE2606 and PE2708, material designation
8.5.3.2 Passing results are (a) non-failure for all three PE3406 being superseded by PE3606, material designation PE3407 being
discontinued, and material designation PE3408 being superseded by
specimens at a time equal to or greater than the “minimum material designations PE3608, PE3708, PE3710, PE4708 and PE4710.
average time before failure”, or (b) not more than one ductile Recognizing that a period of time is necessary for the dissemination of
specimen failure and the average time before failure for all information and to update specifications and literature, during the transi-
three specimens shall be greater than the specified “minimum tional period, product markings that include both older and newer
average time before failure” for the selected Table 5 Condition. materials designations, for example PE2406/PE2606, may occur.
For Table 5 Conditions 1 through 5: if more than one ductile 9.1.3 Fittings intended for the transport of potable water
failure occurs before the “minimum average time before shall include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
failure”, it is permissible to conduct one retest at a Table 5 evaluation for this purpose,
Condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time 9.1.4 Size, and
before failure for the material designation. For Table 5 Condi- 9.1.5 ASME SD-2683 or both ASME SD-2683 and ASTM
tion 6 no retest is permissible. Brittle failure of any specimen D2683.
89
SD-2683 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test RequirementsA,B

PE2606, PE2706, PE2708 PE3608 PE3708, PE3710, PE4710
PE4708
Test Pressure Hoop Stress Minimum Average Test PressureMinimum
Test A
, Time Before Failure, Hoop Average
Condition Temperature, psi (kPa)B
HoursB StressA , Time
ºF (ºC)B psi (kPa)B
Before
Failure,
HoursB
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
2S
P5
S Do
t
21 D
Where:
P = test pressure, psig (kPa)
DO = measured outside diameter, in. (mm), and
B
Test temperature tolerance ± 3.6ºF (± 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa. Note:
Table 5 conditions are based on PE validation requirements per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 test pressure hoop stress and six times greater
minimum average time before failure. Conditions 2 through 5 are linear stress and time interpolations between Conditions 1 and 6. The intent of multiple conditions is to
maintain equivalent performance criteria, but provide for retest in the event of ductile failure. The test pressure hoop stress levels for Conditions 2-5 are linear interpolations
for arbitrarily chosen time increments. An equivalent performance requirement, however, may be determined by arbitrarily choosing a test pressure hoop stress between
Conditions 1 and 6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For example for PE3710 and PE4710 material, at 670 psi test pressure hoop stress,
the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) x ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
9.2 Where the size of the fitting does not allow complete turer shall maintain such additional records as are necessary to
marking, identification marking may be omitted in the follow- confirm identification of all coded fittings.
ing sequence: size, designation number, material designation.
9.3 All required markings shall be legible and so applied as 10. Quality Assurance
to remain legible under normal handling and installation 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
practices. If indentation is used, it shall not reduce the wall manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
thickness to less than the minimum value for the fittings, and it with this specification and has been found to meet the
should be demonstrated that these marks have no effect on the requirements of this specification.
long-term strength of the fittings. In addition to the above, the
fittings shall bear an appropriate code number that will assure
identification on the fittings as to month of production and resin 11. Certification
formulas used in the production of said fittings. The manufac- 11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise specified in facilities for the performance of the inspection and test
the contract or purchase order, the producer is responsible for requirements specified herein, unless disapproved by the pur-
the performance of all inspection and test requirements speci- chaser. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the
fied herein. The producer may use his own or any other suitable inspections and tests set forth in this specification where such
90
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2683
inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material with Uniform Freight Classifications rules or National Motor
conforms to prescribed requirements. Freight Classifications rules.
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accordance with
inspection. Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for
Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procurement military agencies.
Packaging —Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Federal Government procurement
material shall be packaged in accordance with the supplier’s requirements should not be construed as an indication that the U.S.
standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at destination in Federal Government uses or endorses the products described in this
satisfactory condition and which will be acceptable to the specification.
carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall comply
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for the product to be used to convey or to be in con-
tact with potable water.
S3. Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for health effects portion of NSF Standard 14 by an acceptable
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and certifying organization when required by the regulatory author-
certified for conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61 or the ity having jurisdiction.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
91
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2737

TUBING
SD-2737
mandatory.)
93
SD-2737 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing

1.1 This specification covers polyethylene (PE) plastic tub- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
ing in outside diameters and SDR’s that are pressure rated for D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
water. Included are requirements for PE compounds, and D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
requirements and test methods for PE plastic tubing D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
workmanship, dimensions, elevated temperature sustained by Extrusion Plastometer
pressure, burst pressure and marking. D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
1.2 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, Under Constant Internal Pressure
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
notes and footnotes shall not be considered as requirements of Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
the specification. Notes and footnotes in tables and figures, and D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
Supplementary Requirements are requirements of the specifi- tics
cation. D1603 Test Method for Carbon Black Content in Olefin
Plastics
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical moplastic Pipe and Fittings
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In-
and are not considered standard. tended for Outdoor Applications
NOTE 1—Joining PE plastic tubing with fittings that require flaring the
tubing is not recommended because Practice D3140, the technique used to for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
make the flare has been withdrawn (discontinued). for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
NOTE 2—References and PE compound descriptions for PE2305, D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
PE2406, PE3306, PE3406, and PE3408 have been removed due to tings Materials
changes in Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3. For removed designations, D3140 Practice For Flaring Polyolefin Pipe And Tubing
refer to previous editions of Specification D2737, Specification D3350,
PPI TR-3 and PPI TR-4. The removal of these PE compounds does not D4218 Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black
affect pipelines that are in service. PE compounds and material designa- Content in Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-
tions resulting from changes in Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3 are Furnace Technique
addressed in Section 5. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the G154 Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for
test methods portion, Section 7, of this specification: This UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, G155 Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 2.2 APWA Standard:
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- APWA Uniform Color Code
tions prior to use.
94
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2737
2.3 NSF Standards: 2 3 HDS

PR 5 (1)
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components ~ SDR11 !
and Related Materials
Where:
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems
Components—Health Effects PR = pressure rating for water, 73°F (23°C), psi (kPa)
HDS = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73°F (23°C),
2.4 PPI Standards:
psi (kPa)
PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro-
SDR = standard dimension ratio
static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), NOTE 3—PR and HDS must have the same units. See Appendix X1 for
Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required maximum pressure ratings for water.
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate-
4.2 This specification covers PE tubing in standard dimen-
rials or Pipe
sion ratios SDR 7.3, SDR 9, and SDR 11.
PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List-
ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design 5. Materials
Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum 5.1 Polyethylene Compound—Polyethylene compounds
Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Pip- suitable for use in the manufacture of tubing under this
ing Materials or Pipe specification shall meet thermoplastic materials designation
codes PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall meet
3. Terminology
Table 1 requirements for PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or
3.1 Definitions—Unless otherwise specified, definitions are PE4710, and shall meet thermal stability, brittleness tempera-
in accordance with Terminology F412 and abbreviations are in ture and elongation at break requirements in accordance with
accordance with Terminology D1600. Specification D3350.
5.1.1 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—
4. Tubing Classification Polyethylene compounds shall meet Specification D3350 code
4.1 General—This specification covers PE plastic tubing C, D or E. In addition, Code C polyethylene compounds shall
made from PE compounds in three standard dimension ratios have 2 to 3 percent carbon black, and Code D or E polyethyl-
and pressure rated for water. Pressure ratings for water are ene compounds shall have sufficient UV stabilizer to protect
dependent on the PE compound in accordance with the tubing from deleterious UV exposure effects during unpro-
following relationship: tected outdoor shipping and storage for at least eighteen (18)
months.
NOTE 4—Pipe users should consult with the pipe manufacturer about
the outdoor exposure life of the product under consideration. Evaluation
of UV stabilizer in Code D or E PE compound using Practice D2565 or
Practice G154 or Practice G155 may be useful for this purpose.

Requirement PE2708 PE3608 PE4608 PE4710
Required Value
Minimum HDB at 140ºF
(60ºC), psi (MPa),
800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A
and PPI TR-3
HDS for water at 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
73°F (23°C) psi (MPa),
and PPI TR-3A
Melt flow rate #0.40 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min
per Test Method D1238 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 Cond. 190/2.16 or Cond. 190/2.16 or Cond. 190/2.16 or
min Cond. 190/21.6 #20 g/10 min #20 g/10 min #20 g/10 min
Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6
Specification D3350 Required Value

Cell Classification
Property Requirement
Density (natural base resin) 2 3 4 4
SCG Resistance 7 6 6 7
B
Color and UV Stabilizer Code C, D or E C, D or E C, D or E C, D or E
A
B
See 5.1.1.
95
SD-2737 ASME NM.3.1-2018
5.1.2 Colors for solid color, an external color layer or color uniform. It shall not be possible to cleanly separate any two
stripes—In accordance with the APWA Uniform Color Code, layers with a probe or point of a knife blade at any point.
blue shall identify potable water service; green shall identify
6.4 Carbon Black—Polyethylene tubing produced using
sewer service; and purple (lavender) shall identify reclaimed
Code C polyethylene compound per 5.1.1 shall contain 2 to 3%
water service. Yellow identifies gas service and shall not be
carbon black when tested in accordance with 7.5.
used.
5.2 Products intended for contact with potable water shall 6.5 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressure for tubing
be evaluated, tested and certified for conformance with NSF/ shall be as given in Table 4, when determined in accordance
ANSI Standard No. 61 or the health effects portion of NSF/ with 7.6 using a minimum hoop stress of 2520 psi (17.4 MPa)
ANSI Standard No. 14 by a certifying organization acceptable for Table 1 density cell 2 polyethylene compound or 2900 psi
to the authority having jurisdiction. (20.0 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 3 or 4 polyethylene
compound. In addition, the failure shall be ductile.
5.3 Rework Material—Clean polyethylene compound from
the manufacturer’s own tubing production that met 5.1 through 6.6 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure—Elevated
5.2 as new PE compound is suitable for re-extrusion into temperature sustained pressure tests for each polyethylene
tubing when blended with new PE compound having the same compound designation per Table 1 used in production at the
material designation. Tubing containing rework material shall facility shall be conducted twice annually per 7.7.
meet all the requirements of this specification. 6.7 Inside Surface Ductility for Tubing—Tubing shall be
tested for inside surface ductility in accordance with 7.8 or 7.9.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship—The tubing shall be homogeneous NOTE 6—Tensile elongation testing per 7.9 provides a quantifiable
result and is used for referee testing and in cases of disagreement.
throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign
inclusions, or other defects. The tubing shall be as uniform as
7. Test Methods
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties. See 5.1.2. 7.1 Conditioning—Condition as specified in the test
6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: method. Where conditioning is not specified in the test method,
6.2.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler- condition the test specimens at 73 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) without
ances shall be as shown in Table 2 when measured in regard to relative humidity for not less than 4 h prior to the test
accordance with 7.4. in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618, or at 73 6
6.2.1.1 Out-of-roundness—Out of roundness shall be in 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not less than 1 h in accordance with
accordance with Table 2 as extruded, but before coiling for Procedure D of Practice D618.
packaging when measured in accordance with 7.4. 7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in accordance with the
NOTE 5—Coiling may increase out-of-roundness, depending on the conditions specified in the test method, or if not specified in the
coiling method and coil dimensions. test method, at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) without regard to
6.2.2 Wall Thicknesses—The wall thicknesses and tolerance relative humidity.
shall be as shown in Table 3 when measured in accordance 7.3 Sampling—The number and selection of samples shall
with 7.4. Wall thickness shall be inclusive of all extruded be as specified in the test method, or if not specified in the test
concentric layers. method, sample selection shall be as agreed upon by the
6.2.3 Wall Thickness Variation—The wall thickness varia- purchaser and seller. In case of no prior agreement, any sample
tion shall not exceed 12 % when measured in accordance with selected by the testing laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
7.4. 7.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
6.2.4 Thickness of Outer Layer—For tubing produced by mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
simultaneous multiple extrusion, the outer concentric layer the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
shall be at least 0.020 in (0.5 mm) thick. portion of the tubing sample that is at least one pipe diameter
6.3 Bond—For tubing produced by simultaneous multiple away from an end closure. The entire marking shall be
extrusion, the bond between the layers shall be strong and documented in testing records.
TABLE 2 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PE Plastic Tubing

Outside
Tubing
Diameter, Outside Diameter Out-of-Roundness,
Size
in. (mm) Tolerance, in. (mm) in. (mm)
⁄
12 0.625 (15.87 ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.030 (0.76)
⁄
58 0.750 (19.05) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.030 (0.76)
⁄
34 0.875 (22.23) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.030 (0.76)
1 1.125 (28.58) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.030 (0.76)
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.93) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.030 (0.76)
1 1⁄ 2 1.625 (41.23) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.030 (0.76)
2 2.125 (53.98) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.030 (0.76)
96
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2737
TABLE 3 Wall Thickness and Tolerances for PE Plastic Tubing

Wall Thickness, in.A
SDR 7.3 SDR 9 SDR 11
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
Tubing Size, in. Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
⁄
12 0.086 +0.010 (2.18) (0.25) 0.069 +0.010 (1.75) (0.25) 0.062 +0.010 (1.57) (0.25)
5⁄ 8 0.103 +0.010 (2.62) (0.25) 0.083 +0.010 (2.11) (0.25) 0.068 +0.010 (1.73) (0.25)
3⁄ 4 0.120 +0.012 (3.05) (0.30) 0.097 +0.010 (2.46) (0.25) 0.080 +0.010 (2.03) (0.25)
1 0.154 +0.015 (3.91) (0.38) 0.125 +0.012 (3.18) (0.30) 0.102 +0.010 (2.59) (0.25)
1 1⁄ 4 0.188 +0.019 (4.78) (0.48) 0.153 +0.015 (3.89) (0.38) 0.125 +0.012 (3.18) (0.30)
1 1⁄ 2 0.233 +0.022 (5.92) (0.56) 0.181 +0.018 (4.60) (0.46) 0.148 +0.015 (3.76) (0.38)
2 0.291 +0.029 (7.39) (0.74) 0.236 +0.024 (5.99) (0.61) 0.193 +0.019 (4.90) (0.48)
A
plus the stated tolerance. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement. Wall thickness variation shall be in accordance with 6.2.3.
TABLE 4 Minimum Burst Pressure for PE Plastic Tubing Pipe

Minimum Burst PressureA psi (kPa)
SDR PE2708 PE3608, PE4608, PE4710
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
7.3 800 (5517) 921 (6352)
9 630 (4345) 725 (5000)
11 504 (3476) 580 (4000)
A
Minimum burst pressure calculated in accordance with:
2S
PB 21
Do
t
Where:
PB = burst test pressure, psi (kPa)
S = minimum hoop fiber stress, psi. (kPa)
S = 2520 psi (17,370 kPa) for Specification D3350 density cell 2 PE compound per Table 2.
S = 2900 psi (20,000 kPa) for Specification D3350 density cell 3 and 4 PE compound per Table 2.
Do = measured average inside diameter, in. (mm)
t = measured minimum wall thickness, in (mm).
Test temperature tolerance ±3.6ºF (± 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa);
7.4 Dimensions and Tolerances—Use any length of tubing 7.7.1 For the selected Table 5 Condition, passing results are
to determine the dimensions. Outside diameter, out-of- (a) non-failure for all three specimens at a time equal to or
roundness, and wall thickness shall be measured in accordance greater than the “minimum average time before failure”, or (b)
with Test Method D2122. not more than one ductile specimen failure and the average
7.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter of time before failure for all three specimens shall be greater than
the tubing in accordance with Test Method D2122. The average the specified “minimum average time before failure” for the
outside diameter is the arithmetic average of the maximum and selected Table 5 Condition, or (c) successful retest per 7.7.3.
minimum diameter at any cross section. The tolerance for 7.7.2 For the selected Table 5 condition, failure to meet this
out-of-roundness shall apply only to tubing prior to shipment. requirement is (a) brittle failure of any specimen when tested
7.5 Carbon Black—For all tubing manufactured with Code at Table 5 Condition 1 through 6, or (b) ductile failure of all
C polyethylene compound, determine in duplicate the carbon three specimens.
black content in accordance with Test Method D1603 or Test 7.7.3 Provision for Retest for Table 5 Conditions 1 through
Method D4218. 5—If a second ductile failure occurs before the “minimum
7.6 Burst Pressure—The test equipment, procedures and average time before failure”, it is permissible to conduct one
failure definitions shall be as specified in Test Method D1599. retest at a Table 5 Condition of lower stress and longer
minimum average time before failure for the material designa-
7.7 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—
tion. The retest sample shall be three additional specimens of
Elevated temperature sustained pressure tests for each Table 1
the same tubing size and material designation from the same
material designation used in production of tubing in accor-
time frame as the test sample per 7.7. For the retest, any
dance with this specification at the facility shall be conducted
specimen failure before the “minimum average time before
per D1598, and Table 5 using water as the pressurizing
failure” at the retest condition constitutes failure to meet this
medium. The “test sample” shall be three specimens of any
requirement. For Table 5 Condition 6 no retest is permissible.
tubing size or SDR. One Table 5 Condition for the applicable
material designation shall be selected for the test. 7.8 Bend-back Test Method:
97
SD-2737 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure TestA Requirements

PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
Test Test Pressure Minimum Test Pressure Minimum
Condition Temperature, Hoop Stress, Average Time Hoop Stress, Average Time
ºF (ºC) psi (kPa) Before Failure, psi (kPa) Before Failure,
hours hours
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
2S
P5 21
Do
t
Where:
P = test pressure, psi (kPa)
Do = measured average inside diameter, in. (mm)
Test temperature tolerance ± 3.6ºF (± 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
Conditions 1 and 6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For example for PE3710 and PE4710 compound designations, at 670 psi test
pressure hoop stress, the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours:
S
927 5 2001 s 750 2 670d 3
s 1200 2 200d
s 750 2 640d D
7.8.1 Squarely cut four 1 1⁄8 to 1 3⁄8 in. (29 to 35 mm) wide 8. Retest and Rejection
rings from tubing. Condition the rings per 7.1.
8.1 Except as provided in 7.7.3, if the results of any test(s)
7.8.2 Split each ring longitudinally so that when reverse do not meet the requirements of this specification, the test(s)
bent per 7.8.3, the pipe ID for each quadrant around the tubing shall be conducted again only by agreement between the
will be tested. purchaser and the seller. Under such agreement, minimum
7.8.3 In a well-lit area, perform the following procedure requirements shall not be lowered, changed, or modified, nor
within 5 min: (a) Bend each split ring specimen so that the shall specification limits be changed. If upon retest, failure
tubing inside surface is on the outside surface of the bend. (b) occurs, the quantity of product represented by the test(s) does
Using an apparatus such as a bench vise or other suitable not meet the requirements of this specification.
equipment, close the legs of the specimen together. When the
specimen legs are closed together, the top of the bend-back
9. Marking
specimen shall extend above the point of closure by 3 6 ½
times the minimum wall thickness per Table 3. (c) With the 9.1 Marking on the tubing shall include the following
unaided (naked) eye, visually examine the reverse-bent tubing information. Marking shall be spaced at intervals of not more
ID surface. than 5 ft (1.5 m). Marking shall be applied such that legibility
7.8.4 Visible brittle cracking or crazing indicates failure. is maintained after normal handling and installation.
7.9 Elongation-at-Break Test Method: 9.1.1 Tubing size (for example, 1 TUBING).
7.9.1 Five Test Method D638 Type III or Type IV speci- 9.1.2 Tubing SDR
mens cut in the longitudinal direction from locations equally 9.1.3 The PE material designation in accordance with the
spaced around the circumference of the tubing shall be material designation prescribed in Table 1 (for example,
conditioned per 7.1 and tested in accordance with Test Method PE3608).
D638 at a cross-head separation speed of 2 in. (50.8 mm) min. 9.1.4 Pressure rating for water in psi or kPa, (for example,
If the specimen thickness must be reduced by machining, the 160 psi. or 1103 kPa)
tubing ID surface shall be left unaltered. 9.1.5 ASME SD-2737 or both ASME SD-2737 and ASTM
7.9.2 —The percent elongation at break for each test speci- D2737.
men shall exceed 400 %. 9.1.6 The manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and a code
NOTE 7—Specimen machining that produces smooth surfaces and that identifies manufacturing location, PE compound source,
uniform thickness is necessary. Surface cuts or scratches and non-uniform manufacturing date and relevant production information such
thickness in the specimen gage length can detrimentally affect test results.
98
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2737
as extrusion line and shift. Upon request the manufacturer shall with this specification and has been found to meet the
provide an explanation of the code. requirements of this specification.
9.1.7 Tubing intended for the transport of potable water
shall also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the 11. Certification
evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the 11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
laboratory.
NOTE 8—Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must
obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned. 12. Keywords
12.1 CTS; CTS tubing; DR; OD controlled; PE pipe; PE
10. Quality Assurance tubing; plastic pipe; plastic tubing; potable water pipe; poly-
ethylene pipe; polyethylene tubing; potable water tubing;
10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
service pipe; service tubing; SDR; water pipe; water tubing;
water service pipe; water service tubing
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
99
SD-2737 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1.1 Maximum tubing pressure ratings for use with water water or other media, or for variations of internal or external
may be determined using PPI recommended hydrostatic design conditions.
stress (HDS) ratings for the PE compound per Section 5 and
Table 1. Maximum internal pressure ratings for cold water are X1.2 Information on HDS is available in Table 1, Test
shown in Table X1.1. At the manufacturer’s discretion and Method D2837, PPI TR-3 and PPI TR-4.
responsibility, other pressure ratings may be recommended for
TABLE X1.1 Maximum Pressure Rating, PR, for SDR-PR PE Pipe for Use With Water
Nominal Pressure RatingA,B psi (kPa)
PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
SDR
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
†
7.3 250 (1725) 315 (2170)
9† 200 (1380) 250 (1725)
11† 160 (1100) 200 (1380)
A
2HDS
PR 5
s SDR 2 1 d
Where:
PR = burst test pressure, psi (kPa)
HDS = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73°F (23°C), psi. (kPa) (Table 1)
SDR = standard inside dimension ratio
B
Table values rounded to nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
Editorially corrected in February 2012.
100
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
SPECIFICATION FOR CHLORINATED POLY(VINYL

CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
SD-2846/SD-2846M
(Identical with ASTM D2846/D2846M-14 except for additional requirements in section 15 and Annex A1, revised
marking requirements in para. 12.2.3, renumbering of section 16, and quality assurance requirement in para. 14.1 has
101
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and
Cold-Water Distribution Systems
1. Scope NOTE 2—Suggested hydrostatic design stresses and hydrostatic pressure

ratings for pipe, tubing, and fittings are listed in Appendix X1. Design,
1.1 This specification covers requirements, test methods, assembly, and installation considerations are discussed in Appendix X2.
and methods of marking for chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) An optional performance qualification and an in-plant quality control
plastic hot- and cold-water distribution system components program are recommended in Appendix X3.
made in one standard dimension ratio and intended for water 1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
service up to and including 180°F (82°C). These components test method portion, Sections 9 and 10, of this specification:
comprise pipe and tubing, socket-type fittings, street fittings, This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
plastic-to-metal transition fittings, solvent cements, and adhe- concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
sives. Requirements and methods of test are included for of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
materials, workmanship, dimensions and tolerances, hydro- health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
static sustained pressure strength, and thermocycling resis- limitations prior to use.
tance. The components covered by this specification are
intended for use in residential and commercial, hot and cold, 2. Referenced Documents
potable water distribution systems. 2.1 ASTM Standards:
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which Under Constant Internal Pressure
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for (CPVC) Compounds
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
NOTE 1—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases moplastic Pipe and Fittings
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious safety D2444 Test Method for Determination of the Impact Resis-
hazards should a system fail for any reason. tance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, Tup (Falling Weight)
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
not be considered as requirements of the specification. for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
F402 Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements,
1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
Pipe and Fittings
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
F493 Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
with the standard.
plastic Pipe and Fittings
102
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
F1960 Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX 2S/P 5 R 2 1 (1)
Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene
or
(PEX) Tubing
F1961 Specification for Metal Mechanical Cold Flare Com- 2 S/P 5 ~ D 0 / t ! 2 1 (2)
pression Fittings with Disc Spring for Crosslinked Poly- where:
ethylene (PEX) Tubing
S = stress in circumferential or hoop direction, psi (MPa),
F1807 Specification for Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a P = internal pressure, psi (MPa),
Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene D0 = average outside diameter, in. (mm),
(PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised Tem- t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm), and
perature (PE-RT) Tubing R = standard dimension ratio, SDR
F2080 Specification for Cold-Expansion Fittings with Metal
3.1.3 standard dimension ratio (SDR)—a selected series of
Compression-Sleeves for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)
numbers in which the average outside diameter to minimum
Pipe
wall thickness dimension ratios are constant for all sizes of
F2098 Specification for Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing
pipe and tubing in each standard dimension ratio, and which
SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing to Metal
are the ANSI Z17.1 Preferred Number Series 10 modified by
Insert and Plastic Insert Fittings
+1. SDR fittings shall by definition be equivalent in minimum
F2159 Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings Utilizing a
socket wall thickness to the minimum wall thickness of the
Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene
corresponding SDR and size of pipe or tubing, and the
(PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised Tem-
minimum body wall thickness shall be 125 % of that value.
perature (PE-RT) Tubing
F2434 Specification for Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a 3.1.4 standard material designation code—the chlorinated
Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene poly(vinyl chloride) material designation code shall consist of
(PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene/ the abbreviation CPVC followed by two digits indicating the
Aluminum/Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) ASTM type and grade in Arabic numerals. Where necessary, a
Tubing third and fourth digit shall be added to indicate the hydrostatic
F2735 Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings For SDR9 design stress for water at 73°F [23°C] in units of 100 psi [0.69
Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) and Polyethylene of MPa].
Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Tubing
4. Classification
2.2 ANSI Standards:
ANSI Z17.1-1958 Preferred Numbers 4.1 Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings—This specification classifies
2.3 Federal Standard: CPVC 4120 pipe, tubing, and fittings by a single standard
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies) dimension ratio which shall be SDR 11, by a maximum
2.4 Military Standard: continuous use temperature which shall be 180°F [82°C] and
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage by nominal pipe or tubing diameters from 1⁄4 in. [9.5 mm]
2.5 NSF Standards: through 2 in. [50 mm].
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related 4.2 Transition Fittings—This specification classifies transi-
Materials tion fittings intended for use up to and including 180°F [82°C]
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components— as CPVC-180°F on the basis of resistance to failure by
Health Effects thermocycling.
3. Terminology 4.3 Solvent Cements and Adhesives—This specification
3.1 Definitions: classifies solvent cements and adhesives meeting the require-
3.1.1 General—Definitions used in this specification are in ments contained herein as CPVC Solvent Cement or CPVC
accordance with Terminology F412, unless otherwise speci- Adhesive.
fied. The abbreviation for chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo-ride) is NOTE 3—This specification does not include requirements for pipe
CPVC. Plastic tubing denotes a particular diameter schedule of fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases.
plastic pipe in which the outside diameter of the tubing is equal
to the nominal size plus 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm). 5. Materials
3.1.2 relation between standard dimension ratio, stress, and 5.1 Basic Materials Description—Chlorinated poly(vinyl
internal pressure—the following expression is used to relate chloride) plastics used to make pipe, tubing, and fittings
standard dimension ratio, stress, and internal pressure for pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are categorized
and tubing: by two criteria; namely, basic short-term properties, and
long-term hydrostatic strength. Sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 respec-
tively define these categories.
5.1.1 Basic Short-Term Properties—This specification cov-
ers CPVC 41 pipe, tubing, and fittings made from plastic
materials meeting the mechanical strength, heat resistance,
flammability, and chemical resistance requirements for CPVC
23447 in Specification D1784.
103
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Outside Diameters, Wall Thicknesses, and Tolerances for CPVC 41, SDR 11, Plastic Pipe and TubingA
Outside Diameter, in. [mm] Wall Thickness, in. [mm]B
Max Out-of-
Nominal Tube or Pipe Size Average Tolerance on Average RoundC SDR 11
Min Tolerance
⁄ Tubing
14 0.375 [9.5] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.003 [±0.08] 0.055 [1.40]D +0.020 [+0.51]
3⁄8 Tube [10] 0.500 [12.7] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.003 [±0.08] 0.060 [1.52]D +0.020 [+0.51]
1⁄2 Tube [15] 0.625 [15.9] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.004 [±0.10] 0.060 [1.52]D +0.020 [+0.51]
3⁄4 Tube [20] 0.875 [22.2] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.005 [±0.13] 0.080 [2.03] +0.020 [+0.51]
1 Tube [25] 1.125 [28.6] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.006 [±0.15] 0.102 [2.59] +0.020 [+0.51]
11⁄4 Tube [32] 1.375 [34.9] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.007 [±0.18] 0.125 [3.18] +0.020 [+0.51]
11⁄2 Tube [40] 1.625 [41.3] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.008 [±0.20] 0.148 [3.76] +0.020 [+0.51]
2 Tube [50] 2.125 [54.0] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.010 [±0.25] 0.193 [4.90] +0.023 [+0.58]
11⁄2 Pipe [40] 1.900 [48.6] +0.006, −0.002 [+0.15, −0.05] ±0.008 [±0.20] 0.173 [4.39] +0.021 [+0.53]
2 Pipe [50] 2.375 [60.7] +0.006, −0.002 [+0.15, −0.05] ±0.010 [±0.25] 0.216 [5.49] +0.026 [+0.66]
A
All dimensions are in inches and millimetres. (1 in. = 25.4 mm.)
B
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness at any cross section. The maximum permitted wall thickness, at any cross section, is the minimum wall thickness plus the stated
tolerance. All wall tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement.
C
The maximum out-of-roundness applies to the average measured outside diameter.
D
For tubing sizes of 1⁄2 in. and below, wall thickness minimums are not a function of SDR.
NOTE 4—CPVC 23447 was formerly designated as CPVC Type IV interference fit based on the major diameter of pipe and tubing
Grade 1, and is herein designated as CPVC 41. This is also used in having a degree of out-of-roundness.
marking pipe, tubing, or fittings.
6.1.1.3 Out-of-Roundness—The maximum out-of-
5.1.2 Long-Term Hydrostatic Strength—This specification roundness requirements shown in Table 1 and Table 2 for pipe,
covers CPVC 41 pipe, tubing, and fittings which are further tubing, and fittings apply to the average measured diameter.
defined by hydrostatic design stress as CPVC 4120. Pipe and
NOTE 6—Example: In the 1-in. [25 mm] tubing size, if the measured
tubing are so defined on the basis of long-term hydrostatic average tubing diameter was 1.123 in. [28.52 mm], then the extreme
strength tests and are made from compounds having an measured diameters due to ovality could be 1.129 in. [28.68 mm]
established 180°F [82°C] hydrostatic design stress of 500 psi maximum and 1.117 in. [28.37 mm] minimum.
[3.45 MPa] or greater in accordance with Test Method D2837. 6.1.2 Pipe and Tubing:
Fittings are so defined by hydrostatic sustained pressure tests 6.1.2.1 Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness—The outside
on fitting assemblies, required by this specification (see 6.2), diameters and wall thicknesses for pipe and tubing shall meet
based on the hydrostatic strength of the corresponding pipe or the requirements for dimension and tolerance given in Table 1
tubing. when measured in accordance with Test Method D2122.
NOTE 5—No hydrostatic design stress, as such, exists for fittings until 6.1.2.2 Wall Thickness Range—The wall thickness range for
such time as long-term hydrostatic strength test methods for fittings are pipe and tubing shall be within 12 % when measured in
developed. accordance with Test Method D2122.
5.2 The PEX fitting ends of CPVC to PEX transition fittings 6.1.2.3 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting,
shall meet the material and dimensional requirements of the cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
corresponding PEX fitting standard. with 9.2.
6.1.2.4 Length—Pipe and tubing supplied in straight lengths
5.3 The PERT fitting ends of CPVC to PERT transition
shall have a tolerance on any specified length of +1⁄2, −0 in.
fittings shall meet the material and dimensional requirements
[+12.5, −0 mm].
of the corresponding PERT fitting standard.
6.1.3 Socket-Type Fittings:
5.4 Rework Material—Clean rework plastic material gener- 6.1.3.1 Dimensions—Fitting sockets, inside diameters
ated from the manufacturer’s own plastic tube or fitting (waterways), wall thicknesses, laying lengths, and reducing
production may be used by the same manufacturer provided the bushing minimums shall meet the requirements for dimension
pipe, tubing, or fittings meet all the requirements of this and tolerance given in Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4 when
specification. measured in accordance with Test Method D2122. The spigot
ends of street fittings shall meet the outside diameter and
6. Requirements for Pipe, Tubing and Fittings minimum wall requirements of Table 1.
6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances: 6.1.3.2 Alignment—The maximum angular variation of any
6.1.1 General: socket opening shall not exceed 1⁄2 ° off the true centerline axis.
6.1.1.1 Wall Minimums—Table 1 and Table 2 show wall 6.1.4 Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
thickness minimums. Calculated SDR 11 fitting wall thick- 6.1.4.1 Basic Dimensions—Plastic parts of plastic-to-metal
nesses that fall below 0.102 in. [2.59 mm] for the fitting socket transition fittings shall meet the dimensional requirements of
bottom, or 0.128 in. [3.25 mm] for the fitting body, shall be Table 1 and Table 2, where applicable, with the following
arbitrarily increased to these values. exceptions. Such parts shall be exempted from the require-
6.1.1.2 Interference Fit—The diameters and tolerances in ments for inside diameter (waterway) and wall thickness
Table 1 and Table 2 provide for socket-type joints having an tolerance.
104
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
TABLE 2 Tapered Socket Dimensions for CPVC 41, SDR 11, Plastic Pipe and Tubing FittingsA,B
A Socket Entrance Diameter, in. [mm] B Socket Bottom Diameter, in. [mm]
Nominal Tube
or Pipe Size Tolerance on C Tolerance on
Average Max Out-of-Round Average Max Out-of-Round C
Average Average
⁄ Tube
38 [10] 0.508 [12.90] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.003 [±0.08] 0.494 [12.55] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.003 [±0.08]
⁄ Tube
12 [15] 0.633 [16.08] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.004 [±0.10] 0.619 [15.72] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.004 [±0.10]
⁄ Tube
34 [20] 0.884 [22.45] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.005 [±0.13] 0.870 [22.10] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.005 [±0.13]
1 Tube [25] 1.135 [28.83] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.006 [±0.15] 1.121 [28.47] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.006 [±0.15]
11⁄4 Tube [32] 1.386 [35.20] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.007 [±0.18] 1.372 [34.85] ±0.003 [±0.08] ±0.007 [±0.18]
11⁄2 Tube [40] 1.640 [41.66] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.008 [±0.20] 1.622 [41.20] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.008 [±0.20]
2 Tube [50] 2.141 [54.38] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.010 [±0.25] 2.123 [53.92] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.010 [±0.25]
11⁄2 Pipe [40] 1.918 [48.72] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.008 [±0.20] 1.900 [48.26] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.008 [±0.20]
2 Pipe [50] 2.393 [60.78] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.010 [±0.25] 2.375 [60.33] ±0.004 [±0.10] ±0.010 [±0.25]
C Socket Length, D Inside Diameter, Wall Thickness, min,D in. [mm] Entrance; min EW
min, in. [mm] min, in. [mm] ( Ea) Socket Entrance (Eb) Socket Bottom F EX EZ, in. [mm]
0.500 [12.70] 0.364 [9.25] 0.068 [1.73] 0.102 [2.59] 0.128 [3.25] 0.034 [0.86]
0.500 [12.70] 0.489 [12.42] 0.068 [1.73] 0.102 [2.59] 0.128 [3.25] 0.034 [0.86]
0.700 [17.78] 0.715 [18.16] 0.080 [2.03] 0.102 [2.59] 0.128 [3.25] 0.034 [0.86]
0.900 [22.86] 0.921 [23.39] 0.102 [2.59] 0.102 [2.59] 0.128 [3.25] 0.034 [0.86]
1.100 [27.94] 1.125 [28.58] 0.125 [3.18] 0.125 [3.18] 0.156 [3.96] 0.042 [1.07]
1.300 [33.02] 1.329 [33.76] 0.148 [3.76] 0.148 [3.76] 0.185 [4.70] 0.049 [1.24]
1.700 [43.18] 1.739 [44.17] 0.193 [4.90] 0.193 [4.90] 0.241 [6.12] 0.064 [1.63]
1.375 [34.92] 1.494 [37.95] 0.173 [4.39] 0.173 [4.39] 0.216 [5.49] 0.058 [1.47]
1.500 [38.10] 1.933 [49.10] 0.216 [5.49] 0.216 [5.49] 0.270 [6.86] 0.072 [1.83]
A
B
All sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only.
C
Maximum out-of-roundness applies to the average measured inside diameter.
D
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness at any cross section.
TABLE 3 Minimum Dimensions from Center to End of Socket (Laying Length) for CPVC 41, SDR 11 Plastic Pipe
and Tubing FittingsA ,B,C
Nominal Tube or Pipe Size G MinD , in. [mm] J MinD , in. [mm] N MinD , in. [mm]
⁄ Tube
38 [10] 0.359 [9.12] 0.174 [4.42] 0.102 [2.59]
⁄ Tube
12 [15] 0.382 [9.70] 0.183 [4.65] 0.102 [2.59]
3⁄4 Tube [20] 0.507 [12.88] 0.235 [5.97] 0.102 [2.59]
1 Tube [25] 0.633 [16.08] 0.287 [7.29] 0.102 [2.59]
11⁄4 Tube [32] 0.758 [19.25] 0.339 [8.61] 0.102 [2.59]
11⁄2 Tube [40] 0.884 [22.45] 0.391 [9.93] 0.102 [2.59]
2 Tube [50] 1.134 [28.83] 0.495 [12.57] 0.102 [2.59]
11⁄2 Pipe [40] 1.022 [25.96] 0.448 [11.38] 0.102 [2.59]
2 Pipe [50] 1.260 [32.00] 0.547 [13.89] 0.102 [2.59]
A
B
All dimensions not shown shall be in accordance with those in Table 2.
C
D
Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance.
105
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Dimensions of Reducer Bushings for CPVC 41, SDR 11, Socket-Type, Plastic Pipe and Tubing FittingsA,B ,C,D
A
Tubing socket dimensions, A, B, and C, and tolerances on these dimensions shall be the same as in Table 2. The minimum length of the male end of the bushing or
coupling, CM, shall be the same as C in Table 2, but in any case the male end shall bottom in the mating fitting. Minimum waterway dimensions, D and DJ, shall be the
same as D in Table 2. Minimum wall dimensions, EJ and EN, apply to the larger and smaller sizes joined respectively, and shall be the same as the corresponding values
for Ea in Table 2.
B
The minimum socket wall thickness for reducing bushings shall be 102 in. [2.59 mm]. If the socket wall thickness exceeds the total of EJ and EN calculated from the
appropriate Eb values in Table 2 and the reducer bushing is cored, the inner socket shall be reinforced from the outer wall by a minimum of three ribs extending the full
depth of the coring.
C
The transition from D to DM shall be straight, tapered as shown, or radiused, at the discretion of the manufacturer.
D
A taper on the male end of a bushing is optional. If a taper is used, it shall be a positive taper in the same direction as the taper in the socket. Whether a taper is used
or not, all diameters X shall conform to the diameter and tolerance for the corresponding size of tubing shown in Table 1.
TABLE 5 Minimum Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Requirements

6.1.4.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads, for CPVC 4120, SDR 11, Pipe, Tubing, and Fitting Assemblies
threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in Tested in Either Water or Air Bath External Environment at 180°F
accordance with 9.5. [82°C]A
6.1.5 CPVC to PEX and CPVC to PERT Transition Fittings: Test Con- Test Dura- Hydrostatic Test Pressure
6.1.5.1 Basic Dimensions: dition tion Water Bath Air Bath
(1) CPVC spigot-ends of CPVC to PEX and CPVC to
PERT fittings shall meet the dimensional requirements of Table A 6 min 521 psi 551 psi
[3 590 kPa] [3 800 kPa]
1, where applicable, with the following exceptions. Such parts B 4h 364 psi 403 psi
shall be exempted from the requirements for inside diameter (2 510 kPa) [2 780 kPa]
(waterway) and wall thickness tolerance and, A
Test conditions were calculated from the following experimentally derived, 95 %
(2) CPVC tapered socket-ends of CPVC to PEX and CPVC confidence, rupture pressure versus time relationships for CPVC 41, SDR 11, pipe
and tubing at 180°F [82°C]. Pressure, P, and time, t, are in psi and h respectively.
to PERT transition fittings shall meet the dimensional require- The 50 % confidence relationships are given for information only.
ments of Table 2 where applicable. log P = − 0.085155 log t + 2.726805 (50 % confidence in air)
(3) The PEX fitting end of CPVC to PEX and CPVC to log P = −0.085155 log t + 2.656225 (95 % confidence in air)
log P = −0.097269 log t + 2.690464 (50 % confidence in water)
PERT transition fittings shall meet the applicable requirements log P = −0.097269 log t + 2.619884 (95 % confidence in water)
of the corresponding ASTM fitting standard. See the following
specifications for these requirements: F1960, F1961, F1807,
F2080, F2098, F2159, F2434 and F2735.
for predicting compliance with the sustained pressure requirements of
6.2 Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure: Table 5. Such correlations will necessarily differ with the size, wall
6.2.1 General—Pipe, tubing, and fittings (tested as assem- thickness, and geometry of individual components. Test Method D2444
blies) shall meet the minimum hydrostatic sustained pressure using Tup A and Holder A is suggested for nominal diameters of 1 in. [25
requirements of both test conditions shown in Table 5 when mm] and above. For smaller components, a guided mandrel type of
tested in accordance with 9.3. impacter such as the Gardner Impacter equipped with a 1⁄2 in. [12.7 mm]
radius mandrel is suggested. Drop impact is not included in this specifi-
6.2.2 Pipe and Tubing Quality—Test Condition B shall be cation directly as a quality requirement because of the wide test scatter
termed the primary sustained pressure test for pipe and tubing normally associated with this test, and also because of the wide differences
and shall be used for quality control (see Appendix X3). Test in value over the range of sizes and components covered in this
Condition A shall be termed the secondary sustained pressure specification.
test for pipe and tubing and shall be used for periodic 6.3 Thermocycling—Transition fittings (other than metal
performance qualification. Failure to pass either test is cause socket-type transitions for use with adhesives), assembled
for rejection. according to the manufacturer’s instructions, shall not separate
6.2.3 Fitting Quality—Test Condition A shall be termed the or leak when thermocycled 1000 times between the tempera-
primary sustained pressure test for fittings and shall be used for tures of 60°F and 180°F [16°C and 82°C] in accordance with
quality control (see Appendix X3). Test Condition B shall be 9.3.
termed the secondary sustained pressure test for fittings and
shall be used for periodic performance qualification. Failure to
pass either test is cause for rejection.
NOTE 7—Drop weight impact resistance is correlatable with hydrostatic
sustained pressure resistance for CPVC 41 components, and may be useful
106
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
TABLE 6 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Strength Requirements for TABLE 7 Minimum Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Requirements
Nominal 2-in. [50-mm] CPVC Solvent Cemented Joints after 2 h for CPVC Socket-Type Adhesive Joint Assemblies Tested Either
Drying at Test Temperature in Water Bath or Air Bath External Environment at 180°F [82°C]A
Temperature Burst Pressure Test Pressure
Test Duration, h
73.4°F [23°C] 400 psi [2 760 kPa] Water Bath Air Bath
180°F [82°C] 200 psi [1 380 kPa]
10 000 170 psi 207 psi
[1 170 kPa) (1 430 kPa)
A
Test conditions were calculated from the experimentally derived, 95 % confi-
7. Requirements for Solvent Cement and Adhesive Joints dence limit, rupture pressure versus time relationships for CPVC 41, SDR 11, pipe
and tubing noted in Table 5. It is implied that CPVC adhesive joints meeting the
7.1 CPVC Solvent Cements: sustained pressure requirements of 7.2.2 would necessarily pass the less rigorous
requirements of 6.2.1.
NOTE 8—CPVC solvent cements may exist which meet the require-
ments of the specification when used in accordance with the manufactur-
er’s recommendations, without a primer or cleaner. It is recommended that
those CPVC solvent cements which may be used without a primer or 9. Test Methods for Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
cleaner be clear or yellow in color. Otherwise, it is recommended that
CPVC solvent cement requiring the use of a primer or cleaner be orange 9.1 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of pipe, tubing, or
in color. Color identification is recommended to facilitate cement fittings, as agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller,
recognition, to prevent the misuse of the cement and to minimize the shall be selected at random from each lot or shipment and
unintentional use of other cements that may fail at elevated service
temperatures.
tested to determine conformance with this specification. In the
case of no prior agreement, random samples selected by the
7.1.1 General—CPVC solvent cements, for use in CPVC testing laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
41, plastic-to-plastic, socket-type joints shall meet the require- 9.1.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
ments set forth in Specification F493. mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
7.1.2 Hydrostatic Burst Strength—2-in. [50-mm] CPVC the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
solvent cement joints shall exceed the minimum hydrostatic portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away from
burst strength requirements given in Table 6 after a maximum an end closure.
drying interval of 2 h when tested in accordance with 10.1.1.
Failure to pass the burst requirement at either temperature is 9.2 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe, 2 in.
cause for rejection. [50-mm] long, between parallel plates in a suitable press until
7.1.3 Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Strength—1⁄2-in. [15- the distance between the plates is 40 % of the outside diameter
mm] CPVC solvent cement joints shall meet the requirements of the pipe or the walls of the pipe touch, whichever occurs
of 6.2 when tested in accordance with 9.3. first. The rate of loading shall be uniform and such that the
7.1.4 Safe Handling of Solvent Cement—Refer to Practice compression is completed within 5 min. Upon removal of the
F402. load, examine the specimens for evidence of splitting,
7.2 CPVC Adhesives:
7.2.1 General—CPVC adhesives (other than CPVC solvent 9.3 Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure:
cement), shall qualify for use in CPVC socket-type joints by a 9.3.1 Summary of Test Method—This test method describes
rigorous simulated use testing program as further defined in a pass-fail test for CPVC 41 pipe, tubing, or fittings (tested as
7.2.2 and 7.2.3. CPVC adhesives shall be tested in the largest assemblies) subjected to a constant internal hydrostatic pres-
size joint and in the exact type of joint for which they are sure for a predetermined period of time. Test conditions are
intended; that is, 2-in. [50-mm] plastic-to-metal or 2-in. [50- based on known rupture pressure versus time relationships for
mm] plastic-to-plastic. standard CPVC 41 components (see footnote to Table 5). The
7.2.2 Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Strength—Socket-type external test environment shall be either water or air; however,
CPVC adhesive joints, made and cured according to the test pressures differ depending on the environment selected
adhesive manufacturer’s instructions, shall not separate or leak (see Table 5).
when tested in accordance with 10.2 at the hydrostatic sus- 9.3.2 Apparatus:
tained pressure condition given in Table 7. 9.3.2.1 Constant-Temperature Environment—Either a wa-
7.2.3 Thermocycling—Socket-type CPVC adhesive joints, ter bath or an air bath capable of maintaining a constant and
made and cured according to the adhesive manufacturer’s uniform temperature of 180 6 1.8°F [82 6 1°C] throughout.
instructions, shall not separate or leak when thermocycled 9.3.2.2 Pressurizing System—A pressure source capable of
10 000 times between the temperatures of 60°F and 180°F rapidly and continuously applying a constant hydrostatic
[16°C and 82°C] in accordance with 10.2. pressure, controlled to 610 psi [669 kPa] or better, to the test
specimens.
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 9.3.2.3 Timing Device—Any clock capable of accuracy to
within 1 % of the total test time.
8.1 Workmanship—The pipe and fittings shall be homoge-
9.3.2.4 Closure Fittings—Any suitable specimen closure
neous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign
that allows “free-end” mounting, is free of leaks, and will not
inclusions, or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as
contribute to end failures.
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties. NOTE 9—Various types of compression and flared, metal fittings have
107
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 8 Minimum Suggested Drying Times for Solvent 9.4 Thermocycling:

Cemented Fitting Assemblies in Air at 180°F [82°C] 9.4.1 Summary of Method—This method describes a pass-
Test Condition Suggested Drying Time at fail test for thermally cycling CPVC plastic-to-metal transition
(from Table 5) 180°F [82°C], h
fitting assemblies over a critical temperature range for a
A 4
B 16
selected number of cycles while subjected to a nominal internal
pressure. The test provides a measure of resistance to failure
due to the combined effects of differential thermal expansion
and creep for CPVC plastic-to-metal transition fittings intended
been found to be acceptable. Socket-type CPVC 41 caps are also for continuous use up to and including 180°F [82°C].
acceptable provided that the necessary solvent cemented or adhesive joints 9.4.2 Apparatus—A nitrogen or air source capable of main-
are suitably dried or cured (refer to 9.3.3.2).
taining a nominal internal pressure of 100 6 10 psi [690 6 69
9.3.3 Sampling and Specimen Preparation: kPa) on the specimens is required. The immersion system shall
9.3.3.1 Pipe and Tubing—Select at random specimens of at consist of two water reservoirs controlled at 60 6 3.6°F [16 6
least seven times the nominal diameter in length, but in any 2°C] and 180 6 3.6°F [82 6 2°C]. The specimens shall be
case not shorter than 10 in. [250 mm]. Take three specimens for cycled from one reservoir to the other or the hot and cold water
quality control testing. Take six specimens for qualification or shall be alternately cycled over the test specimens automati-
referee testing. cally and returned to the proper reservoir.
9.3.3.2 Fittings—Select specimens at random. Take three
NOTE 10—Automatic cycling may be accomplished by pumping from
specimens for quality control testing. Take six specimens for each reservoir through a delivery system having timer-actuated valves to
qualification or referee testing. Assemble the fittings, individu- a specimen water trough having synchronized, timer-actuated return
ally or collectively, using suitable lengths of CPVC 41 pipe or drains. Any automatic apparatus shall provide for complete immersion of
tubing and CPVC solvent cement or CPVC adhesive. Use only the test specimens in the trough.
pipe or tubing and solvent cement or adhesive meeting the 9.4.3 Sampling and Specimen Preparation— Select at ran-
requirements of this specification. Assemble the joints in dom six specimens of the type and size of CPVC plastic-to-
accordance with the cement manufacturer’s instructions. Allow metal transition fitting to be tested. Assemble the fittings with
solvent cemented fitting assemblies to dry at elevated suitable lengths of pipe or tubing meeting the requirements of
temperature, up to 180°F [82°C] maximum, in a forced-air this specification, and attach to a common manifold. Assemble
oven until all joints are sufficiently strong to eliminate joint strictly according to the instructions of the transition fitting
failures during the test. Minimum suggested drying times are manufacturer. If plastic threads are to be mated to metal
shown in Table 8. Cure assemblies prepared with CPVC threads, use the thread sealant intended for use with the
adhesives according to the adhesive manufacturer’s instruc- threaded transition. Close the specimen assembly with any
tions until the adhesive joints are sufficiently strong to elimi- suitable end closures that allow “free-end” mounting and will
nate joint failures during the test. In no case, however, should not leak under the thermocycling conditions, and connect the
adhesive joints be cured at a temperature higher than 180°F specimen assembly to the pressure source.
[82°C]. 9.4.4 Procedure—Pressure the specimen assembly with ni-
9.3.4 Procedure—After curing all cemented or adhesive trogen in air 100 6 10 psi [690 6 69 kPa]. Immerse in 60 6
joints used, attach suitable end closures where necessary. Fill 3.6°F [16 6 2°C] water to determine if there are any initial
the specimen with water, making certain to avoid entrapment leaks. All leaks shall be eliminated before the thermocycling
of air. Condition the test specimen at 180 6 1.8°F [82 6 1°C] test is started. Thermally cycle the specimen assembly either
for a minimum of 30 min if using a water bath, or 4 h if using manually or automatically, and under an internal pressure of
an air bath. Attach the specimen to the pressure source, and 100 6 10 psi [6906 69 kPa] alternately between 60 6 3.6°F
place it on test at 180 6 1.8°F [826 1°C] under the proper [16 6 2°C] and 180 6 3.6°F [82 6 2°C] by means of
hydrostatic pressure selected from Table 5. Start the timer immersion in water using the following test cycle:
immediately. Hold the test pressure and temperature as close as Water immersion at 180°F [82°C] 2 minutes (min)
possible to the specified values, but in any case to within 6 10 Air immersion at ambient 2 minutes (max)
psi [669 kPa] and 1.8°F [1°C] respectively. At the end of the Water immersion at 60°F [16°C] 2 minutes (min)
Air immersion at ambient 2 minutes (max)
specified minimum time interval, isolate the specimen from the
pressure source and check for any continuous loss of pressure Upon the completion of 1000 thermal cycles, immerse the
resulting from transmission of water through the specimen. specimen assembly again in 60 6 3.6°F [16 6 2°C] water and
Any such continuous loss of pressure, resulting from bursting check for any sign of gas leakage. Any evidence of leakage at
or weeping of the test specimens as defined in Test Method the transition fitting or separation of the transition fitting from
D1598, shall constitute failure. If joint leakage or joint sepa- the pipe or tubing constitutes a failure.
ration has occurred, the test shall be repeated using a longer 9.4.5 Interpretation of Results—Failure of any one of six
joint drying or curing cycle. specimens tested shall constitute failure in this test.
9.3.5 Interpretation of Results: 9.5 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
9.3.5.1 For Quality Control—Failure of any one of three accordance with Specification F1498.
specimens tested shall constitute failure in this test.
9.3.5.2 For Performance Qualification—Failure of any one 10. Tests for Solvent Cement and Adhesive Joints
of six specimens tested shall constitute failure in this test. 10.1 Test for Solvent Cement Joints:
108
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
10.1.1 Hydrostatic Burst Strength—Determine the mini- making the evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals
mum hydrostatic burst strength for CPVC solvent cemented specified by the laboratory,
joints according to Test Method D1599, except as herein 12.2.3 ASME SD-2846/SD-2846M or both ASME SD-
specified. Test assemblies containing at least six nominal 2-in. 2846/SD-2846M and ASTM D2846/D2846M,
[50-mm] solvent cemented joints prepared for CPVC 41 pipe 12.2.4 Material designation in accordance with 5.1.2
or tubing and fittings meeting the requirements of this speci- (CPVC 4120),
fication. Assemble the joints in accordance with the solvent 12.2.5 Pressure rating (see Appendix X1) at 180°F [82°C].
cement manufacturer’s instructions. After attaching end 12.2.6 Nominal size,
closures, fill the specimen assembly with water and condition 12.2.7 Standard dimension ratio (SDR 11), and
in water at the test temperature for 2 h maximum. Then test 12.2.8 A code number identifying the compound and the
immediately. Increase the internal pressure at a constant rate so date of manufacture.
as to reach the minimum burst requirement in 60 to 70 s.
Leakage or separation at any of the joints tested at less than the 12.3 Pipe and Tubing—Markings 12.2.1 through 12.2.7
minimum hydrostatic burst requirement specified in Table 6 shall be required on pipe and tubing at intervals of not more
shall constitute failure in this test. than 5 ft [1.5 m]. Marking shall be applied without indentation
in some permanent manner so as to remain legible under
10.2 Test for Adhesive Joints: normal handling and installation practice.
10.2.1 General—Prepare a test assembly containing at least
six adhesive joints of the largest nominal diameter and the 12.4 Socket-Type Fittings—Markings 12.2.1 through 12.2.4
exact type (plastic-to-plastic, or plastic-to-metal) for which the shall be required on socket-type fittings, except where size
adhesive is intended to qualify. Make and cure the adhesive makes such marking impractical. Where markings are omitted,
joints in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer’s fittings shall be identified by some symbol which is defined in
instructions, but in no case above 180°F [82°C]. The CPVC 41 the manufacturer’s trade literature. Marking on fittings shall be
pipe or tubing and fittings used in the assembly shall meet the molded, hot stamped, or applied in some other permanent
requirements of this specification. manner so as to remain legible under normal handling and
10.2.2 Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure for Adhesive Joints— installation practice. Where recessed marking is used, care
Test in accordance with 9.2, but at the conditions in Table 7 shall be taken to see that wall thicknesses are not reduced
which require a test duration of 10 000 h. Any evidence of below the specified minimums.
leaking or separation at the adhesive joint, or adhesive-related 12.5 Transition Fittings—Markings 12.2.1 through 12.2.3
bursting, weeping, or ballooning of the CPVC 41 components shall be required on CPVC plastic-to-metal transition fittings in
adjacent to the joint, shall constitute failure. Failure of any one addition to the designation CPVC.
of six joint specimens tested shall constitute failure in this test. 12.6 CPVC to PEX and CPVC to PERT Transition
10.2.3 Thermocycling for Adhesive Joints—Test in accor- Fittings—Markings 12.1 through 12.2.3 shall be required to be
dance with 9.3, but carry the test to 10 000 cycles. Any marked on the transition fittings in addition to the standard
evidence of leakage or separation at the adhesive joint consti- number to which the PEX or PERT fitting end portion of the
tutes a failure. Failure of any one of six joint specimens tested transition is manufactured.
shall constitute failure in this test.
12.7 Solvent Cements and Adhesives—Solvent cements and
11. Retest and Rejection adhesives shall be labeled in accordance with 12.2.1 through
11.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the require- 12.2.3 in addition to the designation CPVC Solvent Cement or
ments of this specification, the tests(s) shall be conducted again CPVC Adhesive.
only by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under NOTE 12—Certain regional air quality districts have established criteria
such agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered, regarding limits on volatile organic content levels for certain products,
changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed. including CPVC solvent cement. Both the cement producer and user
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre- should ensure that the product complies with the specific air quality
district requirements as determined by the test methods specified by that
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this air quality district. It is recommended that the air quality district and the
specification. air quality district’s regulation to which the cement conforms be indicated
on the label.
obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
13. Safe Handling of Solvent Cement
12. Product Marking
13.1 Refer to Practice F402 for information on safe han-
12.1 Quality of Marking—The marking shall be applied to dling of solvent cements.
the pipe in such a manner that it remains legible (easily read)
after installation and inspection. 14. Quality Assurance
12.2 Content of Marking: 14.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
12.2.1 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark), and production manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
code, with this specification and has been found to meet the re-
12.2.2 Components intended for the transport of potable quirements of this specification.
water shall also include the seal or mark of the laboratory
109
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
15. Certification 16. Keywords

15.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1. 16.1 cold-water pipe; CPVC piping; hot-water pipe; water
distribution piping
These requirements apply only to Federal/Military procurement, not domestic sales of transfers.
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
ment:
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to convey or to be in contact with
potable water.
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested and acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
110
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
APPENDIXES
X1. HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESS
X1.1 Hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the Plas- SDR 11, components meeting the requirements of this speci-
tics Pipe Institute are used to pressure rate CPVC plastic pipe fication.
and tubing. These design stresses are based on the 100 000-h
hydrostatic strength of the pipe and tubing obtained in accor- X1.4 These hydrostatic design stresses are not suitable for
dance with Test Method D2837. Additional information regard- materials that show a negative departure from a straight-line
ing the method of test and other criteria used in developing plot of log stress versus log time-to-failure. All of the data
these hydrostatic design stresses may be obtained from the available to date on CPVC materials made in the United States
Plastics Pipe Institute, Division of the Society of the Plastics and tested in the form of pipe, tubing, or cured fitting
Industry, 355 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017. assemblies meet this requirement. Experience of the industry
indicates that CPVC hot- and cold-water distribution systems
X1.2 Independent methods for determining the hydrostatic made from components meeting the requirements of this
design stress of fittings have yet to be developed due to the specification give satisfactory service under normal conditions
complicating effects of fitting geometry. Instead, fittings and at this temperature-pressure rating.
assembled systems carry an implied pressure rating equivalent
to that of the corresponding pipe or tubing on the basis of
actual equivalent hydrostatic performance of assembled sys- TABLE X1.1 Hydrostatic Design Stresses and Pressure Ratings
tems for periods exceeding 10 000 h. The sustained pressure for CPVC 4120, SDR 11, Hot-Water Distribution Systems
requirements of 6.2 for fittings, tested as assembled systems, Hydrostatic Pressure Rating
Rated Temperature
are derived from the rupture pressure-time relationship for pipe Design Stress for Water
and tubing (see footnote to Table 5). 73.4°F [23°C] 2000 psi 400 psi
[13.8 MPa] [2.8 MPa]
X1.3 The hydrostatic design stresses and pressure ratings in 180°F [82°C] 500 psi 100 psi
[3.5 MPa] [0.7 MPa]
Table X1.1 apply to systems assembled from CPVC 4120,
111
SD-2846/SD-2846M ASME NM.3.1-2018
X2. DESIGN, ASSEMBLY, AND INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
X2.1 Design ence dry-fit exists when the pipe or tubing makes contact with
the fitting socket wall between one third and two thirds of the
X2.1.1 Thermal Expansion—The linear thermal expansion
way into the socket.
rate for CPVC is approximately 1⁄2 in. for each 10°F tempera-
ture change for each 100 ft [8 mm for each 10°C temperature X2.2.1.2 Cutting—Pipe and tubing may be cut to length
with tubing cutters. Tubing cutters with thin cutting wheels
change for each 10 m] of pipe or tubing. When installing long
designed specially for plastic are recommended. Where tubing
runs of pipe allow 1⁄16 to 3⁄32 in. longitudinal clearance per foot
cutters are not available, a saw and mitre box may be used.
[5 to 7 mm per metre] of run to accommodate thermal
Burrs and ridges caused by handling or cutting must be
expansion. Proper design includes offsets of 12 in. [300 mm] or
removed before assembling a joint.
more every 10 ft [3 m] on vertical risers if they are restrained
by horizontal branches at each floor level. Pipe should not be X2.2.1.3 Solvent Cleaning—When recommended by the
anchored rigidly to a support but rather be secured with broad, cement manufacturer, organic liquids can be used as a cleaning
smooth hangers providing for a degree of movement. solvent for CPVC 41 components. These organic liquids
should have a low solvation power for CPVC, to prevent
X2.1.2 Support Spacing—The maximum recommended mistaken use of the cleaning solvent for a cement. Uncemented
spacing between supports is 3 ft [1 m] for sizes 1 in. or smaller joints with a good solvent. THF for instance, will pass the usual
and 4 ft [1.2 m] for larger sizes. cold water pressure check but are likely to fail later in hot water
service.
X2.1.3 Water Heaters—Components covered by this speci-
fication are not intended for use at temperatures above 180°F X2.2.1.4 Step-by-Step Assembly—Correct assembly con-
[82.2°C]. Hence, they may not be suitable for use with the sists of the following steps: (1) cut the pipe square; (2) remove
instantaneous type (coil or immersion) water heater. They are burrs; ( 3) check for interference fit; (4) clean both pipe end and
fitting socket with a recommended CPVC cleaner or by light
suitable for use with storage type water heaters with connec-
sanding, or both; (5) apply a liberal coat of CPVC solvent
tions made in an approved manner.
cement to the pipe and apply a light coat of cement to the fitting
X2.1.4 Sweating—Even though the thermal conductivity of socket; (6) assemble immediately by bottoming the pipe in the
CPVC is several orders of magnitude lower than that of metal, socket and rotating a quarter turn as the joint is assembled; and
sweating or condensation at a slow rate may occur under (7) remove excess cement from the joint. If a joint has been
certain temperature and humidity conditions. properly made, a small bead of cement will always appear at
the juncture between the pipe or tubing and the fitting.
X2.1.5 Water Hammer and Surge—A CPVC hot-water
system will withstand repeated pressure surges well in excess X2.2.2 Adhesive Joints—Assemble according to the manu-
of its rated pressure, but water hammer arrestors may be facturer’s instructions paying particular attention to whether
advisable when solenoid valves or other quick closing devices sanding of the pipe or tubing is recommended to eliminate the
are used in the system. In designing for such situations it is interference fit.
advisable to consult the pipe or fitting manufacturer for X2.2.3 Plastic-to-Metal Transitions—Assemble in accor-
recommended surge pressure limits. Water hammer and surge dance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Union and com-
pressure calculations are reviewed in AWWA Manual M11, pression type transition fittings are likely to include ferrules or
“Steel Pipe Design and Installation,” 1964, Chapter 7, Ameri- O-rings, or both, which form an essential part of the fitting
can Water Works Association Inc., 2 Park Ave., New York, NY assembly and should not be omitted. Plastic socket-to-male
10016. threaded adapters should be installed with a recommended
thread sealant.
X2.2 Assembly
X2.2.1 Solvent Cemented Joints: X2.3 Installation
X2.2.1.1 Interference Fit—Components meeting the dimen- X2.3.1 Storage and Handling—CPVC pipe, tubing, and
sional requirements of this specification are designed to have fittings should be stored under cover to avoid unnecessary dirt
an interference fit. Before making a cemented joint, it is accumulation and long-term exposure to sunlight. Pipe and
advisable to check for an interference dry-fit. A good interfer- tubing should be stored with continuous support in straight,
112
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-2846/SD-2846M
uncrossed bundles. Care should be used in handling to ensure For cements not requiring a primer or cleaner, refer to the
that unnecessary abuse such as abrasion on concrete or manufacturer’s recommended cure times specific to that ce-
crushing is avoided. ment.
X2.3.2 Installation Temperature—Extra care must be taken X2.3.4 Repairs—If a leak is discovered, that portion of the
at temperatures of 40°F or lower and 110°F or higher. Always system should be drained and the joint and fitting should be cut
follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions carefully. out. The pipe should be thoroughly dried and a new fitting
X2.3.3 Pressure Testing—CPVC piping systems made of should be installed using couplings and short lengths of pipe.
1⁄2 through 2-in. sizes in accordance with this specification, and
utilizing a solvent cement requiring a primer or cleaner, can be X2.3.5 Soldering in the Area—Soldered metal joints should
pressure tested (using cold tap water only) at line pressure (150 not be made closer than 18 in. (460 mm) to an installed
psi maximum) after the solvent cement joints have cured for at plastic-to-metal adapter in the same water line.
least the following amount of time:
Ambient Minimum Cure Times, h
Temperature ⁄ in. to 1 in.
12 11⁄4 in. to 2 in.
over 60°F 1 2
40° to 60°F 2 4
X3. OPTIONAL PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION AND IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

FOR CPVC HOT-WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
X3.1 Scope TABLE X3.1 Suggested Quality Control Program

Component Property Frequency Method
X3.1.1 The following program covers performance qualifi-
cation and in-plant quality control for component design and Pipe and tubing outside diameter hourly 6.1.2.1
manufacture respectively to provide reasonable assurance that wall thickness hourly 6.1.2.1
CPVC hot-water distribution system components supplied sustained pressure daily 6.2
6.1.3
under this specification shall consistently meet its require- Fittings socket diameter hourly 6.1.4.2
ments. external threads hourly 6.2
sustained pressure daily 6.2
X3.2 Performance Qualification
X3.2.1 Performance qualification tests shall be run initially cavity in accordance with the requirements of this specification
on each component design, size, and formulation according to at a frequency agreed upon between the purchaser and the
the requirements of this specification. The test results shall be manufacturer. The program outlined in Table X3.1 is recom-
independently certified, and shall be made available to the mended. The test results shall be recorded and filed for
purchaser on request. inspection on request. Should a component fail to meet the
specification in any test, production should be sampled back to
X3.3 In-Plant Quality Control the previous acceptable test result and tested to determine
X3.3.1 Material—The pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be which components produced in the interim do not meet the
manufactured only from CPVC 4120 materials, as defined in requirement. Components that do not meet the requirements of
Section 5 of this specification. The manufacturer shall so this specification shall be rejected.
certify. X3.3.3 Marking—A code number shall be included on the
X3.3.2 Quality Control Testing—Pipe, tubing, and fitting pipe, tubing, and fittings that can be used to identify the
quality control tests shall be run for each extrusion line or mold manufacturer, the compound, and the date of manufacture.
113
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3035

PIPE (DR-PR) BASED ON CONTROLLED OUTSIDE
DIAMETER
SD-3035
mandatory.)
115
SD-3035 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled
Outside Diameter
1. Scope D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics

1.1 This specification covers polyethylene (PE) pipe made by Extrusion Plastometer
in thermoplastic pipe dimension ratios based on outside diam- D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
eter and pressure rated for water (see Appendix X1). Included Under Constant Internal Pressure
are requirements for polyethylene compounds and PE plastic D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
pipe, a system of nomenclature for PE plastic pipe, and Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
requirements and test methods for materials, workmanship, D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
dimensions, sustained pressure, and burst pressure. Methods of tics
marking are also given. D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
moplastic Pipe and Fittings
1.2 All pipes produced under this specification are intended D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
for use as the distribution and transmission of potable and Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
non-potable water, grey water, reclaimed water, wastewater, D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
force main and gravity municipal sewage, etc. The user should for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
consult the manufacturer to determine whether the material for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
being transported is compatible with polyethylene pipe and D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
will not affect the service life beyond limits acceptable to the tings Materials
user. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 2.2 NSF International Standards:
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only and Related Materials
and are not considered standard. NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water System
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the Components—Health Effects
test methods portion, Section 7, of this specification: This 2.3 Other Documents:
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, TR-4 Listing of Hydrostatic Design Bases (HDB), Strength
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user Design Bases (SDB), Pressure Design Bases (PDB) and
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermo-
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- plastic Piping Materials or Pipe
tions prior to use. APWA Uniform Color Code
2. Referenced Documents 3. Terminology
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
116
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3035

PE1404 PE2708 PE3608 PE4608 PE4710
Requirement Required Value
HDB at 140ºF (60ºC), psi
(MPa), A
800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B 800 (5.5)B
per ASTM D2837 and PPI
TR-3
HDS for water at

73°F (23°C) psi (MPa),
400 (2.76) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
per ASTM D2837 and PPI
TR-3C
Melt flow 1.0 to 0.4 g/10 #0.40 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min Cond.
rate per min 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 min 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 min 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 min 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 min
ASTM D1238 Cond. 190/2.16 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6 Cond. 190/21.6
Specification D3350
Required Value
Cell Classification Property
Density
1 2 3 4 4
SCG
4 7 6 6 7
Resistance
Color and UV
C C, D, or E C, D, or E C, D, or E C, D, or E
Stabilizer CodeD
A
HDB at 140°F (60°C) not required. Contact manufacturer about pipe use at temperatures other than 73°F (23°C).
B
Minimum value.
C
D
See 5.1.1.
3.2.1 relation between dimension ratio, hydrostatic design

stress, and pressure rating—the following expression, com- TABLE 2 IPS Pipe-Outside DiameterA and Tolerance
monly known as the ISO equation, is used in this specification IPS Outside Diameter, Tolerances,
to relate dimension ratio, hydrostatic design stress, and pres- Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
sure rating: ⁄
12 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10)
⁄
34 1.050 (26.7) ±0.004 (0.10)
2S/P 5 DR 2 1 or 2S/P 5 ~ D 0 /t ! 2 1 (1) 1 1.315 (33.4) ±0.005 (0.13)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.2) ±0.005 (0.13)
where: 11⁄2 1.900 (48.3) ±0.006 (0.15)
2 2.375 (60.3) ±0.006 (0.15)
S = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73°F (23°C), psi 3 3.500 (88.9) ±0.008 (0.20)
(MPa), 4 4.500 (114.3) ±0.009 (0.23)
P = pressure rating, psi (MPa), 6 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28)
8 8.625 (219.08) ±0.013 (0.33)
D0 = average outside diameter, in. (mm) 10 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38)
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm), and, 12 12.750 (323.85) ±0.017 (0.43)
DR = thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (D0 /t for PE pipe). 14 14.000 (355.60) ±0.063 (1.60)
16 16.000 (406.40) ±0.072 (1.83)
4. Pipe Classification 18 18.000 (457.20) ±0.081 (2.06)
20 20.000 (508.00) ±0.090 (2.29)
4.1 General—This specification covers PE pipe made from 22 22.000 (558.80) ±0.099 (2.51)
24 24.000 (609.60) ±0.108 (2.74)
PE plastic pipe materials in various dimension ratios and water 26 26.000 (660.4) ±0.117 (2.97)
pressure ratings. 28 28.000 (711.2) ±0.126 (3.20)
30 30.000 (762.0) ±0.135 (3.43)
4.2 Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratios (DR)—This 32 32.000 (812.8) ±0.144 (3.66)
specification covers PE pipe in various dimension ratios such 34 34.000 (863.6) ±0.153 (3.89)
as, but not limited to, DR 11, DR 13.5, DR 17, and DR 21. The 36 36.000 (914.4) ±0.162 (4.11)
42 42.000 (1066.8) ±0.189 (4.80)
pressure rating is uniform for all nominal sizes of pipe for a 48 48.000 (1219.2) ±0.216 (5.49)
given PE pipe material and DR. (See Table X1.1.) 54 54.000 (1371.6) ±0.243 (6.17)
63 63.000 (1600.2) ±0.284 (6.71)
4.3 Special Sizes—Where existing system conditions or 65 65.000 (1651.0) ±0.293 (7.44)
special local requirements make other diameters or dimension A
For a distance to the cut end of the pipe that is the lesser of 11.8-in (300 mm) or
ratios necessary, other sizes or dimension ratios, or both, shall 1.5 times the outside diameter, a diameter reduction of up to 1.5% shall be
be acceptable in engineered products when mutually agreed acceptable.
117
SD-3035 ASME NM.3.1-2018
upon by the customer and manufacturer if (1) the pipe is the same percentage of the calculated minimum wall as for the
manufactured from plastic compounds meeting the material closest listed minimum wall thickness.
requirements of this specification and (2) the strength and 6.2.3 Wall Thickness Range—The wall thickness range shall
design requirements are calculated on the same basis as those be within 12 % when measured in accordance with Test
used in this specification. Method D2122.
5. Materials 6.3 Short-term Properties—Specimens of pipe shall be

tested in accordance with either Test Method D1599 or Test
5.1 Polyethylene Compounds—Polyethylene compounds
Method D2290. The test method used, Test Method D1599 or
suitable for use in the manufacture of pipe under this specifi-
Test Method D2290, is determined by the pipe size and the
cation shall meet thermoplastic materials designation codes
availability of appropriate test equipment. Test Method D1599
PE1404 or PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall
is generally used for 4 in. (114 mm) and smaller sizes and Test
meet Table 1 requirements for PE1404 or PE2708 or PE3608
or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall meet thermal stability, Method D2290 for 2 in. (60 mm) and larger sizes. Short-term
brittleness temperature and elongation at break requirements in hoop stress and failure mode data is provided by either test.
accordance with Specification D3350 6.3.1 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressure for PE
5.1.1 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—Per Table plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 4, when determined in
3, polyethylene compounds shall meet Specification D3350 accordance with Test Method D1599 and 7.6. The failure mode
code C, D or E. In addition, Code C polyethylene compounds shall be ductile.
shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon black, and Code E polyethyl- 6.3.2 Apparent Ring Tensile Strength—The minimum appar-
ene compounds shall have sufficient UV stabilizer to protect ent ring tensile strength at yield shall be 1250 psi (8.62 MPa)
pipe from deleterious UV exposure effects during unprotected for PE 1404, 2520 psi (17.37 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 2
outdoor shipping and storage for at least eighteen (18) months. polyethylene pipe materials, and 2900 psi (20.00 MPa) for
5.1.2 Colors for solid color, a color shell layer, or color Table 1 density cell 3 and 4 polyethylene pipe materials when
stripes–In accordance with the APWA Uniform Color Code, tested in accordance with Test Method D2290, Procedure B
blue shall identify potable water service; green shall identify and 7.7. The failure shall be ductile.
sewer service; purple (lavender) shall identify reclaimed water
service. Yellow identifies gas service and shall not be used. 6.4 Sustained Pressure at Ambient and Elevated Tempera-
ture for PE1404—PE1404 pipes shall be tested in accordance
5.2 Potable Water Requirement—When required by the with 7.4 at the stresses and temperatures specified in Table 6.
regulatory authority having jurisdiction, products intended for Tests may be conducted on any pipe size, but tests conducted
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and
on 6 in. (168 mm) nominal size pipe shall be considered
certified for conformance with NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 or
representative of all pipe sizes. At 176°F (80°C) pipes shall be
the health effects portion of NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 by an
tested at either stress. If ductile failures occur at the higher
acceptable certifying organization.
stress at 176°F (80°C), testing shall be repeated at the lower
5.3 Rework Material—Clean, rework material from the stress. Acceptable results are non-failure at the minimum
manufacturer’s own pipe production that met 5.1 through 5.2 average test time, or brittle failure at times exceeding the
as new compound is suitable for use when blended with new minimum average test time.
compound of the same material designation. Pipe containing
the rework material shall meet the requirements of this 6.5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure for Pipes
specification. Other Than PE1404—Elevated temperature sustained pressure
tests for each Table 1 polyethylene pipe material (material
6. Requirements designation) used in production at the facility shall be con-
ducted twice annually per 7.5.
6.1 Workmanship—The pipe shall be homogeneous
throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign NOTE 1—Elevated temperature sustained pressure tests are intended to
inclusions, or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as verify extrusion processing and are conducted in accordance with the
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other manufacture’s quality program.
physical properties. 6.5.1 Passing results are (1) non-failure for all three
6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: specimens at a time equal to or greater than the Table 8
6.2.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler- “minimum average time before failure” for the selected Table
ances shall be as shown in Table 2 or Table 7 when measured 8 Condition, or (2) not more than one ductile specimen failure
in accordance with Test Method D2122. For diameters not and the average time before failure for all three specimens shall
shown in Table 2 or Table 7, the tolerances shall be the same be greater than the specified “minimum average time before
percentage of the outside diameter as those for the closest listed failure” for the selected Table 8 Condition. If more than one
diameter. ductile failure occurs before the “minimum average time
6.2.2 Wall Thicknesses—The wall thicknesses and toler- before failure”, it is permissible to conduct one retest at a Table
ances shall be as shown in Table 3 or Table 7 when measured 8 Condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time
in accordance with Test Method D2122. For wall thicknesses before failure for the material designation except that for Table
(DRs) not shown in Table 3 or Table 7, the tolerances shall be 8 Condition 6 no retest is permissible. Brittle failure of any
118
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3035
TABLE 3 IPS PipeA Minimum Wall Thickness and Tolerance

IPS DR 32.5 DR 26 DR 21 DR 17 DR 15.5 DR 13.5 DR 11 DR 9 DR 7
Size Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol. Min. Tol.
in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.062 0.020 0.076 0.020 0.093 0.020 0.120 0.020
⁄
12
(1.57) (0.51) (1.93) (0.51) (2.36) (0.51) (3.05) (0.51)
... ... ... ... ... ... 0.062 0.020 0.068 0.020 0.078 0.020 0.095 0.020 0.117 0.020 0.150 0.020
⁄
34
(1.57) (0.51) (1.73) (0.51) (1.98) (0.51) (2.41) (0.51) (2.97) (0.51) (3.81) (0.51)
... ... 0.062 0.020 0.063 0.020 0.077 0.020 0.085 0.020 0.097 0.020 0.120 0.020 0.146 0.020 0.188 0.023
1
(1.57) (0.51) (1.60) (0.51) (1.96) (0.51) (2.16) (0.51) (2.46) (0.51) (3.05) (0.51) (3.71) (0.51) (4.78) (0.58)
0.064 0.020 0.079 0.020 0.098 0.020 0.107 0.020 0.123 0.020 0.151 0.020 0.184 0.022 0.237 0.028
1 1⁄ 4
(1.63) (0.51) (2.01) (0.51) (2.49) (0.51) (2.72) (0.51) (3.12) (0.51) (3.84) (0.51) (4.67) (0.56) (6.02) (0.71)
0.062 0.020 0.073 0.020 0.090 0.020 0.112 0.020 0.123 0.020 0.141 0.020 0.173 0.021 0.211 0.025 0.271 0.033
1 1⁄ 2
(1.57) (0.51) (1.85) (0.51) (2.29) (0.51) (2.84) (0.51) (3.12) (0.51) (3.58) (0.51) (4.39) (0.53) (5.36) (0.64) (6.88) (0.84)
0.073 0.020 0.091 0.020 0.113 0.020 0.140 0.020 0.153 0.020 0.176 0.021 0.216 0.026 0.264 0.032 0.339 0.041
2
(1.85) (0.51) (2.31) (0.51) (2.87) (0.51) (3.56) (0.51) (3.89) (0.51) (4.47) (0.53) (5.49) (0.66) (6.71) (0.81) (8.61) (1.04)
0.108 0.020 0.135 0.020 0.167 0.020 0.206 0.025 0.226 0.027 0.259 0.031 0.318 0.038 0.389 0.047 0.500 0.060
3
(2.74) (0.51) (3.43) (0.51) (4.24) (0.51) (5.23) (0.64) (5.74) (0.69) (6.58) (0.79) (8.08) (0.97) (9.88) (1.19) (12.70) (1.52)
0.138 0.020 0.173 0.021 0.214 0.026 0.265 0.032 0.290 0.035 0.333 0.040 0.409 0.049 0.500 0.060 0.643 0.077
4
(3.51) (0.51) (4.39) (0.53) (5.44) (0.66) (6.73) (0.81) (7.37) (0.89) (8.46) (1.02) (10.39) (1.24) (12.70) (1.52) (16.33) (1.96)
0.204 0.024 0.255 0.031 0.315 0.038 0.390 0.047 0.427 0.051 0.491 0.059 0.602 0.072 0.736 0.088 0.946 0.114
6
(5.18) (0.61) (6.48) (0.79) (8.00) (0.97) (9.91) (1.19) (10.85) (1.30) (12.47) (1.50) (15.29) (1.83) (18.69) (2.24) (24.03) (2.90)
0.265 0.032 0.332 0.040 0.411 0.049 0.507 0.061 0.556 0.067 0.639 0.077 0.784 0.094 0.958 0.115 1.232 0.148
8
(6.73) (0.81) (8.43) (1.02) (10.44) (1.24) (12.88) (1.55) (14.12) (1.70) (16.23) (1.96) (19.91) (2.39) (24.33) (2.92) (31.29) (3.76)
0.331 0.040 0.413 0.050 0.512 0.061 0.632 0.076 0.694 0.083 0.796 0.096 0.977 0.117 1.194 0.143 1.536 0.184
10
(8.41) (1.02) (10.49) (1.27) (13.00) (1.55) (16.05) (1.93) (17.63) (2.11) (20.22) (2.44) (24.82) (2.97) (30.33) (3.63) (39.01) (4.67)
0.392 0.047 0.490 0.059 0.607 0.073 0.750 0.090 0.823 0.099 0.944 0.113 1.159 0.139 1.417 0.170 1.821 0.219
12
(9.96) (1.19) (12.45) (1.50) (15.42) (1.85) (19.05) (2.29) (20.90) (2.51) (23.98) (2.87) (29.44) (3.53) (35.99) (4.32) (46.25) (5.56)
0.431 0.052 0.538 0.065 0.667 0.080 0.824 0.099 0.903 0.108 1.037 0.124 1.273 0.153 1.556 0.187 2.000 0.240
14
(10.95) (1.32) (13.67) (1.65) (16.94) (2.03) (20.93) (2.51) (22.94) (2.74) (26.34) (3.15) (32.33) (3.89) (39.52) (4.75) (50.80) (6.10)
0.492 0.059 0.615 0.074 0.762 0.091 0.941 0.113 1.032 0.124 1.185 0.142 1.455 0.175 1.778 0.213 2.286 0.274
16
(12.50) (1.50) (15.62) (1.88) (19.35) (2.31) (23.90) (2.87) (26.21) (3.15) (30.10) (3.61) (36.96) (4.45) (45.16) (5.41) (58.06) (6.96)
0.554 0.066 0.692 0.083 0.857 0.103 1.059 0.127 1.161 0.139 1.333 0.160 1.636 0.196 2.000 0.240 2.571 0.309
18
(14.07) (1.68) (17.58) (2.11) (21.77) (2.62) (26.90) (3.23) (29.49) (3.53) (33.86) (4.06) (41.55) (4.98) (50.80) (6.10) (65.30) (7.85)
0.615 0.074 0.769 0.092 0.952 0.114 1.176 0.141 1.290 0.155 1.481 0.178 1.818 0.218 2.222 0,267 2.857 0.343
20
(15.62) (1.88) (19.53) (2.34) (24.18) (2.90) (29.87) (3.58) (32.77) (3.94) (37.62) (4.52) (46.18) (5.54) (56.44) (6.78) (72.57) (8.71)
0.677 0.081 0.846 0.102 1.048 0.126 1.294 0.155 1.419 0.170 1.630 0.196 2.000 0.240 2.444 0.293 3.143 0.377
22
(17.20) (2.06) (21.49) (2.59) (26.62) (3.20) (32.87) (3.94) (36.04) (4.32) (41.40) (4.98) (50.80) (6.10) (62.08) (7.44) (79.83) (9.58)
0.738 0.089 0.923 0.111 1.143 0.137 1.412 0.169 1.548 0.186 1.778 0.213 2.182 0.262 2.667 0.320 3.429 0.411
24
(18.75) (2.26) (23.44) (2.82) (29.03) (3.48) (35.86) (4.29) (39.32) (4.72) (45.16) (5.41) (55.42) (6.65) (67.74) (8.13) (87.10) (10.44)
0.800 0.096 1.000 0.120 1.238 0.149 1.529 0.183 1.677 0.201 1.926 0.231 2.364 0.284 2.889 0.347 ... ...
26
(20.32) (2.44) (25.40) (3.05) (31.45) (3.78) (38.84) (4.65) (42.60) (5.11) (48.92) (5.87) (60.05) (7.21) (73.38) (8.81)
0.862 0.103 1.077 0.129 1.333 0.160 1.647 0.198 1.806 0.217 2.074 0.249 2.545 0.305 3.111 0.373 ... ...
28
(21.89) (2.62) (27.36) (3.28) (33.86) (4.06) (41.83) (5.03) (45.87) (5.51) (52.68) (6.32) (64.64) (7.75) (79.02) (9.47)
0.923 0.111 1.154 0.138 1.429 0.171 1.765 0.212 1.935 0.232 2.222 0.267 2.727 0.327 3.333 0.400 ... ...
30
(23.44) (2.82) (29.31) (3.51) (36.30) (4.34) (44.83) (5.38) (49.15) (5.89) (56.44) (6.78) (69.27) (8.31) (84.66) (10.16)
0.985 0.118 1.231 0.148 1.524 0.183 1.882 0.226 2.065 0.248 2.370 0.284 2.909 0.349 3.556 0.427 ... ...
32
(25.02) (3.00) (31.27) (3.76) (38.71) (4.65) (47.80) (5.74) (52.45) (6.30) (60.20) (7.21) (73.89) (8.86) (90.32) (10.85)
1.046 0.126 1.308 0.157 1.619 0.194 2.000 0.240 2.194 0.263 2.519 0.302 3.091 0.371 ... ... ... ...
34
(26.57) (3.20) (33.22) (3.99) (41.12) (4.93) (50.80) (6.10) (55.73) (6.68) (63.98) (7.67) (78.51) (9.42)
1.108 0.133 1.385 0.166 1.714 0.206 2.118 0.254 2.323 0.279 2.667 0.320 3.273 0.393 ... ... ... ...
36
(28.14) (3.38) (35.18) (4.22) (43.54) (5.23) (53.80) (6.45) (59.00) (7.09) (67.74) (8.13) (83.13) (9.98)
1.292 0.155 1.615 0.194 2.000 0.240 2.471 0.297 2.710 0.325 3.111 0.373 ... ... ... ... ... ...
42
(32.82) (3.94) (41.02) (4.93) (50.80) (6.10) (62.76) (7.54) (68.83) (8.26) (79.02) (9.47)
1.477 0.177 1.846 0.222 2.286 0.274 2.824 0.339 3.097 0.372 3.556 0.427 ... ... ... ... ... ...
48
(37.52) (4.50) (46.89) (5.64) (58.06) (6.96) (71.73) (8.61) (78.66) (9.45) (90.32) (10.85)
1.662 0.199 2.077 0.249 2.571 0.309 3.176 0.381 3.484 0.418 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
54
(42.21) (5.05) (52.76) (6.32) (65.30) (7.85) (80.67) (9.68) (88.49) (10.62)
1.938 0.233 2.423 0.291 3.000 0.360 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
63
(49.23) (5.92) (61.54) (7.39) (76.20) (9.14)
2.000 0.240 2.500 0.300 3.095 0.371 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
65
(50.80) (6.10) (63.50) (7.62) (78.61) (9.42)
A
See 4.3 for sizes not shown.
B
For IPS sizes greater than 24, tolerance applies to the minimum wall thickness obtained when measuring pipe.
specimen in the test sample when tested at Table 8 Condition 6.5.2 Provision for retest (if needed)—The retest sample
1 through 6 constitutes failure to meet this requirement and no shall be three specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and
retest is allowed. material designation from the same time frame as the test
119
SD-3035 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) for DR-PR PE Plastic Pipe
Min Burst Pressure,A psi (MPa)
PE 3608,
Dimension
PE 4608, PE 2708 PE 1404
Ratio
PE 4710
psi (MPa) psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
7 967 (6.67) 840 (5.79) 417 (2.87)
9 725 (5.00) 630 (4.34) 313 (2.16)
11 580 (4.00) 504 (3.47) 250 (1.72)
13.5 464 (3.20) 403 (2.78) 200 (1.38)
15.5 400 (2.76) 348 (2.40) 172 (1.19)
17 363 (2.50) 315 (2.13) 156 (1.08)
21 290 (2.00) 252 (1.74) 125 (0.86)
26 232 (1.60) 202 (1.39) 100 (0.69)
32.5 184 (1.27) 160 (1.10) 79 (0.55)
A
psi (MPa)
PE 3608, PE 4608, PE 4710 2900 (20.00)
PE 2708 2520 (17.37)
PE 1404 1250 (8.62)
TABLE 5 Apparent Tensile Strength at Yield of Ring Specimens failure time specified in Table 6 in accordance with Test
Cut from Pipe Method D1598, at the stress and temperature values given in
Material psi (MPa) Table 6. Maintain the specimens at the test pressures 610 psi
PE 2708 2520 (17.37) (670 kPa) and the test temperatures 6 3.6°F (6 2°C). Failure
PE 3608,
of one of the three specimens tested is cause for retest of three
PE 4608, 2900 (20.00) additional specimens. Failure of one of three specimens tested
PE 4710 in retest constitutes failure in the test. Test and retest specimens
PE 1404 1250 (8.62) shall be from the same production lot. Failure of the pipe test
specimen shall be as defined in Test Method D1598. When
testing at 176 6 3.6°F (80 6 2°C) at the higher stress, if ductile
sample per 7.5. For the retest, any specimen failure before the failure occurs before the minimum time, rerunning the test at
Table 8 “minimum average time before failure” at the retest the lower stress condition is not considered a retest.
condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time 7.5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—The
before failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement. “test sample” shall be three specimens of a generally represen-
tative pipe or tubing size produced at the manufacturer’s
7. Test Methods facility using the Table 1 polyethylene pipe material (material
7.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens for not less designation). Select one Table 8 Condition for the Table 1
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of polyethylene pipe material (material designation) and test the
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. three specimen test sample in accordance with Test Method
7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the standard labora- D1598 using water as the internal test medium.
tory atmosphere of 73 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C), unless otherwise 7.6 Hydrostatic Burst Pressure—The test equipment,
specified in the test methods or in this specification. procedures, and failure definitions shall be as specified in Test
7.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of Method D1599.
pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller. In 7.7 Apparent Ring Tensile Strength at Yield—The method
case of no prior agreement, random samples as selected by the and test equipment shall be as specified in Test Method D2290,
testing laboratory shall be deemed adequate. Procedure B. Test a minimum of five specimens.
7.4 Sustained Pressure Test at Ambient and Elevated
Temperature—Select three specimens of pipe at random and 8. Retest and Rejection
test each specimen individually with water at controlled 8.1 Except as specified in 6.4, 6.5, 6.5.1 and 6.5.2, if the
temperatures under the stresses given in Table 6. Each speci- results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements of this
men shall be at least ten times the nominal diameter in length, specification, the test(s) may be conducted again in accordance
but not less than 10 in. (250 mm) or more than 3 ft (1000 mm) with an agreement between the purchaser and the seller. There
between end closures and containing the permanent marking shall be no agreement to lower the minimum requirement of
on the pipe. Condition the specimens for at least 2 h at test the specification by such means as omitting tests that are a part
temperature 6 3.6°F (2°C) prior to test. Test for the minimum of the specification, substituting or modifying a test method, or
120
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3035
TABLE 6 Stress and Time Requirements for Sustained Pressure TestA

Minimum Hours
Minimum Average Hours
Before Failure at
Pipe to Failure at 176°F (80°C)
73°F (23°C)
Material
S = 800 psi S = 670 psi S = 580 psi S = 435 psi
(5.5 MPa) (4.6 MPa) (4 MPa) (3 MPa)
PE 1404 1000 80 150
A
Calculate internal pressure in accordance with the following formula:
2S
P5
Do
21
t
where:
P = pressure, psig (MPa),
S = hoop stress, psi (MPa),
Do = average outside diameter, in. (mm), and
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm).
TABLE 7 PE4710 DIPS PR-DR Plastic Pipe—Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness
Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
DIPS Outside DiameterA PR 300 PR 250 PR 200 PR 150 PR 125 PR 100
Size 7.7 DR 9 DR 11 DR 14.3 DR 17 DR 21
Average ± Tol. Min. Tol.B Min. Tol.B Min. Tol.B Min. Tol.B Min. Tol.B Min. Tol.B
3.960 0.018 0.514 0.062 0.440 0.053 0.360 0.043 0.277 0.033 0.233 0.028 0.189 0.023
3
(100.58) (0.46) (13.06) (1.57) (11.18) (1.35) (9.14) (1.09) (7.04) (0.84) (5.92) (0.71) (4.80) (0.58)
4.800 0.022 0.623 0.075 0.533 0.064 0.436 0.052 0.336 0.040 0.282 0.034 0.229 0.027
4
(121.92) (0.56) (15.82) (1.91) (13.54) (1.63) (11.07) (1.32) (8.53) (1.02) (7.16) (0.86) (5.82) (0.69)
6.900 0.031 0.896 0.108 0.767 0.092 0.627 0.075 0.483 0.058 0.406 0.049 0.329 0.039
6
(175.26) (0.79) (22.76) (2.74) (19.48) (2.34) (15.93) (1.91) (12.27) (1.47) (10.31) (1.24) (8.36) (0.99)
9.050 0.041 1.175 0.141 1.006 0.121 0.823 0.099 0.633 0.076 0.532 0.064 0.431 0.052
8
(229.87) (1.04) (29.85) (3.58) (25.55) (3.07) (20.90) (2.51) (16.08) (1.93) (13.51) (1.63) (10.95) (1.32)
11.100 0.050 1.442 0.173 1.233 0.148 1.009 0.121 0.776 0.093 0.653 0.078 0.529 0.063
10
(281.94) (1.27) (36.63) (4.39) (31.32) (3.76) (25.63) (3.07) (19.71) (2.36) (16.59) (1.98) (13.44) (1.60)
13.200 0.059 1.714 0.206 1.467 0.176 1.200 0.144 0.923 0.111 0.776 0.093 0.629 0.075
12
(335.28) (1.50) (43.54) (5.23) (37.26) (4.47) (30.48) (3.66) (23.44) (2.82) (19.71) (2.36) (15.98) (1.91)
15.300 0.069 1.987 0.238 1.700 0.204 1.391 0.167 1.070 0.128 0.900 0.108 0.729 0.087
14
(388.62) (1.75) (50.47) (6.05) (43.18) (5.18) (35.33) (4.24) (27.18) (3.25) (22.86) (2.74) (18.52) (2.21)
17.400 0.078 2.260 0.271 1.933 0.232 1.582 0.190 1.217 0.146 1.024 0.123 0.829 0.099
16
(441.96) (1.98) (57.40) (6.88) (49.10) (5.89) (40.18) (4.83) (30.91) (3.71) (26.01) (3.12) (21.06) (2.51)
19.500 0.088 2.532 0.304 2.167 0.260 1.773 0.213 1.364 0.164 1.147 0.138 0.929 0.111
18
(495.30) (2.24) (64.31) (7.72) (55.04) (6.60) (45.03) (5.41) (34.65) (4.17) (29.13) (3.51) (23.60) (2.82)
21.600 0.097 2.805 0.337 2.400 0.288 1.964 0.236 1.510 0.181 1.271 0.153 1.029 0.123
20
(548.64) (2.46) (71.25) (8.56) (60.96) (7.32) (49.89) (5.99) (38.35) (4.60) (32.28) (3.89) (26.14) (3.12)
25.800 0.116 3.351 0.402 2.867 0.344 2.345 0.281 1.804 0.216 1.518 0.182 1.229 0.147
24
(655.32) (2.95) (85.12) (10.21) (72.82) (8.74) (59.56) (7.14) (45.82) (5.49) (38.56) (4.62) (31.22) (3.73)
32.000 0.144 4.156 0.499 3.556 0.427 2.909 0.349 2.238 0.269 1.882 0.226 1.524 0.183
30
(812.80) (3.66) (105.56) (12.67) (90.32) (10.85) (73.89) (8.86) (56.85) (6.83) (47.80) (5.74) (38.71) (4.65)
38.300 0.172 4.974 0.597 4.256 0.511 3.482 0.418 2.678 0.321 2.253 0.270 1.824 0.219
36
(972.82) (4.37) (126.34) (15.16) (108.10) (12.98) (88.44) (10.62) (68.02) (8.15) (57.23) (6.86) (46.33) (5.56)
44.500 0.200 5.779 0.693 4.944 0.593 4.045 0.485 3.112 0.373 2.618 0.314 2.119 0.254
42
(1130.30) (5.08) (146.79) (17.60) (125.58) (15.06) (102.74) (12.32) (79.04) (9.47) (66.50) (7.98) (53.82) (6.45)
50.800 0.229 6.597 0.792 5.644 0.677 4.618 0.554 3.552 0.426 2.988 0.359 2.419 0.290
48
(1290.32) (5.82) (167.56) (20.12) (143.36) (17.20) (117.30) (14.07) (90.22) (10.82) (75.90) (9.12) (61.44) (7.37)
A
For a distance to the cut end of the pipe that is the lesser of 11.8–in. (300 mm) or 1.5 times the outside diameter, a diameter reduction of up to 1.5% shall be acceptable.
B
For DIPS sizes greater than 24, tolerance applies to the minimum wall thickness obtained when measuring pipe.
by changing the specification limits. In retesting, the product 9.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in. IPS),
requirements of this specification shall be met, and the test 9.1.2 Type of plastic pipe material in accordance with the
methods designated in the specification shall be followed. If, materials designation code given in per 5.1 (for example, PE
upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product represented 3608),
by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this specifi- 9.1.3 Thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio in accordance
cation. with 4.2 (for example, DR 11),
9.1.4 The pressure rating in pounds-force per square inch
9. Marking for water at 73°F (23°C) shown as the number followed by psi
9.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following, spaced (kPa), for example, 100 psi or 690 kPa,
at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m):
121
SD-3035 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 8 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test Requirements

PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
Condition Test Temperature Test Pressure Hoop Minimum Average Time Test Pressure Hoop Minimum Average Time
°F (°C)A StressB Before Failure StressB Before Failure
psi (kPa)A Hours psi (kPa)A Hours
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
Test temperature tolerance ± 3.6ºF (+/- 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (±35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
Note: Table 2 conditions are based on PE validation requirements per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 test pressure hoop stress and six times greater
the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) · ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
B
Calculate internal test pressure in accordance with:
2s
P5
S Do
t
21 D
where:
Do = measured outside diameter, in. (mm)
9.1.5 ASME SD-3035 or both ASME SD-3035 and ASTM potable water; green shall identify sewer; and purple (violet,
D3035, lavender) shall identify reclaimed water. Yellow identities gas
9.1.6 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and code, and and shall not be used.
9.1.7 Pipe intended for transporting potable water shall also 9.3 Markings that identify gas, communications or electrical
include the seal of an accredited laboratory. use are prohibited.
NOTE 2—Earlier editions of Specification D3035 included PE materials 10. Quality Assurance
designations PE 2406, PE 3406, and PE 3408. Changes to Specification
D3350 and PPI TR-3 led to changes in thermoplastic materials designation 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
codes, resulting in materials designation PE 2406 being superseded by manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
materials designations PE 2606 and PE 2708, materials designation with this specification and has been found to meet the re-
PE 3406 being superseded by PE 3606 and materials designation PE 3408 quirements of this specification.
being superseded by materials designations PE 3608, PE 3708, PE 3710,
PE 4608, PE 4708, and PE 4710. Recognizing that a period of time is 11. Certification
necessary for the dissemination of information and to update specifica-
tions and literature, during the transitional period, product markings that 11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
include both older and newer materials designations, for example
PE 2406 ⁄ PE 2606, may occur.
12. Keywords
NOTE 3—Manufacturers using the seal of approval of an accredited
laboratory must obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned. 12.1 DR; OD controlled; PE pipe; plastic pipe; potable
9.2 Using Color—When color is applied, such as with water pipe; polyethylene pipe; service pipe; SDR; water pipe;
stripes, a color shell layer or a solid color; blue shall identify water service pipe
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
122
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3035
APPENDIX
X1. PIPE PRESSURE RATINGS
X1.1 The pipe is rated for use with water at 73°F (23°C) at pressure ratings. Industry experience indicates that satisfactory
the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.1. Lower long-term service can be provided by PE plastic pipe meeting
pressure ratings than those calculated in accordance with 3.2.1 this specification that is properly installed and operated within
may be recommended by the pipe manufacturer where unusu- the identified pressure and temperature ratings. The sustained
ally high pressure surges, elevated temperatures, or unusual pressure requirements (see 6.4) are related to these ratings
installation conditions exist. Pressure ratings at 73°F (23°C) through the slopes of the strength-time plots of these materials
are generally suitable for use at service temperatures not in pipe form.
exceeding 80°F (27°C). Pressure ratings are reduced at tem-
peratures above 80°F (27°C), and materials having an elevated X1.2 The hydrostatic design stress recommended by the
temperature HDB should be used when service at temperatures Plastics Pipe Institute are based on tests made on pipe ranging
above 80°F (27°C) is anticipated. Consult the pipe manufac- in size from 1⁄2 to 3 in. (12.7 to 50.8 mm).
turer for information about elevated temperature service and
TABLE X1.1 Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratios (DR) and Water Pressure Ratings (PR) at 73°F (23°C) for DR-PR PE Plastic Pipe
PE Pipe MaterialsA
Dimension PE 2708, PE 3608,
PE4710 PE 1404
Ratio PE 4608
Pressure Rating, psi (MPa) Pressure Rating, psi (MPa) Pressure Rating, psi (MPa)
7 333 (2.3) 267 (1.84) 133 (0.92)
7.7 300 (2.1) ... ... ... ...
9 250 (1.7) 200 (1.38) 100 (0.69)
11 200 (1.4) 160 (1.10) 80 (0.55)
13.5 160 (1.1) 128 (0.88) 64 (0.44)
14.3 150 (1.0) ... ... ... ...
15.5 138 (1.0) 110 (0.76) 55 (0.38)
17 125 (0.9) 100 (0.69) 50 (0.34)
21 100 (0.7) 80 (0.55) 40 (0.28)
26 80 (0.6) 64 (0.44) 32 (0.22)
32.5 63 (0.4) 51 (0.35) 25 (0.17)
A
Hydrostatic Design Stress values obtained from PPI TR4. Other design factors may be appropriate under certain conditions. Values rounded to the nearest 5 psi (0.03
MPa)
123
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3222
SPECIFICATION FOR UNMODIFIED POLY(VINYLIDENE

FLUORIDE) (PVDF) MOLDING EXTRUSION AND
COATING MATERIALS
SD-3222
(Identical with ASTM D3222-05(R10) except for revisions in para. 7.1 and section 12, and additional requirements in
section 13 and Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 14 and 15.)
125
SD-3222 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding
Extrusion and Coating Materials
1. Scope NOTE 2—There is no equivalent ISO standard for this specification.

Information in this specification is technically equivalent to related
1.1 This specification covers melt processable molding and information in ISO 12086-1 and ISO 12086-2.
extrusion materials, as well as coating materials of poly(vi-
nylidene fluoride) fluoroplastic, commonly abbreviated PVDF 2. Referenced Documents
(or PVF2 in scientific literature). This specification covers 2.1 ASTM Standards:
thermoplastic resin materials supplied in pellet or powder D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
form. Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
1.2 This specification applies only to the virgin homopoly- at Commercial Power Frequencies
mer prepared from vinylidene fluoride, not copolymers, rein- D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
forced, filled grades or special grades with additives or tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
treatments for modification of attributes. D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
1.3 The tests involved are intended to provide information Impact Resistance of Plastics
for specification of unmodified PVDF homopolymer resins. It D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
is not the purpose of this specification to provide engineering Insulating Materials
data for design purposes. D542 Test Method for Index of Refraction of Transparent
Organic Plastics
1.4 PVDF fluoroplastics melt between 156 and 180°C (312 D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
and 356°F) and are thermally stable up to about 370°C (698°F). D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
(Warning—Evolution of corrosive and toxic hydrogen fluo- D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
ride can occur under certain conditions.) and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
1.5 The values stated in SI units, as detailed in IEEE/ASTM als
S-10, are to be regarded as the standard. The values given in D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
parentheses are for information only. tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
NOTE 1—PVDF exhibits polymorphism. The type and extent of
crystalline structure varies with the thermomechanical history of the
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
sample. Specimens prepared by techniques different than prescribed in by Extrusion Plastometer
this specification can have properties that vary from the values specified. D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the Plastics (Oxygen Index)
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific precau- Differential Scanning Calorimetry
tionary statements are given in Section 10. D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
IEEE/ASTM S-10 Use of the International System of Units
126
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3222
TABLE 1 Classification of PVDF Resins

Typical Values or Ranges
Property Type I Type II
Grade 1 Grade 2
Specific Gravity Gms/cc 1.75-1.79 1.75-1.79 1.76-1.79
Peak Melting Endotherm °C 156-162 162-170 164-180
Melt Flow Rate g/10 min (wt in Kg)
Ultra High Viscosity ... ... 0.5-10A
High Viscosity 0.5-8A 5-8B 0.5-10C
Medium Viscosity 4-18A 5-36B 0.5-30D
Low Viscosity ... 3.5-45E 0.5-60F
Apparent Melt Viscosity Pa’s:G
High Viscosity 2800-3800 2800-3700 2500-4000
Medium Viscosity 2300-2800 1300-2800 1300-2500
Low Viscosity ... 350-1300 250-1300
Note: For measuring MFR values of PVDF, the load must be selected based on the viscosity as follows:
A
= 21.6 Kg
B
= 12.5 Kg
C
= 10.0 Kg
D
= 5 Kg
E
= 3.8 Kg
F
= 2.16 Kg
G
Reported for a shear rate of 100 s−1 determined by capillary rheometry at 232°C (450°F) using 0.027 radian (60°) entrance angle die with L/D of 15 and in accordance
with procedures of Test Method D3835. Multiply the pascal second values by ten to obtain poise values.
(SI): The Modern Metric System resin grades available from several sources and are provided
2.2 IEC and ISO Standards: for information purposes only.
ISO 12086-1 Plastics—Fluoropolymer Dispersion and 4.1.2 Type II—PVDF fluoroplastics are polymerized in sus-
Moulding and Extrusion Materials—Part 1: Designation pension. Peak melting temperatures of these resins range from
and Basis for Specification 164 to 180°C. The particles isolated from suspension are
ISO 12086-2 Plastics—Fluoropolymer Dispersion and spherical and range typically from 20 to 150 µm in diameter.
Molding and Extrusion Materials—Part 2: Preparation of 4.1.2.1 Type II resins are available commercially, and the
Test Specimens and Determination of Properties data of Table 1 reflect ranges encompassing values typical for
the properties of available grades.
3. Terminology
4.2 The system uses predefined cells to refer to specific
3.1 Definitions: aspects of this specification, as illustrated below.
3.1.1 For definitions of plastics terms used in this specifi-
Specification
cation, see Terminology D883. Special
Standard Number Block Type Grade Class
3.1.2 lot, n—one production run or a uniform blend of two Notes
Example: Specification
or more production runs. D3222 – 05 I 2 ... ...
4. Classification For this example (D3222 – 05, I2), the line callout describes
a PVDF resin polymerized in emulsion, having a specific
4.1 This specification covers two types of natural, unmodi-
gravity between 1.75 and 1.79, and a peak melting endotherm
fied PVDF fluoroplastics supplied in pellet form for molding
between 162 to 170°C. A comma is used as the separator
and extrusion, and in powder form for solutions, dispersions, or
between the Standard Number and the Type. Separators are not
coatings.
needed between the Type, Grade, and Class. Provision for
4.1.1 Type I—PVDF fluoroplastics are polymerized in emul-
Special Notes is included so that other information, such as a
sion. Depending upon the polymerization conditions, the peak
preferred viscosity range, can be provided when required.
melting point of the resin can be varied between 156 and
When special notes are used, they shall be preceded by a
170°C. The diameter of the primary particle isolated from the
comma.
emulsion is typically less than 1 µm; the dried powder has an
average agglomerate diameter range of 3 to 15 µm. 5. General Requirements
4.1.1.1 Two distinctly different Type I emulsion PVDF
resins are available commercially. These are differentiated by 5.1 The material shall be of uniform composition and free of
peak melting endotherm values, as shown in Table 1, and this foreign matter.
difference is the basis for subdividing Type I resins into Grades
1 and 2. Table 1 shows the melt viscosity ranges encompassing 6. Detail Requirements
6.1 General Attributes:
127
SD-3222 ASME NM.3.1-2018
6.1.1 Peak Melting Endotherm—The material covered by ture is 30 to 60°C higher than the upper peak melting
this specification shall have a minimum peak melting endo- endotherm value depending on the grade. Mold temperature is
therm for the type and class as shown in Table 1 when tested 120 6 10°F.
in accordance with Test Method D3418. For Type I resins, this 6.3.2 Flexural Properties—The material covered in this
shall involve heating a solid specimen of 5 6 1 mg from room specification shall have a minimum flexural modulus of 1.38
temperature to 200°C at 10°C/min, maintaining the tempera- GPa (190 × 103 psi) when tested in accordance with Method I
ture at 200°C for 5 min, followed by cooling at a controlled of Test Methods D790, using 6.4-mm (0.25-in.) thick speci-
rate of 10°C/min to about 30°C, then reheating at 10°C/min to mens prepared by injection molding under conditions specified
200°C. Record the peak melting endotherm during the second by the resin supplier. Alternatively, compression-molded
melting cycle. samples are used (see Section 8) and tested after the 16-h
6.1.1.1 Temperature—Test Type II resins likewise except conditioning period.
that the maximum is 250°C. 6.3.3 Impact Resistance—Type I material covered in this
6.1.2 Specific Gravity—A solid specimen of the material specification shall have a minimum impact strength of 80.0 J/m
covered by this specification shall have the minimum specific (1.50 ft·lbf/in.) determined by Test Methods D256 using
gravity indicated in Table 1 (1.75 for Type I, Class 1 and 1.76 6.4-mm (0.25-in.) thick specimens prepared by injection mold-
for all others) when tested in accordance with Test Method ing under conditions specified by the manufacturer. Alterna-
D792. tively, specimens are compression-molded and tested after the
conditioning period as specified above. For Type II material,
NOTE 3—Test attached to the specimen upon immersion. Dipping the impact testing is not required.
specimens in a very dilute solution (less than 0.1 weight percent) of an
ammonium perfluorooctanoate surfactant minimizes this problem. 6.4 Electrical Properties:
6.1.3 Refractive Index—The material covered in this speci- 6.4.1 D-C Resistance—The material covered in this speci-
fication shall have a refractive index of 1.42 when measured at fication shall have a d-c volume resistivity greater than 1.2V·m
the sodium D line at 25°C (77°F) in accordance with the (1.2 × 1014 V·cm) when tested as a 0.76-mm (0.030-in.)
refractometer procedure in Test Methods D542, using speci- compression-molded specimen (see Section 8) in accordance
mens that have not been subjected to any processes which with Test Methods D257.
induce orientation of the polymer chains or crystal-lites. 6.4.2 Dielectric Strength—The material covered in this
Compression-molded specimens at least 2-mm (0.079-in.) specification shall have a dielectric strength in air no less than
thick that have been quenched rapidly in water are preferred. 57 kV/mm (1280 V/0.001 in.) by the “short-time” method of
6.1.4 Limiting Oxygen Index—The material covered in this Test Methods D149 with 0.13-mm (0.05-in.) thick
specification shall have a minimum limiting oxygen index of compression-molded specimens (see Section 8) tested in air
42 when tested in accordance with Test Method D2863. using 25.4-mm (1-in.) Type 3 electrodes.
6.4.3 Dielectric Constant—The material covered in this
NOTE 4—If a column with a restricted opening is used, position the top specification shall have a dielectric constant less than 11.0 at
of the specimen 40 mm below the opening.
100 Hz and greater than 5.8 at 1 MHz when tested as a 3.2-mm
6.2 Processing Related Attributes: (0.125-in.) thick compression-molded specimen (see Section 8)
6.2.1 Flow Rate—Materials conforming to this specification in accordance with Test Methods D150 at 23°C (73°F).
shall be tested for melt flow rate in accordance with Test 6.4.4 Dissipation Factor—The material covered in this
Method D1238 using loads shown in parentheses in Table 1. specification shall have a dissipation factor of less than 0.045
6.2.2 Rheological Properties—The apparent melt viscosity at 100 Hz and less than 0.24 at 1 MHz when tested as 3.2-mm
of these materials shall be tested in accordance with Test (0.125-in.) compression-molded specimens (see Section 8) in
Method D3835 at 231 6 1°C (450°F) using a die with an accordance with Test Methods D150 at 23°C (73°F).
entrance angle of 60° (cone angle of 120°) and a minimum
NOTE 5—Since this material has very low water-absorption character-
capillary L/D of 15. See Table 1. istics, maintenance of constant humidity during testing or specimen
6.3 Mechanical Properties: preparation is not necessary except as required for a specific test method.
However, no moisture shall be present in the resin when preparing
6.3.1 Tensile Properties—The material covered in this specimens for testing. Heat the resin sample at 110°C (230°F) in an
specification shall have a tensile yield strength exceeding 36 air-circulating oven until the adventitious moisture is removed.
MPa (5200 psi) at 23°C (74°F) and a minimum elongation at
break of 10 % when tested in accordance with Test Method 7. Sampling
D638 at 51 mm (2 in.)/min, using Type I specimens 3.2-mm 7.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
(0.125-in.) thick as specified in Test Method D638. Preferably, requirements of Annex A1.
compression-molded samples are used (see Section 8), but
injection molded specimens also are used, providing that the 8. Preparation of Compression Molded Specimens
samples yield and rupture in the gage region and not near the
heel. Specimens shall be molded under conditions specified by 8.1 Equipment:
the resin suppliers. Generally, injection molded specimens 8.1.1 Press with approximately 180 kN (20 ton) capacity
show low and variable elongation values compared to and heating capability for maintaining platens between 220 and
compression-molded specimens. Typically, the melt tempera- 240°C (428 to 464°F).
128
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3222
8.1.2 Two smooth chromium-finished plates with approxi- the mold dimension. To assure complete filling, the stack of
mate dimensions 150 by 250 by 5 mm (10 by 10 by 0.02 in.), thin samples must be slightly higher than the mold cavity
or, if more appropriate to the press type, 150 by 150 by 5 mm thickness.
(6 by 6 by 0.02 in.).
8.1.3 Flat open-cavity steel molds, that is, frames, to pro- 9. Test Conditions
vide the shape and thicknesses requisite for the specific tests. 9.1 Specific Gravity, Mechanical Properties, and Electrical
8.1.4 Timing device. Properties:
8.1.5 Appropriate equipment to handle the hot mold assem- 9.1.1 Condition the molded test specimens in accordance
bly when removed from the press. with Procedure A of Practice D618, except that the period shall
8.1.6 Balance and containers for weighing the resin be at least 16 h prior to test.
samples. 9.1.2 Conduct tests at the standard laboratory temperature
8.1.7 Water-filled container to quench-cool the samples in of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F).
the mold frame. NOTE 8—PVDF is a partially crystalline polymer. Unless molded and
8.1.8 Aluminum foil approximately 0.1-mm thick (0.004- conditioned equivalently for a sufficient period to assure consistent
in.). crystallinity, samples prepared by any other method give variable results.
8.2 Compression Molding Specimens Less Than 2 mm (0.08 10. Handling
in.):
10.1 As is the case with any synthetic resin, it is advisable
8.2.1 For the given mold cavity establish, by initial trial
to wear a dust mask when handling large quantities of powder
preparations, the amount of material necessary to overfill
grades to prevent ingestion.
slightly and yield a minimum flash after forming.
8.2.2 Place the appropriate amount of material in the center 11. Packaging
of the mold between thin sheets of polished aluminum foil. 11.1 The packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
8.2.3 Place the assembly between the chrome-finished Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
plates.
8.2.4 Place the mold assembly in the press so that it is in 12. Inspection
contact with the hot platens, using a ram force that barely 12.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference
registers on the force gage and hold for a 5-min period at a to this specification shall be for conformance to the require-
temperature of 230 6 2°C (446 6 4°F). ments specified herein.
8.2.5 After the preheat period, slowly increase the ram force
to 130 kN (30 000 lbf) and hold for 1 min. 12.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
8.2.6 Remove the sandwiched material and immediately acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
quench in cold water. inspection shall consist of all the requirements.
8.2.7 After standing for 1 min, disassemble and remove the 12.3 Periodic check inspection with reference to this speci-
molded plaque from the frame. fication shall consist of the tests for all requirements of the
NOTE 6—The alternative method of allowing the assembly to cool at
material under this specification.
ambient room temperature under a heavy weight, or under pressure in a 12.4 A report of test results shall be furnished. The re-
cold press, results in specimens having properties that vary from values in
specification tests.
port shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance inspection for
the shipment and the results of the most recent periodic-
8.2.8 If the mold shape is not appropriate for the test, cut check inspection.
test specimens from the molded sample.
13. Certification
NOTE 7—The edges of the specimen affect performance in mechanical
tests. Die-cutting is the preferred method to prepare such specimens; the 13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
cutting edges shall be leveled and sharp.
14. Precision and Bias
8.3 Compression Molding Specimens Thicker Than 2 mm
(0.08 in.): 14.1 The precision and bias statements of ASTM test
8.3.1 Pellets of PVDF can be compression-molded directly methods referenced herein apply to the specific tests required
in thick sections without difficulty. in this specification.
8.3.2 Powdered PVDF samples tend to entrap air when 15. Keywords
thick sections are molded under compression. Such specimens
are not suitable for any tests in this specification. The preferred 15.1 extrusion materials; fluorohydrocarbon plastics; fluo-
method to obtain bubble-free thick moldings involves prepa- ropolymers; molding materials; polyvinylidene fluoride
ration of thin compression-molded sheets, as described in 8.2, (PVDF)
and a subsequent second molding cycle filling the thick section
mold with several layers of the thin sheet specimens cut to fill
129
SD-3222 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
130
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3261
SPECIFICATION FOR BUTT HEAT FUSION

POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC FITTINGS FOR
POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC PIPE AND TUBING
SD-3261
(Identical with ASTM D3261-12e1 except for additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, revised marking
requirements in para. 11.1.1, renumbering of section 14, and quality assurance requirement in para. 12.1 has been
made mandatory.)
131
SD-3261 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
1. Scop 2.5 Plastic Pipe Institute

1.1 This specification covers polyethylene (PE) butt fusion PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro-
fittings for use with polyethylene pipe (IPS, DIPS, and ISO) static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB),
and tubing (CTS). Included are requirements for materials, Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
workmanship, dimensions, marking, sustained pressure, and Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate-
burst pressure. rials or Pipe
PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List-
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Pip-
and are not considered standard. ing Materials or Pipe
3. Terminology
2.1 ASTM Standards:
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe 3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412
Under Constant Internal Pressure and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic unless otherwise specified.
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 3.2 dimension ratio (DR) for thermoplastic pipe—the ratio
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- of diameter to wall thickness. For this specification it is
tics calculated by dividing the specified outside diameter by the
D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther- specified wall thickness of the fitting at its area of fusion. DRs
moplastic Pipe and Fittings are rounded and do not calculate exactly.
D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 4. Classification
D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit- 4.1 General—This specification covers butt fusion fittings
tings Materials intended for use with polyethylene pipe and tubing.
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems 4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally
2.2 Federal Standard: molded. Fittings may be machined from extruded or molded
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) stock.
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
2.4 National Sanitation Foundation Standard:
Materials
132
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3261
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by thermal welding are not in- 7.1.1 Outside Diameter—Nominal outside diameters of butt
cluded in this specification. fusion fittings shall conform to the nominal iron pipe size
4.1.3 Fittings intended for use in the distribution of natural (IPS), ductile iron pipe size (DIPS)or copper tubing size (CTS)
gas or petroleum fuels shall also meet the requirements of dimensions at area of fusion. These dimensions and tolerances
Specification D2513. shall be as shown in Table 2, Table 3, Table 4 and of this
specification.
5. Ordering Information 7.1.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Inside diam-
5.1 When ordering fittings under this specification, the eters of butt fusion fittings for tubing at area of fusion shall
following should be specified: conform to the dimensions of the tubing being joined. The
5.1.1 Polyethylene compound (material designation or trade dimensions and tolerances for the fittings are shown in Table 5.
name) 7.1.3 Wall Thickness—The wall thicknesses of butt fusion
5.1.2 Style of fitting (tee, 90° ell, and the like) fittings shall not be less than the minimum specified for the
5.1.3 Size: pipe or tubing. The wall thicknesses and tolerances at the area
5.1.3.1 Nominal diameter. of fusion shall be as shown in Table 5, Table 6, Table 7, and
5.1.3.2 CTS, IPS, DIPS, or schedule. Table 8 of this specification.
5.1.3.3 Dimension ratio number or schedule number. 7.1.4 Measurements—These shall be made in accordance
with Test Method D2122 for roundable pipe.
6. Materials 7.1.5 Design Dimensions—Overall fitting dimensions may
be as preferred from a design standpoint by the manufacturer
6.1 Polyethylene Compound—Polyethylene material com-
and accepted by the purchaser consistent with 7.1.3.
pounds suitable for use in the manufacture of fittings under this
specification shall meet Specification D3350 and shall meet the 7.1.6 Special Sizes—Where existing system conditions or
Specification D3350 classification and property requirements special local requirements make other diameters or dimension
inTable 1 and shall have PPI TR-4 HDB and HDS listings at ratios necessary, other sizes or dimension ratios, or both, shall
73°F (23°C) and HDB listings 140°F (60°C) in accordance be acceptable for engineered applications when mutually
with Table 1. agreed upon by the customer and the manufacturer, if the fitting
is manufactured from plastic compounds meeting the material
6.2 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—Polyethylene requirements of this specification, and the strength and design
material compounds shall meet Specification Table 1 code C or requirements are calculated on the same basis as those used in
E. Code C material compounds shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon this specification. For diameters not shown in Table 2, Table 3
black. Code E material compounds shall be colored with UV or Table 4, the tolerance shall be the same percentage as that
stabilizer. shown in the corresponding tables for the next smaller listed
6.3 Rework Material—Clean polyethylene compound from size. Minimum wall thickness for these special sizes shall not
the manufacturer’s own production that met 6.1 and 6.2 as be less than the minimum wall specified for the pipe or tubing
virgin material is suitable for remolding into fittings, either the fitting is designed to be used with. The maximum wall
alone or blended with new compound of the same cell thickness allowed shall not be greater than 20 % thicker than
classification or material designation. Fittings containing the the specified minimum wall, and shall be determined by 10.4.3
rework material shall meet the material and product require- of this specification.
ments of this specification. 7.2 Pressure Test Requirements :
7.2.1 Short-Term Rupture Strength for Fittings 1⁄2 to 12 in.
7. Requirements and 90 to 315 mm, Nominal Diameter—The minimum short-
7.1 Dimensions and Tolerances: term rupture strength of the fitting and fused pipe or tubing
TABLE 1 Specification D3350 Classification of Polyethylene Fittings Materials

Physical Properties Cell Classification and Properties for Polyethylene Pipe Materials
PE2606 PE2706 PE2708 PE3608 PE3708 PE3710 PE4708 PE4710
Density 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
Melt Index 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 4 4 4 4 4
Flexural modulus $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $5
Tensile Strength $3 $3 $3 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4
Slow crack growth resistance 6 7 7 6 7 7 7 7
(F1473)
Hydrostatic strength classifica- 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
tion
Color and UV StabilizerA C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E
B B B B B B B B
HDB at 140°F (60°C), PPI TR-4,
psi (MPa)
HDB at 73°F (23°C), PPI TR-4, 630 (4.34) 630 (4.34) 800 (5.52) 800 (5.52) 800 (5.52) 1000 800 (5.52) 1000
psi (MPa) (6.90) (6.90)
A
See 6.2.
B
Listing required; consult manufacturer for listed value.
133
SD-3261 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 IPS Sizing System Outside Diameters and Tolerances TABLE 4 ISO Sizing System (ISO 161/1) Outside Diameters and
for Fittings for Use with Polyethylene Pipe, in. Tolerances for Fit for Use with Polyethylene Pipe, mm
Average Outside Nominal Pipe Average Outside Diameter at Area of Fusion
Nominal Pipe
Diameter at Area of Tolerance Size Min MaxA
Size
FusionA
90 90.0 90.8
⁄
12 0.840 ±0.008 110 110.0 111.0
⁄
34 1.050 ±0.008 160 160.0 161.4
1 1.315 ±0.010 200 200.0 201.8
1 1⁄4 1.660 ±0.010 250 250.0 252.3
1 1⁄2 1.900 ±0.010 280 280.0 282.5
2 2.375 ±0.010 315 315.0 317.8
3 3.500 ±0.012 355 355.0 358.2
4 4.500 ±0.015 400 400.0 403.6
6 6.625 ±0.018 450 450.0 454.1
8 8.625 ±0.025 500 500.0 504.5
10 10.750 ±0.027 560 560.0 565.0
12 12.750 ±0.036 630 630.0 635.7
14 14.000 ±0.063 710 710.0 716.4
16 16.000 ±0.072 800 800.0 807.2
18 18.000 ±0.081 900 900.0 908.1
20 20.000 ±0.090 1000 1000.0 1009.0
21.5 21.500 ±0.097 1200 1200.0 1210.8
22 22.000 ±0.099 1400 1400.0 1412.6
24 24.000 ±0.108 1600 1600.0 1614.4
28 28.000 ±0.126
A
32 32.000 ±0.144 Specified in ISO 3607.
36 36.000 ±0.162
42 42.000 ±0.189
48 48.000 ±0.216
A
Defined as measured 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 in. (6.4 to 12.7 mm) from fitting outlet extremity. 7.2.3 Sustained Pressure—The fitting and fused pipe or
tubing shall not fail, as defined in Test Method D1598, when
tested at the time, pressures, and test temperatures selected
TABLE 3 DIPS Sizing System Outside Diameters and Tolerances from test options offered in Table 10. The test specimens shall
for Fittings for Use with Polyethylene Pipe, in. be prepared for testing in the manner prescribed in 10.5.1.
Average Outside Diameter
Nominal Pipe Size ToleranceA
at Area of Fusion 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
3 3.96 ±0.016 8.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
4 4.80 ±0.022 with good commercial practice so as to produce fittings
6 6.90 ±0.031
8 9.05 ±0.041 meeting the requirements of this specification. Fittings shall be
10 11.10 ±0.050 homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign
12 13.20 ±0.059 inclusions, or other injurious defects. The fittings shall be as
14 15.30 ±0.069
16 17.40 ±0.078 uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density,
18 19.50 ±0.088 and other physical properties.
20 21.60 ±0.097
24 25.80 ±0.116
9. Sampling
30 32.000 ±0.144
36 38.30 ±0.172 9.1 Parts made for sale under this specification should be
42 44.50 ±0.200
48 50.80 ±0.229
sampled at a frequency appropriate for the end use intended.
A
When the fittings are to be installed under a system specifica-
Defined as measured 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 in. (6.4 to 12.7) from fitting outlet extremity.
tion (such as Specification D2513 for gas), the minimum
requirements of that specification must be satisfied.
shall not be less than the minimum short-term rupture strength 10. Test Methods
of the pipe or tubing in the system when tested in accordance
with 10.5.3. These minimum pressures shall be as shown in 10.1 General—The test methods in this specification cover
Table 9 of this specification. Test specimens shall be prepared fittings to be used with pipe and tubing for gas, water, and other
for testing in the manner described in 10.5.1 of this specifica- engineered piping systems. Test methods that are applicable
tion. The test equipment, procedures, and failures definitions from other specifications will be referenced in the paragraph
shall be as specified in Test Method D1599. pertaining to the particular test. Certain special test methods
7.2.2 Short-Term Strength for Fittings 14 to 48 in. and 355 applicable to this specification only are explained in the
to 1600 mm, Nominal Diameter—Fittings shall not fail when appropriate paragraph.
tested in accordance with 10.5.4. The minimum pressure shall 10.2 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition
be as shown in Table 9 of this specification. Test specimens the specimens prior to test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not
shall be prepared for testing in the manner described in 10.2 of less than 6 h in air, or 1 h in water, for those tests where
this specification. The test equipment and procedures shall be conditioning is required and in all cases of disagreement.
as specified in Test Method D1599. Newly molded fittings shall be conditioned 40 h prior to test.
134
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3261
TABLE 5 Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Tolerances for Fittings for Use with Plastic Tubing
Diameter at Area of FusionA
Tubing Type Nominal Tubing Minimum Wall
Outside, in. (mm) Inside, in. (mm)
in. (mm) Size, in. Thickness, in. (mm)
Average Tolerance Average Tolerance
0.062 (1.57) ⁄ CTS

12 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.495 (12.58) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58)
⁄ CTS
34 0.875 (22.22) ± 0.010 (±0.26) 0.745 (18.92) .... ...
0.090 (2.29) 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.437 (11.10) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.687 (17.44) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.937 (23.80) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.187 (30.14) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
DR 11 3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.715 (18.16) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.077 (1.96)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.915 (23.24) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.101 (2.56)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.125 (28.58) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
DR 9.3 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.483 (12.26) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.067 (1.70)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.679 (17.24) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.094 (2.38)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.873 (22.18) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.069 (27.16) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.148 (3.76)
A
Defined as measured 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 in. (6.4 to 12.7 mm) from fitting outlet extremity.
TABLE 6 IPS Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with Polyethylene Pipe, in.A,B,C
Minimum Wall Thickness
Nominal Pipe Size
SCH 40 SCH 80 SDR 21 SDR 17 SDR 13.5 DR 10 DR 11.5 SDR 11 DR 9.3 SDR 9 DR7
⁄
12 0.109 0.147 ... ... ... ... ... 0.076 0.090 ... 0.120
⁄
34 0.113 0.154 ... ... ... ... ... 0.095 0.113 0.117 0.150
1 0.133 0.179 ... ... ... ... ... 0.119 0.142 0.146 0.188
1 1⁄ 4 0.140 0.191 ... ... ... 0.166 ... 0.151 0.179 0.184 0.237
1 1⁄ 2 0.145 0.200 ... ... ... ... ... 0.173 0.204 0.211 0.271
2 0.154 0.218 ... ... ... ... ... 0.216 0.256 0.264 0.339
3 0.216 0.300 ... ... 0.259 ... 0.305 0.318 0.377 0.389 0.500
4 0.237 0.337 ... 0.264 0.333 ... 0.392 0.409 0.484 0.500 0.643
6 0.280 0.432 0.316 0.390 0.491 ... 0.576 0.603 0.713 0.736 0.946
8 0.322 ... 0.410 0.508 0.639 ... 0.750 0.785 0.928 0.958 1.232
10 0.365 ... 0.511 0.633 0.797 ... 0.935 0.978 1.156 1.194 1.536
12 0.406 ... 0.608 0.750 0.945 ... 1.109 1.160 1.371 1.417 1.821
14 ... ... 0.667 0.824 ... ... ... 1.273 1.505 1.556 2.000
16 ... ... 0.762 0.941 ... ... ... 1.455 1.720 1.778 2.286
18 ... ... 0.857 1.059 ... ... ... 1.636 1.935 2.000 2.571
20 ... ... 0.952 1.176 ... ... ... 1.818 2.151 2.222 2.857
21.5 ... ... 1.024 1.265 ... ... ... ... ... ... 3.071
22 ... ... 1.048 1.294 ... ... ... 2.000 2.366 2.444 3.143
24 ... ... 1.143 1.412 ... ... ... 2.182 2.581 ... 3.429
28 ... ... 1.333 1.647 ... ... ... 2.545 ... ... 4.000
32 ... ... 1.524 1.882 ... ... ... 2.909 ... ... 4.571
36 ... ... 1.714 2.118 ... ... ... ... ... ... 5.143
42 ... ... 2.000 2.471 ... ... ... ... ... ... 6.000
48 ... ... 2.286 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 6.857
A
Tolerance +20 %, −0 %.
B
For those SDR groups having overlapping thickness requirements, a manufacturer may represent their product as applying to the combination (for example, 11.0/11.5)
so long as their product falls within the dimensional requirements of both DR’s.
C
For wall thicknesses not listed the minimum wall thickness may be calculated by the average outside diameter/SDR rounded up to the nearest 0.001 in.
10.3 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the standard have 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm) land lengths cut to the minimum inside
laboratory temperature of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) unless diameter and maximum inside diameter. A fitting is unaccept-
otherwise specified. able (no go) if it fits snugly on the minimum inside diameter
10.4 Dimensions and Tolerances: land of the gage or if it fits loosely on the maximum diameter
10.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter of land of the gage.
the fittings at the area of fusion in accordance with the Wall 10.4.3 Wall Thickness—Make a series of measurements
Thickness section of Method D2122 by use of a circumferen- using a cylindrical anvil tubular micrometer or other accurate
tial tape readable to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm). device at closely spaced intervals to ensure that minimum and
10.4.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Use a stepped maximum wall thicknesses to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm)
plug gage to determine the inside diameter of the CTS end of have been determined. Make a minimum of six measurements
the fitting. The plug gage shall be of the go/no go type and shall at each cross section.
135
SD-3261 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 7 ISO Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the Condition 6 no retest is permissible. Brittle failure of any
Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with specimen before the Table 10 “minimum average time before
Polyethylene Pipe, mmA,B,C
failure” constitutes failure to meet this requirement and no
Nominal Minimal Wall Thickness
Pipe retest is allowed.
Size DR 41 DR 32.5 DR 26 DR 21 DR 17 DR 11 10.5.2.3 Provision for retest (if needed). The retest sample
shall be three specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and
90 ... ... 3.5 4.3 5.3 8.2 material designation from the same time frame as the “test
110 ... 3.4 4.2 5.2 6.5 10.0
160 ... 4.9 6.2 7.6 9.4 14.5 sample.” For the retest, any specimen failure before the
200 ... 6.2 7.7 9.5 11.8 18.2 “minimum average time before failure” at the retest condition
250 ... 7.7 9.6 11.9 14.7 22.7 of lower stress and longer minimum average time before
280 ... 8.6 10.8 13.3 16.5 25.5
315 .... 9.7 12.1 15.0 18.5 28.6 failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement.
355 ... 10.9 13.7 16.9 20.9 32.3 10.5.3 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure for Fittings 1⁄2
400 ... 12.3 15.4 19.0 23.5 36.4 to 12 in. and 90 to 315 mm, Nominal Diameter—The test
450 ... 13.8 17.3 21.4 26.5 ...
500 ... 15.4 19.2 23.8 29.4 ... equipment, procedures, and failure definitions shall be as
560 ... 17.2 21.5 26.7 32.9 ... specified in Test Method D1599. The hydrostatic pressure shall
630 ... 19.4 24.2 30.0 37.1 ... be increased at a uniform rate such that the specimen fails
710 ... 21.8 27.3 33.8 41.8 ...
800 ... 24.6 30.8 38.1 47.1 ... between 60 and 70 s from start of test. Minimum failure
900 ... 27.7 34.6 42.9 ... ... pressures are shown in Table 9.
1000 24.4 30.8 38.5 47.6 ... ... 10.5.4 Minimum Hydrostatic Pressure for Fittings 14 to 48
1200 29.3 36.9 46.2 ... ... ...
1400 34.1 43.1 ... ... ... ... in. and 355 to 1600 mm, Nominal Diameter—The test equip-
1600 39.0 49.2 ... ... ... ... ment and procedures shall be as specified in Test Method
A
Tolerance +20 %, −0 %. D1599. The hydrostatic pressure shall be increased at a
B
For those SDR groups having overlapped thickness requirements, a manufac- uniform rate such that the test pressure is reached within 60 to
turer may represent their product as applying to the combination (for example,
11.0/11.5) so long as their product falls within the dimensional requirements of both 70 s from the start of the test. No failure should occur in the
DR’s. sample during the test period.
C
For wall thicknesses not listed the minimum wall thickness may be calculated by
the average outside diameter/SDR rounded up to the nearest 0.001. 11. Product Marking
11.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
11.1.1 ASME SD-3261 or both ASME SD-3261 and
10.5 Pressure Testing:
10.5.1 Preparation of Specimens for Pressure Testing— ASTM D3261.
Prepare test specimens in such a manner that each, whether 11.1.2 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
individual fittings or groups of fittings, is a system incorporat- 11.1.3 Material designations (such as PE2708 or PE4710),
ing at least one length of pipe or tubing. Fuse all fitting outlets NOTE 1—Earlier editions of Specification D3261 included PE material
with the appropriate size pipe or tubing. At least one piece of designations PE2406, PE3406, PE3407 and PE3408. Changes to Specifi-
pipe or tubing in the system shall have a minimum length equal cation D3350 and PPI TR-3 led to changes in thermoplastic material
designation codes, resulting in material designation PE2406 being super-
to five pipe diameters. seded by material designations PE2606 and PE2708, material designation
10.5.2 Sustained Pressure Test: PE3406 being superseded by PE3606, material designation PE3407 being
10.5.2.1 Sustained pressure tests shall be conducted in discontinued, and material designation PE3408 being superseded by
accordance with Table 10 and Test Method D1598 using water material designations PE3608, PE3708, PE3710, PE4708 and PE4710.
as the pressurizing medium. The “test sample” shall be three Recognizing that a period of time is necessary for the dissemination of
information and to update specifications and literature, during the transi-
specimens. Select one Table 10 Condition for the material tional period, product markings that include both older and newer
designation and test the three specimen test sample. materials designations, for example PE2406/PE2606, may occur.
10.5.2.2 Passing results are: (a) non-failure for all three
11.1.4 Date of manufacture or manufacturing code,
specimens at a time equal to or greater than the “minimum
11.1.5 Size.
average time before failure,” or (b) not more than one ductile
specimen failure and the average time before failure for all 11.2 Where the physical size of the fitting does not allow
three specimens shall be greater than the specified “minimum complete marking, marking may be omitted in the following
average time before failure” for the selected Table 10 Condi- sequence: size, date of manufacture, material designation,
tion. For Table 10 Conditions 1 through 5: if more than one manufacturer’s name or trademark.
ductile failure occurs before the “minimum average time 11.3 Where recessed marking is used, take care not to
before failure,” it is permissible to conduct one retest at a Table reduce the wall thickness below the minimum specified.
10 Condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time
before failure for the material designation. For Table 10
136
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3261
12. Quality Assurance 13. Certification

12.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was 13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance 14. Keywords
with this specification and has been found to meet the 14.1 butt fusion fittings; fittings; polyethylene fittings; poly-
requirements of this specification. ethylene pipe; polyethylene tubing
TABLE 8 DIPS Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with Polyethylene Pipe, in.A,B,C
Nominal Minimum Wall Thickness
Pipe
Size SDR 32.5 DR 26 DR 21 SDR 17 DR 13.5 SDR 11 SDR 9 SDR 7
3 0.122 0.153 0.189 0.233 0.294 0.360 0.440 0.566

4 0.148 0.185 0.229 0.283 0.356 0.437 0.534 0.686
6 0.213 0.266 0.329 0.406 0.512 0.628 0.767 0.946
8 0.279 0.348 0.431 0.533 0.670 0.823 1.006 1.293
10 0.342 0.427 0.529 0.653 0.823 1.009 1.234 1.586
12 0.407 0.508 0.629 0.777 0.978 1.200 1.467 1.886
14 0.471 0.589 0.729 0.900 1.134 1.391 1.700 2.186
16 0.536 0.670 0.829 1.024 1.289 1.582 1.934 2.486
18 0.600 0.750 0.929 1.147 1.445 1.773 2.167 2.786
20 0.665 0.831 1.029 1.271 1.600 1.964 2.400 3.086
24 0.794 0.993 1.229 1.518 1.912 2.346 2.867 3.686
30 0.985 1.231 1.524 1.883 2.371 2.909 3.556 4.571
36 1.179 1.473 1.824 2.253 2.837 3.482 4.256 5.471
42 1.370 1.712 2.119 2.618 3.297 4.046 4.945 6.357
48 1.563 1.954 2.419 2.989 3.763 4.619 5.645 7.257
A
Tolerance +20 %, 0 %.
B
C
For wall thicknesses not listed the minimum wall thickness may be calculated by the average outside diameter/SDR rounded up to the nearest 0.001
TABLE 9 Burst Pressure Requirements at 73.4°F for Common Fitting SizesA

Wall Thickness, DR, Nominal Minimum Pressure, Minimum Pressure,
or Schedule Diameter psi (MPa) Density 3 or 4
Materials psi (MPa)
DR 7 ALLB 833 (5.744) 967 (6.667)
SDR 9 ALLB 625 (4.309) 725 (4.999)
DR 9.3 ALLB 602 (4.151) 699 (4.820)
SDR 11 ALLB 500 (3.448) 580 (3.999)
DR 11.5 ALLB 476 (3.282) 552 (3.806)
DR 15.5 ALLB 345 (2.379) 400 (2.758)
SDR 17 ALLB 313 (2.158) 363 (2.503)
SDR 21 ALLB 250 (1.724) 290 (2.000)
DR 26 ALLB 200 (1.379) 232 (1.600)
DR 32.5 ALLB 159 (1.096) 184 (1.269)
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1⁄2 CTS 551 (3.799) 639 (4.406)
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 3⁄4 CTS 381 (2.627) 442 (3.048)
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1 CTS 292 (2.013) 639 (4.406)
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1⁄2 CTS 841 (5.799) 976 (6.730)
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 3⁄4 CTS 573 (3.951) 665 (4.585)
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1 CTS 435 (2.999) 504 (3.475)
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 11⁄4 CTS 350 (2.413) 406 (2.799)
SCH 40 1⁄2 IPS 746 (5.144) 865 (5.964)
SCH 40 3⁄4 IPS 603 (4.158) 699 (4.820)
SCH 40 1 IPS 563 (3.882) 653 (4.502)
SCH 40 11⁄4 IPS 461 (3.179) 534 (3.682)
SCH 40 11⁄2 IPS 413 (2.848) 479 (3.303)
SCH 40 2 IPS 347 (2.393) 402 (2.772)
SCH 40 3 IPS 326 (2.268) 381 (2.672)
SCH 40 4 IPS 278 (1.917) 322 (2.220)
SCH 40 6 IPS 221 (1.524) 256 (1.765)
SCH 40 8 IPS 194 (1.338) 225 (1.551)
SCH 40 10 IPS 176 (1.214) 204 (1.407)
SCH 40 12 IPS 164 (1.131) 191 (1.317)
SCH 40 16 IPS 164 (1.129) 190 (1.309)
SCH 40 20 IPS 154 (1.060) 178 (1.230)
A
Fiber stress of 2520 psi (17.4 MPa) for PE2406 and PE3408.
B
Refers to IPS, DIPS and ISO diameters shown in Table 2, Table 3 and Table 4.
137
SD-3261 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 10 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test RequirementsA,B

PE2606, PE2706, PE2708 PE3608 PE3708, PE3710, PE4710
PE4708
Test Pressure Hoop Stress,A Minimum Average Test Pressure Minimum
Test psi (kPa)B Time Before Failure, Hoop Average
Condition Temperature,
HoursB Stress,A Time
ºF (ºC)B psi (kPa)B Before
Failure,
HoursB
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
2S
P5
S Do
t
21 D
Where:
DO = measured outside diameter, in. (mm), and
B
Test temperature tolerance ±3.6ºF (±2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ±5 psi (±35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa. Note:
the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) x ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
These requirements apply only to federal / military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.
of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where
such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material
dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
ment:
138
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3261
ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or ser calls for the product to be used
to convey or to be in contact with potable water.
S3. Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for health effects portion of NSF Standard 14 by an acceptable
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and certifying organization when required by the regulatory author-
certified for conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61 or the ity having jurisdiction.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
139
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3307
SPECIFICATION FOR PERFLUOROALKOXY

(PFA)-FLUOROCARBON RESIN MOLDING AND
EXTRUSION MATERIALS
SD-3307
(Identical with ASTM D3307-10 except for revisions in paras. 5.2, 7.1, and section 10, and additional requirements in
141
SD-3307 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)-Fluorocarbon Resin Molding and
Extrusion Materials
1. Scope health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory

1.1 This specification covers melt processable molding and limitations prior to use.
extrusion materials of PFA-perfluoro(alkoxy alkane) fluorocar- NOTE 1—This specification, ISO 12086–1(2006), and ISO
bon resin. The materials are copolymers of TFE-fluorocarbon 12086–2(2006) differ in approach or detail. Data obtained using either
resins containing perfluoroalkoxy side chains. These materials may not be technically equivalent.
were formerly the subject of this specification and Specifica- 2. Referenced Documents
tion D6314.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
1.2 This specification is intended to provide a means for D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
calling out plastic materials used in the fabrication of end items tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
or parts. It is not intended for the selection of materials. D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
Material selection should be made by those having expertise in D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
the plastics field after careful consideration of the design and D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
the performance required of the part, the environment to which tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
it will be exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
costs involved, and the inherent properties of the material other D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
than those covered by this specification. by Extrusion Plastometer
1.3 This specification does not cover recycled plastics. D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
1.4 The tests involved are intended to provide information tics
for identifying the materials covered. It is not the function of D1708 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics by Use
this specification to provide engineering data for design pur- of Microtensile Specimens
poses. Specimens prepared by injection molding or extrusion D2116 Specification for FEP-Fluorocarbon Molding and
could yield test results that may vary from the values in this Extrusion Materials
specification. D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4591 Test Method for Determining Temperatures and
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as Heats of Transitions of Fluoropolymers by Differential
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information Scanning Calorimetry
only. D4895 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the Resin Produced From Dispersion
test methods portions, Sections 8 and 9 of this specification: D5033 Guide for Development of ASTM Standards Relating
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety to Recycling and Use of Recycled Plastics (Withdrawn
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility 2007)
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and D6314 Specification for Fluorocarbon Perfluoromethoxy
(MFA) Resin Molding and Extrusion Materials (With-
drawn 2002)
142
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3307
TABLE 1 Detail Requirements for Test on Molding and Extrusion Materials

Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV
A
Melt flow, g/10min:
min >7 1 >3 >10 1 >3 10 2 >24 1 $4 $8 $18 $63
max 19 3 7 30 3 10 17 5 #50 4 8 18 40 81
Melting endotherm peak
temperature,B 300 300 300 285 285 285 280 280 300 265 265 265 265 290
min, °C
A
See 9.3 of this specification.
B
E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in 6. Detail Requirements
ASTM Test Methods 6.1 The materials covered by this specification shall con-
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International form to the requirements prescribed in Table 1 and Table 2
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System when tested by the procedures specified herein. Table 2 lists
2.2 ISO Standards: those tests requiring a specimen molded as described in 9.1.
ISO 12086–1 Plastics–Fluoropolymer Dispersions and
Moulding and Extrusion Materials–Part 1 7. Sampling
ISO 12086–2 Plastics–Fluoropolymer Dispersions and 7.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
Moulding and Extrusion Materials–Part 2 requirements of Annex A1.
3. Terminology 8. Number of Tests
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- 8.1 One set of test specimens as prescribed in Section 9
nologies D883 and D1600. shall be considered sufficient for testing each sample. The
3.1.1 lot, n—one production run or a uniform blend of two average result of the specimens tested shall conform to the
or more productions runs. requirements of this specification.
4. Classification 9. Test Methods

4.1 This specification covers 14 types of PFA-fluorocarbon 9.1 Test Specimens:
resins supplied in pellet form for molding and extrusion. 9.1.1 Prepare a molded sheet 1.50 6 0.25-mm (0.0606
0.010-in.) thick. Use a picture-frame-type chase having a
4.2 A one-line system may be used to specify materials
suitable blanked-out section and thickness to produce the
covered by this specification. The system uses predefined cells
desired sheet. Use clean aluminum foil, 0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.005
to refer to specific aspects of this specification, illustrated as
to 0.007 in.) thick, in contact with the resin. A high temperature
follows:
mold release agent may be sprayed on the aluminum foil to
Specification help prevent the foil from sticking to the sheet. Use steel
Standard Number : Type : Grade :Class : Special molding plates at least 1.0 mm (0.040 in.) thick and of an area
Block : : : : Notes
: : : : : : : adequate to cover the chase.
: : 9.1.2 Lay down and smoothly cover one plate with a sheet
–––––––––––– ––– ––– ––– ––––– of aluminum foil. Place the mold chase on top of this assembly.
Example: Specification D3307 – 06, I
Place within the mold chase sufficient molding material to
In this standard, the only specifications are type; no grade or produce the required sheet in such manner that the polymer
class is required. A comma is used as the separator between the charge is a mound in the middle of the chase. Place a second
standard number and the type. sheet of aluminum foil on top of the granules and add the top
mold plate. Place the assembly in a compression molding press
5. General Requirements having platens that have been heated to 380 6 5°C (716 6
5.1 The materials shall be of uniform composition and so 10°F).
prepared as to conform to the requirements of this specifica- 9.1.3 Bring the press platens to incipient contact with the
tion. mold assembly. Hold for 2 to 4 min without pressure. Apply
5.2 The materials described in this specification shall be free approximately 1 MPa (145 psi) and hold for 1 to 1.5 min. Then
of foreign matter to such a contamination level as may be apply 2 to 4 MPa (290 to 580 psi) and hold for 1 to 1.5 min.
required in Annex A1. Maintain the press at 380 6 5°C (716 6 10°F) during these
steps. Remove the assembly from the press and place between
two 20 6 7-mm (0.75 6 0.25-in.) steel plates whose tempera-
ture is less than 40°C (104°F).
9.1.4 When the sheet is cool enough to touch (about 50 to
60°C (122 to 140°F)), remove the aluminum foil from the
143
SD-3307 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Detailed Requirements for Molded Specimens

Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV
Tensile strength, min, 23°C
(73.4°F):A
MPa 20.68 25.00 20.68 22.75 25.51 22.75 20.68 26.20 20.68 20.68 20.68 20.68 17.24 20.00
psi 3000 3625 3000 3300 3700 3300 3000 3800 3000 3000 3000 3000 2500 2900
Elongation, 23°C (73.4°F),
A 275 300 275 275 260 275 275 300 275 275 275 275 275 230
min, %
Note: The following properties are the same for all types except as noted.
Specific gravity, 23°C
All 2.12-2.17
(73.4°F):B
Dielectric constant, max:C All 2.2 at 102 Hz and 106 Hz
Dissipation factor, max:C
102 All 0.0003
106 All 0.0005 except Type 7, which is 0.0003
A
B
C
sheet. (If the sheet is allowed to cool to room temperature, the 9.6 Tensile Properties—Cut five specimens with the micro-
aluminum foil cannot be pulled free.) tensile die shown in Fig. 1, which is exactly the same as Fig.
9.2 Conditioning: 1 of Test Method D1708. The die shall be of the steel-rule type
9.2.1 For tests of specific gravity, tensile properties, and of curvature of 5 6 0.5-mm (0.20 6 0.02-in.) type. Determine
electrical properties, condition the molded test specimens in the tensile properties in accordance with the procedures de-
accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618 for a period of scribed in Test Method D638, except that the specimens used
at least 4 h prior to test. The other tests require no conditioning. shall be as detailed above, the initial jaw separation shall be 22
9.2.2 Conduct tests at the Standard Laboratory Temperature 6 0.13 mm (0.866 6 0.005 in.), and the speed of testing shall
of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) for determination of specific be 50 mm/min (2 in./min). Clamp the specimens with essen-
gravity, tensile properties, and electrical properties only. Since tially equal lengths in each jaw. Determine the elongation from
the resin does not absorb water, the maintenance of constant the chart, expressing it as a percentage of the initial jaw
humidity during testing is not necessary. Conduct tests for melt separation. Details appear in the Tensile Properties section of
flow rate and melting endotherm under ordinary laboratory Specification D2116.
conditions. 9.7 Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor—Determine
9.3 Melt Flow Rate—Determine the melt flow rate in dielectric constant and dissipation factor on three specimens,
accordance with Test Method D1238, Test Method A or B, with each 101.6 mm (4 in.) in diameter in accordance with Test
a temperature of 372 6 1°C and using a total load, including Methods D150. Testing shall be at 102 Hz and 106 Hz.
piston, of 5000 g. The same requirements apply for the use of 10. Inspection
corrosion-resistant alloy for the barrel lining, orifice, and piston
10.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference
tip.
to a specification based on this classification system shall
9.4 Melting Endotherm Peak Temperature: be for conformance to the requirements specified herein.
9.4.1 Determine the melting endotherm peak temperature
10.2 Lot-acceptance shall be the basis on which acceptance
using techniques in Test Method D4591 and Specification
or rejection of the lot is made. The lot acceptance inspection
D4895. Place a 20-mg specimen in a 4-mm tube with a
shall consist of melting endotherm peak temperature and melt
thermocouple. Premelt the specimen at 325°C, and push the
flow rate.
thermocouple into intimate contact with the melt. Cool the
sample in air. Run the differential thermal analysis at 10°C/min 10.3 Periodic check inspection with reference to a specifi-
with glass beads as a reference to a maximum temperature of cation based on this classification system shall consist of the
350°C. Extend straight lines down tangent to both sides of the test for all requirements of the material in accordance with this
melting endotherm, and take the temperature at which the lines specification.
intersect (peak minimum) as the melting endotherm peak 10.4 A report of test results shall be furnished. The
temperature. report shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance inspection
9.4.2 Precision—The single instrument precision of the for the shipment and the results of the most recent periodic-
differential thermal analysis applied to this material is 61.2°C check inspection.
(2S) as defined in Practice E177.
11. Certification
9.5 Specific Gravity—Cut two specimens from the compres-
sion molded sheet and test in accordance with Test Method
D792.
144
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3307
NOTE 1—All dimensions are in millimetres.

FIG. 1 Microtensile Die and Test Specimen
12. Packaging and Package Marking 13. Keywords

12.1 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of 13.1 extrusion; injection molding; fluoropolymer, perfluo-
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification. roalkoxy; PFA-fluorocarbon resin; tetrafluoroethylene copoly-
mer; TFE-fluorocarbon
145
SD-3307 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
146
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3350
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE PLASTICS PIPE

AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
SD-3350
(Identical with ASTM D3350-14 except for additional requirements in section 14 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
section 15.)
147
SD-3350 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials
1. Scope D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced

1.1 This specification covers the identification of polyeth- and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
ylene plastic pipe and fittings materials in accordance with a als
cell classification system. It is not the function of this specifi- D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
cation to provide specific engineering data for design purposes, tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
to specify manufacturing tolerances, or to determine suitability D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
for use for a specific application. D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
1.2 Polyethylene plastic materials, being thermoplastic, are D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
reprocessable and recyclable (Note 2). This specification al- Materials for Wire and Cable
lows for the use of those polyethylene materials, provided that D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-
all specific requirements of this specification are met. Gradient Technique
NOTE 1—The notes in this specification are for information only and D1603 Test Method for Carbon Black Content in Olefin
shall not be considered part of this specification. Plastics
NOTE 2—See Guide D5033 for information and definitions related to D1693 Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of
recycled plastics.
Ethylene Plastics
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)
standard. D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- D2839 Practice for Use of a Melt Index Strand for Deter-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- mining Density of Polyethylene
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. D3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
NOTE 3—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 For information regarding molding and extrusion mate- D4218 Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black
rials see Specification D4976. For information regarding wire Content in Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-
and cable materials see Specification D1248. Furnace Technique
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
2.1 ASTM Standards: D4883 Test Method for Density of Polyethylene by the
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing Ultrasound Technique
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics D4976 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
D746 Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics Extrusion Materials
and Elastomers by Impact D5033 Guide for Development of ASTM Standards Relating
to Recycling and Use of Recycled Plastics (Withdrawn
2007)
F1473 Test Method for Notch Tensile Test to Measure the
Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
and Resins
F2263 Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance
148
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3350
of Polyethylene (PE) Pipe to Chlorinated Water Type I (0.910 to 0.925) = Low Density
Type II (0.926 to 0.940) = Medium Density
2.2 ISO Standard: Type III (0.941 to 0.965) = High Density
ISO 12162 Thermoplastic Materials for Pipes and Fittings
NOTE 5—The manner in which materials are identified in the cell
for Pressure Applications—Classification and classification is illustrated for Class PE233424B as follows (refer also to
Designation—Overall Service (Design) Coefficient Table 1 and 6.2):
Class
3. Terminology 2 3 3 4 2 4 B
3
Density (0.926–0.940 g/cm )
3.1 Definitions: Melt Index (<0.4–0.15)
3.1.1 Terms as described in Terminology D883 shall apply Flexural Modulus (276–<552 MPa)
Tensile Strength at yield
in this specification. (21–<24 MPa (3000–<3500 psi))
3.1.2 polyethylene plastics—as defined by this specification, Slow Crack Growth Resistance
plastics or resins prepared by the polymerization of no less than I. ESCR D1693
Condition B, 24 h, 50% max failure
85 % ethylene and no less than 95 % of total olefins with II. PENT F1473
additional compounding ingredients. Average 1 h failure
Hydrostatic design basis at 23°C
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: (11.03 MPa (1600 psi))
3.2.1 materials—polyethylene (PE) resins with the added Color and UV stabilizer (colored)
compounding ingredients.
4.2 Materials used in polyethylene plastic pipe and fittings
3.2.2 PE compounds—has the same meaning as PE plastics
shall use a cell-type format for the identification, close
materials, compounds, and plastics.
characterization, and specification of material properties. The
3.3 Historical usage and user group conventions have re- information from the format is to be used alone or in
sulted in inconsistent terminology used to categorize and combination.
describe polyethylene resins and compounds. The following
NOTE 6—This type format, however, is subject to possible misapplica-
terminology is in use in ASTM specifications pertaining to tion since unobtainable property combinations can be selected if the user
polyethylene: is not familiar with commercially available materials. The manufacturer
3.3.1 Specification D1248: should be consulted. Additionally, the appropriate ASTM standard speci-
3.3.1.1 Type (0, I, II, III, IV) = density ranges (same, fication should be reviewed to assure materials utilized will meet all the
respectively, as Class in Specification D4976). material and piping requirements as specified in the standard.
3.3.1.2 Class (A, B, C, D) = composition and use. 4.3 Grade—A code for polyethylene pipe and fittings ma-
3.3.1.3 Category (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) = melt index ranges (same as terials that consists of the two letter abbreviation for polyeth-
Grade in Specification D4976). ylene (PE) followed by two numbers that designate the density
3.3.1.4 Grade (E, J, D, or W followed by one or two digits) cell (Property 1) and the slow crack growth resistance cell
= specific requirements from tables. (Property 5), as defined by either Test Method F1473 or Test
3.3.2 Specification D3350: Method D1693, of the thermoplastic, as specified in Table 1.
3.3.2.1 Type (I, II, III) = density ranges (same as Types I, II, For the requirements of Property 5 (slow crack growth
and III in Specification D1248 and Classes 1, 2, and 3 in resistance), consult the materials section of the appropriate
Specification D4976). ASTM standard specification for the end-use application.
3.3.2.2 Class = a line callout system consisting of “PE” NOTE 7—Grade designations were adapted from Specification
followed by six cell numbers from Table 1 plus a letter (A, B, D1248 – 84 prior to the removal of pipe material from D1248 - 84.
C, D, E) denoting color and UV stabilizer. Former Specification D1248 – 84 grades for PE pipe materials were P14,
3.3.2.3 Grade = simplified line callout system using “PE” P23, P24, P33, and P34. Equivalent Specification D3350 grade designa-
tions for these materials are PE11, PE20, PE23, PE30, and PE33,
followed by density and slow crack growth cell numbers from respectively.
Table 1.
3.3.3 Specification D4976: 5. Materials and Manufacture
3.3.3.1 Group (1, 2) = branched or linear polyethylene. 5.1 The molding and extrusion material shall be polyethyl-
3.3.3.2 Class (0, 1, 2, 3, 4) = density ranges (same, ene plastic in the form of powder, granules, or pellets.
respectively, as Type in Specification D1248). 5.2 The molding and extrusion materials shall be as uniform
3.3.3.3 Grade (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) = melt index ranges (same as in composition and size and as free of contamination as is
Category in Specification D1248). achieved by good manufacturing practice. If necessary, the
level of contamination may be agreed upon between the
4. Classification manufacturer and the purchaser.
4.1 Polyethylene plastic pipe and fittings compounds are 5.3 When specified, the color and translucence of molded or
classified in accordance with density, melt index, flexural extruded pieces formed, under the conditions specified by the
modulus, tensile strength at yield, slow crack growth manufacturer of the materials, shall be comparable within
resistance, and hydrostatic strength classification in Table 1. commercial match tolerances to the color and translucence of
NOTE 4—It has been a long-standing practice to use the following terms standard samples supplied in advance by the manufacturer of
in describing polyethylene plastics: the material.
149
SD-3350 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Primary PropertiesA —Cell Classification Limits

Test
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Method
3
1. Density, g/cm D1505 Unspecified 0.925 or >0.925- >0.940- >0.947- >0.955 ... Specify
lower 0.940 0.947 0.955 Value
2. Melt index D1238 Unspecified >1.0 1.0 to <0.4 to <0.15B C

Specify
0.4 0.15 Value
3. Flexural D790 Unspecified <138 138- 276- 552- 758- >1103 Specify
modulus, MPa (psi) (<20 000) <276 <552 <758 <1103 (>160 000) Value
(20 000 to (40 000 to (80 000 to (110 000 to
<40 000) 80 000) 110 000) <160 000)
4. Tensile strength D638 Unspecified <15 15-<18 18-<21 21-<24 24-<28 >28 Specify
at yield, MPa (psi) (<2200) (2200- (2600- (3000- (3500- (>4000) Value
<2600) <3000) <3500) <4000)
5. Slow Crack
Growth Resistance
I. ESCR D1693 Unspecified
a. Test condition A B C C ... ... ... Specify
(100% Igepal.)D Value
b. Test duration, h 48 24 192 600
c. Failure, max, % Unspecified 50 50 20 20
II. PENT (hours) F1473
Molded plaque, Unspecified ... ... ... 10 30 100 500 Specify
80°C, 2.4 MPa Value
Notch depth, Unspecified
F1473, Table 1
6. Hydrostatic Strength
Classification
I. Hydrostatic design D2837 NPRE 5.52 6.89 8.62 11.03 ... ...
basis, MPa (psi), (23°C) (800) (1000) (1250) (1600)
II. Minimum required ISO 12162 ... ... ... ... ... 8 10
strength, MPa (psi), (20°C) (1160) (1450)
A
Compliance with physical properties in accordance with Section 8 is required including requirements for cell classification, color, and ultraviolet (UV) stabilizer, thermal
stability, brittleness temperature, density, tensile strength at yield, and elongation at break.
B
Refer to 10.1.4.1.
C
Refer to 10.1.4.2.
D
There are environmental concerns regarding the disposal of Nonylphenoxy poly(ethyleneoxy) ethanol (CAS 68412-54-4) for example, Igepal CO-630. Users are advised
to consult their supplier or local environmental office and follow the guidelines provided for the proper disposal of this chemical.
E
NPR = Not Pressure Rated.
6. Physical Properties 6.2.1 For PE compounds with a hydrostatic strength classi-

6.1 Cell Classification—Test values for specimens of the PE fication cell class 0 (not pressure-rated), the carbon black
material prepared as specified in Section 9 and tested in content shall be in the range of 2.0 % to 4.0 %.
accordance with Section 10 shall conform to the requirements 6.2.2 For PE compounds with a hydrostatic strength classi-
given in Table 1. A typical property value for a PE material is fication other than cell class 0, the carbon black content shall
to be the average value from testing numerous lots or batches be in the range of 2.0 % to 3.0 %.
and determines the cell number. When, due to manufacturing 6.3 Thermal Stability—The PE material shall contain suffi-
tolerances and testing bias, individual lot or batch values fall cient antioxidant so that the minimum induction temperature
into the adjoining cell, the individual value shall not be shall be 220°C when tested in accordance with 10.1.9.
considered acceptable unless the user, or both the user and the
producer, determine that the individual lot or batch is suitable 6.4 Brittleness Temperature—The brittleness temperature
for its intended purpose. shall not be warmer than −60°C when tested in accordance
with Test Method D746.
6.2 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilizer—The color and
UV stabilization shall be indicated at the end of the cell 6.5 Density—The density used to classify the material shall
classification by means of a letter designation in accordance be the density of the PE base resin (uncolored PE) determined
with the following code: in accordance with 10.1.3. When the average density of any lot
Code Letter Color and UV Stabilizer
or shipment falls within 60.002 g/cm3 of the nominal value, it
A Natural shall be considered as conforming to the nominal value and to
B Colored all classifications based on the nominal value.
C Black with a carbon black in
the range as noted in 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 6.5.1 For black compounds, containing carbon black, deter-
D Natural with UV stabilizer mine the density, Dp, and calculate the resin density, Dr, as
E Colored with UV stabilizer follows:
150
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3350
TABLE 2 Minimum Log Average Test Times for Oxidative satisfaction of the purchaser shall be required. One sample
Resistance Classification shall be sufficient for testing each batch or lot provided that the
90°C (194°F) Test Temperature average values for all of the tests made on that batch or lot
Test Stress 2.48 Test Stress 2.76 Test Stress 3.10
Categorization
MPa (360 psi) MPa (400 psi) MPa (450 psi)
comply with the specified requirements.
Time (h) Time (h) Time (h)
CC0 Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified 9. Specimen Preparation
CC1 2700 1900 1200
CC2 7400 5100 3400 9.1 Unless otherwise specified in Section 10, the test speci-
CC3 16 200 11 100 7400 mens shall be molded in accordance with Procedure C of
Annex A1 of Practice D4703.
9.2 When pipe or fitting test specimens are required, they
Dr 5 Dp 2 0.0044C
shall be extruded or molded in accordance with the specifica-
where: tions of the material manufacturer.
C = weight percent of carbon black.
10. Test Methods
6.5.2 For colored compounds, the nominal density of the
base resin shall be provided by the manufacturer, on request. 10.1 The properties enumerated in this specification shall be
determined in accordance with the following test methods:
6.6 Tensile Strength at Yield—The tensile strength at yield 10.1.1 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified in the test
used to classify the material shall be the tensile strength at yield methods or in this specification, for those tests where condi-
of the PE resin determined in accordance with 10.1.6. When tioning is required, condition the molded test specimens in
the average tensile strength at yield of any lot or shipment falls accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618.
within 63.45 MPa (6500 psi) of the nominal value, it shall be 10.1.2 Test Conditions—Unless otherwise specified in the
considered as conforming to the nominal value and to all test methods or in this specification, conduct tests at the
classifications based on the nominal value. standard laboratory temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F).
6.7 Elongation at Break—As tested in accordance with 10.1.3 Density—Test Method D1505 or alternative methods
10.1.6, all pressure rated materials shall have a minimum referenced in 2.1 (see D792, D2839, and D4883) providing
extension at break of 400 %. equivalent accuracy. Make duplicate determinations using two
separate portions of the same molding or from two moldings.
6.8 Oxidative Resistance Classification:
The molded specimen thickness portions shall be 1.9 6 0.2
6.8.1 The Oxidative Resistance Classification is a classifi-
mm (0.075 6 0.008 in.). Calculate the average value.
cation of a PE compound’s resistance to the oxidative effects of
10.1.4 Melt Index—Test Method D1238, using Condition
chlorinated potable water. The classification is only for PE
190/2.16. Make duplicate determinations on the material in the
compounds intended for potable water pressure piping appli-
form of powder, granules, or pellets, and calculate the average;
cations as noted in the materials requirement section of the
no conditioning is required.
appropriate ASTM standard specification. In addition to the
10.1.4.1 For materials having a melt index less than 0.15
class specified in 3.3.2.2, the user shall specify an oxidative
(Cell 4), the manufacturer shall report a flow rate not greater
resistance requirement by appending the category designation
than 20 g/10 min and not less than 4.0 g/10 min when tested in
requirement (Table 2) to the line call out.
accordance with Test Method D1238, Condition 190/21.6.
6.8.2 The oxidative resistance time used to classify the PE
10.1.4.2 Classify materials having a melt index less than
compound shall be determined in accordance with 10.1.11 and
0.15 (Cell 4) as Cell 5 only if they have a flow rate not greater
be classified in accordance with Table 2.
than 4.0 g/10 min when tested in accordance with Test Method
7. Sampling D1238, Condition 190/21.6.
7.1 A batch or lot shall be considered as a unit of manufac- NOTE 9—For materials having a melt index less than 0.40 to 0.15 g/10
ture and shall consist of one production run or as a blend of two min (Cell 3), the manufacturer may report a flow rate value when tested
in accordance with Test Method D1238, Condition 190/21.6. For non-
or more production runs of material. pressure applications, if agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
7.2 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer purchaser, the manufacturer may report only the melt index.
and the purchaser, the material shall be sampled in accordance NOTE 10—Flow rate is the general term used for all results obtained
with Test Method D1238. Although the flow rate of polyethylene plastics
with the procedure described in Sections 9 through 12 of may be measured under any of the conditions listed for it under 7.2 of Test
Practice D1898. Adequate statistical sampling prior to packag- Method D1238, only measurements made at Condition 190/2.16 may be
ing shall be considered an acceptable alternative. identified as “Melt Index.”
NOTE 8—A sample taken from finished product may not necessarily 10.1.5 Flexural Modulus—Test Methods D790, using
represent the original batch or lot. Method 1, Procedure B, and a 50-mm (2-in.) test span. Test five
specimens, each 3.2 by 12.7 mm (1⁄8 by 1⁄2 in.) flatwise at a
8. Number of Tests crosshead speed of 12.7 mm/min (0.5 in./min) and the average
8.1 The requirements identified by the material designation value of the secant modulus calculated at 2 % strain in the
and otherwise specified in the purchase order shall be verified outer fibers.
by tests made in accordance with 11.1. For routine inspection, 10.1.5.1 The deflection of the test specimen corresponding
only those tests necessary to identify the material to the to 2 % strain (0.02 mm/mm or in./in.) is calculated as follows:
151
SD-3350 ASME NM.3.1-2018
D 5 rL2 /6d scanning calorimeter (DSC). The directions of the instrument

manufacturer regarding calibration and operation shall be
where:
followed except when in conflict with other parts of this
D = deflection of the center of the beam test specimen at 2 % section.
strain, in.,
r = strain in the outer fibers = 0.02 mm/mm (0.02 in./in.), NOTE 12—This test requires accurate temperature and atmosphere
L = test span = 50 mm (2 in.), and control on the DSC specimen compartment. The DSC manufacturers offer
d = specimen depth = 3.2 mm (1⁄8 in.). choices in cell configuration and temperature control parameters that may
affect this required control. For example, in some power compensation
10.1.5.2 The stress corresponding to 2 % strain is calculated DSCs, use of the two-hole platinum specimen holder lids with a special
“flow-through” swing-away block cover is required. Therefore, the user
as follows: may wish to consult equipment-specific literature and with the equipment
S 5 3 PL/2 bd2 manufacturer to optimize the operation of individual DSCs for this test.
where: 10.1.9.1 Specimens—Press small pieces of the pipe into

films 0.127 6 0.013 mm (0.0050 6 0.0005 in.) thick. Cut at
S = stress in the outer fiber at 2 % strain,
P = load corresponding to 2 % strain, N (lbf), least three disks 6.35 6 0.13 mm (0.250 6 0.005 in.) in
L = test span = 50 mm (2 in.), diameter from the film.
d = specimen depth = 3.2 mm (1⁄8 in.), and 10.1.9.2 Procedure—Place the disk of film in a small
b = specimen width = 12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.). aluminum cup used in the DSC in a stretched condition, as
shown in Fig. 1(a). Place a small piece of indium (melting
The secant modulus at 2 % strain is the ratio of stress to point 156.6°C) or anisic acid (melting point 183.0°C) for a
strain or S/0.02. temperature reference standard contained in a similar cup (see
10.1.6 Tensile Strength at Yield—The tensile strength at Fig. 1(b)) in the reference position. Use an oxidized copper
yield and elongation at break shall be determined in accordance reference disk for black, filled, or dark brown test specimens
with Test Method D638. The speed of testing shall be 500 and an aluminum disk for natural or light pigmented polymers.
mm/min (20 in./min for materials in the density range from Place the specimen and reference standard cups in the instru-
0.910 to 0.925 g/cm3) and 50 mm/min (2 in./min for all others). ment which is preset at approximately 150°C. The bottoms of
Specimens shall conform to the dimensions given for Type IV the cups shall be pressed and rubbed securely against the flat
in Test Method D638 with a thickness of 1.9 6 0.2 mm surface so as to ensure that thermal contact is made. Allow 5
(0.075 6 0.008 in.). Specimen shall be either die cut or min for the cups to reach thermal equilibrium. Begin the
machined. programmed heating at approximately 150°C at a heating rate
10.1.7 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—One method shall of 10.0°C/min in static air. Test at least three film specimens
be used to classify this material property. from each sample and use the average value for the induction
10.1.7.1 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—The material’s temperature.
resistance shall meet the minimum requirement shown for the NOTE 13—Since the indium standard may change with use, it should
appropriate cell classification when tested in accordance with not be used more than 30 times without confirming that no significant
Test Method D1693. change in melting point has occurred. This check can be made by
comparison with a fresh piece of indium.
10.1.7.2 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—The average fail-
ure time from two test specimens shall meet the minimum 10.1.9.3 Results—The temperature change (∆T) or heat
requirement shown for the appropriate cell classification when absorption rate (J/s) in the specimen plotted against tempera-
tested in accordance with Test Method F1473. Test at least four ture shall produce a line with a clear rise in slope. The
specimens in case of a dispute. induction temperature (degradation onset) is the intersection of
10.1.8 Hydrostatic Strength Classification—One method the extended base line and a line tangent to the leading slope of
shall be used to classify this material property. the exothermic decomposition peak (see Fig. 2).
10.1.10 Carbon Black Content—Test Method D1603 or Test
10.1.8.1 Hydrostatic Design Basis—Determine the hydro-
Method D4218 shall be used. Make duplicate determinations
static design basis in accordance with Test Method D2837, on
from a sample of the material in the form of powder, granules,
pipe extruded from three different lots of material. Subject
or pellets.
specimens from one lot for at least 10 000 h. Terminate the
10.1.11 Oxidative Resistance Test—Test specimens shall
tests on the two additional lots after 2000 h. The results from
consist of extruded 4-in. DR11 IPS pipe meeting the dimen-
each of the three lots shall be within the same or next higher
sional requirements of Specification D3035. All specimens
cell limits.
shall be from the same lot of pipe. Test a minimum of five (5)
NOTE 11—For pressure application at elevated temperatures, the hy- specimens in accordance with Test Method F2263 at one of the
drostatic design basis should be determined at that temperature in temperature and stress combinations of Table 2.
accordance with Test Method D2837. The 100 000-h intercept should be
categorized in accordance with Table 1 of Test Method D2837. NOTE 14—If a selected temperature/stress condition results in prema-
ture failures, testing may be conducted at a lower stress as shown in Table
10.1.8.2 Minimum Required Strength—Determine the mini- 2.
mum required strength in accordance with ISO 12162.
10.1.9 Thermal Stability—Test specimens taken from pipe
or fittings made from the virgin material with a differential
152
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-3350
FIG. 1 Mounting Film Specimen in Cup
10.1.11.1 Calculation—Calculate the log average test time 13.2 Marking—Unless otherwise agreed upon between the
using all failures and non-failures. All specimens shall have seller and the purchaser, shipping containers shall be marked
been tested at the same nominal test stress. Data from not less with the name of the material, identification in accordance with
than five specimens are required for compound classification. this specification, the lot or batch number and quantity con-
10.1.11.2 Significance—Testing is only required to be per- tained therein, as defined by the contract or order under which
formed on representative pipe samples for the original valida- shipment is made, and the name of the manufacturer.
tion of a particular compound. 13.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
11. Inspection
11.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon 14. Certification
between the purchaser and the manufacturer as part of the 14.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
purchase contract.
15. Keywords
12. Retest and Rejection
15.1 cell classification system; pipe and fittings material;
12.1 If any failure occurs, and when specified by the
polyethylene; recycled
manufacturer, the material shall be retested to establish con-
formity in accordance with the agreement between the pur-
chaser and the manufacturer.
13. Packaging and Marking

13.1 Packaging—The material shall be packaged in stan-
dard commercial containers, so constructed as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery, unless otherwise
specified in the contract or order.
153
SD-3350 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 2 Typical DSC Plots
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
154
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYPROPYLENE INJECTION AND

EXTRUSION MATERIALS
SD-4101
(Identical with ASTM D4101-11 except for changes in section 14, additional requirements in section 15 and Annex A1,
and renumbering of sections 16, 17, and 18.)
155
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials
INTRODUCTION
This specification is not intended for the selection of materials but only as a means to call out plastic
materials to be used for the manufacture of parts. The selection of these materials is to be made by
personnel with expertise in the plastics field where the environment, inherent properties of the
materials, performance of the part, part design, manufacturing process, and economics are considered.
1.1 This specification covers polypropylene materials suit- of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
able for injection molding and extrusion. Polymers consist of practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
homopolymer, copolymers, and elastomer compounded with or tions prior to use.
without the addition of impact modifiers (ethylene-propylene NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
rubber, polyisobutylene rubber, and butyl rubber), colorants,
stabilizers, lubricants, or reinforcements. 2. Referenced Documents
1.2 This specification allows for the use of those polypro- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
pylene materials that can be recycled, reconstituted, and C177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measure-
reground, provided that: (1) the requirements as stated in this ments and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
specification are met, and (2) the material has not been the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
modified in any way to alter its conformance to food contact D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
regulations or similar requirements. The proportions of Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
recycled, reconstituted, and reground material used, as well as at Commercial Power Frequencies
the nature and the amount of any contaminant, cannot be D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
practically covered in this specification. It is the responsibility tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
of the supplier and the buyer of recycled, reconstituted, and D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
reground materials to ensure compliance. (See Guide D7209.) Impact Resistance of Plastics
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
standard. Insulating Materials
D495 Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc
NOTE 1—The properties included in this specification are those required Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation
to identify the compositions covered. There may be other requirements D523 Test Method for Specular Gloss
necessary to identify particular characteristics important to specific
applications. These will be designated by using the suffixes given in D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Section 1. Chemical Reagents
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
test methods portion, Section 13, of this specification: This D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
156
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Plastics Using Load and Displacement Sensors
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position D3801 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Characteristics of Solid Plastics in a Vertical Position
Plastics D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
D696 Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expan- Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
sion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
Silica Dilatometer D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
D732 Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch als
Tool D4329 Practice for Fluorescent UV Exposure of Plastics
D746 Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics D4364 Practice for Performing Outdoor Accelerated Weath-
and Elastomers by Impact ering Tests of Plastics Using Concentrated Sunlight
D785 Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and D4805 Terminology for Plastics Standards (Withdrawn
Electrical Insulating Materials 2002)
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced D4812 Test Method for Unnotched Cantilever Beam Impact
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi- Resistance of Plastics
als D5279 Test Method for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Prop-
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela- erties: In Torsion
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement D5420 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics Falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
by Extrusion Plastometer D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics D5740 Guide for Writing Material Standards in the Classi-
D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density- fication Format
Gradient Technique D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid
D1525 Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics Specimens
Plastics D6110 Test Method for Determining the Charpy Impact
D1531 Test Methods for Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics
Constant) and Dissipation Factor by Fluid Displacement D6290 Test Method for Color Determination of Plastic
Procedures Pellets
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
tics Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products
D1822 Test Method for Tensile-Impact Energy to Break E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials Determine Conformance with Specifications
D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998) E313 Practice for Calculating Yellowness and Whiteness
D2117 Test Methods for Carbon Black—Surface Area by Indices from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
Nitrogen Adsorption (Withdrawn 1999) E831 Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid
D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hard- Materials by Thermomechanical Analysis
ness 2.2 Military Standard:
D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In- MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedure and Tables for Inspec-
tended for Outdoor Applications tion by Attributes
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced 2.3 DOT Standard:
Resins MVSS-302 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302
D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Flammability of Interior Materials
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
2.4 UL Standard:
Plastics (Oxygen Index)
UL 94 Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Mate-
D2990 Test Methods for Tensile, Compressive, and Flexural
rials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
Creep and Creep-Rupture of Plastics
D3012 Test Method for Thermal-Oxidative Stability of 2.5 SAE Standards:
Polypropylene Using a Specimen Rotator Within an Oven SAE J1545 Instrumental Color Difference Measurement for
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En- Exterior Finishes, Textiles and Color Trim
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3763 Test Method for High Speed Puncture Properties of
157
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
SAE J1767 Instrumental Color Difference Measurement for two or more separate phases. The phases consist of a polypro-
Colorfastness of Automotive Interior Trim Materials pylene homopolymer (PP-H) or a polypropylene random
SAE J1885 Accelerated Exposure of Automotive Interior copolymer (PP-R) matrix containing a dispersed olefinic elas-
Materials Using Controlled Irradiance Water Cooled tomer having no other functional group, added in situ or
Xenon-Arc Apparatus physically blended into the polypropylene matrix.
SAE J1960 Accelerated Exposure of Automotive Exterior 3.2.15 polypropylene homopolymer (PP-H)—a propylene
Materials Using Controlled Irradiance Water Cooled plastic prepared by the polymerization of propylene only.
Xenon-Arc Apparatus
SAE J1976 Outdoor Weathering of Exterior Materials 3.2.16 polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R)—a propyl-
ene plastic containing another olefinic monomer (or mono-
3. Terminology mers) having no functional group other than the olefinic group
copolymerized with propylene. Polypropylene random copoly-
3.1 Definitions— See Terminologies D883 and D4805 for
mers containing more than one additional monomer are often
definitions of terms related to this specification.
called “terpolymers.”
3.2.1 back pressure, n—the constant pressure that is applied 4. Classification
to the end of the screw while the screw is rotating and
retracting to prepare for the next injection. 4.1 Unreinforced polypropylene materials are classified into
groups according to basic composition. These groups are
3.2.2 brittle failure, n—one where the specimen test area is subdivided into classes and grades, as shown in Table PP.
broken into two or more pieces, with sharp edges and shows
almost no plastic flow. NOTE 3—An example of this classification system is as follows. The
designation PP0113 would indicate: PP = polypropylene, as found in
3.2.3 cooling time, n—the time in which the material is in Terminology D1600, 01 (group) = homopolymer, 1 (class) = general
the closed mold with no pressure applied. purpose, and 3 (grade) = with requirements given in Table PP.
3.2.4 cycle time, n—the time required to complete a full 4.1.1 To facilitate the incorporation of future or special
injection molding cycle, including injection time, cooling time, materials not covered by Table PP, the “other/unspecified”
and mold open time. category for group (00), class (0), and grade (0) is shown on the
3.2.5 ductile brittle transition temperature, n—the tempera- table with the basic properties to be obtained from Table A,
ture at which a 80% of the specimens exhibit ductile failure Table B, Table C, Table G, Table H, and Table T, as they apply
(see 4.3).
3.2.6 ductile failure, n—one where the specimen deforms
plastically before fracturing. One where the puncture of the test 4.2 Reinforced versions of the polypropylene materials are
plaque does not have cracks radiating more than 10 mm classified in accordance with Table PP, Table A, Table C, Table
beyond the center of the impact point. G, and Table T. Table PP, Table B, and Table H specify the
3.2.7 injection pressure, n—the constant pressure that is properties of the unreinforced material, and Tables A, C, G, or
applied to the end of the screw causing the melted material to T specify the properties after the addition of reinforcements,
fill the mold. The injection pressure along with the injection pigments, fillers, or lubricants, at the nominal level indicated
speed determines the volumetric fill rate of the mold. (see 4.2.1)
4.2.1 Reinforcements and Additive Materials—A symbol
3.2.8 injection speed, n—the forward velocity of the screw
(single letter) will be used for the major reinforcement or
during the injection step.
combinations thereof, along with two numbers that indicate the
3.2.8.1 Discussion—Injection speed is a set position on the
percentage of addition by mass, with the tolerances as tabu-
injection molding machine ranging from slow to fast. The
lated as follows:
injection speed along with the injection pressure determines the
Symbol Material Tolerance
volumetric fill rate of the mold. G Glass reinforced—
3.2.9 injection time, n—the time in which a constant speci- <15 % ±2 percentage points
>15 % ±3 percentage points
fied pressure is applied to the melted material. L Lubricant (that is, graphite, to be specified
3.2.10 melt temperature, n—the temperature of the material silicone, and stearates)
M Mineral-reinforced—
as it is being injected into the mold, measured by a pyrometer. <15 % ±2 percentage points
3.2.11 mold open time, n—the time beginning when the >15 % ±3 percentage points
R Reinforced-combinations/ ±3 percentage points based on
mold is opened and ending when the mold is closed. mixtures of reinforcements the total reinforcement
3.2.12 mold temperature, n—the temperature of the mold or other fillers/reinforcements
during the molding cycle, measured in all mold cavities and on NOTE 4—This part of the system uses the type and percentage of
both platens. additive to designate the modification of the base material. To facilitate
this designation, the type and percentage of additive can be shown on the
3.2.13 polypropylene (PP)—a propylene plastic prepared by supplier’s Technical Data Sheet, unless it is proprietary in nature. If
the polymerization of propylene or propylene with other alpha necessary, additional requirements shall be indicated by the use of the
olefins. (See also PP-B, PP-H, and PP-R.) suffix part of the system as given in Section 5.
3.2.14 polypropylene heterophasic copolymers (PP-B, 4.2.2 Specific requirements for reinforced, pigmented,
PP+EPR, or PP+EPDM)—a propylene plastic consisting of filled, or lubricant polypropylene materials will be shown by a
158
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
six-character designation. The designation will consist of the

letter A, B, C, G, or T and the five digits comprising the cell PP0500 = copolymer or impact modified,
numbers for the property requirements in the order in which H = Table H property requirements,
they appear in Table A, Table B, Table C, Table G, or Table T. 5 = 1200-MPa flexural modulus, min,
For Table H the designation will consist of the letter H and 8 = Izod impact resistance, non-break failure mode,
three digits comprising the cell numbers for the property no value reported, and
requirements in the order in which they appear in Table H. 5 = <–30°C ductile-brittle transition temperature
4.2.2.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include
5. Suffixes
the range of properties available in existing materials, they
should not be interpreted as implying that every possible 5.1 When additional requirements are needed for the mate-
combination of the properties exists or can be obtained. rials covered in this specification that are not covered in Table
4.2.3 When the grade of the basic materials is not known or PP, Table A, Table B, Table C, Table G, Table H, and Table T,
is not important, the use of “0” grade classification will be used those requirements shall be designated through the use of
for reinforced materials in this system. (See Note 5.) suffixes. The primary suffix list can be found in Suffix
Requirements, Section 7, of Classification D4000. Other suf-
NOTE 5—An example of this classification system for a reinforced- fixes that pertain only to the material requirements in this
polypropylene material is as follows. The designation PP0110M20A21130
would indicate the following, with the material requirements from Table
specification are listed as follows. In general, the suffix letter
A: indicates the requirement needed; the first number (digit)
indicates the test condition, and the second number (digit)
indicates the specimen requirement.
PP0110 = General-purpose polypropylene homopolymer
from Table PP NOTE 9—Suffixes from Classification D4000 will contain two letters
M20 = Mineral reinforced, 20 %, followed by three digits while suffixes from this specification will contain
A = Table A property requirements. a single letter followed by two or three numbers. An example would be
weatherability; a designation of WA510 would indicate that it is a
2 = 35-MPa tensile stress, min, Classification D4000 suffix with the following requirements:
1 = 1000-MPa flexural modulus (1 % secant), min,
1 = 15-J/m Izod impact, min,
3 = 110°C deflection temperature, min, and W = Weather resistant,
0 = Unspecified. A = Practice D1435,
If no properties are specified, the designation would be PP0110M20- 5 = Elongation properties, and
A00000. 10 = 10 % change.
4.3 Table B has been incorporated into this specification to A designation of W110 would indicate that it is a Specification D4101
suffix with the following requirements:
facilitate the classification of special materials where Table PP
does not reflect the required properties of that unreinforced
material. This table will be used in a manner similar to Tables W = Weatherability,
A, C, G, and T. Table H has been incorporated into this 1 = Practice D2565, Test Cycle 1, specimens exposed in a
specification to improve the callout of random copolymers and xenon-arc accelerated test apparatus,
impact copolymers. Table H has a reduced callout based on 1 = 200-h exposure, and
flexural modulus, Izod impact, and the Multiaxial Impact 0 = Change in properties to be specified.
Ductile-Brittle Transition Temperature. If a full line callout is Suffıxes:
required, use Table B.
NOTE 6—Mechanical properties of polypropylene materials with pig- E = Electrical requirements as designated by the following
ments or colorants can differ from the mechanical properties of natural digits:
material, depending on the choice and the concentration. First Digit
NOTE 7—An example of a special material using this classification
system is as follows. The designation PP0110B67253 would indicate the 0 = To be specified by user.
following with the material requirements from Table B: 1 = Specimens preconditioned 40 h at 23°C and 50 %
relative humidity, then 14 days in distilled water at 23
PP0110 = homopolymer, general purpose, other, 6 1°C.
B = Table B property requirements, Second Digit
6 = 30-MPa tensile stress at yield, min,
7 = 1500-MPa flexural modulus, min, 0 = To be specified by user.
2 = 50-J/m Izod impact resistance, min, 1 = Insulation resistance, dielectric constant, and dissipa-
5 = 90°C deflection temperature, min, and tion factor meet property limits as shown below. These
3 = >1.0 to 3.0 nominal melt flow rate. are electrical limits usually applied to unreinforced
NOTE 8—An example of a polypropylene copolymer material using polypropylene when control of their electrical proper-
Table H would be as follows. The designation PP0500H585 would ties is required.
indicate a material with the following requirements: Electrical Properties:
159
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Dielectric constant, Test Methods D1531 or 2.30 Thus, at an irradiance level of 0.55 W/(m2.nm) at 340 nm, the multipli-
max D150 cation factor for converting light hours to kJ is 1.98 (0.55 × 3.6).
Dissipation factor, max Test Methods D1531 0.0005 Therefore, 100 light hours is equivalent to 396 kJ/(m2.nm) at 340 nm at
Insulation resistance, Test Methods D257 1 × 1015 this irradiance level.
min, V
Third Alphanumeric
Water immersion Test Methods D1531 or Shall meet the di-
stability D150 electric constant
and dissipation
factor require- 0 = To be specified by user.
ments 1 = The exposed specimens shall not exhibit surface
W = Weatherability requirements as designated by the following digits: changes (such as dulling and chalking) or deep-seated
First Digit changes (such as checking, crazing, warping, and dis-
coloration).
2 = The tensile strength after exposure must be no less than
0 = To be specified.
50 % of the original.
1 = Specimens exposed in a xenon arc accelerated test
3 = The tensile strength after exposure must be no less than
apparatus that conforms to Practice D2565 using Test
90 % of the original.
Cycle 1 for exterior applications. 4 = American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
2 = Specimens exposed in a fluorescent UV/condensation
(AATCC) rating 4 to 5.
accelerated test apparatus that conforms to Practice 5 = Colorfastness by SAE J1545, for exterior materials,
D4329 using Test Cycle A for exterior applications. CIELAB color difference, 10° observer, Illuminant D65,
3 = Specimens exposed in a xenon-arc accelerated test
specular included, DE = 2.5 max.
apparatus that conforms to SAE J1960 or equivalent for 6 = Colorfastness by SAE J1545, for exterior materials,
exterior applications. CIELAB color difference, 10° observer, Illuminant D65,
4 = Specimens exposed in a xenon-arc accelerated test
apparatus that conforms to SAE J1885 or equivalent for 7 = Colorfastness by SAE J1545, for exterior materials,
interior applications. CIELAB color difference, 10° observer, Illuminant D65,
5 = Specimens exposed to concentrated natural sunlight in
accordance with Practice D4364 without water spray. 8 = Colorfastness by SAE J1767, for interior materials,
6 = Specimens exposed to concentrated natural sunlight in
CIELAB color difference, 10° observer, Illuminant D65,
accordance with Practice D4364 with water spray
(Table 1, Cycle 1). 9 = Colorfastness by SAE J1767, for interior materials,
7 = Specimens exposed to natural sunlight in accordance
CIELAB color difference, 10° observer, Illuminant D65,
with Practice D1435 using a rack angle of 45° from the
horizontal facing the equator , unless specified other- Z = Other special requirement characteristics (for example,
wise. internal mold release agent) not covered by existing
8 = Specimens exposed to natural sunlight in accordance
call-out capabilities may be assigned. These will be
with SAE J1976 Procedure A, unless specified other-
spelled out in detail and identified in sequence, that is,
wise.
01 UV-stabilized, 02 special color, and 03, etc.
Second Alphanumeric Additional suffixes will be added to this specification as test methods
and requirements are developed or requested, or both.
0 = To be specified by user.
1 = 200-h exposure. 6. Basic Requirements
2 = 500-h exposure.
3 = 1000-h exposure. 6.1 Basic requirements from property or cell tables, as they
4 = 2000-h exposure. apply, are always in effect unless these requirements are
5 = 1240.8 kJ/(m2.nm) at 340 nm. superseded by specific suffix requirements in the “Line Call-
6 = 2500 kJ/(m2.nm) at 340 nm. Out.”
7 = 1000 MJ/m2 solar total UV irradiation (approximately 3
years). 7. General Requirements
8 = 336-h exposure 7.1 The plastic composition shall be uniform and shall
9 = 720-h exposure conform to the requirements specified herein. The color and
A = 5000-h exposure form of the material shall be specified. Note specification
B = 10000-h exposure changes due to the effects of colorants and, when necessary,
C = 225.6 kJ/(m2.nm) at 340 nm
cover them by suffixes.
D = 601.6 kJ/(m2.nm) at 340 nm.
NOTE 10—Conversion from hours to kilojoules (kJ) varies with 7.2 For recycled, reconstituted, and reground materials the
irradiance and the light/dark cycle. Conversion to kJ from actual light level of contamination by nonpolymeric materials other than
hours (h) is based on the following relation: fillers and additives shall not be of a significant level that it
kJ 5 Irradiance in Watts 3 3.6 kJ/h 3 h of light prevents the product from meeting the performance criteria for
which it was manufactured.
160
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
8. Detail Requirements 11.1.4 Melt Temperature—The melt temperature for mold-

8.1 Test specimens for the various materials shall conform ing test specimens for materials with melt flows of 1 to 30 g/10
to the requirements prescribed in Table PP, Table A, Table B, min shall correlate with the polymer melt flow (Test Method
Table C, Table G, Table H, Table T and to the suffix require- D1238, Condition 230/2.16) as shown in Table 1. Melt
ments as they apply. temperatures shall be measured on cycle by taking the tem-
peratures of several successive free shots with a needle-type
8.2 Observed or calculated values obtained from analysis, pyrometer to an accuracy of 63°C. The needle should be
measurement, or test shall be rounded in accordance with moved around in the plastic mass, and a sufficient number of
Practice E29 to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of measurements be made to establish a reliable result. To
figures used in expressing the specified limiting value. The minimize heat loss from the plastic during measurement, the
value obtained is compared directly with the specified limiting mass should be collected in a heated container, or in one made
value. Conformance or nonconformance with the specification from material of low thermal conductivity. The quantity of
is based on this comparison. plastic in the free shot should be controlled to be equivalent to
the weight of a complete injection-molded shot. To avoid
9. Sampling excessive thermal history the shot size shall be kept to a
9.1 Unless otherwise specified, the materials shall be minimum; therefore, the cushion shall be 5 to 10 mm.
sampled in accordance with the sampling procedure prescribed
NOTE 13—For materials with melt flows less than 1 g/10 min, the
in Practice D1898. Adequate statistical sampling shall be temperature of the melt should be raised in 5°C increments from 250°C
considered an acceptable alternative. A batch or lot of resin until the part weight of the entire shot is equivalent to the part weight of
shall be considered as a unit of manufacture as prepared for a 1 to 5-g/10 min material. Due to degradation and thermal expansion of
shipment and may consist of a blend of two or more production the material do not exceed 270°C. If unable to obtain the weight at 270°C,
make slight adjustments in the injection pressure to achieve the proper
runs of material. weight. The melt temperature shall be 190°C for materials with melt flows
greater than 30 g/10 min.
10. Number of Tests
Since the needle-type pyrometer technique is somewhat
10.1 The number of tests conducted shall be consistent with tedious, a second technique using an infrared pyrometer may
the requirements of Section 13. be used. The infrared pyrometer used must have an accuracy of
1 % of reading or 61°F or 61°C, a response time of at least
11. Specimen Preparation 0.5 s, and a distance to target ratio of at least 30:1. It is
11.1 All test specimens other than those for heat stability recommended that the infrared pyrometer have a laser beam to
testing (see 11.2) shall be injection molded in accordance with establish the position being measured on the molten mass of
the following specific procedures: polymer. This second technique shall only be used after a
correlation between the needle-type pyrometer and the infrared
NOTE 11—Physical and mechanical properties are dependent upon the pyrometer has been established. This correlation shall be
technique of specimen preparation. Specimen preparation by means other
than those described as follows can lead to significant variation in test verified at least every six months. The correlation shall be
results, with resultant departure from specification values. re-established each time either pyrometer is recalibrated.
NOTE 12—Limited data have shown that, for Polypropylenes, mechani- 11.1.5 Back Pressure—The back pressure shall be set at 0.7
cal test values can be significantly affected by the cross sectional area of MPa (gage).
the runner. Specimens molded using the specified minimum runner size of
5 mm D (~20 mm2) exhibited lower values of most mechanical properties 11.1.6 Injection Pressure and Speed—All materials less
than specimens molded using runners with cross-sectional areas of 50 and than 30-g/10 min melt flow shall be molded using a single
80 mm2. Higher viscosity (lower MFR) materials appear to be more stage pressure. For a given machine and a given mold, the
sensitive. This effect needs to be considered when comparing data injection pressure and the injection speed controls shall be set
obtained from different sources.
to produce equal part weights, including sprue and runners
11.1.1 Specimen Mold—Molds designed in compliance with (62 %) regardless of material flow rates. The injection speed
Practice D3641 to mold the following test specimens: and injection pressure shall be set to minimize sink and flash.
11.1.1.1 A Test Method D638, Type I tension test specimen The maximum amount of flash shall not exceed 1 mm and will
with a thickness of 3.2 6 0.1 mm. only be acceptable in the nontesting area. Once the injection
11.1.1.2 A rectangular bar, with dimensions of 127 mm by speed and pressure are determined for a given machine and
12.7 mm by 3.2 6 0.1 mm. mold they shall not be varied by more than 62 %.
11.1.1.3 Plate, with minimum dimensions of 100 mm2 or
100-mm diameter with a thickness of 3.2 6 0.2 mm. NOTE 14—A single stage pressure can be obtained in two different
ways: (1) Injection pressure may be set to reach a specified pressure then
11.1.2 Mold Temperature—The temperature of the mold allowed to shift over to a hold pressure; the hold pressure maintains the
shall be 60 6 3°C. Temperature measurements shall be made pressure at the maximum pressure generated by the injection pressure, and
in each cavity of the mold after machine conditions are at (2) The cavity may be filled using hold pressure only; the first method is
equilibrium and shall be made with a surface-type pyrometer, the preferred method. For materials with melt flow rates above 30 g/10
or equivalent, to an accuracy of 62°C after equilibrium or min the injection and hold pressures may be set to different pressures.
Normally the hold pressure is set lower than the injection pressure, but
cycle conditions have been established. must be high enough to finish filling out the molded part. For these high
11.1.3 Cycle—The total molding cycle time shall be 45 s, melt flow rate materials the injection and hold pressure shall be specified
consisting of 20-s injection, 20-s cooling, and 5-s mold open. by the manufacturer.
161
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
NOTE 15—It is recommended that screw rotation speed be set to a NOTE 18—Polypropylene properties change with time as a result of
minimum to allow the screw to rotate for 17 to 19 s of the 20-s cooling amorphous densification and, in some cases, due to a small degree of
time. This slower screw speed will provide greater uniformity of the melt secondary crystallization in the rubbery phase.
with respect to viscosity and temperature. It may be necessary to adjust the
screw rotation speed for the various material types in order to achieve the
12.2 Test Conditions—Natural unfilled polypropylene shall
17 to 19-s time frame. The rate of screw movement backwards away from be tested in a controlled laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C.
the mold is dependent on the back pressure, frictional effects, various For filled and reinforced polypropylene and polypropylene
additive types, and melt viscosity. blends, which contain a hydrophilic comonomer or modifier
11.1.7 Reporting—Report the injection molding conditions the specimens shall be tested in a standard laboratory atmo-
in accordance with Practice D3641. sphere of 23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 % relative humidity, unless
sufficient testing has been conducted that indicates that specific
11.2 Prepare test specimens for heat stability testing in materials type’s properties are not affected by humidity. For all
accordance with Test Method D3012. materials to be tested for electrical properties, the laboratory
shall comply with the requirements of the standard test
12. Conditioning methods for electrical testing. In all cases the laboratory shall
12.1 Conditioning: report both the temperature and humidity conditions during
12.1.1 Once specimens are molded, they shall be moved to testing.
a standard laboratory atmosphere or a controlled laboratory
atmosphere. For natural unfilled polypropylene the controlled 13. Test Methods
laboratory atmosphere shall be 23 6 2°C. Specimens shall be 13.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this specifica-
stored in storage medium, such as boxes, paper bags or tion in accordance with the ASTM test methods as they apply,
envelopes, plastic bags, or racks, whichever is most practical unless otherwise stated herein.
for the laboratory storing the specimens. It is recommended 13.1.1 Flow Rate—Condition 230/2.16 of Test Method
that specimens be allowed to cool for about 30 min on a bench D1238. Make two determinations on the material in the form
or in a rack before they are placed in any container where the that it is to be molded (such as powder, pellets, or granules).
specimens might come in contact with each other. For filled
NOTE 19—This test method serves to indicate the degree of uniformity
and reinforced polypropylene or polypropylene blends, which of the flow rate of the polymer of a single manufacturer as made by an
contain a hydrophilic comonomer or modifier the specimens individual process and, in this case, may be indicative of the degree of
shall be conditioned in a standard laboratory atmosphere of 23 uniformity of molded specimens, and therefore other properties. However,
6 2°C and 50 6 10 % relative humidity, unless sufficient uniformity of flow rate among various polymers of various manufacturers
testing has been conducted that indicates that specific material as made by various processes does not, in the absence of other tests,
indicate uniformity of other properties and vice versa.
type’s properties are not affected by humidity. In those cases,
the storage medium can be the same as for unfilled materials. 13.1.2 Measurement of Test Specimen Dimensions—The
Materials whose properties are affected by humidity, must be width and thickness of the test specimen shall be measured to
stored in accordance with Practice D618, Procedure A. For all an incremental discrimination of at least 0.025 mm. Measure-
materials to be conditioned for electrical testing, conditioning ments shall be made with a micrometer, preferably with
shall comply with the requirements of the standard test ratchet, having a movable circular contact foot and a lower
methods for electrical testing. In all cases the laboratory shall anvil foot, both 6.35 6 0.025 mm in diameter. Specimens shall
report both the temperature and humidity conditions during the be measured in accordance with Test Methods D5947.
conditioning period. 13.1.3 Tensile Stress—Test Type I specimens using Test
Method D638. The material shall be tested at 50 mm/min when
NOTE 16—When the temperature in the molding area exceeds 28°C or the material is one that shows a breaking strain greater than
the humidity level exceeds 60 % (applies only to filled materials)
specimens shall be moved as quickly as possible to the standard laboratory
10 %, or at 5 mm/min when the material breaks at a strain
atmosphere. equal to or less than 10 %.
13.1.4 Flexural Modulus (1 % Secant)—Test Methods
12.1.2 Testing, except for those tests where a test time is
D790, Method I, Procedure A, with a 50-mm span, a 5.0 6
specified, shall be conducted not less than 40 h after molding.
0.1-mm radius support and loading nose, and a 1.3-mm/min
The aging times as specified in this and subsequent sections
testing speed using the center test region of a Test Method
shall apply to all testing conducted for development of a line
D638, Type I specimen. It is mandatory that the toe correction
callout, data for publication, or for cases of dispute over testing
be made to correct for the slack in the test fixture and load cell.
values.
Center the specimen between the span flatwise and test with a
12.1.3 Specimens that are to be tested for Izod or Charpy crosshead speed of 1.3 mm/min. Calculate the average value of
impact shall be notched within 1 to 16 h after molding. Once the flexural modulus (1 % secant) at 1 % strain in the outer
notched the specimens shall condition for a minimum of 40 h surface of the test specimen.
before testing.
NOTE 20—If the Test Method D638 Type I specimens were molded on
NOTE 17—Data have shown that, for some polypropylene impact a mold containing a draft angle, the specimens will be trapezoidal.
copolymers with higher xylene solubles or higher rubber content, Izod
impact values can vary significantly over time.
12.1.4 Specimens that are to be tested for tensile or flexural
properties shall be tested within 40 to 96 h after molding.
162
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
Therefore the flexural modulus may vary slightly depending on which side D256, studies with numerous types of polypropylene specimens has
is placed away from the loading nose. shown that clamp lengths as short as 19 mm are acceptable, with no
change in test results. What is critical is that the length of material above
13.1.4.1 Calculate the deflection of the test specimen corre- the clamp, which is specified as 31.8 6 1 mm. Failure to maintain the 31.8
sponding to 1 % strain (0.01 mm/mm) as follows: 6 1 mm above the clamp will result in reduced or increased Izod impact
D 5 rL 2 /6d (1) values depending on whether the specimen length above the clamp is
longer or shorter than that specified by Test Method D256, Method A.
where: NOTE 22—With the design of each clamping system and the capacity of
the pendulum used different from instrument to instrument it is difficult to
D = deflection of the center of the test specimen at 1 % specify a pressure will hold the specimen securely. What is important is
strain, mm that the clamp pressure be maintained constant from specimen to
r = strain in the outer surface of the test specimen = 0.01 specimen and be sufficient to prevent specimen movement during the
mm/mm, impact. Too low a clamp pressure may result in slightly higher Izod values
L = test span = 50 mm, and with a wider scatter of impact values within a set of specimens. Too high
d = specimen depth = 3.2 mm (nominal). a clamp pressure will induce stress in the specimen resulting in lower than
expected test values. This is particularly true of propylene plastics when
Warning—The load measured must be a minimum of 1 % tested at sub-ambient temperatures close to their brittleness temperature.
of the load cell capacity. The test span shall be known to an Set up the test instrument with the lowest capacity pendulum
accuracy of 0.05 mm, and this value shall be used in the recognized by Test Method D256, which is the 2.7 J (2 ft-lb)
calculations in 13.1.4.1. The loading nose shall be precisely pendulum. This pendulum shall be used for all Izod impact
centered between the supports. The test specimen shall be resistance measurements where the specimen exhibits a
aligned perpendicular to the supports to an accuracy of 2° and complete, hinge, or partial break. For specimens showing
the center of the specimen shall be directly below the center of non-break behavior, progressively increase the hammer capac-
the loading nose. ity to move the type of break from non-break with the 2.7 J
13.1.4.2 Calculate the stress corresponding to 1 % strain as hammer to complete, hinge, or partial break so that an impact
follows: value may be reported. Conformance or nonconformance with
S 5 3PL/2bd2 (2) the specifications detailed in the Tables shall be based on a
material having a complete, hinge, or partial break.
where: 13.1.6 Deflection Temperature—Test Method D648 shall be
S = stress in the outer surface of the test specimen at 1 % used to test a rectangular specimen 3.2 by 12.7 by 127 mm with
strain, MPa, a load applied at the center to give maximum fiber stresses of
P = load corresponding to 1 % strain, N 455 kPa.
L = test span = 50 mm, 13.1.7 Multiaxial Impact Ductile-Brittle Transition
d = specimen depth = 3.2 mm (nominal), and Temperature—Test Method D3763 shall be used to test speci-
b = specimen width = 12.7 mm (nominal). mens equal to or greater in dimensions than 100 mm2 or 100
The secant modulus at 1 % strain is the ratio of stress to mm in diameter and 3.2 6 0.2 mm in thickness. The test speed
strain or S/0.01. shall be 2.2 m/s with the 12.7-mm diameter impact dart and
13.1.5 Impact Resistance (Izod)—Test Method D256 (A) 76-mm support ring. The temperature at which 80 % of the
shall be used for notched specimens tested at 23°C. Specimens specimens exhibit ductile failure shall be determined based on
shall be cut from the center section of the Test Method D638, the definitions listed in Section 3. This temperature shall be
Type I tensile test specimen. Before cutting the test specimen determined by either a standard graphical method or through a
from the tensile bar, draw a symbol of any design in the straight probability graphical method. When using the standard graphic
center section of the bar to indicate which is the gate end of the method to determine the 80 % passing temperature, it is
specimen. Cut out the 57.2 mm straight center-section of the necessary to repeat this procedure of testing ten specimens at a
bar. The specimens shall be notched in accordance with Test series of temperatures differing by uniform increments of 5°C.
Method D256 for tests at 23°C. Specimens shall be notched The transition region of the curve shall be established using
such that the notch is off-center on the 57.2 6 1 mm long either 5°C or 10°C increments, but -5°C increments must be
specimen. When notched, the apex of the notch shall be 25.4 6 used when testing in the transition temperature region. When
2 mm from the non-gated end and 31.8 6 1 mm from the gated using probability graph paper, it is not necessary to obtain the
end of the specimen. The more critical dimension is the 31.8 6 lowest no-failure temperatures, at which no failure is obtained,
1 mm from the gated end of the specimen. Notched specimens or the highest failure temperature. Draw a straight line through
must be conditioned after notching for a minimum of 40 h a minimum of four points, two above and two below the 50 %
before testing. The specimen shall be inserted in the clamp with failure point. The temperature indicated at the intersection of
the 25.4 6 2 mm in the clamp and the 31.8 6 1 mm length the data line with the 20 % failure line shall be reported as the
above the clamp. When testing, the specimen shall be clamped ductile-brittle temperature or 80 % passing temperature.
in the grips with the minimum pressure necessary to prevent NOTE 23—In addition to visually examining the plaques for ductile
any movement of the specimen upwards or downwards during failure, review the load versus time or load versus displacement curve for
impact. Should this pressure deform the specimen, then the the impact for signs of ductility.
clamp pressure may be reduced. 13.1.8 Reinforcement and Additive Concentrations:
NOTE 21—Although the 57.2 mm length of specimen does not comply 13.1.8.1 Glass Percentage— Use Test Method D2584.
with the minimum specimen length of 61.5 mm specified by Test Method 13.1.8.2 All Others—Method to be specified.
163
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
13.1.8.3 Additional testing methods and conditions, refer to materials may be retested to establish conformity. Rejection
Appendix X1. shall be reported to the supplier promptly and in writing. In
case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, a claim for a
14. Inspection rehearing may be made.
14.1 Inspection of the material supplied uner this speci-
fication shall conform to the requirements specified herein 17. Packaging and Package Marking
and in Classification D4000, Section 15. 17.1 Provisions of Practice D3892 apply for packaging,
packing, and marking of plastic materials.
15. Certification
18. Keywords
18.1 injection and extrusion materials; materials specifica-
16. Rejection and Rehearing tion; polypropylene; polypropylene test methods; recycled
16.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of plastics
this specification may be rejected. If any failure occurs, the
TABLE PP Requirements for Unreinforced Polypropylene (Natural Color Only)

Flexural Deflection
ModulusD Izod Tempera-
Tensile
Nominal Flow (1 % Impact,E
StressB at ture at 455-
Rate,A Test Yield, Test Secant), Resistance
Method D1238, Test at 23°C, KPa
Group Description Class Description Grade Description Method Stress,G
Condition D638, Methods Test
230/2.16, D790, Method Test
g/10 min min,C Procedure A, D256, min,F Method
MPa C D648H ,
min, J/m
MPa min, °C
01 Homopolymer 1 General purpose 1 ... <0.3 27.5 1050 32 81
2 ... >0.2 to #1.0 27.5 1000 27 81
3 ... >1.0 to #3.0 27.5 1000 25 74
4 ... >3.0 to #10 27.5 950 20 71
5 ... >10 to #20 26 850 16 71
6 ... >20 to #40 25 800 14 64
7 ... >40 to #100 24 800 12 64
8 ... >100 to #200 23 850 12 64
9 ... >200 21 850 8 74
0 Other
2 Nucleated 1 ... >1.0 to #3.0 33.5 1350 27 100
2 ... >1.0 to #3.0 30.5 1150 27 90
3 ... >3.0 to #10 30.5 1150 22 100
4 ... >3.0 to #10 30.5 1150 21 90
5 ... >10 to #30 30 1150 20 95
6 ... >10 to #30 30 1150 16 85
7 ... >30 28.5 1050 16 80
0 Other
3 High-crystallinity 1 ... <1.0 38 2000 21 100
2 ... >1.0 to #5.0 36 1800 21 100
3 ... >5.0 to #10 36 1600 21 100
4 ... >10 to #20 33 1400 22 95
5 ... >20 to #40 30 1300 24 90
6 ... >40 26 1300 26 90
0 Other
0 Other 0 Other
02 Random Copolymers Refer to Appendix
X2
03 Copolymers or Impact- Refer to Appendix
Modified X2
05 Copolymers or 0 Other 0 Other Use Table H for a reduced line callout of materials where only the ratio
impact modified of stiffness to impact is important. Use Table B when a full line callout is
required.
A
Nominal flow rate is as supplied by the manufacturer of the material. Maximum allowable tolerance = ±30 % per individual lot.
B
Test specimens are unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bars and shall be tested at 50 mm/min when the material is one that shows a breaking strain greater
than 10 %, or at 5 mm/min when the material breaks at a strain equal to or less than 10 %.
C
MPa × 145 = psi.
D
Test specimens are the center of the unannealed Test Method D638,, Type I tensile bars with a nominal 3.2 by 12.7-mm cross section. Span is a nominal 50 mm. Rate
of crosshead is 1.3 mm/min using Method I. Report 1 % secant based on strain.
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 mm in width and are at the center section of unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
F
J/m = ft·lbf/in. × 53.38.
G
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 by 12.7-mm cross section and shall be unannealed.
H
Minimum values are based on testing the material by Test Method D648, Method A (test span 101.6 mm).
164
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
TABLE A Detail RequirementsA of Polypropylene Not Called Out by Tables B, C, G, and T

Designation or
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Order No.
1 Tensile stress at yield,B Unspecified 20 35 50 65 80 95 110 125 Specify
Test Method D638, min, MPaC valueD
2 Flexural modulus (1 % secant),E Unspecified 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 Specify
Test Methods D790 (A), min, MPaC valueD
3 Izod impact resistanceF at 23°C, Unspecified 15 30 45 60 90 135 190 250 Specify
Test Method D256, min, J/mG valueD
4 Deflection temperature at 455 kPa,H Unspecified 80 95 110 130 150 170 90 210 Specify
Test Method D648, min, °C valueD
5 To be determined Unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
It is recognized that detailed test values, particularly Izod impact, may not predict nor even correlate with performance of parts molded of these materials.
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
If a specific value is required, it must appear on the drawing or contract, or both.
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 by 12.7-mm cross section and are at the center of unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar. Span is a nominal 50 mm. Rate
F
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are at the center section of Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
G
J/m × (1.873 × 10−2) = ft · lb/in. or J/m = ft · lb/in. × 53.38.
H
TABLE B Detail RequirementsA of Unfilled and Unreinforced Polypropylene

Designation
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
or Order No.
B
1 Tensile stress at yield, Test Method D638, Unspecified 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Specify
min, MPaC valueD
2 Flexural modulus (1 % secant),E Test Unspecified 100 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 Specify
Methods D790, (A), min, MPaC valueD
3 Izod impact resistanceF at 23°C, Unspecified 10 50 100 200 300 400 500 700 Specify
Test Method D256, min, J/mG valueD
4 Deflection temperature at 455 kPa,H Test Method Unspecified 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Specify
D648, min, °C valueD
5 Flow rate,I Test Method D1238, Condition Unspecified #0.3 >0.3-1.0 >1.0-3.0 >3.0-10 >10-20 >20-40 >40-100 >100 Specify
230/2.16, g/10 min valueD
A
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
E
F
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are at the center section of Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
G
J/m × (1.873 × 10−2) = ft · lb/in. or J/m = ft · lb/in. × 53.38.
H
I
Nominal flow rate is as supplied by the manufacturer of the material. Allowable tolerance ±30 % per individual lot.
165
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE C Detail RequirementsA of Calcium Carbonate Filled Polypropylene

Designation
or Order Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number
1 Tensile Stress at YieldB Unspecified 10 14 17 21 24 27 31 34 Specify ValueD
Test Method D638, min, MPaC
2 Flexural Modulus (1 % secant)E Unspecified 800 1100 1400 1700 1900 2200 2500 2700 Specify ValueD
Test Method D790 (A), min,
MPaC
3 Izod impact resistanceF at Unspecified 15 35 55 75 90 110 135 255 Specify ValueD
+23°C
Test Method D256, min, J/mG
4 Deflection Temperature at 455 Unspecified 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 Specify ValueD
kPaH
Test Method D648, min, °C
5 To be determined Unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Specify ValueD
A
It is recognized that detailed test values, particularly Izod impact, may not predict nor even correlate with performance of molded parts.
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
E
of crosshead is 1.3 mm/min using Method I. Report 1 % secant modulus based on strain.
F
Test specimens are a nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are cut from the center of a Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
G
J/m × (1.873 × 10-2) = ft- lb/in. or J/m = ft-lb/in. × 53.38.
H
TABLE G Detail RequirementsA of Glass Reinforced Polypropylene

Designation
Number
1 Tensile Stress at YieldB Unspecified 24 32 40 48 57 65 74 82 Specify ValueD
Test Method D638, min, MPaC
2 Flexural Modulus (1 % secant)E Unspecified 1000 1900 2800 3700 4600 5500 6400 7300 Specify ValueD
MPaC
3 Izod impact resistanceF at +23°C Unspecified 15 35 55 80 100 130 150 170 Specify ValueD
Test Method D256, min, J/mG
4 Deflection Temperature at 455 Unspecified 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 Specify ValueD
kPaH
Test Method D648, min, °C
5 To be determined Unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Specify ValueD
A
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 by 12.7-mm cross section and are at the center of unannealed Test Method D638 Type I tensile bar. Span is a nominal 50 mm. Rate
F
Test specimens are a nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are cut from center section of Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
G
H
Test specimens are a nominal 3.2 by 12.7 mm cross section and shall be unannealed.
TABLE H Detail RequirementsA of Unfilled and Unreinforced Polypropylene Copolymers

Designation
Number
1 Flexural Modulus (1 % secant)B Unspecified 100 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 Specify ValueD
MPaC
2 Izod impact resistanceE at 23°C Unspecified 20 40 70 120 180 260 400 Non Specify ValueD
Test Method D256, min, J/mF BreakG
3 Multiaxial Impact Ductile-Brittle Unspecified <10 <0 <-10 <-20 <-30 <-40 <-50 <-60 Specify ValueD
Transition Temperature, °CH
A
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are cut from center section of unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
F
J/m × (1.873 × 10–2 ) = ft • lb/in. or J/m = ft • lb/in. × 53.38.
G
Izod impact resistance, non-break failure mode, no value reported
H
Plate with thickness 3.2 ± 0.2 mm.
166
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
TABLE T Detail RequirementsA of Talc Filled Polypropylene

Designation
Number
1 Tensile stress at YieldB Unspecified 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 Specify
Test Method D638, min, MPaC ValueD
2 Flexural Modulus (1 % secant)E Unspecified 650 1000 1350 1700 2050 2400 2750 3100 Specify
Test Method D790 (A), min, MPaC ValueD
3 Izod impact resistanceF at +23°C Unspecified 15 35 55 75 95 115 135 155 Specify
Test Method D256, min, J/mG ValueD
4 Deflection Temperature at 455 kPaH Unspecified 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Specify
Test Method D648, min, °C ValueD
5 To be determined Unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Specify
ValueD
A
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi or kPa × 0.145 = psi.
D
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 by 12.7 mm cross section and are at the center of unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar. Span is a nominal 50 mm. Rate
F
Test specimens are a nominal 3.2 mm in thickness and are at the center of a Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
G
H
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 by 12.7 mm cross section and shall be unannealed.
TABLE 1 Melt Temperature Requirements for Molding

Flow Rate, g/10 min Melt Temperature, °C
1.0–1.5 250
1.6–2.5 240
2.6–4.0 230
4.1–6.5 220
6.6–10.5 210
10.6–17.5 200
17.6-30.0 190
The following supplementary items may become part of this specification, when applicable, as
agreed upon between the user and the supplier.
S1. Approval S3.2 In the event such tests are to be designated as require-
S1.1 Material submitted by a new supplier must be ap- ments to be tested by the supplier, this must appear on the part
proved by the user. Material or test specimens submitted by the drawing or purchase contract, or both.
supplier and intended for evaluation shall be accompanied by S4. Quality Assurance Provisions for Government/Military
the supplier’s laboratory test report. Procurement
S2. New Sources S4.1 Selection of Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) and of
S2.1 The user may elect to temporarily accept shipment on Inspection Level (IL) shall be made with consideration of the
the supplier’s certification. specific use requirements. This is discussed in Sections 7 and
8 of Practice D1898, with reference to MIL-STD-105. In the
S3. Infrared Spectrophotometry or Thermal Analysis, or absence of contrary requirements, the following values shall
Both apply:
S3.1 At the option of the user, infrared or thermal analysis, Testing (Polymer, Unfabricated) IL AQL
S−1A ...
or both, may be conducted on material/parts supplied to this
specification. The curves established for initial approval shall A
Samples shall be drawn from the required number of units and pooled for
constitute the reference standard and shall be kept on file at the preparation of molded samples for property evaluation.
user’s laboratory. All samples shall produce curves that corre-
spond to the reference standard within agreed upon tolerances S5. Government/Military Packaging
when tested under the same conditions as those specified on the S5.1 (Text of this section will be the same as presently being
master set of curves. balloted by Subcommittee D20.94.)
167
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
168
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101
APPENDIXES
X1. ADDITIONAL TEST METHODS AND CONDITIONS
X1.1 Table X1.1 specifies the other test methods and

conditions, other than the five standard test methods, that can
be used to characterize polypropylene.
TABLE X1.1 Test Methods and ConditionsA

Suffix from Test Conditions
Standard Test
Specimen Type Processing D4000 or and Supplementary
Number Property Units
Dimensions, mm Method D4101, Instructions
Method
Section 5
1. Rheological properties
1.1 Melt flow rate D1238 Granules or powder g/10 min VC2 Test temperature 230°C, 2.16
kg load
1.2 Melt rheology D3835 Granules or powder Pa-s Test temperatures 190, 210, and
230°C
2. Mechanical properties
2.1 Tensile stress at yield D638 Type I, thickness = 3.2 Injection MPa KY Test at 50 mm/min when the
material is one that shows a
breaking strain greater than
10 %, or at 5 mm/min when
the material breaks at a strain
equal to or less than 10 %
2.2 Tensile elongation at yield % LY
2.3 Tensile modulus MPa Speed of 5 mm/min with Class
B-2 or better extensometer
2.4 Tensile creep modulus D2990 Type I, thickness = 3.2 Injection MPa At room temperature and at
least two elevated tempera-
tures for 1000 h at three
stress levels
2.5 Flexural modulus D790 Center of Type I bar, 63.5 Injection MPa UC 1 % secant, 50 mm span, 1.3
by 12.7 by 3.2 mm/min speed 5 ± 0.1 mm
radius support rods and load-
ing nose at yield if yield oc-
curs at less than 5 % strain,
otherwise report value at 5 %
2.6 Flexural strength MPa NA
2.7 Flexural creep modulus D2990 Center of Type I bar, 63.5 Injection MPa At room temperature and at
by 12.7 by 3.2 least two elevated tempera-
tures for 1000 h at three
stress levels
2.8 Compressive strength D695 12.7 by 12.7 by 25.4 prism Injection MPa QA Speed 1.3 mm/min (strain rate
or 12.7 mm diameter by 0.05 mm/mm/min)
25.4 mm long right
cylinder
2.9 Compressive modulus 12.7 by 12.7 by 50.8 prism MPa Slenderness ratio 11 to 16 to 1,
or 12.7 mm diameter by speed 1.3 mm/min (strain rate
50.8 mm long right 0.025 mm/mm/min)
cylinder
2.10 Compressive creep D2990 12.7 by 12.7 prism or 12.7 Injection At room temperature and at
modulus mm diameter length least two elevated tempera-
(must be sufficient to tures for 100 h at three stress
meet slenderness ratio levels
or 11 to 15)
2.11 Shear strength D732 50 disk or 50 by 50 by 50 square Injection MPa Speed 1.3 mm/min
with thickness of 3.2
2.12 Shear modulus D5279 76 by 13 by 3.2 Injection Pa −150°C to Tg+20°C or
Tm+10°C @ 1 Hz
Pa SM
2.13 Izod impact resistance D256 Center of Type I bar, 57.2 by 12.7 Injection J/m PA Use a 2.7 J pendulum for all
by 3.2 materials, unless at 2.7 J non-
break behavior is observed.
2.14 Charpy impact D6110 127 by 12.7 by 3.2 Injection J/m PB
resistance
2.15 Cantilever beam impact D4812 Center of Type I bar, 63.5 by 12.7 J/m
by 3.2
2.16 Tensile impact D1822 Type S, thickness = 3.2 Injection kJ/m2
resistance
169
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE X1.1 Continued

Standard Test
Method
Section 5
2.17 Gardner D5420 Minimum 50 by 50 by 3.2 Injection J PG3 Geometry GC at +23°C, or
impact square or 50 diameter –30°C, or both
by 3.2 diskB
2.18 Puncture D3763 Minimum 100 Injection J Test speed 2.2 m/s. Report en-
properties by 100 by 3.2 ergy at peak load and total
square or 100 energy at 50 % of the peak
diameter by 3.2 load. Primary test temperature
+23°C. If the temperature at
which the material transitions
from ductile to brittle failure is
required, recommended test
temperatures for initial evalua-
tion are +0°C, -15°C, -30°C
and -40°C.
2.19 Rockwell D785 Minimum 25 by 25 square Injection HRR Rockwell R scale (thickness of
hardness by 6 or 25 diameter disk compression specimen may be achieved
by 6 thick by plying specimens or thin-
ner specimens may be used if
hardness is shown not to be
changed)
2.20 Shore A or D hardness D2240 Minimum 25 by 25 square Injection Shore A Shore A or D scale (thickness of
by 6 or 25 diameter disk com- or D specimen may be achieved
by 6 thick pression by plying specimens or thin-
ner specimens may be used if
hardness is shown not to be
changed). Values at 1 s.
3. Thermal properties
3.1 Melting temperature D2117 Any material form °C CE Fisher-Johns
D3418 CD DSC/DTA
3.2 Heat deflection temperature D648 127 by 13 by 3.2 Injection °C YA Unannealed specimen, 1820
kPa stress.
YD Unannealed specimen, 455 kPa
stress.
3.3 Vicat softening temperature D1525 Minimum 12 by 12 by 3 square or Injection °C CB Rate A, 50°C/h
12 diameter disk
3.4 Coefficient of linear thermal D696 Between 50 and 120 length, other Injection µm/(m·°C) Dilatometer, between −30° and
expansion dimensions depend on test ap- +30°C (use E228 for tempera-
paratus tures other than −30 and
+30°C)
E831 Between 2 and 10 length and less Injection µm/(m·°C) Report over ranges from −30 to
than 10 lateral dimension 0°C, 0 to +30°C, and +30 to
+60°C
3.5 Thermal conductivity C177 Depends on test apparatus Injection cal/s/
cm2/°C/cm
3.6 Brittleness temperature D746 Length minimum 20 + minimum 5 Injection °C PL Procedure A
in clamp by 6.35 by 1.91
3.7 Flammability D635 127 by 12.7 by 3.2 Injection mm/min FA
D2863 127 by 6.5 by 3.2 Injection % FB
D3801 127 by 12.7 by 3.2 Injection s FC Generate rating based on burn-
ing time and glow time
MVSS-302 355 by 102 by 1.25 Injection mm/min
4. Electrical properties
4.1 Volume resistivity D257 100 by 100 by 3.2 square or Compression Ohm·cm EG Electrification for 60 s with ap-
100 diameter disk by 3.2 plied voltage of 500 V
4.2 Dielectric strength D149 100 by 100 by 3.2 square or Compression kV/mm EA Method A—short time
100 diameter disk by 3.2
ED Method B—step by step
4.3 Dielectric constant D150 100 by 100 by 3.2 square or Compression ED Test at 1 MHz
100 diameter disk by 3.2
4.4 Dissipation factor EE
4.5 Arc resistance D495 Dependent on test apparatus, Compression s EF
thickness 3.2
5. Optical
5.1 Yellowness indexA E313 Minimum 63.5 by 63.5 by 3.2 or Injection Yl Reflectance with specular light
minimum 63.5 diameter disk by included
3.2
5.2 Yellowness index D6290 Pellets YI Reflectance, specular light
excluded, Illuminant C, 2° ob-
server calculate YI with E313
equation
5.3 Gloss D523 150 by 75 by 3.2 Injection At 45 and 60°
170
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101

Standard Test
Method
Section 5
6.
6.1 Natural weathering D1435 Type I tensile bar for physical test- Injection W7 Angle of exposure 45°, report
ing and minimum 65.5 by 63.5 exposure time, % retention of
square or 63.5 diameter disk by physical properties and total
3.2 for color change. solar radiant energy. See
Third Alphanumeric Suffixes
for evaluations of exposure
and failure criteria.C
SAE J1976 Type I tensile bar for physical test- Injection W8 Angle of exposure 5°, report
ing and minimum 65.5 by 63.5 exposure time, % retention of
square or 63.5 diameter disk by physical properties and total
3.2 for color change. solar radiant energy. See
Third Alphanumeric Suffixes
for evaluations and failure cri-
teria.C
6.2 Accelerated weathering D2565 same as for 6.1 Injection W1 Xenon-arc test as described in
First Digit 1. Exposure for 720
h.D See Third Digit Alphanu-
meric for evaluations of expo-
sure and failure criteria.C
D4329 same as for 6.1 Injection W2 Fluorescent UV/condensation
test as described in First Digit
2.D See Third Alphanumeric
Suffixes for evaluations of ex-
posure and failure criteria.C
SAE J1885 same as for 6.1 Injection W4 Xenon-arc test as described in
First Digit 4. Radiant expo-
sure of 1240.8 kJ/(m2.nm) at
340 nm.D See Third Alphanu-
meric Suffixes for evaluations
of exposure and failure crite-
ria.C
SAE J1960 same as for 6.1 Injection W3 Xenon-arc test as described in
First Digit 3. Radiant expo-
sure of 2500 kJ/(m2.nm) at
340 nm.D See Third Alphanu-
ria.C
D4364 same as for 6.1 Injection W5, UV radiant exposure below 385
W6 nm of 1000 MJ/m2
(approximately 3 years).D
Specify whether First Digit is
5 or 6. See Third Alphanu-
ria.C
6.3 Oven aging D3012 50 by 10 by 1.0 Compression Days SA Test temperature = 150°C
or Injection
7. Other
7.1 Water absorption D570 50.8 by 3.2 disk Injection % 24 h immersion at ambient tem-
perature
7.2 Water absorption D570 50.8 by 3.2 disk Injection % Long-term immersion to satura-
tion
7.3 Chemical resistance D543 50.8 by 3.2 thick disk or Type I Injection % Disk for weight and dimensional
bar, 3.2 thickness changes
Injection % Type I for mechanical properties
retention, 7 day immersion
7.4 Density D792 37 by 12.7 by 3.2 Injection kg/m3 GC
D1505 Pellet or section of molded or ex- kg/m3 GD
truded sample
7.5 Ash D5630 Granules or pellets %
A
The measurement of yellowness index of molded flat specimens for comparison between other laboratories is not as reproducible as with pellets due to the difference
in molding techniques to make the specimen; the additional heat history applied to the material; differences in design of the colorant measurement systems; the level of
specimen transparence, translucence, or opaqueness; and the color of the background backing up the specimen.
B
The Gardner impact resistance of a material is dependent on the size and shape of the specimen, gating of the mold, and the material flow pattern in the mold during
injection molding. When the impact failure mode is ductile the specimen dimensions do not make a significant difference, but when the impact failure mode is brittle, larger
specimens of the same thickness will yield higher impact results. In cases of non-agreement, customer and supplier shall agree on specimen and dimensions used.
C
Failure shall be when the material loses tensile strength or Izod impact properties. If color change is critical, DE cannot exceed 3.0.
D
The minimum exposure time shall be that necessary to produce a statistically significant change in the property measured, that is, tensile strength, impact resistance or
color, in the least stable material being evaluated.
171
SD-4101 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X2. TABLE PP REQUIREMENTS FOR UNREINFORCED POLYPROPYLENE GROUPS 02 AND 03 (NATURAL COLOR
ONLY)
X2.1 Table X2.1 is the former Table PP for the line call out previously classified with these groupings may continue to be
of random copolymers (Group 2) and copolymers and impact used. All new materials shall be called out with the Group 5
modified materials (Group 03). Groups 02 and 03 have been classification.
replaced by Group 05 in the main document. A material
TABLE X2.1 PP Requirements for Unreinforced Polypropylene (Natural Color Only)
Flexural Deflection
Nominal Flow Tensile
B (1 % Impact,E ture at 455-
Rate,A Test Density, max Stress at Secant), Resistance
Yield, Test KPa
Group Description Class Description Grade Description Method D1238, Test Methods Method Test at 23°C,
Condition D1505 or Methods Test Stress,G
230/2.16, 3 D638, D790, Method Test
D792, kg/m min,C Procedure
g/10 min A, D256, min,F Method
MPa min, C
J/m D648H ,
MPa min, °C
02 Random 1 General purpose 1 ... . . . 910 24 1000 30 78
copolymer 2 ... . . . 910 24 800 30 67
3 ... . . . 910 22 700 30 67
4 ... . . . 910 20 600 40 62
5 ... . . . 910 17 500 45 62
6 ... . . . 910 16 400 50 60
7 ... . . . 910 15 350 50 60
0 Other
2 Nucleated 1 ... . . . 915 26 975 35 87
2 ... . . . 915 24 675 40 77
3 ... . . . 915 22 575 40 73
4 ... . . . 915 21 375 50 67
0 Other
0 Other 0 Other
03 Copolymers 1 Low impact 1 ... . . . 905 26 1000 10 80
or impact 2 ... . . . 905 21 850 10 65
modified 3 ... . . . 905 23 850 30 70
4 ... . . . 905 18 650 30 65
5 ... . . . 905 17 450 30 60
6 ... . . . 905 24 800 50 75
7 ... . . . 905 22 750 50 70
8 ... . . . 905 20 750 50 70
9 ... . . . 905 18 650 50 65
0 Other
2 Moderate impact 1 ... . . . 905 27 1000 60 85
2 ... . . . 905 25 850 70 80
3 ... . . . 905 23 850 70 75
4 ... . . . 905 21 750 70 70
5 ... . . . 905 19 550 70 70
6 ... . . . 905 19 550 70 60
7 ... . . . 905 22 700 90 75
8 ... . . . 905 17 650 90 65
9 ... . . . 905 15 550 90 60
0 Other
3 Medium impact 1 ... . . . 905 25 1000 100 75
2 ... . . . 905 23 900 120 70
3 ... . . . 905 19 700 120 65
4 ... . . . 905 17 500 120 60
5 ... . . . 905 17 600 150 65
6 ... . . . 905 25 850 200 70
7 ... . . . 905 20 850 200 70
8 ... . . . 905 20 700 200 70
9 ... . . . 905 16 500 200 60
0 Other
4 High impact 1 ... . . . 905 24 800 300 80
2 ... . . . 905 21 800 300 75
3 ... . . . 905 21 550 300 70
4 ... . . . 905 17 500 300 65
5 ... . . . 905 15 450 300 60
6 ... . . . 905 16 500 400 65
7 ... . . . 905 24 750 600 70
8 ... . . . 905 20 700 600 65
9 ... . . . 905 19 500 600 60
0 Other
5 Nucleated 1 ... ... 905 29 1000 10 77
2 ... ... 905 27 1300 30 95
172
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4101

Flexural Deflection
Nominal Flow Tensile E
B (1 % Impact, ture at 455-
A
Rate, Test Density, max Stress at
Yield, Test Secant), Resistance
KPa
Group Description Class Description Grade Description Method D1238, Test Methods Method Test at 23°C,
Condition D1505 or Methods Test Stress,G
D638, Test
230/2.16, D792, kg/m3 D790,
min,C Procedure Method
g/10 min MPa A, D256, min,F Method
min,C J/m D648H ,
MPa min, °C
3 ... . . . 905 23 950 30 90
4 ... . . . 905 21 850 30 85
5 ... . . . 905 23 1050 50 85
6 .... . . . 905 19 800 50 85
7 ... . . . 905 26 1150 80 85
8 ... . . . 905 22 850 80 80
9 ... . . . 905 19 550 100 80
0 Other
0 Other 0 Other
A
Nominal flow rate is as supplied by the manufacturer of the material. Maximum allowable tolerance = ±30 % per individual lot.
B
C
MPa × 145 = psi.
D
Test specimens are the center of the unannealed Test Method D638,, Type I tensile bars with a nominal 3.2 by 12.7-mm cross section. Span is a nominal 50 mm. Rate
E
Test specimens are nominal 3.2 mm in width and are at the center section of unannealed Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar.
F
J/m = ft·lbf/in. × 53.38.
G
H
Minimum values are based on testing the material by Test Method D648, Method A (test span 101.6 mm).
173
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE

(PTFE) GRANULAR MOLDING AND RAM EXTRUSION
MATERIALS
SD-4894
(Identical with ASTM D4894-07(R12) except for revisions in para. 7.1 and section 11, and additional requirements in
175
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram
Extrusion Materials

1.1 This specification covers granular resins and test meth- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
ods for polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) that have never been D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
preformed or molded and are normally processed by methods D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
similar to those used in powder metallurgy or ceramics, or by D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
special extrusion processes. These PTFE resins are homopoly- tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
mers of tetrafluoroethylene, or, in some cases, modified ho- D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
mopolymers containing not more than one percent by weight of D1895 Test Methods for Apparent Density, Bulk Factor, and
other fluoromonomers. The usual methods of processing ther- Pourability of Plastic Materials
moplastics generally are not applicable to these materials D3295 Specification for PTFE Tubing, Miniature Beading
because of their viscoelastic properties at processing tempera- and Spiral Cut Tubing
tures. The materials included herein do not include mixtures of D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
PTFE resin with additives such as colorants, fillers or plasti- D4441 Specification for Aqueous Dispersions of Polytetra-
cizers; nor do they include reprocessed or reground resin or any fluoroethylene
fabricated articles. The methods and properties included are D4591 Test Method for Determining Temperatures and
those required to identify the various types of resins. Addi- Heats of Transitions of Fluoropolymers by Differential
tional procedures are provided in the Appendix for further Scanning Calorimetry
characterization of the resins. D4745 Specification for Filled Compounds of Polytetrafluo-
1.2 The values stated in SI units as detailed in IEEE/ASTM roethylene (PTFE) Molding and Extrusion Materials
SI-10 are to be regarded as the standard, and the practices of D4895 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 are incorporated herein. Resin Produced From Dispersion
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the Sieves
Specimen Preparation section, Section 9, and the Test Methods E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
section, Section 10, of this specification: This specification ASTM Test Methods
does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices 2.2 ISO Standards:
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior ISO 12086-1 Plastics—Fluoropolymer Dispersions and
to use. See Notes 3 and 9 for specific cautionary statements. Moulding and Extrusion Materials—Part 1: Designation
NOTE 1—Information in this specification is technically equivalent to System and Basis for Specification
related information in ISO 12086-1 and ISO 12086-2. ISO 12086-2 Test Methods for Fluoropolymers
176
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
TABLE 1 Detail Requirements for Tests on ResinsA

Type Grade Bulk Density, g/L Particle Size, Average Diameter, µm Water Content, max, % Melting Peak Temperature
Initial °C Second °C
A
I 1 700 ± 100 500 ± 150 0.04 327 ± 10
A
2 675 ± 50 375 ± 75 0.04 327 ± 10
A
II ... ... <100 0.04 327 ± 10
A
III 1 400 ± 125 <100 0.04 327 ± 10
A
2 850 ± 100 500 ± 150 0.04 327 ± 10
A
IV 1 650 ± 150 550 ± 225 0.04 327 ± 10
A
2 >800 ... 0.04 327 ± 10
A
3 580 ± 80 200 ± 75 0.04 327 ± 10
V ... 635 ± 100 500 ± 250 0.04 327 ± 10 327 ± 10
A
VI ... 650 ± 150 800 ± 250 0.04 327 ± 10
A
>5°C above the second melting peak temperature.
3. Terminology 4.1.1 Type I—Resin used for general-purpose molding and

3.1 Definitions: ram extrusion.
3.1.1 The terminology given in Terminology D883 is appli- 4.1.2 Type II—Finely divided resin with an average particle
cable to this specification. size less than 100 micrometres.
3.2 Descriptions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 4.1.3 Type III—Modified resins, either finely divided or
3.2.1 bulk density—the mass (in grams) per litre of resin free-flowing, typically used in applications requiring improved
measured under the conditions of the test. resistance to creep and stress-relaxation in end-use.
4.1.4 Type IV—Free-flowing resins. Generally made by
3.2.2 extended specific gravity (ESG)—the specific gravity treatment of finely divided resin to produce free-flowing
of a specimen of PTFE material molded as described in this agglomerates.
specification and sintered (g.v.) for an extended period of time, 4.1.5 Type V—Presintered. Resin that has been treated
compared to the sintering time for the measurement of standard thermally at or above the melting point of the resin at
specific gravity (SSG), using the appropriate sintering schedule atmospheric pressure without having been previously pre-
given in this specification. formed.
3.2.3 lot, n—one production run or a uniform blend of two 4.1.6 Type VI—Resin, not presintered, but for ram extrusion
or more production runs. only.
3.2.4 preforming—compacting powdered PTFE material NOTE 2—See Tables 1 and 2 for division of Types by Grades, and
under pressure in a mold to produce a solid object, called a footnotes to Tables 1 and 2 (and Table X2.1 in Appendix X2.) for former
preform, that is capable of being handled. Molding and classifications.
compaction are terms used interchangeably with preforming 4.2 A line callout system is used to specify materials in this
for PTFE. standard. The system uses predefined cells to refer to specific
3.2.5 reground resin—that produced by grinding PTFE aspects of this specification, illustrated as follows:
material that has been preformed but has never been sintered. Specification
Standard Number
3.2.6 reprocessed resin—that produced by grinding PTFE Block
: Type : Grade : Class : Special notes
material that has been both preformed and sintered. : : : : :
Example: ASTM
3.2.7 sintering—as it applies to PTFE, a thermal treatment D4894 – 04
III 2
during which the PTFE is melted and recrystallized by cooling
with coalescence occurring during the treatment.
3.2.8 skiving—a machining operation during which a con- For this example, the line callout would be ASTM
tinuous film of PTFE material is peeled from the lateral surface D4894 – 04, III2, and would specify a granular polytetrafluo-
of a cylindrical sintered molding. roethylene that has all of the properties listed for that Type and
Grade in the appropriate specified properties, Tables, or both,
3.2.9 standard specific gravity (SSG)—the specific gravity in this specification. In this case there is no Class item so the
of a specimen of PTFE material molded as described in this cell position for class is left blank. A comma is used as the
specification and sintered using the appropriate sintering separator between Standard Number and Type. Separators are
schedule given in this specification. not needed between Type, Grade, and Class. Provision for
3.2.10 thermal instability index (TII)—a measure of the Special Notes is included so that other information will be
decrease in molecular weight of PTFE material which has been provided when required. An example would be in Specification
heated for a prolonged period of time. D3295 where dimensions and tolerances are specified for each
AWG size within Type and Class. When Special Notes are
4. Classification used, they shall be preceded by a comma.
4.1 This specification covers the following six types of
PTFE generally used for compression molding or ram
extrusion, or both:
177
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Detail Requirements for Tests on Molded Specimens

Type Grade Thermal Instability Index, max Standard Specific Gravity Tensile Strength, min Elongation at break min %
min max MPa psi
I 1 50 2.13 2.18 13.8 2000 140
2 50 2.13 2.18 17.2 2500 200
II ... 50 2.13 2.19 27.6 4000 300
III 1 50 2.14 2.22 28.0 4060 450
2 50 2.14 2.18 20.7 3000 300
IV 1 50 2.13 2.19 25.5 3700 275
2 50 2.13 2.19 27.6 4000 300
3 50 2.15 2.18 27.6 4000 200
V ... NAA NAA NAA NAA NAA NAA
VIB ... NAA NA A
NAA NA A
NAA NAA
A
NA: Not Applicable by molding techniques included in this specification.
B
Extrusions of this resin show different degrees of clarity from the others.
5. Mechanical Properties 9.1.2 Screen 14.5 g (for tensile properties) or 7.25 g (for
5.1 The resins covered by this specification shall conform to electrical properties discussed in Appendix X1.7) of PTFE
the requirements prescribed in Tables 1 and 2 when tested by resin through a No. 10 hand sieve into the die. Adjust the lower
the procedures specified herein. Table 1 lists tests to be carried plug height to allow the resin in the die can be leveled by
out on resins. Table 2 lists tests requiring specimens molded as drawing a straightedge in contact with the top of the die across
described in Section 9. the top of the die cavity. Insert the die in a suitable hydraulic
press and apply pressure gradually (Note 3) until a total of 34.5
6. Other Requirements MPa (5000 psi) is attained. Hold this pressure for 3 min.
Remove the disk identification on the disk at this time.
6.1 The resin shall be uniform and shall contain no additives
or foreign material. NOTE 3—As a guide, increasing the pressure at a rate of 3.45 MPa (500
psi)/min is suggested until the desired maximum pressure is attained.
6.2 The color of the material as shipped by the seller shall
9.1.3 Sinter the preforms in accordance with Table 3 (Note
be white.
4).
7. Sampling 9.1.3.1 Use Procedure B for Types I, II and IV and Proce-
dure C for Type III.
7.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
requirements of Annex A1. NOTE 4—Although the rate of heating application is not critical, the
cooling cycle is most important and the conditions cited in these
procedures must be followed very closely. If they are not followed, the
8. Number of Tests crystallinity of the disks and the resulting physical properties will be
8.1 Lot inspection shall include tests for bulk density, markedly changed. Therefore, the use of a programmed oven is recom-
mended for the most precise sintering cycle control so that the hood
particle size and standard specific gravity. Periodic tests shall window will be left down during the entire sintering procedure, the latter
consist of all the tests specified in Tables 1 and 2 and shall be being an important safety consideration.
made at least one per year.
9.2 Test Specimens for Standard Specific Gravity (SSG) and
8.2 The tests listed in Tables 1 and 2, as they apply, are Extended Specific Gravity (ESG):
sufficient to establish conformity of a material to this specifi- 9.2.1 A cylindrical preforming die, 28.6 mm (11⁄8 in.)
cation. One set of tests specimens as prescribed in Section 7 internal diameter by at least 76.2 mm (3 in.) deep, is used to
shall be considered sufficient for testing each sample. The prepare the preforms. End plug clearances shall be sufficient to
average of the results for the specimens tested shall conform to ensure escape of air during pressing. The test resin shall be near
the requirements of this specification. ambient temperature prior to molding (Note 5).
9. Specimen Preparation NOTE 5—For maximum precision, the weighing and preforming opera-
tions shall be carried out at 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) (the “near ambient”
9.1 Test Disks: temperature referred to herein). These operations shall not be preformed at
9.1.1 Use the die shown in Fig. 1 for the molding of test temperatures below 21°C (70°F) due to the crystalline transition that
disks. The test resin shall be near ambient temperature prior to occurs in PTFE in this temperature region which leads to possible cracks
in sintered specimens and differences in specimen density (as well as
molding (Note 5). Warning—PTFE can evolve small quanti- changes in other physical properties). Problems caused by the effects of
ties of gaseous products when heated above 204°C (400°F). temperature on the specific gravity or density of PTFE will be minimized
Some of these gases are harmful. Consequently, exhaust when the measurement is made using immersion procedures if a sensitive
ventilation must be used whenever the resins are heated above thermometer (for example, one reading 60.1°C) is used in the liquid and
this temperature, as they are during the sintering operations the temperature is adjusted to be at least 22°C.
that are a part of this specification. Since the temperature of 9.2.2 Weigh out 12.0 6 0.1 g of resin and place it in the die.
burning tobacco exceeds 204°C (400°F), those working with Screen non-free-flowing resins through a No. 10 sieve. Break
PTFE resins should ensure that tobacco is not contaminated. up compacted resins by hand-shaking cold resin in a half-filled
178
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
FIG. 1 Assembly and Details of Die for Molding Test Specimens
TABLE 3 Sintering Procedures

B C D E F G H I
Initial temperature, °C (°F) 290 (554) 290 (554) 238 (460) 238 (460) 290 (554) 238 (460) 238 (460) 238 (460)
Rate of heating, °C/h (°F/h) 120 ± 10 120 ± 10 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 120 ± 10 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5
(216 ± 18) (216 ± 18) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (216 ± 18) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9)
Hold temperature, °C (°F) 380 ± 6 357 ± 8 371 ± 6 360 ± 6 380 ± 6 357 ± 8 380 ± 6 371 ± 6
(716 ± 10) (675 ± 15) (700 ± 10) (685 ± 10) (716 ± 10) (675 ± 5) (716 ± 10) (700 ± 10)
Hold time, min 30 + 2, −0 30 + 2, −0 240 ± 15 240 ± 15 360 ± 5 240 ± 15 960 ± 15 120 ± 5
Cooling rate, °C/h (°F/h) 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5 60 ± 5
(108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) (108 ± 9)
Final or second hold temperature, °C (°F) 294 ± 6 294 ± 6 238 ± 6 238 ± 6 294 ± 6 238 ± 6 238 ± 6 238 ± 6
(561 ± 10) (561 ± 10) (460 ± 10) (460 ± 10) (561 ± 10) (460 ± 10) (460 ± 10) (460 ± 10)
Second hold time, min 24 + 0.5, −0 24 + 0.5, −0 NAA NAA 24 + 0.5, −0 NAA NAA NAA
Period to room temperature, min, h 1⁄2 1⁄2 6 6 1⁄2 6 6 6
A
NA, Not applicable.
sealed glass container. Condition the resin in the sealed glass

container in a freezer or dry-ice chest. After breaking up resin
lumps, allow the sealed container to equilibrate to near ambient
temperature. Then screen and weigh the 12.0 6 0.1-g sample.
Insert the die in a suitable hydraulic press and apply pressure
gradually (Note 3) until a pressure of 34.5 MPa (5000 psi) is
attained. Hold this pressure for 2 min. Remove the preform
from the die. Write the sample identification number using an
appropriate marker that will not effect the PTFE during
sintering on the preform at this time.
9.2.3 Sinter the preforms in accordance with Table 3 (Note
4).
9.2.3.1 For SSG specimens use Procedure B for Types I, II
and IV and Procedure C for Type III.
9.2.3.2 For ESG specimens use Procedure F for Types I, II
and IV and Procedure G for Type III.
NOTE 6—Improved precision in SSG and ESG test results has been
obtained with the use of an upright, cylindrical oven and an aluminum
sintering rack. The cylindrical oven has an inside diameter of 140 mm (5.5
in.) and an inside depth of 203 mm (8 in.) plus additional depth to
accommodate a 50.8-mm (2-in.) thick cover, and is equipped with suitable FIG. 2 SSG Samples Sintering Rack
heaters and controllers to sinter specimens in accordance with the
Procedures in Table 3. The rack, as shown in Fig. 2, allows preforms to be
placed symmetrically in the center region of the oven. Place six preforms on each of the middle oven rack shelves (if six or fewer preforms are to
179
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 4 Sectioned PTFE Test Billet
FIG. 3 Preforming of PTFE Test Billet

preforming step. The final pressure attained, if not recom-
mended by the manufacturer of the particular material, shall be
be sintered, place them on the middle rack, filling in with “dummies” as
needed). Place “dummies” on the top and bottom shelves. Specimens must 34.5 MPa (5000 psi) for Type I and 17.2 MPa (2500 psi) for
be spaced evenly in a circle on each shelf, with none of them touching. An Types II, III and IV. Hold under maximum pressure for 2 to 5
oven load must be no less than 18 pieces including “dummies.” “Dum- min. Release the pressure by gradually “cracking” the pressure
mies” are defined as normal 12-g specimens that have previously been release valve without an apparent movement of the press
through the sintering cycle. “Dummies” must only be used for an
platens. Remove the top pusher and force the preform verti-
additional two or three thermal cycles, due to eventual loss of thermal
stability and physical form. cally out of the mold shell using a continuous, smooth
movement.
9.2.4 Remove all flash from each specimen so that no air
bubbles will cling to the edges when the specimen is immersed NOTE 7—Remove the mold in a careful smooth movement from the die
in the solution for weighing during the standard specific gravity to prevent cracking.
and thermal instability index tests. It is recommended for this 9.3.3 Sinter the preform in accordance with Table 3 (Note
section and during testing that cotton gloves be worn while 4).
handling test specimens. 9.3.3.1 Use Procedure D for Types I, II and IV and
9.3 Test Billets: Procedure E for Type III—except for ESG specimens.
9.3.1 Use test specimens cut or skived from billets may be 9.3.3.2 For ESG specimens use Procedure H for Types I, II,
used as alternatives to the test disks described in 9.1 and 9.2 for and IV and Procedure I for Type III.
Types I, II, III and IV resins. 9.3.4 Divide the test billet into sections by making trans-
9.3.2 Mold test billets in a mold similar to Fig. 3, having an verse cuts by machining, or by a suitable alternate procedure,
inside diameter of 57 mm (2.25 in.) and of sufficient height to in accordance with Fig. 4. Use a saw for the rough cuts
contain the resin sample. Plug clearance shall be sufficient to between Sections I and II and between sections III and IV, but
ensure escape of air during pressing. A 254-mm (10-in.) mold Faces C and D must be prepared by machining. Prepare five
cavity fill depth will produce a billet approximately 76 mm (3 test specimens for the determination of tensile properties from
in.) long from a resin charge of 400 6 50 g. Vary the billet 0.8-mm (1⁄32-in.) thick slices machined from Section II, Face C,
length in accordance with the testing to be done. The test resin and machine a slice of suitable thickness for standard specific
shall be near ambient temperature prior to molding (Note 4). gravity measurements as described in 10.5. Care shall be taken
9.3.2.1 Adjust the lower plug position using a support ring to avoid wedge-shaped cuts. Use the remainder of Section II to
to position the mold shell so that the resin level will not come prepare tape specimens by skiving 0.13 mm (5 mils) thick.
within 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the top of the mold cavity. Add the Discard the initial five revolutions of skived tape before taking
resin to the mold, insert the top plug, and apply hand pressure. the test sample. Use the tape for the determination of tensile
Remove the support ring, and place the mold in a hydraulic properties, as an alternative to machined disks. If electrical
press. properties, discussed in the Appendix, are to be determined on
9.3.2.2 Apply an initial pressure of 3.45 MPa (500 psi) tape, Sections II and III must be left together in order that a
610 % and hold for 1 to 2 min. Increase the pressure smoothly tape of sufficient width is obtained to allow the cutting of a
to the final preforming pressure in 3 to 5 min. Do not allow the 50.8-mm (2-in.) diameter electrical test specimen.
mold shell to contact either press platen at any time during this 9.4 Conditioning Test Specimens:
180
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
melted before the test. The second melting peak temperature

occurs at about 327°C (621°F). Usually the difference between
the initial and second melting peak temperatures is greater than
5°C (9°F), as seen in Table 1. If peak temperatures are difficult
to discern from the curves, that is, if the peaks are rounded
rather than pointed, straight lines shall be drawn tangent to the
sides of the peak. Where these lines intersect beyond the peak
shall be taken as the peak temperature. Where more than one
peak occurs during the initial melting test, the presence of any
peak corresponding to the second melting peak temperature
indicates the presence of some previously melted material.
10.2 Bulk Density:
10.2.1 Significance and Use—Bulk density gives some in-
dication of how a resin will perform during feeding of molding
and ram extrusion equipment. PTFE resins have a tendency to
compact during shipment and storage, and even though the
material is broken up by screening or some other means,
FIG. 5 Melting Characteristics by Thermal Analysis
original “as produced” results are not guaranteed. Because of
this tendency to pack under small amounts of compression or
shear, Test Method D1895 is not applicable to these resins. The
9.4.1 For tests of tensile properties and all tests requiring the procedure given in the following paragraphs must be used to
measurement of specific gravity condition the test specimens in measure this property.
general accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618, with 10.2.2 Apparatus:
the following deviations therefrom: a) the aging period shall be 10.2.2.1 Funnel—A funnel arrangement as shown in Fig. 6.
a minimum of 4 h immediately prior to testing, b) the 10.2.2.2 Feeder —A feeder with a No. 8 wire screen placed
laboratory temperature shall be 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F), and over approximately the top two-thirds of the trough. The funnel
c) there shall be no requirement respecting humidity. The other shall be mounted permanently in the feeder outlet.
tests require no conditioning of the molded test specimens. 10.2.2.3 Controller
9.5 Test Conditions: 10.2.2.4 Volumetric Cup and Cup Stand (Fig. 7)—The
9.5.1 Tests shall be conducted at the standard laboratory volumetric cup shall be calibrated initially to 250 mL by filling
temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F). See Note 5 for it with distilled water, placing a planar glass plate on top,
additional details. Since these resins do not absorb water, the drying the outside of the cup, and weighing. The net weight
maintenance of constant humidity during testing is not re- shall be 250 6 0.5 g. The top and bottom faces of the
quired. volumetric cup and the cup stand shall be machined plane and
parallel.
10. Test Methods 10.2.2.5 Leveling Device—The leveler (Fig. 8) shall be
affixed permanently to the table and adjusted so that the
10.1 Melting Characteristics by Thermal Analysis:
sawtooth edge of the leveler blade passes within 0.8 mm (1⁄32
10.1.1 Significance and Use—Most of the PTFE resins that
in.) of the top of the volumetric cup.
fall within the scope of this specification have never been
10.2.2.6 Work Surface—The work surface for holding the
melted (the only exception is Type V resin). These resins have
volumetric cup and leveler shall be essentially free from
higher melting peak temperatures on initial melting than on
vibration. The feeder, therefore, must be mounted on an
second or subsequent meltings. Since PTFE resins that have
adjoining table or wall bracket.
been melted prior to use behave differently from those that
10.2.2.7 Balance—The balance having an extended beam
have not, the melting characteristics of resins provide impor-
shall have a capacity of 500 g and a sensitivity of 0.1 g or
tant distinctions among them. Melting peak temperatures (see
equivalent.
Fig. 5) are used to make these distinctions, and determine
10.2.3 Procedure:
conformance of a resin to the melting peak temperature
10.2.3.1 Place the clean, dry volumetric cup on the extended
requirements given in Table 1 of this specification. A resin that
beam of the balance and adjust the tare to zero. Select about
has been melted is not compatible with this specification,
500 mL of the resin to be tested, place it on the feeder screen
except for Type V.
and vibrate all of the resin through the screen and back into the
10.1.2 Apparatus—Use apparatus described in Test Method
sample container twice to break up any lumps. Put the cup in
D4591.
the cup stand and place the assembly such that the distance of
10.1.3 Procedure:
10.1.3.1 Measure melting peak temperatures in accordance
with the procedures given in Method D4591. An initial melting
peak temperature above the melting peak temperature obtained
on the second and subsequent melting (defined as the second
melting peak temperature) indicates that the resin was not
181
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 6 Details of Funnel for Bulk Density Test
FIG. 7 Volumetric Cap and Cap Stand for Bulk Density Test
free polymer fall from the feeder outlet to the top rim of the cup this test method has no bias because the value of bulk density
shall be 38.1 6 3.2 mm (11⁄2 6 1⁄8 in.). Increased fall causes is defined only in terms of a test method.
packing in the cup and higher Bulk Density values. Set the
10.3 Particle Size:
controller so that the cup is filled in 20 to 30 s. Pour the sample
on the vibrating screen and fill the cup so that the resin forms 10.3.1 Significance and Use—The fabrication of PTFE res-
a mound and overflows. Let the resin settle for about 15 s and ins either by molding or extrusion is affected significantly by
then gently push the cup and its stand beneath the leveler. particle (or agglomerate) size and size distribution. (See
Exercise care to avoid agitation of the resin and cup before Appendix X1. for further details on particle characteristics.)
leveling. Weigh the resin to the nearest 0.1 g. The average particle size of PTFE resins is determined by
10.2.4 Calculation—Calculate the bulk density as follows: fractionation of the material with a series of sieves. Fraction-
ation is facilitated by spraying with perchloroethylene which
Grams of resin 3 4 5 bulk density ~ grams per litre!
breaks up lumps and prevents clogging of the sieve openings.
10.2.5 Precision and Bias—A precision statement for use (Warning—Perchloroethylene is under investigation by gov-
with this procedure is under development. The procedure in ernment agencies and industry for its carcinogenic effects.
182
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
FIG. 8 Leveler Stand for Bulk Density Test
Protective nitrile or butyl gloves shall be worn to prevent skin shown in Fig. 9 (b). Pour each fraction into a tared beaker and
contact and adequate ventilation provided to remove the weigh to 60.1 g (See Note 8).
vapors.) 10.3.4.5 Record the weight of resin on each sieve.
10.3.2 Apparatus: 10.3.4.6 Clean the sieve by inverting it over filter paper and
10.3.2.1 Balance—capable of weighing to 60.1 g. spraying with perchloroethylene. Take care to prevent the resin
10.3.2.2 Sieves—U.S. Standard Sieve Series, 203-mm (8- from getting into the perchloroethylene.
in.) diameter conforming to Specification E11. Sieve Numbers 10.3.5 Calculation—Calculate the net percentage of resin
shall be selected from Table 4. on each sieve as follows:
10.3.2.3 Ventilated Hood.
10.3.2.4 Beakers—Six tared, 150-mL beakers. Net percentage on sieve Y
5 F 3 weight of resin in grams on sieve Y.
NOTE 8—As an alternative, sieves are tared, dried, and weighed on a
balance to avoid transferring of fractionated samples to the tared beakers.
where:
10.3.2.5 Apparatus for Sieving and Spraying—A suggested
arrangement of an apparatus for recirculating perchloroethyl- F = 2 for 50-g sample, and
F = 10 for 10-g sample.
ene is shown in Fig. 9 (a). This must be located in a ventilated
hood or adequately ventilated area. 10.3.5.1 Calculate the cumulative percentage of resin on
10.3.3 Reagents—Perchloroethylene, 20 L (5 gal). The use each sieve as follows:
of other liquids, their applicability and hazards associated with Cumulative percentage on sieve Y 5 sum of net percentages on sieve Y
their use must be thoroughly investigated. and sieves having numbers smaller than Y.
10.3.4 Procedure:
10.3.4.1 Select the appropriate sample size and combination NOTE 9—Example—Cumulative percentage on 500 µm (No. 35) sieve
of sieves from Table 4 for the type of resin under test. Adjust for a Type V resin = net percentage on 1.00 mm (No. 18) plus net
the flow rate of the perchloroethylene to 6 6 0.5 L/min. percentage on 710 µm (No. 25) plus net percentage on 500 µm (No. 35)
sieves.
10.3.4.2 Place the weighed resin on the top sieve and spray
it with perchloroethylene for 1 6 0.2 min. The shower-head 10.3.5.2 Plot the cumulative percentage versus the sieve
shall be about level with the top of the sieve and be moved in opening size (or sieve number) on log-probability paper as
a circular fashion. Take care to break up all of the lumps and shown in the sample plot (Fig. 10). The sieve numbers and
to wash the material from the sides of the sieve. sieve opening sizes in micrometres are indicated below the
10.3.4.3 Remove the top sieve and place it in the hood to figure. Draw the best straight line through the points and read
dry. the Particle Size at the 50 % cumulative percentage point (d50).
10.3.4.4 Repeat the procedure specified in 10.3.4.2 and 10.3.5.3 Calculate the Particle Size, Average Diameter,
10.3.4.3 until all the sieves have been sprayed. Air-dry the d̄ as follows:
sieves in the hood for 30 min or longer, or oven-dry at 90°C
d̄ = d50 (micrometres)
(194°F) for 15 min and then cool to room temperature. Remove
the resin from each sieve by tapping on a piece of paper as 10.3.6 Precision and Bias:
183
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Sieving RequirementsA

Sieve Number Type
(opening) I IIB III 1B III 2 IV V VI
14 (1.40 mm) X X X X
18 (1.00 mm) X X X X X
25 (710 µm) X X X X X X X
35 (500 µm) X X X X X
45 (355 µm) X X X X X
60 (250 µm) X X X X
80 (180 µm) X X X X X
120 (125 µm) X
170 (90 µm) X X
200 (75 µm) X X
230 (63 µm) X X
270 (53 µm) X X
325 (45 µm) X X
400 (38 µm) X X X
Sample size, g
10 ± 0.1 X X
50 ± 0.1 X X X X X
A
It is suggested that the sieves and sample size checked in a “Type Grade”
column be used when performing the sieve analysis on that particular type grade.
B
A discussion of the particular characteristics of finely divided resins is found in
Appendix X1.
Sieve. Sieve Opening, µm Sieve Sieve Opening, µm

No. No.
14 1400
FIG. 9 Apparatus for Particle Size Test
18 1000 80 180
25 710 120 125
35 500 170 90
45 355 200 75
60 250 230 63
10.3.6.1 Because the resin particles have complex shapes, 270 53
and because on each sieve there is a distribution of particle 325 45
400 38
sizes, the values for particle size and particle size distribution
obtained will be only relative numbers. The 95 % confidence
limits based on a limited series of tests are 62.8 % for the FIG. 10 Sample Plot of Cumulative Percent Versus Sieve Open-
average particle size. Since there is no accepted reference ing Size for Determination of Particle Size
material suitable for determination of the bias for this test
procedure, no statement on bias is being made. 10.4.1 Significance and Use—The presence of an excessive
10.3.7 Alternative methods for particle size are available. amount of water in PTFE resin has a significant adverse effect
Light Scattering Instruments/Light Defraction Instruments (see upon the processing characteristics of the resin and the quality
ISO 12086-2, 8.6.4) and Electron Zone Sensing Instruments, of products made using the resin. A sample of PTFE resin of
which is a resistance-variation tester, (see ISO 12086-2, 8.6.3) known weight is dried in a vacuum oven in a tared aluminum
are used as long as there is a direct correlation to the Particle weighing dish. When the resin is dry, it is removed from the
Size Analysis in 10.3 of this specification. oven, placed in a desiccator, allowed to cool, and then
10.3.7.1 This alternative method is very dependent on reweighed. Water content is calculated from the weight lost
particle shape and is only recommended for processes that are during drying.
stable and that have regular spherical type shape particles. 10.4.2 Apparatus:
Also, it is recommended that each manufacturing processor do 10.4.2.1 Balance, capable of weighing to the nearest 0.0001
an analysis to determine their own correlation. g.
10.4 Water Content: 10.4.2.2 Vacuum Oven.
184
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
10.4.2.3 Aluminum Weighing Dishes, with lids. 10.5.2.4 Make specific gravity determinations in accordance
10.4.3 Procedure (Note 10): with the procedures described in Test Methods D792, Method
10.4.3.1 Wash the aluminum weighing dishes with water A-1. Add two drops of a wetting agent to the water in order to
and rinse with acetone. When the acetone has evaporated from reduce the surface tension and ensure complete wetting of the
the dishes, dry them thoroughly in an oven at 50 to 80°C (122 specimen.
to 176°F), then store in a desiccator until ready for use. Obtain 10.6 Thermal Instability Index (TII):
the tare weight, B, of an aluminum weighing dish, plus lid, to 10.6.1 Significance and Use—This test method compares
the nearest 0.0001 g. Place 35 to 40 g of PTFE resin in the tared the SSG of a resin (determined in 10.5) to its Extended Specific
aluminum weighing dish and record the weight (including lid), Gravity (ESG) (determined here). Specimens used to deter-
A, to the nearest 0.0001 g (Note 10). Dry to constant weight in mine ESG are identical to those used to determine SSG, except
a vacuum oven (635 mm (25 in.) Hg) at 150°C (302°F), with for the differences in thermal history described in 9.2.3 and
the dish lid removed. Remove the dish from the oven, replace 9.3.3. The specific gravity of a specimen prepared in accor-
the lid on the weighing dish, and allow to cool in the desiccator dance with all of the requirements of 9.2.3.2 or 9.3.3.2 defines
for at least 30 min. Reweigh the dish (plus the resin and lid), the ESG for that resin specimen.
C, and calculate the weight loss. 10.6.2 Procedure:
NOTE 10—Select one sample from each group of samples and run 10.6.2.1 Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.4, the spe-
duplicate water content determinations on it. If the difference between the cific gravity of specimens prepared in 9.2.3.2 or 9.3.3.2.
duplicate results exceeds 0.01 %, the entire group of samples must be run 10.6.2.2 If specimens from 9.2.3.2 are to be tested, use them
over. as is.
NOTE 11—When a group of samples is run at the same time, it is good 10.6.2.3 If specimens from 9.3.3.2 are to be tested, use the
practice to place the lids from the weighing dishes directly under their
corresponding dishes while the samples are drying in the oven. This center portion of the billet (Section III of Fig. 4).
eliminates the possibility of introducing errors in the tare weights. Also, 10.6.3 Calculation—Calculate the thermal instability index
overnight drying in a circulating air oven is used if the data are shown to (TII) as
be equivalent to those obtained with the above procedure.
TII 5 ~ ESG 2 SSG! 3 1000
10.4.4 Calculation:
10.4.4.1 Calculate the water content as follows: 10.7 Tensile Properties:
water content, % 5 ~ A 2 C ! / ~ A 2 B ! 3 100 10.7.1 Procedure:
10.7.1.1 Cut five tensile specimens from a disk prepared in
where: accordance with all of the requirements of 9.1.3.1 (or from a
billet prepared in accordance with all of the requirements of
A = weight of resin, dish, and lid, g, before drying 9.3.3.1 and cut or skived as in 9.3.4), with the microtensile die
B = weight of dish and lid, g and,
described in Fig. 11. Determine the tensile strength in accor-
C = weight of resin, dish, and lid after drying, g.
dance with the procedures described in Test Method D638,
10.4.5 Precision and Bias: except that the initial jaw separation shall be 22.2 6 0.13 mm
10.4.5.1 The precision of this test is 60.0063 % (two sigma (0.875 6 0.005 in.), and the speed of testing shall be 50 mm (2
limits). Since there is no accepted reference material for in.)/min. Clamp the specimen with essentially equal lengths in
determining the bias in this test procedure, no statement on bias each jaw. Determine elongation at break from the chart,
is being made. expressed as a percentage of the initial jaw separation.
10.7.2 Precision and Bias:
10.5 Standard Specific Gravity (SSG):
10.7.2.1 A precision and bias statement for use with this
10.5.1 Significance and Use—The specific gravity of an procedure is under development and will be included when it
article made from a PTFE resin is affected both by the has been approved by the balloting process.
particular resin used and by the way the resin is processed.
Therefore, a test method that measures the specific gravity of 11. Inspection
an article prepared in a precisely defined way provides valuable
resin characterization data. The specific gravity of a specimen 11.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference
of PTFE resin prepared in accordance with all of the require- to this specification shall be for conformance to the require-
ments of 9.2.3.1 or 9.3.3.1 defines the SSG for that resin ments specified herein.
specimen. 11.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
10.5.2 Procedure: acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
10.5.2.1 Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.4, the spe- inspection shall consist of the following:
cific gravity of specimens prepared in 9.2.3.1 or 9.3.3.1. 11.2.1 Bulk density,
10.5.2.2 If specimens from 9.2.3.1 are to be tested, use them 11.2.2 Particle size,
as is. 11.2.3 Water content, and
11.2.4 Standard Specific Gravity.
10.5.2.3 If specimens from 9.3.3.1 are to be tested, use the
center portion of the sintered billet (Section II of Fig. 4). From
it, cut an approximately cubical shape which weighs at least 10
g (for example, a cube about 17 mm (0.67 in.) on a side).
185
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 11 Microtensile Die
11.3 Periodic check inspection with reference to a specifi- the shipment and the results of the most recent periodic-
cation shall consist of the tests for all requirements of the check inspection.
material under the specification. Inspection frequency shall be
adequate to ensure the material is certifiable in accordance 12. Certification
with Annex A1. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
11.4 A report of test results shall be furnished. The re-
port shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance inspection for
186
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
13. Packaging and Package Marking 13.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
13.1 Packaging—The resin shall be packaged in standard Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
commercial containers so constructed as to ensure acceptance
by common or other carriers for safe transportation to the point 14. Keywords
of delivery, unless otherwise specified in the contract or order. 14.1 fluoropolymers; granular polytetrafluoroethylene;
13.2 Package Marking—Shipping containers shall be polytetrafluoroethylene; PTFE
marked with the name of the resin, type, and quantity contained
therein.
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract or order.
S1. Ordering Information—The purchase order shall state

this ASTM designation and year of issue, and which type and
grade is desired.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
187
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1. ADDITIONAL USEFUL TESTS
X1.1 Scope
X1.1.1 In addition to their use for specification purposes, TABLE X1.1
the tests described in this specification have utility for charac- Specification Specification Additional
terizing PTFE resins. Other useful properties of PTFE can be Test Property Measured Information
Reference Available
measured by adding a few details to the specification tests. The 10.5 Standard Specific Dimensional change
purpose of this Appendix is to provide the details needed to Gravity during molding
determine these additional characteristics. The scope is sum- (shrinkage and growth)
10.1 Melting Heats of fusion
marized in Table X1.1. Characteristics and crystallization
by Thermal Analysis
X1.2 Referenced Documents 10.3 Particle Size (a) Average Particle Size
for resins smaller than those
X1.2.1 ASTM Standards: covered by the standard
X1.2.1.1 The following standards are referenced herein, in specification
addition to those already listed in Section 1.1 of the Standard: (b) Percent coarse particles
(percent >63 µm) in small particle
D150 Test Methods for A-C Loss Characteristics and Per- size
mittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulating resins
Materials 10.7 Tensile Yield stress and
Properties tangent modulus
D2990 Test Methods for Tensile, Compressive, and Flexural at rupture
Creep and Creep-Rupture of Plastics Electrical Properties:
D3293 Specification for PTFE Resin Molded Sheet Dielectric constant
Dissipation factor
D3294 Specification for PTFE Resin Molded Basic Shapes Dielectric breakdown
D3308 Specification for PTFE Resin Skived Tape voltage
D3369 Specification for TFE-Fluorocarbon Resin Cast Dielectric strength
Tensile creep strain
Film
X1.3 Dimensional Changes During Molding (Shrinkage
and Growth)
X1.3.1 Measure the inside diameter (ID) to 60.00254 mm
(0.0001 in.) of the die used to make the preform in 9.1, 9.2, or
9.3. Measure the diameter and height at the preform. After the
piece has been sintered and cooled to ambient temperature,
measure the diameter and height of the sintered piece.
X1.3.2 Calculation:
X1.3.2.1 Percent mold shrinkage = [(diameter of sintered
piece/ID) − 1] × 100
188
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4894
X1.3.2.2 Percent preform shrinkage = [(diameter of sintered X1.4.3.1 Procedure—Using the graph plotted in accordance
piece/diameter of preform) − 1] × 100 with 10.3.5.2 or 10.3.5.3, draw the best smooth curve through
X1.3.2.3 Percent growth = [(height of sintered piece/height the data points and read the values for the sizes at cumulative
of preform) − 1] × 100 percentages of 16 and 84. These values, identified as d16 and
X1.3.2.4 Positive values reflect an increase in the dimension d84, are, respectively, the size of the resin at the average
during sintering. Negative values reflect a decrease in the diameter (d̄ ) plus 1 sigma and (d̄ ) minus 1 sigma. Calculate a
dimension during sintering. distribution factor (DF) and skewness (SKEW) as follows:
DF 5 d16/d50
X1.4 Size and Distribution of Size of Particles or Ag-
glomerates in PTFE Resins
SKEW 5 DF/~ d50/d84!
X1.4.1 Average Size of Fine-Particle Size PTFE—Wet-
sieve analysis, while having disadvantages, can be used to
measure the average size of Type II and Type III PTFE resins. X1.4.3.2 Precision and Bias—Because the resin particles
The procedure of 10.3 shall be followed using the set of sieves have complex shapes, and because on each sieve there is a
listed in Table 4 and a sample size of 10.0 g. distribution of particle sizes, the values for particle size and
particle size distribution obtained will be only relative num-
X1.4.2 Material Retained on 63-µm (No. 230) Sieve: bers. The 95 % confidence limits based on a limited series of
X1.4.2.1 Scope—A wet sieving is performed with the ap- tests are 62.8 % for the average particle size and 66 % for the
paratus used for the determination of particle size, except that particle size distribution function. Since there is no accepted
only three sieves are employed. This method is applicable to reference material suitable for determination of the bias for this
ultrafine resins such as Type II resins. The resin is sieved on a test procedure, no statement on bias is being made.
63 µm (No. 230) sieve by spraying with perchloroethylene
which breaks up agglomerates and prevents clogging of the X1.5 Yield Behavior and Tangent Modulus at Rupture
sieve openings (See Note 7). X1.5.1 Most of the PTFE resins covered in this standard do
X1.4.2.2 Apparatus—Same as in 10.3.2, except that the not show a yield stress as defined in Test Method D638. Rather
following sieves are used: U.S. Standard Sieves, 850 µm (No. than the stress-strain curve having a zero slope, the rate of
20), 63 µm (No. 230), and 45 µm (No. 325). increase of stress with strain decreases and then increases
X1.4.2.3 Procedure: again. An approximate yield stress shall be reported as the
X1.4.2.4 Weigh 10 6 0.01 g of resin. Assemble the sieves stress at the intersection of the two lines that best represent the
as shown in Fig. 10 (a). Adjust the flow rate of the perchloro- initial “linear” part of the stress strain curve and the second
ethylene to 6 6 0.5 L/min. “linear” part of the curve.
X1.4.2.5 Place the weighed sample on the 850 µm (No. 20) X1.5.2 Tangent Modulus at Rupture—The shapes of tensile
sieve and spray with perchloroethylene for exactly 1 min using stress-strain curves for PTFE resins are highly dependent on
a timer. This step assists in breaking up agglomerates. Move the crystallinity of the test specimen. Values for tensile strength
the shower-head in a circular fashion, taking care to break up and elongation at break do not reflect these shapes clearly. The
all the agglomerates and to wash the material from the sides of value of the tangent to the recorded stress-strain curve mea-
the sieve. sured as the best straight line from the point of rupture back
X1.4.2.6 Remove the 850 µm (No. 20) sieve and spray the along the curve is a convenient measure of the relative
63 µm (No. 230) sieve for exactly 6 min, using a timer. Wash crystallinity of the test specimen. High values for the tangent
the material to the side of the sieve during the last minute. modulus at rupture (>7.6 MPa (1200 psi)) indicate relatively
X1.4.2.7 Dry the sieve and retained resin in an oven for 20 low crystalline contents. As the crystallinity increases, the
min or longer at 80 to 120°C (176 to 248°F). The No. 20 sieve tangent modulus at rupture decreases until it approaches zero at
does not require drying. high levels of crystallinity.
X1.4.2.8 Remove the material from the 63 µm (No. 230)
sieve by inverting on a piece of filter paper and tapping to free X1.6 Heats of Fusion and Crystallization
dry polymer. Use a stiff brush to help free all the material from X1.6.1 If the melting characteristics of the PTFE resin, as
the sieve. Pour the dried resin into a tared weighing dish and determined by Section 10.1, are determined by differential
weigh to 60.01 g. Alternatively, determined the tare weight of scanning calorimetry (DSC) rather than in DTA mode, addi-
the resin retained on the sieve from the difference between the tional quantitative information will be obtained on the nature of
gross weight after sieving and the tare weight of the sieve the resin.
before sieving. A balance with a sensitivity of about 0.01 g is
required for good precision. X1.6.2 Following the procedures given in Test Method
D4591 for determining heats of fusion (delta Hf) and heat of
X1.4.2.9 Calculation—the percentage of resin retained on
crystallization (delta Hc), measure and report delta Hf for the
the No. 230 sieve is calculated as follows:
initial and second endotherms and delta Hc for the exotherm
Amount retained, % 5 ~ weight retained/sample weight! 3 100 that is observed during controlled cooling between the two
heating steps. These heats of transition, especially delta Hc,
X1.4.3 Distribution of Particle or Agglomerate Sizes in provide additional characterization of crystalline content and
PTFE Resin: relative molecular weight of PTFE resins.
189
SD-4894 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE X1.2 Typical Electrical Properties from Tests on Molded from the sheets produced in X1.8.2. Make measurements in
Specimens accordance with Test Method D2990. Conditions of test shall
Type II Type III be 5.52 MPa (800 psi) stress at the Standard Laboratory
Dielectric constant, max, 1 kHz 2.1 2.1
Dissipation factor, max, 1 kHz 0.0003 0.0003 Temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3°F) for a test duration of a
minimum of 100 h. Typical values for moldings of Type III
resins would be a maximum of 4.0 % tensile creep strain after
X1.7 Electrical Properties 100 h.
X1.7.1 Determine dielectric constant and dissipation factor
X1.8.2 Mold test sheets for Type III resins for tensile creep
in accordance with Test Method D150. Determine dielectric
breakdown voltage and dielectric strength in accordance with measurements in a picture frame mold having inside dimen-
Test Method D150. Typical property values for dielectric sions of 203 mm (8.0 in.) square and of sufficient height to
constant and dissipation factor are listed in Table X1.2. contain the sample. A frame 102 mm (4 in.) in height has been
Standards for dielectric strength of sheet, basic shapes, skived found adequate when using 25-mm (1-in.) thick pusher plugs
tape, and film are described in Specifications D3293, D3294, to produce a sheet approximately 3 mm (1⁄8 in.) in thickness
D3308, and D3369, respectively. from a resin charge of 300 g. Take care to level the resin charge
in the mold. The molded sheet thickness shall be 3 mm (1⁄8 in.).
X1.8 Tensile Creep
X1.8.3 Sinter the preform in accordance with procedure E
X1.8.1 Determine the tensile creep of Type III materials on
of Table 3.
Test Method D638 Type II tensile bars die cut or machined
190
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE

(PTFE) RESIN PRODUCED FROM DISPERSION
SD-4895
(Identical with ASTM D4895-10 except for revisions in section 11, additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1,
and renumbering of sections 13 and 14.)
191
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced From
Dispersion
1. Scope associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
1.1 This specification covers dry-powder resins of polytet- standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
rafluoroethylene (PTFE) that have been prepared from disper- and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
sions of PTFE by manufacturing techniques that involve to use. See Warning note in 9.1.1 for a specific hazards
controlled coagulation of the dispersion. These resins are statement.
generally known as “fine-powder” resins or “coagulated- NOTE 1—Information in this specification is technically equivalent to
dispersion powder” resins. The conversion of these resins to related information in ISO 12086-1 and ISO 12086-2.
finished products normally involves a process called “paste
extrusion,” and sometimes involves formative processes such 2. Referenced Documents
as calendering. A volatile liquid is present as a processing aid
2.1 ASTM Standards:
during these formative stages of conversion, and is subse-
quently removed during the finishing stages of conversion.
These PTFE resins are homopolymers of tetrafluoroethylene,
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
or, in some cases, modified homopolymers containing not more
than 1 % by weight of other fluoromonomers. The usual
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
methods of processing thermoplastics generally are not appli-
D1895 Test Methods for Apparent Density, Bulk Factor, and
cable to these materials because of their viscoelastic properties.
Pourability of Plastic Materials
The materials covered herein do not include mixtures of PTFE
with additives such as colors, fillers, or plasticizers; nor do they
D4052 Test Method for Density, Relative Density, and API
include reprocessed or reground resin or any fabricated articles
Gravity of Liquids by Digital Density Meter
because the properties of such materials have been irreversibly
D4441 Specification for Aqueous Dispersions of Polytetra-
changed when they were fibrillated or sintered. The methods
fluoroethylene
and properties included are those required to identify the
various resins. An additional procedure is provided in the
Heats of Transitions of Fluoropolymers by Differential
appendix for further characterization of the resins.
Scanning Calorimetry
1.2 The values stated in SI units as detailed in IEEE/ASTM D4894 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
SI-10 are to be regarded as standard. The values given in Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials
parentheses are for information only. E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the Sieves
Specimen Preparation Section, Section 9, and the Test Methods E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Section, Section 10, of this specification: This standard does Determine Conformance with Specifications
not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
ASTM Test Methods
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Use of the International System of Units
(SI): The Modern Metric System
192
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
2.2 ISO Standards: 3.2.10 stretching void index (SVI), n—a measure of the
ISO 12086-1 Plastics Fluoropolymer Dispersions and Mold- change in specific gravity of PTFE material which has been
ing and Extrusion Materials—Part 1: Designation and subjected to tensile strain as described in this specification.
Specification 3.2.11 thermal instability index (TII), n—a measure of the
ISO 12086-2 Plastics Fluoropolymer Dispersions and decrease in molecular weight of PTFE material which has been
Molding and Extrusion Materials—Part 2: Preparation of heated for a prolonged period of time.
Test Specimens and Determination of Properties
3.2.12 unstrained specific gravity (USG), n—the specific
gravity, prior to straining, of a specimen of PTFE material used
3. Terminology
in the Stretching Void Index Test (see 10.9) of this specifica-
3.1 Definitions—The definitions given in Terminology tion.
D883 are applicable to this specification.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 4. Classification
3.2.1 bulk density, n—the mass in grams per litre of resin 4.1 This specification covers the following types of PTFE:
measured under the conditions of the test. 4.1.1 Type I and Type II—Resin produced from dispersion
3.2.2 extended specific gravity (ESG), n—the specific grav- and normally used with a volatile processing aid. Each type of
ity of a specimen of PTFE material molded as described in this resin has the same requirements for bulk density, particle size,
specification and sintered (see 3.2.7) for an extended period of water content, melting peak temperature, tensile, and elonga-
time, compared to the sintering time for the measurement of tion. Each type of resin is divided into grades in accordance
SSG (see 3.2.8), using the appropriate sintering schedule given with standard specific gravity (SSG), Thermal Stability Index
in this specification. (TII), and Stretching Void Index (SVI). Grades are divided into
3.2.3 lot, n—one production run or a uniform blend of two classes according to extrusion pressure.
or more production runs. NOTE 2—See Tables 1 and 2 for details about grades and classes.
3.2.4 preforming, vb—compacting powdered PTFE material 4.2 A line callout system is used to specify materials in this
under pressure in a mold to produce a solid object, called a specification. The system uses predefined cells to refer to
preform, that is capable of being handled. Molding and specific aspects of this specification, as illustrated as follows:
compaction are terms used interchangeably with preforming
for PTFE.
3.2.5 reground resin, n—resin produced by grinding PTFE Specification
material that has been preformed but has never been sintered. Standard Number Type Grade Class Special Notes
3.2.6 reprocessed resin, n—resin produced by grinding Block
PTFE material that has been preformed and sintered. | | | | |

3.2.7 sintering, n—as it applies to PTFE, a thermal treat- Example: Specification I 2 C
D4895 - XX
ment during which the PTFE is melted and recrystallized by
cooling with coalescence occurring during the treatment.
3.2.8 standard specific gravity (SSG), n—the specific grav- For this example, the line callout would be Specification
ity of a specimen of PTFE material molded as described in this D4895 - XX, I2C, and would specify a coagulated dispersion
specification and sintered using the appropriate sintering form of polytetrafluoroethylene that has all of the properties
schedule given in this specification. listed for that type, grade, and class in the appropriate specified
3.2.9 strained specific gravity (strained SG), n—the specific properties or tables, or both, in the specification identified. A
gravity of a specimen of PTFE material molded, sintered, and comma is used as the separator between the standard number
strained as described in this specification. and the type. Separators are not needed between the type,
grade, and class.
TABLE 1 Detail Requirements for all Types,A Grades and Classes

Particle Size Melting Peak
Bulk Density, Water Content, Temperature, °C Tensile Strength, Elongation at Break,
Type Average
g/L max, % min, MPa min, %
Diameter, µm Initial Second
B
I 550 ± 150 500 ± 200 0.04 327 ± 10 19 200
B
II 550 ± 150 1050 ± 350 0.04 327 ± 10 19 200
A
The types, grades, and classes are not the same as those in previous editions of Specification D4895.
B
Greater than 5.0°C above the second melting peak temperature.
193
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Detail Requirements for All Types,A Grades and Classes

Standard Specific Gravity Thermal Instability Index, Stretching Void Index,
Type Grade Class Extrusion Pressure, MPa
min max max max
I 1 A 2.14 2.18 5 to <15B 50 NAC
B 2.14 2.18 15 to <55D 50 NAC
C 2.14 2.18 15 to <75E 50 NAC
2 A 2.17 2.25 5 to <15B 50 NAC
B 2.17 2.25 15 to <55D 50 NAC
C 2.17 2.25 15 to <75E 50 NAC
3 C 2.15 2.19 15 to <75E 15 200
D 2.15 2.19 15 to <65E 15 100
E 2.15 2.19 15 to <65E 50 200
4 B 2.14 2.16 15 to <55D 15 50
II 1 A 2.14 2.25 5 to <15B 50 NAC
A
The types, grades, and classes are not the same as those in previous editions of Specification D4895.
B
Tested at a reduction ratio of 100:1 (reduction ratio is the ratio of the cross-sectional area of the preform to the cross-sectional area of the die).
C
Not applicable.
D
Tested at a reduction ratio of 400:1.
E
Tested at a reduction ratio of 1600:1.
5. Mechanical Properties 9.1.1 Use the die shown in Fig. 1 for the molding of test
5.1 The resins covered by this specification shall be in disks (see Note 2). Place flat aluminum disks, 0.1 to 0.4 mm
accordance with the requirements prescribed in Tables 1 and 2, (0.004 in. to 0.016 in.) thick and 76 mm (3 in.) in diameter, on
when tested by the procedures specified herein. both sides of the resin. The test resin shall be near ambient
temperature prior to molding (see Note 3). Warning— PTFE
6. Other Requirements resins can evolve small quantities of gaseous products when
heated above 204°C (400°F). Some of these gases are harmful.
6.1 The resin shall be uniform and shall contain no additives Consequently, exhaust ventilation must be used whenever
or foreign material. these resins are heated above this temperature, as they are
6.2 The color of the material as shipped by the supplier shall during the sintering operations that are a part of this specifi-
be natural white. cation. Since the temperature of burning tobacco exceeds
6.3 For purposes of determining conformance, all specified 204°C (400°F), those working with PTFE resins shall ensure
limits for this classification system are absolute limits, as that tobacco is not contaminated.
defined in Practice E29. NOTE 3—For maximum precision, these weighing and preforming
6.3.1 With the absolute method, an observed value is not operations shall be carried out at 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) (the “near
rounded, but is to be compared directly with the limiting value. ambient” temperature referred to herein). These operations shall not be
performed at temperatures below 21°C (70°F) due to the crystalline
Example: In Table 2 Type I, Grade 4, Class B, under Specific transition that occurs in PTFE in this temperature region which leads to
Gravity, 2.14 shall be considered as 2.140000 and 2.16 shall be possible cracks in sintered specimens and differences in specimen density
considered 2.160000. (as well as changes in other physical properties). Problems caused by the
effect of temperature on the specific gravity or density of PTFE shall be
7. Sampling minimized when the measurement is made using immersion procedures if
a sensitive thermometer (for example, one reading 6 0.1°C) is used in the
7.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the liquid and the temperature is adjusted to be at least 22°C.
requirements in Section 11. 9.1.2 Screen 14.5 g of PTFE resin through a No. 10 sieve
into the die. Adjust the lower plug height to allow the resin in
8. Number of Tests the die can be leveled by drawing a straightedge in contact with
8.1 Lot inspection shall include tests for bulk density, the top of the die across the top of the die cavity. Insert the die
particle size, and extrusion pressure. Periodic tests shall consist in a suitable hydraulic press and apply pressure gradually (see
of all the tests specified in Tables 1 and 2 and shall be made at Note 4) until a pressure of 14 MPa (2030 psi) is attained. Hold
least once per year. this pressure for 3 min. Remove the disk from the die. Write the
sample identification number on the preform using an appro-
8.2 The tests listed in Tables 1 and 2, as they apply, are
priate marker that will not effect the PTFE during sintering.
sufficient to establish conformity of a material to this specifi-
cation. One set of test specimens as prescribed in Section 9 NOTE 4—As a guide, increasing the pressure at a rate of 3.5 MPa (500
shall be considered sufficient for testing each sample. The psi)/min is suggested until the desired maximum pressure is attained.
average of the results for the specimens tested shall conform to 9.1.3 Place the sintering oven in a laboratory hood (or equip
the requirements of this specification. it with an adequate exhaust system) and sinter the preforms in
accordance with Table 3, Procedure A (see Note 5).
9. Specimen Preparation
NOTE 5—Although the rate of heat application is not critical, the
9.1 Test Disks for Tensile Properties: cooling cycle is most important and the conditions cited in this procedure
194
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895

FIG. 1 Mold Assembly for the Preparation of Specimens for the Determination of Tensile Properties
TABLE 3 Sintering Procedures 9.2.2 Weigh out 12.0 6 0.1 g of resin and place it in the die.
A B Screen non-freeflowing resins through a No. 10 sieve. Com-
Initial temperature, °C (°F) 290 (554) 290 (554) pacted resins shall be broken up by hand-shaking cold resin in
Rate of heating, °C/h (°F/h) 120 ± 10 120 ± 10 a half-filled sealed glass container. Condition the resin in the
(216 ± 18) (216 ± 18)
Hold temperature, °C (°F) 380 ± 6 380 ± 6 sealed glass container in a freezer or dry-ice chest. After
(716 ± 10) (716 ± 10) breaking up resin lumps, allow the sealed container to equili-
Hold time, min 30 + 2, −0 360 ± 5 brate to near ambient temperature. Then screen and weigh the
Cooling rate, °C/h (°F/h) 60 ± 5 60 ± 5
(108 ± 9) (108 ± 9) 12.0 6 0.1-g sample. Insert the die in a suitable hydraulic press
Second hold temperature, °C (°F) 294 ± 6 294 ± 6 and apply pressure gradually (see Note 4) until a pressure of 14
(561 ± 10) (561 ± 10) MPa (2030 psi) is attained. Hold this pressure for 2 min.
Second hold time, min 24 + 0.5, −0 24 + 0.5, −0
Period to room temperature, min $30 $30 Remove the preform from the die. Write the sample identifi-
cation number on the preform using an appropriate marker that
will not effect the PTFE during sintering.
9.2.3 Sinter the preforms in accordance with Table 3 (see
Note 5).
must be followed very closely. If they are not followed, the crystallinity of 9.2.3.1 For SSG specimens use Procedure A.
the disks and the resulting physical properties will be markedly changed. 9.2.3.2 For ESG specimens use Procedure B.
Therefore, the use of a programmed oven is recommended for the most
precise sintering cycle control and the hood window shall be left down NOTE 6—Improved precision in SSG and ESG test results has been
during the entire sintering procedure, the latter being an important safety obtained with the use of an upright, cylindrical oven and an aluminum
consideration. sintering rack. The cylindrical oven has an inside diameter of 140 mm (5.5
9.2 Test Specimens for Standard Specific Gravity and Ther- in.) and an inside depth of 203 mm (8 in.) plus additional depth to
accommodate a 51-mm (2-in.) thick cover, and is equipped with suitable
mal Instability Index: heaters and controllers to sinter specimens in accordance with the
9.2.1 A cylindrical preforming mold, 29-mm (1.14-in.) in- procedures in Table 3. The rack, as shown in Fig. 2, allows preforms to be
ternal diameter by at least 76 mm (3 in.) deep, is used to placed symmetrically in the center region of the oven. Place six preforms
prepare the preforms. Clearance shall be sufficient to ensure on each of the middle oven rack shelves (if six or fewer preforms are to
escape of air during pressing. Place flat aluminum foil disks, be sintered, place them on the middle rack, filling in with “dummies” as
needed). Place “dummies” on the top and bottom shelves. Specimens must
normally 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) thick and 29 mm (1.14 in.) in be spaced evenly in a circle on each shelf, with none of them touching. An
diameter on both sides of the resin. The test resin shall be near oven load must be no less than 18 pieces including “dummies.” “Dum-
ambient temperature prior to molding (see Note 3). mies” are defined as normal 12-g specimens that have previously been
195
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
9.4 Conditioning Test Specimens:

9.4.1 For tests of tensile properties and all tests requiring the
measurement of specific gravities, condition the test specimens
in general accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618, with
the following deviations therefrom: (1) the aging period shall
be a minimum of 4 h immediately prior to testing, (2) the
laboratory temperature shall be 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F), and
(3) there shall be no requirement respecting humidity. The
other tests require no conditioning of the molded test speci-
mens.
9.5 Test Conditions:
9.5.1 Tests shall be conducted at the standard laboratory
temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F), unless otherwise
specified in the test methods or in this specification. This
deviation from the standard laboratory temperature is made
because of the necessity for maintaining test temperatures
above approximately 21°C (70°F). See Note 3 for additional
details. Since these resins do not absorb water, the maintenance
of constant humidity during testing is not required.
10. Test Methods

10.1 Melting Characteristics by Thermal Analysis:
10.1.1 Significance and Use—For PTFE resins that have
been melted prior to use, the melting peak temperature char-
NOTE 1—Aluminum plates tack welded to rods. acteristics of a resin provide important information about the
NOTE 2—All dimensions are in millimetres. thermal history of the material. Melting peak temperatures (see
FIG. 2 Sintering Rack for SSG Specimens Fig. 3) are used to determine conformance of a resin to the
melting peak temperature requirements in Table 1 of this
specification.
through the sintering cycle. “Dummies” must only be used for an 10.1.2 Apparatus—Use apparatus described in Test Method
additional two or three thermal cycles, due to eventual loss of thermal D4591.
stability and physical form. 10.1.3 Procedure—Measure melting peak temperatures in
9.2.4 Remove all flash from each specimen so that no air accordance with procedures given in Test Method D4591. An
bubbles will cling to the edges when the specimen is immersed initial melting peak temperature above the melting peak
in the solution for weighing during the standard specific gravity temperature obtained on the second and subsequent melting
and thermal instability index tests. It is recommended for this (defined as the second melting peak temperature) indicates that
section and during testing that cotton gloves be worn while the resin was not melted before the test. The second melting
handling test specimens. peak temperature occurs at about 327°C (621°F). The differ-
9.3 Test Disks for Stretching Void Index (SVI): ence between the initial and second melting peak temperatures
9.3.1 Mold the disk as in 9.1.1.
9.3.2 Screen 29 g of PTFE resin through a 2.00-mm (No.
10) sieve into the die. Adjust the lower plug to allow the resin
to be leveled by drawing a straightedge in contact with the top
of the die across the top of the die cavity. Insert the die in a
suitable hydraulic press and apply pressure gradually (see Note
4) until a pressure of 7 MPa (1015 psi) is attained. Hold this
pressure for 2 min, then increase the pressure to 14 MPa (2030
psi) and hold for an additional 2 min. Remove the disk from the
die. Write the sample identification number on the preform
using an appropriate marker that will not effect the PTFE
during sintering.
9.3.3 Sinter the preforms in accordance with Table 3,
Procedure A (see Note 5).
9.3.4 Remove all flash from those portions of these speci-
mens that will be used for determination of specific gravities so
that no air bubbles will cling to their edges when the specimens
are immersed in liquid during these tests. It is recommended
that cotton gloves be worn while handling test specimens. FIG. 3 Melting Characteristics by Thermal Analysis
196
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
is greater than 5°C (9°F). If peak temperatures are difficult to it with distilled water, placing a planar glass plate on top,
discern from the curves (that is, because the peaks are rounded drying the outside of the cup, and weighing. The net weight
rather than pointed) straight lines should be drawn tangent to shall be 250 6 0.5 g. The top and bottom faces of the
the sides of the peak. These lines intersect at the peak volumetric cup and the cup stand shall be machined plane and
temperature. Where more than one peak occurs during the parallel.
initial melting test, the presence of any peak corresponding to 10.2.2.5 Leveling Device—The leveler (see Fig. 6) shall be
the second melting peak temperature indicates the presence of affixed permanently to the table and adjusted so that the
some previously melted material. sawtooth edge of the leveler blade passes within 0.8 mm (0.031
10.2 Bulk Density: in.) of the top of the volumetric cup.
10.2.1 Significance and Use—Bulk density gives an indica- 10.2.2.6 Work Surface—The work surface for holding the
tion of how a resin performs during the filling of processing volumetric cup and leveler shall be essentially free from
equipment. PTFE resins tend to compact during shipment and vibration. The feeder, therefore, must be mounted on an
storage. Because of this tendency to pack under small amounts adjoining table or wall bracket.
of compression or shear, Test Method D1895 is not applicable 10.2.2.7 Balance—Balance, having an extended beam, with
to these resins. The procedure given in 10.2.2 through 10.2.5 a capacity of 500 g and a sensitivity of 0.1 g, or equivalent.
must be used to measure this property. 10.2.3 Procedure—Place the clean, dry volumetric cup on
10.2.2 Apparatus: the extended beam of the balance and adjust the tare to zero.
10.2.2.1 Funnel—A funnel arrangement as shown in Fig. 4. Select about 500 mL of the resin to be tested and place it on the
10.2.2.2 Feeder —A feeder with a No. 8 wire screen feeder screen. Put the cup in the cup stand and place the
placed over approximately the top two thirds of the trough. The assembly such that the distance of free-polymer fall from the
funnel shall be mounted permanently in the feeder outlet. feeder outlet to the top rim of the cup shall be 39 6 3 mm
10.2.2.3 Controller.
10.2.2.4 Volumetric Cup and Cup Stand (see Fig. 5)—The
volumetric cup shall be calibrated initially to 250 mL by filling
NOTE 1—Funnel Material: type 304 Stainless Steel 16 Gage (1.6-mm thickness).
FIG. 4 Details of the Funnel Used for the Determination of Bulk Density
197
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018

FIG. 5 Volumetric Cup and Cup Stand for the Determination of Bulk Density
NOTE 1—Base plate must be flat and parallel. Saw blade, when mounted, must be square to and parallel with base plate within 0.13 mm from end to
end. Height of saw blade must have 0.8 mm or less clearance between blade and assembled cup and cup stand (as indicated by phantom lines). Welded
construction where indicated. Material: as noted.
FIG. 6 Leveler Stand for the Determination of Bulk Density
198
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
(1.5 6 0.012 in.). Increased fall causes packing in the cup and 10.3.2.4 Freezer—Any commercial ice freezer. (A dry-ice
higher bulk density values. Set the controller so that the cup is chest may be used.)
filled in 20 to 30 s. Pour the sample on the vibrating screen and 10.3.3 Procedure:
fill the cup so that the resin forms a mound and overflows. Let 10.3.3.1 Place 50 6 0.1 g of the sample in an aluminum
the resin settle for about 15 s and then gently push the cup and pan, and cool the pan and contents to less than 10°C (50°F).
its stand beneath the leveler. Exercise care to avoid agitation of 10.3.3.2 Measure the tare weight of each of the sieves listed
the resin and cup before leveling. Weigh the resin to the nearest in 10.3.2.2. Place the conditioned sample on the top sieve of
0.1 g. the assembly and shake in the sieve shaker for 10 6 0.5 min.
10.2.4 Calculation—Calculate the bulk density as follows: The dewpoint temperature of the sieving room must be less
grams of resin 3 4 5 bulk density~ grams per litre! than the temperature of the conditioned sample so that water
will not condense on the sample during this test. Determine the
10.2.5 Precision and Bias—A precision statement for use weight of resin retained on each sieve.
with this procedure is under development. The procedure in
10.3.4 Calculation:
this test method has no bias because the value of bulk density
10.3.4.1 Calculate the net percentage of resin on each sieve
shall be defined only in terms of a test method.
as follows:
10.3 Particle Size:
net percentage on sieve Y 5 2 3 weight of resin in grams on sieve Y.
10.3.1 Significance and Use—The fabrication of PTFE res-
ins is affected significantly by particle (or agglomerate) size 10.3.4.2 Calculate the cumulative percentage of resin on
and size distribution. The average particle size of PTFE resins each sieve as follows:
is determined by fractionation of the material with a series of cumulative percentage on sieve Y 5 sum of net percentages
sieves. Fractionation is accomplished by mechanically shaking on sieve Y and sieves
the material in the assembly of sieves for a specified period. having numbers smaller than Y.
10.3.2 Apparatus: NOTE 7—Cumulative percentage on 500-µm (No. 35) sieve = net
10.3.2.1 Balance, capable of weighing to 60.1 g. percentage on 1.40-mm (No. 14) + net percentage on 1.00-mm (No.
10.3.2.2 Sieves, U.S. Standard Sieve Series, 203-mm (8-in.) 18) + net percentage on 710-µm (No. 25) + net percentage on 500-µm
diameter conforming to Specification E11. It is suggested that (No. 35) sieves.
the following sieve numbers (openings) be used: 1.40 mm (14), 10.3.4.3 Plot the cumulative percentage versus the sieve
1.00 mm (18), 710 µm (25), 500 µm (35), 355 µm (45), 250 µm opening size (or sieve number) on log-probability paper as
(60), and 180 µm (80). However, other configurations of sieves shown in the sample plot (see Fig. 7). The sieve numbers and
may be used to give equivalent results. sieve opening sizes in micrometres are indicated below the
10.3.2.3 Sieve Shaker—A mechanical sieve shaking device figure. Draw the best straight line through the points and read
capable of imparting uniform rotary and tapping action. the particle size at the 50 % cumulative percentage point (D50).
Sieve No. Sieve Opening, µm

14 1400
18 1000
25 710
35 500
45 355
60 250
80 180
FIG. 7 Log Probability Plot for Sieve Analysis
199
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
10.3.4.4 Calculate the particle size, average diameter, d50, as NOTE 10—When a group of samples is run at the same time, it is good
follows: practice to place the lids from the weighing dishes directly under their
corresponding dishes while the samples are drying in the oven. This
d 5 d 50~ micrometres! eliminates the possibility of introducing errors in the tare weights. Also,
overnight drying in a circulating air oven may be used if the data can be
10.3.5 Precision and Bias—The test precision is 63.2 % shown to be equivalent to those obtained with the above procedure.
(two sigma limits) for the combination of 710 + 500 + 355-µm
10.4.4 Calculation—Calculate the water content as follows:
(25 + 35 + 45) sieve fractions for a resin where this combina-
tion of sieves retains, on the average, 78 % of the sample. Since water content, % 5 ~ A 2 C ! / ~ A 2 B ! 3 100
there is no accepted reference material suitable for determining where:
the bias for this test procedure, no statement on bias is being
A = weight of resin, dish, and lid, g
made.
B = weight of dish and lid, g, and
10.3.6 Alternative methods for particle size are available. C = weight of resin, dish, and lid after drying, g.
Light Scattering Instruments/Light Defraction Instruments (see
ISO 12086-2, 8.6.4) and Electron Zone Sensing Instruments, 10.4.5 Precision and Bias—The precision of this test is
which is a resistance-variation tester, (see ISO 12086-2, 8.6.3) 60.0063 percentage points (two sigma limits). Since there is
are used as long as there is a direct correlation to the Particle no accepted reference material suitable for determining the bias
Size Analysis in 10.3 of this specification. for this test, no statement on bias is being made.
10.3.6.1 This alternative method is very dependent on 10.4.6 Alternative Method for Determination of Water Con-
particle shape and is only recommended for processes that are tent by Karl Fischer Reagent:
stable and that have regular spherical type shape particles. 10.4.6.1 Weigh 35 6 1 g of resin into a glass-stoppered
Also, it is recommended that each manufacturing processor do flask containing about 50 mL of pretitrated methanol. Shake to
an analysis to determine their own correlation. mix with a swirling motion for a few minutes. Titrate with
standardized Karl Fischer Reagent to a visual or electrometric
10.4 Water Content: end point.
10.4.1 Significance and Use—The presence of an excessive
amount of water in PTFE resin has a significant adverse effect 10.5 Standard Specific Gravity (SSG):
upon the processing characteristics of the resin and the quality 10.5.1 Significance and Use—The specific gravity of an
of products made using the resin. A sample of PTFE resin of article made from a PTFE resin is affected both by the
known weight is dried in a vacuum oven in a tared aluminum particular resin used and by the way the resin is processed.
weighing dish. When the resin is dry, it is removed from the Therefore, a test method that measures the specific gravity of
oven, placed in a desiccator, allowed to cool, and then an article prepared in a precisely defined way provides valuable
reweighed. Water content is calculated from the weight lost resin characterization data. The specific gravity of a specimen
during drying. of PTFE resin prepared in accordance with all of the require-
ments of 9.2.3.1 defines the SSG for that resin specimen.
NOTE 8—If volatiles other than water are suspected, use the alternative 10.5.2 Procedure:
method described in 10.4.6. 10.5.2.1 Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.2, the spe-
10.4.2 Apparatus: cific gravity of specimens prepared in 9.2.3.1.
10.4.2.1 Balance, capable of weighing to the nearest 0.0001 10.5.2.2 Make specific gravity determinations in accordance
g. with the procedures described in Test Methods D792, Method
10.4.2.2 Oven. A. Add two drops of a wetting agent to the water in order to
10.4.2.3 Aluminum Weighing Dishes, with lids. reduce the surface tension and ensure complete wetting of the
10.4.3 Procedure (see Note 8)—Wash the aluminum weigh- specimen.
ing dishes with water and rinse with acetone. When the acetone 10.6 Thermal Instability Index (TII):
has evaporated from the dishes, dry them thoroughly in an 10.6.1 Significance and Use—The TII gives an indication of
oven at 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), then store in a desiccator how a resin resists degradation during extended periods of
until ready for use. Obtain the tare weight, B, of an aluminum heating at sintering temperatures. This test method compares
weighing dish, plus lid, to the nearest 0.0001 g. Place 35 to 40 the SSG of a resin (determined in 10.5) to its extended specific
g of PTFE resin in the tared aluminum weighing dish and gravity (determined here). Specimens used to determine ESG
record the weight (including lid), A, to the nearest 0.0001 g are identical to those used to determine SSG, except for the
(see Note 9). Dry in an oven for two hours at 150°C (302°F), differences in thermal history described in 9.2.3. The specific
with the dish lid removed. Remove the dish from the oven, gravity of a specimen of PTFE resin prepared in accordance
replace the lid on the weighing dish, and allow to cool in the with all of the requirements of 9.2.3.2 defines the ESG for that
desiccator for at least 30 min. Reweigh the dish (plus the resin resin specimen.
and lid), C, and calculate the weight loss.
NOTE 9—Select one sample from each group of samples and run
duplicate moisture determinations on it. If the difference between the
duplicate results exceeds 0.01 percentage points, the entire group of
samples must be run over.
200
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
10.6.2 Procedure—Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.2, 10.7.2 Precision and Bias—A precision and bias statement
the specific gravity of specimens prepared in 9.2.3.2. for use with this procedure is under development and will be
10.6.3 Calculation—Calculate the thermal instability index included when it has been approved by the balloting process.
(TII) as follows: 10.8 Extrusion Pressure:
TII 5 ~ ESG 2 SSG! 3 1000 10.8.1 Significance and Use—Processing of the PTFE resins
10.7 Tensile Properties: covered by this specification normally involves “paste extru-
10.7.1 Procedure—Cut five tensile specimens from the disk sion” of a blend of the resin with a volatile liquid, as indicated
prepared in accordance with all of the requirements of 9.1, in 1.1. The pressure that must be applied to such a blend to
using the microtensile die described in Fig. 8. Determine the extrude it is affected by several processing conditions which
tensile strength in accordance with the procedures described in include the nature and amount of deformation imparted to the
Test Method D638, except that the initial jaw separation shall blend during extrusion (usually characterized by the reduction
be 22.0 6 0.13 mm (0.875 6 0.005 in.), and the speed of ratio), the type and amount of liquid used, and the extrusion
testing shall be 50 mm (2 in.)/min. Clamp the specimen with temperature. When such a blend is extruded under well-defined
essentially equal lengths in each jaw. Determine elongation at processing conditions, the pressure required to affect extrusion
break from the chart, expressed as a percentage of the initial (extrusion pressure) provides significant characteristic infor-
jaw separation. mation about the resin itself.
10.8.2 Apparatus Recommended apparatus:
10.8.2.1 Paste Extruder (Fig. 9)—One paste extruder that is
used is a vertically disposed, breech-loading extruder with a
32-mm (1.26 in.) inside diameter extrusion cylinder. The barrel
length is approximately 305 mm (12 in.), which is not critical
so long as it will hold enough lubricated resin to extrude for
about 5 min. The ram is 32 mm (1.26 in.) outside diameter,
with a ring groove near its free end to hold an O-ring that
makes a tight seal between the ram and extruder cylinder. The
extruder is equipped with devices for sensing and recording
pressure on the face of the ram. The range of the pressure
sensing device shall be greater than 70 MPa (10 000 psi).
Temperature-controlling equipment maintains the extruder at
30 6 1°C. A system (hydraulic or screw) drives the ram at a
speed of about 18 mm/min (0.7 in./min) to give an output rate
of 19 g/min on a dry-resin basis (about 23.5 g/min of lubricated
resin) during the extrusion pressure test. The extruder also has
a fast-speed drive (speed not precisely controlled) to run the
ram rapidly into the cylinder cavity prior to the extrusion
pressure test. The extruder-die assembly slides on tracks from
under the ram to allow easy access for loading and cleaning the
cylinder. An alternative muzzle-loaded paste extruder shall be
used which has a detachable die assembly. The die assembly is
detached, a preformed charge of resin is inserted up into the
cylinder and the die assembly is reattached.
10.8.2.2 Extrusion Dies (Fig. 10)—Interchangeable extru-
sion dies, each having 30° included angles, give the desired
reduction ratios when dimensioned as follows:
Reduction Ratio Die Orifice

(Inside Diameter), Land Length, Die Length,
mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
100 to 1 3.18 (0.125) 25.35 (0.998) 78.66 (3.0)
400 to 1 1.59 (0.0625) 4.78 (0.188) 61.06 (2.3)
1600 to 1 0.79 (0.0312) 0.38 (0.015) 58.15 (2.2)
NOTE 11—Reduction ratio in this specification is the ratio of the

cross-sectional area of the extruder cylinder to the cross-sectional area of
the die. This must not be confused with another definition wherein
reduction ratio is the ratio of the cross-sectional area of the extruder
cylinder to the cross-sectional area of the sintered extrudate.
10.8.2.3 Miscellaneous Apparatus—Equipment is needed
NOTE 1—All dimensions are in millimetres. for weighing, blending, conditioning (at 30°C) and preforming,
FIG. 8 Microtensile Die as well as extruded cleaning.
201
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 9 Paste Extruder for Determining Extrusion Pressure
10.8.3 Procedure: of lubricant. Shake the jar briefly to minimize the wetting of
10.8.3.1 Screen the dry resin through a 4.75-mm (No. 4) the jar wall with liquid.
sieve onto a clean, dry, lint-free sheet of paper. 10.8.3.4 Blend the mixture by placing the jar on rubber-
10.8.3.2 Transfer 200 6 0.5 g of the screened resin to a coated mill rolls and rolling it at 30 r/min for 25 6 5 min, by
clean, dry glass jar about 92 mm (3.625 in.) in diameter fastening the jar to a windmill type blender and blending for
(approximately 1-L capacity) having an airtight closure, or into 20 6 1 min, or by blending the mixture in the V-blender for
a V-blender of laboratory size. 15 6 5 min. If a V-blender has been used, drop the resin from
10.8.3.3 Determine the density of the lubricant, a kerosene- it into a jar of approximately 1-L capacity and seal the jar.
type hydrocarbon liquid. Determine the density at 25°C using 10.8.3.5 After blending, store the jar with its contents at
Test Method D4052, a commercial density meter that will give 30 6 1°C for a minimum of 2 h. A water bath has been found
four significant figures for the density, or a technically to be satisfactory. This enables the lubricant to diffuse to the
equivalent procedure. Calculate the mass of lubricant required interior of individual particles and surfaces not reached during
by multiplying the density by 60.00 mL. Add the calculated the blending process.
mass 60.01 g of the lubricant to the resin in the jar or blender. 10.8.3.6 Place the proper extrusion die for the desired
It is convenient to make this addition while the jar containing reduction ratio (given in 10.8.2.2) in the paste extruder.
the powder is on a balance that has a sensitivity at least as good 10.8.3.7 Resin Preform—To preform the resin for the
as the 60.01 g required for the test. Avoid wetting the walls of breech-loading paste extruder of 10.8.2.1, slide the extruder-
the blending vessel with the liquid as this impairs mixing. die assembly forward, mount a 32-mm (1.26-in.) inside diam-
When a jar is used the lid shall be taped in place to prevent loss eter extension tube about 610 mm (24 in.) in length at the
breech end of the extruder cylinder. Quickly pour the lubri-
cated resin through a funnel into the extension and force the
202
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
10.8.4 Precision and Bias—The test precision and bias are

to be determined by round-robin testing.
10.9 Stretching Void Index:
10.9.1 Significance and Use—This test method compares
the unstrained specific gravity (USG) of a resin to its strained
specific gravity (strained SG). The specific gravity of a
specimen of PTFE resin prepared in accordance with all of the
requirements of 9.3 defines the USG for that resin specimen.
The SVI gives one indication of the potential for induced void
content of a solid fabricated resin product in use. Such void
content may contribute to a susceptibility to the formation of
cracks and failures under conditions of extreme stretching and
stress or in some environments when stressed. Similar failures
have also been associated, at times, with improper processing
techniques.
10.9.2 Procedure:
10.9.2.1 Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.2, the spe-
cific gravity of specimens prepared in 9.3. This is the USG for
the specimen.
10.9.2.2 Cut tensile specimens from the disk prepared in 9.3
using the microtensile die shown in Fig. 8. Clamp the specimen
in a tensile testing machine with essentially equal lengths in
each jaw. The initial jaw separation shall be 12.5 6 0.1 mm
(0.5 6 0.005 in.). Strain the specimen at a constant rate of 5.0
mm (0.2 in.)/min until it breaks. This strain rate and initial jaw
separation yield a strain rate of 40 %/min, based on the original
Reduction Ratio Die Orifice (Diameter) Land Length Die Length gage length of the specimen. If elongation at break is less than
100 to 1 3.18 25.35 78.66 200 %, discard the result and repeat 10.9.2.2.
400 to 1 1.59 4.78 61.06
1600 to 1 0.79 0.38 58.15 10.9.2.3 Cut off a portion of the stretched part of the
specimen. Determine, in accordance with 10.5.2.2, the specific
NOTE 1—All dimensions are in millimetres. gravity of this strained specimen (strained SG).
FIG. 10 Extruder Die Assembly for Extrusion Pressure Apparatus 10.9.3 Calculation—Calculate the stretching void index
(SVI) as follows:
resin into the extruder cylinder with a tamping rod. Apply the SVI 5 ~ USG 2 strained SG! 3 1000
force with hand pressure and a very slow, even stroke. To
preform the resin for the muzzle-loading paste extruder of 11. Inspection
10.8.2.1, mount a 32-mm (1.26-in.) inside diameter preforming 11.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference to
tube about 610 mm (24 in.) in length with its cross section this specification shall be for conformance to the requirements
resting against a flat, smooth surface. Quickly pour the specified herein.
lubricated resin through a funnel into the tube and force the
resin down in the tube. The force may be applied with a 11.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
hydraulically controlled tamping device to compact the resin acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
with a slow, even stroke to a minimum of 690 kPa (100 psi) on inspection shall consist of the following:
the resin. Remove the preform from the preforming tube, insert 11.2.1 Bulk density,
the preform up into the cylinder of the extruder, and attach the 11.2.2 Particle size, and
die assembly. 11.2.3 Melting point.
10.8.3.8 Use the fast-speed drive to run the ram down into
11.3 Periodic check inspection with reference to a specifi-
the cylinder cavity. When the first bit of beading emerges from
cation shall consist of the tests for all requirements of the
the orifice, stop the descent of the ram.
material under the specification. Inspection frequency shall be
10.8.3.9 Immediately change to slow-speed drive, start the
adequate to ensure the material is certifiable in accordance with
pressure-recording system, and extrude the lubricated resin at a
Annex A1.
rate of 19.0 6 1.0 g/min (dry-resin basis).
10.8.3.10 Record the pressure developed at the face of the 11.4 A report of test results shall be furnished. The re-
ram in contact with the resin in the cylinder as a function of port shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance inspection for
time. The extrusion pressure is the average pressure required to the shipment and the results of the most recent periodic-
extrude the sample as measured between the third and fourth check inspection.
minutes of the extrusion.
203
SD-4895 ASME NM.3.1-2018
12. Certification 13.2 Package Marking—Shipping containers shall be

marked with the name of the resin, type, and quantity contained
therein.
13. Packaging and Package Marking 13.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
13.1 Packaging—The resin shall be packaged in standard Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
commercial containers so constructed as to ensure acceptance
by common or other carriers for safe transportation to the point 14. Keywords
of delivery, unless otherwise specified in the contract or order. 14.1 coagulated dispersion polytetrafluoroethylene; fluo-
ropolymers; polytetrafluoroethylene; PTFE
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract or order.
S1. Ordering Information—The purchase order should state

this ASTM designation and year of issue, and which type,
grade, and class is desired.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
204
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4895
APPENDIX
X1. EXPANSION TEST FOR EXTRUDED TUBING
X1.1 Significance and Use X1.3.3 When the extruder is ready for extrusion, unwrap the
X1.1.1 Processing of the PTFE resins covered by this preform and quickly insert it into the extruder cylinder over the
specification almost always includes extrusion of a blend of the guide tube. Attach the mandrel tip to the guide tube, then close
resin with a volatile liquid. The quality of the extrudate is the extruder cylinder and attach the die assembly.
affected by several processing conditions which include the X1.3.4 Proceed in accordance with 10.8.3.8 and 10.8.3.9
nature and amount of deformation imparted during extrusion, Pass the extruded tubing vertically downward through an
the type of resin, the type and amount of liquid used, and the electrically heated air oven designed to produce a higher
extrusion temperature. When the blend is extruded into a tube temperature in the lower half of the oven than in the upper half.
under well-defined processing conditions, characterization of The lubricant is vaporized in the upper half of the oven at about
the resultant tube using suitable test procedures provides 120 to 150°C (248 to 302°F). Adjust the temperature in the
significant characteristic information about the resin. lower half of the oven so that the tubing passing through it is
in the gel (completely transparent) for about 100 mm (4 in.). As
X1.2 Apparatus the tubing emerges from the oven it is allowed to cool in air,
X1.2.1 Use the extruder shown in Fig. 9 and described in and is then coiled on a suitable spool.
10.8.2.1 (or equivalent apparatus), except that a guide tube X1.3.5 Connect one end of the extruded tubing to a source
which extends through the center of the ram and into the die is of nitrogen that shall apply at least 345-kPa (50-psi) internal
attached to the hydraulic cylinder and a mandrel tip is screwed pressure to the tubing. Make sure that there is at least 15 m (50
onto this guide tube. The guide tube has an outside diameter of ft) of tubing. Clamp the free end of the tubing and push it
15 mm (0.59 in.), and the mandrel tip has an outside diameter through a heated glass tube having an inside diameter of 1.65
of 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) over a land length of 0.4 mm. When used mm (0.065 in.). Apply 345-kPa pressure to the PTFE tubing,
in combination with the 0.8-mm (0.031-in.) orifice given in and move the PTFE tubing through the heated glass tube at a
10.8.2.2, a reduction ratio of 1600 to 1 is produced. This setup rate that allows the PTFE tubing to reach 340°C (644°F) in the
will yield a sintered tube with an outside diameter of about last 75 to 100 mm (3 to 4 in.) of the glass tube (that is, the
0.76 mm (0.03 in.), and an inside diameter of about 0.4 mm. PTFE tubing becomes transparent). As the PTFE tubing
X1.2.2 Use the miscellaneous apparatus described in becomes transparent it expands against the inner surface of the
10.8.2.3. glass tube. If this does not occur, increase the nitrogen pressure
slowly until expansion occurs.
X1.3 Procedure
X1.3.1 The procedure is as given in 10.8.3, except that X1.3.6 As the expanded tubing emerges from the glass tube
preforming is done in a separate mold shell having a 31.6-mm allow it to cool in air and coil it up on a suitable spool. If a flaw
(1.245-in.) inside diameter, and fitted with a central die rod appears and the expanded tubing loses nitrogen pressure,
having the same diameter as the extruder guide tube and clamp off the tubing downstream of the flaw and continue.
suitable end plugs. Pour the lubricated resin into one end of the X1.3.7 The expanded tubing is inspected visually for flaws
vertical preform mold, and tap the side of the mold shell to
and stretch marks.
level the resin. Place the top mold plug in the mold, and apply
a minimum pressure of 690 kPa (100 psi) to the resin. NOTE X1.1—This test is not appropriate for all resins.
X1.3.2 Remove the preform from the mold and wrap in
aluminum foil for 4 h. This is to provide uniform distribution
of lubricant within the preform.
205
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4976
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE PLASTICS

MOLDING AND EXTRUSION MATERIALS
SD-4976
(Identical with ASTM D4976-12a except for revisions in paras. 3.2, 9.2, and section 13, additional requirements in
207
SD-4976 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials
INTRODUCTION
This specification is not intended for the selection of materials, but only as a means to call out
plastic materials to be used for the manufacture of parts. The selection of these materials is to be made
by personnel with expertise in the plastics field where the environment, inherent properties of the
materials, performance of the parts, part design, manufacturing process, and economics are
considered. This specification does not specify the source of the resin to be used for the fabrication
of any given article.
1.1 This specification provides for the identification of of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
polyethylene plastics molding and extrusion materials in such practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
a manner that the supplier and the user can agree on the tions prior to use.
acceptability of different commercial lots or shipments. The 1.6 For information regarding plastic pipe materials see
tests involved in this specification are intended to provide Specification D3350. For information regarding wire and cable
information for identifying materials in accordance with the materials, see Specification D1248.
groups, classes, and grades covered. It is not the function of NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
this specification to provide specific engineering data for
design purposes. 2. Referenced Documents
1.2 Other requirements necessary to identify particular char- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
acteristics important to specialized applications shall be agreed D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
upon between the user and the supplier, by using the suffixes Insulating Materials
given in Section 1.3. D568 Method of Test for Burning and/or Extent and Time of
1.3 Ethylene plastic materials, being thermoplastic, are Burning of Flexible Plastics in a Vertical Position (With-
reprocessable and recyclable (see Note 1). This specification drawn 1991)
allows for the use of those ethylene plastic materials, provided D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
that any specific requirements as governed by the producer and D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
the end user are met. Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
NOTE 1—See Guide D7209 for information and definitions related to
recycled plastics. D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
1.4 The values stated in SI units are regarded as standard.
als
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains to the test D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
method portion only, Section 12, of this specification. This tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
208
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4976
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics 2.2 Military Standard:
by Extrusion Plastometer MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion tion by Attributes
Materials for Wire and Cable NOTE 3—According to the DOD, “MIL-STD-105E, dated 10 May
D1499 Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Expo- 1989, is hereby canceled without replacement” (1995).
sures of Plastics 2.3 DOT Standard:
D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302, Flammability
Gradient Technique of Interior Materials
D1531 Test Methods for Relative Permittivity (Dielectric
3. Terminology
Constant) and Dissipation Factor by Fluid Displacement
Procedures 3.1 Definitions—For definitions of technical terms pertain-
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- ing to plastics used in this specification, see Terminology D883
tics and Terminology D1600.
D1693 Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of 3.2 Historical usage and user group conventions have re-
Ethylene Plastics sulted in inconsistent terminology used to categorize and
D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In- describe polyethylene resins and compounds. The following
tended for Outdoor Applications terminology is in use in ASTM specifications pertaining to
D2839 Practice for Use of a Melt Index Strand for Deter- polyethylene:
mining Density of Polyethylene 3.2.1 Specification D1248:
D2951 Test Method for Resistance of Types III and IV 3.2.1.1 Type (I, II, III, IV) = density ranges (same,
Polyethylene Plastics to Thermal Stress-Cracking (With- respectively, as Classes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in Specification SD-
drawn 2006) 4976).
D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit- 3.2.1.2 Class (A, B, C, D) = composition and use.
tings Materials 3.2.1.3 Category (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) = melt index ranges (same as
D3801 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning Grade in Specification SD-4976).
3.2.1.4 Grade (E, J, D, or W followed by one or two digits)
Characteristics of Solid Plastics in a Vertical Position
= specific requirements from tables.
3.2.2 Specification D3350:
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
3.2.2.1 Type (I, II, III) = density ranges (same as Types I, II,
als
and III in Specification D1248 and Classes 1, 2, and 3 in
D4329 Practice for Fluorescent UV Exposure of Plastics Specification SD-4976).
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic 3.2.2.2 Class = a line callout system consisting of “PE”
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets followed by six cell numbers from Table 1 plus a letter (A, B,
D4804 Test Method for Determining the Flammability Char- C, D, E) denoting color and UV stabilizer.
acteristics of Nonrigid Solid Plastics 3.2.2.3 Grade = simplified line callout system using “PE”
D4883 Test Method for Density of Polyethylene by the followed by density and slow crack growth cell numbers from
Ultrasound Technique Table 1.
D4986 Test Method for Horizontal Burning Characteristics 3.2.3 Specification SD-4976:
of Cellular Polymeric Materials 3.2.3.1 Group (1, 2) = branched or linear polyethylene.
D6360 Practice for Enclosed Carbon-Arc Exposures of Plas- 3.2.3.2 Class (1, 2, 3, 4) = density ranges (same,
tics respectively, as Types I, II, III, and IV in Specification D1248).
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and 3.2.3.3 Grade (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) = melt index ranges (same as
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products Category in Specification D1248).
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
4. Classification
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E1354 Test Method for Heat and Visible Smoke Release 4.1 Unreinforced polyethylene plastic materials are classi-
Rates for Materials and Products Using an Oxygen Con- fied into groups in accordance with molecular structure. These
sumption Calorimeter groups are subdivided into classes and grades as shown in
F1473 Test Method for Notch Tensile Test to Measure the Table PE (Basic Property Table).
Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
and Resins
TABLE PE Basic Requirement of Polyethylene Plastics

Flexural Modulus at
Flow Rate, D1238, Tensile Stress at Yield, Nominal Strain at
Group Description Class Description Grade 2 % Strain, D790, min,
g/10 min D638, min, MPa Break, D638, min, %
MPa
1 Branched 1 low density 1 >25 8 70 100
... 2 >10 to 25 8 90 125
0.910–0.925 3 >1 to 10 8.5 100 125
209
SD-4976 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE PE Basic Requirement of Polyethylene Plastics

Flexural Modulus at
Flow Rate, D1238, Tensile Stress at Yield, Nominal Strain at
Group Description Class Description Grade 2 % Strain, D790, min,
g/10 min D638, min, MPa Break, D638, min, %
MPa
... 4 >0.4 to 1 9.5 300 125
... 5 to 0.4 9.5 400 150
... 0 ... ... ... ...
2 medium density 1 >25 8 40 200
... 2 >10 to 25 11 50 200
>0.925–0.940 3 >1 to 10 11 70 200
... 4 >0.4 to 1 11 200 250
... 5 to 0.4 12 400 300
... 0 ... ... ... ...
0 ... 0 ... ... ... ...
2 Linear 1 low density 1 >25 10 300 300
... 2 >10 to 25 10 300 325
0.910–0.925 3 >1 to 10 10 300 350
... 4 >0.4 to 1 10 400 350
... 5 to 0.4 12 500 400
... 0 ... ... ... ...
2 medium density 1 >25 14 90 500
... 2 >10 to 25 14 100 500
>0.925–0.940 3 >1 to 10 14 100 550
... 4 >0.4 to 1 15 200 600
... 5 to 0.4 19 400 600
... 0 ... ... ... ...
3 high density 1 >25 17 10 400
... 2 >10 to 25 17 50 400
>0.a940–0.960 3 >1 to 10 18 200 450
... 4 >0.4 to 1 19 400 500
... 5 to 0.4 20 600 600
... 0 ... ... ... ...
4 high density 1 >25 24 10 500
... 2 >10 to 25 24 10 600
>0.960 3 >1 to 10 25 30 800
... 4 >0.4 to 1 28 300 900
... 5 to 0.4 28 400 1000
... 0 ... ... ... ...
0 0 ... 0 ... ... ... ...
Cell Table A Detail Requirements for Polyethylene Plastics

Designation Cell Limits
Property
Order Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile Stress at Yield, Test Method D638, MPa, min unspecified 4 8 12 16 21 30 35 ... specify value
2 Nominal Strain at Break, Test Method D638, %, min unspecified 25 50 200 400 600 800 1000 ... specify value
3 Secant Flexural Modulus at 2 % Strain, D790, MPa, min unspecified 50 100 200 400 600 800 1000 ... specify value
4 Thermal stress-crack resistance, D2951, hours without unspecified 24 48 96 168 ... ... ... ... specify value
cracking, min
5 Environmental stress-crack resistance, D1693, min F50, h unspecified 24 48 96 168 336 672 1008 ... specify value
Cell Table B Detail Requirements for Polyethylene Plastics

Designation Cell Limits
Property
Order Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile Stress at Yield, D638, MPa, min unspecified 4 8 12 16 21 30 35 ... specify value
2 Nominal Strain at Break, D638, %, min unspecified 25 50 200 400 600 800 1000 ... specify value
3 Secant Flexural Modulus at 2 % Strain, D790, MPa, min unspecified 50 100 200 400 600 800 1000 ... specify value
4 Thermal stress-crack resistance, D2951, hours without unspecified 24 48 96 168 ... ... ... ... specify value
cracking, min
5 Slow Crack Growth Resistance, PENT-Test Method F1473, h, unspecified 0.3 1 3 10 30 100 300 ... specify value
min
NOTE 4—An example of this classification system is as follows: The the five digits comprising the cell numbers for the property
designation PE 112 would indicate PE, polyethylene as found in Termi- requirements in the order they appear in Cell Table A.
nology D1600, 1 (group) branched, 1 (class) low density, 2 (grade) >25
melt index. 4.2.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include the
4.2 Cell Tables A or B shall be used to specify the physical range of properties available in the existing materials, users
property requirements that shall be shown by a five-digit should not infer that every possible combination of the
designation. The designation shall consist of the letter A and properties exist or can be obtained.
210
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4976
NOTE 5—It is recognized that some high-density polyethylene plastics the test specimen ceases to burn before flaming or glowing
of very high molecular weight have densities slightly less than 0.960, yet reaches the 125 mm gage mark.
in all other respects they are characteristic of Class 4 materials. Similarly,
there are other polyethylene plastics of very high molecular weight having
5.1.2.3 The burning characteristics in a vertical orientation
densities slightly less than 0.941 that, in all other respects, are more of polyethylene plastics shall be assessed by Test Method
characteristic of Class 2 than of Class 3 materials. D3801. A plastic shall be classified V0, V1 or V2 as indicated
NOTE 6—Use the following terms in describing polyethylene plastics: in Appendix X1 of Test Method D3801.
Class 1 (0.910 to 0.925) = low density, 5.1.2.4 The burning characteristics in a vertical orientation
Class 2 (>0.925 to 0.940) = medium density,
Class 3 (>0.940 to 0.960) = high density, of nonrigid polyethylene plastics that, due to specimen thick-
Class 4 (>0.960) = high density, and ness or lack of rigidity, would distort or shrink when tested
Although Classes 3 and 4 cover two ranges of density, both are described using Test Method D3801shall be assessed by Test Method
by the term “high density.” D4804. A plastic shall be classified VTM0, VTM1 or VTM2 as
indicated in Appendix X1 of Test Method D4804.
5. Suffixes
5.1.2.5 G = Flammability requirements as designated by
5.1 When using the call-out for the materials covered by this the following digits: as designated by the following digits:
specification, the following suffixes can be used for specific First digit
requirements of the material for the application intended. In 0 = To be specified by user.
general, the suffix letter indicates the requirement needed; the 1 = Rigid
2 = Foam
first number (digit) indicates the test condition, and the second 3 = Non-rigid
number (digit) indicates the specimen requirement. The suf- Second Digit
fixes are as follows: 0 = To be specified by user.
1 = Meets the classification requirements for HB when tested per D 635
5.1.1 E = Electrical requirements as designated by the 2 = Meets the classification requirements for HBF when tested per D4986
following digits: 3 = Meets the classification requirements for V0 when tested per D3801
4 = Meets the classification requirements for V1 when tested per D3801
5 = Meets the classification requirements for V2 when tested per D3801
First Digit 6 = Meets the classification requirements for VTM0 when tested per D4804
0 = To be specified by user. 7 = Meets the classification requirements for VTM1 when tested per D4804
1 = Specimens preconditioned 40 h at 23°C and 50 % relative humidity, 8 = Meets the classification requirements for VTM2 when tested per D4804
then 14 days in distilled water at 23 ± 1°C.
Second Digit 5.1.2.6 The above call-out table reflects changes due to the
0 = To be specified by user. withdrawal of D568 in 1991. For reference, the original
1 = Volume resistivity, permittivity, and dissipation factor meet property
limits as shown as follows. These are electrical limits usually applied
call-out table can be be found in Appendix X1 of this
to unreinforced polyethylene plastics when control of their electrical document. The table in Appendix X1 is included only for
properties is required. reference and shall not be used for future specification of
materials.
Electrical Properties: 5.1.2.7 If requested, the heat release rate and ignitability in
a horizontal orientation of polyethylene plastics shall be
Test
Methods
assessed when tested using Test Method E1354.
Permittivity, max D1531 2.30 5.1.3 W = Weatherability requirements as designated by the
Dissipation factor, max D1531 0.001 following digits:
Volume resistivity, min D257 1 × 1015
V-cm
Water immersion stability D1531 shall meet the dielectric First Digit
constant and dissipation 0 = To be specified by user.
factor requirements 1 = Specimens exposed to xenon-arc type light source, in accordance with
Practice D2565, Type BH. Specimens shall be Test Method D638, Type IV
tensile bars.
5.1.2 Flammability requirements for polyethylene plastics 2 = Specimens exposed to enclosed carbon-arc type light source, in accor-
dance with Practice D6360. Specimens shall be Test Method D638, Type
shall be assessed by one or more of the following small scale IV tensile bars.
flammability tests: 3 = Specimens exposed to fluorescent-UV-condensation type light source, in
5.1.2.1 The rate of burning and/or extent and time of accordance with Practice D4329. Specimens shall be Test Method D638,
Type IV tensile bars.
burning in a horizontal orientation for polyethylene plastics 4 = Specimens exposed to filtered open-flame carbon arc type light source in
shall be assessed by Test Method D635. A plastic shall be accordance with Practice D1499. Specimens shall be Test Method D638,
classified HB if: (a) the rate of burning in the test does not Type IV tensile bars
Second Digit
exceed 40 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens 0 = To be specified by user.
having a thickness of 3.0 – 13 mm, or b) the rate of burning 1 = 200-h exposure.
does not exceed 75 mm per minute over a 75 mm for 2 = 500-h exposure.
3 = 1000-h exposure.
specimens having a thickness less than 3.0 mm, or c) the test 4 = 2000-h exposure.
specimen ceases to burn before the 100 mm reference mark.
5.1.2.2 The rate of burning and/or extent and time of
burning in a horizontal orientation for foamed polyethylene
plastics shall be assessed by Test Method D4986. A foamed
plastic shall be classified HBF if: (a) the rate of burning in the
test does not exceed 40 mm per minute over a 100 mm span b)
211
SD-4976 ASME NM.3.1-2018
NOTE 7—The exposure duration shall be that necessary to produce a 10.2 The specimen type and dimensions shall comply with
measurable change in the property evaluated for a product known to those described in the test method section. Die-cut specimens
perform poorly in the application of interest. It will assure that the
duration is of sufficient length to identify an unacceptable material.
are recommended; however, machine-cut specimens are ac-
ceptable.
5.1.3.1 The exposed specimens shall not exhibit surface
changes (such as, dulling and chalking) or deep-seated changes 11. Conditioning
(such as, checking, crazing, warping, and discoloration). The 11.1 Conditioning—Once specimens are molded, they shall
tensile strength after exposure must be no less than 50 % of the be moved to a standard laboratory atmosphere or a controlled
original. laboratory atmosphere. For natural unfilled polyethylene plas-
5.1.4 Z = Other special requirements (for example, internal tics the controlled laboratory atmosphere shall be 23 6 2°C.
mold release agent) not covered by existing call-out capabili- Test specimens, 7 mm or under in thickness, shall be condi-
ties can be assigned by the user. These shall be spelled out in tioned for a minimum of 40 h immediately prior to testing. For
detail and identified in sequence, that is, 01 UV-stabilized, 02 filled and reinforced polyethylene plastics or polyethylene
special color, and 03 etc. plastic blends, which contain a hydrophilic co-monomer,
5.2 Additional suffixes will be added to this specification as pigment, or modifier the specimens shall be conditioned in a
test methods and requirements are developed or requested, or standard laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 %
both. relative humidity (see Practice D618, Procedure A). For all
5.3 Additional suffixes are listed in Table 3 of Classification materials to be conditioned for electrical testing, conditioning
D4000. These use the two-letter, three-digit suffix system as shall comply with the requirements of the standard test
established for the classification system for plastic materials. methods for electrical testing. In all cases the laboratory shall
report both the temperature and humidity conditions during the
6. Basic Requirements conditioning period.
6.1 Basic requirements from property or cell tables, as they 11.2 Test Conditions—Natural unfilled polyethylene plastics
apply, are always in effect unless these requirements are shall be tested in a controlled laboratory atmosphere of
superseded by specific suffix requirements, that always take 23 6 2°C. For filled and reinforced polyethylene plastics and
precedence. polyethylene plastic blends, which contain a hydrophilic co-
monomer, pigment, or modifier the specimens shall be condi-
7. Chemical Composition
tioned in a standard laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C and
7.1 The plastic composition shall be uniform and shall 50 6 10 % relative humidity. For all materials to be tested for
conform to the requirements specified herein. The color and electrical properties, the laboratory shall comply with the
form of the material shall be as agreed upon between the requirements of the standard test methods for electrical testing.
supplier and the user. Specification changes due to the effects In all cases the laboratory shall report both the temperature and
of colorants should be noted by both parties and, when humidity conditions during testing.
necessary, covered by suffixes.
11.3 Dispute—In cases of dispute, conditioning and testing
8. Other Requirements shall be conducted in accordance with Procedure A of Practice
D618.
8.1 Test specimens for the various materials shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in Table PE and Cell Tables A 12. Test Methods
and B, and to suffix requirements as they apply.
12.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this specifica-
8.2 Observed or calculated values obtained from analysis, tion in accordance with the ASTM methods as they apply,
measurement or test, shall be rounded in accordance with the unless otherwise stated in this specification.
rounding method in Practice E29 to the nearest unit in the last 12.1.1 Flow Rate—Test Method D1238, using Condition
right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified 190°C/2.16 kg unless otherwise directed, (see Note 8). Make
limiting value. The value obtained is compared directly with duplicate determinations on the material in the form of powder,
the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconformance granules, or pellets. No conditioning is required.
with the specification is based on this comparison.
NOTE 8—Although the flow rate of polyethylene plastics can be
9. Sampling measured under any of the conditions listed for it under 6.2 of Test Method
D1238, only measurements made at Condition 190°C/2.16 kg are identi-
9.1 A batch or lot shall be considered as a unit of manufac- fied as “melt index.”
ture and can consist of a blend of two or more production runs This method of test serves to indicate the degree of uniformity of the
of the same material. flow rate of the polymer of a single manufacturer as made by an individual
process and is not, by itself, indicative of the degree of uniformity of other
9.2 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the properties. Additionally, uniformity of flow rate among various polymers
requirements of Annex A1. of various manufacturers as made by various processes does not, in the
absence of other tests, indicate uniformity or equivalency of other
10. Specimen Preparation properties and vice versa.
The melt viscosity of polyethylene plastics, in common with that of
10.1 Unless otherwise specified, test specimens shall be most high polymers, is non Newtonian, that is, dependent on the rate of
compression molded in accordance with Annex A1, Procedure shear. The degree of departure from Newtonian behavior depends on the
C of Practice D4703. nature and molecular constitution of the individual sample. Additional
212
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4976
characterization of the sample can be obtained if other conditions are used. Test Method F1473 at 80°C and at 2.4 MPa stress. Specimen
Especially recommended as an adjunct to Condition 190°C/2.16 kg is shall be prepared in accordance with the procedures described
Condition 190°C/10.0 kg or Condition 190°C/21.6 kg.
in Test Method F1473. A specimen with a nominal thickness of
12.1.2 Density—Test Method D1505 or alternative methods 10 mm shall be used. Test at least four specimens in case of a
referenced in 2.1 providing equivalent accuracy. Perform dispute.
duplicate density determinations using two specimens taken 12.1.7 Thermal Stress Crack Resistance, Test Method
from the same molding or one specimen taken from each of D2951—Specimen dimensions shall be in accordance with Test
two moldings. Method D2951. Each specimen being nominally 127 by 6.4 by
12.1.3 Tensile Stress at Yield, Nominal Strain at Break, Test 1.27 mm [5 by 0.25 by 0.05 in.]
Method D638—The speed of grip separation shall be 500 mm
12.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
[20 in.]/min for specimens of densities of 0.925 g/cm3 or less
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
and 50 mm [2 in.]/min for densities greater than 0.925 g/cm3.
inspection shall consist of:
Specimens shall conform to the dimensions given for Type IV
12.2.1 Density
in Test Method D638 with thickness of 1.9 6 0.2 mm
12.2.2 Flow Rate
[0.075 6 0.008 in.]. Percentage elongation at break shall
12.2.3 Other tests (see Clauses 4 and 5) as required by
include the cold-drawing distance. Test results for specimens
end-use or contract requirements.
that break outside the gage marks after extensive cold drawing
need not be discarded unless the break occurs between the 13. Inspection
contact surfaces of a grip.
13.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference
12.1.4 Secant Flexural Modulus at 2 % Strain—Test Meth-
to a specification based on this classification system shall
ods D790, using Procedure B, with a 51-mm [2-in.] span, and
be for conformance to the requirements specified herein.
testing speed of 12.7 mm/min [0.5 in./min]. Test each 3.2 by
12.7-mm [0.125 by 0.5-in.] specimen flatwise and calculate the 13.2 Lot acceptance shall be based on verification of the
average value of the secant modulus at 2 % strain in the outer conformance of the lot to the requirements identified by the
fibers. material designation and otherwise specified in the purchase
12.1.5 Environmental Stress-Crack Resistance, Test Method order (see 5.1 and 5.2) and verified by tests made in accordance
D1693—The materials resistance shall meet the minimum with the directions given in 12.1.
requirement shown for the appropriate cell classification (in 13.3 Periodic check inspection with reference to a specifi-
Cell Table A) when tested in accordance with Test Method cation based upon this classification system shall consist of the
D1693. Polyethylene materials with densities less than or equal tests for all requirements of the material under the specifica-
to 0.925 shall be tested in accordance with Test Method D1693, tion.
Condition A. Polyethylenes with densities greater than 0.925 13.4 A report of the test results shall be furnished. The
shall be tested in accordance to Test Method D1693, Condition report shall consist of results of the lot acceptance in-
B. spection for the shipment and the results of the most recent
NOTE 9—The specimen dimensions and notch depths are different for periodic-check inspection.
these two conditions.
14. Certification
Igepal concentration for all testing is 100%. F50 shall be
reported. 14.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
NOTE 10—F50 is the time required for failure of 50 % of the specimen 15. Packaging and Package Marking
tested in accordance with the graphical method described in Test Method
D1693. 15.1 For packing, packaging, and package marking, the
NOTE 11—There are environmental concerns regarding the disposal of provisions of Practice D3892 apply.
Nonylphenoxy poly(ethyleneoxy) ethanol (CAS 68412-54-4), for
example, Igepal CO-630. Users are advised to consult their supplier or 16. Keywords
local environmental office and follow the guidelines provided for the
proper disposal of this chemical
16.1 molding and extrusion materials; polyethylene
12.1.6 Slow Crack Growth Resistance, Test Method
F1473—The average failure time from two test specimens shall
meet the minimum requirement shown (in Cell Table B) for the
appropriate cell classification when tested in accordance with
213
SD-4976 ASME NM.3.1-2018
When applicable and as agreed upon between the user and the supplier, the following supplementary
items are to be considered as part of this specification.
S1. Approval S3.2 Inspection and certification of the material supplied

S1.1 Material submitted by a new supplier must be ap- with reference to a specification based on this classification
proved by the user. Material or test specimens submitted by the system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
supplier and intended for evaluation shall be accompanied by herein.
the supplier’s laboratory test report. S3.4 Lot acceptance shall be based on verification of the
S1.2 New Sources—The user has the option to temporarily conformance of the lot to the requirements identified by the
accept shipment based on the supplier’s certification. material designation and otherwise specified in the purchase
S2. Infrared Spectrophotometry or Thermal Analysis, or order and verified by tests made in accordance with the
Both directions given in clause 12.1 of this document.
S2.1 At the option of the user, infrared or thermal analysis, S3.5 Periodic check inspection with reference to a specifi-
or both can be conducted on material/parts supplied to this cation based upon this classification system shall consist of the
specification. The curves established for initial approval shall tests for all requirements of the material under the specifica-
constitute the reference standard and shall be kept on file at the tion. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to ensure the
user’s laboratory. All samples shall produce curves that corre- material is certifiable in accordance with S3.6.
spond to the reference standard within agreed upon tolerances S3.6 Certification shall be that the material was manufac-
when tested under the same conditions as those specified on the tured by a process in statistical control, sampled, tested, and
master set of curves. inspected in accordance with this classification system, and
S2.2 In the event such tests are to be designated as require- that the average values for the lot meet the requirements of the
ments to be tested by the supplier, this must appear on the part specification (line callout).
drawing or purchase contract, or both. S3.7 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
S3. Quality Assurance Provisions for Government/Military requested. The report shall consist of results of the lot
Procurement acceptance inspection for the shipment and the results of the
S3.1 In the absence of MIL-STD-105E, the following most recent periodic-check inspection.
guidance shall be applied.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
214
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-4976
APPENDIX
X1. FLAMMABILITY REQUIREMENTS REFERENCING WITHDRAWN TEST METHODS
X1.1 The following table was extracted from the original 3 = When burned vertically in accordance with Test Method D568, the mate-
rial:
subsection 5.1.2 and references D568, which was withdrawn in (a)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming combustion for
1991 and is considered obsolete. more than 30 s after either application of the test flame;
First digit (b)Does not have a total flaming combustion time exceeding 250 s for the
0 =
To be specified by user. 10 flame applications for each set of five specimens;
1 =
Product is 3.05-mm thickness, min. (c)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming or glowing com-
2 =
Product is 1.47-mm thickness, min. bustion up to the holding clamp;
3 =
Product is 0.71-mm thickness, min. (d)Does not have any specimens that drip flaming particles that ignite the
4 =
Product is 0.38-mm thickness, min. dry absorbent surgical cotton located 305 mm [12 in.] below the test
5 =
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302. specimen;
Second Digit (e)Does not have any specimens with glowing combustion that persists for
0 = To be specified by user. more than 60 s after the second removal of the test flame.
1 = When burned horizontally in accordance with Test Method D635, a mate- 4 = When burned vertically as described in Test Method D568, the material:
rial: (a)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming combustion for
more than 10 s after either application of the test flame;
(a)Does not have a burning rate exceeding 38.1 mm/min over a 76.2-mm
span for specimens of 3.05 to 12.7-mm thickness; or (b)Does not have a total flaming combustion time exceeding 50 s for the
10 flame applications for each set of five specimens;
(b)Does not have a horizontal burning rate exceeding 76.2 mm/min over a
76.2-mm span for specimens of less than 3.05-mm thickness; or (c)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming or glowing com-
bustion up to the holding clamp;
(c) Ceases to burn, horizontally, before the 102-mm reference mark.
(d)Does not have any specimens that drip flaming particles that ignite the
2 = When burned vertically in accordance with Test Method D568, the mate-
dry absorbent surgical cotton located 305 mm [12 in.] below the test
rial:
specimen;
(a)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming combustion for
(e)Does not have any specimens with glowing combustion that persists for
more than 30 s after two applications of the test flame:
more than 30 s after the second removal of the test flame.
(b)Does not have a total flaming combustion time exceeding 250 s for 10
5 = When burned vertically in accordance with Test Method D568, the mate-
flame applications for each set of five specimens;
rial:
(c)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming or glowing com-
(a)Does not have any specimens that burn with flaming or glowing com-
bustion up to the holder clamp;
bustion for more than 60 s after the fifth flame;
(d)Has specimens that drip flaming particles that ignite the dry absorbent
(b)Does not have any specimens that drip particles.
surgical cotton placed 305 mm [12 in.] below the test specimen;
6 = Has a burn rate less than 100 mm/min.
(e)Does not have any specimens with glowing combustion that persists for
more than 60 s after the second removal of the test flame.
215
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM FOR COPOLYMERS OF

VINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (VDF) WITH OTHER
FLUORINATED MONOMERS
SD-5575
(Identical with ASTM D5575-07(R13) except for revisions in section 11, additional requirements in section 12 and
Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 13, 14, and 15.)
217
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Classification System for

Copolymers of Vinylidene Fluoride (VDF) with Other
Fluorinated Monomers
1. Scope 1.5 The minimum specification properties are established by

1.1 This classification system covers both developing prop- this classification system. Additional specification properties,
erty designations and specifications for thermoplastic compo- based on the designation properties cited, can be established by
sitions consisting of vinylidene fluoride (VDF) polymers the resin supplier and customer.
modified with other fluoromonomers and property-enhancing 1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
additives. The other fluoromonomers include one or more of standard.
the following: hexafluoropropylene (HFP), tetrafluoroethylene 1.7 The property tests are intended to provide information
(TFE), and chlorotrifluoroethylene (CTFE). The additives are for specifications of modified VDF-copolymer compositions. It
those that improve its flame resistance, processing, or physical is not the purpose of this classification system to provide
properties. However, these additives are not normally consid- engineering data for design purposes.
ered to be reinforcing. This classification system covers ther-
moplastic compositions supplied in pellet or powder forms. NOTE 1—Although the values listed in Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table
4, and Table 5 are necessary to include the range of properties available in
1.2 A designation or specification applies only to the virgin existing materials, they are not to be interpreted as implying that every
polymers prepared from vinylidene fluoride (>50 weight %) possible combination of the properties exists or can be obtained. It is
with one or more of the following comonomers: possible for a user or designer, using Tables 1-5, to call out property
relationships that are physically impossible to occur in a copolymer made
hexafluoropropylene, tetrafluoroethylene, and chlorotrifluoro-
using current technology.
ethylene. Some polymers contain additives to enhance certain NOTE 2—Many of these polymers exhibit polymorphism. The type and
properties. extent of crystalline structure will vary with the thermomechanical history
of the sample. Properties vary based on the technique used to prepare the
1.3 This system constitutes a line callout as a means of specimens.
designating and specifying properties of VDF-based copoly-
mers. At least four of the designated properties are used to 1.8 Test methods used in this classification system can result
define a polymer’s specification. Specification criteria from in the incidental production of hazardous materials. Modified
international documents can be used if their criteria match VDF polymer fluoroplastics melt between 90 and 182°C (194
designation properties currently used by this classification and 359°F) and are thermally stable up to about 350°C (662°F),
system. This classification system is not intended for the or somewhat higher, depending on the composition.
selection of materials. (Warning—Evolution of corrosive, colorless, and toxic hydro-
gen fluoride can occur under certain conditions.)
1.4 The manufacturer of the virgin resin shall establish the
designation of a resin based on the property value criteria in 1.9 This standard does not purport to address all of the
this classification system. safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. See Warning in 1.8
and Section 10 for specific hazards statements.
NOTE 3—Many, but not all of the codes and specifications found in this
classification system are also in ISO 12086-1 and ISO 12086-2.
218
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
TABLE 1 Codes for the Information on Fluoropolymers Used in D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
Data Block 1 Insulating Materials
Code Meaning D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
A modified
B block copolymer
H homopolymer D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
K copolymer tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
L graft polymer
R random copolymer D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
Z other D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
TABLE 2 Code-Letters Used in Data Block 2 (Intended tics
Application or Method of Processing, Essential Properties, D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Additives, or Other Information
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Code Position 1 Code Positions 2 to 8
A adhesives C colored
Plastics (Oxygen Index)
B blow molding D powder D3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluo-
B1 extrusion blow molding D2 free-flowing ride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials
B2 injection blow molding D3 not free-flowing
C calendaring E expandable
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
E extrusion F special burning characteristics thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
G general use F1 nonflammable Differential Scanning Calorimetry
H coating F2 flame retarded
H1 powder coating F4 reduced smoke emission
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
H2 dip coating G granules Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
K cable and wire coating G1 pellets D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
L monofilament extrusion L light and weather stabilized
M molding (injection/transfer) M nucleated
Q compression molding N natural (no color added) Heats of Transitions of Fluoropolymers by Differential
R rotational molding N1 suitable for food contact Scanning Calorimetry
V thermoforming N2 high purity
X no indication P impact modified D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
Y textile yarns, spinning R mold release agent Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
Z other S lubricated D5740 Guide for Writing Material Standards in the Classi-
T transparent
T1 translucent fication Format
T2 opaque IEEE/ASTM S1–10 Standard for Use of the International
W1 improved chemical resistance System of Units (SI)
Y increased electrical conductivity
Z antistatic
2.2 IEC and ISO Standards:
IEC 60093 Recommended Methods of Test for Volume and
TABLE 3 Designatory and Specification Properties for Data Block
Surface Resistivities of Electrical Insulating Materials
3 IEC 60250 Recommended Methods for the Determination of
Position NumberA Property
the Permittivity and Dielectric Dissipation Factor of
1 B
melt temperature Electrical Insulating Materials at Power, Audio and Radio
B
2 melt flow rate/melt viscosity Frequencies Including Metre Wavelengths
B
3 tensile strength and modulus
4 tensile elongation ISO 291 Plastics—Standard Atmospheres for Conditioning
5 B
density and Testing (Practice D618)
6 electrical ISO 293 Plastics—Compression Molding Test Specimens
7 flammability by oxygen index (OI)
8 specimen preparation method and type of Thermoplastic Materials (Practice 4703)
A
Property test information for Positions 1 to 7 are given in Section 8.
ISO 472 Plastics—Vocabulary (Terminology D883)
B
Positions 1, 2, 3, and 5 are mandated as the minimum specification properties. ISO 527/1,2,3 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties
(Test Method D638)
ISO 1043/1 Plastics—Symbols—Part 1: Symbols for Basic
Polymers and Their Special Characteristics (Terminology
2. Referenced Documents D883)
2.1 ASTM Standards: ISO 1043/2 Plastics—Symbols—Part 2: Fillers and Rein-
NOTE 4—For ASTM and ISO documents, the equivalent or a compa-
forcing Materials (Terminology D883)
rable method is listed after each citation in parentheses. ISO 1133 Plastics—Determination of the Melt Mass-Flow
D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit- Rate (MFR) and the Melt Volume-Flow Rate (MVR) of
tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation Thermoplastics (Test Method D1238)
ISO 1183 Plastics—Methods for Determining Density and
219
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Date Block 3

Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4
Melt Viscosity/Melt-Flow Rate Tensile Strength Tensile Elongation
Melt Temp-
Code Tm,° C Melt-Flow Yield
Load, Vis- era- Modulus,
Code Rate, Code Strength, Code Yield, % Break, %
kg cosity, ture, MPa
g/10 min MPa
Pa/sA °C
a <20 a <0.1 <250 a <15 <500 a <5 <50
b 20 to <30 b 0.1 to< 0.2 0.325 >250 b 15 to <20 500 to< 800 b 5 to <10 50 to <100
c 30 to <40 c 0.2 to <0.5 1.20 >500 c 20 to <25 800 to< 1200 c 10 to <15 100 to <150
d 40 to< 50 d 0.5 to <1.0 2.16 >100 d 25 to< 30 1200 to <1600 d 15 to <20 150 to <200
e 50 to <60 e 1.0 to <2.0 3.80 >1500 e 30 to< 35 1600 to <2000 e 20 to <25 200 to <250
f 60 to <70 f 2.0 to <5.0 5.00 >2000 230 f 35 to< 40 2000 to< 3000 f 25 to <30 250 to <300
g 70 to <80 g 5.0 to <10 10.00 >2500 125 g 40 to< 45 3000 to< 4000 g >30 300 to <350
h 80 to< 90 h 10 to < 20 12.50 >3000 h 45 to< 50 4000 to <6000 h 350 to <400
i 90 to < 100 i 20 to <50 21.60 >3500 i 50 to< 55 >6000 i 400 to <500
j 100 to< 110 j $50 31.60 j 55 to< 60 j 500 to <600
k 110 to< 120 k k 60 to <65 k 600 to< 800
l 120 to< 130 l l $65 l >800
m 130 to <140 m m m
n 140 to <150 n n n
o 150 to <160 o o o
p 160 to <170 p p p
q 170 to <180 q q q
r 180 to <190 r r r
s 190 to <200 s s s
t 200 to <210 t t t
u u u u
v v v v
w w w w
x x x x
y y y y
z not specified z not specified z not specified z not specified
A
1 Pa/s = 10 P.
TABLE 5 Codes for Filler and Physical Form of Materials for Use 3. Terminology
in Data Block 4
3.1 Definitions:
Code Material Code Form/Structure
B boron B beads, spheres, balls 3.1.1 copolymer—a polymer derived from more than one
C carbon C chips, cuttings species of monomer.
CG graphite D powder
E clay F fiber 3.1.2 fluoroplastic—a plastic based on polymers made with
G glass G ground monomers containing one or more atoms of fluorine, or
K calcium carbonate H whisker
M mineral, metal K knitted fabric copolymers of such monomers with other monomers, the
Ma aluminum oxide L layer fluoro-monomer(s) being in the greatest amount by mass.
Mb bronze M mat (thick)
MC calcium fluoride N nonwoven (fabric) 3.1.3 monomer—a low-molecular-weight substance consist-
Md molybdenum disulfide P paper ing of molecules capable of reacting with like or unlike
Me stainless steel S roving molecules to form a polymer.
P mica T scale, flake
Q silica V cord 3.1.4 thermoplastic—a plastic that repeatedly can be soft-
R aramid W veneer
S synthetic, organic X not specified
ened by heating and hardened by cooling through a tempera-
T talcum Y yarn ture range characteristic of the plastic, and that in the softened
X not specified Z others state can be shaped by flow into articles by molding or
Z none
extrusion.
3.2.1 amorphous—noncrystalline or devoid of regular struc-
Relative Density of Non-Cellular Plastics (Test Methods ture.
D792) 3.2.2 contamination—the presence of nonpolymer particu-
ISO 4589 Plastics—Determination of Flammability By Oxy- late and debris in the polymer, excluding any property-
gen Index enhancing additives.
ISO 12086-1 Fluoropolymer Dispersion and Molding and
Extrusion Materials—Part 1: Designation and Specifica- 3.2.3 fluoropolymer—synonymous with fluoroplastic.
tion 3.2.4 melt-processible—capable of being processed by, for
ISO 12086-2 Fluoropolymer Dispersion and Molding and example, injection molding, screw extrusion, and other opera-
Extrusion Materials—Part 2: Preparation of Test Speci- tions typically used with thermoplastics.
mens and Determination of Properties
220
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
Position 5 Position 6 Position 7 Position 8

Specific Gravity, Electrical a-c d-c Electric Vol- Limiting Oxygen
Code Code Loss Code Code Specimen Type
g/cm3 Dielectric Constant ume Index
a <1.6 a >10E3 a <40 a D638 Type I
b 1.6 to <1.7 b 10E3 to 10E12 b 40 to <50 b D638 Type II
c 1.7 to< 1.8 c >10E12 c 50 to <60 c D638 Type III
d 1.8 to <1.9 d d 60 to< 70 d D638 Type IV
e 1.9 to< 2.0 e e 70 to <80 e ISO 527 Type 1A
f 2.0 to <2.1 f f 80 to <90 f ISO 527 Type 1B
g 2.1 to< 2.2 g <0.0012 g >90 g ISO 527 Type 6A
h 2.2 to< 2.3 h <3.0 <0.0014 h h ISO 527 Type 7A
i 2.3 to <2.4 i 3.0 to< 3.1 <0.0016 i i ISO 12086/1 Fig. 1
j 2.4 to <2.5 j 3.1 to <3.2 <0.0018 j j D638 Type MI
k k 3.2 to< 3.5 <0.0020 k k D638 Type MII
l l 3.5 to <4.0 <0.0022 l l D638 Type MIII
m m 4.0 to< 4.5 <0.0024 m m
n n 4.5 to <5.0 <0.0026 n n
o o 5.0 to< 5.5 <0.0028 o o
p p 5.5 to <6.0 <0.0030 p p D1708
q q 6.0 to <6.5 <0.0035 q q
r r 6.5 to <7.0 <0.0040 r r
s s 7.0 to <8.0 <0.0060 s s
t t 8.0 to <9.0 <0.0080 t t
u u 9.0 to <10 <0.0100 u u
v v 10 to <11 <0.0300 v v
w w 11 to <12 <0.1000 w w
x x 12 to <14 >0.1000 x x
y y >14 y y
z not specified z not specified not specified z not specified z
3.2.5 polymorphism—the ability of a material to form two

or more different but stable crystalline forms. Designation and Classification System
Description Block
3.2.6 thermomechanical history—the mechanical and ther- | Identity Block |
mal exposure that a material experiences before testing. | Individual Item Block |
Data Data Data Data Data
3.3 Abbreviations: Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5
3.3.1 CTFE—chlorotrifluoroethylene (1-chloro-1,2,2- 4.1.1 The designation system consists of the following:
trifluoroethylene).
4.1.1.1 An optional description block, reading
3.3.2 DMAC—dimethylacetamide. “Thermoplastics,”
3.3.3 DSC—differential scanning calorimetry. 4.1.1.2 An identity block comprising the ASTM standard
3.3.4 HFP—hexafluoropropylene (1,1,2,3,3,3-hexaflu- number, and
oropropylene). 4.1.1.3 An individual item block.
3.3.5 MFR—melt-flow rate. (1) The individual item block is subdivided into five data
3.3.6 MV—melt viscosity. blocks that include the information in 4.2 – 4.6. Data Block 5
is used when a designation is converted to a specification. See
3.3.7 PVDF—poly(vinylidene fluoride).
Section 7 for more details.
3.3.8 TFE—tetrafluoroethylene (1,1,2,2-tetrafluoro- (2) The blocks shall be separated from each other by
ethylene). commas. If a data block is not used, this shall be indicated by
3.3.9 VDF—vinylidene fluoride (1,1,-difluoroethylene). doubling the separation sign, that is, by two commas (,,).
3.3.10 VDF/CTFE—vinylidene fluoride/chlorotriflu- 4.2 Data Block 1—This data block identifies the fluoropo-
oroethylene copolymer. lymer by its abbreviation from the list in 3.3 (additional terms
3.3.11 VDF/HFP—vinylidene fluoride/hexafluoropro- are listed in ISO 12086-1, 2, or Terminology D1600). The
penecopolymer. abbreviation is followed by a hyphen and a one-letter code
3.3.12 VDF/TFE—vinylidene fluoride/tetrafluoroethylene giving more information about the polymer, using the codes
copolymer. from Table 1.
3.3.13 VDF/TFE/HFP—vinylidene fluoride/tetrafluoro- 4.3 Data Block 2:
ethylene/hexafluoropropene copolymer. 4.3.1 This block can indicate up to eight items of informa-
tion coded by letters as specified in Table 2. Position 1 gives
4. Classification and Designation information about intended application or method of process-
4.1 The classification and designation system of the poly- ing. Positions 2 through 8 provide up to seven items that can
mers is based on the following standardized pattern taken from use codes from Table 2 to indicate the polymer’s form as well
ISO 12086-1: as specific special characteristics.
221
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
4.3.2 If only one letter is given (for example, E), it must with the principles of Test Method D638 or ISO 527 modified
apply to Position 1. Whenever there is an indication of by details given in 8.9 or ISO 12086-2. Table 4 provides the
properties, etc., in Positions 2 to 8, a code in Position 1 is codes to use for each range of tensile strength and modulus,
required. The code “X” indicates that no other letter code is and percentage elongation at yield and break. Order for
appropriate. An alphabetical order is recommended if more Positions 3 and 4 are as follows:
than one code letter is used in Positions 2 to 8. Position 3 Order Position 4 Order
NOTE 5—Selecting the application or processing method for Position 1 1st = tensile yield 1st = tensile-yield elongation
of Data Block 2 must be done carefully. Many polymers are capable of 2nd = tensile break 2nd = tensile-break elongation
more than one application or method of processing (for example, 3rd = tensile modulus
extrusion (E) and molding (M) resins must be coded “general use” (G)).
Coding for special methods of processing must be reserved for polymers
4.4.5 Density (Relative Density, Specific Gravity) (Position
only designed for the application. 5)—Density shall be determined in accordance with the prin-
ciples of Test Methods D150 or ISO 12086-2. The cell codes
4.4 Data Block 3: are listed in Table 4.
4.4.1 Data Block 3 is used as the designation or general 4.4.6 Electrical Properties (Position 6)— Electrical proper-
description of the fluoropolymer’s properties. The property ties for d-c and a-c currents shall be determined by Test
values are presented by code letters in seven of eight positions Methods D150, D257, or their ISO equivalents. The cell codes
within Data Block 3. Each position represents a specific are listed in Table 4. Order for Position 6 is as follows:
property listed in Table 3. Table 4 lists the code letters
Position 6 Order
corresponding to the various property values. The values are
determined by the methods cited in Section 8. At least four of Position 1 = resistivity
the seven properties are specification properties. Position 8 Position 2 = frequency (listed as the exponent of the power of ten)
Position 3 = dielectric constant
cites specimen preparation methods when the designation is Position 4 = dissipation factor
converted to a specification. Positions 5 to 7, 8 to 10, 11 to 13, ... (repeat of 2 to 4 for each frequency cited)
4.4.1.1 Each position shall contain one or more code letters, 4.4.7 Flammability Properties (Position 7)—Flammability
depending on the property cited. The positions are separated by properties shall be determined by oxygen index (OI) values
a hyphen (-). Use of an asterisk (*) or question mark (?) before using Test Method D2863 or ISO 4583. The cell codes are
the code letters denotes that property as a specification prop- listed in Table 4.
erty. 4.4.8 Specimen Preparation and Type (Position 8)—This
4.4.1.2 The resin manufacturer shall assign the codes in position is used only when a designation is converted to a
Data Block 3, based on test results from Table 4. If test values specification to describe the molded specimen type and its
lie on, or on either side of, a cell limit because of manufactur- preparation. Section 9 provides information on preparing
ing tolerances, the resin manufacturer shall state which cell compression-molded specimens. Cell codes are listed in Table
will designate. 2 and Table 4. Order for Position 8 is as follows:
NOTE 6—Properties other than those in this classification system or do Position 8 Order
not have standard test methods are outside of the property focus of the
1st = molding method (from Table 2, Position 1)
document scope (for example, comonomer ratios).
2nd = tensile bar type and method (Table 4)
4.4.2 Melting Endotherm Peak Temperature (Position 1)— NOTE 7—Using specimen preparation method and type cited in Position
Melting endotherm peak temperature shall be determined in 8 allows the supplier and customer to monitor polymer properties while
accordance with the principles of Test Methods D3418 and minimizing the effects of specimen preparation.
D4591. Semicrystalline polymers shall use melting endotherm 4.5 Data Block 4—Data Block 4 is used to site the type
peak temperature as a designatory property. Cell codes and (Position 1) and form (Position 2) of fillers or other materials
ranges are given in Table 4. added to the fluoropolymer. Letter codes listed in Table 5 are
4.4.3 Melt-Flow Rate or Melt Viscosity (Position 2)—Melt used to indicate the type and form used (supplemental codes
viscosity (MV) shall be determined using Test Method D3835. can be found in ISO 1043/2). The nominal content, by weight
Melt-flow rate (MFR) shall be determined in accordance with percent, is noted by arabic numerals after Position 2 to the
Test Method D1238 or ISO 1133, using test conditions selected nearest 1 %. Additive contents below 2 % need not be speci-
from Table 4. The melt viscosity or the melt-flow rate is fied. For designation clarity, a hyphen (-) is used to separate
indicated in Data Block 3 by the cell code and ranges in material type codes. When a material is present in more than
accordance with Table 4, followed by the codes for tempera- one form, a plus sign ( + ) is used to separate the form codes.
ture and load for MFR and shear rate for MV also included in
Table 4. Order for Position 2 is as follows: 4.6 Data Block 5:
4.6.1 Data Block 5 is used to denote changes in the values
Position 2 Order
of a property when the designation is converted to specifica-
1st = MFR tion. The type of changes would be the following:
2nd = MFR load 4.6.1.1 To cite the alternate property value range when a (?)
3rd = MV
4th = Temperature is used in Data Block 3. Where more than one (?) is cited, the
value ranges shall be listed in order of their occurrence.
4.4.4 Tensile Strength Properties (Positions 3 and 4)—
Tensile-strength properties shall be determined in accordance NOTE 8—It is recommended that any ranges smaller than designated by
222
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
Table 4 codes be greater than the precision and bias for the test method Data Block 3 Position Property
that measures the property.
1 melt temperature
4.6.1.2 To cite a current ASTM or other standard specifica- 2 melt-flow rate or melt viscosity, or both
tion for the polymer (see 4.7 for restrictions). 3 tensile strength and modulus
4.6.1.3 A combination of 4.6.1.1 and 4.6.1.2. 5 density
7.1.2 Specification Using Designation Ranges:
4.7 Designation and Specification Restrictions:
7.1.2.1 Example (see Appendix X2):
4.7.1 Data Block 5 of the specification call-out cannot cite
A VDF/CTFE copolymer, a general-use grade, sold as granules, and
properties beyond the scope of this classification system. In having the following (specification properties are in boldface type):
other words, specification criteria or properties from other (1) A melting point of 165°C,
specifications that conflict with this classification system’s (2) An MV of 1500 Pa/s when tested at 230°C at 100 s−1,
(3) A tensile strength yield of 28 MPa; break strength not cited;
scope are not allowed. modulus of 800 MPa,
(4) Elongation yield of 9 %; break of 450 %,
NOTE 9—Some specifications cite properties that are either not detect- (5) Density between 1.78,
able or use test methods not available to most customers. Therefore, (6) Electricals of:
specification property values or results shall be able to be determined by Volume resistivity greater than 2.3 E14Ω,
a user without a priori knowledge of the polymer’s manufacturer, Dielectric constant at 1 kHz at 10.1; at 10 kHz at 9.3; 1 MHz at 7.3,
polymerization process, or any other unique finishing process. Dissipation factor at 1 kHz at 0.021; at 10 kHz at 0.031; at 1 MHz at
0.15,
4.7.2 A commercial grade of polymer shall not have mul- (7) OI at 53, and
tiple designations for Data Block 2. The application choice (8) Tested using compression-molded specimens using ISO 527 Type-6A
tensile bars.
shall be broad enough for a variety of the applications to which Designation and specification where each designatory property is desired
it can be applied. as part of the specification with the specification limits equal to the cell limits
4.7.3 An alternate specification property range in Data is as follows:
Block 5 shall not be greater than the original designation-code ASTM D5XXX, VDF/CTFE-K, GG,*P-*ZZE-*DZC-BI-*C-
C3VU4UVSXY-C-*QG,Z,, ASTM D5XXX, VDF/CTFE-K,
range from Table 4 and either the preceding or following code. GG,*P-*ZZE-*DZC-BI-*C-C3VU4UVSXY-C-*QG, Z,,
In other words, if a property code is normally “D,” the new
7.1.3 Specification Using Alternate Property Ranges:
range could encompass values or ranges from Code “C and D”
7.1.3.1 When the values given in the cell tables are not
or “D and E.” The new values cannot encompass a range cited
satisfactory for specification purposes, indicate this situation
by Codes “C to E” or greater.
by inserting a question mark in Data Block 3 at the beginning
4.7.4 At no time shall a designation for a commercial grade
of the destination cell code and the specification range given in
have more than one designation for Data Blocks 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Data Block 5.
If the code values need to be modified from those cited in Table
7.1.3.2 Example (see Appendix X3):
4, the changes shall be done by use of a (?) and listed in Data
A modified VDF/HFP copolymer that is processed by extrusion, with
Block 5. reduced-burning characteristics and smoke emissions. The resin is marketed
as pellets, contains a lubricant, and is opaque. The additive level is less than
5. General Requirements 2 %. Its properties are as follows (specification properties are in boldface
type):
5.1 The material shall be ordered by the manufacturer’s (1) A melting point of 143°C,
(2) An MV between 1300 and 1700 Pa/s when tested at 230°C at 100
trade name and corresponding copolymer line callout and the −1
s ,
necessary suffix properties to define the material. (3) A tensile strength yield of 24 MPa; break not cited; modulus of
1000 MPa,
5.2 The material shall be of uniform composition and free of (4) Elongation yield of 12 %; break of 350 %,
foreign matter to a contamination level agreed upon between (5) Density of 1.79,
the purchaser and the seller. (6) Electricals not cited.
(7) OI greater than 80,
5.3 Adequate statistical sampling shall be considered an (8) Tensile specimens are compression-molded and Test Method
D638, Type I, and
acceptable alternative. (9) The melt-viscosity range encompasses two ranges.
Designation and specification is as follows:
6. Example of a Designation
ASTM D5XXX, VDF/HFP-A, EFF4G1ST2, *N-*ZZ?E-*CZC-CH-
6.1 The following example is for VDF/HFP fluoropolymer *C-ZZ-*C-QA, Z, ?1300–1700,
material for general-purpose molding with a designation of: 8. Property Determination Methods
8.1 The following subsections of Section 8 cite test methods
7. Specifications for Fluoropolymers
used to determine polymer-property values of code levels from
7.1 Designation Conversion to Specification: Table 4 for Data Block 3 of a designation or specification line
7.1.1 A designation is converted into a specification by call-out. When a test value normally varies between two code
preceding 4 or more property codes in Data Block 3 with an levels, the manufacturer shall designate the code levels. Sev-
asterisk and adding the specimen preparation codes in Data eral properties are tested using molded specimens. Section 9
Block 3, Position 8, from Table 2 and Table 4. presents a procedure to prepare compression-molded speci-
7.1.1.1 Four property codes, cited by Data Block 3 mens. Injection molded specimens are allowed, but due to
positions, that must be included in a specification are as stress effects on many properties, compression molding of
follows: specimens is preferred.
223
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
8.2 Melt Temperature—The copolymers peak melting points Tensile modulus shall use a strain rate of 2 % of the previous
are determined using Test Methods D4591 or D3418 using strain rate (0.5 mm/mm/min or 0.013 in./in./min). The property
DSC. The sample size is 10 6 1 mg. The sample is heated, values of the resin shall be determined as the average of results
cooled, and reheated over a temperature range from − 20 to from at least five specimens.
220°C at a rate of 10°C/min. The sample is held at the upper
temperature for 5 min before cooling. The second heating NOTE 10—When test equipment cannot test at a 2 % strain rate for the
smaller test bars, a higher strain rate (less than 5 %) is allowed.
endotherm peak value shall be used. Occasionally multiple
peaks are observed. The temperature of the tallest peak shall be 8.4.2 Elongation is determined as the percent change in
reported as the melting point. specimen length during the test, based on the original gauge
8.3 Melt-Flow Rate and Melt Viscosity: length. This value can be determined by either cross-head
8.3.1 Melt-Flow Rate—The melt-flow rate (MFR) shall be separation or by use of an extensometer.
determined using Test Method D1238 or ISO 1133 at 230°C for 8.4.3 Compression molded specimens are preferred (see
all resins whose melt point is above 100°C. Lower melt-point Section 9), but injection-molded specimens or specimens cut
resins shall use a test temperature of 125°C. from extruded sheet are allowed. Dies or mold cavity-
8.3.2 Melt Viscosity—The melt-viscosity value at 100 s−1 at dimensions to cut or mold specimens shall match the required
230°C shall be determined from a shear-rate viscosity curve of specimen dimensions and tolerances.
four or more points ranging from less than 50 s−1 to greater
NOTE 11—The different test bar shapes have three basic types with
than 500 s−1 shear rate. For polymers with melt points greater minor variations. Unfortunately, these differences can affect the test
than 110°C, a test temperature of 125°C shall be used. The values. For this reason Position 8 in Data Block 3 is used when a
rheometer die shall have an entrance angle of 60° (cone angle designation is changed to a specification. Examples of the three basic
of 120°) and a capillary L/D ratio of 15. The sample shall be shapes are as follows:
pellets or pieces cut from molded or extruded forms. Strips Large: D638 Type I or ISO 527 Type 1A (50-mm gauge)
about 6 mm wide by 76 mm long are easily handled. Medium: ISO 527 Type 6A or Test Method D638 Type IV (25-mm gauge)
Small: ISO 12086-2 Figure 1 (22-mm gauge)
8.4 Tensile Properties:
8.4.1 Tensile properties, except modulus, shall be tested in NOTE 12—Due to the molded-in stress and orientation, injection-
molded or samples cut from extruded sheet are subject to breaking outside
accordance with Test Method D638 or ISO 527 at a strain rate of the gauge region and show low (and possibly variable) elongation
of 25 mm/mm/min (1 in./in./min). The strain rate is the ratio of compared to compression-molded specimens. Some samples exhibit strain
the cross-head speed divided by the specimen-gauge length. hardening. This effect can result in variable break properties.
224
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
8.5 Specific Gravity—The specific gravity shall be deter- tests. Die-cutting is the preferred method of preparing specimens. The
mined by Test Methods D792 using two test specimens cut cutting edges shall be sharp and free from any nicks or other defects that
could cause a dimensional defect in the specimen.
from a compression-molded sample. With this test, care must
be exercised to eliminate all air bubbles attached to the 10. Handling
specimens upon immersion. Dipping the specimens in a very
dilute solution (less than 0.1 weight %) of a surfactant will 10.1 As with any synthetic resin, it is advisable to wear a
minimize the problem. dust mask when handling large quantities of powder grades to
prevent ingestion.
8.6 Electrical Properties:
8.6.1 Specimen Type: 10.2 The Material Safety Data Sheets of the fluoropolymer
8.6.1.1 The electrical tests are determined on three grade must be reviewed to determine if there is any special-
specimens, each 100 mm in diameter and 0.12 to 0.25 mm handling information.
(0.005 to 0.010 in.) in accordance with IEC 250, Test Methods
11. Inspection
D150, and Test Method D257.
8.6.2 Volume Resistivity—The d-c volume resistivity shall 11.1 Inspection of the material supplied under this clas-
be measured using Test Method D257 or IEC 93. Cell codes sification system or specification shall be for conformance
and ranges are listed in Table 4. to the requirements specified herein.
8.6.3 Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor—The a-c 11.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
dielectric constant and dissipation factor shall be determined acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
by Test Methods D150. The testing shall be done at the inspection shall consist of melt-flow rate, melt viscosity, tensile
following frequencies: 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 0.1 MHz, and 1 MHz. and elongation at break.
Codes for dielectric constant and dissipation factor are listed in 11.2.1 Those tests that ensure process control during manu-
Table 4. The code used for each frequency shall be the first facture as well as those necessary to ensure certifiability in
integer of the base 10 log of the frequency (for example, 1 accordance with Annex A1.
kHz = 3; 1 MHz = 6). 11.2.2 The four minimum lot-acceptance tests are melt
8.7 Limiting Oxygen Index (LOI)—Limiting oxygen index is temperature, melt flow rate/melt viscosity, tensile strength and
determined by Test Method D2863. For formulations that modulus, and density as listed in Table 3.
extinguish before the 3-min burn time that defines the LOI 11.3 A lot is defined as one production run or a uniform
value at oxygen levels above 95 %. In this case, the LOI value blend of two or more production runs.
is the highest oxygen level used.
11.4 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
NOTE 13—If a column with a restricted opening is used, the top of the specified for all requirements of the material under this
specimen shall be positioned at least 40 mm below the opening. classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
9. Preparation of Compression-Molded Specimens ensure that the material is certifiable in accordance with Annex
A1.
9.1 Molding Conditions:
9.1.1 Compression-molded sheets can be prepared by Prac- 11.5 A report of the test results shall be furnished. The
tice D4703 using a “picture frame” mold. The resin form can report shall consist of the results of the lot-acceptance
be pellets, molded preforms, or powder. The temperature shall inspection for the shipment and the results of the most re-
be 230°C for all resins with a melt point greater than 110°C. cent periodic-check inspection.
For resins with a lower melt point, use 125°C. Where possible, 12. Certification
cooling shall be done under pressure either by slow cooling
(Method A or B) or quench cooling (Method C). It is
recommended that an inert mold-release sheet (less than 0.007
13. Packaging, Packing, and Marking
in.) of aluminum, polyimide, or PTFE be used.
9.1.2 The ram forces are used based on the size of the 13.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the purchaser
specimen area. The force adjustment exerts an approximate and the seller, the packing, packaging, and marking provisions
pressure of 0.25 kN/cm2 (360 lb/in.2) of specimen area. of Practice D3892 shall apply to this classification system.
NOTE 14—Powder samples tend to entrap air and cause bubbles in the 14. Precision and Bias
specimen when compression molded. Such specimens are not suitable for
any test in this classification system. Use molded preforms or densified 14.1 The precision and bias statements of the ASTM test
powder to eliminate bubble formation. methods referenced herein apply to the specific tests required
9.2 Specimen Preparation—Test specimens can be molded in this classification system.
directly by a shaped mold or cut from a molded sheet. The
dimensions of shaped molds can vary due to mold-shrinkage 15. Keywords
effects. Cutting specimens from a molded sheet is preferred. 15.1 fluoropolymers; line callout; plastics; poly(vinylidene
NOTE 15—The specimen edge will affect performance in mechanical fluoride) copolymers
225
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
226
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
APPENDIXES
X1. FORM TO DEVELOP DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATION CODE
Specification
Test/Parameter Actual Lot Data Data Block Data Table Code Used Other Comments
YN
Polymer abbreviation Y-mandated No. 1–2 Section 3.3
Polymer type Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1
Application/process and Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1
special characteristics
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Properties
Melt temperature °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 * Test Method D4591
MFR g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 * Test Method D1238
Load kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 * Test Method D1238
Melt viscosity Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 * Test Method D3835
Temperature °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 *
Tensile strength:
Yield MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a * Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c * Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 * Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6 Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Flammability (OI) Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 2-1
Specimen type (above 2 %) Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4.8
Additives type Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Alternate:
Property range No. 1 Y if used
Method specification Y If used
Designation code: ASTM
D5 XXX
227
SD-5575 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X2. DEVELOPMENT OF DESIGNATION FOR 7.1.2.1
Specification
YN
Polymer abbreviation VDF/CTFE Y-mandated No. 1-2 Section 3.3 VDF/CTFE
Polymer type copolymer Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1 K
Application/process and general Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1 Gn
special characteristics granules Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 G
natural Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 N
Properties
Melt temperature 168 °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 *P Test Method D4591
MFR ... g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 Z Test Method D1238
Load ... kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 Z Test Method D1238
Melt Viscosity 1500 Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 *E Test Method D3835
Temperature 230 °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 *F
Tensile strength:
Yield 28 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a *D Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break ... MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Z Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus 800 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield 9 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a B Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break 450 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 I Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density 1.78 g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 C Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity >2.4E14 Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c C Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 1K Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 3
Dielectric constant 10.1 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a V Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.021 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 2 10K Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 4
Dielectric constant 9.3 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.031 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b V Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 3 1M Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 6
Dielectric constant 7.3 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a S Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.15 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Flammability (OI) 53 Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 C Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method compression Y as specified DB 3-8 name Q
Specimen type (above 2 %) 527—Type 6a Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4. G
Additives type none Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1 Z
Alternate:
Method specification Y if used
Designation code: ASTM D5XXX VDF/CTFE-K, GGN, *P-*ZZEF-*DZC-BI-*C-C3VU4VU6SU-C-QG, Z, ,
228
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-5575
X3. DEVELOPMENT OF DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATION FOR 7.1.3.2
Specification
YN
Polymer abbreviation VDF/HFP Y-mandated No. 1-2 Section 3.3 VDF/HFP
Polymer type modified Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1 A
Application/process and extrusion Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1 E
special characteristics specification Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 F
burn
low smoke Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 F4
pellets Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 G1
lubricated Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 S
opaque Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 T1
Properties
Melt temperature 143 °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 *N Test Method D4591
MFR ... g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 Z Test Method D1238
Load ... kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 Z Test Method D1238
Melt Viscosity 1300–1400 Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 *? Test Method D3835
Temperature 230 °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 F
Tensile strength:
Yield 24 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break ... MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Z Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus 1000 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield 12 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break 350 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 H Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density 1.79 g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 *C Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity none Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c Z Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 none Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent Z
Flammability (OI) >80 Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 *F Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method compression Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 2-1 *Q
Specimen type (above 2 %) D638 TYPE I Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4.8 A
Additives type ... Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1 Z
Alternate:
Property range No. 1 1300–1700 Y if used ?1300–1700
Method specification Y if used
Designation code: ASTM D5XXX VDF/HFP-A, EFF4G1ST2, *N-*ZZ?F-*CZC-CH-*C-ZZ-*F-*QA, Z, ?1300–1700
229
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779
CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM FOR AND BASIS OF

SPECIFICATION FOR POLYAMIDE MOLDING AND
EXTRUSION MATERIALS (PA)
SD-6779
(Identical with ASTM D6779-12a except for revisions in paras. 8.1, 11.1.1, and section 12, additional requirements in
231
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Classification System for and Basis of Specification for

Polyamide Molding and Extrusion Materials (PA)

1.1 This classification system covers polyamide materials 2.1 ASTM Standards:
suitable for molding and extrusion. Some of these composi- D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
tions are also suitable for application from solution. Insulating Materials
1.2 The properties included in this classification system are D789 Test Methods for Determination of Solution Viscosi-
those required to identify the compositions covered. Other ties of Polyamide (PA)
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
important to specialized applications are to be specified by tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
using suffixes as given in Section 5. D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1.3 This classification system and subsequent line callout tics
(specification) are intended to provide a means of calling out D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
plastic materials used in the fabrication of end items or parts. D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
It is not intended for the selection of materials. Material als
selection can be made by those having expertise in the plastic D5740 Guide for Writing Material Standards in the Classi-
field after careful consideration of the design and the perfor- fication Format
mance required of the part, the environment to which it will be D6260 Test Method for Gravimetric Determination of Car-
exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the costs bon Black in Nylon Materials (PA) (Withdrawn 2004)
involved, and the inherent properties of the material other than D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
those covered by this classification system. Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this Determine Conformance with Specifications
standard. 2.2 IEC/ISO Standards:
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the IEC 60243-1 Electrical Strength of Insulating Materials—
test methods portion, Section 11, of this classification system. Test Methods—Part 1: Tests at Power Frequencies
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety IEC 60250 Recommended Methods for the Determination of
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility the Permittivity and Dielectric Dissipation Factor of
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and Electrical Insulating Materials at Power, Audio and Radio
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory Frequencies Including Metre Wavelengths
requirements prior to use. ISO 75-1 Plastics—Determination of Temperature of De-
flection Under Load—Part 1: General Test Methods
NOTE 1—This classification system is similar to ISO 1874-1/-2,
although the technical content is significantly different.
232
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779
ISO 75-2 Plastics—Determination of Temperature of De- Tolerance

flection Under Load—Part 2: Plastic and Ebonite Symbol Material (Based on the Total
Mass)
ISO 179-1 Plastics—Determination of Charpy Impact C carbon- and graphite-fiber- ±2 %
Strength—Part 1: Non-instrumented Impact Test reinforced
ISO 294-1 Plastics—Injection Moulding of Test Specimens G glass-reinforced ±2 %
L lubricants (such as PTFE, Depends upon material
of Thermoplastic Materials—Part 1: General Principles, graphite, and
Multipurpose-Test Specimens and Bars silicone, and molybdenum process—to be specified.
disulfide)
ISO 307 Determination of Viscosity Number of Polyamides M mineral-reinforced ±2 %
In Dilute Solutions R combinations of reinforcements or ±3 %
ISO 527-1 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties— fillers, or both
Part 1: General Principles NOTE 3—An example of this classification system for reinforced
ISO 527-2 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties— polyamide is given as follows: The designation PA012G35 indicates the
Part 2: Testing Conditions following:
ISO 1183 Plastics—Methods for Determining the Density PA = polyamide as found in Terminology D1600,
and Relative Density of Non-Cellular Plastics 01 (group) = polyamide 66,
ISO 1874-1 Plastics—Polyamide (PA) Homopolymers and 2 (class) = heat stabilized, and
Copolymers for Moulding and Extrusion—Part 1: Desig- G35 (grade) = nominal 35 % glass with the requirements
nation given in Table PA.
ISO 1874-2.2 Plastics—Polyamide (PA) Homopolymers and NOTE 4—This part of the classification system uses percent of rein-
Copolymers for Moulding and Extrusion—Part 2: Prepa- forcements or additives, or both, in the callout of the modified basic
ration of Test Specimens and Determination of Properties material. The types and percentages of reinforcements and additives are
sometimes shown on the supplier’s technical data sheet. If necessary,
ISO 3167 Plastics, Multipurpose Test Specimens additional control of these reinforcements and additives can be accom-
ISO 3451-4 Plastics—Determination of Ash—Part 4: Poly- plished by use of the suffix part of the system (see Section 5).
amides NOTE 5—Materials containing reinforcements or fillers, or both, at
ISO 11357-1 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry— nominal levels not in multiples of 5 are included in the nearest PA grade
Part 1: General Principles designation. For example, a material with a nominal glass fiber level of
33 % is included with Grade G35 as shown in Note 4.
ISO 11357-3 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry—
NOTE 6—Ash content of filled or reinforced materials is determined
Part 3: Determination of Temperature and Enthalpy of using Test Method ISO 3451-4.
Melting and Crystallization
ISO 15512 Plastics—Determination of Water Content 4.2 Variations of polyamide materials that are not in Table
PA are classified in accordance with Tables PA and A or B.
Table PA is used to specify the group of polyamide and Table
3. Terminology
A or B is used to specify property requirements.
3.1 The terminology used in this classification system is in 4.2.1 Specific requirements for variations of polyamide
accordance with Terminologies D883 and D1600. materials shall be shown by a six-character designator. The
designation will consist of the letter “A” or “B” and the five
4. Classification digits comprising the cell numbers for the property require-
ments in the order as they appear in Tables A and B.
4.1 Polyamide materials are classified into groups in accor-
4.2.1.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include
dance with their composition. These groups are subdivided into
the range of properties available in existing materials, not
classes and grades as shown in the Basic Property Table (Table
every possible combination of the properties exists or can be
PA).
obtained.
NOTE 2—An example of this classification system for unreinforced 4.2.2 When the grade of the basic material is not known, is
polyamide is given as follows: The designation PA0123 indicates the not important or does not meet the Table PA requirements, the
following: use of “0” grade classification shall be used for reinforced
PA = polyamide as found in Terminology D1600, materials in this classification system.
01 (group) = polyamide 66, NOTE 7—An example of this classification system for a reinforced
2 (class) = heat stabilized, and polyamide material is given as follows. The designation
3 (grade) = with a minimum viscosity number of 210 and PA0110G30A42270 would indicate the following material requirements:
the requirements given in Table PA.
PA0110 = Polyamide 66, from Table PA,
4.1.1 Grades of reinforced or filled versions, or both, of the G30 = Glass reinforced at 30 % nominal,
basic materials are identified by a single letter that indicates the A = Table A property requirements,
reinforcement or filler used and two digits, in multiples of 5, 4 = Tensile strength, 140 MPa, min,
that indicate the nominal quantity in percent by weight. Thus, 2 = Tensile modulus, 4500 MPa, min,
a letter designation G for glass reinforced and 35 for percent or 2 = Charpy impact, 5.0 kJ/m2, min,
reinforcement, G35, specifies a material with a nominal glass 7 = Deflection temperature at 1.8 MPa, 200°C, min,
level of 35 %. The reinforcement letter designations and and
0 = Unspecified.
associated tolerance levels are shown as follows:
233
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018
If no properties are specified, the designation would be the natural polymers in mechanical properties depending on the choice of
PA0110G30A00000. colorants and concentrations. The main property affected is ductility, as
illustrated by a reduction in Charpy impact and elongation values. In a
NOTE 8—When a grade of polyamide is not fully identified by a typical white pigmented polyamide, elongation losses of up to 50 % and
standard callout, it is possible to specify all table properties by the use of Charpy impact losses of up to 30 % are common. To specify property
an addition of Classification D4000 suffixes. Suffix values will override requirements of pigmented materials, use Table B.
the PA table values. An example of an unreinforced polyamide material is NOTE 10—An example of a special material using this classification
given as follows: PA0212KN023. This example is a general purpose, low system is as follows: The designation PA0220B54220 would indicate the
viscosity PA6 material where K denotes tensile properties, N denotes following material requirements from Table B:
tensile modulus with ISO 527 as the test method, and 023 denotes a value
of 2300 MPa. This value for tensile modulus overrides the normal table PA0220 = Polyamide 6, heat stabilized, from Table PA,
value. This example can be applied to replace all table values, that is, B = Table B property requirements,
tensile stress, notched Charpy impact, and heat deflection temperature. 5 = Tensile strength, 70 MPa, min,
4.3 To facilitate the specification of special materials where 4 = Tensile modulus, 2400 MPa, min,
the basic property table does not reflect the properties required, 2 = Charpy impact, 4.0 kJ/m2, min,
Table B has been incorporated into this classification system. 2 = Deflection temperature at 1.8 MPa, 55°C, min,
This table will be used in a manner similar to Table A. and
NOTE 9—Pigmented or colored polyamides can differ significantly from
0 = unspecified.
TABLE PA Requirements for Polyamides Dry-as-MoldedA,B

Tensile Charpy Deflection
Tensile
Viscosity D
Strength, Modulus,E Impact Temperature,F
Number, Density, ISO 527-1 Resistance, ISO 75-1
Group Description Class Description Grade DescriptionC ISO 1183 ISO 527-1 and
ISO 307, g/cm3 and and ISO 179/
ISO 75-2,
min, mL/g ISO 527-2, ISO 527-2, 1eA, kJ/m2, at 1.8 MPa,
MPa, min MPa, min min °C, min
01 PA66 1 General- 1 135 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
purpose 2 165 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
3 210 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
4 270 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
5 recycled 115 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
6 recycled 135 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
7 115 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.3 60
G15 15 % glass ... 1.20 to 1.26 100 4000 3.0 215
G20 20 % glass ... 1.25 to 1.33 115 5000 4.0 220
G25 25 % glass ... 1.29 to 1.37 140 6000 5.0 225
G35 35 % glass ... 1.35 to 1.45 170 8000 7.0 235
G40 40 % glass ... 1.42 to 1.52 175 9000 8.0 235
G45 45 % glass ... 1.45 to 1.55 180 10 000 9.0 240
G50 50 % glass ... 1.51 to 1.61 190 11 000 10.0 245
M40 40 % mineral ... 1.45 to 1.55 80 5000 2.0 100
0 other
2 Heat- 1 135 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
stabilized 2 165 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
3 210 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
4 270 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
5 recycled 115 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
6 recycled 135 1.13 to 1.15 70 2300 3.0 60
G15 15 % glass ... 1.20 to 1.26 100 4000 3.0 220
G25 25 % glass ... 1.29 to 1.37 140 6000 5.0 225
G30 30 % glass ... 1.32 to 1.42 160 7000 6.0 230
G35 35 % glass ... 1.35 to 1.45 170 8000 7.0 235
G40 40 % glass ... 1.43 to 1.53 175 9000 8.0 235
G45 45 % glass ... 1.45 to 1.55 180 10 000 9.0 240
G50 50 % glass ... 1.51 to 1.61 190 11 000 10.0 245
M40 40 % mineral ... 1.45 to 1.55 80 5000 2.0 100
R20 20 % filler ... 1.23 to 1.31 70 3200 1.5 ...
R40 40 % filler ... 1.43 to 1.53 100 5500 2.5 200
0 other
3 Nucleated 1 135 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
2 165 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
3 210 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
4 270 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
5 recycled 115 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
6 recycled 135 1.13 to 1.15 80 2500 2.8 60
0 other
4 Nucleated, 1 Requirements the same as corresponding grades under Group 01, Class 3
heat- 2
stabilized 3
4
5
0 other
234
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779

Tensile
Viscosity Strength, Impact Temperature,F
Density,D Modulus,E ISO 75-1
Number, ISO 527-1 ISO 527-1 Resistance,
Group Description Class Description Grade DescriptionC ISO 1183 and
ISO 307, g/cm3 and and ISO 179/ ISO 75-2,
min, mL/g ISO 527-2, ISO 527-2, 1eA, kJ/m2,
MPa, min at 1.8 MPa,
MPa, min min °C, min
5 Impact- 1 ... 1.06 to 1.12 52 1700 9.0 50
modified 2 recycled ... 1.06 to 1.12 50 1600 8.0 50
G15 15 % glass ... 1.15 to 1.23 85 3000 6.0 210
G35 35 % glass ... 1.31 to 1.41 110 5500 6.0 225
0 other
6 Impact- 1 ... 1.08 to 1.12 52 1700 9.0 50
modified, 2 recycled ... 1.08 to 1.12 50 1600 8.0 50
heat- G15 15 % glass ... 1.15 to 1.23 85 3000 6.0 210
stabilized G35 35 % glass ... 1.31 to 1.41 110 5500 6.0 225
M40 40 % mineral ... 1.45 to 1.55 75 4500 4.0 ...
R35 35 % filler ... 1.38 to 1.48 80 5500 3.0 200
0 other
7 Toughened 1 ... 1.06 to 1.10 42 1500 40 45
2 recycled ... 1.05 to 1.11 40 1300 35 45
G15 15 % glass ... 1.15 to 1.23 70 2800 9.0 180
G35 35 % glass ... 1.28 to 1.38 110 5500 11 220
0 other
8 Tough- 1 ... 1.06 to 1.10 42 1500 40 45
ened, 2 recycled ... 1.05 to 1.11 40 1300 35 45
heat- G15 15 % glass ... 1.15 to 1.23 70 2800 9.0 180
stabilized G35 35 % glass ... 1.28 to 1.38 110 5500 11 220
G45 45 % glass ... 1.39 to 1.49 130 8000 10 230
M35 35 % mineral ... 1.37 to 1.47 70 3800 6.0 ...
0 other
9 Weather- 1 135 1.13 to 1.17 80 2400 2.5 60
stabil- 2 recycled 115 1.13 to 1.17 65 2200 2.0 60
izedG 0 other
0 Other 0 other
02 PA6 1 General- 1 100 1.12 to 1.14 75 2400 4.0 50
purpose 2 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2200 3.0 50
3 150 1.12 to 1.15 70 2200 3.0 50
4 200 1.12 to 1.15 70 2200 3.0 50
G15 15 % glass 1.20 to 1.28 110 4200 4.0 170
G25 25 % glass 1.28 to 1.36 135 5000 6.5 180
G30 30 % glass 1.32 to 1.40 150 7000 7.5 180
G35 35 % glass 1.38 to 1.44 155 7500 8.0 180
G40 40 % glass 1.41 to 1.48 175 10 000 9.0 190
M30 30 % mineral 1.30 to 1.40 70 3200 2.4 50
M40 40 % mineral 1.44 to 1.52 75 4500 4.0 70
R40 40 % glass/ 1.42 to 1.50 100 6000 3.0 180
mineral
0 other
2 Heat- 1 100 1.12 to 1.14 75 2400 4.0 50
stabilized 2 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2200 3.0 50
3 150 1.12 to 1.15 70 2200 3.0 50
4 200 1.12 to 1.15 70 2200 3.0 50
5 recycled 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2000 3.0 50
G5 5 % glass 1.16 to 1.22 85 2500 2.5 110
G15 15 % glass 1.20 to 1.28 110 4200 4.0 180
G25 25 % glass 1.28 to 1.36 135 5000 6.5 190
G30 30 % glass 1.32 to 1.40 150 7000 7.5 190
G35 35 % glass 1.38 to 1.44 155 7500 8.0 190
G40 40 % glass 1.41 to 1.48 175 10 000 9.0 190
G45 45 % glass 1.46 to 1.54 175 10 000 10 190
G50 50 % glass 1.52 to 1.60 175 10 000 10 190
G65 65 % glass 1.70 to 1.78 175 13 000 10 200
M30 30 % mineral 1.30 to 1.40 70 3200 2.4 50
M35 35 % mineral 1.39 to 1.47 70 3500 3.0 60
M40 40 % mineral 1.44 to 1.52 75 4500 4.0 70
R20 20 % glass/ 1.25 to 1.33 80 3200 2.5 120
mineral
R40 40 % glass/ 1.42 to 1.50 100 6000 3.0 180
mineral
0 other
3 Nucleated 1 100 1.12 to 1.14 70 2300 2.5 50
and 2 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2300 2.5 50
lubricated 3 150 1.12 to 1.15 75 2300 2.5 50
4 200 1.12 to 1.15 80 2300 2.5 50
0 other
235
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018

Tensile
4 Nucleated 1 100 1.12 to 1.14 70 2300 2.5 50
and heat- 2 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2300 2.5 50
stabilized 3 150 1.12 to 1.15 75 2300 2.5 50
4 200 1.12 to 1.15 80 2300 2.5 50
5 recycled 135 1.12 to 1.14 70 2100 2.5 50
0 other
5 Impact- 1 1.05 to 1.12 45 1700 30 45
modified 2 1.05 to 1.18 55 2000 6.0 45
3 1.05 to 1.18 40 1000 6.0 35
G15 15 % glass 1.15 to 1.24 75 3300 9.0 130
G30 30 % glass 1.30 to 1.40 135 6500 15 180
G35 35 % glass 1.32 to 1.42 135 6800 15 190
G40 40 % glass 1.39 to 1.47 135 8000 10 200
0 other
6 Impact- 1 1.05 to 1.12 45 1700 30 45
modified, 2 1.05 to 1.18 55 2000 6.0 45
heat- 3 1.05 to 1.18 40 1000 6.0 35
stabilized 4 1.05 to 1.18 25 1000 30 30
G15 15 % glass 1.15 to 1.24 75 3300 9.0 130
G30 30 % glass 1.30 to 1.40 135 6500 15 180
G35 35 % glass 1.32 to 1.42 135 6800 10 190
G40 40 % glass 1.39 to 1.47 135 8000 10 200
M35 35 % mineral 1.35 to 1.45 65 3200 3.0 50
M40 40 % mineral 1.39 to 1.47 65 3200 3.0 50
0 other
7 Flexural- 1 injection 1.05 to 1.16 55 2375 max 10 45
modified, molding
heat- 2 extrusion 1.05 to 1.16 30 2000 max 7.0 25
stabilized 3 blends 1.05 to 1.10 35 1700 max 4.5 35
0 other
0 Other 0 other
03H PA11 1 General 1 115 to 140 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 4.0 36
purpose 2 160 to 190 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 6.0 36
0 other
2 Heat- 1 115 to 140 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 4.0 36
stabilized 2 160 to 190 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 6.0 36
3 UV 160 to 190 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 4.0 36
Stabilized
4 210 to 255 1.01 to 1.06 35 900 6.0 36
0 other
3 Plasticized 1 170 to 200 1.01 to 1.06 30 370 25 36
0 other
4 Plasticized, Heat 1 180 to 240 1.01 to 1.06 35 500 25 36
Stabilized 2 170 to 200 1.01 to 1.06 35 400 25 36
3 115 to 140 1.01 to 1.06 30 350 25 36
4 UV 175 to 240 1.01 to 1.06 35 400 25 36
Stabilized
5 170 to 190 1.01 to 1.06 30 370 25 36
6 200 to 230 1.01 to 1.06 35 370 25 36
7 UV 160 to 240 1.01 to 1.06 35 340 25 36
Stabilized
0 other
0 Other 0 other
04 PA12 1 General 1 100 to 210 1.00 to 1.06 30 800 2.5 35
purpose 2 100 to 210 1.00 to 1.06 35 1000 2.5 35
3 211 to 270 1.00 to 1.06 35 1000 2.5 35
4 271 to 340 1.00 to 1.06 35 1000 2.5 35
0 other
2 Heat- 1 100 to 150 1.00 to 1.06 35 800 2.5 35
stabilized 2 151 to 210 1.00 to 1.06 35 800 2.5 35
3 211 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 35 1000 2.5 35
G15 15 % glass 1.10 to 1.20 75 3000 10 160
G25 25 % glass 1.10 to 1.25 90 3000 15 160
G30 30 % glass 1.15 to 1.30 95 4000 15 160
G40 40 % glass 1.30 to 1.45 100 4500 15 160
R30 30 % filler 1.18 to 1.32 55 3500 5.0 100
0 other
3 Nucleated 1 100 to 180 1.00 to 1.06 35 800 1.0 35
2 181 to 250 1.00 to 1.06 35 800 1.0 35
0 other
236
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779

Tensile
Density, D Modulus,E ISO 75-1
4 Plasticized 1 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 30 300 to 550 15
2 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 30 450 to 750 10
0 other
5 Plasti- 1 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 20 200 to 350 20
cized, 2 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 30 300 to 550 15
heat- 3 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 30 450 to 750 10
stabilized 4 100 to 280 1.00 to 1.06 35 550 to 950 5.0
0 other
0 Other 0 other
05 PA612 1 General 1 100 to 139 1.05 to 1.07 50 1800 2.0 45
purpose 2 140 to 199 1.05 to 1.07 50 1800 2.5 45
3 200 1.05 to 1.07 50 1800 3.0 45
G35 35 % glass 1.28 to 1.38 140 7000 9.0 175
G45 45 % glass 1.38 to 1.48 150 8500 11 180
0 other
2 Heat- 1 140 1.05 to 1.07 50 1800 2.0 45
stabilized G20 20 % glass 1.17 to 1.25 105 4500 5.0 170
G30 30 % glass 1.25 to 1.33 120 5500 5.0 170
G35 35 % glass 1.28 to 1.38 140 7000 9.0 175
0 other
3 Weather- 1 140 1.05 to 1.07 50 1800 1.5 45
stabi-
lizedG
0 other
06 PA46 1 General- 1 170 1.16 to 1.20 85 2300 6.0
purpose 2 195 1.16 to 1.20 85 2300 6.0 140
0 other
2 Heat- 1 165 1.16 to 1.20 85 2300 6.0 140
stabilized 2 195 1.16 to 1.20 85 2300 6.0 140
G15 15 % glass 1.25 to 1.31 125 5000 3.6 240
G30 30 % glass 1.38 to 1.42 175 8000 7.5 280
G40 40 % glass 1.48 to 1.53 195 10 000 10.0 280
G50 50 % glass 1.58 to 1.63 210 12 000 12.0 280
R50 50 % filler 1.60 to 1.67 140 9000 4.0 280
0 other
3 Flame- 1 1.32 to 1.36 45 2250 4.0 140
retar- G15 15 % glass 1.55 to 1.59 115 6000 4.5 270
dantI , G30 30 % glass 1.63 to 1.69 155 10 000 7.5 280
heat- G40 40 % glass 1.76 to 1.80 145 11 000 8.0 280
stabilized
G45 45 % glass 1.75 to 1.79 165 12 000 8.0 280
0 other
4 Impact- 1 1.08 to 1.12 40 1500 50 70
modified, 0 other
heat-
stabilized
5 Wear- 1 1.16 to 1.20 75 2200 3.0 140
resistant, 0 other
heat-
stabilized
0 Other 0 other
07 PA6T/ 1 Heat- G35 35 % glass 1.42 to 1.52 200 10 000 8.0 250
MPMDT stabilized G45 45 % glass 1.53 to 1.63 210 12 000 8.0 250
0 other
0 Other 0 other
08 PA66 1 PA66/6 G15 15 % glass 1.20 to 1.26 90 3500 3.0 180
copoly- General G35 35 % glass 1.35 to 1.45 160 7500 8.0 190
mers purpose G45 45 % glass 1.45 to 1.55 180 8500 10 200
+ blends
0 other
2 66/6 G15 15 % glass 1.20 to 1.26 90 3500 3.0 180
heat- G25 25 % glass 1.29 to 1.37 115 4500 6.5 190
stabilized G35 35 % glass 1.35 to 1.45 160 7500 8.0 190
G45 45 % glass 1.45 to 1.55 180 8500 10 200
M20 20 % mineral 1.25 to 1.33 70 3000 4.0
M30 30 % mineral 1.35 to 1.45 75 4000 3.0
M40 40 % mineral 1.45 to 1.55 75 4000 3.0
0 other
237
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018

Tensile
3 66 + 6 G15 15 % glass 1.20 to 1.26 100 4000 3.0 200
general G35 35 % glass 1.35 to 1.45 170 8000 9.0 210
purpose G45 45 % glass 1.45 to 1.55 190 10 000 10 220
0 other
4 66 + 6 M20 20 % mineral 1.25 to 1.33 70 3000 3.0
heat- M40 40 % mineral 1.45 to 1.55 75 4500 3.0
stabilized
0 Other 0 other
09 PA6 1 PA6 + 1 1.00 to 1.05 50 2000 7.0 50
copoly- polypropy-
mer lene
+ blends blend
Heat- G35 35 % glass 1.23 to 1.33 150 8500 9.0 200
stabilized R35 35 % filler 1.28 to 1.38 53 6000 2.0 135
0 other
0 Other 0 other
10 PA6T/66 1 Heat- G35 35 % glass 1.41 to 1.51 175 9000 6.0 270
stabilized
G45 45 % glass 1.52 to 1.62 205 12 000 7.5 270
G60 60 % glass 1.72 to 1.82 230 19 000 8.0 270
0 other
2 High heat, G35 35 % glass 1.39 to 1.49 180 9000 6.0 285
heat stabilized
G45 45 % glass 1.49 to 1.59 210 12 000 9.0 285
G60 60 % glass 1.72 to 1.82 240 19 000 8.0 285
0 other
3 Impact- G15 15 % glass 1.17 to 1.27 90 4500 6.5 245
modified
G30 30 % glass 1.31 to 1.37 145 8000 10 270
0 other
4 Flame- G35 35 % glass 1.63 to 1.73 150 9000 7.0 260
retardant
G45 45 % glass 1.73 to 1.85 165 12 000 7.0 265
0 other
5 Lubricated G35 35 % glass 1.38 to 1.48 165 8500 6.0 285
0 other
6 General 1 20 % glass, 1.41 to 1.51 95 7000 5.5 285
Purpose reflective
0 other
0 Other 0 other
11 PAMXD6 1 General G30 30 % glass 1.43 to 1.47 170 10 000 4.5 225
purpose G50 50 % glass 1.63 to 1.67 245 17 500 6.5 225
G60 60 % glass 1.75 to 1.79 240 21 000 8.0 225
0 other
2 UV G50 50 % glass 1.59 to 1.63 210 16 500 7.0 210
stability
improved-
exteriors
0 other
3 Heat stabilized G50 50 % glass 1.62 to 1.66 220 17 500 7.0 225
0 other
0 Other 0 other
12 PA6T/6I/66 1 Heat G35 35 % glass 1.41 to 1.51 195 9500 7.0 265
stabilized
G45 45 % glass 1.52 to 1.62 220 14 000 7.0 265
G60 60 % glass 1.72 to 1.82 250 20000 7.0 265
M40 40 % mineral 1.49 to 1.59 93 6000 2.5 140
R40 40 % glass/ 1.49 to 1.59 130 8000 3.0 225
mineral
R65 65 % glass/ 1.82 to 1.92 115 13 000 2.0 260
mineral
0 other
2 Heat R65 65 % glass/ 1.76 to 1.86 175 14 500 4.5 265
stabilized, mineral
high
strength
0 other
3 Impact- 1 1.09 to 1.19 58 1800 12 110
modified
2 1.06 to 1.16 43 1700 25 105
238
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779

Tensile
Density, D Modulus,E ISO 75-1
3 1.05 to 1.15 50 1700 5.0 80
4 1.08 to 1.18 62 2000 12 115
5 1.11 to 1.18 55 1800 40 100
6 1.09 to 1.19 52 1800 2.0 100
G15 15 % glass 1.23 to 1.33 125 5500 5.5 240
G25 25 % glass 1.30 to 1.40 160 7500 6.5 255
0 other
4 Plating M40 40 % mineral 1.43 to 1.53 55 3000 2.0 115
0 other
5 Flame- G35 35 % glass 1.64 to 1.74 160 12 000 5.5 250
retardant
G45 45 % glass 1.74 to 1.84 170 14 000 5.5 250
0 other
7 Lubricated M30 30 % mineral 1.37 to 1.47 85 5700 2.0 170
M40 40 % mineral 1.49 to 1.59 75 5500 2.5 150
G45 45 % glass 1.53 to 1.63 220 14 000 7.0 260
0 other
8 General G35 35 % glass, 1.50 to 1.60 145 8500 5.5 255
Purpose reflective
0 other
0 0 other
13 PA 6T/6I 1 Heat- G30 30 % glass 100 1.42 to 1.46 170 10 000 5 270
stabilized
G35 35 % glass 1.46 to 1.52 170 10 500 6 275
G40 40 % glass 100 1.51 to 1.55 200 12 500 6 275
G45 45 % glass 100 1.57 to 1.61 215 15 000 7 275
G50 50 % glass 100 1.63 to 1.67 225 16 500 7 280
G60 60 % glass 100 1.76 to 1.80 235 21 000 8 280
0 other
0 Other 0 Other
14 PA6/6T 1 High heat, 1 110 1.11 to 1.21 85 2700 6 85
heat-stabilized
G25 25 % glass 110 1.30 to 1.40 140 7000 6 235
G35 35 % glass 110 1.39 to 1.49 160 9000 8 235
G50 50 % glass 110 1.57 to 1.67 200 14 000 10 235
M5 5 % mineral 100 1.10 to 1.20 50 2400 10 220
0 other
2 Impact- G30 30 % glass 110 1.32 to 1.42 140 7000 10 220
modified,
high heat,
heat-
stabilized
0 other
3 Flame G25 25 % glass 105 1.33 to 1.43 120 7000 4 180
retardant,
high heat,
heat-
stabilized
0 other
0 Other 0 other
00 Other 0 Other 0 other
A
If data on 4-mm test specimens are limited, the minimum values will be changed in a later revision if a statistical database of sufficient size is generated, which justifies
change.
B
Refer to 9.1 for source of test pieces.
C
No descriptions are listed unless needed to describe a special grade under the class. All other grades are listed by requirements.
D
Test Methods D792 is an acceptable alternative method.
E
Crosshead speed shall be 50 mm/min ± 10 % unless the specimen exhibits brittle failure (no yield point) and strain at break of <10 % in which case crosshead speed
shall be 5 mm/min ± 25 %.
F
Deflection temperature shall be determined with the specimen in the flatwise position (Method Af).
G
Weatherable nylon has typically contained about 2 % carbon black. Test Method D6260 - 98 (Withdrawn July 2004),D6260 Federal Specification L-P-419a, and other
methods have been used to determine the amount of carbon black. It is possible that materials incorporating other pigments or soluble stabilizers, or both, may prove
adequate for particular applications.
239
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018
H
Relative Viscosities for Group 03 were generated from a correlation with Test Methods D789, utilizing an Ubbelohde viscometer, and m-Cresol as the solvent. Viscosity
for groups 03, 04, and 05 (PA11, PA12, and PA6,12) in this classification shall be measured using solvents other than formic acid. Relative viscosities for Groups 03 and
04 shall be measured using 0.5 g of polymer dissolved in 99.5 g of m-cresol at 25.0 ± 0.1°C in a Cannon-Fenske No. 200 viscometer. Inherent viscosity of Group 05 shall
be measured using 0.5 g of polymer dissolved in 100 mL of m-cresol at 25.0 ± 0.1°C in a Cannon-Fenske No. 200 viscometer. The inherent viscosity is calculated as follows:
lnts t s /t c d
Inherent viscosity 5
C
where:
ts 5 average efflux time for sample solution,
tc 5 average efflux time for solvent, and
C 5 concentration in g/100 mL.
I
For specific flammability requirements, use the proper suffix from Classification D4000, for example, FL310 = V0 at 0.8 mm.
TABLE A Detail Requirements: Reinforced PolyamidesA,B

Designation
Order Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number
1 Tensile strength, ISO 527, unspecified 35 70 105 140 175 210 245 280 specify valueD
min, MPaC
2 Tensile modulus, ISO 527, unspecified 1500 4500 7500 10 500 13 500 16 500 19 500 22 500 specify valueD
min, MPa
3 Charpy impact, ISO 179/1eA, unspecified 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 22.5 30.0 specify valueD
min, kJ/m2
4 Deflection temperature, unspecified 50 85 110 135 160 185 200 235 specify valueD
ISO 75, Method A,
1.8 MPa, min, °CE
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
It is recognized that detailed test values, particularly Charpy impact, often do not predict nor even correlate with the performance of parts molded of these materials.
B
Refer to 9.1 for source of test specimens.
C
Crosshead speed shall be 50 mm/min ± 10 % unless the specimen exhibits brittle failure (no yield point) and a strain at break of <10 % in which case crosshead speed
D
E
TABLE B Detail Requirements: Unreinforced PolyamidesA,B

Designation
Order Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number
1 Tensile strength, ISO 527, unspecified 10 25 40 55 70 85 100 115 specify valueD
min, MPaC
2 Tensile modulus, ISO 527 unspecified 300 1000 1700 2400 3100 3800 4500 5200 specify valueD
min, MPa
3 Charpy impact, ISO 179/1eA, unspecified 2.0 4.0 6.0 10.0 14.0 18.0 24.0 30.0 specify valueD
min, kJ/m2
4 Deflection temperature, unspecified 40 55 70 85 100 115 130 145 specify valueD
ISO 75, Method A,
1.8 MPa, min, °CE
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
It is recognized that detailed test values, particularly Charpy impact, often do not predict nor even correlate with the performance of parts molded of these materials.
B
Refer to 9.1 for source of test specimens.
C
Crosshead speed shall be 50 mm/min ± 10 % unless the specimen exhibits brittle failure (no yield point) and a strain at break of <10 % in which case crosshead speed
D
If specific value is required, it must appear on the drawing or contract, or both.
E
5. Suffixes appropriate. Additional suffixes will be added to that classifi-

5.1 When additional requirements are needed that are not cation system as test methods and requirements are developed
covered by the basic requirements or cell-table requirements, and requested.
they shall be indicated through the use of suffixes.
5.2 A list of suffixes can be found in Classification D4000
(Table 3) and are to be used for additional requirements, as
240
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779
6. General Requirements TABLE 1 Process Temperatures for Injection Molding of

Specimens
6.1 Basic requirements from the property tables or cell
Plastic Melt Mold Surface
tables are always in effect unless superseded by specific suffix Polyamide
Viscosity
Temperature, Temperature,
Number
requirements, which always take precedence. °C °C
PA 6 <200 unfilled 260 80
6.2 The plastics composition shall be uniform and shall >200 unfilled 270 80
conform to the requirements specified herein. filled 290 80
PA 46 unfilled 305 80
7. Detail Requirements filled 305 80
PA 66 unfilled 290 80
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements pre- filled 290 80
PA11 unfilled 288 38
scribed in Tables PA, A, and B, and suffix requirements as they PA12 <210 unfilled 220 60
apply. >210 unfilled 240 60
filled 240 80
7.2 For purposes of determining conformance, all specified PA612 <200 unfilled 250 80
limits for a specification (line callout) based on this classifica- >200 unfilled 270 80
tion system are absolute limits, as defined in Practice E29. filled 270 80
PA 6T/66 filled 335 130
7.2.1 With the absolute method, an observed value or a PAMXD6 filled 280 125
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly PA6T/6I/66 filled 335 130
with the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconfor- PA 6T/MPMDT filled 325 140
mance is based on this comparison.
8. Sampling material can be dried by a variety of methods such as raising the

temperature of the material to 80 to 100°C in a vacuum or in a stream of
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the dry nitrogen using a desiccant-bed drier. Continue drying until the
requirements of Annex A1. moisture content is within the stated limits.
8.2 A batch or lot shall be constituted as a unit of manufac- 10. Conditioning
ture as prepared for shipment, and can consist of a blend of two
or more “production runs.” 10.1 Conditioning—Test data shall be obtained using dry-
as-molded specimens, defined as those specimens that are
9. Specimen Preparation sealed in containers that are impermeable to water vapor within
9.1 Test pieces for relevant test methods shall be based on one hour after removal from the mold. Maximum moisture
the injection molded ISO 3167 type multipurpose test speci- content of specimens shall be 0.2 %. No moisture shall be
men. All tests shall be conducted on as-molded (not annealed) intentionally added to reach this level. Condition specimens a
specimens conditioned dry-as-molded. The following pieces minimum of 24 h in sealed containers at 23 6 2°C.
NOTE 14—Physical properties of most nylon resins are highly depen-
are to be used for the listed relevant test methods: dent upon the moisture content of the molded item. The user is referred to
Test Piece Relevant Test Method the manufacturer’s literature for details.
ISO 3167 Type 1A bar Tensile strength by ISO 527
Tensile modulus by ISO 527 10.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests, other than solution
80 ± 2 mm by 10 ± Charpy impact resistance viscosity or those tests conducted at elevated temperature, in
0.2 mm by 4 ± by ISO 179/1eA the standard laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C and 50 6 5 %
0.2 mm cut from Deflection temperature by
the center portion ISO 75/Method Ar relative humidity. Individual specimens shall not be removed
of ISO 3167 from sealed containers until immediately before testing.
Type 1A bar
Specimen approxi- Density by ISO 1183
mately 10 by
11. Test Methods
10 by 4 mm 11.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica-
cut from center
of ISO 3167 tion system by means of the test methods referenced in Section
Type 1A bar 2.
9.2 The test specimens shall be prepared by an injection 11.1.1 The number of tests shall be consistent with the
molding process as specified in ISO 294. Recommended requirements of Section 8 and Annex A1.
processing temperatures are shown in Table 1.
NOTE 11—Test specimens of PA 6 and PA 66 copolymers and blends
12. Inspection
prepared at the same process temperatures as specified for their 12.1 Inspection of the material supplied with reference
homopolymers, usually show no significant property loss. Selection of to a specification based on this classification system shall
process temperature is made based on the major polymer component.
NOTE 12—Consult ISO 1874-2, Table 1, for a more comprehensive be for conformance to the requirements specified herein.
listing of the Conditions for Injection Moulding of Test Specimens. 12.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
9.3 Molding material-granules of the molding material used acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
in preparation of test specimens shall contain no more than inspection shall consist of the tests listed as they apply:
0.2 % moisture, with the exception of PA 46 which will contain 12.2.1 Relative viscosity, or viscosity number, or both,
no more than 0.05 % moisture. 12.2.2 Moisture content per ISO 15512,
NOTE 13—If the moisture content exceeds the limits stated above, the
241
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018
12.2.3 Reinforcement content, plastic, as defined in 3.1.47 of Guide D7209, and the
12.2.4 Carbon black content (weather-stabilized materials), results of the most recent periodic-check inspection.
and
12.2.5 Heat stabilizer content (heat-stabilized materials, 13. Certification
supplier’s test showing positive presence). 13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
12.3 Periodic-check inspection with reference to a specifi-
cation based upon this classification system shall consist of the 14. Packing, Packaging, and Marking
tests specified for all requirements of the material under this 14.1 The provisions of Practice D3892 apply to packaging,
classification system. packing, and marking of containers for plastic materials.
NOTE 15—The ASTM publication, Manual on Presentation of Data and
Control Chart Analysis, 7th Edition, stock number MNL7A, provides 15. Keywords
detailed information about statistical process control.
15.1 classification; classification system; line callout; poly-
12.4 A report of the test results shall be furnished. The
amide; recycle; specification
report shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance in-
spection for the shipment, the percent by weight of recycled
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the inquiry, contract,
or order for agencies of the U. S. Government.
S1. Special End Uses S3.3 Test Method—Testing shall be in accordance with the
S1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase methods specified in Table S2.2.
order, the supplier is responsible for the performance of all S3.4 Conditioning—Standard test specimens shall be con-
testing and inspections. Except as otherwise specified, the ditioned before testing as specified in Table S2.2 and described
supplier can utilize his own facilities or any commercial in Section S4.
laboratory acceptable to the government. The government
reserves the right to perform any testing or inspections set forth S4. Conditioning
in the specification requirements. This testing ensures qualifi- S4.1 Nomenclature:
cation on a one time basis unless the manufacturer makes a S4.1.1 Condition A—Dry-as-molded. See Section 10.
significant change in formulation, raw material, or process. S4.1.2 Condition C—Humidity conditioning.
S4.1.3 Condition D—Immersion conditioning in distilled
S2. Electrical Requirements water.
S2.1 The electrical property requirements for initial material S4.2 Designation—Conditioning procedures shall be desig-
qualification of electrical grade materials are given in Table nated as follows:
S2.1 and the test methods in Table S2.2. S4.2.1 A capital letter indicating the general conditioning.
S4.2.2 A number indicating, in hours, the duration of
S3. Quality Assurance conditioning.
S3.1 Acceptance Criteria—Failure to conform to require- S4.2.3 A number indicating, in °C, the conditioning tem-
ments in Table S2.1 shall result in rejection of the material. perature.
S3.2 Sample Size—The minimum number of test specimens S4.2.4 A number indicating the relative humidity when it is
to be tested shall be as specified in Table S2.2. controlled.
TABLE S2.1 Property Values for Initial Electrical Qualification Testing

Value Required for Each Type of Compound
Reinforced PA
Unreinforced PA
Property Units
Type IIIA Type VIA Type VIAA Type IA Type IIA
Grade E Grade E Grade E Grade A Grade A
Insulation resistance, min ohms 5 × 1012 5 × 1012 5 × 1012 ... ...
Dielectric strength
step-by-step test, min kV/mm 14.8 14.8 14.8 ... ...
short-time test, min kV/mm ... ... ... 14.8 14.8
Dielectric constant @ 1 MHz, max 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.2 4.2
Dissipation factor @ 1 MHz, max 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.025 0.025
A
Types as described in Appendix X3.
242
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779
TABLE S2.2 Sampling and Conditioning for Initial Qualification

Conditioning
Test Method Number
Property Test Method Specimens Reinforced
Modified per Tested Unreinforced PA
PA
Insulation resistance ASTM D257 S5.1 60 × 60 × 2 mm plaque 3 C-96/23/50 ...
Dielectric strength IEC 60243 60 × 60 × 2 mm plaque
step-by-step test 5 C-96/23/50 ...
short-time test 5 ... A
Dielectric constant IEC 60250 60 × 60 × 2 mm plaque 5 C-96/23/50 + A
D-48/50 + D-0.5/23
Dissipation factor IEC 60250 60 × 60 × 2 mm plaque 5 C-96/23/50 + A
D-48/50 + D-0.5/23
S4.3 Tolerances: S5.1.1 The test shall be performed under oil at a frequency
S4.3.1 Relative Humidity—Standard tolerance shall be not exceeding 100 Hz.
65 %. S5.1.2 Short-Time Test—The voltage shall be increased
S4.3.2 Temperature— Standard tolerance shall be 62°C. uniformly at the rate of 500 V/s.
For water immersion the standard tolerance shall be 61°C. S5.1.3 Step-by-Step Test—Step-by-step testing shall be done
NOTE 16—The numbers shall be separated from each other by slant (/) after a short-time test. Voltage increments for the step-by-step
marks, and from the capital letter by a dash (-). A sequence of conditions
shall be denoted by the use of a plus (+) sign between successive
test shall be determined from short-time results as follows:
conditions. Breakdown by short-time test,
Increment for step-by-
Examples: step test,
kV
C-96/23/50—Humidity condition; 96 h at 23°C and 50 % R.H. kV
D-48/50—Immersion condition; 48 h at 50°C. #12.5 0.5
>12.5 to #25 1.0
>25 to #50 2.5
S5. Test Method Modification >50 to #100 5.0
S5.1 Dielectric Strength: >100 10.0
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
243
SD-6779 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIXES
X1. VISCOSITY CONVERSION: ASTM TEST METHODS D789 and ISO 307
X1.1 The relation between relative viscosity in 90 % X1.2 For convenience, a conversion table and graph (Fig.
HCOOH (Test Methods D789) and viscosity number in 96 % X1.1) are provided using the following established relation-
H2SO4 (ISO 307) was developed in an interlaboratory round- ship:
robin study by ISO TC-61 Subcommittee 9/Work Group 8 VN 5 A1B 3 ln~ RV! (X1.1)
(Plastic Materials/Polyamides). Seven laboratories, including 3
U.S. laboratories (Allied, DuPont, and Monsanto), participated where:
in the work. A95 6 9 % between-laboratory confidence VN = viscosity number (ISO 307),
interval was predicted for the measurements. RV = relative viscosity (Test Methods D789),
A = -206.52124, and
B = 90.23355.
FIG. X1.1 Nylon 6 and Nylon 66 Viscosity Correlation Relative Viscosity in 90 % HCOOH (Test Methods D789) versus Viscosity Number
in 96 % H2SO4 (ISO 307)
244
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SD-6779
X2. MELTING POINT
X2.1 The nominal melting point of the various polyamide

polymers shown in Table PA are listed below. The typical range
for melting point determination is 65°C.
X2.2 The melting point shall be determined using ISO
11357-3 except the heating rate shall be 10°C/min. The melting
point, Tm, is obtained from the second melting curve.
Group Description Tm, °C
01 PA 66 262
02 PA 6 222
03 PA 11 190
04 PA 12 178
05 PA 612 212
06 PA 46 290
07 PA 6T/MPMDT 300
10 PA 6T/66 310
X3. CROSS-REFERENCES TO MIL-M-20693B AND L-P-395C
ASTM D6779 MIL-M-20693B

PA0111 Type I
PA0121 Type IA
PA0191 Type II
PA0511 Type III
PA0511 Type III, Grade E
PA0211 Type IV
PA0311 Type VI
PA0311 Type VI, Grade E
PA0321 Type VIA
PA0321 Type VIA, Grade E
ASTM D6779 L-P-395C
PA02G30 Type I, Grade A and Grade B
PA01G40 Type II, Grade A and Grade B
245
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-437
SPECIFICATION FOR THREADED CHLORINATED POLY

(VINYL CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS,
SCHEDULE 80
SF-437
(Identical with ASTM F437-09 except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking re-
quirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.)
247
SF-437 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

1.1 This specification covers chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
ride) (CPVC) threaded Schedule 80 pipe fittings. Included are D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
requirements for materials, workmanship, dimensions, and D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
burst pressure. Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
NOTE 1—The CPVC fittings covered by this specification were covered
previously in Specification D2464.
tics
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. plastic Pipe and Fittings
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious saftey 2.2 Federal Standard:
hazards should a system fail for any reason. Fed Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, 2.3 Military Standard:
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall 2.4 NSF Standard:
not be considered as requirements of the specification. Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only 3. Terminology
and are not considered standard. 3.1 Definitions:
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the 3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, unless otherwise indicated. The abbreviation for chlorinated
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user poly(vinyl chloride) is CPVC.
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
tions prior to use.
248
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-437
4. Classification tional, is not shown in Table 1, and is not included in the

4.1 General—This specification covers threaded Schedule center-to-end or end-to-end dimensions.
80 CPVC pipe fittings, intended for use with threaded Iron Pipe 6.1.2 Fittings Not Illustrated—All fittings, whether illus-
Size (IPS) outside-diameter plastic pipe. trated in Table 1 and Table 2 or not, shall have wall thicknesses
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally and thread dimensions conforming to 6.1 and 6.2.
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, unions, bushings, 6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads,
caps, nipples, etc., shall be molded or machined from extruded threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in
stock. accordance with 8.4.
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by backwelding are not included in
6.3 Burst Pressure:
this specification.
6.3.1 The minimum burst strength of the fittings shall be not
NOTE 3—This specification does not include requirements for pipe and less than that calculated for the size and wall thickness of the
fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases. pipe with which it is to be used, when calculated from the
following equation:
S5P ~ D o 2t ! /2 t (1)
5.1 This specification covers CPVC pipe fittings made from
compounds meeting the requirements of Class 23447 as
defined in Specification D1784. where:
NOTE 4—Mechanical strength, heat resistance, flammability, and
S = hoop stress, psi (or MPa),
chemical resistance requirements are covered in Specification D1784. P = internal pressure, psi (or MPa),
Do = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), and
5.2 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm).
duced shall meet all the requirements of this specification. Fittings tested in accordance with 8.5 shall withstand the
minimum burst pressure shown in Table 3.
6. Requirements 6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
used only as an indication of quality.
6.1.1 The dimensions and tolerances of the fittings shall be
with Test Method D2122. Minimum dimensions have zero 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
negative tolerances. Bushings shall have thread lengths appli- 7.1 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free
cable to the corresponding sizes. Counterbore, which is op- of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
TABLE 1 Dimensions of 90° Ells, Tees, Crosses, 45° Elbows and Couplings (Straight Sizes), in. (mm)A,B
Nominal Center to Thread Length of Center to Thread Inside Nominal Wall Outside Thread End to
Pipe End, 90° Elbows, Thread, End, 45° Elbow,C Diameter Thickness, Diameter Thread End of
Size Tees, Crosses, T, min K, min of Fitting, F, min of Hub, Coupling,
H, min D, min M, min L, min
⁄
14 0.812 (20.62) 0.50 (12.70) 0.688 (17.48) 0.258 (6.55) 0.135 (3.43) 0.840 (21.34) 1.063 (27.00)
⁄
38 0.938 (23.83) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.379 (9.63) 0.144 (3.66) 1.000 (25.40) 1.063 (27.00)
1⁄ 2 1.125 (28.58) 0.64 (16.26) 0.750 (19.05) 0.502 (12.75) 0.198 (5.03) 1.280 (32.51) 1.344 (34.14)
3⁄ 4 1.250 (31.75) 0.65 (16.51) 1.000 (25.40) 0.698 (17.73) 0.207 (5.25) 1.500 (38.10) 1.500 (38.10)
1 1.500 (28.10) 0.81 (20.51) 1.125 (28.58) 0.911 (23.14) 0.225 (5.72) 1.810 (45.97) 1.688 (42.88)
1 1⁄ 4 1.750 (44.45) 0.85 (21.59) 1.313 (23.35) 1.227 (31.17) 0.261 (6.63) 2.200 (55.88) 1.750 (44.45)
1 1⁄ 2 1.938 (49.23) 0.85 (21.59) 1.438 (36.83) 1.446 (36.73) 0.270 (6.85) 2.500 (63.50) 2.000 (50.80)
2 2.250 (57.15) 0.90 (22.86) 1.625 (41.28) 1.881 (47.78) 0.297 (7.54) 3.000 (76.20) 2.063 (52.40)
2 1⁄ 2 2.688 (68.28) 1.21 (30.73) 1.938 (49.23) 2.250 (57.15) 0.315 (8.00) 3.560 (90.42) 2.625 (66.68)
3 3.063 (77.80) 1.30 (33.02) 2.125 (53.98) 2.820 (71.63) 0.405 (10.29) 4.300 (109.22) 2.750 (69.85)
4 3.625 (92.08) 1.38 (35.05) 2.625 (66.68) 3.737 (94.92) 0.450 (11.43) 5.430 (137.92) 3.000 (76.20)
6 5.125 (130.18) 1.50 (38.10) 3.250 (82.55) 5.646 (143.41) 0.504 (12.80) 7.625 (193.68) 3.250 (82.55)
A
B
Symbols for dimensions are per Symbols D2749.
C
249
SF-437 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Dimensions of Plugs and Caps, in.A,B
Nominal Pipe Length of Male Length of Female Width of Nominal Wall Height of Cap Height, Outside Diameter
Size Thread, S, min Thread, T, min Flats,B Q, min Thickness, F, min Head, R, min W, min of Hub, M, min
⁄
14 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) 0.135 (3.43) 0.188 (4.78) 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34)
⁄
38 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.144 (3.66) 0.188 (4.78) 0.688 (17.48) 1.000 (25.40)
1⁄ 2 0.53 (13.46) 0.64 (16.26) 0.938 (23.83) 0.198 (5.03) 0.188 (4.73) 0.875 (22.23) 1.280 (32.51)
3⁄ 4 0.55 (13.92) 0.65 (16.51) 1.125 (28.53) 0.207 (5.26) 0.219 (5.56) 1.000 (25.40) 1.450 (35.03)
1 0.68 (17.27) 0.81 (20.57) 1.375 (34.93) 0.225 (5.72) 0.219 (5.56) 1.188 (30.18) 1.810 (45.97)
1 1⁄ 4 0.71 (18.03) 0.85 (21.59) 1.750 (44.45) 0.261 (6.63) 0.281 (7.14) 1.250 (31.75) 2.200 (55.88)
1 1⁄ 2 0.72 (18.29) 0.85 (21.59) 1.875 (47.63) 0.270 (6.85) 0.313 (7.95) 1.250 (31.75) 2.450 (62.23)
2 0.76 (19.30) 0.90 (22.86) 1.875 (47.63) 0.297 (7.54) 0.313 (7.95) 1.375 (34.93) 3.000 (76.20)
2 1⁄ 2 1.14 (28.96) 1.21 (30.25) 1.875 (47.63) 0.369 (8.00) 0.375 (9.53) 1.625 (41.28) 3.560 (90.42)
3 1.20 (30.48) 1.30 (33.02) 2.000 (50.80) 0.405 (10.29) 0.375 (9.53) 1.750 (49.45) 4.250 (107.98)
4 1.30 (33.02) 1.38 (35.05) 2.000 (50.80) 0.450 (11.43) 0.375 (9.53) 2.000 (50.60) 5.350 (125.87)
6 1.44 (36.58) 1.50 (35.10) 2.000 (50.80) 0.504 (12.80) 0.500 (12.10) 2.125 (53.98) 7.625 (193.68)
A
B
Symbols for dimensions are per Symbols D2749.
C
At the manufacturer’s option the head of the plug shall be hexagonal, octagonal, square, or round.
TABLE 3 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
for CPVC Threaded Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
Min Burst StrengthA
NOTE 5—For individual orders or specifications where supplemental
Nominal Size, in. Class 23447
tests are required, only those tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed
psi (MPa) upon between the purchaser and seller need be conducted.
14⁄ 3620 (24.96)
3 ⁄8 2940 (20.27) 8.4 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
1 ⁄2 2720 (18.75) accordance with Specification F1498.
3 ⁄4 2200 (15.17)
1 2020 (13.93) 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
1 1⁄ 4 1600 (11.44) with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method
1 1⁄ 2 1510 (10.41)
2 1290 (8.89)
D1599. Join the fittings to the pipe sufficiently strong and in
2 1⁄ 2 1360 (9.38) such a manner that no failures shall occur in the assembly at a
3 1200 (8.27) pressure less than the pressure requirement given in Table 3.
4 1040 (7.17)
6 890 (6.14)
The time of testing each assembly shall be between 60 and 70
A
s.
This table was calculated for Schedule 80 pipe using the ISO formula and a
stress level as follows:
psi MPa 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
Class 23447 (Type IV Grade 1 (CPVC)) 6400 44.1
of this specification, the tests(s) shall be conducted again only
fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
specification.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 10. Product Marking
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less 10.1 Quality of Marking—The markings shall be applied to
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of the fittings in such a manner that they remain legible under
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. normal handling and installation practices.
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora- 10.2 Content of Marking:
tory Atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % 10.2.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth- 10.2.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
ods or in this specification. 10.2.1.2 Material designation CPVC for CPVC 23447,
8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed 10.2.1.3 The seal or mark of the laboratory making the
upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at evaluation for potable water contact,
250
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-437
10.2.1.4 Size, and 11. Quality Assurance

10.2.1.5 ASME SF-437 or both ASME SF-437 and ASTM
F437.
factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with
10.3 Where the size of the fitting does not allow complete this specification and has been found to meet the requirements
marking, omit identification marking in the following se- of this specification.
trademark.
10.4 Markings or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or 12. Certification
applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
printing.
see that in no case marking causes cracks or reduces the wall
thickness below the minimum specified.
These requirements apply only to Federal/Military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.
S1. Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the con-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer is respon- tract, the materials shall be packaged in accordance with the
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require- supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
NOTE S1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
ment:
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to convey or to be in contact
with potable water.
251
SF-437 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
252
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-438
SPECIFICATION FOR SOCKET-TYPE CHLORINATED

POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC PIPE
FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 40
SF-438
quirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3, renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has
253
SF-438 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

1.1 This specification covers chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
ride) (CPVC) Schedule 40 socket-type pipe fittings. Included D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
are requirements for materials, workmanship, dimensions, and D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
burst pressure. Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
NOTE 1—The CPVC fittings covered by this standard were covered tics
previously in Specification D2466.
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases, some D2466 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
NOTE 2—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
contain large amounts of stored energy, which present serious safety plastic Pipe and Fittings
hazards should a system fail for any reason.
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These 2.3 Military Standard:
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
not be considered as requirements of the specification. 2.4 NSF Standard:
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Materials
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components—
and are not considered standard. Health Effects
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 3.1 Definitions:
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,
tions prior to use.
254
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-438
unless otherwise indicated. The abbreviation for chlorinated 6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads,
poly(vinyl chloride) is CPVC. threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in
accordance with 8.4.
4. Classification
6.3 Burst Pressure:
4.1 General—This specification covers Schedule 40 CPVC
6.3.1 The minimum burst strength of the fittings shall be not
pipe fittings, socket-type, intended for use with Iron Pipe Size
less than that calculated for the size and wall thickness of the
(IPS) outside-diameter plastic pipe.
pipe with which it is to be used, when calculated from the
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally
following equation:
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, unions, bushings,
caps, nipples, and the like, shall be molded or machined from S5P ~ D O 2t ! /2t
extruded stock.
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by backwelding are not included in where:
this specification. S = hoop stress, psi (or MPa),
NOTE 3—This specification does not include requirements for pipe and P = internal pressure, psi (or MPa),
fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases. DO = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), and
Fittings tested in accordance with 8.5 shall withstand the
5.1 This specification covers CPVC pipe fittings made from minimum burst pressure shown in Table 4.
compounds meeting the requirements of Class 23447 as
6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
defined in Specification D1784.
not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
NOTE 4—Mechanical strength, heat resistance, flammability, and used only as an indication of quality.
chemical resistance requirements are covered in Specification D1784.
5.2 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
6. Requirements fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
6.1.1 Fitting sockets, inside diameters (waterways), mini- 8. Test Methods
mum wall thicknesses, and dimensions shall be as shown in
Tables 1-4 and when measured in accordance with Test Method 8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6
D2122. 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less
6.1.2 When multistep reducer bushings are cored out, the than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
inner socket shall be reinforced from the outer wall by a Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required.
minimum of three ribs extending from the top of the inner 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora-
socket in the deepest extremity of the coring. The transition tory Atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
from D to DJ (Table 3) shall be straight, tapered as shown, or relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
radiused. A positive taper in the same direction of the taper in ods or in this specification.
the socket on the outside diameter of the bushing is optional.
6.1.3 The maximum angular variation of any opening shall 8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed
be not more than 1⁄2 ° off the true centerline axis. upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at
6.1.4 The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be 125 % random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size of the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
Schedule 40 pipe for which they are designed to be used, NOTE 5—For individual orders or specifications where supplemental
except that for the socket, the wall thickness shall be at least tests are required, only those tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed
equal to the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size upon between the purchaser and the seller need be conducted.
of Schedule 40 pipe. For any threaded transition fitting, the 8.4 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
minimum wall thickness of the threaded portion shall be at accordance with Specification F1498.
least equal to the thickness of material under the thread root of
threaded Schedule 80 pipe of the same size. 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
6.1.5 The minimum inside diameter of the fittings shall be in accordance with Test Method D1599. The time of testing
not less than the minimum specified inside diameter of the each specimen shall be between 60 and 70 s.
corresponding size of Schedule 40 pipe. Any fitting having a 8.5.1 Apparatus—Fittings shall be tested while held in a test
male thread shall have an internal diameter not larger than jig constructed in such a manner as to seal the socket by means
Schedule 80 pipe of the same size. of O-rings, or gaskets, but not to reinforce or support the
6.1.6 Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance. fittings, except where contact is necessary because of the shape
Tolerances on other dimensions are shown in Table 1 and Table of the fitting to keep the fitting in the test jig. Such contact shall
3. be held to the minimum. The socket plug portion of the test
255
SF-438
TABLE 1 Tapered Sockets for CPVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40, in. (mm)A
A B Wall Thickness, min Entrance, min

CB DC Outside
Nominal Socket Entrance Diameter Socket Bottom Diameter Inside
Socket Diameter
Pipe Tolerance Maximum Tolerance Maximum Diameter,
Diameter Diameter min E F of Hub, EW EX, EZ
min
ASME NM.3.1-2018
Size on Diameter Out-of-Round on Diameter Out-of-Round in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) M, min in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
256
⁄
14 0.552 (14.02) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.536 (13.6) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.500 (12.70) 0.320 (8.13) 0.088 (2.23) 0.110 (2.79) 0.672 ⁄
1 64 (0.40) ⁄
1 64 (0.40)
⁄
38 0.687 (17.45) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.671 (17.04) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.594 (15.08) 0.449 (11.40) 0.091 (2.31) 0.114 (2.90) 0.821 ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 32 (0.79)
⁄
12 0.848 (21.54) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.836 (21.23) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.688 (17.48) 0.578 (14.68) 0.109 (2.76) 0.136 (3.45) 0.998 ⁄ (0.79)
1 32 ⁄ (0.79)
1 32
⁄
34 1.058 (26.87) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 1.046 (26.57) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 0.719 (18.26) 0.740 (18.80) 0.113 (2.87) 0.141 (3.58) 1.221 ⁄ (0.79)
1 32 ⁄ (0.79)
1 32
1 1.325 (33.66) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 1.310 (33.27) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 0.875 (22.23) 0.990 (25.15) 0.133 (3.38) 0.166 (4.22) 1.504 1⁄16 (1.59) 1⁄16 (1.59)
1 1 ⁄4 1.670 (42.42) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 1.655 (42.04) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 0.938 (23.83) 1.335 (33.91) 0.140 (3.56) 0.175 (4.45) 1.871 ⁄ (1.59)
1 16 ⁄ (1.59)
1 16
1 1 ⁄2 1.912 (48.56) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.894 (48.10) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.094 (27.79) 1.564 (39.73) 0.145 (3.68) 0.181 (4.60) 2.127 ⁄ (1.59)
1 16 ⁄ (1.59)
1 16
2 2.387 (60.63) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 2.369 (60.17) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.156 (29.36) 2.021 (51.33) 0.154 (3.91) 0.193 (4.90) 2.634 1⁄16 (1.59) 1⁄16 (1.59)
2 1 ⁄2 2.889 (73.38) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 2.868 (72.85) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 1.750 (44.45) 2.414 (61.32) 0.203 (5.16) 0.254 (6.45) 3.170 ⁄ (2.38)
3 32 18 ⁄ (3.18)
3 3.516 (89.31) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 3.492 (88.70) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 1.875 (47.63) 3.008 (76.40) 0.216 (5.49) 0.270 (6.86) 3.841 ⁄ (2.38)
3 32 18 ⁄ (3.18)
3 1 ⁄2 4.016 (102.01) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 3.992 (101.40) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 2.000 (50.80) 3.486 (88.54) 0.226 (5.74) 0.283 (7.19) 4.374 3⁄32 (2.38) 18 ⁄ (3.18)
4 4.518 (114.76) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76) 4.491 (114.07) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76) 2.000 (50.80) 3.961 (100.61) 0.237 (6.02) 0.296 (7.52) 4.907 ⁄
3 32 (2.38) 18⁄ (3.18)
5 5.583 (141.81) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 5.553 (141.05) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 3.000 (76.20) 4.975 (126.37) 0.258 (6.55) 0.323 (8.20) 6.039 ⁄
3 32 (2.38) 18⁄ (3.18)
6 6.647 (168.83) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 6.614 (168.00) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 3.000 (76.20) 5.986 (152.04) 0.280 (7.11) 0.350 (8.89) 7.203 1⁄8 (3.18) 3⁄16 (4.76)
A
B
C
See 6.1.5.
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-438
TABLE 2 Minimum Dimension from Center to End of Sockets If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
(Laying Length) for Couplings, Tees, 90° and 45° Elbows, CPVC sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
specification.
10. Product Marking
10.1 Quality of Marking—The markings shall be applied to
the fittings in such a manner that they remain legible under
normal handling and installation practices.
10.2.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
10.2.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
10.2.1.2 Material designation CPVC for CPVC 23447,
10.2.1.3 The seal or mark of the laboratory making the
evaluation for potable water contact,
10.2.1.4 Size, and
10.2.1.5 ASME SF-438 or both ASME SF-438 and ASTM
Nominal Pipe G, min J, min N, min F438.
Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
⁄
14 ⁄ (7.94)
5 16 ⁄ (3.97)
5 32 ⁄
1 16 (1.59) marking, omit identification marking in the following se-
3⁄ 8 3⁄8 (9.53) 3⁄16 (4.76) 3⁄32 (2.38)
1⁄ 2 1⁄2 (12.70) 1⁄4 (6.35) 3⁄32
(2.38)
3⁄ 4 9⁄16 (14.29) 5⁄16 (7.94) 3⁄32 (2.38)
trademark.
1 11⁄16 (17.46) 5⁄16 (7.94) 3⁄32 (2.38) 10.4 Markings or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or
1 1⁄ 4 7⁄8 (22.22) 3⁄8 (9.53) 3⁄32 (2.38)
1 1⁄ 2 1 (25.40) 7⁄16 (11.11) 3⁄32 (2.38) applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as
2 11⁄4 (31.75) 5⁄8 (15.88) 3⁄32 (2.38) printing.
2 1⁄ 2 11⁄2 (38.10) 11⁄16 (17.46) 3⁄16 (4.76)
3 113⁄16 (46.04) 3⁄4 (19.05) 3⁄16 (4.76) 10.5 Where recessed marking is used, care shall be taken to
3 1⁄ 2 21⁄8 (53.98) 1 (25.40) 3⁄16 (4.76) see that in no case does marking cause cracks or reduce the
4 25⁄16 (58.74) 1 (25.40) 3⁄16 (4.76)
5 3 (76.20) 13⁄8 (34.92) 3⁄16 (4.76)
wall thickness below the minimum specified.
6 31⁄2 (88.90) 13⁄4 (44.45) 1⁄4 (6.35)
A
fixture must extend one third to two thirds of the socket depth. this specification and has been found to meet the requirements
Failure of any part of the test apparatus does not constitute of this specification.
failure of the fittings.
12. Certification
of this specification, the tests(s) shall be conducted again only 13. Keywords
by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such 13.1 CPVC; fittings; pressure; Sch 40; sockets; threads
257
SF-438 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Dimensions of Reducer Bushings, CPVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40,A in.
Nominal Outside Tolerance on Outside Diameter Tolerance on Maximum

Size Diameter Outside Diameter XB Outside Diameter Out of Roundness
XA (max. minus min.)
1⁄4 by 1⁄8 0.540 (13.72) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
⁄ by 1⁄4, 1⁄8
38 0.675 (17.41) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.675 (17.41) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 by 3⁄8, 1⁄4 0.840 (21.34) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 1⁄4 1.050 (26.67) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51)
1 by 1⁄2,3⁄4 1.315 (33.40) + 0.008 - 0.005 (0.20 - 0.13) 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1 1.660 (42.16) + 0.008 - 0.005 (0.20 - 0.13) 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4 1.900 (48.26) + 0.010 - 0.006 (0.25 - 0.15) 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2 2.375 (60.33) + 0.010 - 0.006 (0.25 - 0.15) 2.375 (60.33) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
21⁄2 by 2 2.875 (73.03) + 0.012 - 0.007 (0.30 - 0.18) 2.875 (73.03) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76)
3 by 21⁄2, 2 3.500 (88.90) + 0.013 - 0.008 (0.33 - 0.20) 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
31⁄2 by 21⁄2, 2 4.000 (101.60) + 0.013 - 0.008 (0.33 - 0.20) 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
4 by 31⁄2, 3, 21⁄2, 2 4.500 (114.30) + 0.015 - 0.009 (0.38 - 0.23) 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.030 (0.76)
5 by 4 5.563 (141.30) + 0.017 - 0.010 (0.43 - 0.25) 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52)
6 by 5 6.625 (168.28) + 0.018 - 0.011 (0.46 - 0.28) 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.070 (1.78)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only—per Symbols D2749.

for CPVC Socket-Type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
Min Burst Strength,A
Nominal Size, in. Class 23447
psi (MPa)
⁄
14 2490 (17.17)
⁄
38 1990 (13.72)
⁄
12 1910 (13.17)
⁄
34 1540 (10.62)
1 1440 (9.93)
11⁄4 1180 (8.14)

11⁄2 1060 (7.31)
2 890 (6.14)
21⁄2 970 (6.69)

3 840 (5.79)
31⁄2 770 (5.31)
4 710 (4.90)
5 620 (4.27)
6 560 (3.86)
A
This table was calculated for Schedule 40 pipe using the ISO formula and a
stress level as follows:
psi (MPa)
Class 23447 (Type IV, Grade 1 (CPVC)) 6400 (44.1)
258
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-438
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require- supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
ment:
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to convey or to
be in contact with potable water.
be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with ANSI/ required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
259
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-439
SPECIFICATION FOR CHLORINATED POLY (VINYL

CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE
80
SF-439
quirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3, renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has
261
SF-439 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80
1. Scope Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

1.1 This specification covers chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo- (CPVC) Compounds
ride) (CPVC) Schedule 80 pipe fittings. Included are require- D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
ments for materials, workmanship, dimensions, and burst moplastic Pipe and Fittings
pressure. D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
NOTE 1—The threaded CPVC fittings covered by this specification were F437 Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
covered previously in Specification F437.
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
1.2 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These plastic Pipe and Fittings
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall 2.2 Federal Standard:
not be considered as requirements of this specification. Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 2.3 Military Standard:
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only 2.4 NSF Standard:
and are not considered standard. Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related
Materials
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water System Components—
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
Health Effects
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 3. Terminology
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
tions prior to use. nology F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600, unless otherwise indicated. The abbreviation
2. Referenced Documents for chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) is CPVC.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4. Classification
4.1 General—This specification covers Schedule 80 CPVC
pipe fittings, intended for use with Iron Pipe Size (IPS)
outside-diameter plastic pipe.
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally
tics
molded. In-line fittings, such as couplings, unions, bushings,
caps, nipples, and so forth, shall be molded or machined from
extruded stock.
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by back welding or butt fusion are
not included in this specification.
262
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-439
NOTE 2—This specification does not include requirements for pipe and where:
fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases.
S = hoop stress, psi (MPa),
P = internal pressure, psi (MPa),
5. Materials and Manufacture DO = average outside diameter, in. (mm), and
5.1 This specification covers CPVC pipe fittings made from t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm).
compounds meeting the requirements of Class 23447 and Class Fittings tested in accordance with 8.5 shall withstand the
23448 as defined in Specification D1784. minimum burst pressure shown in Table 6.
NOTE 3—Mechanical strength, heat resistance and flammability re- 6.3.2 Pressures shown are minimum burst pressures and do
quirements are covered in Specification D1784. not imply rated working pressures. The burst pressure shall be
5.2 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only used only as an indication of quality.
their own clean rework fitting material, and the fittings pro-
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
6. Requirements of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The
color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
6.1.1 Fitting sockets, inside diameters (waterways), mini-
mum wall thicknesses, and dimensions shall be as shown in 8. Test Methods
Tables 1-6 when measured in accordance with Test Method
D2122. 8.1 Conditioning—Condition of test specimens at 73.4 6
6.1.2 When multistep reducer bushings are cored out, the 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 506 5 % relative humidity for not less
inner socket shall be reinforced from the outer wall by a than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
minimum of three ribs extending from the top of the inner Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required.
socket to the deepest extremity of the coring. The transition 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the standard labora-
from D to DJ (Table 3) shall be straight, tapered as shown, or tory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
radiused. A positive taper in the same direction of the taper in relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
the socket on the outside diameter of the bushing is optional ods or in this specification.
(see XA/XB in Table 3). Any point measured along the outside 8.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings as agreed
diameter of the bushing (between XA and XB) shall not fall upon between the seller and the purchaser shall be selected at
below minimum pipe OD. random from each lot or shipment and tested to determine that
6.1.3 The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be 125 % the basic design is in conformance with this specification.
of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size of
Schedule 80 pipe for which they are designed to be used, NOTE 4—For individual orders or specifications where supplemental
except that for the socket, the wall thickness shall be at least tests are required, only those tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed
upon between the purchaser and the seller need be conducted.
equal to the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size
of Schedule 80 pipe. 8.4 Threads—All taper pipe threads shall be gaged in
6.1.4 The minimum inside diameter of the fittings shall be accordance with Specification F1498.
not less than the minimum specified inside diameter of the 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
corresponding size of Schedule 80 pipe. This is calculated as in accordance with Test Method D1599, Procedure B. The time
follows: of testing each specimen shall be between 60 and 70 s.
~ minimum OD! 2 2 3 ~ maximum wall! 5 minimum ID (1)
6.1.5 Minimum dimensions have zero negative tolerance.
Tolerances on other dimensions are shown in Tables 1 and 3.
of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
6.1.6 Fitting Not Illustrated—All fittings, whether illus-
by agreement between the purchaser and the seller. Under such
trated in Tables 1-5 or not, shall maintain the dimensions
conforming to 6.1 and 6.2.
6.2 Threads—For all fittings having taper pipe threads, If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
threads shall conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
accordance with 8.4. specification.
6.3 Burst Pressure:
6.3.1 The minimum burst strength of the fittings shall be not 10. Marking
less than that calculated for the size and wall thickness of the 10.1 Quality of Marking—The markings shall be applied to
pipe with which it is to be used, when calculated from the the fitting in such a manner that they remain legible under
following equation and using a stress of 6400 psi for 8–in. and normal handling and installation practices.
smaller fittings, and a stress of 5100 psi for fittings larger than 10.2 Content of Marking:
8–in.: 10.2.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
S 5 P ~ D O 2 t ! /2t (2) 10.2.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
263
SF-439
TABLE 1 Tapered Sockets for CPVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80, in. (mm)A
A B
CB DC Wall Thickness, min Entrance, min
Nominal Socket Entrance Diameter Socket Bottom Diameter
Pipe Tolerance on Tolerance on
Size Maximum Maximum Socket Inside
Diameter Nominal Diameter Nominal E F EW EX, EZ
Out-of-Round Out-of-Round Length, min Diameter, min
Diameter Diameter
ASME NM.3.1-2018
⁄
14 0.552 (14.02) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.536 (13.61) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.625 (15.88) 0.258 (6.55) 0.119 (3.02) 0.149 (3.78) 0.02 (0.5) 0.02 (0.5)
⁄
38 0.687 (17.45) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.671 (17.04) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.750 (19.05) 0.379 (9.63) 0.126 (3.20) 0.158 (4.01) 0.03 (0.8) 0.03 (0.8)
1⁄ 2 0.848 (21.54) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.836 (21.23) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41) 0.875 (22.22) 0.502 (12.75) 0.147 (3.73) 0.184 (4.67) 0.03 (0.8) 0.03 (0.8)
264
⁄
34 1.058 (26.87) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 1.046 (26.57) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 1.000 (25.40) 0.698 (17.73) 0.154 (3.91) 0.193 (4.90) 0.03 (0.8) 0.03 (0.8)
1 1.325 (33.66) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 1.310 (33.27) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51) 1.125 (28.58) 0.910 (23.11) 0.179 (4.55) 0.224 (5.69) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5)
1 1 ⁄4 1.670 (42.42) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 1.655 (42.04) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61) 1.250 (31.75) 1.227 (31.17) 0.191 (4.85) 0.239 (6.07) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5)
1 1 ⁄2 1.912 (48.56) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.894 (48.11) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.375 (34.93) 1.446 (36.73) 0.200 (5.08) 0.250 (6.35) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5)
2 2.387 (60.63) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 2.369 (60.17) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61) 1.500 (38.10) 1.881 (47.78) 0.218 (5.54) 0.273 (6.93) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5)
2 1 ⁄2 2.889 (73.38) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 2.868 (72.85) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76) 1.750 (44.45) 2.250 (57.15) 0.276 (7.01) 0.345 (8.76) 0.09 (2.3) 0.13 (3.3)
3 3.515 (89.28) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.023 (0.58) 3.491 (88.67) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.023 (0.58) 1.875 (47.63) 2.820 (71.63) 0.300 (7.62) 0.375 (9.53) 0.09 (2.3) 0.13 (3.3)
3 1 ⁄2 4.016 (102.01) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 3.992 (101.40) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76) 2.125 (53.98) 3.280 (83.31) 0.318 (8.08) 0.398 (10.11) 0.09 (2.3) 0.13 (3.3)
4 4.517 (114.73) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.023 (0.58) 4.490 (114.04) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.023 (0.58) 2.250 (57.15) 3.737 (94.92) 0.337 (8.56) 0.420 (10.67) 0.09 (2.3) 0.13 (3.3)
5 5.583 (141.81) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 5.553 (141.05) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52) 2.625 (66.68) 4.713 (119.71) 0.375 (9.53) 0.469 (11.91) 0.09 (2.3) 0.13 (3.3)
6 6.647 (168.83) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 6.614 (168.00) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.060 (1.52) 3.000 (76.20) 5.646 (143.41) 0.432 (10.97) 0.540 (13.72) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8)
8 8.655 (219.84) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29) 8.610 ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29) 4.000 (101.60) 7.490 (190.25) 0.500 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8)
10 10.780 (273.81) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54) 10.735 (272.67) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54) 5.000 (127.00) 9.407 (238.94) 0.593 (15.06) 0.741 (18.82) 0.125 (3.18) 0.187 (4.76)
12 12.780 (324.61) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05) 12.735 (323.47) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05) 6.000 (152.40) 11.197 (284.40) 0.687 (17.45) 0.859 (21.82) 0.125 (3.18) 0.187 (4.76)
A
B
C
See 6.1.4.
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-439
TABLE 2 Minimum Dimensions from Center to End of Sockets

(Laying Length) for Couplings, Tees, 90° and 45° Elbows, CPVC
Nominal
G, min J, min N, min
Pipe Size
⁄
14 0.31 (7.9) 0.16 (4.1) 0.06 (1.5)
⁄
38 0.38 (9.7) 0.19 (4.8) 0.09 (2.3)
1⁄2 0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.4) 0.09 (2.3)
3⁄4 0.56 (14.2) 0.31 (7.9) 0.09 (2.3)
1 0.69 (17.5) 0.31 (7.9) 0.09 (2.3)
11⁄4 0.88 (22.4) 0.38 (9.7) 0.09 (2.3)
11⁄2 1.00 (25.4) 0.44 (11.2) 0.09 (2.3)
2 1.25 (31.8) 0.63 (16.0) 0.09 (2.3)
21⁄2 1.50 (38.1) 0.69 (17.5) 0.19 (4.8)
3 1.81 (46.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.19 (4.8)
31⁄2 2.13 (54.1) 1.00 (25.4) 0.19 (4.8)
4 2.31 (58.7) 1.00 (25.4) 0.19 (4.8)
5 3.00 (76.2) 1.38 (35.1) 0.19 (4.8)
6 3.50 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) 0.25 (6.4)
8 4.50 (114) 2.00 (50.8) 0.25 (6.4)
10 5.687 (144.45) 2.25 (57.15) 0.25 (6.35)
12 6.875 (174.63) 2.50 (63.50) 0.375 (9.53)
A
10.2.1.2 Material designation CPVC for CPVC 23447 and 11. Quality Assurance
designation CPVC 42 for CPVC 23448,
10.2.1.3 The seal or mark of the laboratory making the 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
evaluation for potable water contact, manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
10.2.1.4 Size, and with this specification and has been found to meet the
10.2.1.5 ASME SF-439 or both ASME SF-439 and requirements of this specification.
ASTM F439.
12. Certification
marking, omit identification marking in the following se- 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
quence: size, material designation, and the manufacturer’s
name or trademark. 13. Keywords
10.4 Markings or symbols shall be molded, hot-stamped, or 13.1 CPVC; fittings; pressure; Schedule 80; sockets; threads
applied to fittings by any other suitable method, such as
printing.

see that in no case marking causes cracks or reduces the wall
thickness below the minimum specified.
265
SF-439 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Symbols for Dimensions of Reducer Blushings, CPVC Socket-type Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80A , in. (mm)
Nominal Size Outside Diameter Tolerance on Outside Diameter Tolerance on Maximum

XA Outside Diameter XB Outside Diameter Out of Roundness
(max. minus min.)
⁄ by 1⁄8
14 0.540 (13.72) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.540 (13.72) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
⁄ by 1⁄4,1⁄8
38 0.675 (17.41) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.675 (17.41) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 by 3⁄8,1⁄4 0.840 (21.34) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 1⁄4 1.050 (26.67) + 0.007 - 0.004 (0.18 - 0.10) 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.020 (0.51)
1 by 1⁄2 , 3⁄4 1.315 (33.40) + 0.008 - 0.005 (0.20 - 0.13) 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4,1 1.660 (42.16) + 0.008 - 0.005 (0.20 - 0.13) 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (0.13) 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 by 1⁄2, 3⁄4 1, 11⁄4 1.900 (48.26) + 0.010 - 0.006 (0.25 - 0.15) 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
2 by 1⁄2 , 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2 2.375 (60.33) + 0.010 - 0.006 (0.25 - 0.15) 2.375 (60.33) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.024 (0.61)
21⁄2 by 2 2.875 (73.03) + 0.012 - 0.007 (0.30 - 0.18) 2.875 (73.03) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.030 (0.76)
3 by 21⁄2 , 2 3.500 (88.90) + 0.012 - 0.007 (0.30 - 0.18) 3.500 (88.90) ±0.007 (0.18) 0.023 (0.58)
31⁄2 by 21⁄2, 2 4.000 (101.60) + 0.013 - 0.008 (0.33 - 0.20) 4.000 (101.60) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.030 (0.76)
4 by 31⁄2 , 3, 21⁄2, 2 4.500 (114.30) + 0.014 - 0.008 (0.35 - 0.20) 4.500 (114.30) ±0.008 (0.20) 0.023 (0.58)
5 by 4 5.563 (141.30) + 0.017 - 0.010 (0.43 - 0.25) 5.563 (141.30) ±0.010 (0.25) 0.060 (1.52)
6 by 5 6.625 (168.28) + 0.018 - 0.011 (0.46 - 0.28) 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (0.28) 0.070 (1.78)
8 by 6 8.625 (219.08) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.090 (2.29)
10 by 6 10.750 (273.05) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
10 by 8 10.750 (273.05) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.100 (2.54)
12 by 6 12.750 (323.85) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 8 12.750 (323.85) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
12 by 10 12.750 (323.85) + 0.025 - 0.015 (0.64 - 0.38) 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.120 (3.05)
A
The sketches and designs of fittings are illustrative only from symbols D2749.
TABLE 4 Dimensions of 90° Ells, Tees, Crosses, 45° Elbows and Couplings (Straight Sizes), in. (mm)A,B
Center to Thread Inside Outside Thread End to

Nominal Length of Center to Thread Nominal Wall
End, 90° Elbows, Diameter Diameter Thread End of
Pipe
Tees, Crosses,
Thread, End, 45° Elbow,C of Fitting,
Thickness,
of Hub, Coupling,
Size T, min K, min F, min
H, min D, min M, min L, min
⁄
14 0.812 (20.62) 0.50 (12.70) 0.688 (17.48) 0.258 (6.55) 0.135 (3.43) 0.840 (21.34) 1.063 (27.00)
⁄
38 0.938 (23.83) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.379 (9.63) 0.144 (3.66) 1.000 (25.40) 1.063 (27.00)
1⁄ 2 1.125 (28.58) 0.64 (16.26) 0.750 (19.05) 0.502 (12.75) 0.198 (5.03) 1.280 (32.51) 1.344 (34.14)
3⁄ 4 1.250 (31.75) 0.65 (16.51) 1.000 (25.40) 0.698 (17.73) 0.207 (5.25) 1.500 (38.10) 1.500 (38.10)
1 1.500 (28.10) 0.81 (20.51) 1.125 (28.58) 0.911 (23.14) 0.225 (5.72) 1.810 (45.97) 1.688 (42.88)
1 1 ⁄4 1.750 (44.45) 0.85 (21.59) 1.313 (23.35) 1.227 (31.17) 0.261 (6.63) 2.200 (55.88) 1.750 (44.45)
1 1 ⁄2 1.938 (49.23) 0.85 (21.59) 1.438 (36.83) 1.446 (36.73) 0.270 (6.85) 2.500 (63.50) 2.000 (50.80)
2 2.250 (57.15) 0.90 (22.86) 1.625 (41.28) 1.881 (47.78) 0.297 (7.54) 3.000 (76.20) 2.063 (52.40)
2 1 ⁄2 2.688 (68.28) 1.21 (30.73) 1.938 (49.23) 2.250 (57.15) 0.315 (8.00) 3.560 (90.42) 2.625 (66.68)
3 3.063 (77.80) 1.30 (33.02) 2.125 (53.98) 2.820 (71.63) 0.405 (10.29) 4.300 (109.22) 2.750 (69.85)
4 3.625 (92.08) 1.38 (35.05) 2.625 (66.68) 3.737 (94.92) 0.450 (11.43) 5.430 (137.92) 3.000 (76.20)
6 5.125 (130.18) 1.50 (38.10) 3.250 (82.55) 5.646 (143.41) 0.504 (12.80) 7.625 (193.68) 3.250 (82.55)
A
B
Symbols for dimensions are in accordance with Symbols D2749.
C
266
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-439
TABLE 5 Dimensions of Threaded Plugs and Caps, in.A ,B
Nominal Pipe Length of Male Length of Female Width of Nominal Wall Height of Cap Height, Outside Diameter
Size Thread, S, min Thread, T, min Flats,B Q, min Thickness, F, min Head,CR, min W, min of Hub, M, min
1⁄ 4 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.625 (15.88) 0.135 (3.43) 0.188 (4.78) 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34)
3⁄ 8 0.44 (11.18) 0.50 (12.70) 0.750 (19.05) 0.144 (3.66) 0.188 (4.78) 0.688 (17.48) 1.000 (25.40)
1⁄ 2 0.53 (13.46) 0.64 (16.26) 0.938 (23.83) 0.198 (5.03) 0.188 (4.73) 0.875 (22.23) 1.280 (32.51)
3⁄ 4 0.55 (13.92) 0.65 (16.51) 1.125 (28.53) 0.207 (5.26) 0.219 (5.56) 1.000 (25.40) 1.500 (38.10)
1 0.68 (17.27) 0.81 (20.57) 1.375 (34.93) 0.225 (5.72) 0.219 (5.56) 1.188 (30.18) 1.810 (45.97)
1 1 ⁄4 0.71 (18.03) 0.85 (21.59) 1.750 (44.45) 0.261 (6.63) 0.281 (7.14) 1.250 (31.75) 2.200 (55.88)
1 1 ⁄2 0.72 (18.29) 0.85 (21.59) 1.875 (47.63) 0.270 (6.85) 0.313 (7.95) 1.250 (31.75) 2.500 (63.50)
2 0.76 (19.30) 0.90 (22.86) 1.875 (47.63) 0.297 (7.54) 0.313 (7.95) 1.375 (34.93) 3.000 (76.20)
2 1 ⁄2 1.14 (28.96) 1.21 (30.25) 1.875 (47.63) 0.369 (8.00) 0.375 (9.53) 1.625 (41.28) 3.560 (90.42)
3 1.20 (30.48) 1.30 (33.02) 2.000 (50.80) 0.405 (10.29) 0.375 (9.53) 1.750 (49.45) 4.300 (109.2)
4 1.30 (33.02) 1.38 (35.05) 2.000 (50.80) 0.450 (11.43) 0.375 (9.53) 2.000 (50.60) 5.430 (137.9)
6 1.44 (36.58) 1.50 (35.10) 2.000 (50.80) 0.504 (12.80) 0.500 (12.10) 2.125 (53.98) 7.625 (193.68)
A
B
Symbols for dimensions are in accordance with Symbols D2749.
C
At the manufacturer’s option, the head of the plug shall be hexagonal, octagonal, square, or round.

for CPVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Minimum Burst Strength
Nominal Size, in. Class 23447 and 23448
psi MPa
⁄
14 3620 24.96
3⁄8 2940 20.27
1⁄2 2720 18.75
3⁄4 2200 15.17
1 2020 13.93
11⁄4 1660 11.44
11⁄2 1510 10.41
2 1290 8.89
21⁄2 1360 9.38
3 1200 8.27
31⁄2 1110 7.65
4 1040 7.17
5 930 6.41
6 890 6.14
8 790 5.45
10 600 4.14
12 580 4.00
S1. Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer is respon- such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require- conforms to prescribed requirements.
ments specified herein. The producer may use his own or any NOTE S1.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for
other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection inspection.
and test requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure-
disapproves. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any ment:
267
SF-439 ASME NM.3.1-2018
S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
contract, the materials shall be packaged in accordance with ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
the supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at uses or endorses the products described in this document.
destination in satisfactory condition and which will be accept-
able to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall
comply with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National
Motor Freight Classification rules.
This requirement applies whenever a regulatory authority or user calls for the product to be used to convey or to be in contact with potable
water.
be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with ANSI/ required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
268
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-441/SF-441M

CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC PIPE, SCHEDULES 40 AND
80
SF-441/SF-441M
(Identical with ASTM F441/F441M-13e1 except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised
marking requirements in para. 10.2.1.5, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.)
269
SF-441/SF-441M ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80
1. Scope system shall be used independently of the other. Combining

1.1 This specification covers chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo- values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
ride) (CPVC) pipe made in Schedule 40 and 80 sizes and with the standard.
pressure-rated for water (see appendix). Included are criteria 1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
for classifying CPVC plastic pipe materials and CPVC plastic test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
pipe, a system of nomenclature for CPVC plastic pipe, and standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
requirements and test methods for materials, workmanship, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
dimensions, sustained pressure, burst pressure, flattening, and of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
extrusion quality. Methods of marking are also given. practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
NOTE 1—The CPVC pipe covered by this specification was covered tions prior to use. A specific precautionary statement is given
previously in Specification D1785. in Note 7.
pressure ratings in the appendix, are calculated from stress values obtained
from tests made on pipe 2 in. [50 mm] and smaller. However, tests on 2. Referenced Documents
larger pipe have shown these stress values to be valid.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys-
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products.
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. tics
NOTE 3—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious saftey Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
hazards should a system fail for any reason. (CPVC) Compounds
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, D1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
not be considered as requirements of the specification. moplastic Pipe and Fittings
1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
270
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-441/SF-441M
2.2 Federal Standard: NOTE 4—This specification does not include requirements for pipe
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases.
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage 5. Materials
2.4 NSF Standards: 5.1 General—Chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) plastics used
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related to make pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are
Materials categorized by means of two criteria, namely, (1) short-term
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components— strength tests and (2) long-term hydrostatic strength tests at
Health Effects both 73 and 180°F [23 and 82°C].
3. Terminology 5.2 Basic Materials:
5.2.1 Basic Materials – Short-term Tests—This specification
covers pipe made from CPVC plastics having certain physical
nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
properties as described in Specification D1784.
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for
5.2.1.1 Compound—The CPVC compounds used for this
chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) is CPVC.
pipe shall equal or exceed the classification 23447 described in
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: Specification D1784.
3.2.1 hydrostatic design stress—the estimated maximum 5.2.2 Basic Materials – Long-term Test—This specification
tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding continu- convers pipe made from CPVC plastics having certain Hydro-
ously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe static Design Bases (HDB) and Hydrostatic Design Stresses
will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal (HDS) described in Test Method D2837
hydrostatic water pressure is applied. 5.2.2.1 Compound—The CPVC compounds used for this
3.2.2 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum water pipe shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis at 73ºF [23ºC] of
pressure the pipe is capable of withstanding continuously with 4000 psi [28 MPa], , and a Hydrostatic Design Basis at 180ºF
a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. [82ºC] of either 1000 psi [7.0 MPa] or 1250 psi [8.6 MPa]
3.2.3 relation between dimensions, design stress, and pres- when evaluated in accordance with Test Method D2837
sure rating—The following expression, commonly known as 5.2.3 Standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation—–
the ISO equation, is used in this specification to relate The pipe materials designation shall consist of the material
dimensions, hydrostatic design stress, and pressure rating: designation code CPVC 4120-05 or CPVC 4120-06 for the
type of plastic.
2 S/P 5 ~ D O /t ! 2 1
NOTE 5—As per Terminology F412 (see, “code, thermoplastic pipe
where: materials designation”) the pipe materials designation code CPVC 4120 is
S = hydrostatic design stress, psi [MPa], as follows: CPVC is the abbreviation for chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride)
P = pressure rating, psi [MPa], as per Terminology D1600, 41 represents Cell Classification 23447 per
DO = average outside diameter, in. [mm], and Specification D1784, and 20 represents a HDS of 2000 psi [14 MPa] for
t = minimum wall thickness, in. [mm]. water at 73ºF (23ºC) per Test Method D2837. In addition, the -05 or -06
suffix represents a HDS of 500 psi [3.4 MPa] or 625 psi [4.3 MPa]
3.2.4 standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation respectively for water at 180ºF [82ºC] per Test Method D2837.
code—The pipe materials designation code shall consist of the 5.3 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only
abbreviation CPVC for the type of plastic, followed by the their own clean rework pipe material and the pipe produced
ASTM type and grade in Arabic numerals and the design stress shall meet all the requirements of this specification.
at 73°F [23°C] in units of 100 psi [0.7 MPa] with any decimal
figures dropped, followed by the design stress at 180°F [82°C] 6. Requirements
in units of 100 psi [0.7MPa] with any decimal figures dropped.
When the design stress code contains less than two figures, a 6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
cipher shall be used before the number. Thus a complete 6.1.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be as shown in Table
material code shall consist of four letters and six figures for 1 and Table 2 when measured in accordance with Test Method
CPVC plastic pipe materials (see Section 5). D2122. The tolerances for out-of-roundness shall apply only to
pipe prior to shipment.
4. Classification 6.1.2 Wall Thickness Range—The wall thickness range shall
4.1 General—This specification covers CPVC pipe made not exceed 12 % when measured in accordance with Test
from one (see X1.2) CPVC plastic pipe material in Schedule 40 Method D2122.
and 80 sizes. 6.2 Sustained Pressure—The pipe shall not fail, balloon,
4.2 Hydrostatic Design Stresses—This specification covers burst, or weep as defined in Test Method D1598, at the test
CPVC pipe made from CPVC plastic as defined by hydrostatic pressures given in Table 3, when tested in accordance with 8.4.
design stresses which have been developed on the basis of
long-term tests (see appendix).
271
SF-441/SF-441M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for CPVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, in. [mm]
Tolerances
(maximum minus minimum diameter)
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Schedule 40 sizes Schedule 40 sizes
31⁄2 in. and over; 3 in. and less;
Schedule 80 Schedule 80 sizes
sizes 8 in. and over 6 in. and less
⁄ [8]
14 0.540 [13.7] ±0.004 [0.10] ... 0.016 (0.41)
⁄ [10]
38 0.675 [17.1] ±0.004 [0.10] ... 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 [15] 0.840 [21.3] ±0.004 [0.10] ... 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 [20] 1.050 [26.7] ±0.004 [0.10] ... 0.020 (0.51)
1 [25] 1.315 [33.4] ±0.005 [0.13] ... 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 [32] 1.660 [42.2] ±0.005 [0.13] ... 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 [40] 1.900 [48.3] ±0.006 [0.15] ... 0.024 (0.61)
2 [50] 2.375 [60.3] ±0.006 [0.15] ... 0.024 (0.61)
21⁄2 [65] 2.875 [73.0] ±0.007 [0.18] ... 0.030 (0.76)
3 [80] 3.500 [88.9] ±0.007 [0.18] ... 0.023 (0.58)
31⁄2 [90] 4.000 [101.6] ±0.008 [0.20] 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)
4 [100] 4.500 [114.3] ±0.008 [0.20] 0.100 (2.54) 0.023 (0.58)
5 [125] 5.563 [141.3] ±0.010 [0.25] 0.100 (2.54) 0.060 (1.52)
6 [150] 6.625 [168.3] ±0.011 [0.28] 0.100 (2.54) 0.070 (1.78)
8 [200] 8.625 [219.1] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.090 (2.29)
10 [250] 10.750 [273.1] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.100 (2.54)
12 [300] 12.750 [323.9] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.120 (3.05)
14 [350] 14.000 [355.6] ±0.015 [0.380] 0.200 (5.08) ...
16 [400] 16.000 [406.4] ±0.019 [0.480] 0.320 (8.13) ...
TABLE 2 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for CPVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, in.A,B [mm]
Wall ThicknessA
Nominal Pipe Schedule 40 Schedule 80

Size Min Tolerance Min Tolerance
⁄ [8]
14 0.088 [2.24] +0.020 [0.51] 0.119 [3.02] +0.020 [0.51]
3⁄8 [10] 0.091 [2.31] +0.020 [0.51] 0.126 [3.20] +0.020 [0.51]
1⁄2 [15] 0.109 [2.77] +0.020 [0.51] 0.147 [3.73] +0.020 [0.51]
3⁄4 [20] 0.113 [2.87] +0.020 [0.51] 0.154 [3.91] +0.020 [0.51]
1 [25] 0.133 [3.38] +0.020 [0.51] 0.179 [4.55] +0.021 [0.53]
11⁄4 [32] 0.140 [3.56] +0.020 [0.51] 0.191 [4.85] +0.023 [0.58]
11⁄2 [40] 0.145 [3.68] +0.020 [0.51] 0.200 [5.08] +0.024 [0.61]
2 [50] 0.154 [3.91] +0.020 [0.51] 0.218 [5.54] +0.026 [0.66]
21⁄2 [65] 0.203 [5.16] +0.024 [0.61] 0.276 [7.01] +0.033 [0.84]
3 [80] 0.216 [5.49] +0.026 [0.66] 0.300 [7.62] +0.036 [0.91]
31⁄2 [90] 0.226 [5.74] +0.027 [0.68] 0.318 [8.08] +0.038 [0.96]
4 [100] 0.237 [6.02] +0.028 [0.71] 0.337 [8.56] +0.040 [1.02]
5 [125] 0.258 [6.55] +0.031 [0.79] 0.375 [9.52] +0.045 [1.14]
6 [150] 0.280 [7.11] +0.034 [0.86] 0.432 [10.97] +0.052 [1.32]
8 [200] 0.322 [8.18] +0.039 [0.99] 0.500 [12.70] +0.060 [1.52]
10 [250] 0.365 [9.27] +0.044 [1.12] 0.593 [15.06] +0.071 [1.80]
12 [300] 0.406 [10.31] +0.049 [1.24] 0.687 [17.45] +0.082 [2.08]
14 [350] 0.437 [11.10] +0.053 [+1.35] 0.750 [19.05] +0.090 [+2.29]
16 [400] 0.500 [12.70] +0.060 [+1.52] 0.843 [21.14] +0.101 [+2.57]
A
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the pipe at any cross section. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement.
B
These dimensions conform to nominal IPS dimensions.
6.2.1 Accelerated Regression Test—The accelerated regres- 6.3 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressures for
sion test shall be used in place of both the sustained and burst CPVC plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 4, when
pressure tests at the option of the manufacturer. The test shall determined in accordance with Test Method D1599.
be conducted in accordance with 8.4.1. The pipe shall demon-
6.4 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting,
strate a hydrostatic design basis projection at the 100 000 h
cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
intercept that meets the hydrostatic design basis category
with 8.5.
requirement (see Table 1, Test Method D2837) for the CPVC
material used in its manufacture. If the lower confidence value
at 100 000 h differs from the extrapolated LTHS value by more
than 15 % of the latter; or M in Appendix X2 (Test Method 7.1 The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free
D2837) is zero or negative; or b in the equation h = a + bf in from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects.
Appendix X1 (Test Method D2837) is positive, consider the The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
data unsuitable. color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
272
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-441/SF-441M
TABLE 3 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F 8.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of
[23°C] for CPVC 4120 Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller. In
Pressure Required for TestA case of no prior agreement, any sample selected by the testing
Nominal Pipe Schedule 40 Schedule 80 laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
Size psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
8.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
⁄ [8]
14 1640 [11 310] 2370 [16 340]
mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
⁄ [10]
38 1310 [9 030] 1930 [13 310] the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
⁄ [15]
12 1250 [8 620] 1780 [12 270] portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away from
3⁄4 [20] 1010 [6 960] 1440 [9 930]
1 [25] 950 [6 550] 1320 [9 100] an end closure.
11⁄4 [32] 770 [5 310] 1090 [7 520]
11⁄2 [40] 690 [4 760] 990 [6 830] 8.4 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at
2 [50] 580 [4 000] 850 [5 860] random. Test individually with water at the internal pressures
21⁄2 [65] 640 [4 410] 890 [6 140]
3 [80] 590 [4 070] 790 [5 450]
given in Table 3, six specimens of pipe, each specimen at least
31⁄2 [90] 500 [3 450] 730 [5 030] ten times the nominal diameter in length, but not less than 10
4 [100] 470 [3 240] 680 [4 690] in. [250 mm] or more than 3 ft [1000 mm] between end
5 [125] 410 [2 830] 610 [4 210]
6 [150] 370 [2 550] 590 [4 070]
closures and bearing the permanent marking on the pipe.
8 [200] 330 [2 280] 520 [3 590] Maintain the specimens at the pressure indicated for a period of
10 [250] 300 [2 070] 490 [3 380] 1000 h. Hold the pressure as closely as possible, but within
12 [300] 280 [1 930] 480 [3 310]
14 [350] 270 [1 890] 470 [3 290] 610 psi [669 kPa]. Condition the specimens at the test
16 [400] 270 [1 890] 470 [3 290] temperature of 736 3.6°F [23 6 2°C]. Test in accordance with
A
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is 4200 psi [29.0 MPa]. Test Method D1598, except maintain the pressure at the values
given in Table 3 for 1000 h. Evidence of failure of the pipe
shall be as defined in Test Method D1598.
TABLE 4 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F [23°C]
8.4.1 Accelerated Regression Test—Test in accordance with
for CPVC 4120 Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
procedures in Test Method D1598, using either free end or
restrained end fittings. A minimum of six specimens shall be
Nominal Pipe Schedule 40 Schedule 80
tested. Test three specimens at a single pressure that will result
Size psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
in failures at or below 0.10 h. Test an additional three
⁄ [8]
14 2490 [17 170] 3620 [24 960]
3⁄8 [10] 1990 [13 720] 2940 [20 270] specimens at a single pressure that will result in failures at
1⁄2 [15] 1910 [13 170] 2720 [18 760] about 200 h. Additional data points may be generated if
3⁄4 [20] 1540 [10 620] 2200 [15 170] necessary to improve the LTHS or LCL, or both. No points
1 [25] 1440 [9 930] 2020 [13 930]
11⁄4 [32] 1180 [8 140] 1660 [11 450] shall be excluded unless an obvious defect is detected in the
11⁄2 [40] 1060 [7 310] 1510 [10 410] failure area of the test sample, or there was an obvious
2 [50] 890 [6 140] 1290 [8 890]
21⁄2 [65] 970 [6 690] 1360 [9 380]
malfunction of the test equipment. Characterize the data using
3 [80] 840 [5 790] 1200 [8 270] the least-squares regression described in Test Method D2837.
31⁄2 [90] 770 [5 310] 1110 [7 650]
4 [100] 710 [4 900] 1040 [7 170] NOTE 7—Caution: Since the rupture of the test specimen is expected in
5 [125] 620 [4 270] 930 [6 410] quick burst and high stress regression testing, well shielded test equipment
6 [150] 560 [3 860] 890 [6 140] and protective personal equipment should be used when conducting the
8 [200] 500 [3 450] 790 [5 450] tests.
10 [250] 450 [3 100] 750 [5 170]
12 [300] 420 [2 900] 730 [5 030] 8.5 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe, 2 in.
14 [350] 410 [2 870] 720 [5 040]
16 [400] 410 [2 870] 710 [4 970] [50 mm] long, between parallel plates in a suitable press until
A
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is 6400 psi [44.1 MPa].
the distance between the plates is 40 % of the outside diameter
of the pipe or the walls of the pipe touch, whichever occurs
first. The rate of loading shall be uniform and such that the
compression is completed within 2 to 5 min. On removal of the
NOTE 6—Color and transparency or opacity should be specified in the load examine the specimens for evidence of splitting, cracking,
contract or purchase order. or breaking.
8. Test Methods 9. Retest and Rejection

8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
3.6°F [23 6 2°C] and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of by agreement between the purchaser and the seller. Under such
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered,
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the standard labora- changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
tory atmosphere of 73 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] and 50 6 5 % If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre-
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth- sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
ods or in this specification. specification.
273
SF-441/SF-441M ASME NM.3.1-2018
10. Marking 10.2.1.6 Manufacturer’s name (or trade mark) and code, and
10.1 Quality of Marking—The marking shall be applied to 10.2.1.7 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water
the pipe in such a manner that it remains legible (easily read) shall also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
after installation and inspection. evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the
laboratory.
10.2.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following, obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft [1.5 m]:
10.2.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in. [50 mm]), 11. Quality Assurance
10.2.1.2 Type of plastic pipe material in accordance with the 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
material designation code prescribed in 5.2.3, for example, manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
CPVC 4120–05. with this specification and has been found to meet the
10.2.1.3 Schedule size (40 or 80 whichever is applicable). requirements of this specification.
10.2.1.4 The pressure rating in pounds-force per square inch
for water at both 73ºF [23ºC] and 180ºF [82ºC], shown as the 12. Certification
number followed by psi and the temperature (for example, 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
“630 psi at 73ºF, 155 psi at 180ºF”). When the indicated
pressure rating is lower than that calculated in accordance with
3.2.3 (see Appendix X1), this shall be indicated by placing a
star after the pressure rating.
10.2.1.5 ASME SF-441/SF-441M or both ASME SF-441/
SF-441M and ASTM F441/F441M.
274
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-441/SF-441M
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
GOVERNMENT / MILTARY PROCUREMENT
These requirements apply only to federal/military procurement, not domestic sales of transfers.
dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-
NOTE S2.1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for –STD–129 for military agencies.
ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
S3. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure- uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ment:
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
275
SF-441/SF-441M ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1.1 The hydrostatic design stress (HDS) at 73ºF [23ºC] TABLE X1.2 Water Pressure RatingsA (PR) in psi [kPa] at 73°F
(23°C) for Schedule 80 Pipe Produced from CPVC 4120-05 and
and the hydrostatic design stress (HDS) at 180ºF [82ºC] CPVC 4120-06 Materials having an HDSB of 2000 psi [14 MPa] at
recommended by the Plastics Pipe Institute and utilizing a 73°F [23°C]
service (design) factor for water of 0.5 are used to pressure rate Nominal Unthreaded Threaded
CPVC plastic pipe for water service applications only. This Pipe Size psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
hydrostatic design stress applies only to pipe meeting all the 14⁄ [8] 1130 [7 790] 570 [3 930]
3⁄8 [10] 920 [6 340] 460 [3 170]
requirements of this specification. 1⁄2 [15] 850 [5 860] 420 [2 900]
3⁄4 [20] 690 [4 760] 340 [2 340]
X1.2 CPVC pipe materials are included based on the 1 [25] 630 [4 340] 320 [2 210]
requirements of Specification D1784 and the PPI- 11⁄4 [32] 520 [3 590] 260 [1 790]
recommended hydrostatic design stress for water at both 73ºF 11⁄2 [40] 470 [3 240] 240 [1 650]
2 [50] 400 [2 760] 200 [1 380]
[23ºC] and 180ºF [82ºC], as follows: 21⁄2 [65] 420 [2 900] 210 [1 450]
3 [80] 370 [2 550] 190 [1 310]
X1.2.1 Type IV, Grade 1 (23447), with a hydrostatic design 31⁄2 [90] 350 [2 410] 170 [1 170]
stress at 73ºF [23ºC], in water of 2000 psi [13.8 MPa], and a 4 [100] 320 [2 210] 160 [1 100]
hydrostatic design stress at 180ºF [82ºC], in water of either 500 5 [125] 290 [2 000] 140 [970]
6 [150] 280 [1 930] 140 [970]
psi [3.4 MPa] or 625 psi [4.3 MPa] shall be designated as 8 [200] 250 [1 720] 120 [830]
CPVC 4120-05 or CPVC 4120-06, respectively. 10 [250] 230 [1 590] 120 [830]
12 [300] 230 [1 590] 110 [760]
X1.3 The standard method for obtaining hydrostatic basis 14 [350] 220 [1 540] ... ...
16 [400] 220 [1 540] ... ...
for thermoplastic pipe materials is Test Method D2837. Addi-
A
tional information regarding the test method and other criteria These pressure ratings apply only to unthreaded pipe. The industry does not
recommend threading CPVC plastic pipe in Schedule 40 dimensions in normal
used in developing these hydrostatic design bases may be pipe sizes 6 in. [150 mm] and smaller.
obtained from the Plastics Pipe Institute Available from Plas- B
HDB of 4000 psi [28 MPa].
tics Pipe Institute (PPI), 105 Decker Court, Suite 825, Irving,
TX 75062, http://www.plasticpipe.org. These hydrostatic de-
sign stresses may not be suitable for materials that show a wide TABLE X1.3 Water Pressure RatingsA (PR) in psi [kPa] at 180ºF
(82ºC) for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Pipe Produced from
departure from a straight-line plot of log stress versus log time CPVC 4120-05 Material having an HDSB of 500 psi 3.4 [MPa] at
180ºF [82ºC], psi [kPa]
Nominal Pipe Unthreaded Threaded
TABLE X1.1 Water Pressure RatingsA (PR) in psi [kPa] at 73°F Size Schedule 40 Schedule 80 Schedule 80
(23°C) for Schedule 40 Pipe Produced from CPVC Materials ⁄ [8]
14 195 [1 340] 280 [1 930] 140 [970]
having an HDSC of 2000 psi [14 MPa] at 73°F [23°C] ⁄ [10]
38 155 [1 070] 230 [1 590] 115 [790]
1⁄2 [15] 150 [1 030] 210 [1 450] 105 [720]
Pressure RatingsB
3⁄4 [20] 120 [830] 170 [1 170] 85 [590]
Nominal Pipe [kPa]
1 [25] 110 [760] 155 [1 070] 80 [550]
Size psi
11⁄4 [32] 90 [620] 130 [900] 65 [450]
⁄ [8]
14 780 [5 380] 11⁄2 [40] 80 [550] 115 [790] 60 [410]
⁄ [10]
38 620 [4 270] 2 [50] 70 [480] 100 [690] 50 [340]
1⁄2 [15] 600 [4 140] 21⁄2 [65] 75 [520] 105 [720] 50 [340]
3⁄4 [20] 480 [3 310] 3 [80] 65 [450] 90 [620] 45 [310]
1 [25] 450 [3 100] 31⁄2 [90] 60 [410] 85 [590] 40 [280]
11⁄4 [32] 370 [2 550] 4 [100] 55 [380] 80 [550] 40 [280]
11⁄2 [40] 330 [2 280] 5 [125] 45 [310] 70 [480] 35 [240]
2 [50] 280 [1 930] 6 [150] 45 [310] 70 [480] 35 [240]
21⁄2 [65] 300 [2 070] 8 [200] 40 [280] 60 [410] 30 [210]
3 [80] 260 [1 790] 10 [250] 35 [240] 55 [380] 30 [210]
31⁄2 [90] 240 [1 650] 12 [300] 30 [210] 55 [380] 25 [170]
4 [100] 220 [1 520] 14 [350] 30 [210] 55 [380] 25 [170]
5 [125] 190 [1 310] 16 [400] 30 [210] 55 [380] 25 [170]
6 [150] 180 [1 240] A
8 [200] 160 [1 100] These pressure ratings apply only to unthreaded pipe. The industry does not
10 [250] 140 [970] recommend threading CPVC plastic pipe in Schedule 40 dimensions in normal
12 [300] 130 [900] pipe sizes 6 in. [150 mm] and smaller.
B
14 [350] 130 [900] HDB of 1000 psi [6.9 MPa]
16 [400] 130 [900]
A
See appendix for code designation.
B
These pressure ratings apply only to unthreaded pipe. The industry does not
recommend threading CPVC plastic pipe in Schedule 40 dimensions in nominal to failure. All the data available to date on CPVC pipe
pipe sizes 6 in. [150 mm] and smaller.
C
HDB of 4000 psi [28 MPa]. materials made in the United States exhibit a straight-line plot
under these plotting conditions.
276
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-441/SF-441M
X1.4 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the TABLE X1.4 Water Pressure RatingsA (PR) in psi [kPa] at 180ºF
(82ºC) for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Pipe Produced from
Plastics Pipe Institute are based on tests made on pipe ranging CPVC 4120-06 Material having an HDSB of 625 psi [4.3 MPa] at
in size from 1⁄2 to 2 in. 180ºF [82ºC]
Nominal Pipe Unthreaded Threaded
X1.5 The pipe is rated for use with water at 73°F [23°C] at Size Schedule 40 Schedule 80 Schedule 80
14⁄ [8] 240 [1 660] 350 [2 410] 175 [1 210]
the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.1 and 38⁄ [10] 195 [1 340] 290 [2 000] 145 [1 000]
Table X1.2. Lower pressure rating than those calculated in 1⁄2 [15] 190 [1 310] 260 [1 790] 130 [900]
3⁄4 [20] 150 [1 030] 210 [1 450] 105 [720]
accordance with 8.4 may be recommended, at the option of the
1 [25] 140 [970] 195 [1 340] 100 [690]
pipe manufacturer, in which case the pipe Schedule shall be 11⁄4 [32] 110 [760] 160 [1 100] 80 [550]
included in the marking. Experience of the industry indicates 11⁄2 [40] 100 [690] 145 [1 000] 75[520]
2 [50] 90 [620] 125[860] 60 [410]
that CPVC plastic pipe meeting the requirements of this 21⁄2 [65] 95 [660] 130 [900] 60 [410]
specification gives satisfactory service under normal conditions 3 [80] 80 [550] 110 [760] 55 [380]
for a long period at these pressure ratings. The sustained 31⁄2 [90] 75 [520] 105 [720] 50 [340]
4 [100] 70 [480] 100 [690] 50 [340]
pressure requirements are related to these ratings through the 5 [125] 55 [380] 90 [620] 45 [310]
slopes of the strength-time plots of these materials in pipe 6 [150] 55 [380] 90 [620] 45 [310]
8 [200] 50 [340] 75 [520] 40 [280]
form. 10 [250] 45 [310] 70 [480] 40 [280]
12 [300] 40 [280] 70[480] 30 [210]
X1.6 The pipe is rated for use with water at 180ºF [82ºC] at 14 [350] 40 [280] 70[480] 30 [210]
16 [400] 40 [280] 70[480] 30 [210]
the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.3 and A
These pressure ratings apply only to unthreaded pipe. The industry does not
Table X1.4 Lower pressure ratings than those calculated in recommend threading CPVC plastic pipe in Schedule 40 dimensions in normal
accordance with 8.4 may be recommended at the option of the pipe sizes 6 in. [150 mm] and smaller.
B
pipe manufacturer, in which case the pipe Schedule shall be HDB of 1250 psi [8.6 MPa.
included in the marking. Experience of the industry indicates

that CPVC plastic pipe meeting the requirements of this X1.7 These derating factors are suitable for CPVC pipe
specification gives satisfactory service under normal conditions conveying water at elevated temperatures. To determine el-
for long period at these pressure ratings. The sustained pressure evated temperature rating, multiply 73°F [23°C] pressure
requirements are related to these ratings through the slopes of rating by appropriate factor as follows (For pressure rating at
the strength-time plots of these materials in pipe form. 180°F, see Table X1.3.):
Temperature Derating Factor with 180°F HDS
of :
°F [°C] 500 psi 625 psi
73 to 80 [22.5 to 26.7] 1.00 1.00

90 [32.2] 0.91 0.91
100 [37.8] 0.82 0.83
120 [48.9] 0.65 0.70
140 [60.0] 0.50 0.57
160 [71.1] 0.40 0.44
180 [82.2] 0.25 0.31†
A
200 [93.3] 0.20
A
Consult with specific product or component manufacturers for temperature
derating factors above 180°F
†
Editorially revised in September 2013.
277
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-442/SF-442M

CHLORIDE) (CPVC) PLASTIC PIPE (SDR-PR)
SF-442/SF-442M
(Identical with ASTM F442/F442M-13e1 except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised
marking requirements in para. 10.2.1.5, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.)
279
SF-442/SF-442M ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR–PR)
1. Scope system shall be used independently of the other. Combining

1.1 This specification covers chlorinated poly(vinyl chlo- values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
ride) (CPVC) pipe made in standard thermoplastic pipe dimen- with the standard.Within the text, the SI units are shown in
sion ratios and pressure rated for water (see Appendix). brackets.
Included are criteria for classifying CPVC plastic pipe mate- 1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
rials and CPVC plastic pipe, and requirements and test meth- test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
ods for materials, workmanship, dimensions, sustained standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
pressure, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality. if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
Methods of marking are also given. of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
NOTE 1—The CPVC pipe covered by this specification was covered practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
previously in Specification D2241. tions prior to use. A specific precautionary statement is given
NOTE 2—The sustained and burst pressure test requirements and the in Note 7.
pressure ratings in the Appendix are calculated from stress values obtained
from tests made on pipe 2 in. (50 mm) and smaller. However, tests on
larger pipe have shown these stress values to be valid. 2. Referenced Documents
1.2 The products covered by this specification are intended 2.1 ASTM Standards:
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys- Under Constant Internal Pressure
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. tics
NOTE 3—Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed gases D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious saftey Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
hazards should a system fail for any reason.
(CPVC) Compounds
1.3 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These moplastic Pipe and Fittings
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall D2241 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
not be considered as requirements of the specification. Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
280
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-442/SF-442M
2.2 Federal Standard: When the design stress code contains less than two figures, a
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) cipher shall be used before the number. Thus a complete
2.3 Military Standard: material code shall consist of four letters and six figures for
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage CPVC plastic pipe materials (see Section 5, Note 5 and
2.4 NSF Standards: X1.2.1).
Materials 4. Classification
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components— 4.1 General—This specification covers CPVC pipe made
Health Effects from one CPVC plastic pipe material in six standard dimension
ratios and water pressure ratings for nonthreaded pipe.
3. Terminology
4.2 Standard Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratios
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- (SDR)—This specification covers CPVC pipe in six standard
nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi- dimension ratios, namely, 11, 13.5, 17, 21, 26, and 32.5, which
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for are uniform for all nominal pipe sizes for each material and
chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) plastic is CPVC. pressure rating. These are referred to as SDR11, SDR13.5,
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: SDR21, SDR17, SDR26, and SDR32.5, respectively. The
3.2.1 hydrostatic design stress— the estimated maximum pressure rating is uniform for all nominal pipe sizes for a given
tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding continu- CPVC pipe material and SDR (see Table X1.1).
ously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe 4.3 Hydrostatic Design Stresses—This specification covers
will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal CPVC pipe made from CPVC plastic as defined by hydrostatic
hydrostatic water pressure is applied. design stresses developed on the basis of long-term tests (see
3.2.2 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum water Appendix).
pressure the pipe is capable of withstanding continuously with NOTE 4—This standard specification does not include requirements for
a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. pipe and fittings intended to be used to vent combustion gases.
3.2.3 relation between standard dimension ratio, hydro- 5. Materials

static design stress, and pressure rating—the following 5.1 General—Chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) plastics used
expression, commonly known as the ISO equation, is used in to make pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are
this specification to relate standard dimension ratio, hydrostatic categorized by means of two criteria, namely, (1) short-term
design stress, and pressure rating: strength tests, and (2) long-term hydrostatic strength tests at
2 S/P 5 R 2 1 or 2 S/P 5 ~ D o /t ! 2 1 both 73 and 180° F [23 and 82° C].
where: 5.2 Basic Materials:
S = hydrostatic design stress, psi [MPa], 5.2.1 Basic Materials – Short-term Tests—This specification
P = pressure rating, psi [kPa], covers pipe made from CPVC plastics having certain physical
Do = average outside diameter, in. [mm] properties as described in Specification D1784.
t = minimum wall thickness, in. [mm], and 5.2.1.1 Compound—The CPVC compounds used for this
R = standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (Do /t for pipe shall equal or exceed the classification 23447 described in
CPVC pipe), also known as SDR. Specification D1784.
3.2.4 standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (SDR)— 5.2.2 Basic Materials – Long-term Test—This specification
the standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (SDR) is the convers pipe made from CPVC plastics having certain Hydro-
ratio of pipe diameter to wall thickness. For CPVC pipe it is static Design Bases (HDB) and Hydrostatic Design Stresses
calculated by dividing the average outside diameter of the pipe (HDS) described in Test Method D2837.
in millimetres or in inches by the minimum wall thickness in 5.2.2.1 Compound—The CPVC compounds used for this
millimetres or in inches. If the wall thickness calculated by this pipe shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis at 73ºF [23ºC] of
formula is less than 0.060 in. [1.52 mm], it shall be arbitrarily 4000 psi [28 MPa], and a Hydrostatic Design Basis at 180ºF
increased to 0.060 in. [1.52 mm]. The SDR values shall be [82ºC] of either 1000 psi [7.0 MPa] or 1250 psi [8.6 MPa]
rounded to the nearest 0.5. when evaluated in accordance with Test Method D2837.
5.2.3 Standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation—
3.2.5 standard thermoplastic pipe materials designation The pipe materials designation shall consist of the material
code—the pipe materials designation code shall consist of the designation code CPVC 4120-05 or CPVC 4120-06 for the
abbreviation CPVC for the type of plastic, followed by the type of plastic.
ASTM type and grade in Arabic numerals and the design stress
at 73°F [23°C] in units of 100 psi [690 kPa] with any decimal NOTE 5—As per Terminology F412 (see, “code, thermoplastic pipe
materials designation”) the pipe materials designation code CPVC 4120 is
figures dropped, followed by the design stress at 180°F [82°C] as follows: CPVC is the abbreviation for chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride)
in units of 100 psi [0.7 MPa] with any decimal figures dropped.
281
SF-442/SF-442M ASME NM.3.1-2018
as per Terminology D1600, 41 represents Cell Classification 23447 per Method D2837) is zero or negative; or b in the equation h = a
Specification D1784, and 20 represents a HDS of 2000 psi [14 MPa] for + bf in Appendix X1 (Test Method D2837) is positive, consider
water at 73ºF (23ºC) per Test Method D2837. In addition, the -05 or -06
suffix represents a HDS of 500 psi [3.4 MPa] or 625 psi [4.3 MPa]
the data unsuitable.
respectively for water at 180ºF [82ºC] per Test Method D2837. 6.3 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressures for
5.3 Rework Material—The manufacturers shall use only CPVC plastic pipe shall be as given in Table 4, when
their own clean rework pipe material and the pipe produced determined in accordance with 8.5.
shall meet all the requirements of this specification. 6.4 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting,
6. Requirements cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
with 8.6.
6.1 Dimension and Tolerances:
6.1.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler- 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
ances shall be as shown in Table 1 when measured in
accordance with Test Method D2122. The tolerances on 7.1 The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free
out-of-roundness shall apply only to pipe prior to shipment. from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects.
6.1.2 Wall Thickness—The wall thicknesses and tolerances The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
shall be as shown in Table 2 when measured in accordance color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
with Test Method D2122. NOTE 6—Color and transparency or opacity should be specified in the
6.1.3 Wall Thickness Range—The wall thickness range shall contract or purchase order.
be within 12 % when measured in accordance with Test
Method D2122. 8. Test Methods
6.2 Sustained Pressure—The pipe shall not fail, balloon, 8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 73.4 6
burst, or weep as defined in Test Method D1598 at the test 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less
pressures given in Table 3 when tested in accordance with 8.4. than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
6.2.1 Accelerated Regression Test—At the option of the Practice D618 for those tests where conditioning is required.
manufacturer, the accelerated regression test may be used as a
substitute for both pressure tests—sustained and burst. The test 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the standard
shall be conducted in accordance with 8.4.1. The pipe shall laboratory atmosphere of 73 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] and 50 6 5 %
demonstrate a hydrostatic design basis projection at the relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
100 000-h intercept that meets the hydrostatic design basis ods or in this specification.
category requirement (see Table 1, Test Method D2837) for the 8.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of
CPVC material used in its manufacture. If the lower confidence pipe shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller. In
value at 100 000 h differs from the extrapolated LTHS value by case of no prior agreement, any sample selected by the testing
more than 15 % of the latter; or M in Appendix X2 (Test laboratory shall be deemed adequate.
TABLE 1 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for CPVC Plastic Pipe

Tolerances, in. [mm]
Average Outside (maximum minus minimum diameter)
Nominal Pipe Size Diameter, SDR17
in. [mm] SDR32.5
SDR13.5
SDR26
SDR11
SDR21
For Average
⁄ [8]
14 0.540 [13.7] ±0.004 [0.10] 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄8 [10] 0.675 [17.1] ±0.004 [0.10] 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
1⁄2 [15] 0.840 [21.3] ±0.004 [0.10] 0.030 (0.76) 0.016 (0.41)
3⁄4 [20] 1.050 [26.7] ±0.004 [0.10] 0.030 (0.76) 0.020 (0.51)
1 [25] 1.315 [33.4] ±0.005 [0.13] 0.030 (0.76) 0.020 (0.51)
11⁄4 [32] 1.660 [42.2] ±0.005 [0.13] 0.030 (0.76) 0.024 (0.61)
11⁄2 [40] 1.900 [48.2] ±0.006 [0.15] 0.060 (1.52) 0.024 (0.61)
2 [50] 2.375 [60.3] ±0.006 [0.15] 0.060 (1.52) 0.024 (0.61)

21⁄2 [65] 2.875 [73.0] ±0.007 [0.18] 0.060 (1.52) 0.030 (0.76)
3 [80] 3.500 [88.9] ±0.007 [0.18] 0.060 (1.52) 0.023 (0.58)
31⁄2 [90] 4.000 [101.6] ±0.008 [0.20] 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)
4 [100] 4.500 [114.3] ±0.008 [0.20] 0.100 (2.54) 0.023 (0.58)

5 [125] 5.563 [141.3] ±0.010 [0.25] 0.100 (2.54) 0.060 (1.52)
6 [150] 6.625 [168.3] ±0.011 [0.28] 0.100 (2.54) 0.070 (1.78)
8 [200] 8.625 [219.1] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.090 (2.29)
10 [250] 10.750 [273.1] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.100 (2.54)

12 [300] 12.750 [323.9] ±0.015 [0.38] 0.150 (3.81) 0.120 (3.05)
282
TABLE 2 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for CPVC Plastic Pipe
Nominal Wall ThicknessA,B in. [mm]
Pipe SDR32.5 SDS26 SDR21 SDR17 SDR13.5 SDR11
Size,
Min Tolerance Min Tolerance Min Tolerance Min Tolerance Min Tolerance Min Tolerance
⁄ [8]
14 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 [1.52] +0.020 [0.51] 0.060 [1.52] +0.020 [0.51]
3⁄8 [10] ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.060 [1.52] +0.020 [0.51] 0.061 [1.55] +0.020 [0.51]
1⁄2 [15] ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.062 [1.57] +0.020 [0.51] 0.076 [1.93] +0.020 [0.51]
3⁄4 [20] ... ... ... ... 0.060 [1.52] +0.020 [0.51] 0.062 [1.57] +0.020 [0.51] 0.078 [1.98] +0.020 [0.51] 0.095 [2.41] +0.020 [0.51]
ASME NM.3.1-2018
1 [25] ... ... 0.060 [1.52] +0.020 [0.51] 0.063 [1.60] +0.020 [0.51] 0.077 [1.96] +0.020 [0.51] 0.097 [2.46] +0.020 [0.51] 0.119 [3.02] +0.020 [0.51]
11⁄4 [32] ... ... 0.064 [1.63] +0.020 [0.51] 0.079 [2.01] +0.020 [0.51] 0.098 [2.49] +0.020 [0.51] 0.123 [3.12] +0.020 [0.51] 0.151 [3.84] +0.020 [0.51]
11⁄2 [40] ... ... 0.073 [1.85] +0.020 [0.51] 0.090 [2.29] +0.020 [0.51] 0.112 [2.84] +0.020 [0.51] 0.141 [3.58] +0.020 [0.51] 0.173 [4.39] +0.021 [0.53]
283
2 [50] ... ... 0.091 [2.31] +0.020 [0.51] 0.113 [2.87] +0.020 [0.51] 0.140 [3.56] +0.020 [0.51] 0.176 [4.47] +0.021 [0.53] 0.216 [5.49] +0.026 [0.66]
21⁄2 [65] ... ... 0.110 [2.79] +0.020 [0.51] 0.137 [3.48] +0.020 [0.51] 0.169 [4.29] +0.020 [0.51] 0.213 [5.41] +0.026 [0.66] 0.261 [6.63] +0.031 [0.79]
3 [80] 0.108 [2.74] +0.020 [0.51] 0.135 [3.43] +0.020 [0.51] 0.167 [4.24] +0.020 [0.51] 0.206 [5.23] +0.025 [0.64] 0.259 [6.58] +0.031 [0.79] 0.318 [8.08] +0.039 [0.99]
31⁄2 [90] 0.123 [3.12] +0.020 [0.51] 0.154 [3.91] +0.020 [0.51] 0.190 [4.83] +0.023 [0.58] 0.235 [5.97] +0.028 [0.71] 0.296 [7.52] +0.036 [0.91] 0.363 [9.22] +0.044 [1.12]
4 [100] 0.138 [3.50] +0.020 [0.51] 0.173 [4.39] +0.021 [0.53] 0.214 [5.44] +0.026 [0.66] 0.265 [6.73] +0.032 [0.81] 0.333 [8.46] +0.040 [1.02] 0.409 [10.39] +0.049 [1.24]
5 [125] 0.171 [4.34] +0.021 [0.53] 0.214 [5.44] +0.027 [0.69] 0.265 [6.73] +0.032 [0.81] 0.327 [8.30] +0.039 [0.99] 0.412 [10.46] +0.049 [1.24] 0.506 [12.85] +0.061 [1.55]
6 [150] 0.204 [5.18] +0.024 [0.61] 0.255 [6.48] +0.031 [0.79] 0.316 [8.03] +0.038 [0.96] 0.390 [9.91] +0.047 [1.19] 0.491 [12.47] +0.059 [1.50] 0.602 [15.29] +0.073 [1.85]
8 [200] 0.265 [6.73] +0.032 [0.81] 0.332 [8.43] +0.040 [1.02] 0.410 [10.41] +0.049 [1.24] 0.508 [12.90] +0.061 [1.55] 0.639 [16.23] + 0.077 [1.95] 0.785 [19.94] +0.095 [2.41]
10 [250] 0.331 [8.41] +0.040 [1.02] 0.413 [10.49] +0.050 [1.27] 0.511 [12.98] +0.061 [1.55] 0.632 [16.05] +0.076 [1.93] 0.797 [20.24] + 0.096 [2.44] 0.978 [24.84] +0.118 [2.99]
12 [300] 0.392 [9.96] +0.047 [1.19] 0.490 [12.45] +0.059 [1.50] 0.606 [15.39] +0.073 [1.85] 0.750 [19.05] +0.090 [2.29] 0.945 [24.00] + 0.114 [2.89] 1.160 [29.46] +0.140 [3.56]
A
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the pipe at any cross section. All tolerances are on the plus side of the minimum requirement.
B
Where 0.060-in. [1.52 mm] wall thickness is shown, it may not be a true SDR value.
SF-442/SF-442M
SF-442/SF-442M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F malfunction of the test equipment. Characterize the data using
(23°C) for CPVC 4120 Plastic Pipe the least-squares regression described in Test Method D2837.
SDR PressureA Required for Test
NOTE 7—Caution: Since the rupture of the test specimen is expected in
psi kPa
quick burst and high stress regression testing, well shielded test equipment
11 840 [5 790] and protective personal equipment should be used when conducting the
13.5 670 [4 620]
tests.
17 530 [3 650]
21 420 [2 900] 8.5 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
26 340 [2 340]
32.5 260 [1 790]
with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method
A
D1599. The time of testing of each specimen shall be between
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is 4200 psi [29.0 MPa].
Some minor adjustments have been made to keep the test pressures uniform to 60 and 70 s.
simply testing.
8.6 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe, 2 in.
[50 mm] long, between parallel plates in a suitable press until
for CPVC 4120 Plastic Pipe of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and such that
SDR Minimum Burst PressureA
the compression is completed within 2 to 5 min. On removal of
psi kPa
the load, examine the specimens for evidence of splitting,
11 1250 [8 620]
13.5 1000 [6 890]
17 800 [5 520] 9. Retest and Rejection
21 630 [4 340]
26 500 [3 450]
32.5 400 [2 760] of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
A
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is 6400 psi [44.1 MPa]. by agreement between the purchaser and the seller. Under such
8.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci- sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of specification.
the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
10. Marking
an end closure. 10.1 Quality of Marking—The marking shall be applied to
the pipe in such a manner that it remains legible (easily read)
8.4 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at
after installation and inspection.
random. Test individually with water at the internal pressures
given in Table 3, six specimens of pipe, each specimen at least 10.2 Content of Marking:
ten times the nominal diameter in length, but not less than 10 10.2.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following,
in. [250 mm] or more than 3 ft [1000 mm] between end spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft [1.5 m]:
closures and bearing the permanent marking on the pipe. 10.2.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in. [50 mm]),
Maintain the specimens at the pressure indicated for a period of 10.2.1.2 Type of plastic pipe material in accordance with the
1000 h. Hold the pressure as closely as possible, but within designation code given in 3.2.5 (for example, CPVC 4120–05),
610 psi [670 kPa]. Condition the specimens at the test 10.2.1.3 Standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio in
temperature of 736 3.6°F [23 6 2°C]. Maintain the test accordance with the designation code given in 3.2.5 (for
temperature at 73 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C]. Test in accordance with example, SDR 13.5),
Test Method D1598, except maintain the pressure at the values 10.2.1.4 Pressure rating in pounds-force per square inch for
given in Table 3 for 1000 h. Failure of two of the six specimens water at both 73ºF [23ºC] and 180ºF [82ºC], shown as the
tested shall constitute failure in the test. Failure of one of the number followed by psi and the temperature (for example,
six specimens tested is cause for retest of six additional “400 psi at 73ºF, 100 psi at 180ºF”).
specimens. Failure of one of the six specimens tested in retest 10.2.1.5 ASME SF-442/SF-442M or both ASME SF-442/
shall constitute failure in the test. Evidence of failure of the SF-442M and ASTM F442/F442M.
pipe shall be as defined in Test Method D1598. 10.2.1.6 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and code, and
8.4.1 Accelerated Regression Test—Test in accordance 10.2.1.7 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water
with procedures in Test Method D1598, using either free end or shall also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
restrained end fittings. A minimum of six specimens shall be evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the
tested. Test three specimens at a single pressure that will result laboratory.
in failures at or below 0.10 h. Test an additional three NOTE 8—Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must
specimens at a single pressure that will result in failures at obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
about 200 h. Additional data points may be generated if
necessary to improve the LTHS or LCL, or both. No points 11. Quality Assurance
shall be excluded unless an obvious defect is detected in the 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
failure area of the test sample, or there was an obvious
284
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-442/SF-442M
manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance 12. Certification

with this specification and has been found to meet the 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
POTABLE WATER REQUIREMENTS
S1. Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and latory authority having jurisdiction.
the health effects portion of NSF Standard No. 14 by an
These requirements apply only to federal/military procurement, not domestic sales of transfers.
such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that material dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-
conforms to prescribed requirements. –STD–129 for military agencies.
NOTE S2.1—In U.S. Federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for
inspection. NOTE S3.1—The inclusion of U.S. Federal Government procurement
requirements should not be construed as an indication that the U.S.
S3. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Federal Government Federal Government uses or endorses the products described in this
Procurement: specification
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
285
SF-442/SF-442M ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1.1 The hydrostatic design stress (HDS) at 73ºF and the pressure ratings than those calculated in accordance with 3.2.2
hydrostatic design stress (HDS) at 180ºF recommended by the may be recommended, at the option of the pipe manufacturer,
Plastics Pipe Institute and utilizing a service (design) factor for in which case the SDR shall be included in the marking.
water of 0.5 are used to pressure rate CPVC plastic pipe for Experience of the industry indicates that CPVC plastic pipe
water service applications only. This hydrostatic design stress meeting the requirements of this specification gives satisfac-
applies only to pipe meeting all the requirements of this tory service under normal conditions for a long period at these
specification. pressure ratings. The sustained pressure requirements are
related to these ratings through the slopes of the strength-time
X1.2 CPVC pipe materials are included based on the plots of these materials in pipe form.
requirements of Specification D1784 and the PPI-
recommended hydrostatic design stress for water at both 73ºF X1.6 The pipe is rated for use with water at 180ºF [82ºC] at
[23ºC] and 180ºF [82ºC] as follows: the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.2 and
X1.2.1 Type IV, Grade 1 (23447), with a hydrostatic design Table X1.3 Lower pressure ratings than those calculated in
stress at 73ºF [23ºC], in water of 2000 psi [13.80 MPa], and a accordance with 8.4 may be recommended at the option of the
hydrostatic design stress at 180ºF [82ºC] in water of either 500 pipe manufacturer, in which case the SDR pipe shall be
included in the marking. Experience of the industry indicates
psi [3.4 MPa] or 625 psi [4.3 MPa] shall be designated as
that CPVC plastic pipe meeting the requirements of this
CPVC 4120-05 or CPVC 4120-06, respectively.
specification gives satisfactory service under normal conditions
X1.3 The standard method for obtaining hydrostatic basis for long period at these pressure ratings. The sustained pressure
for thermoplastic pipe materials is Test Method D2837. Addi- requirements are related to these ratings through the slopes of
tional information regarding the method of test and other the strength-time plots of these materials in pipe form.
criteria used in developing these hydrostatic design stresses X1.7 These derating factors are suitable for CPVC pipe
may be obtained from the Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI), 105 conveying water at elevated temperatures. To determine el-
Decker Court, Suite 825, Irving, TX 75062, http:// evated temperature rating, multiply 73°F [23°C] pressure
www.plasticpipe.org. These hydrostatic design stresses may rating by appropriate factor as follows:
not be suitable for materials that show a wide departure from Temperature Derating Factor
a straight-line plot of log stress versus log time to failure. All with 180°F HDS of:
the data available to date on CPVC pipe materials made in the °F °C 500 psi 625 psi
73 to 80° [23 to 26.7°] 1.0 1.00
United States exhibit a straight-line plot under these plotting 90 [32.2] 0.91 0.91
conditions. 100 [37.8] 0.82 0.83
120 [48.9] 0.65 0.70
X1.4 The hydrostatic design stresses recommended by the 140 [60] 0.50 0.57
160 [71.1] 0.40 0.44
Plastics Pipe Institute are based on tests made on pipe ranging 180 [82.2] 0.25 0.31
in size from 1⁄2 to 21⁄2 in. [12 to 65 mm]. 200 [93.3] 0.20 A
X1.5 The pipe is rated for use with water at 73°F [23°C] at A
Consult with specific product or component manufacturers for temperature
the maximum internal pressures shown in Table X1.1. Lower
286
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-442/SF-442M
TABLE X1.1 Water Pressure Ratings (PR) in psi [kPa] at 73ºF

(23ºC) for NonthreadedA SDR Pipe Produced from CPVC Material
having an HDSB of 2000 psi [14 MPa] at 73ºF [23ºC]C
SDR Pressure Rating
psi kPa
11 400 [2 760]
13.5 320† [2 170]
17 250 [1 720]
21 200 [1 380]
26 160 [1 100]
32.5D 125 [ 860]
A
These pressure ratings do not apply for threaded pipe.
B
HDB of 4000 psi [28 MPa]
C
See 5.2.3 for material designation.
D
Available only in nominal pipe size diameters of 3 to 12 in. [75 to 300 mm].
†
Editorially corrected in September 2013.

having an HDSB of 500 psi [3.4 MPa] at 180ºF [82ºC]C
SDR Pressure Rating
psi kPa
11 100 [ 690]
13.5 80 [ 550]
17 63 [ 440]
21 50 [ 350]
26 40 [ 280]
32.5D 32 [ 220]
A
B
C
D
Available only in nominal pipe size diameters of 3 to 12 in. [75 to 300 mm]

having an HDSB of 625 psi [4.3 MPa] at 180ºF [82ºC]C
SDR Pressure Rating
psi kPa
11 125 [ 860]
13.5 100 [ 690]
17 80 [ 550]
21 63 [ 440]
26 50 [ 350]
32.5D 40 [ 280]
A
B
C
D
Available only in nominal pipe size diameters of 3 to 12 in. [75 to 300 mm]
287
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-714

PIPE (DR-PR) BASED ON OUTSIDE DIAMETER
SF-714
quirements in para. 9.1.2, changes from "ANSI" to "ASME" in paras. 1.7 and 2.2 and Tables 5 and 7, and quality as-
surance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.)
289
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Outside
Diameter
1. Scope 1.8 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
1.1 This specification covers polyethylene (PE) pipe made test methods portion, Section 6, of this specification:This
in dimensions based on outside diameters of 90 mm (3.500 in.) standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
and larger. if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
1.2 Three standard outside diameter sizing systems are practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
detailed: one known as the ISO metric system, one known as tions prior to use.
the IPS system, and the other known as the DIPS system. See
5.2.5 for guidelines for special sizes. 2. Referenced Documents
1.3 The piping is intended for new construction and inser- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
tion renewal of old piping systems used for the transport of D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
water, municipal sewage, domestic sewage, industrial process by Extrusion Plastometer
liquids, effluents, slurries, etc., in both pressure and nonpres- D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
sure systems. Under Constant Internal Pressure
NOTE 1—The user should consult the manufacturer to ensure that any D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
damage to the polyethylene pipe caused by the material being transported Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
will not affect the service life beyond limits acceptable to the user. D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
1.4 All pipes produced under this specification are pressure- tics
rated. See Appendix X5 for information on pressure rating. D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
NOTE 2—References and material descriptions for PE2406, PE3406, moplastic Pipe and Fittings
PE3408 and materials having a HDB of 1450 psi have been removed from D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Specification F714 due to changes in Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3. Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
For removed designations, refer to previous editions of Specification D2321 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplas-
F714, Specification D3350, PPI TR-3 and PPI TR-4. The removal of these
materials does not affect pipelines that are in service. See Notes 9 and 9. tic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
1.5 This specification includes criteria for choice of raw Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
material, together with performance requirements and test D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
methods for determining conformance with the requirements. for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
1.6 Quality-control measures are to be taken by manufac- for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
turers. See Appendix X4 for general information on quality D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
control. tings Materials
1.7 In referee decisions, the SI units shall be used for
F585 Guide for Insertion of Flexible Polyethylene Pipe Into
metric-sized pipe and inch-pound units for pipe sized in the IPS
Existing Sewers
system (ASME B36.10) and DIPS system. In all cases, the
values given in parentheses are provided for information only. 2.2 ASME Standard:
B36.10 Standard Dimensions of Steel Pipe (IPS)
290
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-714
2.3 ISO Standards: NOTE 3—Hydrostatic design stress (HDS) ratings for PE compounds
161 Thermoplastic Pipe for the Transport of Fluids - Nomi- are in accordance with this specification and are specified in Section 4.
nal Outside Diameters and Nominal Pressures
3607 Polyethylene Pipe: Tolerances on Outside Diameters 4. Materials
and Wall Thicknesses 4.1 Polyethylene Compound—Polyethylene compounds
4427 Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings for Water Supply suitable for use in the manufacture of pipe under this specifi-
Specification cation shall meet thermoplastic materials designation codes
2.4 Federal Standard: PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or PE4710, and shall meet Table
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) 1 requirements for PE2708 or PE3608 or PE4608 or PE4710,
2.5 Military Standard: and shall meet thermal stability, brittleness temperature and
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage elongation at break requirements in accordance with Specifi-
2.6 Canadian Standard: cation D3350.
CGSB 41 GP-25M Pipe, Polyethylene for the Transport of 4.1.1 Polyethylene compounds suitable for use in the manu-
Liquids facturer of DIPS pipe per Table 2 and Table 3 are identified by
2.7 NSF/ANSI Standards: thermoplastic pipe material designation code, and shall be
Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and Related PE4710 or PE3608 in accordance with 4.1, 4.1.2 and 4.2.
Materials 4.1.2 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—Per Table
Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water Systems Components— 1, polyethylene compounds shall meet Specification
Health Effects D3350code C or E. In addition, Code C polyethylene com-
2.8 Other Documents: pounds shall have 2 to 3 percent carbon black, and Code E
PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro- polyethylene compounds shall have sufficient UV stabilizer to
static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), protect pipe from deleterious UV exposure effects during
Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required unprotected outdoor shipping and storage for at least eighteen
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate- (18) months.
rials or Pipe 4.2 Potable Water Requirement—When required by the
PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List- regulatory authority having jurisdiction, products intended for
ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested, and
Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum certified for conformance with NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 or
Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Pip- the health effects portion of NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 by an
ing Materials or Pipe acceptable certifying organization.
APWA Uniform Color Code
4.3 Rework Material—Clean polyethylene compound from
3. Terminology the manufacturer’s own pipe production that met 4.1 through
3.1 Unless otherwise specified, definitions are in accordance 4.1.2 as new compound is suitable for reextrusion into pipe,
with Terminology F412 and abbreviations are in accordance when blended with new compound of the same thermoplastic
with Terminology D1600. pipe material designation code. Pipe containing rework mate-
rial shall meet the requirements of this specification.
3.2.1 dimension ratio, hydrostatic design stress, and pres- 5. Requirements
sure rating relationship:
5.1 Workmanship—The pipe shall be homogeneous
2S throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density,
P5
~ D O /t ! 2 1 and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be
where: semimatte or glossy in appearance (depending on the PE
S = hydrostatic design stress, HDS, for water at 73°F compound) and free of chalking, sticky, or tacky material. The
(23°C), psi (or kPa or MPa), surfaces shall be free of excessive bloom, that is, slight bloom
P = pressure rating, PR, psi (or kPa or MPa), is acceptable. The pipe walls shall be free of cracks, holes,
DO = outside diameter, in. (or mm), per Tables 3, 4, or 5 blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm), per Tables 6, 7, visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity.
or 8 Holes deliberately placed in perforated pipe are acceptable.
DO/t = dimension ratio (DR). Bloom or chalking may develop in pipe exposed to direct rays
3.2.2 hydrostatic design basis and hydrostatic design
stress—the hydrostatic design stress, S, is determined by
multiplying the hydrostatic design basis (HDB) by a design
factor, DF that has a value less than 1.0.
291
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018

Requirement
PE2708 PE3608 PE4608 PE4710
Required Value
Minimum HDB at 140ºF (60ºC), psi (MPa), 800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A 800 (5.5)A
per D2837and
PPI TR-3
HDS for water at 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
73°F (23°C) psi (MPa),
per D2837 and
PPI TR-3A
Melt flow rate per D1238 #0.40 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min #0.15 g/10 min Cond. #0.15 g/10 min Cond.
190/2.16 or #20 g/10 Cond. 190/2.16 or #20 g/10 190/2.16 or #20 g/10
min Cond. 190/21.6 190/2.16 or #20 min Cond. 190/21.6 min Cond. 190/21.6
g/10
min Cond. 190/21.6
Specification D3350 Required Value
Cell Classification Property
Density 2 3 4 4
SCG Resistance 7 6 6 7
Color and UV C or E C or E C or E C or E
Stabilizer CodeB
A
B
See 4.1.1.
TABLE 2 Outside Diameters and Tolerances-DIPS Sizing System 5.2.4 Toe-In—When measured in accordance with 5.2.1, the
Outside
Minimum Maximum outside diameter at the cut end of the pipe shall not be more
Nominal Outside Outside
Size
Diameter,
Diameter, Diameter,
than 1.5 % smaller than the undistorted outside diameter.
in (mm) Measurement of the undistorted outside diameter shall be made
in. (mm) in. (mm)
no closer than 1.5 pipe diameters or 11.8 in. (300 mm),
3 3.960 (100.58) 3.942 (100.13) 3.976 (100.99)
4 4.800 (121.92) 4.778 (121.37) 4.822 (122.48)
whichever distance is less, from the cut end of the pipe.
6 6.900 (175.26) 6.869 (174.47) 6.931 (176.05) Undistorted outside diameter shall meet specifications in Table
8 9.050 (229.87) 9.009 (228.84) 9.091 (230.91) 2, Table 4, or Table 5.
10 11.100 (281.94) 11.050 (280.67) 11.150 (283.21)
12 13.200 (335.28) 13.141 (333.77) 13.259 (336.78) 5.2.5 Special Sizes—Where existing system conditions or
14 15.300 (388.62) 15.231 (386.87) 15.369 (390.37) special local requirements make other diameters or dimension
16 17.400 (441.96) 17.322 (439.97) 17.478 (443.94)
18 19.500 (495.30) 19.412 (493.07) 19.588 (497.54) ratios necessary, other sizes or dimension ratios, or both, shall
20 21.600 (548.64) 21.503 (546.17) 21.697 (551.10) be acceptable for engineered applications when mutually
24 25.800 (655.32) 25.684 (652.37) 25.916 (658.27)
30 32.000 (815.80) 31.856 (809.14) 32.144 (816.46)
agreed upon by the customer and the manufacturer, if the pipe
36 38.300 (972.82) 38.128 (968.44) 38.472 (977.19) is manufactured from plastic compounds meeting the material
42 44.500 (1130.30) 44.300 (1125.21) 44.700 (1135.38) requirements of this specification, and the strength and design
48 50.800 (1290.32) 50.571 (1284.51) 51.029 (1296.14)
requirements are calculated on the same basis as those used in
this specification. For diameters not shown in Table 2, Table 4,
or Table 5, the tolerance shall be the same percentage as that
of the sun (ultraviolet radiant energy) for extended periods and, used in the corresponding table for the next smaller listed size.
consequently, these requirements do not apply to pipe after Minimum wall thicknesses for DRs not shown in Table 3,
extended exposure to direct rays of the sun. Table 6, or Table 7 or shall be determined by dividing the
5.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: average outside diameter by the DR and rounding to three
5.2.1 Outside Diameters—These shall be in accordance decimal places for inch sized pipes or two decimal places for
with Table 2 (inch-pound units), Table 4 (SI units), Table 5 metric sized pipes, and the tolerance shall comply with 5.2.3.
(inch-pound units) or when measured in accordance with Test
5.3 Pressure Test Performance—All pipe shall meet the
Method D2122 at any point not closer than 300 mm (11.8 in.)
requirements of 5.3.2 and either 5.3.1 or 5.4.
to the cut end of a length of pipe. Conditioning to standard
temperature without regard to relative humidity is required. NOTE 4—The requirements of 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 are for laboratory
5.2.2 Wall Thicknesses—The minimum thicknesses shall be proof-testing only and should not be interpreted as applicable to in situ
in accordance with Table 3, Table 6, or Table 7 when measured testing for acceptance of installed systems. See appropriate installation
in accordance with Test Method D2122. Conditioning to and leak testing standards or manufacturer’s recommendations for field
testing procedure.
standard temperature without regard to relative humidity is
required. 5.3.1 Short-Term Pressurization—Quick burst or non-
5.2.3 Eccentricity—The wall thickness variability as mea- failure testing shall be conducted per 5.3.1.1 or 5.3.1.2. Test
sured and calculated in accordance with Test Method D2122 in pressure shall be determined per 3.2.1 except that S shall be the
any diametrical cross section of the pipe shall not exceed 12 %. prescribed hoop stress value, and P shall be test pressure.
292
TABLE 3 Minimum Wall Thickness DIPS Sizing System, in.
A
PE4710 PE3608A
PR350B PR300B PR250B PR200B PR150B PR100B PR350B PR300B PR250B PR200B PR150B PR100B
Outside 200 psi 150 psi 100 psi 350 psi 300 psi 250 psi 200 psi 150 psi 100 psi
Nominal 350 psi 300 psi 250 psi
Diameter (1380 kPa)D (1035 kPa)D (690 kPa)D (2415 kPa)D (2070 kPa)D (1725 kPa)D (1380 kPa)D (1035 kPa)D ( 690 kPa)D
Size (2415 kPa)D (2070 kPa)D (1725 kPa)D
in. (mm)C
DR 6.7 DR 7.7 DR 9 DR 11 DR 14.3 DR 21 DR 5.6 DR 6.3 DR 7.4 DR 9 DR 11.7 DR 17

3 3.960 0.591 0.514 0.440 0.360 0.277 0.189 0.707 0.629 0.535 0.440 0.338 0.233
(100.58) (15.01) (13.06) (11.18) (9.14) (7.04) (4.80) (17.96) (15.97) (13.59) (11.18) (8.59) (5.92)
4 4.800 0.761 0.623 0.533 0.436 0.336 0.229 0.857 0.762 0.649 0.533 0.410 0.282
(121.92) (18.20) (15.83) (13.54) (11.07) (8.53) (5.82) (21.77) (19.35) (16.48) (13.54) (10.41) (7.16)
6 6.900 1.030 0.896 0.767 0.627 0.483 0.329 1.232 1.095 0.932 0.767 0.590 0.406
(175.26) (26.16) (22.76) (19.48) (15.93) (12.27) (8.36) (31.30) (27.82) (23.67) (19.48) (14.99) (10.31)
8 9.050 1.351 1.175 1.006 0.823 0.633 0.431 1.616 1.437 1.223 1.006 0.774 0.532
(229.87) (34.31) (29.85) (25.55) (20.90) (16.08) (10.95) (41.05) (36.49) (31.06) (25.55) (19.66) (13.51)
10 11.100 1.657 1.441 1.233 1.009 0.776 0.529 1.982 1.762 1.500 1.233 0.949 0.653
ASME NM.3.1-2018
(281.94) (42.08) (36.62) (31.32) (25.63) (19.71) (13.44) (50.35) (44.75) (38.10) (31.32) (24.10) (16.59)
12 13.200 1.970 1.714 1.467 1.200 0.923 0.629 2.357 2.095 1.784 1.467 1.128 0.776
(335.28) (50.04) (43.54) (37.26) (30.48) (23.44) (15.98) (59.87) (53.22) (45.31) (37.26) (28.65) (19.71)
293
14 15.300 2.284 1.987 1.700 1.391 1.070 0.729 2.732 2.429 2.068 1.700 1.308 0.900
(388.62) (58.00) (50.47) (43.18) (35.33) (27.18) (18.52) (69.40) (61.69) (52.53) (43.18) (33.22) (22.86)
16 17.400 2.597 2.260 1.933 1.582 1.217 0.829 3.107 2.762 2.351 1.933 1.487 1.024
(441.96) (65.96) (57.40) (49.10) (39.67) (30.91) (21.06) (78.92) (70.15) (59.72) (49.10) (37.77) (26.01)
18 19.500 2.910 2.532 2.167 1.773 1.364 0.929 3.482 3.095 2.635 2.167 1.667 1.147
(495.30) (73.93) (64.32) (55.04) (45.03) (34.65) (23.60) (88.45) (78.62) (66.93) (55.04) (42.34) (29.13)
20 21.600 3.224 2.805 2.400 1.964 1.510 1.029 ... 3.429 2.919 2.400 1.846 1.271
(548.64) (81.89) (71.25) (60.96) (49.89) (38.35) (26.14) (87.09) (74.14) (60.96) (46.89) (32.28)
24 25.800 ... 3.351 2.867 2.345 1.804 1.229 ... ... 3.486 2.867 2.205 1.518
(655.32) (85.11) (72.82) (59.56) (45.82) (31.22) (88.54) (72.82) (56.01) (38.56)
30 32.000 ... ... 3.556 2.909 2.238 1.524 ... ... ... 3.556 2.735 1.882
(815.80) (90.32) (73.89) (56.85) (38.71) (90.32) (69.47) (47.80)
36 38.300 ... ... ... 3.482 2.678 1.824 ... ... ... ... 3.274 2.253
(972.82) (88.44) (68.02) (46.33) (83.16) (57.23)
42 44.500 ... ... ... ... 3.112 2.119 ... ... ... ... ... 2.618
(1130.30) (79.04) (53.82) (66.50)
48 50.800 ... ... ... ... 3.552 2.419 ... ... ... ... ... 2.988
(1290.32) (90.22) (61.44) (75.90)
A
Thermoplastic material designation code per 4.1.1.
B
See 9.1.7.
C
Per Table 2
D
Per 3.2.1. Values rounded to the nearest 5 kPa.
SF-714
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Outside Diameters and Tolerances with 6.1 at a test pressure determined using 2500 psi hoop
ISO Sizing System (ISO 161/1) stress for Table 1 density cell 2 materials, and 3200 psi hoop
NominalPipe Size Equivalent
Outside Diameter, stress for Table 1 density cell 3 and 4 materials.
Do, mm
5.3.2 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure—Elevated-
mm in. min maxA
temperature sustained-pressure test for each Table 1 polyeth-
90 3.543 90 90.8
110 4.331 110 111.0
ylene pipe material (material designation) used in production at
160 6.299 160 161.4 the facility shall be conducted twice annually per 6.2.
200 7.874 200 201.8
250 9.843 250 252.3 NOTE 5—Elevated temperature sustained pressure tests are intended to
280 11.024 280 282.5 verify extrusion processing and are conducted in accordance with the
315 12.402 315 317.8 manufacture’s quality program.
355 13.976 355 358.2
400 15.748 400 403.6 5.3.2.1 Passing results are (1) non-failure for all three
450 17.717 450 454.1
500 19.685 500 504.5
specimens at a time equal to or greater than the Table 8
560 22.047 560 565.0 “minimum average time before failure”, or (2) not more than
630 24.803 630 635.7 one ductile specimen failure and the average time before
710 27.953 710 716.4
800 31.496 800 807.2
failure for all three specimens shall be greater than the
900 35.433 900 908.1 specified “minimum average time before failure” for the
1000 39.370 1000 1009.0 selected Table 8 Condition. If more than one ductile failure
1200 47.244 1200 1210.8
1400 55.118 1400 1412.6 occurs before the Table 8 “minimum average time before
1600 62.992 1600 1614.4 failure”, it is permissible to conduct one retest at a Table 8
A
As specified in ISO 3607. Condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time
before failure for the material designation except that for Table
8 Condition 6 no retest is permissible. Brittle failure of any
TABLE 5 Outside Diameters and Tolerances IPS Sizing System specimen in the test sample when tested at Table 8 Condition
(ASME B36.10) 1 through 6 constitutes failure to meet this requirement and no
Nominal Pipe Equivalent,
Actual Outside Diameters, in. retest is allowed.
Size, in. mm Tolerance 5.3.2.2 Provision for retest (if needed)—The retest sample
Average
± in.
shall be three specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and
3 88.9 3.500 0.016
4 114.3 4.500 0.020 material designation from the same time frame as the test
5A 136.5 5.375 0.025 sample per 6.2. For the retest, any specimen failure before the
5 141.3 5.563 0.025
6 168.3 6.625 0.030
“minimum average time before failure” at the retest condition
7A 181.0 7.125 0.034 of lower stress and longer minimum average time before
8 219.1 8.625 0.039 failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement.
10 273.1 10.750 0.048
12 323.8 12.750 0.057 5.4 Apparent Tensile Strength at Yield—For pipe nominal
13A 339.7 13.375 0.060
14 355.6 14.000 0.063
3-in. (90-mm) diameter and larger, Short-Term Pressurization
16 406.4 16.000 0.072 requirement, 5.3.1, may be replaced by the apparent tensile
18 457.2 18.000 0.081 strength at yield requirement, 5.4. The minimum apparent
20 508.0 20.000 0.090
21.5A 546.1 21.500 0.097
tensile strength at yield when determined in accordance with
22 558.8 22.000 0.099 6.3 shall be 2520 psi (17.4 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 2
24 609.6 24.000 0.108 materials and 2900 (20.0 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 3 and
26 660.4 26.000 0.117
28 711.2 28.000 0.126
4 materials.
30 762.0 30.000 0.135
32 812.8 32.000 0.144
5.5 Quality Control—To determine compliance with Section
34 863.6 34.000 0.153 5, the number of samples specified in the test method shall be
36 914.4 36.000 0.162 tested. For quality control purposes, not for determining
42 1066.8 42.000 0.189
48 1219.2 48.000 0.216
compliance with Section 5, Requirements, it is acceptable to
54 1371.6 54.000 0.243 test individual samples.
A
Irregular size.
NOTE 6—Manufacturers conduct appropriate quality control tests at a
frequency appropriate to their manufacturing operations. See Appendix
X4.
5.3.1.1 Quick Burst—For pipe nominal 12-in. (315 mm) and
6. Test Methods
smaller diameter, rupture shall be ductile when tested in
accordance with 6.1. The minimum hoop stress shall be 2520 6.1 Short-Term Pressurization Tests—When tested to
psi (17.4 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 2 materials and 2900 psi rupture, this test is applicable to nominal 12-in. (315-mm) and
(20.0 MPa) for Table 1 density cell 3 and 4 materials. smaller pipes and is conducted in accordance with Test Method
5.3.1.2 Non-Failure—When raised to test pressure and held D1599. When tested for non-failure, this test is applicable to all
at test pressure for five (5) seconds, pipe shall not rupture, leak, pipe sizes and is conducted in accordance with Test Method
nor exhibit localized deformation when tested in accordance D1598 except that no failure will have occurred when tested at
294
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-714
TABLE 6 Minimum Wall Thickness

ISO 161 Sizing System, mm
DR
Nominal 41 32.5 26 21 17 11
Pipe Size
90 ... ... 3.5 4.3 5.3 8.2
110 ... 3.4 4.2 5.2 6.5 10.0
160 ... 4.9 6.2 7.6 9.4 14.5
200 ... 6.2 7.7 9.5 11.8 18.2
250 ... 7.7 9.6 11.9 14.7 22.7
280 ... 8.6 10.8 13.3 16.5 25.5
315 ... 9.7 12.1 15.0 18.5 28.6
355 ... 10.9 13.7 16.9 20.9 32.3
400 ... 12.3 15.4 19.0 23.5 36.4
450 ... 13.8 17.3 21.4 26.5 ...
500 ... 15.4 19.2 23.8 29.4 ...
560 ... 17.2 21.5 26.7 32.9 ...
630 ... 19.4 24.2 30.0 37.1 ...
710 ... 21.8 27.3 33.8 41.8 ...
800 ... 24.6 30.8 38.1 47.1 ...
900 ... 27.7 34.6 42.9 ... ...
1000 24.4 30.8 38.5 47.6 ... ...
1200 29.3 36.9 46.2 ... ... ...
1400 34.1 43.1 ... ... ... ...
1600 39.0 49.2 ... ... ... ...
TABLE 7 Minimum Wall Thickness

IPS Sizing System, in. (ASME B36.10)
Nominal IPS Actual Dimension Ratio
Pipe Size Pipe Size 41 32.5 26 21 17 15.5 13.5 11 9.3 9 8.3 7.3
3 3.500 0.085 0.108 0.135 0.167 0.206 0.226 0.259 0.318 0.376 0.389 0.422 0.479
4 4.500 0.110 0.138 0.173 0.214 0.265 0.290 0.333 0.409 0.484 0.500 0.542 0.616
5A 5.375 0.131 0.165 0.207 0.256 0.316 0.347 0.398 0.489 0.578 0.597 0.648 0.736
5 5.563 0.136 0.171 0.214 0.265 0.327 0.359 0.412 0.506 0.598 0.618 0.670 0.762
6 6.625 0.162 0.204 0.255 0.315 0.390 0.427 0.491 0.602 0.712 0.736 0.798 0.908
7A 7.125 0.174 0.219 0.274 0.340 0.420 0.460 0.528 0.648 0.766 0.792 0.858 0.976
8 8.625 0.210 0.265 0.332 0.411 0.507 0.556 0.639 0.784 0.927 0.958 1.039 1.182
10 10.750 0.262 0.331 0.413 0.512 0.632 0.694 0.796 0.977 1.156 1.194 1.295 1.473
12 12.750 0.310 0.392 0.490 0.607 0.750 0.823 0.944 1.159 1.371 1.417 1.536 1.747
13A 13.375 0.326 0.412 0.514 0.637 0.787 0.863 0.991 1.216 1.438 1.486 1.611 1.832
14 14.000 0.341 0.431 0.538 0.667 0.824 0.903 1.037 1.273 1.505 1.556 1.687 1.918
16 16.000 0.390 0.492 0.615 0.762 0.941 1.032 1.185 1.455 1.720 1.778 1.928 2.192
18 18.000 0.439 0.554 0.692 0.857 1.059 1.161 1.333 1.636 1.935 2.000 2.169 2.466
20 20.000 0.488 0.615 0.769 0.952 1.176 1.290 1.481 1.818 2.151 2.222 2.409 ...
21.5A 21.500 0.524 0.662 0.827 1.024 1.265 1.387 1.593 ... ... ... ... ...
22 22.000 0.537 0.677 0.846 1.048 1.294 1.419 1.630 2.000 2.366 2.444 ... ...
24 24.000 0.585 0.738 0.923 1.143 1.412 1.548 1.778 2.182 2.581 2.667 ... ...
26 26.000 0.634 0.800 1.000 1.238 1.529 1.677 1.926 2.364 2.796 ... ... ...
28 28.000 0.683 0.862 1.077 1.333 1.647 1.806 2.074 2.545 3.011 ... ... ...
30 30.000 0.732 0.923 1.154 1.429 1.765 1.935 2.222 2.727 3.226 ... ... ...
32 32.000 0.780 0.985 1.231 1.524 1.882 2.065 2.370 2.909 ... ... ... ...
34 34.000 0.829 1.046 1.308 1.619 2.000 2.194 2.519 3.091 ... ... ... ...
36 36.000 0.878 1.108 1.385 1.714 2.118 2.323 2.667 3.273 ... ... ... ...
42 42.000 1.024 1.292 1.615 2.000 2.471 2.710 ... ... ... ... ... ...
48 48.000 1.171 1.477 1.846 2.286 2.824 3.097 ... ... ... ... ... ...
54 54.000 1.317 1.662 2.077 2.571 3.176 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
Irregular size.
the test pressure and duration per 5.3.1.2. The test shall be designation). Select one Table 8 Condition for the Table 1
conducted at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) without regard to polyethylene pipe material (material designation) and test the
relative humidity. three specimen test sample in accordance with Test Method
NOTE 7—Warning: Pressurization of specimens being tested under 6.1 D1598 using water as the internal test medium.
should not commence until it is certain that all entrapped air has been bled
from the water-filled specimens. 6.3 Apparent Tensile Properties—The procedure and test
6.2 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—The equipment shall be as specified in Test Method D2290. Cut
“test sample” shall be three specimens of a generally represen- specimens from pipe. Test a minimum of five specimens at
tative pipe or tubing size produced at the manufacturer’s 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) without regard to relative humidity.
facility using the Table 1 polyethylene pipe material (material
295
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 8 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test Requirements

PE2708, PE3608, PE4608 PE4710
Condition Test Test Pressure Hoop StressB Minimum Average Time Test Pressure Hoop StressB Minimum Average Time
Temperature psi (kPa)A Before Failure psi (kPa)A Before Failure
°F (°C)A Hours Hours
1 176 (80) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200
2 176 (80) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 176 (80) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 176 (80) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 176 (80) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 176 (80) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
Test temperature tolerance ± 3.6ºF (+/- 2ºC). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (±35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa. Note:
the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) · ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
B
2S
P5
S DO
t
21 D
Where:
Do = measured outside diameter, in. (mm)
This test is applicable to all pipe of nominal 3-in. (90-mm) appurtenances where continuous markings along the pipe length may be
outside diameter and larger. undesirable. Where pipe is used as the fluid transporting conduit in a
piping system, continuous marking per 9.1 is used.
7. Retest and Rejection 9.1.2 ASME SF-714 or both ASME SF-714 and ASTM
7.1 Except as required in 5.3.2.1 or 5.3.2.2, if the results of F714.
any test(s) do not meet the requirements of this specification, 9.1.3 The thermoplastic pipe materials designation code,
the test(s) may be conducted again in accordance with an such as PE3608, in accordance with 4.1 and 4.1.1.
agreement between the purchaser and the seller. There shall be
no agreement to lower the minimum requirement of the NOTE 9—Earlier editions of Specification F714 included PE material
designations PE2406, PE3406, PE3407 and PE3408. Changes to Specifi-
specification by such means as omitting tests that are a part of cation D3350 and PPI TR-3 led to changes in thermoplastic material
the specification, substituting or modifying a test method, or by designation codes, resulting in material designation PE2406 being super-
changing the specification limits. In retesting, the product seded by material designations PE2606 and PE2708, material designation
requirements of this specification shall be met, and the test PE3406 being superseded by PE3606, material designation PE3407 being
methods designated in the specification shall be followed. If, discontinued, and material designation PE3408 being superseded by
material designations PE3608, PE3708, PE3710, PE4708 and PE4710.
upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product represented Recognizing that a period of time is necessary for the dissemination of
by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this specifi- information and to update specifications and literature, during the transi-
cation. tional period, product markings that include both older and newer
materials designations, for example PE2406/PE2606, may occur.
8. Certification 9.1.4 Nominal pipe outside diameter in mm or inches in
8.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1. accordance with Table 4, Table 5, or Table 2, and the
designated sizing system: “XX mm ISO,” or“ XX in IPS,” or
9. Marking “XX in DIPS.” For metric outside diameter pipe, the omission
9.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following and of “ISO” is acceptable, and for inch sized outside diameter
shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m). pipe, omitting “in” or using a double-quotation mark (“) are
9.1.1 Markings placed at each end of each shipped length acceptable.
are acceptable by agreement between the manufacturer and the 9.1.5 For ISO (metric) and IPS sizing system pipe, the
purchaser. dimension ratio, DR, as “DR YY” where “YY” is the numeri-
cal value of the dimension ratio.
NOTE 8—End of pipe markings are intended for use only per a
manufacturer-purchaser agreement where pipe is to be used as a subcom- 9.1.6 For ISO (metric) and IPS sizing system pipe, a
ponent by the purchaser for the manufacture of another product such as marking for pressure rating is optional. In kilopascals, the
fabricated fittings, transition fittings, coupling devices or other piping marking for pressure rating per 3.2.1is shown as “ZZZ kPa”
296
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-714
where “ZZZ” is the numerical value of the pressure rating for service; green identifies sewer (wastewater) service; and purple
water in kPa. In pounds-force per square inch, the marking for (violet, lavender) identifies reclaimed water service. Yellow
pressure rating per 3.2.1 is shown as “WWW psi” or that identifies gas service shall not be used.
“PRWWW” where “WWW” is the numerical value of the 9.3 Markings that identify gas, communications or electrical
pressure rating for water in psi. (Appendix X5). use are prohibited.
9.1.7 DIPS sizing system pipe shall be marked with the
pressure rating for water expressed as “PRZZZ” where
“PRZZZ” shall be in accordance with Table 8 for the appli-
cable thermoplastic material designation code. 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
9.1.8 Name or trademark of the manufacturer. manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
9.1.9 Production code from which location and date of with this specification and has been found to meet the
manufacturer can be identified. requirements of this specification.
also include the seal or mark of the accredited laboratory. (See
4.3.) 11. Keywords
9.2 When color identifies piping service in accordance with 11.1 industrial pipe; non-pressure pipe; plastic pipe; poly-
the APWA Uniform Color Code, blue identifies potable water ethylene pipe; pressure pipe; sewer pipe; water pipe
These requirements apply onlyto federal/military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.
S1. Responsibility for Inspection— Unless otherwise speci- S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the
and test requirements specified herein, unless the purchaser comply with Un iform Freight Classification rules on National
NOTE S1.1—In federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for 129 for military agencies.
ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure- uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ment
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
297
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIXES
X1. GENERAL INFORMATION
X1.1 It has been demonstrated that pipe stiffness is not a X1.1.1 For those wishing to use deflection control in un-
controlling factor in design of buried polyethylene piping pressurized polyethylene piping systems for construction
systems installed in accordance with Practice D2321 or equiva- specification purposes, the following information is provided.
lent recommended practices (1-15).
X2. DEFLECTION CONTROL IN UNPRESSURIZED POLYETHYLENE PIPING SYSTEMS
X2.1 Control of deflection is achieved primarily through PS = pipe stiffness = 4.472E/(SDR-1)3 where E is the
control of the earthwork surrounding buried systems. Practice flexural modulus of its pipe material (see Section 4 of
D2321 should be followed to achieve this control. All dimen- this specification), psi (or kPa), and
sions of pipe specified in this specification may be successfully E1 = modulus of soil reaction, depending on soil strength
installed if this practice is followed. and degree of compaction, psi (or kPa).
NOTE X2.1—Pipe stiffness (PS) may also be determined by measure-
X2.2 When polyethylene pipe is to be installed by insertion ment for datum at a constant 5 % deflection by Test Method D2412. See
into older existing pipes or is to be laid where no support from appendix to Test Method D2412 for correction of this test value to other
the surrounding environment is possible, Practice F585 should deflection levels.
be followed in making a selection of appropriate dimension
X2.4 For purposes of this calculation, the pipe stiffness
ratio pipe from this specification.
values given in Table X2.1 may be used. For specific data on
X2.3 The appropriate degree of deflection in buried piping particular products, consult the manufacturer’s literature.
may be calculated using the modified Spangler formula.
De K Wc TABLE X2.1 Pipe Stiffness Ranges for Specified Materials and
X5 1 DR’s, psi
0.149 PS10.061 E
DR
where: Modulus,
X = deflection (horizontal or vertical), in. (or mm), Cell 41 32.5 26 21 17 11
Classification
K = bedding constant, dependent on the support the pipe
receives from the bottom of the trench 3 2–6 6–11 11–23 22–45 71–87 179–358
(dimensionless), 4 6–8 11–16 23–31 45–61 87–120 358–492
De = deflection lag factor (dimensionless), 5 8–11 16–23 31–46 61–89 120–175 492–716
Wc = vertical load per unit of pipe length, lbf/in. (or N/m) of
pipe,
298
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-714
X3. ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION LIMITS
X3.1 Research reports, including case histories supporting TABLE X3.1 Allowable Deflection of Buried Polyethylene Pipe,
the following information, are on file at ASTM Headquarters. Short Term, %
DR Allowable Deflection
X3.2 When said support is achieved, polyethylene pipes 41 10.9
32.5 8.6
made to this specification may deflect or otherwise distort 26 6.5
without kinking or buckling, and remain structurally stable up 21 5.0
to 20 % or more of the vertical diameter. However, the lower 17 4.0
11 3.3
the DR, the lower is the amount of deflection which should be
permitted to ensure that long-term structural integrity is main-
tained. The pipe manufacturer should be consulted for the safe X3.4 When polyethylene piping is subject to live external
value for the particular pipe material involved. In the absence loading at buried depths of less than 4 ft (1200 mm), special
of specific data on a particular pipe material, Table X3.1 precautions to ensure strong supporting soil conditions should
provides safe values for conventional polyethylene pipe mate- be taken.
rials. These values provide a safety factor of at least two
against loss of structural integrity. X3.5 Polyethylene pipes having high DR’s will require
more careful handling in storage, transport, and installation to
X3.3 If there is noexternal support around the pipe, struc- avoid inducing pre-installation deflection. Kinking of pipe
tural integrity of the pipe is likely to be lost due to buckling if should be considered destructive damage and sections which
deflection exceeds 10 %. For selection of proper DR, see have been kinked should not be installed, even though no
Practice F585. leakage is observed.
X4. QUALITY CONTROL
X4.1 Visual inspection of every length of pipe for work- requirements of Section 5 of this specification.
manship defects shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s
plant. Measurements of outside diameter and wall thickness X4.3 Manufacturers of pipe shall conduct such other quality
shall be made for each hour’s production or each length of control tests as are appropriate to their manufacturing opera-
pipe, whichever is less frequent. Tests for apparent tensile tions and which will provide assurance that the product
properties shall be carried out as agreed upon between the requirements of 5.3 will be met instead of the actual perfor-
manufacturer and the purchaser. mance of the specified tests.
NOTE X4.1—The pressure tests required under product requirements
are tests for performance. These tests are not adaptable to inplant quality
X4.2 Lengths of pipe that are shorter than standard shipping control. Quality control tests have not been standardized because the
lengths may be butt-fused to produce standard lengths. Such requirements for such tests vary substantially from one manufacturing
built-up lengths must otherwise meet all of the product plant to another.
299
SF-714 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X5. PIPE PRESSURE RATING
X5.1 Pipe meeting the requirements of this specification is specified in Codes or Regulations or by the authority having
pressure rated for water in accordance with 3.2.1 at the jurisdiction. When used at elevated temperatures (temperatures
maximum internal pressures in Table X5.1. Pressure ratings above 80°F (27°C)), elevated temperature stress ratings for the
lower than those in Table X5.1 may be recommended by the material are used to determine pressure rating. The actual
pipe manufacturer or may be determined by the system choice of pressure rating for a particular application rests with
designer for special or unusual application conditions such as the system designer, taking into account applicable Codes and
those described in X5.2. Industry experience indicates that PE Regulations, transportation and on-site handling conditions,
plastic pipe meeting the requirements of this specification that the quality of installation, the fluid being transported, the
is handled with reasonable care, installed in accordance with external environment, and the possibility of deviation from
applicable standards, and operated under normal service con- design operating conditions of internal pressure or external
ditions gives satisfactory long-term service at the pressure load. A reduced pressure rating should be applied at the
ratings in Table X5.1.
designing engineer’s discretion where warranted by consider-
X5.2 Pressure ratings for a particular application can vary ation of these or other conditions for the particular application.
from standard ratings for water service depending on actual Users should consult the pipe manufacturer for elevated
application conditions. Pressure rating should be reduced for temperature and other information relating to pipe performance
systems operating under special or unusual conditions or where in various applications and application conditions. Information
the pipe transports fluids that are known to have some is also available from the Plastics Pipe Institute, PPI.
degrading effect on the properties of polyethylene or where
TABLE X5.1 PE Plastic Pipe Pressure Ratings (PR) for Water

Thermoplastic Pipe Material Designation Code
PE2708
PE Pipe Material PE4710 PE3608
PE4608
HDS,A psi (kPa) HDS,A psi (kPa)
1000 psi (6890 kPa) 800 psi (5520 kPa)
Pipe DR Pressure Rating, psi (kPa)
7.3 317 (2190) 254 (1750)
8.3 274 (1890) 219 (1510)
9 250 (1720) 200 (1380)
9.3 241 (1660) 193 (1330)
11 200 (1380) 160 (1100)
13.5 160 (1100) 128 (880)
15.5 138 (950) 110 (760)
17 125 (860) 100 (690)
21 100 (690) 80 (550)
26 80 (550) 64 (440)
32.5 63 (430) 51 (350)
41 50 (340) 40 (280)
A
HDS for water at 73°F (23°C) per 3.2.1 and 4.1.1.
300
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTROFUSION TYPE

POLYETHYLENE FITTINGS FOR OUTSIDE DIAMETER
CONTROLLED POLYETHYLENE AND CROSSLINKED
POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPE AND TUBING
SF-1055
mandatory.)
301
SF-1055 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter Controlled Polyethylene and Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing
1. Scope D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure

1.1 This specification covers electrofusion polyethylene fit- Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
tings for use with outside diameter-controlled polyethylene D2737 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
pipe, covered by Specifications D2513, D2737, D3035, and D3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
F714 and crosslinked polyethylene (PEX), covered by Speci- PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
fication F2788. Requirements for materials, workmanship, and D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
testing performance are included. All requirements for joining tings Materials
PE electrofusion fittings to PE pipe shall also apply to joining F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
PE electrofusion fittings to PEX pipe. Where applicable in this F714 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
specification “pipe” shall mean “pipe” or “tubing.” PR) Based on Outside Diameter
F905 Practice for Qualification of Polyethylene Saddle-
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Fused Joints
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical F1473 Test Method for Notch Tensile Test to Measure the
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
and are not considered standard. and Resins
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the F2788 Specification for Metric-sized Crosslinked Polyethyl-
test method portion, Section 9, of this specification: This ene (PEX) Pipe
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 2.2 PPI Standards:
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro-
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB),
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
tions prior to use. Strength (MRS) Rating for Thermoplastic Piping Materi-
als or Pipe
2. Referenced Documents PPI TR-4 HDB/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials, PPI List-
2.1 ASTM Standards: ing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Strength Design
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS)
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Rating for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic 3. Terminology
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
tics nology D1600, unless otherwise specified.
3.2.1 electrofusion—a heat fusion joining process where the
heat source is an integral part of the fitting, such that when
electric current is applied, heat is produced that melts and joins
the plastics.
302
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
TABLE 1 Specification D3350 Classification Requirements of

Polyethylene Electrofusion Fitting Materials
Cell Classification and Properties for Polyethylene
Physical Properties Materials
PE2708 PE4710
Density 2 4
Melt Index 3 or 4 4
Flexural Modulus $4 $5
Tensile Strength $3 $4
Slow Crack Growth Re- 7 7
sistance (F1473)
Hydrostatic Strength 3 4
Classification
Color and UV Stabilizer C or E C or E
HDB at 73°F (23°C), psi 1250 (8.62) 1600 (11.03)
(MPa)
FIG. 1 Correct Wire Termination Coupling–Single Coil

3.2.2 fusion interface—surface in the heat fusion process
where the plastic materials of the products being joined bond
together.
3.2.3 fusion zone length—total length of the melted material
in the fitting cross-section under evaluation.
4.1 This specification covers fittings made from polyethyl-
ene compounds as defined in Specification D3350.
4.1.1 Polyethylene material compounds suitable for use in
the manufacture of electrofusion fittings under this specifica-
tion shall meet Specification D3350 and shall meet Specifica-
tion D3350 classification and property requirements shown in
Table 1 and shall have PPI TR-4 HDB and HDS listings at
73°F (23°C) and HDB listings at 140°F (60°C). FIG. 2 Correct Wire Termination Coupling–Dual Coil
4.2 Rework Material—Clean rework polyethylene material

of the same resin, free of any wire or contaminants generated
from the fitting manufacturer’s own production, may be used
by the same manufacturer, as long as the fittings produced
conform to the requirements of this specification.
4.3 Heating Mechanism—The heat mechanism shall be of
materials and design not detrimental to the performance of the
fitting or the pipe to which it is intended to be joined. Heating
mechanisms, such as wires or materials other than
polyethylene, shall not exit the fitting in an area exposed to
internal pressure. Heat mechanisms shall be of a design that
ensures that wire terminations are toward the outer edges of the
fusion zone length and away from the pressure containing area.
Examples of acceptable and unacceptable wire terminations are
shown in Figs. 1-5.
FIG. 3 Correct Wire Termination–Saddle Fitting
5. Performance Requirements
5.1 The following requirements are for electrofusion joints
that have been joined using the manufacturer’s recommended
joining procedures. These requirements must be met by each 5.1.1 It is not required that each configuration of a fitting be
electrofusion joint design, on each size and type of pipe tested to meet all of these qualifications (that is, 2 in. main
material for which the manufacturer recommends use of his saddle joint with multiple outlet configurations offered) as long
fitting. Any revisions to the electrofusion joint design or as the electrofusion joint design is not altered in the configu-
processing by the manufacturer after the initial testing requires ration differences.
retesting to ensure these requirements can still be met. Fittings
NOTE 1—It is permissible when accomplishing these tests, to do so on
intended for use in the distribution of natural gas or liquid the highest and lowest dimension ratio of the same pipe material. If in
petroleum gas shall also meet the requirements of Specification those tests all performance requirements are met, all dimension ratios
D2513. between those tested may be considered as having met the requirements.
303
SF-1055 ASME NM.3.1-2018
contain test requirements, the test pressure, minimum time-to-

failure and test temperature shall be as shown in Table 2.
5.3 Tensile Strength Requirements (Coupling Type Joints
Only)—The fitting or the pipe to fitting joint made on pipe shall
not fail when tested in accordance with 9.3. Specimens shall be
subjected to a tensile stress that causes the pipe to yield to an
elongation no less than 25 % or causes the pipe to break
outside the joint area. Tensile tests must be made on specimens
as joined, not on straps cut from the specimen. Yielding must
be measured only in the pipe, independent of the fitting or joint.
5.4 Impact Resistance (Saddle Type Joints Only)—The joint
made on the specimen shall not fail when impacted with a force
sufficient to break the body or other portion of the specimen.
Tests of 500 ft·lbf or higher impact with no failures noted shall
be considered as a “pass” impact test. The device for testing
and the methods shall be as defined in Practice F905.
5.5 Joint Integrity Tests—(Couplings and Saddle Type
FIG. 4 Incorrect Wire Termination Coupling–Dual Coil
Joints)—The joint made on the specimen shall meet the
requirements in 9.4 and 9.5 of this specification, when tested in
6. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations

6.1 Dimension and tolerances of electrofusion fittings must
be such that heat fusion is possible to outside diameter (OD)
controlled PE pipes such as those listed in Specifications
D2513, D2737, D3035, and F714 and PEX pipes listed in
Specification F2788, such that the joints will satisfy the
performance requirements in Section 5.
6.2 Because of the varying designs for electrofusion fittings,
the actual spread of dimensions may be quite different from
manufacturer to manufacturer. A table of dimensions and
tolerances encompassing these differences would be meaning-
FIG. 5 Incorrect Wire Termination Saddle–Single Coil less and without value and, therefore, is omitted from this
specification.
6.3 The manufacturer shall furnish to the user the electrical
These tests do not have to cover the full range of dimension ratios resistance, critical dimensions, and tolerances of his fittings.
available, only the dimension ratio range on which the manufacturer This information must include at least the following dimen-
recommends his fitting be used.
sions and tolerances:
5.2 Pressure Requirements: 6.3.1 Coupling inside diameter,
5.2.1 Minimum Hydraulic Burst Pressure—The fitting and 6.3.2 Temperature joining limits, and
fused joint shall not fail when tested in accordance with 9.1. 6.3.3 Operating pressure of the fitting.
The minimum hydraulic burst pressure of the test specimen
NOTE 2—There are other items that fall beyond the scope of this
shall not be less than that required to produce the minimum specification which would be of interest to the user for proper application
fiber stress in the pipe as required by the controlling pipe of the fittings and is recommended as additional information to be
standard for the type of pipe used in the test. In no case shall furnished. A few of these are: (1) maximum pipe out of round allowed at
the minimum hydraulic burst pressure be less than that required joint area; (2) minimum/maximum pipe SDR capability of the fitting, and
to produce 2520 psi (17.4 MPa) fiber stress in the pipe for (3) for saddles intended for use on a live main, the maximum allowable
line pressure when making the joint.
medium density PE (density cell 2) and 2900 psi (20 MPa)
fiber stress in the pipe for high density PE (density cell 3 or 4) 7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
test specimens when tested in accordance with 9.1. The test
equipment, procedures, and failures definitions shall be as 7.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
specified in Test Method D1599. with good commercial practice so as to produce fittings
5.2.2 Sustained Pressure—The fitting and fused joint shall meeting the requirements of this specification.
not fail when tested in accordance with 9.2. The test pressure, 7.2 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout, except
minimum time-to-failure, and test temperature shall be as where a heating coil or electrical connectors are incorporated,
required by the controlling pipe standard for the type of pipe and free of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or injurious
used in the test. If a pipe standard is not specified, or does not defects such as gouges, dents, cuts, etc. The fittings shall be as
304
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
TABLE 2 Supplemental Sustained Pressure Test Requirements for the Pipe Material Being Tested
PE2408, PE2706, PE2708 PE3408, PE3608, PE3708, PE3710, PE4708,
PE4710
Condition Test Temperature °C Test Pressure Hoop Minimum Average Time Test Pressure Hoop Minimum Average Time
(°F)A Stress Before Failure Hours Stress Before Failure Hours
psiB psiB
(kPa)A (kPa) A
1 80 (176) 670 (4620) 170 750 (5170) 200

2 80 (176) 650 (4480) 340 730 (5020) 400
3 80 (176) 630 (4345) 510 705 (4870) 600
4 80 (176) 610 (4210) 680 685 (4715) 800
5 80 (176) 590 (4070) 850 660 (4565) 1000
6 80 (176) 580 (4000) 1000 640 (4415) 1200
A
Test temperature tolerance ± 2 °C (± 3.6°F). Test pressure tolerance ± 5 psi (± 35 kPa); test pressure hoop stress values are rounded to the nearest 5 psi or 5 kPa.
Table 2 conditions are based on PE validation requirements per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 hoop stress and six times greater minimum average
time before failure. Conditions 2 through 5 are linear stress and time interpolations between Condition 1 and 6. The intent of multiple conditions is to maintain equivalent
performance criteria, but provide for retest in the event of a ductile failure. The test pressure hoop stress levels for Conditions 2-5 are linear interpolations for arbitrarily
chosen time increments. An equivalent performance requirement, however, may be determined by arbitrarily choosing a test pressure hoop stress between Conditions 1
and 6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For example for PE4710 material, at 670 psi test pressure hoop stress, the minimum average
time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) · ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927.
B
2S
P5
S DDo
t21
where:
S = test pressure hoop stress, psi (kPa)
Do = measured outside pipe diameter, in. (mm)
t = measured minimum pipe wall thickness, in (mm)
uniform as commercially practicable in opacity, density, and 8.3.2 Fuse all fitting outlets with the appropriate size pipe in
other physical properties. Any heating coils, connecting cables, accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
connectors, and related electrical power source shall be de- 8.3.3 All saddle fusion joint specimens conditioned as in
signed to prevent electrical shock to the user. 8.1.2 and destined for quick burst testing as in 9.1 and
sustained pressure testing as in 9.2, are to be joined with the
8. Specimen Preparation pipe at no less than maximum allowable operating pressure of
8.1 Conditioning: the pipe system or fitting, whichever is lowest, when being
8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, condition the specimens prepared for those tests. The pipe should be left under pressure
(pipe and fittings) prior to joining at the minimum pipe for a time period not less than recommended by the manufac-
temperature allowable for fusion as recommended by the turer for cooling in the field prior to disturbing the joint. Saddle
manufacturer, for not less than 16 h and make the fusion joint joint specimens destined for mechanical/destructive type tests
at that temperature for those tests where conditioning is such as impact as in 5.4 or crush tests as in 9.4, or specimens
required. conditioned for cold temperature joining as in 8.1.1, may be
8.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, condition the specimens made on unpressured pipe specimens.
(pipe and fittings) prior to joining at the maximum pipe
temperature allowable for fusion as recommended by the 9. Test Methods
manufacturer, for not less than 16 h and make the fusion joint 9.1 Minimum Hydraulic Burst Pressure Test:
at that temperature for those tests where conditioning is
9.1.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
required.
in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens,
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the Standard condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
Laboratory Temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) unless 8.1.2.
otherwise specified. 9.1.2 Test the specimens in accordance with Test Method
8.3 Preparation of Specimens for Testing: D1599.
8.3.1 Prepare test specimens so that the minimum length of 9.1.3 Failure of the fitting or joint shall constitute specimen
unreinforced pipe on one side of any fitting is equal to three failure.
times the diameter of the pipe, but in no case less than 12 in. 9.1.4 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall consti-
(304 mm). It is permissible to test multiple fittings together tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the four specimens
provided they are separated by a minimum distance equal to tested is cause for retest of four additional specimens, joined at
three times the diameter of the pipe, but in no case less than 12 the failed specimens joining temperature. Failure of any of
in. (304 mm). these four additional specimens constitutes a failure of the test.
305
SF-1055 ASME NM.3.1-2018
9.2 Sustained Pressure Test:

in accordance with Section 8 of this specification. From the
four specimens, condition two specimens each in accordance
with 8.1.1 and 8.1.2.
9.2.2 Test the specimens in accordance with Test Method
D1598. All tests shall be conducted at 80 6 2°C. The FIG. 6 Preparation of Coupling Specimen for Crush Test
assemblies are to be subjected to pipe fiber stresses and
minimum test periods in accordance with the controlling pipe
standards requirements for sustained pressure test. Joint speci- NOTE 3—It is permissible to utilize in joint integrity testing, specimens
mens shall not fail within these time periods. Any failures from the quick-burst tests conducted in 9.1 after visually determining that
within these time periods must be of the pipe, independent of neither the joint area nor the pipe segment to be crushed was a part of the
failure mode in the quick-burst test.
the fitting or joint and must be of a“ brittle” type pipe failure,
not “ductile.” If ductile pipe failures occur, reduce the pressure 9.4.1.2 Slit socket joints longitudinally as illustrated in
of the test and repeat until the required results or pipe brittle Fig. 6 as near the centerline of the pipe as practical. Pipe
failures are achieved. If test conditions are not specified by the lengths extending out of the socket may be cut back to a
controlling pipe standard, the requirements of Table 2 shall be minimum of 3 in. (76 mm) for ease of placing in a vise.
used for the pipe material type being tested with the electro- 9.4.1.3 Place each specimen half in a vise such that the
fusion fitting. outermost wire of coil is within 1.250 6 0.125 in. (32 6 3 mm)
9.2.3 Failure of the fitting or joint shall constitute specimen of vise jaws, with the jaws closing only on the pipe portion of
failure. the specimen (Fig. 7).
9.2.4 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall consti- 9.4.1.4 Tighten the jaws of the vise on the pipe until the
tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the four specimens inner walls of the pipe meet (Fig. 8). Repeat crush test on both
tested is cause for retest of four additional specimens, joined at halves and each end of specimen, at all ends, where a joint
the failed-specimens-joining temperature. Failure of any of exists.
these four additional specimens constitutes a failure of the test. 9.4.1.5 Separation of the fitting from the pipe at the fusion
interface constitutes a failure of the test. Some minor separa-
9.3 Tensile Strength Test:
tion at the outer limits of the fusion heat source up to 15 % of
the fusion length may be seen. This does not constitute a
in accordance with Section 8 with the exception that it is
failure. Ductile failure in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation
permissible, on pipe sizes above 4 in. (102 mm) IPS, if limits
material, is acceptable as long as the bond interface remains
of tensile machine will not allow 25 % elongation with pipe
intact.
specimens of three-pipe diameters, to test with free pipe
9.4.1.6 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall
lengths of 20 in. (304-mm) minimum. From the four
constitute failure of the test and is cause for retest of four
specimens, condition two specimens each in accordance with
additional fittings, joined at the same temperature as the failed
8.1.1 and 8.1.2.
specimens. Failure of any of these four additional specimens
9.3.2 Test the specimens using the apparatus of Test Method
constitutes a failure of the test.
D638. Test at a pull rate of 0.20 in. (5.0 mm) per min, 625 %.
9.4.2 Saddle Type Joint Crush Test (Not Full-Wrap Design):
9.3.3 Failure of the fitting or joint as defined in 5.3, shall 9.4.2.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
constitute specimen failure. in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens,
9.3.4 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall consti- condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the four specimens 8.1.2 (see 9.4).
tested is cause for retest of four additional specimens, joined at 9.4.2.2 Pipe lengths extending from saddle joint may be cut
the failed specimens joining temperature. Failure of any of back clear up to the outer edges of the saddle for convenience
these four additional specimens constitutes a failure of the test. of handling, if desired, however, it is not necessary. The length
9.4 Joint Integrity Tests—Illustrations of joint crush tests for of the pipe extending beyond the saddle is not important to this
socket type joints and saddles are offered in 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 as test (Fig. 9).
test methods that are useful as an evaluation of bonding 9.4.2.3 Place the specimen in vise jaws as shown in Fig. 10,
strength between the pipe and fitting. Alternately, the fusion such that vise jaws are within 1⁄2 in. of saddle bottom and the
evaluation test (FET) offered in 9.4.3 and 9.4.4 may be used in jaws will close only on the pipe portion of the specimen.
lieu of the crush test. Similar test evaluations as specified in the Saddle designs incorporating a bottom half saddle will need the
contract or purchase order and as agreed upon by the purchaser bottom half removed for this test. Saddle designs incorporating
and manufacturer are of equal value in performing such a full-wrap single piece saddle are to be tested as in 9.4 socket
evaluations and may be substituted with such agreement. type joints (Fig. 7 and Fig. 8).
9.4.1 Joint Crush Test: 9.4.2.4 Tighten the jaws of the vise on the pipe until the
9.4.1.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens inner walls of the pipe meet (Fig. 11).
in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens, 9.4.2.5 Separation of the fitting from the pipe at the fusion
condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and interface constitutes a failure of the test. Some minor separa-
8.1.2 (Note 3). tion at the outer limits of the fusion heat source up to 15 % of
306
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
the fusion length may be seen. This does not constitute a

failure. Ductile failure in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation
material, is acceptable as long as the bond interface remains
intact.
9.4.2.6 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall
constitute failure of the test and is cause for retest of four
additional fittings, joined at the same temperature as the failed
9.4.3 Fusion Evaluation Test (FET) of Sockets:
9.4.3.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
8.1.2.
9.4.3.2 A band saw with a locking guide and a blade
restricted to cutting plastic is recommended for obtaining the
FET samples. Slit the socket in the order of cuts as illustrated
in Fig. 12. First, radially cut the socket in half along the
centerline of the joint. Pipe extending from the fittings may be
cut back to about 1 in. from the fitting edge. Cut FET
specimens approximately 1⁄16 in. wide from each joint half. A
minimum of four FET strips shall be cut from one half of the
socket and spaced approximately 90° apart.
9.4.3.3 Grip an FET specimen in a vise or clamping device
as shown in Fig. 13 so that the bond line between the pipe and
fitting is at least 1⁄16 in. from the edges of the clamping device.
Flex the specimen four times 90° in both directions. Pliers may
be used in lieu of a vise as long as the entire length of the
fusion is flexed.
FIG. 7 Coupling Crush Test Arrangement 9.4.3.4 Separation of the specimen along the bond line
constitutes failure of the specimen. Some minor separation at
the outer limits of the fusion heat source may be seen or there
may be voids between wires. This does not constitute failure as
long as the voids do not exceed the limits of 9.5. Ductile failure
in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation material is acceptable
as long as the bond interface remains intact.
9.4.3.5 Failure of any one of the four joints shall constitute
failure of the test and is cause for retest using four additional
fittings joined at the same conditions as the failed joint
specimens. Failure of any of these four additional joint
specimens constitutes a failure in the test.
9.4.4 Fusion Evaluation Test of Saddle Type Joints (Not
Full-Wrap Design):
8.1.2.
FET samples. Remove the stack from the fitting and cut the
bottom portion of the pipe from the test piece. Cut the saddle
in half in the transverse direction and then cut each half again
in the longitudinal direction as shown in Fig. 14. Cut FET
specimens approximately 1⁄16 in. wide through the fusion base
of the saddle fitting. These cuts must be both longitudinal and
FIG. 8 Coupling Crush Test transverse using two diagonal quarters for transverse direction
and the two remaining quarters for the longitudinal direction.
307
SF-1055 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 9 Preparation of Saddle Specimen for Crush Test
FIG. 10 Saddle Fitting Crush Test Before Crush
9.4.4.3 Inspect the fusion area for any discontinuities. Fol- FIG. 11 Saddle Fitting Crush Test After Crush
low the instructions in 9.4.3.3 to test the FET samples.
9.4.4.4 Separation of the specimen along the bond line
after the joint is made. If detected, such voids are considered
constitutes failure of the specimen. Some minor separation at
acceptable only if round or elliptical in shape, with no sharp
the outer limits of the fusion heat source may be seen or there
corners allowed and if they meet the limitations of 9.5.1
through 9.5.3.
long as the voids do not exceed the limits of 9.5. Ductile failure
9.5.1 Voids that do not exceed 10 % of the fusion zone
in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation material is acceptable
length in size are acceptable. (See Fig. 15.)
as long as the bond interface remains intact.
9.5.2 Multiple voids, if present, are acceptable if the com-
9.4.4.5 Failure of any one of the four joints shall constitute
bined void sizes do not exceed 20 % of the fusion zone length.
failure of the test and is cause for retest using four additional
(See Fig. 15.)
fittings, joined at the same conditions as the failed joint
9.5.3 If voids are exposed, additional longitudinal cuts
specimens. Failure of any of these four additional joint
should be made to ensure that the void does not follow a
specimens constitutes a failure in the test.
diametric path which connects to the pressure-containing area
9.5 Evaluation for Voids—When dissecting electrofusion of the joint. (See Fig. 16.)
joints for the integrity tests in 9.4, or any reason, voids at or
NOTE 4—Some voids in electrofusion fitting joints may be due to the
near the fusion interface may be exposed. The voids, should natural phenomenon described in 9.5. It is also possible the voids can be
they be present, are a phenomenon of the electrofusion process, produced by not following proper fusion procedures. If voids are detected,
due to trapped air and shrinking during the cooling process one should ensure that all procedures were followed in making the joint.
308
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
FIG. 12 Recommended Procedure for Cutting FET Strip From Coupling
FIG. 13 Strip for FET Bend Test
FIG. 14 Procedure for Cutting FET Strips from a Saddle
10. Product Marking 10.1.2 Material designation (for example, PE2708, PE4710,
10.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following: etc.),
309
SF-1055 ASME NM.3.1-2018
10.1.3 For fittings intended for transporting potable water,

the seal of approval of an accredited laboratory, for fittings
complying with Specification D2513 and intended for gas
distribution, the word “gas” or if space does not permit, the
letter “G,”
10.1.4 Size, followed by “IPS” or “CTS” designation,
10.1.5 ASME SF-1055 or both ASME SF-1055 and ASTM
F1055,
10.1.6 The fittings shall bear an appropriate code number
that will assure identification on the fittings as to date of
FIG. 15 Coupling Fusion Assembly With Possible Void Charac- production and resin formulas used in the production of said
teristics fittings. The manufacturer shall maintain such additional re-
cords as are necessary to confirm identification of all coded
fittings, and
10.1.7 Where the size of the fitting does not allow complete
marking, identification marking may be omitted in the follow-
ing sequence: ASTM designation number, and material desig-
nation.
10.2 All required markings shall be legible and so applied as
to remain legible under normal handling and installation
practices. If indentation is used, it shall be demonstrated that
these marks have no effect on the long term strength of the
fitting.
FIG. 16 Coupling Fusion Assembly—Further Examination Guid- 11. Quality Assurance
ance
NOTE 5—Earlier editions of ASTM F1055, as well as related piping requirements of this specification.
standards, included PE material designations PE2306, PE2406, PE3406,
and PE3408. Changes to Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3 led to changes 12. Certification
in thermoplastic material designation codes, resulting in material desig-
nation PE2406 being superseded by material designation PE2708. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A2.
Similarly, PE3408 was superseded by material designations PE3708,
PE3710, PE4708, and PE4710. Recognizing that a period of time is
necessary for the dissemination of information and to update specifica- 13. Keywords
tions and literature, during the transitional period, product markings that 13.1 electrofusion; fittings; joining; polyethylene
include both older and newer material designations, for example PE3408/
PE4710, may occur.
310
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1055
ANNEXES
A1. IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR ELECTROFUSION FITTINGS
A1.1 Introduction: A1.2.2.3 Heating Element Resistance —Immediately pro-

A1.1.1 Use the following in-plant quality control program, ceeding production start up, then once per h, or one out of ten
covering material and performance requirements in manufac- fittings, whichever is less frequent.
ture to provide reasonable assurance that the product meets the A1.2.3 Molding or Extrusion Quality—Make the following
requirements of this specification and normally anticipated tests on each cavity in the mold or each extrusion line being
field performance requirements. used. Test at the start of each production run, whenever
production conditions have changed or when the resin lot has
A1.2 Fittings Tests:
changed, but not less than once per 500 fittings thereafter.
A1.2.1 Conduct the fittings tests at the frequencies indicated A1.2.3.1 Voids in Part—Inspect for voids in the fitting by
as follows: means of X-ray or dissection of the fitting in 0.25-in. (6-mm)
NOTE A1.1—When any failure to meet the requirements of this wide strips.
specification occurs, make additional tests to ascertain those fittings that
are acceptable, back to the last acceptable ones. Those that do not meet the
A1.2.3.2 Molding Knit Line Strength—Test by one of the
requirements must be rejected. following tests, or other suitable tests:
(1) By crushing a fitting or a portion of a fitting in a manner
A1.2.2 Dimensions of fusion area with heating element in
that applies load in a direction normal to the knit line.
place:
(2) By performing an apparent tensile strength test of a ring
A1.2.2.1 Socket Diameters—Immediately proceeding pro-
cut from a fitting with the load oriented normal to the knit line.
duction start up, then once per h, or one out of ten fittings,
(3) By performing a burst test of the fitting in accordance
whichever is less frequent.
with Test Method D1599.
A1.2.2.2 Saddle Sizes—Main sizes and branching outlet
sizes, immediately proceeding production start up, then once NOTE A1.2—Separation in the knit line of any of these tests constitutes
per h, or one out of ten fittings, whichever is less frequent. a failure of the test.
A2. CERTIFICATION
311
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1483
SPECIFICATION FOR ORIENTED POLY(VINYL

CHLORIDE), PVCO, PRESSURE PIPE
SF-1483
quirements in para. 9.1.6, quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of
section 12.)
313
SF-1483 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Oriented Poly(Vinyl Chloride), PVCO, Pressure Pipe
1. Scope Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

1.1 This specification covers requirements for materials, (CPVC) Compounds
dimensions, sustained pressure, accelerated regression testing, D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
burst pressure, flattening, impact resistance, workmanship, and moplastic Pipe and Fittings
methods of marking for oriented poly(vinyl chloride) (PVCO) D2152 Test Method for Adequacy of Fusion of Extruded
pipe for pressure applications. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Molded Fittings by
Acetone Immersion
1.2 The PVCO pipe shall be joined using elastomeric seals D2444 Test Method for Determination of the Impact Resis-
(gaskets). The joint shall meet the requirements of Specifica- tance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a
tion D3139 and the elastomeric seal shall meet the require- Tup (Falling Weight)
ments of Specification F477. The PVCO shall not be joined by D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
solvent cementing. for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
as standard. The values in parentheses are given for informa- D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes
tion only. Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
test method portion, Section 8 of this specification: This F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, ing Plastic Pipe
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 2.2 Other Standards:
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health NSF Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- Related Materials
tions prior to use. ANSI/NSF Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water System
Components—Health Effects
2. Referenced Documents PPI-TR 3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Recom-
2.1 ASTM Standards: mended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing Pipe
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics 3. Terminology
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Under Constant Internal Pressure 3.1 Definitions:
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic 3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings nologies D883 and F412 and abbreviations are in accordance
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- with Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated. The
tics abbreviation for poly(vinyl chloride) plastics is PVC.
D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) 3.1.2 PVCO pipe—abbreviation for oriented poly(vinyl
chloride) plastics. PVCO pipe is PVC pressure pipe which
attains a relatively high strength by reorienting the molecules.
Conventionally extruded PVC pipe is expanded circumferen-
tially (for example, 2-in. diameter is expanded to 4-in. diam-
eter) through the application of pressure and temperature. The
314
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1483
expansion reorients the PVC molecular structure in the hoop 5.4 Rework Materials—Clean, rework material, generated
direction, thereby increasing the material strength. from the manufacturer’s own pipe production, shall be permit-
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: ted to be used by the same manufacturer, as long as the pipe
3.2.1 expansion ratio (ER)—the ratio of the finished PVCO produced meets all the requirements of this specification.
pipe outside diameter to the outside diameter of the original 6. Requirements
starting stock.
6.1 General—These requirements are for finished PVCO
3.2.2 standard thermoplastic pipe material designation pipe, unless otherwise noted.
code—the molecularly oriented poly(vinyl chloride) materials
designation code shall consist of the abbreviation PVCO for 6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances:
the type of plastics, followed by the ASTM type and grade in 6.2.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler-
arabic numerals and the hydrostatic design stress in units of ances shall be shown in Table 1 and Table 2 when measured in
100 psi (0.69 MPa) with any decimal figures dropped. The accordance with Test Method D2122. The tolerances for
ASTM type and grade shall be that of the starting stock out-of-roundness shall apply only on pipe prior to shipment.
material. The hydrostatic design stress shall be that of the 6.2.2 Wall Thicknesses—The wall thicknesses and toler-
finished PVCO pipe. ances shall be as shown in Table 3 and Table 4 when measured
in accordance with Test Method D2122.
3.2.3 DISCUSSION—A complete material designation
code shall consist of four letters and four figures (for example; 6.3 Qualification Tests—These tests are for qualification of
a PVCO pipe manufactured from 12454 (Type 1, Grade 1) the compound and extrusion process, not for quality control.
material starting stock and having an HDB of 7100 psi (48.92 6.3.1 Sustained Pressure—The sustained pressure test shall
MPa) [HDS of 3550 psi) (24.46 MPa)] will have a material be completed for each diameter at initial start-up. Thereafter, it
designation code of PVCO 1135). shall be completed whenever there is a change in the ER
3.2.4 starting stock—the conventionally extruded PVC pipe (3.2.1), or the WTR (3.2.5), or whenever a change is made to
of uniform wall thickness which will be expanded to a larger the compound which is outside the allowable limits of the
diameter, molecularly oriented pipe. Plastics Pipe Institute PVC compound range formula (see PPI
TR-3). The pipe shall not fail, balloon, burst, or weep as
3.2.5 wall-thickness-ratio (WTR)—the ratio of the finished defined in Test Method D1598 at the test pressures given in
product wall thickness to the wall thickness of the starting Table 5 when tested in accordance with 7.4.
stock. 6.3.2 Accelerated Regression Test—This test shall be com-
4. Classification pleted on a representative diameter at initial start-up. A
representative diameter is one which has an ER, a WTR, and a
4.1 General—This specification covers PVCO made from
compound which is the same as the other diameters manufac-
PVC plastic pipe, starting stock, having a hydrostatic design
tured. Thereafter, it shall be completed on a representative
stress of 2000 psi (13.78 MPa) determined in accordance with
diameter whenever there is a change in the ER or the WTR, or
Test Method D2837. Finished PVCO pipe shall have a hydro-
whenever a change is made to the compound which is outside
static design stress of 3550 psi (24.46 MPa) determined by
the allowable limits of the Plastics Pipe Institute PVC com-
testing in accordance with Test Methods D1598, with data
pound range formula (see PPI TR-3). The test shall be
evaluated in accordance with Test Methods D2837, as in 6.3.2.
conducted in accordance with 7.5.
5. Materials 6.3.2.1 The pipe shall demonstrate a minimum hydrostatic
design basis projection, at the 100 000-h intercept, of 6810 psi
5.1 General—Poly(vinyl chloride) plastics used to make
(46.92 MPa) (for Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories, see
PVCO pipe meeting the requirements of this specification are
Table 1 of Test Method D2837). At the option of the
categorized by means of two criteria, namely (1) short-term
manufacturer, the accelerated regression test may be used as a
strength tests; and (2) long-term strength tests.
substitute for both pressure tests, sustained and burst (6.4.1).
5.1.1 Supplementary Requirement—This applies whenever
a regulatory authority or user calls for the product to be used to 6.4 Quality Control Tests—These tests are intended to
convey or to be in contact with potable water. Potable water ensure the quality of the finished pipe product.
applications products intended for contact with potable water 6.4.1 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressure for
shall be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with PVCO pipe shall be as given in Table 6, when determined in
ANSI/NSF Standard 61 or the health effects portion of NSF accordance with 7.6.
Standard No. 14 by an acceptable certifying organization when
TABLE 1 IPS PVCO Pipe—Outside Diameters and Tolerances
required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
Average Outside Diameter,
5.2 Basic Materials—This specification covers PVCO pipe Nominal Pipe Size, in. Tolerance, ±in. (mm)
in. (mm)
made from PVC compounds having certain physical and 4 4.500 (114.30) 0.009 (0.23)
chemical properties as described in Specification D1784. 6 6.625 (168.28) 0.011 (0.28)
8 8.625 (219.08) 0.015 (0.38)
5.3 The PVC compound used for the starting stock of this 10 10.750 (273.05) 0.016 (0.41)
pipe shall equal or exceed the following cell classification 12 12.750 (323.85) 0.017 (0.43)
14 14.000 (355.60) 0.018 (0.46)
described in Specification D1784: PVC 12454 (Type 1, Grade 16 16.000 (406.40) 0.019 (0.48)
1). Recycled materials shall not be used in the compound.
315
SF-1483 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 CIOD PVCO Pipe—Outside Diameters and Tolerances closely as possible, but within 610 psi (670 kPa). Condition
Nominal Pipe Size, in.
Average Outside Diameter,
Tolerance, ±in. (mm)
the specimens at the test temperature of 73.46 3.6°F (23 6
in. (mm) 2°C).
4 4.800 (121.92) 0.009 (0.23) 7.4.1 Maintain the test temperature at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6
6 6.900 (175.26) 0.010 (0.25)
8 9.050 (229.87) 0.015 (0.38) 2°C). Test in accordance with Test Methods D1598, except
10 11.100 (281.94) 0.016 (0.41) maintain the pressure at the values given in Table 5 for 1000 h.
12 13.200 (335.28) 0.017 (0.43) Failure of two of six specimens tested shall constitute failure in
14 15.300 (388.62) 0.018 (0.46)
16 17.400 (441.96) 0.019 (0.48) the test. Failure of one of the six specimens tested is cause for
retest of six additional specimens. Failure of one of the six
specimens tested in retest shall constitute failure in the test.
Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in Test
Methods D1598.
6.4.2 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting, 7.5 Accelerated Regression Test—Test in accordance with
cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance procedures in Test Methods D1598, except that restrained end
with 7.7. fittings shall be permitted to be employed. A minimum of six
6.4.3 Extrusion Quality—The starting stock pipe shall not samples will be tested at pressures selected to yield data points
flake, crack, or disintegrate when tested in accordance with as follows:
Test Method D2152. 0.010 to 0.099 h (36 s to 6 min)
6.4.4 Impact Resistance—The minimum impact resistance 0.10 to 0.999 h (6 min to 1 h)
for PVCO shall be as given in Table 7, when determined in 1.00 to 9.999 h
10.0 to 99.999 h
accordance with 7.8. 100.0 to 100+ h
NOTE 1—The impact resistance test is intended for use only as a 0 to 100+ h (random point)
quality-control test, not as a simulated service test. This test has been Additional points may be added if necessary to improve
found to have no quality-control significance in sizes over 12 in. (300 projection or LCL, or both. No points shall be excluded unless
mm). an obvious defect is detected in the failure area of the test
6.4.5 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance—The pipe sample. Characterize the results using the least squares ex-
shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, trapolation described in Test Method D2837.
holes, foreign inclusions, or other defects. The pipe shall be as
NOTE 3—Caution: Since rupture of the test specimen is expected in
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, quick-burst and high-strength regression testing, well-shielded test equip-
and other physical properties. ment and protective personal equipment should be used when conducting
the tests.
NOTE 2—Color and transparency or opacity should be specified in the
contract or purchase order. 7.6 Burst Pressure—Determine the minimum burst pressure
with at least five specimens in accordance with Test Method
7. Test Methods D1599, having the lengths specified in 7.4. The time of testing
7.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimen at 73.4 6 of each specimen shall be not less than 60 s.
3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less NOTE 4—Times greater than 60 s may be needed to bring the
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of larger-sized specimens to the burst pressure. The test is more difficult to
Practice D618 for those tests where conditioning is required. pass using greater pressuring times.
7.7 Flattening—Flatten three specimens of the pipe, 2 in.
7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the standard
(50 mm) long, between parallel plates in a suitable press until
laboratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6
5 % relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test
of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and such that
methods or in this specification.
the compression is completed within 2 to 5 min. Upon removal
7.3 Sampling—The selection of the sample or samples of of the load, examine the specimens for evidence of splitting,
pipe shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the cracking, or breaking.
seller. In case of no prior agreement, the sample selection of the
7.8 Impact Resistance—Determine the impact resistance in
manufacturer shall be deemed adequate.
accordance with the specification requirement section of Test
7.3.1 Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test speci-
Method D2444. Test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (236 2°C) using a Tup B
mens required for any pressure test shall have at least a part of
and flat plate support. Use a 20-lb (9-kg) tup.
the marking in their central sections. The central section is that
7.8.1 Test Specimens—Specimens of pipe for impact testing
shall be cut to lengths required in Test Method D2444.
an end closure.
7.8.2 Test Requirements—For pipe sizes 4 through 12 in.
7.4 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at (100 through 300 mm), test ten specimens. If nine or more
random. Test individually with water at the internal pressure pass, the lot passes. If two or more fail, the lot fails.
given in Table 5, six specimens of pipe, each specimen shall be
3 ft long (1000 mm) between end closures and bearing the 8. Retest and Rejection
permanent marking on the pipe. Maintain the specimens at the 8.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
pressure indicated for a period of 1000 h. Hold the pressure as of this specification, the test(s) may be conducted again in
316
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1483
TABLE 3 Minimum Wall Thickness for PVCO Plastic Pipes with IPS Outside Diameter
Nominal Pipe Size, in. PVCO 1135
Pressure Rated, 160 psi, min Pressure Rated, 200 psi, min Pressure Rated, 250 psi, min
4 0.099 (2.52) 0.123 (3.12) 0.153 (3.89)
6 0.146 (3.71) 0.182 (4.62) 0.225 (5.72)
8 0.190 (4.83) 0.236 (5.99) 0.293 (7.44)
10 0.237 (6.02) 0.295 (7.49) 0.366 (9.30)
12 0.281 (7.14) 0.349 (8.86) 0.434 (11.02)
14 0.309 (7.85) 0.384 (9.75) 0.476 (12.09)
16 0.353 (8.97) 0.438 (11.13) 0.544 (13.82)
TABLE 4 Minimum Wall Thickness for PVCO Plastic Pipes with Cast Iron Outside Diameter (CIOD)
Nominal Pipe Size, in. PVCO 1135
Pressure Rated, 150 psi, min Pressure Rated, 200 psi, min Pressure Rated, 250 psi, min
4 0.099 (2.51) 0.132 (3.35) 0.163 (4.14)
6 0.143 (3.63) 0.189 (4.80) 0.235 (5.97)
8 0.187 (4.75) 0.248 (6.30) 0.308 (7.82)
10 0.229 (5.82) 0.304 (7.72) 0.378 (9.60)
12 0.273 (6.93) 0.362 (9.19) 0.449 (11.40)
14 0.317 (8.05) 0.419 (10.64) 0.520 (13.21)
16 0.360 (9.14) 0.477 (12.12) 0.592 (15.04)
TABLE 5 Sustained Pressure Test Conditions for Water at 73°F TABLE 7 Impact Resistance at 73°F (23°C) for PVCO Pipe
(23°C) for PVCO Plastic Pipes with IPS and CIOD Outside Size, in. Impact Resistance, ft·lbf (J)—All Series
Diameters
4 100 (136)
Test PressuresA 6 150 (203)
Pressure Rating
psi MPa 8 200 (271)
10 200 (271)
150 320 (2.21)
12 200 (271)
160 335 (2.31)
200 420 (2.89)
250 525 (3.48)
A
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is as follows: 9. Product Marking
PVCO 1135 7400 psi (50.99 MPa)
9.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following, spaced
at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m).
TABLE 6 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at 73°F (23°C) 9.1.1 Nominal pipe size.
for PVCO Plastic Pipe with IPS and CIOD Outside Diameters 9.1.2 The outside diameter system (IPS or CIOD).
Test PressuresA 9.1.3 The letters PVCO.
Pressure Rating 9.1.4 The type of plastic pipe material in accordance with
psi MPa
150 475 (3.27) the designation code given in 3.2.5 (for example, PVCO 1135).
160 505 (3.48) 9.1.5 Maximum operating pressure rating, psi.
200 630 (4.35) 9.1.6 ASME SF-1483 or both ASME SF-1483 and ASTM
250 790 (5.44)
A
F1483.
The fiber stress used to derive these test pressures is as follows:
PVCO 1135 11 100 psi (76.48 MPa) 9.1.7 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and code. The
manufacturer’s code shall include year, month, day, shift, plant,
and extruder of manufacture.
accordance with an agreement between the purchaser and the also include the standard to which it was evaluated and the
seller. There shall be no agreement to lower the minimum mark of the laboratory making the evaluation for that purpose.
requirements of the specification by such means as omitting Manufacturers using the seal or mark of a laboratory must
tests that are a part of the specification, substituting or obtain prior authorization from the laboratory concerned.
modifying a test method, or by changing the specification 9.1.9 Mark on the pipe “DO NOT SOLVENT CEMENT”.
limits. In retesting, the product requirement of this specifica-
tion shall be met and the test method designated in the 10. Quality Assurance
specification shall be followed. If, upon retest, failure occurs, 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
the quantity of product represented by the test(s) does not meet manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
the requirement of this specification.
317
SF-1483 ASME NM.3.1-2018
with this specification and has been found to meet the 12. Keywords
requirements of this specification. 12.1 PVCO oriented polyvinyl chloride; pipe pressure
11. Certification
S1. Responsibility for Inspection —S1.1 Unless otherwise S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the
specified in the contract or purchase order, the producer is contract, the material shall be packaged in accordance with the
responsible for the performance of all inspection and test supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
requirements specified herein. The producer may use his own destination in a satisfactory condition and which will be
or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the acceptable to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and
inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless dis- packaging shall comply with Uniform Freight Classification
approved by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the right rules of National Motors Freight Classification rules.
to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this
specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to S2.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
ensure that material conforms to prescribed requirements. dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. Federal Government contracts, the contractor is 129 for military agencies.
responsible for inspection. NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Federal Government procurement
S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure- requirements should not be construed as an indication that the U.S.
ment: Government uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
any other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract, and the results met the requirements of that Spe-
cification, the Supplementary Requirements and the other requirements. A signature or notarizations is not required on
the certificate of compliance, but the document shall be dated and shall clearly identify the organization submitting the
Report. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature or notarization, the certifying organization is responsible for the
contents of the document.
318
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1673
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE

(PVDF) CORROSIVE WASTE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
SF-1673
quirements in para. 10.2.2.5, quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering
of section 13.)
319
SF-1673 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage
Systems

1.1 This specification covers requirements for polyvi- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
nylidene fluoride drainage systems for corrosive applications. D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Requirements for material, pipe and fittings are included. Chemical Reagents
Polyvinylidene fluoride includes emulsion/suspension polym- D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
erization and copolymers of vinylidene fluoride/ D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
hexafluoropropylene produced by either method. D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1.2 These requirements apply to Schedule 40 and 80 IPS, D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
SDR 32.5, and SDR 21 pipe sizes. Pipe and fittings are to be tics
joined by heat fusion or mechanical methods using the equip- D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
ment supplied by the manufacturers. moplastic Pipe and Fittings
D2321 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplas-
1.3 This specification is not intended to provide for inter- tic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
changeability between plastic pipe and fittings from different D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
manufacturers, but it does allow for transition fittings for Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
joining one manufacturer’s product to another’s product, pro- D2444 Test Method for Determination of the Impact Resis-
vided the joining technique used is other than heat fusion. tance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a
1.4 This specification is not for polyvinylidene pressure Tup (Falling Weight)
systems. D3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluo-
ride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials
D3311 Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
Plastic Fittings Patterns
D5575 Classification System for Copolymers of Vinylidene
Fluoride (VDF) with Other Fluorinated Monomers
1.6 Notes and appendixes are not a mandatory part of this F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
specification. F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo-
1.7 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the plastic Pipe and Fittings
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This 2.2 Federal Standard:
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 2.3 Military Standard:
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health MIL-STD 129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
tions prior to use.
320
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1673
2.4 Other Standard: 6.1.1.2 Toe-In—The outside diameter, when measured in

Uniform Plumbing Code accordance with Method D2122, shall meet the requirements
of Table 1 and Table 2 at any point within 1.5 pipe diameters
3. Terminology or 11.8 in. (300 mm), whichever is less, to the cut end of the
3.1 Definitions: pipe length.
3.1.1 Definitions used in this specification are in accordance 6.1.2 Fittings:
with the definitions given in Terminologies D883 and F412 and 6.1.2.1 The minimum wall thickness of the body all fittings
abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600, shall not be less than the corresponding Schedule 40 pipe size
unless otherwise indicated. and shall be measured in accordance with Method D2122.
3.1.2 The plumbing terminology used in this specification is 6.1.2.2 Spigot ends of fittings shall conform to the diameter
in accordance with the definitions given in the Uniform and out-of-roundness requirements for pipe.
Plumbing Code, unless otherwise indicated. 6.1.2.3 Socket ends of fittings shall conform to the dimen-
sional requirements for size and tolerances as provided by the
4. Classification manufacturer.
4.1 General—This specification covers PVDF pipe and 6.1.2.4 The average minimum diameters of waterways of
fittings made from PVDF or VF/HFP copolymers in Schedule fittings, excluding adapters, shall be as specified in Table 3.
40 and 80 IPS sizes and in SDR 32.5 and SDR 21. 6.1.2.5 Taper pipe threads in any fittings shall be as speci-
4.2 This specification also includes molded fittings and the fied in Specification F1498. The tolerance shall be 11⁄2 large or
larger sizes (8, 10, 12 in.) of fabricated fittings. small turns from the basic thread dimension and gaged in
5. Materials and Manufacture 6.1.2.6 The patterns, dimensions, and laying lengths of
molded fittings, including adaptors, shall meet the require-
5.1 Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) material for pipe or
ments of Specification D3311, or shall be of a proven design
fittings shall conform to the requirements of Type I Grade 1,
and allow a smooth transition of fluid flow from one direction
Type I Grade 2, or Type II PVDF as defined in Specification
to another.
D3222 or copolymers as defined in Specification D5575.
6.1.2.7 Cleanouts, cleanout plugs, and caps as commonly
5.2 The PVDF material may contain pigment and fillers not used in the manufacturer’s laboratory drainage system, shall
detrimental to the pipe and fittings, provided the pipe and have a thread size and depth sufficient to ensure that the
fittings produced meet the requirements of this specification. minimum waterway sizes are maintained.
5.3 Rework Material—Clean rework material, generated 6.1.2.8 Traps—All traps shall have a minimum water seal of
from the manufacturer’s pipe and fittings products may be used 2 in.
by the same manufacturer, provided that the pipe or fittings 6.2 Chemical Resistance—Pipe and fittings material shall be
produced meet the requirements of this specification. evaluated in accordance with Practice D543, Procedures I and
II, using the chemicals listed in 8.3. The weight change shall
6. Requirements
not exceed 2 %, nor shall the apparent tensile strength change
6.1 Dimensions and Tolerances—Pipe and Fittings: by more than 10 %. In cases where there is a change in the
6.1.1 Pipe: apparent tensile strength greater than 10 %, a further evaluation
6.1.1.1 Dimensions and tolerances for pipe shown in Table shall be made after removal from the chemical and condition-
1 and Table 2 shall be measured in accordance with Method ing for 72 h. If there is a minimum of 50 % recovery of tensile
D2122. The tolerance for out-of-roundness shall apply only to strength after 72 h, and that figure is within 610 % of the
pipe prior to shipment. original tensile strength, the specimen shall be considered
acceptable.
6.3 Water Absorption—Pipe and fitting materials shall not
change in weight more than 0.50 % when tested in accordance
with 8.4.
TABLE 1 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PVDF Pipe 6.4 System Integrity:
Schedules 40 and 80 and SDR 21, in. (mm)
6.4.1 Fused joints and associated pipe shall withstand a
Nominal Pipe Average Outside Tolerance Out-of-Roundness
Size Diameter (Maximum Diameter
pressure of 50 psi (345 kPa) without leaking when tested in
Minus Minimum accordance with 8.5.1.
Diameter) 6.4.2 Mechanical joints shall withstand a pressure of 14.5
11⁄4 1.660 (42.16) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.050 (1.28) psi (100 kPa) without leaking when tested in accordance with
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.060 (1.52)
2 2.375 (60.32) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.070 (1.78)
8.5.2.
3 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (±0.20) 0.080 (2.04)
4 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (±0.23) 0.100 (2.54)
NOTE 1—Mechanical joints include transition, compression, threaded,
6 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (±0.28) 0.100 (2.54) and other type mechanical joints.
8 8.625 (219.08) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.80) 6.4.3 Mechanical joints shall incorporate a positive me-
10 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.80)
12 12.750 (323.85) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.150 (3.80) chanical system for axial restraint in addition to any restraint
provided by friction.
321
SF-1673 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Wall Thicknesses and Tolerances for PVDF Pipe Schedules 40 and 80 and SDR 21, in. (mm)
NOTE 1— For fittings, the wall thickness is a minimum value, except that a 10 % variation resulting from core shift is allowable. In such a case, the
average of the two opposite wall thickness’ shall equal or exceed the value shown in the Schedule 40 table.
Nominal Schedule 40 Schedule 80 SDR 21 SDR 32.5
Pipe Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
Sizes
1⁄14 0.140 (3.56) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.191 (4.85) +0.023 (+0.58) 0.079 (2.01) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.062 (1.57) +0.020 (0.51)
1 1⁄ 2 0.145 (3.68) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.200 (5.08) +0.024 (+0.61) 0.090 (2.28) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.062 (1.57) +0.020 (0.51)
2 0.154 (3.91) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.218 (5.54) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.113 (2.87) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.073 (1.85) +0.020 (0.51)
3 0.216 (5.49) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.300 (7.62) +0.036 (+0.91) 0.167 (4.22) +0.020 (+0.51) 0.108 (2.74) +0.020 (0.51)
4 0.237 (6.02) +0.028 (+0.71) 0.337 (8.56) +0.040 (+1.02) 0.214 (5.44) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.138 (3.51) +0.020 (0.51)
6 0.280 (7.11) +0.034 (+0.86) 0.432 (10.97) +0.052 (+1.32) 0.315 (8.00) +0.038 (+0.97) 0.204 (5.18) +0.0241 (0.61)
8 0.322 (8.18) +0.039 (+0.99) 0.500 (12.70) +0.060 (+1.52) 0.411 (10.44) +0.049 (+1.24) 0.265 (6.73) +0.032 (0.81)
10 0.365 (9.27) +0.044 (+1.12) 0.593 (15.06) +0.071 (+1.80) 0.512 (13.00) +0.061 (+1.55) 0.331 (8.41) +0.040 (1.02)
12 0.406 (10.31) +0.049 (+1.24) 0.687 (17.45) +0.082 (+2.08) 0.607 (15.42) +0.073 (+1.85) 0.392 (9.96) +0.047 (+1.19)
TABLE 3 Average Waterway Diameter, in. (mm) 8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in a standard labora-
Nominal Pipe Unthreaded Fittings Under Half Thread of Male Adapters tory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
Size Minimum Minimum Maximum relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
1 1⁄ 4 1.227 (31.17) 1.220 (30.99) 1.280 (32.51) ods or in this specification.
1 1⁄ 2 1.446 (36.73) 1.458 (37.03) 1.501 (38.13)
2 1.881 (47.78) 1.915 (48.64) 1.946 (49.43) 8.3 Chemical Resistance—Determine the resistance to the
3 2.820 (71.63) 2.849 (72.36) 2.983 (75.77) following chemicals using the material quantification method
4 3.737 (94.92) 3.806 (96.67) 3.972 (100.89)
6 5.646 (143.41) 5.851 (148.62) 6.008 (152.53)
in Practice D543.
8 7.490 (190.25) ... ... Chemical Percent in Water
10 9.407 (238.94) ... ... Acetic acid 5 by volume
12 11.197 (284.40) ... ... Acetone 5 by volume
Methyl alcohol 100
Ammonia hydroxide 10 by volume
Nitric acid 40 by volume
Sodium hydroxide 10 by weight
6.4.4 Mechanical joints shall show no evidence of separa- Sulfuric acid 20 by volume
tion at the joint under Force P when tested in accordance with Hydrochloric acid 20 by volume
8.6.1, nor shall they leak or show any other damage when 8.4 Water Absorption—Three cleanly cut specimens mea-
tested in accordance with 8.6.2. Two fittings shall be tested and suring approximately 2 by 3 in. (50 by 75 mm) and having
both shall pass. smooth edges shall be weighed to the nearest 0.001 g and
6.5 All stainless steel parts shall be made of corrosion- immersed in distilled water at 73.4 6 1.8°F (23 6 1°C) for 24
resistant steel, containing not less than 16 % chromium and not h + 1⁄2 −0 h, in accordance with Test Method D570. The
less than 6 % nickel by weight. specimens shall be removed, wiped dry with a clean, dry cloth,
and reweighed immediately. The average percent gain in
6.6 Sealing Rings—Sealing rings shall be made from a
weight shall be calculated to the nearest 0.01 % on the basis of
material with a chemical resistance similar to PVDF.
the initial mass. Weight change shall be less than 0.50 %
6.7 Flattening—There shall be no evidence of splitting, (material qualification only).
cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in accordance
8.5 Joint Tests—Hydrostatic Pressure Tests:
with 8.8.1.
8.5.1 Fused Joint Pressure Test—Six specimens of pipe,
6.8 Impact Resistance—The impact resistance testing shall each five times the nominal diameter or a maximum of 18 in.
be in accordance with 8.9. (450 mm) in length, shall be selected at random for each size
of piping and each type of system being considered. Three
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance suitable couplings shall also be selected at random. Three
7.1 The manufacture of pipe and fittings shall be in accor- joined specimens shall be prepared by joining two pipe
dance with good commercial practice, so as to produce fittings specimens with one coupling, using the equipment and instruc-
meeting the requirements of this specification. Fittings and tions supplied by the manufacturer of the system. Fill each
pipe shall be homogenous throughout and free from visible specimen with water at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and cap,
cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or injurious defects. The taking care to exclude all air from the system. Fix one end of
fittings and pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practi- the specimen to a pressurizing apparatus, and support the free
cable in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. end if necessary. Pressurize each specimen to 50 psi (345 kPa)
for a minimum of 5 min and inspect for leaks. None of the
8. Test Methods three specimens shall leak.
8.1 Conditioning—When required, condition the test speci- 8.5.1.1 This is a laboratory performance test only and is not
mens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative for field use.
humidity, for not less than 40 h prior to the test in accordance 8.5.2 Mechanical Joint Pressure Test—The pressure test on
with Procedure A of Practice D618. mechanical joints shall be carried out on test specimens
322
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1673
prepared in a manner similar to that described in 8.5.1, except A. The level of impact shall be in accordance with data
use appropriate pipe specimens where the joint is intended to provided by the manufacturer which shall show impact values
join pipes of similar or dissimilar material and sizes. Pressurize for each size at 73°F (23°C) that specifies adequate quality
the assembly to 14.5 psi (100 kPa) for a period of 24 h +15, consistent with the PVDF compound used by that manufac-
−0.0 min and inspect for signs of leakage. Apply this test to turer. Test 10 specimens. When 9 or 10 specimens pass, accept
each size and type of joint being considered. the lot. When 4 or more specimens fail, reject the lot. When 2
8.5.2.1 This is a laboratory performance test only and is not or 3 specimens of 10 fail, test 10 additional specimens. When
for field use. 17 of 20 specimens tested pass, accept the lot. When 7 or more
8.6 Mechanical Joint Pullout Test: of 20 fail, reject the lot. When 4, 5, or 6 of 20 fail, test 20
8.6.1 Join two sections of pipe by a coupling, with the additional specimens. When 32 of 40 specimens pass, accept
positive mechanical axial restraint system removed or deacti- the lot. When 9 or more of 40 specimens fail, reject the lot.
vated. Mount the assembly with the outer ends of the pipe Failure in the test specimens shall be shattering or any crack or
sections fastened in the clamps of a tensile testing machine. break extending entirely through the pipe wall visible to the
Pull the two pipe sections apart at a rate of approximately unaided eye.
1 in./min (25 mm/min) until at least one pipe section has 8.9.1 This test is intended only for use as a quality control
separated from the coupling. Record the maximum force, F, test not as a simulated service test.
applied.
8.6.2 Using the setup described in 8.6.1, subject a complete 9. Retest and Rejection
joint assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions to an axial pullout force, P, of 25 lbf (110 N) greater than 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
Force F. In no case shall this force P be less than 50 lbf (220 of this specification, the test(s), may be conducted again in
N). Apply Force P within 5 to 30 s and maintain for at least 60 accordance with an agreement between the purchaser and the
s. seller. There shall be no agreement to lower the minimum
8.6.3 Remove the axial force and pressurize the complete requirements of this specification by such means as omitting
joint assembly to 14.5-psi (100-kPa) hydrostatic pressure for a tests that are a part of this specification, substituting or
period of 1 h and inspect for leaks. modifying a test method, or by changing the specification
limits. In retesting, the product requirements of this specifica-
8.7 Threads—All molded taper threads shall have a blunt tion shall be followed. If upon retest, failure occurs, the
start with a pilot equal to 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 turns. Include the pilot in the quantity of product represented by the test(s) does not meet the
thread length measurement. Schedule 80 PVDF pipe may be requirements of this test.
threaded. Measure threads using taper pipe thread gages
conforming to Specification F1498 dimensions and follow the 10. Product Marking
method of gaging outlined:
8.7.1 Gaging External Taper Threads—In gaging external 10.1 Quality of Marking—The markings shall be applied to
taper threads, screw the ring gage tight by hand on the external the fittings and pipe in such a manner that they remain legible
thread. The thread is within the permissible tolerance when the under normal handling and installation practices.
gaging face of the working ring gage is not more than 11⁄2 large
or small turns from being flush with the face of the fitting, after
correction has been made for any variation in the gage from 10.2.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
basic dimensions. 10.2.1.1 Manufacturers name or trademark,
8.7.2 Gaging Internal Taper Threads—In gaging internal 10.2.1.2 Raw material designation and type in accordance
taper threads, screw the plug gage tight by hand into the fitting. with 5.1,
The thread is within the permissible tolerance when the gaging 10.2.1.3 If listed, the seal or mark of the laboratory making
notch of the working plug gage is not more than 11⁄2 large or the evaluation or corrosive waste application, and
small turns from being flush with the face of the fitting, after 10.2.1.4 Size.
correction has been made for any variation in the gage from
basic dimensions. 10.2.2 Marking on the pipe shall include the following
spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m):
8.8 Flattening—Using Test Method D2412, flatten three 10.2.2.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
specimens of pipe 6 in. (152 mm) long between parallel plates
in a suitable press until the distance between the plates is 40 % 10.2.2.2 Raw material designation and type in accordance
of the original outside diameter of the pipe. The rate of vertical with 5.1,
displacement shall be uniform and such that the flattening is 10.2.2.3 If listed, the seal or mark of the laboratory making
completed within 2 to 5 min. Upon removal of the load, the evaluation for corrosive waste application,
examine the specimens for evidence of splitting, cracking, or 10.2.2.4 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in.),
breaking. 10.2.2.5 ASME SF-1673 or both ASME SF-1673 and
8.9 Impact Resistance for PVDF Pipe and Fittings ASTM F1673, and
—Determine and test PVDF pipe and fitting impact values in
accordance with Test Method D2444, using Tup A and Holder
323
SF-1673 ASME NM.3.1-2018
10.2.2.6 Schedule size (40, 80, or SDR 21), whichever is 12. Certification
applicable. 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A2.
11. Quality Assurance 13. Keywords

11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was 13.1 acid waste; corrosion resistance; corrosive waste drain-
manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance age; drain pipes; installation; joints; laboratory piped services;
with this specification and has been found to meet the re- pipe fittings; pipes; plastic pipes; PVDF (polyvinylidene); traps
quirements of this specification. (drainage); waste disposal (building)
sible for all inspection and test requirements specified herein. supplier’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at
The producer may use his own or any other suitable facilities destination in satisfactory condition and which will be accept-
for the performance of the inspection and test requirements able to the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall
specified herein, unless the purchaser disapproves. The pur- comply with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National
chaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections Motor Freight Classification rules.
and tests set forth in this specification where such inspections
are deemed necessary to ensure that material conforms to
prescribed requirements.
inspection. NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of the U.S. Government procurement
S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure- requirements should not be construed as an indication that the U.S.
Government uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
ment:
ANNEXES
A1. INSTRUCTIONS
A1.1 The manufacturer shall ensure that the equipment and A1.2 The PVDF drainage systems shall be installed and
instructions needed for joining the pipe and fittings are readily supported in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommen-
obtainable by the installer. dations.
A2. CERTIFICATION
324
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1673
APPENDIXES
X1. STORAGE
X1.1 Outside Storage—Plastic pipe should be stored on a X1.2 Inventories of plastic pipe should be used on a first-in,
flat surface or supported in a manner that will prevent sagging first-out basis.
or bending. Do not store pipe in direct sunlight for extended
periods of time.
X2. JOINING
X2.1 Field Inspection—Prior to use, all pipes should be X2.4 Cutting—Pipe may be easily cut with ordinary saws.
carefully inspected for cuts, gouges, deep scratches, damaged The pipe shall be cut square and the burrs should be removed
ends, or other major imperfections. Defective pipe should be with a sharp knife fine-tooth file or other suitable tool, such as
rejected or the damaged section should be cut out. a chamfering tool or reamer. If cut with a saw, a miter box
should be used to ensure square-cut ends. The use of specially
X2.2 Pipe Fit—Pipe is manufactured to close tolerances to
designed plastic pipe cutters with extra-wide rollers and
ensure satisfactory fit between the pipe and the fittings socket
thin-cutting wheels is recommended.
during assembly. Use only combinations of pipe and fittings
that yield manufacturers’ recommended fits.
X2.5 Cleaning—Remove burrs from inside and outside pipe
X2.3 Caution must be taken if there is an excess amount of edges. Wipe off all dust, dirt, and moisture from the surfaces to
toe-in. This could result in excess clearance and, if not cut off, be joined with a clean dry rag or a paper towel. Pipe and
result in a poor joint. fittings shall be dry before assembly to obtain good pipe joints.
325
SF-1673 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X3. INSTALLATION
X3.1 Underground Installation—Underground installation level or at 10-ft (3.1-m) intervals, whichever is less. Vertical
of pipe shall be in accordance with Practice D2321, except supports shall allow the pipe to move freely.
aggregate size shall be limited to 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) for angular
and 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) for rounded particles. X3.7 Threaded Connections—Do not cut threads on Sched-
ule 40 or SDR 21 pipe. Schedule 80 pipe may be threaded with
X3.2 Above-Ground Installation—The PVDF pipe and fit- dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Molded threads on
tings are used in applications where the surface flame spread adapter fittings for transition to threaded connections are
and the smoke density are an important consideration and in necessary, except in the case of cleanout plugs. Only approved
applications where high temperatures are required. thread tape or thread lubricant specifically intended for use
with plastic pipe shall be used.
X3.3 DWV Installation—Pipe shall be installed in confor-
mance with governing building codes. In areas not governed by X3.8 Thread Tightness—Maximum thread tightness is hand
codes, pipe shall be installed in accordance with accepted tight plus one full turn.
engineering practices. X3.9 Connection to Nonplastic Pipe—When connecting
X3.4 Installation Under Freezing Conditions —Plastic pipe plastic pipe to other types of piping, use only approved type
has decreased resistance to impact under freezing conditions. fittings and adapters designed for the specific transition.
Increased care shall be exercised if installation is likely to X3.10 Building Drains Under Floor Slabs—Trench bot-
occur under these conditions, particularly during handling, toms shall be smooth and of uniform grade with either
transportation, installation, and backfilling. When possible, undisturbed soil or a layer of selected and compacted backfill
installation should be avoided during freezing conditions. so that no settlement will occur. The bottom of the pipe shall
Allowance shall be made for expansion that will occur when rest on this material throughout the entire length.
the temperature of the pipe is raised.
X3.11 Thermal Expansion—Allow for thermal expansion
X3.5 Alignment and Grade—Align all piping system com- and movement in all piping installations by the use of approved
ponents properly without strain. Do not bend or pull pipe into methods. Support, but do not rigidly restrain, piping at
position after being joined. The grade of the horizontal branches or changes of direction. Do not anchor pipe rigidly in
drainage and vent piping shall be as specified in the application walls or floors. For thermal expansion, consult the manufac-
code. turer.
X3.6 Supports and Spacing—Hangers and straps shall not X3.12 Chemical Resistance—Before installing a PVDF
compress, distort, cut, or abrade the piping and shall allow free (polyvinylidene fluoride) corrosive waste piping system,
movement of the piping system. Support horizontal piping in chemical resistance data for the piping material shall be
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Sup- consulted. Take caution when mixing chemicals, as properties
ports must allow for free movement of the pipe. Maintain can change. If there is a chemical resistance question, consult
vertical piping in straight alignment, with supports at each floor the manufacturer.
326
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1733
SPECIFICATION FOR BUTT HEAT FUSION POLYAMIDE

(PA) PLASTIC FITTING FOR POLYAMIDE (PA) PLASTIC
PIPE AND TUBING
SF-1733
quirements in para. 11.1.1, and quality assurance requirement in para. 12.1 has been made mandatory.)
327
SF-1733 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Butt Heat Fusion Polyamide(PA) Plastic Fitting for
Polyamide(PA) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
1. Scope reference the new PA11 specification, F2945, PA11 has to fall back to
citing the US Code referenced 1999 edition of D2513 in related standard
1.1 This specification covers polyamide (PA) butt fusion such as this one. Until CFR Title 49 Part 192 references the newly
fittings for use with polyamide pipe (IPS and ISO) and tubing developed thermoplastic gas piping standards for those materials removed
(CTS). Included are requirements for materials, workmanship, from D2513, there will be dual references, both D2513–99 and F2945 for
dimensions, marking, sustained pressure, and burst pressure. PA11, as seen in this standard. At which time Part 192 references F2945,
the PA11 gas piping standard, all references to D2513 and this note will
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded be removed from these standards.
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only Under Constant Internal Pressure
and are not considered standard. D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
tics
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
D2513 Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,
2. Referenced Documents Tubing, and Fittings
D4066 Classification System for Nylon Injection and Extru-
2.1 ASTM Standards:
sion Materials (PA) (Withdrawn 2012)
NOTE 1—For over 40 years D2513 was the singular US CFR Title 49 D6779 Classification System for and Basis of Specification
Part 192 referenced Standard Specification codifying the installation and for Polyamide Molding and Extrusion Materials (PA)
use of thermoplastic gas piping in jurisdictional installations. Initially all
materials (PE, PVC, ABS, CAB) were contained within the body of the
standard D2513. In later years D2513 was completely reformatted to make F2785 Specification for Polyamide 12 Gas Pressure Pipe,
it more user friendly by moving material-specific requirements from the Tubing, and Fittings
standard’s body to mandatory annexes. The next major change occurred F2945 Specification for Polyamide 11 Gas Pressure Pipe,
late in 2009 at which time all thermoplastic materials, except Tubing, and Fittings
polyethylene, were removed from D2513 changing its Title and Scope
from a thermoplastic gas piping standard to a polyethylene-only gas 2.2 Federal Standard:
piping standard. This recent change required that new standards be
developed for those materials that were removed from D2513 including Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
PA11. This causes problems for PA11 piping because it has been CFR Title 49 Part 192 Transportation of Natural and Other
referenced and permitted for jurisdictional use and installation under US Gas By Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
CFR Title 49 Part 192 as complying with D2513 and D2513 no longer has
the A5 polyamide annex and Part 192 still references D2513-99 which 2.3 Military Standard:
makes for potential confusion. This puts PA11 gas piping standards into MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
somewhat of a limbo since D2513 is now a PE-only specification is 2.4 National Sanitation Foundation Standard:
referenced in all of these standards. Therefore until Part 192 is revised to
Materials
328
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1733
3. Terminology 6.3 Rework Material—Clean rework material generated

3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412 from the manufacturer’s own production may be used by the
and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600, same manufacturer as long as the fittings produced conform to
unless otherwise specified. the requirements of this specification.
3.2 dimension ratio (DR) for thermoplastic pipe—the ratio 7. Requirements
of diameter to wall thickness. For this specification it is
calculated by dividing the specified outside diameter by the 7.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
specified wall thickness of the fitting at its area of fusion. DRs 7.1.1 Outside Diameter—Nominal outside diameters of butt
are rounded and do not calculate exactly. fusion fittings shall conform to the nominal iron pipe size (IPS)
or copper tubing size (CTS) dimensions at area of fusion.
4. Classification These dimensions and tolerances shall be as shown in Table 1,
Table 2, and Table 3 of this specification.
4.1 General—This specification covers butt fusion fittings 7.1.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Inside diam-
intended for use with polyamide pipe and tubing. eters of butt fusion fittings for tubing at area of fusion shall
4.1.1 Fittings covered by this specification are normally conform to the dimensions of the tubing being joined. The
molded. Fittings may be machined from extruded or molded dimensions and tolerances for the fittings are shown in Table 3.
stock. 7.1.3 Wall Thickness—The wall thicknesses of butt fusion
4.1.2 Fittings fabricated by thermal welding are not in- fittings shall not be less than the minimum specified for the
cluded in this specification. pipe or tubing. The wall thicknesses and tolerances at the area
4.1.3 Fittings intended for use in the distribution of natural of fusion shall be as shown in Table 3, Table 4, and Table 5 of
gas or petroleum fuels shall also meet the requirements of this specification.
Specification D2513–99 and Specification F2945 for PA11 7.1.4 Measurements—These shall be made in accordance
materials or Specification F2785 for PA12 materials. with Test Method D2122 for roundable pipe.
7.1.5 Design Dimensions—Overall fitting dimensions may
5. Ordering Information
be as preferred from a design standpoint by the manufacturer
5.1 When ordering fittings under this specification, the and accepted by the purchaser consistent with 7.1.3.
following should be specified:
7.2 Pressure Test Requirements :
5.1.1 Polyamide compound (material designation or trade
7.2.1 Short-Term Rupture Strength for Fittings 1⁄2 to 12 in.
name)
and 90 to 315 mm, Nominal Diameter—The minimum short-
5.1.2 Style of fitting (tee, 90° ell, and the like)
term rupture strength of the fitting and fused pipe or tubing
5.1.3 Size:
shall not be less than the minimum short-term rupture strength
5.1.3.1 Nominal diameter.
of the pipe or tubing in the system when tested in accordance
5.1.3.2 CTS, IPS, or schedule.
5.1.3.3 Dimension ratio number or schedule number.
TABLE 1 IPS Sizing System Outside Diameters and Tolerances
6. Materials for Fittings for Use with Polyamide Pipe, in.
6.1 Basic Materials—This specification covers fittings made Nominal Pipe Average Outside Diameter
Tolerance
from polyamide plastics as defined in Specifications D4066 or Size at Area of FusionA
D6779. 1 2⁄ 0.840 ±0.008

NOTE 2—The PA plastic fittings intended for use in the transport of ⁄
34 1.050 ±0.008
potable water should be evaluated and certified as safe for this purpose by 1 1.315 ±0.010
11⁄4 1.660 ±0.010
a testing agency acceptable to the local health authority. The evaluation
11⁄2 1.900 ±0.010
should be in accordance with requirements for chemical extraction, taste, 2 2.375 ±0.010
and odor, that are no less restrictive than those included in National 3 3.500 ±0.012
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard No. 14. The seal or mark of the 4 4.500 ±0.015
laboratory making the evaluation should be included on the pipe and 6 6.625 ±0.018
tubing. 8 8.625 ±0.025
10 10.750 ±0.027
6.2 Compounds—The polyamide fittings compounds shall 12 12.750 ±0.036
meet the requirements for Group 3, Class 2, and Grade 3, or 14 14.000 ±0.063
Group 4, Class 2 and Grade 3 as prescribed in Specifications 16 16.000 ±0.072
18 18.000 ±0.081
D4066 or D6779. 20 20.000 ±0.090
21.5 21.500 ±0.097
NOTE 3—Fittings produced from compounds meeting the requirements 22 22.000 ±0.099
of Group 3, Class 2, and Grade 3 (PA 323) are intended for use with pipe 24 24.000 ±0.108
manufactured from compounds meeting the requirements of Group 3, 28 28.000 ±0.126
Class 2, and Grade 3. Fittings produced from compounds meeting the 32 32.000 ±0.144
requirements of Group 4, Class 2, and Grade 3 (PA 423) are intended for 36 36.000 ±0.162
use with pipe manufactured from compounds meeting the requirements of 42 42.000 ±0.189
Group 4, Class 2, and Grade 3. As per the recommendations of respective 48 48.000 ±0.216
resin manufacturers, no cross fusion between PA 323 pipe and fittings and A
Defined as measured 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) from fitting outlet extremity.
PA 423 pipe and fittings is permitted.
329
SF-1733 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 ISO Sizing System (ISO 161/1) Outside Diameters and 10. Test Methods
Tolerances for Fit for Use with Polyamide Pipe, (mm)
Average Outside Diameter at Area of Fusion
10.1 General—The test methods in this specification cover
Nominal Pipe
Size Min Max A fittings to be used with pipe and tubing for gas, water, and other
engineered piping systems. Test methods that are applicable
90 90.0 90.8 from other specifications will be referenced in the paragraph
110 110.0 111.0 pertaining to the particular test. Certain special test methods
160 160.0 161.4
200 200.0 201.8
applicable to this specification only are explained in the
250 250.0 252.3 appropriate paragraph.
280 280.0 282.5
315 315.0 317.8 10.2 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition
355 355.0 358.2 the specimens prior to test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not
400 400.0 403.6
450 450.0 454.1
less than 6 h in air, or 1 h in water, for those tests where
500 500.0 504.5 conditioning is required and in all cases of disagreement.
560 560.0 565.0 Newly molded fittings shall be conditioned 40 h prior to test.
630 630.0 635.7
710 710.0 716.4 10.3 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the standard
800 800.0 807.2
900 900.0 908.1
laboratory temperature of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) unless
1000 1000.0 1009.0 otherwise specified.
1200 1200.0 1210.8
1400 1400.0 1412.6 10.4 Dimensions and Tolerances:
1600 1600.0 1614.4 10.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter
A
Specified in ISO 3607. of the fittings at the area of fusion in accordance with the Wall
Thickness section of Test Method D2122 by use of a circum-
ferential tape readable to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm).
10.4.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Use a stepped
plug gage to determine the inside diameter of the CTS end of
with 10.5.3. These minimum pressures shall be as shown in the fitting. The plug gage shall be of the go/no go type and shall
Table 6 of this specification. Test specimens shall be prepared have 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm) land lengths cut to the minimum inside
for testing in the manner described in 10.5.1 of this specifica- diameter and maximum inside diameter. A fitting is unaccept-
tion. The test equipment, procedures, and failures definitions able (no go) if it fits snugly on the minimum inside diameter
shall be as specified in Test Method D1599. land of the gage or if it fits loosely on the maximum diameter
7.2.2 Short-Term Strength for Fittings 14 to 48 in. and 355 land of the gage.
to 1600 mm, Nominal Diameter—Fittings shall not fail when 10.4.3 Wall Thickness—Make a series of measurements
tested in accordance with 10.5.3. The minimum pressure shall using a cylindrical anvil tubular micrometer or other accurate
be as shown in Table 6 of this specification. Test specimens device at closely spaced intervals to ensure that minimum and
shall be prepared for testing in the manner described in 10.2 of maximum wall thicknesses to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm)
this specification. The test equipment and procedures shall be have been determined. Make a minimum of six measurements
as specified in Test Method D1599. at each cross section.
7.2.3 Sustained Pressure—The fitting and fused pipe or
tubing shall not fail, as defined in Test Method D1598, when 10.5 Pressure Testing:
tested at the time, pressures, and test temperatures selected 10.5.1 Preparation of Specimens for Pressure Testing—
from test options offered in Table 7. The test specimens shall be Prepare test specimens in such a manner that each, whether
prepared for testing in the manner prescribed in 10.5.1. individual fittings or groups of fittings, is a system incorporat-
ing at least one length of pipe or tubing. Fuse all fitting outlets
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance with the appropriate size pipe or tubing. At least one piece of
pipe or tubing in the system shall have a minimum length equal
8.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
to five pipe diameters.
meeting the requirements of this specification. Fittings shall be 10.5.2 Sustained Pressure Test:
homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign 10.5.2.1 Select the test temperature and pressures from one
inclusions, or other injurious defects. The fittings shall be as of the options offered in Table 7.
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, 10.5.2.2 Select the test specimens at random and condition
and other physical properties. at the selected option test temperature. Test the fitting speci-
mens with water, in accordance with Test Method D1598 at the
9. Sampling selected option, stress, and hours of testing.
9.1 Parts made for sale under this specification should be NOTE 4—Other test mediums and test conditions than offered in Table
sampled at a frequency appropriate for the end use intended. 7 may be used as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
When the fittings are to be installed under a system specifica-
tion the minimum requirements of that specification must be 10.5.2.3 Test six specimens at the selected option conditions
satisfied. and time.
330
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1733
TABLE 3 Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Tolerances for Fittings for Use with Polyamide Tubing
Tubing Type, Nominal Tubing Minimum Wall
0.062 (1.57) ⁄ CTS

12 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.495 (12.58) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58)
34⁄ CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.745 (18.92) ... ...
0.090 (2.29) 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.437 (11.10) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.687 (17.44) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.937 (23.80) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.187 (30.14) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
DR 11 3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.715 (18.16) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.077 (1.96)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.915 (23.24) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.101 (2.56)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.125 (28.58) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
DR 9.3 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.483 (12.26) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.067 (1.70)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.679 (17.24) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.094 (2.38)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.873 (22.18) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.069 (27.16) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.148 (3.76)
A
TABLE 4 IPS Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with Polyamide Pipe, in.A,B,C
Nominal Pipe Minimum Wall Thickness
Size SCH 40 SCH 80 SDR 21 SDR 17 SDR 13.5 DR 10 DR 11.5 SDR 11 DR 9.3 SDR 9
⁄
1 2 0.109 0.147 ... ... ... ... ... 0.076 0.090 ...
⁄
3 4 0.113 0.154 ... ... ... ... ... 0.095 0.113 0.117
1 0.133 0.179 ... ... ... ... ... 0.119 0.142 0.146
1 1 ⁄4 0.140 0.191 ... ... ... 0.166 ... 0.151 0.179 0.184
1 1 ⁄2 0.145 0.200 ... ... ... ... ... 0.173 0.204 0.211
2 0.154 0.218 ... ... ... ... ... 0.216 0.256 0.264
3 0.216 0.300 ... ... 0.259 ... 0.305 0.318 0.377 0.389
4 0.237 0.337 ... 0.264 0.333 ... 0.392 0.409 0.484 0.500
6 0.280 0.432 0.316 0.390 0.491 ... 0.576 0.603 0.713 0.736
8 0.322 ... 0.410 0.508 0.639 ... 0.750 0.785 0.928 0.958
10 0.365 ... 0.511 0.633 0.797 ... 0.935 0.978 1.156 1.194
12 0.406 ... 0.608 0.750 0.945 ... 1.109 1.160 1.371 1.417
14 ... ... 0.667 0.824 ... ... ... 1.273 1.505 1.556
16 ... ... 0.762 0.941 ... ... ... 1.455 1.720 1.778
18 ... ... 0.857 1.059 ... ... ... 1.636 1.935 2.000
20 ... ... 0.952 1.176 ... ... ... 1.818 2.151 2.222
21.5 ... ... 1.024 1.265 ... ... ... ... ... ...
22 ... ... 1.048 1.294 ... ... ... 2.000 2.366 2.444
24 ... ... 1.143 1.412 ... ... ... 2.182 2.581 ...
28 ... ... 1.333 1.647 ... ... ... 2.545 ... ...
32 ... ... 1.524 1.882 ... ... ... 2.909 ... ...
36 ... ... 1.714 2.118 ... ... ... ... ... ...
42 ... ... 2.000 2.471 ... ... ... ... ... ...
48 ... ... 2.286 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
B
C
10.5.2.4 Failure of two of the six specimens tested shall ment and procedures shall be as specified in Test Method
constitute failure of the test. Failure of one of the six specimens D1599. The hydrostatic pressure shall be increased at a
tested is cause for retest of six additional specimens. Failure of uniform rate such that the test pressure is reached within 60 to
one of the six specimens in retest shall constitute failure of the 70 s from the start of the test. No failure should occur in the
test. sample during the test period.
10.5.3 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure for Fittings 1⁄2
to 12 in. and 90 to 315 mm, Nominal Diameter—The test 11. Product Marking
equipment, procedures, and failure definitions shall be as
specified in Test Method D1599. The hydrostatic pressure shall
be increased at a uniform rate such that the specimen fails 11.1.1 ASME SF-1733 or both ASME SF-1733 and ASTM
F1733,
between 60 and 70 s from start of the test. Minimum failure
pressures are shown in Table 6.
10.5.4 Minimum Hydrostatic Pressure for Fittings 14 to 48 11.1.3 Material designations (such as PA32312)
in. and 355 to 1600 mm, Nominal Diameter—The test equip-
331
SF-1733 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 5 ISO Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the 11.1.4 Date of manufacture or manufacturing code,
Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with Polyamide Pipe,
11.1.5 Size, and
(mm)A,B,C
Nominal
11.1.6 For PA 32312 fittings:
Minimal Wall Thickness
Pipe “for fusion to PA 32312 (PA11) pipe only”
Size DR 41 DR 32.5 DR 26 DR 21 DR 17 DR 11
For PA 42316 fittings:
“for fusion to PA 42316 (PA12) pipe only.”
90 ... ... 3.5 4.3 5.3 8.2
110 ... 3.4 4.2 5.2 6.5 10.0
160 ... 4.9 6.2 7.6 9.4 14.5
11.2 Where the physical size of the fitting does not allow
200 ... 6.2 7.7 9.5 11.8 18.2 complete marking, marking may be omitted in the following
250 ... 7.7 9.6 11.9 14.7 22.7 sequence: size, date of manufacture, material designation,
280 ... 8.6 10.8 13.3 16.5 25.5
315 ... 9.7 12.1 15.0 18.5 28.6 manufacturer’s name or trademark.
355 ... 10.9 13.7 16.9 20.9 32.3
400 ... 12.3 15.4 19.0 23.5 36.4 11.3 Where recessed marking is used, take care not to
450 ... 13.8 17.3 21.4 26.5 ... reduce the wall thickness below the minimum specified.
500 ... 15.4 19.2 23.8 29.4 ...
560 ... 17.2 21.5 26.7 32.9 ...
630 ... 19.4 24.2 30.0 37.1 ... 12. Quality Assurance
710 ... 21.8 27.3 33.8 41.8 ...
800 ... 24.6 30.8 38.1 47.1 ... 12.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was manu-
900 ... 27.7 34.6 42.9 ... ...
1000 24.4 30.8 38.5 47.6 ... ... factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with
1200 29.3 36.9 46.2 ... ... ... this specification and has been found to meet the require-
1400 34.1 43.1 ... ... ... ... ments of this specification.
1600 39.0 49.2 ... ... ... ...
A
B
For those SDR groups having overlapped thickness requirements, a manufac-
13. Certification
turer may represent their product as applying to the combination (for example,
11.0/11.5) so long as their product falls within the dimensional requirements of both 13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
DR’s.
C
For wall thicknesses not listed the minimum wall thickness may be calculated by
the average outside diameter/SDR rounded up to the nearest 0.001.
332
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1733
TABLE 6 Minimum Burst Pressure Requirements at 73.4°F for

Common Fitting SizesA
Wall Thickness, DR, Nominal Minimum Pressure,
or Schedule Diameter psi
DR 7 ALLB 1300
SDR 9 ALLB 975
DR 9.3 ALLB 945
SDR 11 ALLB 775
DR 11.5 ALLB 745
DR 15.5 ALLB 540
SDR 17 ALLB 495
SDR 21 ALLB 385
DR 32.5 ALLB 250
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1 ⁄2 CTS 860
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 3⁄4 CTS 590
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1 CTS 450
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1⁄2 CTS 1315
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 3 ⁄4 CTS 700
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1 CTS 650
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 11⁄4 CTS 540
SCH 40 1⁄2 IPS 1160
SCH 40 3⁄4 IPS 930
SCH 40 1 IPS 880
SCH 40 11⁄4 IPS 710
SCH 40 11⁄2 IPS 650
SCH 40 2 IPS 590
SCH 40 3 IPS 510
SCH 40 4 IPS 435
SCH 40 6 IPS 340
SCH 40 8 IPS 310
SCH 40 10 IPS 280
SCH 40 12 IPS 265
SCH 40 16 IPS 255
SCH 40 20 IPS 240
A
Fiber stress of 3900 psi (27 MPa) for PA32312 and PA42316.
B
Refers to IPS and ISO diameters shown in Table 1 and Table 2.
TABLE 7 Sustained Pressure Test Options, psig (MPa)
SDR/DR Option 1A, B Option 2C ,B

73°F (23°C)/1000 h 176°F (80°C)/170 h
DR 7 935 (6.5) 485 (3.3)

SDR 9 700 (4.8) 360 (2.5)
SDR 11 560 (3.9) 290 (2.0)
DR 15.5 385 (2.7) 200 (1.4)
SDR 17 350 (2.4) 180 (1.2)
SDR 21 280 (1.9) 145 (1.0)
DR 32.5 180 (1.2) 90 (0.6)
A
Sustained pressure is based on stress of 2800 psi (19 MPa).
B
All psig values were rounded to nearest 5 psig.
C
333
SF-1733 ASME NM.3.1-2018
NOTE S1.1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
ment:
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for the product to be used to convey or to be in contact with potable
water.
S3. Products intended for contact with potable water shall dard 14 by an acceptable certifying organization when required
be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with ANSI/ by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
NSF Standard 61 or the health effects portion of NSF Stan-
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
334
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1924
SPECIFICATION FOR PLASTIC MECHANICAL FITTINGS

FOR USE ON OUTSIDE DIAMETER CONTROLLED
POLYETHYLENE GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND TUBING
SF-1924
quirements in para. 9.1.1, renumbering of section 12, and quality assurance requirement in para 10.1 has been made
mandatory.)
335
SF-1924 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Plastic Mechanical Fittings for Use on Outside Diameter
Controlled Polyethylene Gas Distribution Pipe and Tubing
1. Scope Under Constant Internal Pressure

1.1 This specification describes requirements and test meth- D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
ods for the qualification of plastic bodied mechanical fittings tics
for use with outside diameter controlled polyethylene (PE) gas D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
distribution pipe, nominal 2 pipe size (IPS) and smaller Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
complying with Specification D2513. In addition, it specifies D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
general requirements of the material from which these fittings for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
are made. for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
1.2 The test methods described in this specification are not F1588 Test Method for Constant Tensile Load Joint Test
intended to be used as routine quality control tests. (CTLJT)
1.3 This specification covers the types of mechanical fittings F2897 Specification for Tracking and Traceability Encoding
described in 3.2. System of Natural Gas Distribution Components (Pipe,
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Tubing, Fittings, Valves, and Appurtenances)
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical 2.2 ASME Standard:
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only ASME B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping
and are not considered standard. Systems
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the CFR, Title 49, Part 192 Pipeline Safety Regulations
test method portion, Section 7, of this specification. This 2.4 Plastics Pipe Institute Standard:
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, PPI TR-4 Recommended Hydrostatic Strengths and Design
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings Compounds
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- 3. Terminology
tions prior to use.
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of terms used in this specifica-
1.6 The text of this specification references notes and
tion are in accordance with Terminology F412 unless otherwise
footnotes, which provide explanatory material. These notes and
specified. Abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology
footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be
D1600 unless otherwise specified.
considered as requirements of this specification.
3.1.1 The Gas Industry terminology used in this specifica-
2. Referenced Documents tion is in accordance with ASME B31.8 or CFR, Title 49, Part
192 unless otherwise indicated.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1.2 The term “pipe” used herein refers to both “pipe” and
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics “tubing” unless specifically stated otherwise. The term “fitting”
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe refers to a mechanical connecting device as described in 3.1.4
and 3.1.6.
336
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1924
3.1.3 joint, n—the location at which two pieces of pipe, or a document is evidence of compliance with this paragraph for
pipe and a fitting are connected together, for example, an third party certifying and listing agencies.
installed coupling has two joints.
4.2 The physical properties of each material used to produce
3.1.4 joint, mechanical, n—a connection between piping the fitting shall be available from the fitting manufacturer upon
components employing physical force to develop a seal or request.
produce alignment.
3.1.5 long-term strength (LTS), n—the estimated tensile 4.3 Specifications outlining all the physical properties and
stress that when applied continuously will cause failure at effects of environmental conditions for materials of manufac-
100 000 h. This is the intercept of the stress regression line ture shall be available from the fitting manufacturer upon
with the 100 000 h coordinate. request.
3.1.6 mechanical fitting, n—fitting for making a mechanical NOTE 1—Materials in long-term contact with natural gas of line quality
joint to provide for pressure integrity, leak tightness, and and LP gas vapor should be demonstrated not to adversely affect the
depending on category, as defined in this specification, resis- performance of the fitting.
tance to end loads. NOTE 2—Materials should have a demonstrated resistance to environ-
mental stress cracking when exposed, under stress, to chemical com-
3.1.6.1 category 1 mechanical fitting, n—fitting for assem- pounds encountered in, or external to gas piping systems, and a demon-
bling pipes, which includes a compression zone(s) to provide strated resistance to bacteriological decomposition. Such compounds
for pressure integrity, leak tightness, and resistance to end include, but are not limited to, ice thawing chemicals, fertilizers,
loads sufficient to cause no less than 25 % elongation of the PE insecticides, herbicides, leak detection fluids, acids, bases and antifreeze
piping as described in this specification. solutions used to thaw frozen lines. The effects of liquid environments,
such as antifreeze agents, odorants, and hydrocarbons are known to be
3.1.6.2 category 2 mechanical fitting, n—fitting for assem- deleterious to some plastics, particularly when under service conditions.
bling pipes, which includes a compression zone(s) to provide
for pressure integrity and leak tightness only. Category 2 5. Dimensions
fittings do not provide for resistance to end loads.
5.1 The dimensions and tolerances shall be determined by
3.1.7 MAOP, n—the Maximum Allowable Operating Pres-
the manufacturer.
sure of the fuel gas piping system, in psig, as determined in
accordance with CFR, Title 49, Part 192.121 and as repre-
sented in the following: 6. Qualification Requirements
MAOP 5 P 5 2 3 S/ ~ R 2 1 ! 3 f D (1) 6.1 General—Unless otherwise specified, each nominal size

of fitting shall be tested. Testing of the thickest wall pipe that
where: the fitting is designed to be used with qualifies the use of that
S = the PE material’s HDB as published in PPI TR-4. fitting with pipe of lesser wall thickness.
R = the pipe’s dimension ratio determined by dividing the 6.1.1 Mechanical joint qualifications shall be performed on
pipe’s specified nominal outside diameter by the pipes assembled joints using the fitting manufacturer’s joining pro-
specified nominal wall thickness; and, cedure. All mechanical fittings offered by the manufacturer
fD = the design (derating) factor for thermoplastic fuel gas shall be capable of meeting the requirements of this standard
piping as set by the authority having jurisdiction. In when connecting polyethylene gas piping complying with
the United States the design factor is cited in CFR, Specification D2513. To verify the structural integrity of the
Title 49 Part 192.121. fitting body, representative samples shall be subjected to the
3.2 Types of Mechanical Fittings: requirements of 6.2.1. It is not the intent of this specification to
3.2.1 in-line fitting, n—mechanical fitting used to make a require testing of all fitting configurations, that is, tees, ells,
mechanical joint where the bore axis of the compression and etc., but each mechanical joint design in each size.
sealing zones of the fitting is essentially the same as the 6.1.2 All mechanical fittings described in 3.2 shall have an
connected piping, for example, couplings, ells, and tees. internal pipe reinforcing tubular insert stiffener that extends at
3.2.2 mechanical saddle fitting, n—mechanical fitting used least under the seal and gripping device, where used. The
to make a mechanical joint that allows a lateral connection to saddle portion of saddle-type fittings do not require an internal
an existing main in which a portion of the fitting is contoured tubular stiffener due to the nature of the connection.
to match the O.D. of the pipe to which it is attached. Herein 6.2 Performance Requirements:
referred to as the saddle fitting mating pipe. 6.2.1 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure—The
fitting, joint or pipe in the area affected by the fitting shall not
4. Materials and Manufacture Requirements fail as defined in Test Method D1598, when tested in accor-
4.1 Plastic pressure containing materials subject to continu- dance with 7.2. The fitting or joint meets this requirement when
ous stress, either hoop or axial, shall have an ASTM material tested in accordance with any one of the three conditions (A, B,
specification, and the materials long-term strength, such as the or C) listed in 7.2.
long-term hydrostatic strength, determined in accordance with 6.2.2 Tensile Strength—The pipe joint shall accommodate
Test Method D2837, excepting that failure data can be obtained the tensile loadings when tested in accordance with 7.3.
from specimens such as the following: tensile bars, plane 6.2.2.1 In-Line Fittings, Category 1—The joint shall pro-
strain, or actual fitting samples. A material listing in PPI TR-4 vide resistance to a force on the pipe joint equal to or greater
337
SF-1924 ASME NM.3.1-2018
than that which will cause no less than 25 % elongation of pipe, 2S

P5 (2)
or the pipe fails outside the joint area when tested in accor- DR 2 1
dance with 7.3.
where:
6.2.2.2 In-Line Fittings, Category 2—A joint design that
provides a seal only. A mechanical joint designed for this P = test pressure, psig,
category excludes any provisions in the design of the joint to S = hoop stress from Table 1, and
DR = dimension ratio (OD/wall).
resist any axial pullout forces; therefore, tensile tests are not
required. 7.2.3 Failure of two of the six specimens tested shall
6.2.2.3 Mechanical Saddle Fittings—The joint between the constitute failure in the test. Failure of one of the six specimens
saddle and mating pipe shall not fail by rotation or leakage tested is cause for retest of six additional specimens. Failure of
when tested in accordance with 7.6. one of the six specimens in retest shall constitute failure of the
6.2.2.4 Joint restraint capabilities less than as defined above test. Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in Test
shall constitute failure of the test. Method D1598.
6.2.3 Temperature Cycling Test—The mechanical joint shall
7.3 Tensile Strength Test:
provide a pressure seal after 10 cycles of the temperature
cycling test when tested in accordance with 7.4. 7.3.1 Test specimens shall be prepared so that the minimum
6.2.4 Constant Tensile Load Joint Test— The joint shall not length of unreinforced pipe is equal to five times the nominal
fail by leakage or pullout when loaded to an axial tensile stress outside diameter of the pipe being tested. It is permissible to
of 1320 psi (9.1 MPa) and tested in accordance with 7.5. test multiple joints together provided the minimum length of
unreinforced pipe (as stated above) exists on at least one joint.
7. Test Methods 7.3.2 In-line fittings shall be tested with the apparatus and
7.1 General—The test methods in this specification cover reported as specified in Test Method D638. Test six joints.
mechanical joint designs. Test methods that are applicable from 7.3.3 The test shall be conducted at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6
other specifications will be referenced in the section pertaining 2°C).
to that particular test. 7.3.4 The speed of the testing shall be 0.2 in. (5 mm)/min6
7.1.1 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition 25 %.
the specimens (pipe and fittings) prior to joining at 73.4 6 3.6° 7.3.5 Failure of any sample shall constitute failure of the
F (23 6 2° C) for not less than 16 h. test.
7.1.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the standard
7.4 Temperature Cycling Test:
laboratory temperature of 73.4 6 3.6° F (23 6 2° C) unless
otherwise specified. 7.4.1 Tests shall be conducted on six of the smallest and six
7.1.3 Test Specimens—Test joints shall be prepared with the of the largest nominal pipe sizes of each mechanical joint
appropriate size PE pipe, complying with the dimensional design and assembled in accordance with 6.1.1.
requirements of Specification D2513, in accordance with the 7.4.2 Leak test specimens at ambient at 7 6 3 psig and a
manufacturer’s joining procedures. minimum of 1.5 × MAOP.
7.2 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test: 7.4.3 Cool specimens to a temperature of −20 6 3.6°F (−29
7.2.1 The apparatus and report shall be as specified in Test 6 2°C) and maintain for a minimum of 2.5 h.
Method D1598. Test six joints assembled in accordance with 7.4.4 Condition specimens to a temperature of 140 6 3.6°F
6.1.1. (60 6 2°C) and maintain for a minimum of 2.5 h.
7.2.2 The assembled joints shall be tested in accordance 7.4.5 Repeat 7.4.3 and 7.4.4 for a total of 10 cycles.
with Test Method D1598 with the exception that it is not 7.4.6 Pressurize 50 % of the speciments of each size at 7 6
required that 12 in. or five times the nominal outside diameter 3 psig and the remaining 50 % of each size at 1.5× MAOP of
of the pipe used in conducting the test be placed on each side the piping material and SDR that the fittings are designed to be
of the fitting being tested. The test shall be conducted at one of used with. Leak test first at 140 6 3.6°F (60 6 2°C) and then
the time/temperature/hoop stress combinations shown in Table at −20 6 3.6°F (−29 6 2°C).
1 with the test pressure calculated using Eq 2. If ductile failure
occurs in the pipe at 176°F (80°C)/670 psi (4.6 MPa) hoop NOTE 3—If immersion is used for leak testing, and the design of the
joint is such that air can be trapped within the joint assembly, allow
stress, retest at 176°F (80°C)/580 psi (4.0 MPa) hoop stress. adequate time for all air trapped within the joint to escape prior to
observing for leaks.
TABLE 1 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test

7.5 Constant Tensile Load Joint Test (In-Line Joints Only):
Conditions 7.5.1 One specimen of each nominal pipe size shall be
Condition Minimum Time Temperature Pipe Hoop Stress, S tested in accordance with Test Method F1588 for a minimum
A 3 000 h 140±3.6°F 1 000 psi (6.8 MPa) of 1000 h at an internal pressure between 4 psig (27.6 kPa) and
(60± 2°C) the pipe MAOP.
B 1 000 h 176±3.6°F 580 psi (4.0 MPa)
(80± 2°C) 7.5.2 Failure of the specimen shall constitute failure of the
C 170 h 176±3.6°F 670 psi (4.6 MPa) test.
(80± 2°C)
7.6 Rotation Test (Mechanical Saddle Fittings Only):
338
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1924
7.6.1 Test shall be conducted on six of the smallest and six TABLE 2 Rotation Test Torsion Load Requirements
of the largest nominal pipe sizes of each mechanical joint Main Pipe Size Minimum Torsion Load
design and assembly assembled in accordance with 6.1.1. NPS 11⁄4 30 ft-lbf (40.7 N · m)
7.6.2 The test shall be conducted at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 NPS 2 and larger 50 ft-lbf (67.8 N · m)
2°C).
7.6.3 Saddle fittings shall be assembled onto the mating 9. Product Marking
pipe so that the minimum length of unreinforced pipe is equal 9.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
to five times the nominal diameter of the pipe to which the 9.1.1 ASME SF-1924 or both ASME SF-1924 and ASTM
saddle is being installed. F1924.
7.6.4 Following the manufacturer’s recommended proce- 9.1.2 Two or three letter coded plastic material
dure for installing saddle fittings, tap the mating pipe and identification, in accordance with PPI TR-4 or the equivalent.
remove the saddle fitting cutter. 9.1.3 Date or lot code identification.
7.6.5 Alignment marks shall be placed on both the saddle 9.1.4 Manufacturer’s name or trademark.
fitting and the mating pipe to identify the original position of 9.1.5 Size, followed by “IPS” or “CTS” designation, and
the assembly. SDR or wall thickness range.
7.6.6 Either the saddle fitting, or the mating pipe, shall be 9.1.6 The word “gas”, or if space does not permit, the letter
restrained in a manner that does not affect the saddle fitting “G”.
joint. 9.1.7 Category 1 or Category 2 abbreviation is permitted as
7.6.7 A torque shall be applied to the unrestrained compo- CAT1 or CAT2.
nent of the assembly and a torsion load applied about the 9.1.8 All required markings shall be legible and so applied
centerline of the mating pipe. as to remain legible under normal handling and installation
7.6.8 The saddle fitting assembly shall be capable of with- practices. If indentation is used, it shall be demonstrated that
standing the torsion loads indicated in Table 2 without the these marks have no affect on the long term strength of the
saddle fitting rotating relative to the mating pipe or adversely fitting.
affecting the integrity of the joint. 9.1.9 Fittings manufactured from materials listed in Speci-
7.6.9 Following rotation testing, leak test in accordance fication D2513 and intended for use with natural gas at
with the following. Pressurize each saddle tee joint at 7 6 3 elevated temperatures greater than 73°F (23°C) shall be
psig (48.3 6 20.7 kPa) and at a minimum of 1.5 × MAOP of marked with additional code letters from Table 4 of Specifica-
the pipe on which they are being tested. tion D2513 the first code letter to identify the temperature of
7.6.10 Observe the joint for leakage for 2 to 3 min at each the pressure rating, and a second code letter to identify HDB at
pressure. the highest recommended temperature.
7.6.11 The joint shall be bubble tight when tested with leak
detection soap, liquid immersion, or other equivalent methods. 9.2 Fittings intended for transport of natural gas and meet-
7.6.12 Failure of any of the six samples tested shall consti- ing the requirements of this specification shall be marked with
tute failure of the test. the 16- character gas distribution component tracking and
traceability identifier in accordance with F2897. The 16-
NOTE 4—The rotation test is intended to qualify only the joint between character code shall be expressed in alpha-numeric format and
the saddle fitting and the mating pipe, not the lateral connection coming
from the saddle fitting. It is the intent of this specification that the lateral Code 128 bar code format with a minimum bar thickness value
connection joint design will be qualified by virtue of utilizing a design of 0.005 in. or an alternative 1D or 2D bar code symbology, as
similar to an in-line fitting and capable of meeting the requirements for agreed upon between manufacturer and end user. All fittings
in-line fittings contained within this specification. shall have the 16-character codes marked or affixed to the
8. Product Instructions product, product packaging, or any manner agreed upon
between manufacturer and end user.
8.1 Qualified installation instructions shall be available
from the manufacturer and supplied with the fitting.
339
SF-1924 ASME NM.3.1-2018

10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product is manu- 12.1 gas; mechanical saddle fitting ; plastic mechanical
factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with fitting; polyethylene pipe; rotation test; temperature cycling
this specification and has been found to meet the require- test
ments of this specification.
11. Certification
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
340
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1970
SPECIFICATION FOR SPECIAL ENGINEERED FITTINGS,

APPURTENANCES OR VALVES FOR USE IN POLY (VINYL
CHLORIDE) (PVC) OR CHLORINATED POLY (VINYL
CHLORIDE) (CPVC) SYSTEMS
SF-1970
(Identical with ASTM F1970-12e1 except for additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, revised marking
requirements in para. 11.1.7, renumbering of section 14, and quality assurance requirement in para. 12.1 has been
made mandatory.)
341
SF-1970 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for
use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Systems
1. Scope 1.5 Fittings which rely on heat fusion welding for connec-
1.1 This specification covers fittings, appurtenances and tion to the piping system are outside the scope of this
valves which are to be used with pipe and tubing complying specification.
with Specifications D1785, D2241, D2846/D2846M, F441/ 1.6 Check valves (including foot valves) covered by this
F441M or F442/F442M, or other piping as specified by the specification shall not be considered backflow prevention
fittings manufacturer. These products, such as unions, flanges devices and shall not be used for the protection of a potable
or valves, are not included in the scope of existing ASTM water supply. For definitions and requirements of backflow
specifications. This specification includes minimum require- prevention devices, consult model plumbing codes and ASSE.
ments for testing, materials, dimensions, workmanship, 1.7 Due to the complex and installation-specific concerns
marking, and in-plant quality control. surrounding chemical resistance and corrosion, this specifica-
1.2 Fittings or appurtenances covered by this specification tion does not address the compatibility of the products with all
are generally either molded, fabricated, or assembled from possible end-use environments. Additional testing specific to
molded or machined components. The materials used in the end-use environment is recommended if the system is
components include rigid thermoplastics, thermoplastic conveying liquids other than potable water.
elastomers, elastomerics, and metals. The body or main portion 1.8 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
of the fitting, appurtenance or valve is typically PVC, CPVC, as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are given for
PE or PA (nylon). All products covered by this standard are information only.
intended to be used in PVC or CPVC plastic piping systems, or
as a transition from these to metal systems. 1.9 The following safety caveat applies only to the test
methods and in-plant quality control portions, section of this
1.3 The application of these products to gas service is specification: This standard does not purport to address all of
beyond the scope of this specification. the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
1.4 The products covered by this specification are intended responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
for use with the distribution of pressurized liquids only, which priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
are chemically compatible with the piping materials. Due to bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
inherent hazards associated with testing components and sys-
tems with compressed air or other compressed gases some 2. Referenced Documents
manufacturers do not allow pneumatic testing of their products. 2.1 ASTM Standards:
Consult with specific product/component manufacturers for D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
their specific testing procedures prior to pneumatic testing. Under Constant Internal Pressure
NOTE 1—Warning: Pressurized (compressed) air or other compressed D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
gases contain large amounts of stored energy which present serious safety Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
which present serious safety hazards should a system fail for any reason.
342
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1970
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- 3. Terminology

tics 3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with the Defi-
D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) nitions in F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) D1600 unless otherwise specified.
(CPVC) Compounds
D1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
3.2.1 activation pressure—the activation pressure of a check
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
valve is that inlet pressure, exceeding the outlet pressure,
D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998) required to open the check valve and allow water to flow.
D2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Auto-
motive Applications 3.2.2 appurtenances—accessories of a plastic piping system
designed for special applications or end-uses. Appurtenances
D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
may include, but are not limited to pipes, fittings, valves,
storage tanks, mechanical devices and expansion tanks.
D2241 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) 3.2.3 connections—the portion of the fitting intended to join
D2466 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic the fitting with the rest of the piping system (see 5.1).
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 3.2.4 CTS—abbreviation for “copper tube size”, indicating
D2467 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic an outside-diameter controlled tubing with outside diameter
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 dimensions meeting the tube specifications given in Specifica-
D2846/D2846M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl tion D2846/D2846M.
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribu- 3.2.5 IPS—abbreviation for “iron pipe size”, indicating an
tion Systems outside-diameter controlled tubing with outside diameter di-
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems mensions meeting the requirements of schedule 40 pipe (see
F438 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Specification D1785 for dimensions of schedule 40 pipe).
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 3.2.6 lot size—the total number of completely finished
F439 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) fittings or appurtenances that are manufactured under condi-
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 tions of production that are considered uniform.
F441/F441M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chlo- 3.2.7 referee test—testing conducted to compare perfor-
ride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 mance of the product against all requirements of this specifi-
F442/F442M Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chlo- cation. In-plant QC testing is not considered referee testing.
ride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR–PR)
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join- 4. Materials and Manufacture
ing Plastic Pipe 4.1 The elastomeric seals designed for push-on joints,
F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermo- which require no internal or external pressure to effect the
plastic Pipe and Fittings initial seal, shall comply with the requirements of Specification
2.2 ASME Standards: F477, Table 1 for thermoset, Table 2 for thermoplastic.
B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) 4.2 All other elastomeric seals shall be designed to meet the
B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings product performance requirements stated within this document
2.3 NSF Standards: and be specified in accordance with Classification D2000.
NSF 14 Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials 4.3 Materials used in components which provide structural
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Ef- integrity of the fitting or appurtenance shall meet the require-
fects ments of 4.3.1, 4.3.2, or 4.4.
2.4 ISA Standard: NOTE 2—Components which provide structural integrity include the
ISA S75.02 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedure body; connections such as sockets, compression joint components,
saddles, and flanges.
2.5 ASQ Standard: 4.3.1 PVC materials shall meet the minimum requirements
ANSI/ASQ Z1.4 Sampling Procedures and Tables for In- for a cell-classification of 12454, 13354, 11443 or 14333 as
spection by Attributes defined by Specification D1784.
4.3.2 CPVC materials shall meet the minimum require-
ments for a cell-classification of 23447 or 23448 as defined in
Specification D1784.
4.4 Rework Material— The manufacturers shall use only
duced shall meet the requirements of this specification. Mate-
rials containing contaminants from other base materials or
elastomerics shall not be used in the manufacture of fittings or
appurtenances under this specification.
343
SF-1970 ASME NM.3.1-2018
5. Requirements pressure and pipe of the same nominal size as the valve. For
5.1 Dimensions: valves with more than one flow direction, testing shall be
conducted in each flow configuration.
5.1.1 Seal Dimensions— Seal dimensions shall be in accor-
5.3.2 Leakage Through Reverse Direction of Valves—This
dance with the manufacturer’s standard design dimensions and
requirement is applicable to valves with a specified flow
tolerances. The seal shall be designed to provide an adequate
direction, and check valves. The reverse flow rate (leakage, L)
compressive force against the mating parts after assembly to
through the valve shall not exceed 0.01 % of the flow that
effect a positive seal under all combinations of permitted fitting
would exist if the valve were not installed (F), when tested in
and seal tolerances.
accordance with 8.5. That is, L shall be less than or equal to
5.1.2 Solvent-Weld Connections—Sockets shall comply
0.0001(F), or alternatively, the leakage percentage, P, shall be
with the fittings dimensions applicable to the size of pipe being
less than or equal to 0.01 %.
joined. Dimensioning of sockets shall be conducted in accor-
5.3.3 Activation Pressure of Check Valves—The activation
dance with 8.2.
pressure of check valves shall be within6 5 % or 6 2 in. (mm)
5.1.2.1 Socket connections for solvent-weld to IPS pipe
water column of the manufacturer’s published value, which-
shall comply with the socket dimensions given in Specification
ever is greater, when tested in accordance with 8.6.
D2467 for Sch 80 PVC, Specification D2466 for Sch 40 PVC,
Specification F439 for Sch 80 CPVC or Specification F438 for 5.4 Joint Tightness— Fittings utilizing push-on joints with
Sch 40 CPVC. elastomeric seals shall not leak or fail when tested in accor-
5.1.2.2 Socket connections for solvent-weld to CTS pipe dance with 8.3.
shall comply with the socket dimensions given in D2846/
D2846M. 6. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
5.1.3 Threaded Connections—For all thermoplastic compo- 6.1 The requirements of this section are verified by visual
nents having taper pipe threads, thermoplastic threads shall (non-magnified) inspection of the components and surfaces.
conform to Specification F1498 and be gaged in accordance 6.2 All surfaces of the fitting or assembly against which a
with 8.2.2. The tolerance on thermoplastic threads, when seal may rest shall be free of imperfections that could adversely
measured using gages, shall be 61.5 turns. For all metallic affect the performance of the fitting or assembly.
components having taper pipe threads, threads shall conform to
ASME B1.20.1. The tolerance on metallic threads when 6.3 The surfaces of all thermoplastic and metallic compo-
measured using gages shall be 61 turn. nents shall be free from defects which will adversely affect the
5.1.4 Flange Connections—Flanges and flange-connections performance and service of the fitting or assembly.
on assemblies shall meet the bolt-pattern requirements of 6.4 The thermoplastic materials, after molding or
ASME B16.5. fabrication, shall be as uniform as commercially practical in
5.1.5 Spigot Connections—Spigot ends of fittings shall meet color and opacity.
the requirements for average outside diameter, out-of-
roundness and minimum wall thickness of the corresponding 7. Sample Conditioning
pipe. 7.1 For referee testing, all samples shall be conditioned at
5.1.6 Other dimensions shall be in accordance with the 73 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not less than 40 hours immediately
manufacturer’s standard dimensions and tolerances. preceding testing.
5.2 Internal Pressure Tests—Fittings shall meet the mini- 7.2 For in-plant quality control testing purposes, samples
mum requirements for resistance to hydrostatic pressure when shall be conditioned at ambient temperature.
tested in accordance with 8.2.
5.2.1 Valves—Valves shall be tested in both the open (shell 8. Test Methods
test) and shut-off (seat test) configurations for compliance with 8.1 Dimensioning:
this section. Valves without a specified flow direction shall be 8.1.1 Measure dimensions in accordance with D2122. For
tested in shut-off position from each possible flow direction. those part dimensions that are not covered by Test Method
For operating (test) temperatures above 145°F (63°C), the D2122, note the method of determining dimensions on the test
1000-h test on the valves shall be conducted only in the open report.
(shell test) configuration. 8.1.2 Threads—Gage all thermoplastic taper pipe threads in
5.2.2 Blind Flanges— Blind flanges shall be tested in accordance with Specification F1498.
addition to any other flange configurations for compliance with 8.1.3 Threads—Gage all metal taper pipe threads in accor-
this section. dance with ASME B1.20.1.
5.3 Valves and Check Valves: 8.2 Resistance to Hydrostatic Pressure :
5.3.1 Pressure Drop Across Valves and Check Valves— 8.2.1 Test specimens shall consist of assemblies of fittings
When tested in accordance with 8.4, the pressure drop across and pipe, using pipe sufficient to withstand the internal
the valve shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published values hydrostatic pressure until completion of the test. The assem-
at 25, 50, 75 and 100 % of maximum flow. The maximum flow blies used for each test shall contain the same fittings in the
rate shall be either as specified by the manufacturer, or the flow same configuration. Each individual assembly shall contain at
achieved with 80 psig (550 kPa) inlet (at no flow condition) least two of each fitting being tested.
344
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1970
8.2.2 The test temperature, with a tolerance of 6 3.6°F pipe shall be no less than the smallest cross-section in the flow
(2°C), shall be the maximum operating temperature for which path through the valve. This will ensure that the greatest
the piping system component’s recommended maximum oper- restriction to flow is the valve under test, rather than the pipe
ating pressure is being verified. portion of the test assembly.
8.2.3 Conduct hydrostatic pressure testing in accordance 8.5 Leakage In Reverse Direction for Valves:
with the method and at the times and pressures given in Table 8.5.1 Conduct testing on a single specimen of the
1. Specimens which include an elastomeric seal shall be configuration/size being evaluated. Connect the fitting to the
conditioned for one h at 50% of the test pressure immediately test system as shown in Fig. 2.
prior to conducting th 1-h and 1000-h tests. 8.5.2 The water temperature shall be 73 6 4°F (23 6 2°C).
8.2.4 For the 1-h and 1000-h tests, failure is defined as any 8.5.3 With the upstream test valve connection open to
loss of pressure in the assembly, due to failure of any atmosphere, apply pressure to the downstream test valve
component of the fittings under test. For the burst test, some connection equal to the 1.5 times the nominal pressure of the
loss of pressure due to seepage in a valve stem area is valve and begin the timer.
acceptable, provided no failure or leakage occurs in the body or 8.5.4 Collect any water leaking through the valve over a 60
connections areas of the fitting. min period, in a graduated cylinder or other container capable
NOTE 3—Loss of pressure which can be corrected by tightening of of measuring accurately to 0.0003 gal (1 mL).
threads or valve seals without removal of the fitting from the assembly, is 8.5.5 Calculate the leakage rate in gal/min (gpm) or litres
not considered failure of a component, as specified in 8.2.4. per min (Lpm). Record this as “L”.
8.2.5 Consider all fittings used to construct the assemblies 8.5.6 Remove the test valve from the system and determine
as evaluated upon completion of this test. All fittings from the flow rate (gpm or Lpm) with the piping open to atmosphere
which this representative sample was drawn will also be as shown in Fig. 3, with a flow velocity of 5 ft/s. Alternatively,
considered as evaluated upon completion of this test. the inside diameter of the pipe, and the density of the water
8.3 Joint Tightness: shall be determined, and the flow rate calculated based on a 5
8.3.1 Conduct testing on two specimens of the same fitting ft/s flow velocity. Record this open flow value as “F”.
size/configuration. 8.5.7 Calculate the leakage rate as a percentage of the flow
8.3.2 Use water as the internal pressurizing fluid. The rate determined in 8.5.6, using the equation P = (L/F) × 100 %.
external fluid shall be either air or water. The internal and 8.6 Activation Pressure of Check Valves:
external fluid temperatures shall be the maximum temperature 8.6.1 Conduct testing on a single specimen of the
for which the fittings nominal pressure was verified with a configuration/size being evaluated. Install the valve as shown
tolerance of 6 3.6°F (2°C). in Fig. 1. For valves which can be installed either horizontally
8.3.3 Subject the joint to 20 psig (140 kPa) for 1 h, and then or vertically, this test must be conducted with the valve in three
raised to 2.5 times the nominal pressure of the fitting and configurations; vertical flow up, vertical flow down, and
maintained for 1 h. For those products requiring joint tightness horizontal. For vertical flow testing, the pressure differential
testing, this test replaces the 1-h hydrostatic test shown in must be corrected for the relative difference in height of the
Table 1. pressure sensors.
8.3.4 Any leakage or failure of the fitting during the full test 8.6.2 The water temperature shall be 73 6 4°F (23 6 2°C).
duration constitutes failure of this test. 8.6.3 Increase the pressure differential across the valve at a
8.4 Pressure Drop Across Valves : rate not exceeding 6 psi/min (690 Pa/s) until the check opens
8.4.1 Conduct testing on a single specimen of the and flow is detected at the outlet. Record this differential as the
configuration/size being evaluated. activation pressure.
8.4.2 Water shall be used as the internal pressurizing fluid. 9. Rejection and Rehearing
The water temperature shall be 73 6 4°F (23 6 2°C).
8.4.3 The test systems shall be in accordance with ANSI/ 9.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
ISA S75.02 (see Fig. 1). The test procedure shall be in of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
accordance with the Cv Procedure of ANSI/ISA S75.02. by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such
8.4.4 Conduct testing at 25, 50, 75, and 100 % of maximum agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered,
flow as defined in 5.3.1. The internal cross-sectional area of the changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this
TABLE 1 Hydrostatic Testing specification.
Test Pressure, psi Time Test Method
3.2×(PA ) minimum burst pressure 60 s D1599B 10. In-Plant Quality Control
2.5×(PA ) ± 10 psi 1h D1598
2.1×(PA ) ± 10 psi 1000 h D1598 10.1 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of fittings or
A
P is the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as marked on the fitting. It is the
appurtenances, as agreed upon between the purchaser and
responsibility of the manufacturer to establish a recommended maximum operat- seller, shall be selected from each lot or shipment and tested to
ing pressure. determine conformance with this specification (see Practice
B
Testing may be stopped upon reaching the minimum required pressure, rather
than taking the sample to failure. D1898). In the case of no prior agreement, the quantity of
samples shown in Table 2 shall be selected randomly and
345
SF-1970 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 1 Pressure LossTest System
FIG. 2 Reverse Direction Leakage Test
FIG. 3 Flow Without Test Valve
346
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-1970
TABLE 2 Sample Size for In-Plant QC Testing intended to be used at 100 psi/180°F (hot water supply)
Number of Dimensions Number of Burst the word HOT is acceptable rather than the pressure
Lot SizeA
Specimens Specimens and temperature,
16 to 25 3 1
26 to 90 5 1 11.1.5 Nominal size, and
91 to 150 8 2 11.1.6 If the fitting is intended to be used only with certain
151 to 280 13 3
281 to 500 20 5
SDR, Schedule, or pressure-class pipe within one of the
501 to 1200 32 8 standards given in 1.1, marking shall indicate this.
A
For products manufactured under a single continuous process without further NOTE 4—Fittings need only be marked with the schedule or SDR of the
assembly or fabrication required, dimensions shall be conducted at start-up and
pipe with the highest pressure rating for which they are intended. All
once per 24 h, and burst testing shall be conducted at start-up and once per week.
thinner-wall schedules and SDR’s need not be marked on the fitting.
11.1.7 ASME SF-1970 or both ASME SF-1970 and
tested. The values shown in Table 2 for dimensions are based ASTM F1970.
on Practice D1898, sampling for attributes, random sampling, 11.2 The manufacturer’s literature shall include assembly
and the sample size based on the lot size of finished products instructions which provide adequate information to achieve a
using General Inspection Level I. Larger lot sizes and sampling connection which will meet the nominal pressure given in 5.1.
plans are given in D1898. Additionally, based on historical
testing data, allowance shall be made for tightening or reducing 12. Quality Assurance
the Inspection Level, as described in Practice D1898 and 12.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4. manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance
10.2 Dimensions shall comply with 5.1, when determined in with this specification and has been found to meet the
accordance with 8.1. requirements of this specification.
10.3 Hydrostatic burst testing shall be conducted using Test
Method D1599, with the exception that the test can be stopped 13. Certification
upon reaching the burst pressure given in Table 1, rather than 13.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
taking the fitting or appurtenance to failure. The minimum
required burst pressure is as given in Table 1.
14. Keywords
11. Product Marking 14.1 appurtenances; check valves; CPVC; elastomeric
11.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following: joints; elastomers; fittings; flanges; PVC; SE; special-
11.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark, engineered; unions; valves
11.1.2 Material designation,
11.1.3 Fittings intended for the transport of potable water
shall include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
evaluation for this purpose,
11.1.4 Manufacturer’s recommended pressure, and the tem-
perature for which the pressure is applicable. For fittings
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for product to be used to
S1. Potable Water Requirement the health effects portion of ANSI/NSF Standard No. 14 by an
S1.1 Potable Water Requirement—Products intended for acceptable certifying organization when required by the regu-
contact with potable water shall be evaluated, tested and latory authority having jurisdiction.
347
SF-1970 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
348
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2206
SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATED FITTINGS OF

BUTT-FUSED POLYETHYLENE (PE)
SF-2206
mandatory.)
349
SF-2206 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Fabricated Fittings of Butt-Fused Polyethylene (PE)

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for fabri- 2.1 ASTM Standards:
cated fittings intended for use with outside-diameter controlled D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
polyethylene pipe and tubing. These fittings are manufactured tics
by heat-fusion joining shape-modified polyethylene compo- D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
nents prepared from pipe, molded fittings, sheet, billet, or moplastic Pipe and Fittings
block. Included are requirements for materials, design, D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
workmanship, minimum dimensions, marking, test methods, Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
and quality control. D3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
1.2 Pressure rating of the fabricated-fitting design is beyond D3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
the scope of this standard and shall be established by the fitting Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and
manufacturer. This specification includes requirements for both Tubing
elevated temperature pressure-tests and short-term pressuriza- F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
tion tests to demonstrate a reasonable level of performance of F714 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
the fabricated-fitting design at the pressure rating established PR) Based on Outside Diameter
by the fitting manufacturer. F2619/F2619M Specification for High-Density Polyethylene
1.3 The pressure-tests requirements are specified by the (PE) Line Pipe
fittings’ equivalent (E) DR. The EDR specified is the DR of the F2880 Specification For Lap-Joint Type Flange Adapters for
piping system for which the fabricated fitting is intended to be Polyethylene Pressure Pipe in Nominal Pipe Sizes 3/4 in.
butt-fused. to 65 in.
F3034 Specification for Billets made by Winding Molten
1.4 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes Extruded Stress-Rated High Density Polyethylene
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes (HDPE)
(excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered 2.2 Federal Standards:
as requirements of the standard. Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
1.5 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be OPS Part 192 Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are 2.3 Military Standard:
mathematical conversions to SI units which are provided for MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
information only and are not considered standard. 2.4 ANSI/NSF Standard:
ANSI/NSF 61 for Drinking Water System Components—
1.6 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
Health Effects
test methods portion, Section 9, of this specification. This
2.5 Plastic Pipe Institute:
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
TR-4 Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydro-
static Design Stress (HDS), Strength Design Basis (SDB),
tions prior to use.
350
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2206
Pressure Design Basis (PDB) and Minimum Required 6.1.4 Billet used in the production of fabricated fittings in
Strength (MRS) for Thermoplastic Materials or Pipe. accordance with this specification shall meet the requirements
of Specification F3034.
3. Terminology 6.1.5 Sheet, block or plate stock used in the production of
3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412 fabricated fittings shall be produced from stress-rated polyeth-
and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600, ylene compounds listed in PPI’s TR-4.
unless otherwise specified. NOTE 1—Manufacturers should use appropriate quality assurance
procedures to ensure that sheet, block and plate are free from voids,
3.2 Definitions: laminations, foreign inclusions, cracks, and other injurious defects.
3.2.1 butt-fusion end(s), n—the butt end(s) of the fabricated
fitting intended for field fusion by the installer. 7. Requirements
3.2.2 billet, n—a mass formed from a single stress-rated 7.1 Dimension and Tolerances—Butt-fusion ends shall be
polyethylene compound in the approximate shape of a thick- produced from fittings or pipe conforming to Specification
walled cylindrical shell. (See Specification F3034.) D3261, or by machining billet, block, sheet, plate, or pipe to
3.2.3 fabricated fitting, n—a fitting constructed from manu- the required dimensions.
factured polyethylene components or materials. 7.1.1 Diameter—Nominal outside-diameter of the butt-
fusion end shall conform to the IPS or DIPS dimension at area
3.3 Abbreviations: of fusion. Outer-diameter dimensions and tolerances at the area
3.3.1 DIPS—ductile iron pipe size. of fusion shall be as shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
3.3.2 DR—dimension ratio. 7.1.2 Wall Thickness—The minimum wall thickness of the
3.3.3 EDR—equivalent dimension ratio. The DR of the pipe butt-fusion end shall be in accordance with Table 1 or Table 2
to which the fitting is to be joined. when measured in accordance with Test Method D2122.
3.3.4 IPS—iron pipe size. Conditioning to standard temperature but not to standard
humidity is required.
3.3.5 OD—outside diameter. 7.1.3 Eccentricity—The wall thickness variability of the
butt-fusion end as measured and calculated in accordance with
4. Classification
Test Method D2122, in any diametrical cross-section of the
4.1 General—This specification establishes requirements pipe shall not exceed 12 %.
for fabricated fittings intended for butt-fusion joining to 7.1.4 Measurements—These shall be made in accordance
polyethylene pipe. with Test Method D2122 for roundable pipe.
4.1.1 Fabricated fittings intended for use in the distribution 7.1.5 Laying Lengths—Laying length dimensions shall be
of natural gas or other fuel gases shall also meet the require- defined by the manufacturer.
ments of Specification D2513. 7.1.6 Special Sizes—Where existing system conditions or
special local requirements make other diameters or dimension
5. Ordering Information ratios necessary, other sizes or dimension ratios, or both, shall
5.1 When ordering fittings under this specification include be acceptable for engineered applications when mutually
the following information: agreed upon by the customer and the manufacturer, if the fitting
5.1.1 Polyethylene compound (material designation or trade is manufactured from plastic compounds meeting the material
name). requirements of this specification, and the fitting performs in
5.1.2 Style of fitting (3 piece tee, 5 segment 90° ell, etc.). accordance with the requirements in this specification. For
5.1.3 Size: diameters not shown in Table 1 or Table 2, the tolerance shall
5.1.3.1 Nominal size of end connections. be the same percentage as that shown in the corresponding
5.1.3.2 End configurations (for example, IPS or DIPS). tables for the next smaller listed size. Minimum wall thickness
5.1.3.3 System DR. at the butt-fusion end for these special sizes shall not be less
than the minimum wall thickness specified for the pipe the
6. Material fitting is designed to be used with.
6.1 Polyethylene materials allowed for use in fittings pro- 7.2 Physical Requirements—Fabricated fittings using miter
duced in accordance with this specification shall be in accor- cut pipe stock shall be manufactured from pipe stock with a
dance with the manufacturer’s fabricated-fitting design speci- wall thickness that is at least 22% greater than that of the pipe
fications. In addition: to which the fitting is to be joined. (For example: An EDR11
6.1.1 Polyethylene pipe used in the production of fittings in fitting shall be made using DR9 pipe stock.)
accordance with this specification shall meet the requirements
of Specification F714, D3035, F2619/F2619M or D2513. 7.3 Pressure Test Requirements—Design validation tests per
6.1.2 Molded PE fittings used in the production of fabri- 7.3.1 and 7.3.2 shall be conducted on “test samples” that are
cated fittings in accordance with this specification shall meet representative of:
the requirements of Specification D3261. –Each of three (3) size groupings - 12 in. (300 mm) and smaller,
greater than 12 to less than 24 in. (300 to less than 600 mm),
6.1.3 Flange adaptors used in the production of fabricated and 24 in. (600 mm) and larger.
fittings in accordance with this specification shall meet the –Each style of fitting (for example, 4 segment 90 Elbow, Straight
requirements of Specification F2880. Tee, etc.).
351
SF-2206 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 IPS Sizing System: Butt-Fusion End Dimensions, in.

Size Average Minimum Wall ThicknessB versus DR
IPS ODA 7.3 9 9.3 11 13.5 15.5 17 21 26 32.5
2 2.38 ... 0.26 ... 0.22 0.18 ... 0.14 ... ... ...
3 3.500 0.479 0.389 0.376 0.318 0.259 0.226 0.206 0.167 0.135 0.108
4 4.500 0.616 0.500 0.484 0.409 0.333 0.290 0.265 0.214 0.173 0.138
5 5.563 0.762 0.618 0.598 0.506 0.412 0.359 0.327 0.265 0.214 0.171
6 6.625 0.908 0.736 0.712 0.602 0.491 0.427 0.390 0.315 0.255 0.204
8 8.625 1.182 0.958 0.927 0.784 0.639 0.556 0.507 0.411 0.332 0.265
10 10.750 1.473 1.194 1.156 0.977 0.796 0.694 0.632 0.512 0.413 0.331
12 12.750 1.747 1.417 1.371 1.159 0.944 0.823 0.750 0.607 0.490 0.392
14 14.000 1.918 1.556 1.505 1.273 1.037 0.903 0.824 0.667 0.538 0.431
16 16.000 2.192 1.778 1.720 1.455 1.185 1.032 0.941 0.762 0.615 0.492
18 18.000 2.466 2.000 1.935 1.636 1.333 1.161 1.059 0.857 0.692 0.554
20 20.000 ... 2.222 2.151 1.818 1.481 1.290 1.176 0.952 0.769 0.615
22 22.000 ... 2.444 2.366 2.000 1.630 1.419 1.294 1.048 0.846 0.677
24 24.000 ... 2.667 2.581 2.182 1.778 1.548 1.412 1.143 0.923 0.738
26 26.000 ... ... 2.796 2.364 1.926 1.677 1.529 1.238 1.000 0.800
28 28.000 ... ... 3.011 2.545 2.074 1.806 1.647 1.333 1.077 0.862
30 30.000 ... ... 3.226 2.727 2.222 1.935 1.765 1.429 1.154 0.923
32 32.000 ... ... ... 2.909 2.370 2.065 1.882 1.524 1.231 0.985
34 34.000 ... ... ... 3.091 2.519 2.194 2.000 1.619 1.308 1.046
36 36.000 ... ... ... 3.273 2.667 2.323 2.118 1.714 1.385 1.108
42 42.000 ... ... ... ... ... 2.710 2.471 2.000 1.615 1.292
48 48.000 ... ... ... ... ... 3.097 2.824 2.286 1.846 1.477
54 54.000 ... ... ... ... ... ... 3.176 2.571 2.077 1.662
A
Tolerance on OD is ± 0.45 %.
B
Eccentricity of wall shall not exceed 12 %.
TABLE 2 DIPS Sizing System: Butt-Fusion End Dimensions, in.

Size Average Minimum Wall ThicknessB versus DR
DIPS ODA 9 11 13.5 17 21 26 32.5
3 3.96 0.389 0.360 0.294 0.233 0.189 0.153 0.122
4 4.80 0.500 0.437 0.356 0.283 0.229 0.185 0.148
6 6.90 0.736 0.628 0.512 0.406 0.329 0.266 0.213
8 9.05 0.958 0.823 0.670 0.533 0.431 0.348 0.279
10 11.10 1.194 1.009 0.823 0.653 0.529 0.427 0.342
12 13.20 1.417 1.200 0.978 0.777 0.629 0.508 0.407
14 15.30 1.556 1.391 1.134 0.900 0.729 0.589 0.471
16 17.40 1.778 1.582 1.289 1.024 0.829 0.670 0.536
18 19.50 2.000 1.773 1.445 1.147 0.929 0.750 0.600
20 21.60 2.222 1.964 1.600 1.271 1.029 0.831 0.665
24 25.80 2.667 2.346 1.912 1.518 1.229 0.993 0.794
30 32.00 ... 2.909 2.371 1.883 1.524 1.231 0.985
36 38.30 ... 3.482 2.837 2.253 1.824 1.473 1.179
42 44.50 ... 4.046 3.297 2.618 2.119 1.712 1.370
48 50.80 ... 4.619 3.763 2.989 2.419 1.954 1.563
A
Tolerance on OD is ± 0.45 %.
B
Eccentricity of wall shall not exceed 12 %.
A single EDR sample shall be considered as representative distance of three pipe diameters between end closure(s) and
of all of the wall thickness’ produced in that size and style any miter joints in the fittings(s).
grouping. The EDR of the test fitting(s) shall be in the mid
range of the wall thickness’ typically produced for that size 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
grouping. Fitting styles are characterized as elbows, tees, wyes,
8.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
crosses, reducing tees, reducing laterals, branch saddles, me-
chanical joint adapters, and end caps.
meeting the requirements of this specification. Fittings shall be
7.3.1 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—The
homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign
“test sample” shall be three specimens. Each specimen shall
inclusions or other injurious defects. The fittings shall be as
have a minimum distance of three pipe diameters between end
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density,
closure(s) and any miter joints in the fitting(s).
and other physical properties.
7.3.2 Short-term Pressurization Testing—Quick Burst of
Non-Failure testing shall be conducted. The “test sample” shall 8.2 The procedure used for the heat fusion in the fabrication
be five specimens. Each specimen shall have a minimum process shall be written and qualified in accordance with the
352
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2206
requirements of OPS 49 CFR Part 192.283 “Plastic Pipe: 9.5.2.2 Failure of one of the three specimens shall constitute
Qualifying Joining Procedures.” failure of the test.
8.3 All personnel engaged in the heat fusion process shall be 9.5.3 Short Term Pressurization Test:
qualified in accordance with the requirements of OPS 49 CFR 9.5.3.1 The “test sample” specimens shall be tested and
Part 192.285 “Plastic Pipe: Qualifying Persons to Make evaluated in accordance with the procedures in 6.1 of Speci-
Joints.” fication F714.
9.5.3.2 Failure of one of the five specimens shall constitute
9. Test Methods failure of the test.
9.1 General—The test methods in this specification apply to 10. Product Marking
fittings for use with pipe and tubing for gas, water, and other 10.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
engineered piping systems. 10.1.1 ASME SF-2206 or both ASME SF-2206 and
9.2 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition the ASTM F2206,
specimens prior to test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not less 10.1.2 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
than 6 h in air or 1 h in water. 10.1.3 Material designations (such as PE2606, PE3608, or
PE4710),
9.3 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the standard
10.1.4 Date of manufacture or manufacturing code, and
laboratory temperature of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) unless
10.1.5 Nominal size and fitting EDR.
otherwise specified.
10.2 Where recessed marking is used, such marking shall
have no injurious effect on the product’s performance.
9.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter of
the fittings at the butt-fusion end in accordance with the Wall 11. Quality Assurance
Thickness section of Test Method D2122 by use of circumfer- 11.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
ential tape readable to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm). Other
methods may be used if proven to be equivalent.
9.4.2 Wall Thickness—Make a series of measurements using
a cylindrical-anvil tubular micrometer or other accurate device
at closely spaced intervals to ensure that minimum and
maximum wall thickness to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.2 mm) have 12. Certification
been determined. Make a minimum of six measurements at 12.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
each butt-fusion end.
9.5 Pressure Testing: 13. Keywords
9.5.1 Preparation of Specimens for Pressure Testing—Test
samples may be individual fittings or groups of fittings. The 13.1 fabricated fittings; polyethylene
distance between end closures and the nearest miter joint in the
fitting or in adjacent fittings shall be equal to three pipe
diameters, measured on the OD.
9.5.2 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test:
9.5.2.1 The “test sample” specimens shall be tested and
evaluated in accordance with the procedures in 6.2 of Speci-
fication F714.
This requirement applies whenever a Regulatory Authority or user calls for the product to be used
to convey or to be in contact with potable water.
S1. Potable Water Requirement when required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
S1.1 Products intended for contact with potable water shall
be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with ANSI/
NSF Standard 61 by an acceptable certifying organization
353
SF-2206 ASME NM.3.1-2018
S2. Responsibility for Inspection tion in satisfactory condition and which will be acceptable to
S2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall comply
order, the producer is responsible for the performance of all with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National Motor
inspection and test requirements specified herein. The producer Freight Classification rules.
may use his own or any other suitable facilities for the S3.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
performance of the inspection and test requirements specified dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
herein, unless the purchaser disapproves. The purchaser shall 129 for military agencies.
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set NOTE 3—The inclusion of U.S. government procurement requirements
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. government uses or
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed endorses the products described in this specification.
requirements.
NOTE 2—In federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for inspec-
tion.
ment
S3.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the contract,
the materials shall be packaged in accordance with the suppli-
er’s standard practice in a manner ensuring arrival at destina-
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
354
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2389
SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE-RATED

POLYPROPYLENE (PP) PIPING SYSTEMS
SF-2389
(Identical with ASTM F2389-10 except for revisions to section 11, additional requirements in Annex A1, revised
marking requirements in para. 12.1.7, and quality assurance requirement in para. 13.1 has been made mandatory.)
355
SF-2389 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems
1. Scope D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for polypro- Gradient Technique
pylene (PP) piping system components made to metric sizes D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
and IPS schedule 80 sizes, and pressure rated for water service Under Constant Internal Pressure
and distribution supply (see Appendix X1). Included are D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
criteria for materials, workmanship, dimensions and toler- tics
ances, product tests, and marking for polypropylene (PP) D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
piping system components such as pipe, fittings, valves, and moplastic Pipe and Fittings
manifolds. D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
D3895 Test Method for Oxidative-Induction Time of Poly-
1.2 The components governed by this specification shall be olefins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry
permitted for use in water service lines, hot-and-cold water D4101 Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extru-
distribution, hydronic heating, and irrigation systems. sion Materials
1.3 The pipe and fittings produced under this specification F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
shall be permitted to be used to transport industrial process F2023 Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance
fluids, effluents, slurries, municipal sewage, etc. The user shall of Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing and Systems
consult the manufacturer to determine whether the material to Hot Chlorinated Water
being transported is compatible with the polypropylene piping 2.2 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
system and will not affect the service life beyond limits Standards:
acceptable to the user. ISO 3127 Thermoplastic Pipes—Determination of Resis-
1.4 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be tance to External Blows—Round the Clock Method
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are ISO 4065 Thermoplastics Pipes—Universal Wall Thickness
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for Table
information only and are not considered standard. ISO 9080 Plastics Piping and Ducting Systems—
Determination of the Long-Term Hydrostatic Strength of
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the Thermoplastics Materials in Pipe Form by Extrapolation
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the ISO 15874-2:2002 Plastics Piping Systems for Hot and Cold
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- Water Installations—Polypropylene (PP)—Part 2: Pipes
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- ISO 15874-3:2002 Plastics Piping Systems for Hot and Cold
bility of regulatory requirements prior to use. Water Installations—Polypropylene (PP)—Part 3: Fit-
tings
2. Referenced Documents ISO/TS 15874-7 Plastics Piping Systems for Hot and Cold
2.1 ASTM Standards: Water Installations—Polypropylene (PP)—Part 7: Guid-
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela- ance for the Assessment of Conformity
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement 2.3 NSF International Standards:
NSF/ANSI 14 Plastics Piping System Components and Re-
lated Materials
NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components—Health
Effects
356
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2389
2.4 European Norm: 5.3 The density of the unreinforced, natural color PP mate-
EN 10226-1 Pipe Threads Where Pressure Tight Joints are rial shall not exceed 56.9 lbm/ft3 (912 kg/m3), when tested in
Made on the Threads—Part 1: Designation, Dimensions accordance with Test Method D1505 or Test Method D792.
and Tolerances 5.4 Minimum Required Strength (MRS)—The PP material
2.5 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) used in the pipe and fittings shall have an MRS value of 1160
Standard: psi (8.0 MPa) or 1450 psi (10.0 MPa) based on testing in
B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch accordance with ISO 9080 and classification of the lower
2.6 Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) Technical Report: confidence limit (sLCL) at 50 years in accordance with ISO
TR-4 PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), 12162.
Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis 5.5 Categorized Required Strength (CRSu,t)—The PP mate-
(PDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings rial used in the pipe and fittings shall have a CRSu,t value of
for Thermoplastic Piping Materials 280 psi (1.93 MPa) based on testing in accordance with ISO
9080 and classification of the lower confidence limit (sLCL) at
3. Terminology
180°F (82°C) and 50 years.
3.1 Definitions:
5.6 Minimum Pressure Rating—The minimum pressure rat-
3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology F412
ing of the pipe shall be 160 psi (1.1 MPa) at 73°F (23°C) and
and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,
100 psi (0.69 MPa) at 180°F (82°C) for hot-and-cold distribu-
unless otherwise specified.
tion and 160 psi (1.1 MPa) at 73°F (23°C) for cold water
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: service.
3.2.1 polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R), n—a pro-
5.7 Threads—Fittings shall be permitted to be threaded by
pylene plastic containing not more than 50 % of another
use of metal inserts molded into the fitting.
olefinic monomer (or monomers), having no functional group
5.7.1 Metal threads shall be constructed of brass or stainless
other than the olefinic group, copolymerized with the propyl-
steel inserts molded into the fitting.
ene.
5.7.2 Threads shall not be molded or fabricated directly into
3.2.1.1 Discussion—This term is also used for finished
the polypropylene plastic.
compound which comprises the PP-R resin and additives such
as colorants, UV inhibitors, and stabilizers. Polypropylene 5.8 The piping compound shall be permitted to include
random copolymers containing more than one additional colorants, antioxidants, reinforcing materials and additives
monomer are often referred to as “terpolymers.” necessary for the finished product. The modified material and
3.2.2 plastic-to-metal transition fittings, n—a fitting de- finished product shall meet all requirements of this specifica-
signed to provide a means of connection between the PP piping tion.
NOTE 1—The Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) publishes listings of mini-
system and metal piping systems such as steel pipe and copper mum required strength (MRS) and categorized required strength (CRSu,t
tubing. The fittings include a means of taking into account the ) ratings for thermoplastic piping materials in Technical Report No. 4
differences in thermal expansion of the materials and maintain- (TR-4). ISO/TS 15874-7 provides guidance on evaluating the effect of
ing a pressure-tight seal over the intended use temperature additives on long-term strength of the pipe and fittings material.
range.
4. Classification 6.1 The pipe and fittings shall be free of visible cracks,
4.1 General—This specification covers PP piping systems holes, foreign inclusions, blisters and other known injurious
made from PP materials (PP-R) in various dimension ratios and defects. The pipe and fittings shall be uniform in color, opacity,
pressure ratings. density and other physical properties.
4.2 Thermoplastic Pipe Series and Schedule—This specifi-
7. Dimensions and Tolerances
cation covers PP pipe made in schedule 80 IPS sizes and metric
sizes in accordance with ISO 4065. 7.1 Pipe Dimensions—Pipe dimensions shall meet the re-
quirements in 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.
5. Materials and Manufacture 7.1.1 Outside Diameters—The outside diameters and toler-
5.1 The pipe and fittings shall be polypropylene material of ances shall be as shown in Table 1 (IPS Sch. 80), or Tables 2
type PP-R. Clean rework material, of the same PP-R resin and 3 (metric series), when measured in accordance with Test
generated from the manufacturer’s own pipe or fitting produc- Method D2122. For diameters not shown in these tables, the
tion, shall be permitted to be used provided the pipe or fittings tolerance shall be the same percentage of outside diameter as
produced meet all requirements of this specification. those for the closest listed diameter.
7.1.2 Wall Thicknesses—The wall thicknesses and toler-
5.2 For pipe compound, the melt flow rate (MFR) shall not ances shall be as shown in Table 1, or Tables 2 and 3, when
exceed 10.8 grain/10 min (0.7 g/10 min), when tested in
accordance with D1238 using conditions of 4.76 lbm (2.16 kg)
at 446°F (230°C).
357
SF-2389 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 1 IPS Schedule 80 OD and Wall Thickness

Nominal Average Outside Tolerance on Out-of-roundness Minimum Wall Tolerance on Wall
Pipe Size Diameter, OD, in. OD, in. (max–min) Thickness, in. Thickness, in.
⁄
12 0.840 (21.34) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.015 (0.38) 0.147 (3.73) +0.020 (+0.51)
⁄
34 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.020 (0.51) 0.154 (3.91) +0.020 (+0.51)
1 1.315 (33.40) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.025 (0.64) 0.179 (4.55) +0.021 (+0.53)
1-1⁄2 1.900 (48.26) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.030 (0.76) 0.200 (5.08) +0.024 (+0.61)
2 2.375 (60.33) ±0.006 (±0.15) 0.035 (0.89) 0.218 (5.54) +0.026 (+0.66)
3 3.500 (88.90) ±0.008 (±0.20) 0.040 (1.02) 0.300 (7.62) +0.036 (+0.91)
4 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (±0.23) 0.050 (1.27) 0.337 (8.56) +0.040 (+1.02)
6 6.625 (168.28) ±0.011 (±0.28) 0.050 (1.27) 0.432 (10.97) +0.052 (+1.32)
TABLE 2 Metric Sizes OD

Outside Diameter, OD
Nominal
Size Minimum Maximum Maximum
Average OD, in. Average OD, in. Out-of-roundness, in.
16 0.630 (16.0) 0.642 (16.3) 0.016 (0.4)
20 0.787 (20.0) 0.799 (20.3) 0.016 (0.4)
25 0.984 (25.0) 0.996 (25.3) 0.016 (0.4)
32 1.260 (32.0) 1.272 (32.3) 0.020 (0.5)
40 1.575 (40.0) 1.591 (40.4) 0.020 (0.5)
50 1.969 (50.0) 1.988 (50.5) 0.024 (0.6)
63 2.480 (63.0) 2.504 (63.6) 0.024 (0.6)
75 2.953 (75.0) 2.980 (75.7) 0.039 (1.0)
90 3.543 (90.0) 3.579 (90.9) 0.039 (1.0)
110 4.331 (110.0) 4.370 (111.0) 0.039 (1.0)
125 4.921 (125.0) 4.969 (126.2) 0.051 (1.3)
140 5.512 (140.0) 5.563 (141.3) ... ...
160 6.299 (160.0) 6.358 (161.5) ... ...
200 7.874 (200.0) 7.953 (202.0) ... ...
250 9.842 (250.0) 9.941 (252.5) ... ...
280 11.023 (280.0) 11.142 (283.0) ... ...
315 12.401 (315.0) 12.528 (318.2) ... ...
355 13.976 (355.0) 14.118 (358.6) ... ...
measured in accordance with Test Method D2122. For wall 8. Requirements

thicknesses (DR’s) not shown in these tables, the minimum
8.1 Longitudinal Reversion—When tested in accordance
wall thickness shall be as calculated using the DR and outside
with ISO 15874-2, at the conditions given in Table 8, the mean
diameter, and the tolerance on the wall thickness shall be the
relative change in pipe length shall not exceed 2 %.
same percentage of the calculated minimum wall thickness as
for the closest listed minimum wall thickness. 8.2 Melt Flow Rate (MFR) of Pipe and Fittings—When
7.1.3 Threaded Pipe—Pipe covered by this specification tested in accordance with D1238, the MFR of specimens taken
shall not be threaded. from the finished pipe or fittings shall be within 30 % of the
7.2 Fittings Dimensions—Fittings dimensions shall meet the MFR of the compound used to produce the pipe or fitting. Two
requirements in 7.2.1 through 7.2.4. specimens shall be tested, and both shall pass.
7.2.1 Threads—Taper threads for joining fittings shall com- 8.3 Impact Strength—When tested in accordance with ISO
ply with the requirements of ASME B1.20.1 for NPT metal 3127, 9 of 10 specimens shall pass at the impact level specified
thread inserts or EN 10226-1 for metric threads. Threads in Table 9 at a test temperature of 32 6 2°F (0 6 1°C).
used by the manufacturer to join component parts of a fitting
together shall meet the manufacturer’s specifications. 8.4 Thermal Stability and Oxidative Induction Time (OIT)—
7.2.2 Laying Lengths—Laying lengths shall be in accor- Pipe and fittings shall meet the requirements of 8.4.1–thermal
dance with the manufacturer’s specifications. stability by hydrostatic testing, and 8.4.2–oxidative induction
7.2.3 Socket-fused Fittings—Dimensions for socket-fused time.
fittings shall be in accordance with Tables 4 and 5 (IPS Sch 80) 8.4.1 When tested in accordance with Test Method D1598,
or Tables 6 and 7 (metric series). Socket depth shall be pipe and fittings shall not fail at the pressure corresponding to
measured from the face of the socket entrance to the face of the the pipe circumferential stresses and times given in Table 10. If
pipe stop at the socket bottom. an assembly fails at a joint, the fitting material shall be
7.2.4 Electrofusion Fittings—Dimensions for electrofusion permitted to be retested in pipe form.
fittings shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifica- 8.4.2 The oxidative induction time (OIT) shall be deter-
tions. mined on pipe and fittings in accordance with Test Method
7.2.5 Valves and Flanges—Dimensions for valves and D3895. Two specimens shall be tested and the average OIT of
flanges shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s speci- the two shall be at least 80 % of the OIT of the virgin material
fications. compound. For those materials which require final blending at
358
TABLE 3 Metric Sizes Wall Thickness
Nominal DR = 17.6 DR = 17 DR = 11 DR = 7.3 DR = 6 DR = 5
Size Min Wall, Min Wall, Min Wall, Min Wall, Min Wall,
Tolerance, in. Tolerance, in. Min Wall, in. Tolerance, in. Tolerance, in. Tolerance, in. Tolerance, in.
in. in. in. in. in.
16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.071 (1.8) +0.020 (+0.50) 0.087 (2.2) +0.020 (+0.50) 0.106 (2.7) +0.020 (+0.50) 0.130 (3.3) +0.020 (+0.50)
20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.075 (1.9) +0.009 (+0.23) 0.110 (2.8) +0.013 (+0.34) 0.134 (3.4) +0.016 (+0.41) 0.161 (4.1) +0.019 (+0.49)
ASME NM.3.1-2018
25 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.091 (2.3) +0.011 (+0.28) 0.138 (3.5) +0.017 (+0.42) 0.165 (4.2) +0.020 (+0.50) 0.201 (5.1) +0.024 (+0.61)
32 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.114 (2.9) +0.014 (+0.35) 0.173 (4.4) +0.021 (+0.53) 0.213 (5.4) +0.026 (+0.65) 0.256 (6.5) +0.031 (+0.78)
40 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.146 (3.7) +0.017 (+0.44) 0.217 (5.5) +0.026 (+0.66) 0.264 (6.7) +0.032 (+0.80) 0.319 (8.1) +0.038 (+0.97)
359
50 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.181 (4.6) +0.022 (+0.55) 0.272 (6.9) +0.033 (+0.83) 0.327 (8.3) +0.039 (+1.00) 0.398 (10.1) +0.048 (+1.21)
63 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.228 (5.8) +0.027 (+0.70) 0.339 (8.6) +0.041 (+1.03) 0.413 (10.5) +0.050 (+1.26) 0.500 (12.7) +0.060 (+1.52)
75 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.268 (6.8) +0.032 (+0.82) 0.406 (10.3) +0.049 (+1.24) 0.492 (12.5) +0.059 (+1.50) 0.594 (15.1) +0.071 (+1.81)
90 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.323 (8.2) +0.039 (+0.98) 0.484 (12.3) +0.058 (+1.48) 0.591 (15.0) +0.071 (+1.80) 0.713 (18.1) +0.086 (+2.17)
110 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.394 (10.0) +0.047 (+1.20) 0.594 (15.1) +0.071 (+1.81) 0.720 (18.3) +0.086 (+2.20) 0.870 (22.1) +0.104 (+2.65)
125 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.449 (11.4) +0.054 (+1.37) 0.673 (17.1) +0.081 (+2.05) 0.819 (20.8) +0.098 (+2.50) 0.988 (25.1) +0.119 (+3.01)
140 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.500 (12.7) +0.060 (+1.52) 0.756 (19.2) +0.091 (+2.30) 0.917 (23.3) +0.110 (+2.80) 1.106 (28.1) +0.133 (+3.37)
160 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.575 (14.6) +0.069 (+1.75) 0.862 (21.9) +0.103 (+2.63) 1.047 (26.6) +0.126 (+3.19) 1.264 (32.1) +0.152 (+3.85)
200 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.716 (18.2) +0.083 (+2.1) 1.079 (27.4) +0.122 (+3.1) 1.311 (33.3) +0.154 (+3.9) 1.575 (40.0) +0.181 (+4.6)
250 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.894 (22.7) +0.102 (+2.6) 1.346 (34.2) +0.157 (+4.0) 1.642 (41.7) +0.189 (+4.8) 1.968 (50.0) +0.220 (+5.6)
280 0.626 (15.9) +0.071 (+1.8) 0.653 (16.6) +0.075 (+1.9) 1.000 (25.4) +0.110 (+2.8) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
315 0.705 (17.9) +0.079 (+2.0) 0.736 (18.7) +0.083 (+2.1) 1.126 (28.6) +0.122 (+3.1) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
355 0.791 (20.1) +0.091 (+2.3) 0.831 (21.1) +0.094 (+2.4) 1.268 (32.2) +0.138 (+3.5) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
SF-2389
SF-2389 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 IPS Sch 80 Socket-weld Fittings

Socket Entrance, A Socket Bottom, B
Nominal
Size Tolerance on Maximum Tolerance on Maximum
Average, in. Average, in.
Average, in. Out-of-roundness, in. Average, in. Out-of-roundness, in.
⁄
12 0.840 (21.34) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.012 (0.30) 0.794 (20.17) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.012 (0.30)
⁄
34 1.050 (26.67) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.012 (0.30) 1.000 (25.40) ±0.007 (±0.18) 0.012 (0.30)
1 1.311 (33.30) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.016 (0.41) 1.258 (31.95) ±0.007 (±0.18) 0.012 (0.30)
1-1⁄2 1.898 (48.21) ±0.012 (±0.30) 0.016 (0.41) 1.830 (46.48) ±0.007 (±0.18) 0.015 (0.38)
2 2.383 (60.53) ±0.012 (±0.30) 0.016 (0.41) 2.308 (58.62) ±0.007 (±0.18) 0.015 (0.38)
3 3.513 (89.23) ±0.012 (±0.30) 0.040 (1.02) 3.427 (87.05) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.020 (0.51)
4 4.522 (114.86) ±0.015 (±0.38) 0.040 (1.02) 4.417 (112.19) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.020 (0.51)
6 6.656 (169.06) ±0.032 (±0.81) 0.050 (1.27) 6.512 (165.40) ±0.012 (±0.30) 0.040 (1.02)
TABLE 5 IPS Sch 80 Socket-weld Fittings

Nominal Socket depth, C Wall Thickness
Size Min, in. Max, in. Socket, E, Min, in. Body, F, Min, in.
⁄12 0.835 (21.21) 0.865 (21.97) 0.147 (3.73) 0.185 (4.70)
3⁄ 4 0.960 (24.38) 0.990 (25.15) 0.154 (3.91) 0.195 (4.95)
1 1.085 (27.56) 1.115 (28.32) 0.179 (4.55) 0.225 (5.72)
1-1⁄2 1.335 (33.91) 1.365 (34.67) 0.200 (5.08) 0.250 (6.35)
2 1.460 (37.08) 1.490 (37.85) 0.218 (5.54) 0.275 (6.99)
3 1.830 (46.48) 1.860 (47.24) 0.300 (7.62) 0.375 (9.53)
4 2.205 (56.01) 2.235 (56.77) 0.337 (8.56) 0.420 (10.67)
6 2.955 (75.06) 2.985 (75.82) 0.432 ##### 0.540 (13.72)
TABLE 6 Metric Series Socket-weld Fittings

Socket Entrance, A Socket Bottom, B
Nominal
Size Minimum Average Maximum Average Maximum Minimum Average Maximum Average Maximum
Diameter, in. Diameter, in. Out-of-roundness, in. Diameter, in. Diameter, in. Out-of-roundness, in.
16 0.598 (15.20) 0.610 (15.50) 0.016 (0.40) 0.594 (15.10) 0.606 (15.40) 0.016 (0.40)
20 0.756 (19.20) 0.768 (19.50) 0.016 (0.40) 0.748 (19.00) 0.760 (19.30) 0.016 (0.40)
25 0.953 (24.20) 0.965 (24.50) 0.016 (0.40) 0.941 (23.90) 0.957 (24.30) 0.016 (0.40)
32 1.224 (31.10) 1.240 (31.50) 0.020 (0.50) 1.217 (30.90) 1.232 (31.30) 0.020 (0.50)
40 1.535 (39.00) 1.551 (39.40) 0.020 (0.50) 1.528 (38.80) 1.543 (39.20) 0.020 (0.50)
50 1.925 (48.90) 1.945 (49.40) 0.024 (0.60) 1.917 (48.70) 1.937 (49.20) 0.024 (0.60)
63 2.437 (61.90) 2.461 (62.50) 0.024 (0.60) 2.425 (61.60) 2.445 (62.10) 0.024 (0.60)
75 2.925 (74.30) 2.949 (74.90) 0.039 (1.00) 2.878 (73.10) 2.902 (73.70) 0.039 (1.00)
90 3.516 (89.30) 3.539 (89.90) 0.039 (1.00) 3.461 (87.90) 3.484 (88.50) 0.039 (1.00)
110 4.307 (109.40) 4.331 (110.00) 0.039 (1.00) 4.240 (107.70) 4.264 (108.30) 0.039 (1.00)
125 4.898 (124.40) 4.921 (125.00) 0.039 (1.00) 4.827 (122.60) 4.850 (123.20) 0.039 (1.00)
TABLE 7 Metric Series Socket-weld Fittings

Nominal Socket Depth, C Wall Thickness
Size Min, in. Max, in. Socket, E, Min, in. Body, F, Min, in.
16 0.524 (13.30) 0.622 (15.80) 0.121 (3.06) 0.161 (4.08)
20 0.571 (14.50) 0.669 (17.00) 0.145 (3.69) 0.194 (4.92)
25 0.630 (16.00) 0.728 (18.50) 0.167 (4.25) 0.223 (5.67)
32 0.713 (18.10) 0.811 (20.60) 0.212 (5.38) 0.282 (7.17)
40 0.807 (20.50) 0.906 (23.00) 0.256 (6.50) 0.341 (8.67)
50 0.925 (23.50) 1.024 (26.00) 0.335 (8.50) 0.446 (11.33)
63 1.079 (27.40) 1.177 (29.90) 0.413 (10.50) 0.551 (14.00)
75 1.181 (30.00) 1.319 (33.50) 0.492 (12.50) 0.656 (16.67)
90 1.299 (33.00) 1.496 (38.00) 0.591 (15.00) 0.787 (20.00)
110 1.457 (37.00) 1.732 (44.00) 0.723 (18.38) 0.965 (24.50)
125 1.575 (40.00) 1.850 (47.00) 0.822 (20.88) 1.096 (27.83)
the extruder (masterbatch/resin), the 80% OIT requirement NOTE 2—Initial qualification of changes to materials that have met the
shall be based on the OIT of the pipe sample which has also requirements of this section may be evaluated based on limited hydrostatic
passed the hydrostatic testing of 8.4.1or a pipe sample of the testing and comparison of OIT values.
same formulation containing no rework.
360
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2389
ments of ISO 15874-5 for the intended application class are

exempt from this requirement. Fittings shall be assembled with
pipe per the manufacturer’s instructions, and tested in accor-
dance with 9.2.
8.7 Oxidative Stability in Potable Chlorinated Water
Applications—PP piping intended for use in the transport of
potable water shall have a minimum extrapolated time-to-time
failure of 50 years when tested and evaluated in accordance
with 9.3.
9. Test Methods
9.1 Hydrostatic Tests—Test assemblies in accordance with
Test Method D1598, at the hoop stresses and temperatures
given in Table 11. An assembly shall consist of at least 4 pipe
specimens and 6 fitting joints. For testing valves, the assembly
FIG. 1 Socket Dimension Symbols per D2749
shall include at least 3 valves in the shut-off position (seat test)
and 3 valves in the open or partially open position (shell test).
TABLE 8 Conditions for Heat Reversion Test
Assemblies used in testing of manifolds shall include a
Parameter Type Value minimum of 6 of each type of manifold connection.
Oven Temperature PP-R 275 ± 4°F
(135 ± 2°C) 9.1.1 Assembly Procedure—The assemblies shall be made
Exposure Time Based t < 0.315 in. (8 mm) 60 min in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended joining
on Wall Thickness, t procedures and equipment.
0.315 (8 mm) < t 120 min
< 0.630 in. (16 mm)
9.2 Thermocycling Test Method for Transition Fittings:
t > 0.630 in. (16 mm) 240 min
9.2.1 Apparatus—A nitrogen or air source capable of main-
taining a nominal internal pressure of 100 6 10 psi (690 6 69
TABLE 9 Impact Conditions kPa) on the specimens is required. The immersion system shall
Impact Height, ft consist of two water reservoirs controlled at 60 6 3.6°F (16 6
Impact Mass, lb (kg),
(m)2 2°C) and 180 6 3.6°F (82 6 2°C). The specimens shall be
Nominal Diameter +0.01/−0.00
+0.03/−0.00
(+0.005/−0.000)
(+0.01/−0.00)
cycled from one reservoir to the other or the hot and cold water
1⁄2 , 3⁄4, 1, 16, 20, 25 0.55 (0.250) 3.3 (1.0)
shall be alternately cycled over the test specimens automati-
1-1⁄2 , 2, 3, 32, 40, 50, 63, 75 1.10 (0.500) 3.3 (1.0) cally and returned to the proper reservoir.
4, 6, 90, 110, 125 2.20 (1.000) 6.6 (2.0)
140 4.41 (2.00) 6.6 (2.0)
9.2.2 Sampling and Specimen Preparation—Select at ran-
160 4.41 (2.00) 8.2 (2.5) dom six specimens of the type and size of plastic-to-metal
transition fittings to be tested. Assemble the fittings with
suitable lengths of pipe or tubing and attach to a common
TABLE 10 Thermal Stability by Hydrostatic Test manifold. Assemble strictly in accordance with the instructions
Hoop Stress, Temperature, Time, of the fitting manufacturer. Close the specimen assembly with
psi, (MPa) °F (°C) h any suitable end closures that allow “free-end” mounting and
275 (1.9) 230 (110) 8 760 will not leak under the thermocycling conditions, and connect
the specimen assembly to the pressure source.
9.2.3 Procedure—Pressure the specimen assembly with ni-
8.5 Hydrostatic Pressure Tests—When tested in accordance
trogen to 100 6 10 psi (690 6 69 kPa). Immerse in 60 6 3.6°F
with 9.1, at the hoop stresses and temperatures given in Table
(16 6 2°C) water to determine if there are any initial leaks. All
11, assemblies of pipe and fittings shall not fail during the test
period specified. leaks shall be eliminated before the thermocycling test is
started. Thermally cycle the specimen assembly between 60 6
8.6 Thermocycling—Plastic-to-metal transition fittings, in- 3.6°F (16 6 2°C) and 180 6 3.6°F (82 6 2°C) by means of
tended to be used at temperatures above 113°F (45°C) shall not immersion in water using the test cycle given in Table 12. For
separate or leak during or after being thermocycled 1000 times sizes greater than 1-1⁄2 in. (40 mm), shorter dwell times shall be
between the temperatures of 60°F and 180°F (16°C and 82°C). permitted if it has been demonstrated that the shorter time is
Transition fittings which meet the thermal cycling require- sufficient to achieve the test temperature at the internal surface
of the fitting. Upon completion of the 1000 cycles, immerse the
TABLE 11 Hydrostatic Test Conditions specimen assembly in 60 6 3.6°F (16 6 2°C) water to
Hoop Stress, Temperature, Time, determine if there are any leaks.
psi, (MPa) °F (°C) h
9.2.4 Interpretation of Results—Any evidence of leakage at
2320 (16.0) 68 (20) 1
510 (3.5) 203 (95) 1000 any one of the transition fittings or separation of any transition
fitting from the pipe or tubing constitutes a failure of this test.
361
SF-2389 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 12 Dwell Times for Transition Fittings Thermocyclic Test 12.1.7 ASME SF-2389 or both ASME SF-2389 and
Fitting Nominal Size, IPS (metric) ASTM F2389;
Stage in Cycle 1⁄2 to 1-1⁄2 2 to 3
4 to 6 12.1.8 Manufacturer’s production code which allows the
(90 to manufacturer to identify production date and location if pro-
(16 to 40) (50 to 75)
125)
ducing at different sites; and
Water immersion at 2 min 15 min 30
180°F (82°C), min min 12.1.9 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water shall
Air immersion at 2 min 2 min 2 min also include the seal or mark of the laboratory making the
ambient, max evaluation for this purpose, spaced at intervals specified by the
Water immersion at 2 min 15 min 30
16°C (60°F), min min laboratory.
Air immersion at 2 min 2 min 2 min 12.1.10 Pipe intended for the transport of potable water or
ambient, max
other water that could include residual free chorine as a
disinfectant shall also include the chlorine resistant destination
for which it complies, CL-TD for CL-R.
9.3 Oxidative Stability in Potable Chlorinated Water
Applications—The test shall be conducted, and the extrapo- 12.2 Marking on fittings shall include the following:
lated time-to-failure shall be determined in accordance with 12.2.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark;
Test Method F2023. The test fluid shall be reverse-osmosis 12.2.2 Nominal size;
(RO) or deionized (DI) water prepared in accordance with 12.2.3 Dimension ratio or schedule of the corresponding
9.1.1 of Test Method F2023. pipe, unless the fittings are made as part of a system sold by the
9.3.1 Significance—The test need only be performed on manufacturer, and the same fitting design is used for all pipe
representative pipe samples for the original validation of pipe series produced as part of the system;
made from a particular compound. 12.2.4 Type of material (PP-R);
10. Retest and Rejection 12.2.5 For threaded fittings, the fitting or the packaging in
which the fitting is sold shall include either “Metric” or “NPT”
10.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the require- as appropriate. For metric thread fittings, the packaging shall
ments of this specification, the test(s) shall be permitted to be state that the fittings are not interchangeable with, and shall not
conducted again in accordance with an agreement between the be used with NPT fittings. For NPT thread fittings, the
purchaser and the seller. There shall be no agreement to lower packaging shall state that the fittings are not interchangeable
the minimum requirement of the specification by such means with, and shall not be used with metric fittings; and
as omitting tests that are a part of the specification, substituting 12.2.6 The fitting or the packaging in which the fitting is
or modifying a test method, or by changing the specification sold shall include this specification designation, F2389, with
limits. In retesting, the product requirements of this specifica- which the fitting complies.
tion shall be met, and the test methods designated in the
specification shall be followed. If, upon retest, failure occurs, 12.3 Additional marking for valves and manifolds:
the quantity of product represented by the test(s) does not meet 12.3.1 Marking on valves and manifolds shall include all of
the requirements of this specification. the required marking for fittings;
12.3.2 Valves designed for flow in one direction shall also
11. Certification include marking designating the flow direction; and
11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1. 12.3.3 Marking on manifolds shall include the nominal size
of the inlet and outlet connections.
12. Product Marking
12.1 Marking on the pipe shall include the following, 13. Quality Assurance
spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m): 13.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was manu-
12.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark; factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with this
12.1.2 Nominal pipe size (for example, 1⁄2, 32); specification and has been found to meet the requirements of
12.1.3 Metric series pipe shall be marked with the dimen- this specification.
sion ratio or both the outside diameter and wall thickness and
shall include the term “metric;”
14. Keywords
12.1.4 IPS series pipe shall include the marking “SCH 80”
or “Schedule 80”; 14.1 chlorine; fittings; industrial; municipal; pipe; polypro-
12.1.5 Type of material (PP-R) and classification number pylene; potable water; process piping; thermoplastic; water
(80 or 100);
12.1.6 Pressure rating(s) and temperature for which the
rating(s) is valid (for example, 355 psi at 73°F, 100 psi at
180°F);
362
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2389
convey or be in contact with potable water.
S1. Potable Water Requirements by an acceptable certifying organization, when required by the
S1.1 Products intended for the transport of potable water regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
shall be evaluated, tested, and certified for conformance with
ANSI/NSF 61, or the health effects portion of ANSI/NSF 14,
ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS GOVERNMENT/MILITARY PROCUREMENT
order, the producer is responsible for the performance of all with Uniform Freight Classification rules on National Motor
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set NOTE S2—The inclusion of U.S. government procurement requirements
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. government uses or
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed endorses the products described in this specification.
requirements.
NOTE S1—In federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for
inspection.
ment
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
363
SF-2389 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1. MINIMUM PRESSURE RATINGS FOR WATER
X1.1 The pressure ratings shown in Tables X1.1 and X1.2 X1.1.3 The pressure rating at 140°F is calculated in the
are minimum values. At temperatures of 73°F and 140°F the same manner as 73°F, but using the sLCL value at 140°F, 50
minimums are based on the ISO 9080 extrapolation criteria, years. For the PP-R minimum reference curve, this value is 703
using the Categorized Required Strength (CRSu,t) values for psi. For DR 11 pipe:
these temperatures. At 180°F, the minimums are arbitrarily set s LCL 703
to 100 psi to conform with U.S. plumbing codes. This S5 5 5468 psi (X1.3)
~ 1.2 3 1.25! ~ 1.5!
minimum is based on meeting the requirements for Class 5 2S 2 ~ 468!
service conditions (high temperature radiators) as given in ISO P5 5
DR21 ~ 1121 !
594 psi>90 psi (X1.4)
15874-1, with a pressure rating of 100 psi.
X1.1.1 Pressure rating calculation - The minimum pressure X1.1.4 The pressure rating at 180°F is calculated based on
ratings given in Table X1.1 are calculated as shown in an application class 5 from ISO 15874-2, but if the calculated
X1.1.2-X1.1.4. pressure exceeds 100 psi, it has been arbitrarily lowered to 100
psi to conform with U.S. plumbing codes. Miner’s Rule is used
X1.1.2 The pressure rating is calculated using the lower
confidence limit at 50 years and 73°F (sLCL), or alternatively, to determine the rating for this application class as follows: For
the MRS value at 68°F (1450 psi minimum for rating at 68°F) each condition (temperature/stress), an expected fail time can
and an overall design coefficient, C, of 1.5. For example, the be calculated from the material reference curve. The assumed
minimum reference curves for PP specify a sLCL 1340 psi at exposure time to this condition can then be divided by the total
73°F. Then the pressure rating using DR 6 pipe is calculated as: predicted fail time for that condition. This ratio represents the
amount of damage done to the pipe by this exposure condition/
s LCL 1430 time. As an example, using the times/conditions in Table X1.3
S5 5 5893 psi (X1.1)
~ 1.2 3 1.25! ~ 1.5! the maximum stress is calculated as 393 psi.
2S 2 ~ 893!
P5 5 5357 psi>355 psi (X1.2)
DR21 ~ 621 !
TABLE X1.1 Metric Series Pressure Ratings for Water, psi (MPa)
Temperature, Dimension Ratio (DR)
°F (°C) 11 7.4 6 5
73 (23) 180 (1.24) 290 (2.00) 355 (2.45) 440 (3.03)
140 (60) 90 (0.62) 145 (1.00) 185 (1.28) 230 (1.59)
180 (82) NAA 100 (0.69) 100 (0.69) 100 (0.69)
A
DR11 products are not typically used or rated at 180°F.
364
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2389
TABLE X1.2 IPS Schedule 80 Pressure Ratings for Water

Temperature
Nominal
Pipe Size 140°F
73°F (23°C)
(60°C)
⁄
12 375 200
⁄
34 305 160
1 280 145
1-1⁄2 210 110
2 180 95
3 165 85
4 140 75
6 125 65
TABLE X1.3 Example of Miner’s Rule Conditions

Temperature Time
°C hr year % of total
20 ... 14 28
60 ... 25 50
80 ... 10 20
90 ... 1 2
100 100 0.011408 0.02
Damage/year,% 2.000
Calucated years 50.0
2S 2 s 393/1.5d
P5 5131psi<100 psi
DR21 s 621 d
For DR 6, the resulting value is 105 psi, arbitrarily lowered

to 100 psi. For DR 7.4, however, the minimum reference
curve does not result in a rating above 100 psi. Therefore, to
achieve this rating the minimum curve for the actual material
being used must be sufficiently above the minimum refer-
ence curve to meet the 100 psi requirement. The calculations
above are only an example based on the minimum reference
curve of ISO 15874.
365
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTROFUSION TYPE

POLYAMIDE-11 FITTINGS FOR OUTSIDE DIAMETER
CONTROLLED POLYAMIDE-11 PIPE AND TUBING
SF-2600
mandatory.)
367
SF-2600 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Electrofusion Type Polyamide-11 Fittings for Outside
Diameter Controlled Polyamide-11 Pipe and Tubing
1. Scope 3. Terminology
1.1 This specification covers polyamide-11 electrofusion 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
fittings for use with outside diameter-controlled polyamide-11 nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
pipe, covered by Specification D2513. Requirements for nology D1600, unless otherwise specified.
materials, workmanship, and testing performance are included. 3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
Where applicable in this specification “pipe” shall mean “pipe” 3.2.1 electrofusion—a heat fusion joining process where the
or “tubing.” heat source is an integral part of the fitting, such that when
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded electric current is applied, heat is produced that melts and joins
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical the plastics.
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only 3.2.2 fusion interface—surface in the heat fusion process
and are not considered standard. where the plastic materials of the products being joined bond
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the together.
test method portion, Section 9, of this specification: This 3.2.3 fusion zone length—total length of the melted material
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, in the fitting cross-section under evaluation.
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 4. Materials and Manufacture
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- 4.1 This specification covers fittings made from polyamide
tions prior to use. 11 (PA11) meeting the requirements for Group 3, Class 2, and
2. Referenced Documents Grade 3, (PA32312) as prescribed in Specification D6779.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.2 Rework Material—Clean rework polyamide-11 material
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing of the same resin, free of any wire or contaminants generated
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics from the fitting manufacturer’s own production, may be used
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe by the same manufacturer, as long as the fittings produced
Under Constant Internal Pressure conform to the requirements of this specification.
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic 4.3 Heating Mechanism—The heat mechanism shall be of
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings materials not detrimental to the performance of the fitting or
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- the pipe to which it is intended to be joined.
tics
D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther- 5. Performance Requirements
moplastic Pipe and Fittings 5.1 The following requirements are for electrofusion joints
D2513 Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, that have been joined using the manufacturer’s recommended
Tubing, and Fittings joining procedures. These requirements must be met by each
D6779 Classification System for and Basis of Specification electrofusion joint design, on each size and type of pipe
for Polyamide Molding and Extrusion Materials (PA) material for which the manufacturer recommends use of his
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems fitting. Any revisions to the electrofusion joint design or
F905 Practice for Qualification of Polyethylene Saddle-
Fused Joints
368
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
processing by the manufacturer after the initial testing requires 6.3 The manufacturer shall furnish to the user the electrical
retesting to ensure these requirements can still be met. Fittings resistance, critical dimensions, and tolerances of his fittings.
intended for use in the distribution of natural gas or liquid This information must include at least the following dimen-
petroleum gas shall also meet the requirements of Specification sions and tolerances:
D2513. 6.3.1 Coupling inside diameter,
5.1.1 It is not required that each configuration of a fitting be 6.3.2 Temperature joining limits, and
tested to meet all of these qualifications (that is, 2 in. main 6.3.3 Operating pressure of the fitting.
saddle joint with multiple outlet configurations offered) as long NOTE 2—There are other items that fall beyond the scope of this
as the electrofusion joint design is not altered in the configu- specification which would be of interest to the user for proper application
ration differences. of the fittings and is recommended as additional information to be
furnished. A few of these are: (1) maximum pipe out of round allowed at
NOTE 1—It is permissible when accomplishing these tests, to do so on joint area; (2) minimum/maximum pipe SDR capability of the fitting, and
the highest and lowest dimension ratio of the same pipe material. If in (3) for saddles intended for use on a live main, the maximum allowable
those tests all performance requirements are met, all dimension ratios line pressure when making the joint.
between those tested may be considered as having met the requirements.
These tests do not have to cover the full range of dimension ratios
available, only the dimension ratio range on which the manufacturer
recommends his fitting be used. 7.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accordance
5.2 Pressure Requirements: with good commercial practice so as to produce fittings
5.2.1 Minimum Hydraulic Burst Pressure—The minimum meeting the requirements of this specification.
hydraulic burst pressure of the test specimen shall not be less 7.2 The fittings shall be homogeneous throughout, except
than that required to produce 3900psi (26.9MPa) fiber stress in where a heating coil or electrical connectors are incorporated,
the pipe being used in the test when tested in accordance with and free of cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or injurious
9.1. The test equipment, procedures, and failures definitions defects such as gouges, dents, cuts, etc. The fittings shall be as
shall be as specified in Test Method D1599. uniform as commercially practicable in opacity, density, and
5.2.2 Sustained Pressure—The fitting and fused joint shall other physical properties. Any heating coils, connecting cables,
not fail when tested in accordance with 9.2. connectors, and related electrical power source shall be de-
5.3 Tensile Strength Requirements (Coupling Type Joints signed to prevent electrical shock to the user.
Only)—The fitting or the pipe to fitting joint made on pipe shall
8. Specimen Preparation
not fail when tested in accordance with 9.3. Specimens shall be
subjected to a tensile stress that causes the pipe to yield or 8.1 Conditioning:
causes the pipe to break outside the joint area. Tensile tests 8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, condition the specimens
must be made on specimens as joined, not on straps cut from (pipe and fittings) prior to joining at the minimum pipe
the specimen. Yielding must be measured only in the pipe, temperature allowable for fusion as recommended by the
independent of the fitting or joint. manufacturer, for not less than 16 h and make the fusion joint
5.4 Impact Resistance (Saddle Type Joints Only)—The joint
required.
made on the specimen shall not fail when impacted with a force
8.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, condition the specimens
sufficient to break the body or other portion of the specimen.
(pipe and fittings) prior to joining at the maximum pipe
Tests of 500 ft-lb or higher impact with no failures noted shall
temperature allowable for fusion as recommended by the
be considered as a “pass” impact test. The device for testing
manufacturer, for not less than 16 h and make the fusion joint
and the methods shall be as defined in Practice F905.
5.5 Joint Integrity Tests—(Couplings and Saddle Type required.
Joints)—The joint made on the specimen shall meet the
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at the Standard
requirements in 9.4 and 9.5 of this specification, when tested in
Laboratory Temperature of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) unless
otherwise specified.
6. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations 8.3 Preparation of Specimens for Testing:
8.3.1 Prepare test specimens so that the minimum length of
6.1 Dimension and tolerances of electrofusion fittings must unreinforced pipe on one side of any fitting is equal to three
be such that heat fusion is possible to outside diameter (OD) times the diameter of the pipe, but in no case less than 12 in.
controlled PA-11 pipes such as those listed in Specifications (304 mm). It is permissible to test multiple fittings together
D2513, such that the joints will satisfy the performance provided they are separated by a minimum distance equal to
requirements in Section 5. ( See Test Method D2122.) three times the diameter of the pipe, but in no case less than 12
6.2 Because of the varying designs for electrofusion fittings, in. (304 mm).
the actual spread of dimensions may be quite different from 8.3.2 Fuse all fitting outlets with the appropriate size pipe in
manufacturer to manufacturer. A table of dimensions and accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
tolerances encompassing these differences would be meaning- 8.3.3 All saddle fusion joint specimens conditioned as in
less and without value and, therefore, is omitted from this 8.1.2 and destined for quick burst testing as in 9.1 and
specification. sustained pressure testing as in 9.2, are to be joined with the
369
SF-2600 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 1 Preparation of Coupling Specimen for Crush Test
pipe at no less than maximum allowable operating pressure of 9.3 Tensile Strength Test:
the pipe system or fitting, whichever is lowest, when being 9.3.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
prepared for those tests. The pipe should be left under pressure in accordance with Section 8 with the exception that it is
for a time period not less than recommended by the manufac- permissible, on pipe sizes above 4 in. (102 mm) IPS, if limits
turer for cooling in the field prior to disturbing the joint. Saddle of tensile machine will not allow 25 % elongation with pipe
joint specimens destined for mechanical/destructive type tests specimens of three-pipe diameters, to test with free pipe
such as impact as in 5.4 or crush tests as in 9.4, or specimens lengths of 20 in. (304-mm) minimum. From the four
conditioned for cold temperature joining as in 8.1.1, may be specimens, condition two specimens each in accordance with
made on unpressured pipe specimens. 8.1.1 and 8.1.2.
9. Test Methods 9.3.2 Test the specimens using the apparatus of Test Method
D638. Test at a pull rate of 0.20 in. (5.0 mm) per min, 625 %.
9.1 Minimum Hydraulic Burst Pressure Test:
9.3.3 Failure of the fitting or joint as defined in 5.3, shall
constitute specimen failure. Failure of any one of the four
specimens shall constitute failure of the test. Failure of one of
the four specimens tested is cause for retest of four additional
8.1.2.
specimens, joined at the failed specimens joining temperature.
9.1.2 Test the specimens in accordance with Test Method
Failure of any of these four additional specimens constitutes a
D1599.
9.1.3 Failure of the fitting or joint shall constitute specimen failure of the test.
failure. 9.4 Joint Integrity Tests—Illustrations of joint crush tests for
9.1.4 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall consti- socket type joints and saddles are offered in 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 as
tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the four specimens test methods that are useful as an evaluation of bonding
tested is cause for retest of four additional specimens, joined at strength between the pipe and fitting. Alternately, the fusion
the failed specimens joining temperature. Failure of any of evaluation test (FET) offered in 9.4.3 and 9.4.4 may be used in
these four additional specimens constitutes a failure of the test. lieu of the crush test. Similar test evaluations as specified in the
9.2 Sustained Pressure Test: contract or purchase order and as agreed upon by the purchaser
9.2.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens and manufacturer are of equal value in performing such
in accordance with Section 8 of this specification. From the evaluations and may be substituted with such agreement.
four specimens, condition two specimens each in accordance 9.4.1 Joint Crush Test:
with 8.1.1 and 8.1.2. 9.4.1.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
9.2.2 Test the specimens in accordance with Test Method in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens,
D1598. All tests shall be conducted at 80 6 2°C. The condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
assemblies are to be subjected to pipe fiber stresses of 1450 psi 8.1.2 (Note 3).
(10.0 MPa) for 170 h. Joint specimens shall not fail within
these time periods. Any failures within these time periods must NOTE 3—It is permissible to utilize in joint integrity testing, specimens
be of the pipe, independent of the fitting or joint and must be from the quick-burst tests conducted in 9.1 after visually determining that
neither the joint area nor the pipe segment to be crushed was a part of the
of a“ brittle” type pipe failure, not “ductile.” If ductile pipe failure mode in the quick-burst test.
failures occur, reduce the pressure of the test and repeat until
170-h results or pipe brittle failures are achieved. 9.4.1.2 Slit socket joints longitudinally as illustrated in Fig.
9.2.3 Failure of the fitting or joint shall constitute specimen 1 as near the centerline of the pipe as practical. Pipe lengths
failure. extending out of the socket may be cut back to a minimum of
9.2.4 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall consti- 3 in. (76 mm) for ease of placing in a vise.
tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the four specimens 9.4.1.3 Place each specimen half in a vise such that the
tested is cause for retest of four additional specimens, joined at outermost wire of coil is within 1.250 6 0.125 in. (32 6 3 mm)
the failed-specimens-joining temperature. Failure of any of of vise jaws, with the jaws closing only on the pipe portion of
these four additional specimens constitutes a failure of the test. the specimen (Fig. 2).
370
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
FIG. 2 Coupling Crush Test Arrangement
9.4.1.4 Tighten the jaws of the vise on the pipe until the specimens. Failure of any of these four additional specimens
inner walls of the pipe meet (Fig. 3). Repeat crush test on both constitutes a failure of the test.
halves and each end of specimen, at all ends, where a joint 9.4.2 Saddle Type Joint Crush Test (Not Full-Wrap Design):
exists. 9.4.2.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
9.4.1.5 Separation of the fitting from the pipe at the fusion in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens,
interface constitutes a failure of the test. Some minor separa- condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
tion at the outer limits of the fusion heat source up to 15 % of 8.1.2 (see 9.4).
the fusion length may be seen. This does not constitute a 9.4.2.2 Pipe lengths extending from saddle joint may be cut
failure. Ductile failure in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation back clear up to the outer edges of the saddle for convenience
material, is acceptable as long as the bond interface remains of handling, if desired, however, it is not necessary. The length
intact. of the pipe extending beyond the saddle is not important to this
9.4.1.6 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall test (Fig. 4).
constitute failure of the test and is cause for retest of four 9.4.2.3 Place the specimen in vise jaws as shown in Fig. 5,
additional fittings, joined at the same temperature as the failed such that vise jaws are within 12 in. of saddle bottom and the
371
SF-2600 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 3 Coupling Crush Test
FIG. 4 Preparation of Saddle Specimen for Crush Test
jaws will close only on the pipe portion of the specimen. 9.4.2.4 Tighten the jaws of the vise on the pipe until the
Saddle designs incorporating a bottom half saddle will need the inner walls of the pipe meet (Fig. 6).
bottom half removed for this test. Saddle designs incorporating
a full-wrap single piece saddle are to be tested as in 9.4 socket
type joints (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3).
372
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
FIG. 5 Saddle Fitting Crush Test Before Crush
FIG. 6 Saddle Fitting Crush Test After Crush
9.4.2.5 Separation of the fitting from the pipe at the fusion tion at the outer limits of the fusion heat source up to 15 % of
interface constitutes a failure of the test. Some minor separa- the fusion length may be seen. This does not constitute a
373
SF-2600 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 7 Recommended Procedure for Cutting FET Strip From Coupling
failure. Ductile failure in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation 9.4.4 Fusion Evaluation Test of Saddle Type Joints (Not
material, is acceptable as long as the bond interface remains Full-Wrap Design):
intact. 9.4.4.1 Select four fittings at random and prepare specimens
9.4.2.6 Failure of any one of the four specimens shall in accordance with Section 8. From the four specimens,
constitute failure of the test and is cause for retest of four condition two specimens each in accordance with 8.1.1 and
additional fittings, joined at the same temperature as the failed 8.1.2.
9.4.3 Fusion Evaluation Test (FET) of Sockets:
FET samples. Remove the stack from the fitting and cut the
bottom portion of the pipe from the test piece. Cut the saddle
in half in the transverse direction and then cut each half again
in the longitudinal direction as shown in Fig. 9. Cut FET
8.1.2
specimens approximately116 in. wide through the fusion base of
restricted to cutting plastic is recommended for obtaining the the saddle fitting. These cuts must be both longitudinal and
FET samples. Slit the socket in the order of cuts as illustrated transverse using two diagonal quarters for transverse direction
in Fig. 7. First, radially cut the socket in half along the and the two remaining quarters for the longitudinal direction.
centerline of the joint. Pipe extending from the fittings may be 9.4.4.3 Inspect the fusion area for any discontinuities. Fol-
cut back to about 1 in. from the fitting edge. Cut FET low the instructions in 9.4.3.3 to test the FET samples.
specimens approximately 116in. wide from each joint half. A 9.4.4.4 Separation of the specimen along the bond line
minimum of four FET strips shall be cut from one half of the constitutes failure of the specimen. Some minor separation at
socket and spaced approximately 90° apart. the outer limits of the fusion heat source may be seen or there
9.4.3.3 Grip an FET specimen in a vise or clamping device may be voids between wires. This does not constitute failure as
as shown in Fig. 8 so that the bond line between the pipe and long as the voids do not exceed the limits of 9.5. Ductile failure
fitting is at least116 in. from the edges of the clamping device. in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation material is acceptable
Flex the specimen four times 90° in both directions. Pliers may as long as the bond interface remains intact.
be used in lieu of a vise as long as the entire length of the 9.4.4.5 Failure of any one of the four joints shall constitute
fusion is flexed. failure of the test and is cause for retest using four additional
9.4.3.4 Separation of the specimen along the bond line fittings, joined at the same conditions as the failed joint
constitutes failure of the specimen. Some minor separation at specimens. Failure of any of these four additional joint
the outer limits of the fusion heat source may be seen or there specimens constitutes a failure in the test.
long as the voids do not exceed the limits of 9.5. Ductile failure 9.5 Evaluation for Voids—When dissecting electrofusion
in the pipe, fitting, or the wire insulation material is acceptable joints for the integrity tests in 9.4, or any reason, voids at or
as long as the bond interface remains intact. near the fusion interface may be exposed. The voids, should
9.4.3.5 Failure of any one of the four joints shall constitute they be present, are a phenomenon of the electrofusion process,
failure of the test and is cause for retest using four additional due to trapped air and shrinking during the cooling process
fittings joined at the same conditions as the failed joint after the joint is made. If detected, such voids are considered
specimens. Failure of any of these four additional joint acceptable only if round or elliptical in shape, with no sharp
specimens constitutes a failure in the test. corners allowed and if they meet the limitations of 9.5.1-9.5.3.
374
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
FIG. 8 Strip for FET Bend Test
FIG. 9 Procedure for Cutting FET Strips from a Saddle
9.5.1 Voids that do not exceed 10 % of the fusion zone 10.1.3 For fittings complying with Specification D2513 and
length in size are acceptable. (See Fig. 10.) intended for gas distribution, the word “gas” or if space does
9.5.2 Multiple voids, if present, are acceptable if the com- not permit, the letter “G,”
bined void sizes do not exceed 20 % of the fusion zone length. 10.1.4 Size, followed by “IPS” or “CTS” designation,
(See Fig. 10.) 10.1.5 ASME SF-2600 or both ASME SF-2600 and ASTM
9.5.3 If voids are exposed, additional longitudinal cuts F2600,
should be made to ensure that the void does not follow a 10.1.6 The fittings shall bear an appropriate code number
diametric path which connects to the pressure-containing area that will assure identification on the fittings as to date of
of the joint. (See Fig. 11.) production and resin formulas used in the production of said
NOTE 4—Some voids in electrofusion fitting joints may be due to the fittings. The manufacturer shall maintain such additional re-
natural phenomenon described in 9.5. It is also possible the voids can be cords as are necessary to confirm identification of all coded
produced by not following proper fusion procedures. If voids are detected, fittings, and
one should ensure that all procedures were followed in making the joint.
10.1.7 Where the size of the fitting does not allow complete
10. Product Marking marking, identification marking may be omitted in the follow-
ing sequence: ASTM designation number, and material desig-
nation.
10.1.2 Material designation PA32312,
375
SF-2600 ASME NM.3.1-2018
FIG. 10 Coupling Fusion Assembly With Possible Void Characteristics
FIG. 11 Coupling Fusion Assembly—Further Examination Guidance
10.2 All required markings shall be legible and so applied as 12. Certification
to remain legible under normal handling and installation 12.1 Certification shall be required by Annex A2.
practices. If indentation is used, it shall be demonstrated that
these marks have no effect on the long term strength of the
fitting. 13. Keywords
13.1 electrofusion; plastic pipe; plastic fittings; fittings;
11. Quality Assurance joining; polyamide; PA-11
376
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2600
ANNEXES
A1. N-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR ELECTROFUSION FITTINGS
A1.1 Introduction: A1.2.2.3 Heating Element Resistance—Immediately pro-

A1.1.1 Use the following in-plant quality control program, ceeding production start up, then once per h, or one out of ten
covering material and performance requirements in manufac- fittings, whichever is less frequent.
ture to provide reasonable assurance that the product meets the A1.2.3 Molding or Extrusion Quality—Make the following
requirements of this specification and normally anticipated tests on each cavity in the mold or each extrusion line being
field performance requirements. used. Test at the start of each production run, whenever
production conditions have changed or when the resin lot has
A1.2 Fittings Tests: changed, but not less than once per 500 fittings thereafter.
A1.2.1 Conduct the fittings tests at the frequencies indicated A1.2.3.1 Voids in Part—Inspect for voids in the fitting by
as follows: means of X-ray or dissection of the fitting in 0.25-in. (6-mm)
wide strips.
NOTE A1.1—When any failure to meet the requirements of this A1.2.3.2 Molding Knit Line Strength—Test by one of the
specification occurs, make additional tests to ascertain those fittings that
are acceptable, back to the last acceptable ones. Those that do not meet the
following tests, or other suitable tests:
requirements must be rejected. (a) By crushing a fitting or a portion of a fitting in a manner
that applies load in a direction normal to the knit line.
A1.2.2 Dimensions of fusion area with heating element in (b) By performing an apparent tensile strength test of a ring
place: cut from a fitting with the load oriented normal to the knit line.
A1.2.2.1 Socket Diameters—Immediately proceeding pro- (c) By performing a burst test of the fitting in accordance
duction start up, then once per h, or one out of ten fittings, with Test Method D1599.
whichever is less frequent.
NOTE A1.2—Separation in the knit line of any of these tests constitutes
A1.2.2.2 Saddle Sizes—Main sizes and branching outlet a failure of the test.
sizes, immediately proceeding production start up, then once
per h, or one out of ten fittings, whichever is less frequent.
A2. CERTIFICATION
377
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE

(PE) LINE PIPE
SF-2619/SF-2619M
(Identical with ASTM F2619/F2619M-13 except for additional requirements in section 10 and Annex A1, revised
marking requirements in para. 8.2.5, renumbering of section 11, and quality assurance requirement in para. 9.2 has
379
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
High-Density Polyethylene (PE) Line Pipe

1.1 This specification covers requirements and test methods tics
for high-density polyethylene (PE) materials, pipe and fittings D1603 Test Method for Carbon Black Content in Olefin
for pressure or non-pressure oil and gas producing applications Plastics
to convey fluids such as oil, dry or wet gas, multiphase fluids, D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
and non-potable oilfield water. This specification does not moplastic Pipe and Fittings
cover pipe for gas distribution applications. D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
1.1.1 For the purposes of this specification, high-density Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
polyethylene material is Specification D3350 density cell D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
classification 3 or higher. This specification does not cover Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
materials having Specification D3350 density cell classification D2683 Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings
less than 3 such as medium or low density polyethylene for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and
materials.
Tubing
1.1.2 See Specification D2513 for polyethylene pipe and
fittings intended for use in the distribution of natural gas, or for
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
use with liquefied petroleum gas.
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
1.2 Units—The values stated in either SI units or inch- D3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
pound units are to be regarded separately as standard. The Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and
values stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; Tubing
therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other. D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
Combining values from the two systems may result in non-
tings Materials
conformance with the standard.
D4218 Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the Content in Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the Furnace Technique
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- F1055 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene
and Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing
2.1 ASTM Standards: Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics and Resins
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics F1973 Specification for Factory Assembled Anodeless Ris-
by Extrusion Plastometer ers and Transition Fittings in Polyethylene (PE) and
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Polyamide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12 (PA12) Fuel Gas
Under Constant Internal Pressure Distribution Systems
380
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
F2206 Specification for Fabricated Fittings of Butt-Fused hydrocarbon or gas production, processing, or storage facili-
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Fittings, Sheet Stock, ties.
Plate Stock, or Block Stock
3.2.3 production run, n—the continuous extrusion of pipe of
2.2 Other Documents:
a specific diameter, wall thickness and material compound (see
49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by
4.1).
Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
3.2.3.1 Discussion—Continuous production may be tempo-
Federal Register Vol. 71, No. 50, March 15, 2006
rarily interrupted by loss of power or circumstances such as
CSA Z662 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems
breakdowns or screen changes, etc.; however, a change of
FED-STD-123G Federal Standard Marking for Shipment
diameter or wall thickness (dimension ratio) or material
(Civil Agencies)
compound constitutes a new production run.
Military Standard 129P Standard Practice—Military Mark-
ing for Shipment and Storage 3.2.4 sample, n—pipe or an element of pipe that represents
PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro- a quantity of pipe and provides a specimen or specimens for
static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), testing.
Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required 3.2.5 specimen, n—pipe or an element of pipe that is
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate- subjected to test.
rials or Pipe
PPI TR-4 Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), 4. Materials
Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis 4.1 Polyethylene compounds suitable for use in the manu-
(PDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings facture of pipe and fittings under this specification shall meet
for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe the following requirements:
4.1.1 Material Code—Polyethylene compounds shall meet
3. Terminology Table 1 requirements applicable to the material designation
3.1 Definitions—Unless otherwise specified, definitions are code.
in accordance with Terminology F412, and abbreviations are in 4.1.2 Color and Ultraviolet (UV) Stabilization—
accordance with Terminology D1600. Polyethylene compounds in pipe and fittings shall contain 2 to
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 3 percent carbon black when tested per 5.6. Color polyethylene
3.2.1 multiphase fluid, n—oil, gas, and water in any combi- compound used outside surface color stripes shall contain
nation produced from one or more oil or gas wells, or sufficient UV stabilizer for at least 24 months of unprotected
recombined oil or gas well fluids that may have been separated outdoor storage.
in passing through surface facilities. 4.1.3 Polyethylene compounds shall comply with thermal
3.2.2 oilfield water, n—fresh or salt water transported by stability, brittleness temperature and elongation at break per
pipeline, regardless of purity or quality, from wells or surface Specification D3350.
locations for the purpose of providing water injection to 4.1.4 The manufacturer shall have procedures for ensuring
underground reservoirs; or disposing of waste water from that materials meeting 4.1 are received in a condition that is

PE3608 PE4710
Requirement Required Value
HDB at 140ºF (60ºC), psi (MPa), per Test Method 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5)
D2837 and PPI TR-3A
HDS for water at 73°F (23°C) psi (MPa), per Test 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9)
Method D2837and PPI TR-3A
Melt flow rate per Test Method D1238 #0.15 g/10 min Cond. 190/2.16, or #20 - >4.0 #0.15 g/10 min Cond. 190/2.16, or #20 - >4.0
g/10 min Cond. 190/21.6 g/10 min Cond. 190/21.6
Nominal natural base resin density per Specification >0.940-0.947 >0.947-0.955

D3350, g/cm3
Minimum average SCG Resistance per Specification 100 500

D3350, PENT, hours (Test Method F1473, molded
plaque, 176°F (80°C), 348 psi (2.4 MPa), notch depth
per Table 1)
A
HDB and HDS listings that are published in PPI TR-4 are optional.
381
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
suitable for processing, including receiving inspection to dis- 5.2.3 Pipe Diameter—The outside diameter of the pipe shall
cover damage or contamination from shipping and verification meet the outside diameter per Table 2 or 5.2.8 when measured
of appropriate material properties. in accordance with Test Method D2122. The outside diameter
NOTE 1—Changes to Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3 resulted in
measurement shall be taken at a distance at least 1.5 times the
changes to thermoplastic material designation codes for polyethylene average outside diameter or 11.8 in. [300 mm], whichever is
materials. (See Terminology F412 for the thermoplastic material designa- less, from the cut end of the pipe.
tion code definition.) A Specification D3350 requirement to use a 4 for 5.2.4 Toe-In—When measured in accordance with Test
SCG resistance values of 4 or 6 was deleted, density cell 3 was split into
cells 3 and 4, and a SCG resistance value of 7 (>500 h per Test Method
Method D2122, the outside diameter at the cut end of the pipe
F1473 (PENT)) was added. Changes to PPI TR-3 provide for an increased shall not be more than 1.5 percent smaller than the outside
HDS for water at 73°F for materials that demonstrate >500 h SCG diameter per Table 2 or 5.2.8.
resistance per Test Method F1473 (PENT), and a LCL/LTHS ratio of at 5.2.5 Outside Surface Irregularity—Outside surface irregu-
least 90 percent per Test Method D2837, and substantiation per PPI TR-3
to show that extrapolation of the 73°F stress regression curve is linear to
larity tolerance per Table 2 shall be measured per 7.6. Mea-
the 438 000-h (50-year) intercept. surement is not required where there is no tolerance in Table 2.
4.2 Rework Material—Rework material is acceptable to NOTE 2—Irregular outside surface conditions from the extrusion line
manufacture pipe and fittings in accordance with this specifi- processing equipment that are not field correctable can affect the suitabil-
ity of pipe for joining with devices that secure or seal to the pipe outside
cation as part of a blend with virgin material compound surface, especially electrofusion devices.
meeting 4.1 and 4.1.2. Rework material shall be polyethylene
material compound from the manufacturer’s own pipe or fitting 5.2.6 Ovality—The ovality (elliptical shape) of pipe when
production that met 4.1 and 4.1.2 as virgin material compound. exiting production line processing equipment but before coil-
Rework material shall be traceable per 4.2.1 and shall have the ing or packaging for shipment shall not exceed 5 percent when
same Specification D3350 cell classification and property value determined in accordance with 7.7.
or material designation code per Table 1 as the virgin material NOTE 3—Ovality is a field correctable condition that results from
compound in the blend. Pipe containing rework material shall packaging or storage. When coiled, pipe will deflect to an oval or elliptical
meet the requirements of this specification. profile, and when packaged or stored, higher DR pipe may deflect to an
4.2.1 The manufacturer shall have procedures for ensuring oval or elliptical profile. If necessary, commercially available equipment
can be applied to minimize percent ovality during field joining or
that rework material is clean before use and shall have installation.
procedures for tracing rework material from its initial process-
ing as virgin material through the manufacturer’s rework 5.2.7 Pipe Wall Thickness—Pipe wall thickness shall be as
process to ensure that material blends containing rework specified in Table 3 or Table 4 or 5.2.8 when measured in
material comply with 4.2. Testing rework material for compli- accordance with Test Method D2122. For pipe larger than
ance with Table 1 classification and properties is not required. 12-in. Nominal IPS Pipe Size, the wall thickness variability
(eccentricity) as measured and calculated in accordance with
5. Pipe Requirements Test Method D2122 in any diametrical cross section of the pipe
shall not exceed 12 percent.
5.1 Workmanship—Pipe shall be homogeneous throughout. 5.2.8 Special Sizes—Outside diameter not specified in Table
To the extent commercially practical, pipe exiting production 2 and wall thickness not specified in Table 3 or Table 4 are
line processing equipment but before coiling or packaging for acceptable by agreement between the manufacturer and the
shipment shall be free of injurious defects such as visible purchaser. If not otherwise specified, the total tolerance on
cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids, blisters, dents, and special size outside diameter shall not exceed +0.90 percent of
grooves, ridges and high or low (flat) areas that extend the minimum special outside diameter or 60.45 percent of the
lengthwise along the pipe (see 5.2.5). To the extent commer- average special outside diameter. If not otherwise specified, the
cially practical, pipe and fittings shall be uniform throughout in tolerance on special size wall thickness shall be +12 percent of
finish, opacity and color except for color stripes if applicable. the minimum special size wall thickness for 12-in. Nominal
5.1.1 Pipe outside surface color stripes are not required, but IPS Pipe Size [324-mm] and smaller special sizes. If not
if applied, shall be inseparably co-extruded as part of the pipe otherwise specified, wall thickness shall be in accordance with
outside surface. The colors red, orange, blue, green, and purple 5.2.7 for special sizes larger than 12-in. Nominal IPS Pipe Size
(lavender) shall not be applied to pipe meeting this specifica- [324-mm].
tion.
5.1.2 Cut pipe ends shall be squarely cut and clean without 5.3 Inside Surface Ductility—The pipe inside surface shall
ledges, shaving tails, burrs or cracks. be ductile in accordance with 5.3.1 or 5.3.2.
5.1.3 The interior of the pipe shall be free of cuttings, 5.3.1 Tensile Elongation Test—A sample of pipe shall be
shavings and debris when produced. taken from ongoing production and specimens shall be pre-
pared from the sample and tested per 7.4.1. The minimum
5.2 Dimensions and Tolerances: elongation at break for each tensile specimen from the sample
5.2.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall apply at 73.4 6 3.6°F shall exceed 400 percent of the gauge length.
[23 6 2°C] without regard to humidity. 5.3.2 Bendback Test—Bendback testing is conducted per
5.2.2 Pipe shall be supplied in coils or straight lengths by 7.4.2. Visual examination of bendback specimens from the
agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser. sample pipe shall not reveal inside surface crazing or cracking.
382
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
TABLE 2 Pipe Outside Diameter and Tolerance

Outside Diameter and ToleranceA Outside Surface Irregularity
Nominal IPS
Pipe Size Average Tolerance ToleranceB
in. mm in. mm in. mm
⁄
12 0.840 21.34 ±0.004 ±0.10 0.03 0.8
3 ⁄4 1.050 26.67 ±0.004 ±0.10 0.03 0.8
1 1.315 33.40 ±0.005 ±0.13 0.03 0.8
1 1⁄ 4 1.660 42.16 ±0.005 ±0.13 0.03 0.8
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 48.26 ±0.006 ±0.15 0.06 1.5
2 2.375 60.33 ±0.006 ±0.15 0.06 1.5
2 1⁄ 2 2.875 73.03 ±0.007 ±0.18 0.06 1.5
3 3.500 88.90 ±0.008 ±0.20 0.06 1.5
4 4.500 114.30 ±0.009 ±0.23 0.10 2.5
5 5.563 141.30 ±0.010 ±0.25 0.10 2.5
6 6.625 168.28 ±0.011 ±0.28 0.12 3.0
8 8.625 219.08 ±0.013 ±0.38 0.24 6.1
10 10.750 273.05 ±0.015 ±0.38 0.24 6.1
12 12.750 323.85 ±0.017 ±0.43 0.28 7.1
14 14.000 355.60 ±0.063 ±1.60 { {
16 16.000 406.40 ±0.072 ±1.83 { {
18 18.000 457.20 ±0.081 ±2.05 { {
20 20.000 508.00 ±0.090 ±2.29 { {
22 22.000 558.80 ±0.099 ±2.51 { {
24 24.000 609.60 ±0.108 ±2.74 { {
28 28.000 711.20 ±0.126 ±3.20 { {
30 30.000 762.00 ±0.135 ±3.43 { {
32 32.000 812.80 ±0.144 ±3.66 { {
34 34.000 863.60 ±0.153 ±3.89 { {
36 36.000 914.40 ±0.162 ±4.11 { {
42 42.000 1066.80 ±0.189 ±4.80 { {
48 48.000 1219.20 ±0.216 ±5.49 { {
54 54.000 1371.60 ±0.243 ±6.17 { {
63 63.000 1600.20 ±0.284 ±7.20 { {
65 65.000 1651.00 ±0.293 ±7.43 { {
A
Outside diameter rounded to 3 decimal places for inch dimensions or to 2 decimal places for mm dimensions.
B
See 5.2.5.
5.4 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure—Elevated sample”. For the retest, any specimen failure before the
temperature sustained pressure tests for each polyethylene “minimum average time before failure” at the retest condition
compound (material designation) per 4.1 and Table 1 used to of lower stress and longer minimum average time before
manufacture pipe in accordance with this specification at the failure constitutes failure to meet this requirement.
facility shall be conducted per 7.8 and Table 5. Conduct 5.5 Short-Term Strength—Pipe meeting this specification is
elevated temperature sustained pressure tests when the poly- tested at least once per production run for short-term strength
ethylene compound (material designation) is first used to in accordance with 5.5.1 or 5.5.2.
manufacture pipe meeting this specification at the facility and 5.5.1 Short-Term Pressurization—Pipe 12-in. Nominal IPS
twice annually thereafter such that the tests generally represent Pipe Size and smaller is tested in accordance with Test Method
a first half or a second half of the annual production at the D1599 at 73.4 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] without regard to humidity.
facility. The test sample is five specimens. Specimen ruptures shall be
5.4.1 Passing results are (1) non-failure for all three speci- ductile and the minimum hoop stress at burst shall be 2900 psi
mens at a time equal to or greater than the Table 5 “minimum [20.2 MPa].
average time before failure”, or (2) not more than one ductile 5.5.2 Apparent Tensile Strength at Yield—Pipe of 3-in.
specimen failure and the average time before failure for all Nominal IPS Pipe Size and larger is tested in accordance with
three specimens shall be greater than the specified “minimum Test Method D2290 at 73.4 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] without regard
average time before failure” for the selected Table 5 Condition. to humidity. Five specimens are prepared from the sample per
For Table 5 Conditions 1 through 5: if more than one ductile Test Method D2290. The minimum apparent tensile strength at
failure occurs before the “minimum average time before yield shall be 2900 psi [20.2 MPa].
failure”, it is permissible to conduct one retest at a Table 5
Condition of lower stress and longer minimum average time 5.6 Carbon Black Content—Pipe shall be tested daily for
before failure for the material designation. For Table 5 Condi- carbon black content per 7.5. With the exception of color
tion 6 no retest is allowed. Brittle failure of any specimen when stripes, the carbon black content of the material in the pipe wall
tested at Table 5 Condition 1 through 6 constitutes failure to shall be 2 to 3 percent.
meet this requirement and no retest is allowed.
5.4.2 Provision for Retest (if applicable)—The retest sample 6. Fitting Requirements
shall be three specimens of the same pipe or tubing size and 6.1 Polyethylene fittings intended for use with correspond-
material designation from the same time frame as the “test ingly sized polyethylene line pipe shall be manufactured from
383
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Wall Thickness and Tolerance of 12 in. and Smaller Nominal Pipe Size
Wall Thickness and Tolerance
Minimum Wall ThicknessA ToleranceB
Nominal IPS Pipe Size DR
in. mm in. mm
⁄
12 13.5 0.062 1.58 +0.007 +0.18
11.0 0.076 1.93 +0.009 +0.22
9.0 0.093 2.36 +0.011 +0.28
7.3 0.115 2.92 +0.014 +0.36
7.0 0.120 3.05 +0.014 +0.36
⁄
34 13.5 0.078 1.98 +0.009 +0.22
11.0 0.095 2.41 +0.011 +0.28
9.0 0.117 2.97 +0.014 +0.36
7.3 0.144 3.66 +0.017 +0.43
7.0 0.150 3.81 +0.018 +0.46
1 13.5 0.097 2.46 +0.012 +0.30
11.0 0.120 3.05 +0.014 +0.36
9.0 0.146 3.71 +0.018 +0.46
7.3 0.180 4.57 +0.022 +0.56
7.0 0.188 4.78 +0.023 +0.58
11⁄4 13.5 0.123 3.12 +0.015 +0.38
11.0 0.151 3.84 +0.018 +0.46
9.0 0.184 4.67 +0.022 +0.56
7.3 0.227 5.77 +0.027 +0.69
7.0 0.237 6.02 +0.028 +0.71
11⁄2 13.5 0.141 3.58 +0.017 +0.43
11.0 0.173 4.39 +0.021 +0.53
9.0 0.211 5.36 +0.025 +0.64
7.3 0.260 6.60 +0.031 +0.79
7.0 0.271 6.88 +0.033 +0.84
2 17.0 0.140 3.56 +0.017 +0.43
13.5 0.176 4.47 +0.021 +0.51
11.0 0.216 5.49 +0.026 +0.66
9.0 0.264 6.71 +0.032 +0.81
7.3 0.325 8.26 +0.039 +0.99
7.0 0.339 8.61 +0.041 +1.04
21⁄2 21.0 0.137 3.48 +0.016 +0.41
17.0 0.169 4.29 +0.020 +0.51
13.5 0.213 5.41 +0.026 +0.66
11.0 0.261 6.63 +0.031 +0.79
9.0 0.319 8.10 +0.038 +0.97
7.3 0.394 10.00 +0.047 +1.20
7.0 0.411 10.43 +0.049 +1.25
3 21.0 0.167 4.24 +0.020 +0.51
17.0 0.206 5.23 +0.025 +0.64
13.5 0.259 6.58 +0.031 +0.79
11.0 0.318 8.08 +0.038 +0.97
9.0 0.389 9.88 +0.047 +1.19
7.3 0.479 12.17 +0.058 +1.47
7.0 0.500 12.70 +0.060 +1.52
4 32.5 0.138 3.51 +0.017 +0.43
26.0 0.173 4.39 +0.021 +0.53
21.0 0.214 5.44 +0.026 +0.66
17.0 0.265 6.73 +0.032 +0.81
13.5 0.333 8.46 +0.040 +1.02
11.0 0.409 10.39 +0.049 +1.24
9.0 0.500 12.70 +0.060 +1.52
7.3 0.616 15.65 +0.074 +1.88
7.0 0.643 16.33 +0.077 +1.96
5 32.5 0.171 4.35 +0.021 +0.52
26.0 0.214 5.43 +0.027 +0.65
21.0 0.265 6.73 +0.032 +0.81
17.0 0.327 8.31 +0.039 +1.00
13.5 0.412 10.47 +0.049 +1.26
11.0 0.506 12.85 +0.061 +1.54
9.0 0.618 15.70 +0.074 +1.88
7.3 0.762 19.36 +0.091 +2.32
7.0 0.795 20.19 +0.095 +2.42
6 32.5 0.204 5.18 +0.024 +0.61
26.0 0.255 6.48 +0.031 +0.79
21.0 0.315 8.00 +0.038 +0.97
17.0 0.390 9.91 +0.047 +1.19
13.5 0.491 12.47 +0.059 +1.50
11.0 0.602 15.29 +0.072 +1.83
9.0 0.736 18.69 +0.088 +2.24
7.3 0.908 23.06 +0.109 +2.77
7.0 0.946 24.03 +0.114 +2.90
384
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
TABLE 3 Continued
Wall Thickness and Tolerance
Minimum Wall ThicknessA ToleranceB
in. mm in. mm
8 32.5 0.265 6.73 +0.032 +0.81
26.0 0.332 8.43 +0.040 +1.02
21.0 0.411 10.44 +0.049 +1.24
17.0 0.507 12.88 +0.061 +1.55
13.5 0.639 16.23 +0.077 +1.96
11.0 0.784 19.91 +0.094 +2.39
9.0 0.958 24.33 +0.115 +2.92
7.3 1.182 30.02 +0.142 +3.61
7.0 1.232 31.29 +0.148 +3.76
10 32.5 0.331 8.41 +0.040 +1.02
26.0 0.413 10.49 +0.050 +1.27
21.0 0.512 13.00 +0.061 +1.55
17.0 0.632 16.05 +0.076 +1.93
13.5 0.796 20.22 +0.096 +2.44
11.0 0.977 24.82 +0.117 +2.97
9.0 1.194 30.33 +0.143 +3.63
7.3 1.473 37.41 +0.177 +4.50
7.0 1.536 39.01 +0.184 +4.67
12 32.5 0.392 9.96 +0.047 +1.19
26.0 0.490 12.45 +0.059 +1.50
21.0 0.607 15.42 +0.073 +1.85
17.0 0.750 19.05 +0.090 +2.29
13.5 0.944 23.98 +0.113 +2.87
11.0 1.159 29.44 +0.139 +3.53
9.0 1.417 35.99 +0.170 +4.32
7.3 1.747 44.37 +0.210 +5.33
7.0 1.821 46.25 +0.219 +5.56
A
Minimum wall thickness = average outside diameter (from Table 2) divided by DR (from Table 3), and rounded to 3 decimal places for inch dimensions, or to 2 decimal
places for mm dimensions.
B
Wall thickness tolerance = plus 12 % of the minimum wall thickness, and rounded to 3 decimal places for inch dimensions, or to 2 decimal places for mm dimensions.
polyethylene material compounds in accordance with Section 4 without regard to humidity for at least 1 hour in constant
of this specification and 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, or 6.1.5. temperature circulating water or at least 4 hours in constant
6.1.1 Socket fusion fittings shall be manufactured per Speci- temperature circulating air.
fication D2683.
NOTE 4—Conditioning is intended to produce a uniform 73.4 6 3.6°F
6.1.2 Butt fusion fittings shall be manufactured per Speci- [23 6 2°C] temperature through the pipe wall and all around the pipe. For
fication D3261. larger pipes, conditioning time may be increased as necessary.
6.1.3 Electrofusion fittings shall be manufactured per Speci-
fication F1055. 7.3 Test Conditions—Unless otherwise specified, conduct
6.1.4 Fabricated fittings shall be manufactured per Specifi- tests at 73.4 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] without regard to humidity.
cation F2206. 7.4 Inside Surface Ductility—Test for inside surface ductil-
6.1.5 Transition fittings shall be manufactured per Specifi- ity per 7.4.1 or 7.4.2.
cation F1973. 7.4.1 Tensile Test Method—Four Type III or Type IV tensile
specimens per Test Method D638 are prepared from the
7. Test Methods sample, one specimen from the middle of each quadrant around
7.1 Sampling—For destructive tests, a sufficient quantity of the pipe circumference and cut longitudinally from the pipe
sample pipe shall be taken from ongoing production to prepare wall. For small pipe, specimens prepared from adjacent lengths
test specimens and conduct the required tests. Non-destructive along the sample are acceptable. Cut surfaces of tensile
tests such as tests for dimensions and workmanship do not specimens shall be smooth; however, the pipe inside diameter
require removing a sample of pipe from production. surface in the gauge area shall be left unaltered. Test in
7.1.1 The manufacturer shall have a documented procedure accordance with Test Method D638 at a cross-head separation
for verifying that dimensions measured on unconditioned rate of 2 in. per minute [50.8 mm per minute].
production pipe at temperatures other than 73.4 6 3.6°F [23 6 7.4.2 Bendback Test Method:
2°C] will conform to 5.2 when pipe is conditioned per 7.2. 7.4.2.1 From the pipe sample, squarely cut a pipe ring
7.1.2 For referee tests and in case of disagreement, samples specimen with a minimum width of 11⁄4 in. [32 mm]. For wall
for non-destructive tests shall be taken and conditioned per 7.2 thickness 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm] or less test the entire wall thickness.
before testing. For wall thickness above 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm], remove material
7.2 Conditioning—For tests where conditioning is required, from the outside diameter surface of the ring specimen while
for referee tests and in case of disagreement, condition samples maintaining an undisturbed inside diameter surface, to produce
and specimens prior to testing at 73.4 6 3.6°F [23 6 2°C] a ring specimen with consistent wall thickness of 3⁄8 in. [9.5
385
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 4 Wall ThicknessA for >12-in. Nominal Pipe Size

in. mm
14 32.5 0.431 10.95
26.0 0.538 13.67
21.0 0.667 16.94
17.0 0.824 20.93
13.5 1.037 26.34
11.0 1.273 32.33
9.0 1.556 39.52
7.3 1.918 48.72
7.0 2.000 50.80
16 32.5 0.492 12.50
26.0 0.615 15.62
21.0 0.762 19.35
17.0 0.941 23.90
13.5 1.185 30.10
11.0 1.455 36.96
9.0 1.778 45.16
7.3 2.192 55.68
7.0 2.286 58.06
18 32.5 0.554 14.07
26.0 0.692 17.58
21.0 0.857 21.77
17.0 1.059 26.90
13.5 1.333 33.86
11.0 1.636 41.55
9.0 2.000 50.80
7.3 2.466 62.64
7.0 2.571 65.30
20 32.5 0.615 15.62
26.0 0.769 20.22
21.0 0.952 24.18
17.0 1.176 29.87
13.5 1.481 37.62
11.0 1.818 46.18
9.0 2.222 56.44
7.3 2.740 69.60
7.0 2.857 72.57
22 32.5 0.677 17.20
26.0 0.846 21.49
21.0 1.048 26.62
17.0 1.294 32.87
13.5 1.630 41.40
11.0 2.000 50.80
9.0 2.444 62.08
7.3 3.014 76.56
7.0 3.143 79.83
24 32.5 0.738 18.75
26.0 0.923 23.44
21.0 1.143 29.03
17.0 1.412 35.86
13.5 1.778 45.16
11.0 2.182 55.42
9.0 2.667 67.74
7.3 3.288 83.52
7.0 3.429 87.10
26 32.5 0.800 20.32
26.0 1.000 25.40
21.0 1.238 31.45
17.0 1.529 38.84
13.5 1.926 48.92
11.0 2.364 60.05
9.0 2.889 73.38
28 32.5 0.862 21.89
26.0 1.077 27.36
21.0 1.333 33.86
17.0 1.647 41.83
13.5 2.074 52.68
11.0 2.545 62.23
9.0 3.111 79.02
30 32.5 0.923 23.44

26.0 1.154 29.31
21.0 1.429 36.30
17.0 1.765 44.83
13.5 2.222 56.44
386
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
TABLE 4 Continued
in. mm
11.0 2.727 69.27
9.0 3.333 84.66
32 32.5 0.985 25.02
26.0 1.231 31.27
21.0 1.524 38.71
17.0 1.882 47.80
13.5 2.370 60.20
11.0 2.909 73.89
34 32.5 1.046 26.57
26.0 1.308 33.22
21.0 1.619 41.12
17.0 2.000 50.80
13.5 2.519 63.98
11.0 3.091 78.51
36 32.5 1.108 28.14
26.0 1.385 35.18
21.0 1.714 43.54
17.0 2.118 53.80
13.5 2.667 67.74
11.0 3.273 83.13
42 32.5 1.292 32.82
26.0 1.615 41.02
21.0 2.000 50.80
17.0 2.471 62.76
13.5 3.111 79.02
48 32.5 1.477 37.52
26.0 1.846 46.89
21.0 2.286 58.06
17.0 2.824 71.73
54 32.5 1.662 42.21
26.0 2.077 52.76
21.0 2.571 65.30
17.0 3.176 80.67
63 32.5 1.938 49.22
26.0 2.423 61.55
21.0 3.000 76.20
65 32.5 2.000 50.80
26.0 2.500 63.50
21.0 3.095 78.61
A
Minimum wall thickness = average outside diameter (from Table 2) divided by DR (from Table 3), and rounded to 3 decimal places for inch dimensions, or to 2 decimal
places for mm dimensions. See 5.2.7 for wall thickness eccentricity.
TABLE 5 Elevated Temperature, 176°F [80°C], Sustained Pressure Requirements

PE3608 PE4710
Test Temperature, Test Pressure Minimum Average Test Pressure Minimum Average
Condition
°F [°C]A Hoop Stress,B Time Before Failure, Hoop Stress,B Time Before Failure,
psi [kPa]A hours psi [kPa]A hours
1 176 [80] 670 [4600] 170 750 [5170] 200
2 176 [80] 650 [4480] 340 730 [5020] 400
3 176 [80] 630 [4345] 510 705 [4870] 600
4 176 [80] 610 [4210] 680 685 [4715] 800
5 176 [80] 590 [4070] 850 660 [4565] 1000
6 176 [80] 580 [4000] 1000 640 [4415] 1200
A
Tolerance on test temperature = ±3.6°F [±2°C]. Tolerance on test pressure hoop stress = ±5 psi [±35 kPa].
B
2S
P5
S DO
t
21 D
where P = test pressure, psig [kPa]; S = test pressure hoop stress, psi [kPa]; DO = measured outside diameter, in. [mm];
and t = measured minimum wall thickness, in. [mm].
NOTE—Table 5 conditions are based on PE validation requirements per PPI TR-3 with Condition 6 being 85% of Condition 1 test pressure hoop stress and six times
greater minimum average time before failure. Conditions 2 through 5 are linear stress and time interpolations between Conditions 1 and 6. The intent of multiple conditions
is to maintain equivalent performance criteria, but provide for retest in the event of ductile failure. The test pressure hoop stress levels for Conditions 2-5 are linear
interpolations for arbitrarily chosen time increments. An equivalent performance requirement, however, may be determined by arbitrarily choosing a test pressure hoop
stress between Conditions 1 and 6 and linearly interpolating the minimum average time before failure. For example for PE3710 and PE4710 material, at 670 psi test
pressure hoop stress, the minimum average time before failure would be 927 hours (200 + (750 – 670) × ((1200 – 200) / (750 – 640)) = 927).
387
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
mm]. Test the ring in its entirety, or cut the ring into 7.8 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Test—The
representative sectors to produce individual bend-back test “test sample” shall be three specimens of a generally represen-
specimens for at least each quadrant around the pipe. tative pipe or tubing size. Select one Table 5 Condition for the
7.4.2.2 In a well-lit area test per the following procedure material designation and test the three specimen test sample.
within 5 min: (1) Bend the specimen inside-out (reverse-bend Condition test specimens per 7.2. Specimen length between
so that the pipe ID surface is on the outside surface of the bent end closures for 6-in. nominal size pipe and smaller shall be
specimen). (2) Using an apparatus such as a vise or other five times the pipe diameter, but not less than 12-in. [304-mm].
suitable bending equipment, close the legs of the specimen Specimen length between end closures for larger than 6-in.
together. When the specimen legs are closed together, the top nominal size pipe shall be the lesser of three times the pipe
of the bend-back specimen shall protrude the lesser of 11⁄8 in. diameter or 30-in. [762-mm]. Test per Test Method D1598
[29 mm] or three wall thicknesses above the point of closure using water as the pressurizing medium for the minimum
(jaws). (3) With the unaided (naked) eye, visually examine the average hours before failure specified in Table 5.
protruding reverse-bent pipe ID surface for brittle cracking or
7.9 Apparent Tensile Strength at Yield Test—A sample of
crazing.
pipe shall provide five ring specimens that shall be tested in
7.5 Carbon Black Content—At least one specimen from a accordance with Test Method D2290. Ring specimens shall be
sample taken from the pipe wall shall be tested for percentage aligned so that the minimum wall is located at the disk split.
carbon black content in accordance with Test Method D1603 or
Test Method D4218. Color stripe material shall not be included 8. Marking
as part of the specimen.
8.1 Pipe—Markings shall be legible, visible, and perma-
7.6 Outside Surface Irregularity—Measure outside surface nent. To ensure permanence, marking shall be applied so that
irregularity per 7.6.1 or 7.6.2. removal requires physically removing part of the pipe wall.
7.6.1 Apply a rounding device to the pipe and tighten The marking shall not reduce the wall thickness to less than the
securely. At any gaps between the rounding device and the pipe minimum value for the pipe, shall not affect the long-term
circumference, fit a feeler gage or gage wire having the same strength of the pipe, and shall not provide leakage channels for
thickness as the outside surface irregularity tolerance specified joining devices that seal or join to the outside surface of the
in Table 2 into the gap. If the gage does not fit, the pipe is in pipe. The marking shall repeat at intervals not exceeding 2 ft
compliance. To ensure that the full circumference is checked, [0.6 m]. Marking in a color that contrasts with that of the pipe
rotate the rounding device approximately 90 degrees, tighten is preferred.
securely and repeat the measurement procedure.
8.2 The marking shall consist of the following:
7.6.2 Apply a rounding device to the pipe and tighten
8.2.1 The nominal pipe size followed by the sizing system
securely. Determine the average outside diameter of the pipe
used, such as IPS or MM or OD per 8.2.1.1.
within 2 in. [50.8 mm] to the edge of the rounding device using
a circumferential wrap tape (pi-tape). Measure the pipe outside 8.2.1.1 Special size pipe shall be marked with the special
diameter at any gaps between the rounding device and the pipe size outside diameter value followed by the units and OD, for
outside diameter with calipers. The caliper diameter measure- example, “XX IN OD” or “YY MM OD” where XX and YY
ment shall not differ from the average outside diameter are numbers.
measurement by more than the outside surface irregularity 8.2.2 The DR or the minimum wall thickness value fol-
tolerance specified in Table 2. lowed by the wall thickness value units, for example, “XX
DR”, or “Y>YYY IN”, or “ZZ.Z MM”.
7.7 Ovality—Determine ovality in accordance with Test
Method D2122. Measure the average outside diameter with a 8.2.3 The manufacturer’s name or trademark.
circumferential wrap tape (pi-tape). Except as provided in 8.2.4 The material designation per Table 1.
7.7.1, determine the maximum and minimum diameter at the NOTE 5—Changes to Specification D3350 and PPI TR-3 in 2005 and
same location where the average diameter was measured with 2006 resulted in the material designation PE3408 being superseded by
calipers or a tape measure accurate to 1⁄32 in. [0.80 mm] for material designations PE3608 and PE4710. Recognizing that a period of
16-in. and smaller pipes or to 1⁄16 in. [1.59 mm] for larger pipes. time is necessary for the dissemination of information and to update
specifications and literature, during a transitional period, product markings
When minimum (or maximum) diameter is determined, rotate that include both older and newer materials designations, for example
calipers or tape measure approximately 90 degrees around the PE3408/PE3608, may occur.
pipe circumference to determine the corresponding maximum
8.2.5 ASME SF-2619/SF-2619M or both ASME SF-2619/
(or minimum) diameter. Calculate ovality by subtracting the
SF-2619M and ASTM F2619/F2619M.
minimum diameter from the maximum diameter, dividing the
difference by the measured average outside diameter, and 8.2.6 A manufacturing lot code.
multiplying by one hundred. 8.2.6.1 The manufacturing lot code is determined by the
7.7.1 When maximum and minimum diameter are measured manufacturer to provide information relating to pipe manufac-
at the end of the pipe, the average outside diameter shall be ture including production location, resin and other information
measured 11.8 in. [300 mm] or one pipe diameter, whichever is
less, from the end of the pipe so that the average outside
diameter measurement is not affected by toe-in.
388
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
such as production line and shift. Upon request, the manufac- requirements of this specification, retesting products repre-
turer shall provide information for deciphering the manufac- sented by the test(s) by agreement between the manufacturer
turing lot code. and the purchaser is permissible. However, there shall be no
8.2.7 The date of manufacture. agreement to alter minimum requirements such as by omitting
8.2.8 Additional optional markings such as coil number, tests that are a part of the specification, substituting or
footage, third-party certification marks, etc., shall follow the modifying a test method, or changing specification limits. In
date of manufacture. retesting, the requirements of this specification shall be met
and the test methods designated in this specification shall be
8.3 Markings referring to pipe pressure rating such as
followed. If failure occurs upon retest, the quantity of product
pressure rating, PR, working pressure, WP, working pressure
represented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of
rating, WPR, pressure class, PC, or nominal pressure, PN or
this specification.
NP, are prohibited.
8.4 Using Color—It is not mandatory to use color but when
color is used, such as with stripes, the colors red, orange, blue,
this specification and has been found to meet the re-
green, and purple (lavender) shall not be used.
quirements of this specification.
8.5 Markings that identify potable water use are prohibited.
10. Certification
8.6 Fittings—Fittings shall be marked with the fitting speci-
fication designation: ASTM D2683, ASTM D3261, ASTM 10.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
F1055, ASTM F1973, or ASTM F2206, per 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3,
6.1.4 or 6.1.5 and shall be marked with the material designation 11. Keywords
per Table 1. 11.1 gas; gas gathering; LVP; multiphase; oil; oilfield; PE
fittings; PE line pipe; PE pipe; plastic pipe; polyethylene
fittings; polyethylene line pipe; polyethylene pipe; water
9.1 Retest and Rejection—Unless specified otherwise in this
specification, if the results of any test(s) do not meet the
Federal Government Civil/Military Procurement
These requirements apply only to federal government civil/military procurement, not domestic sales
or transfers.
S1. Responsibility for Inspection S2. Packaging and Marking for U.S. Government Procure-
ment
S1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the producer is responsible for performance of all S2.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified in the contract,
inspection and test requirements specified herein. The producer the materials shall be packaged in accordance with the suppli-
shall use its own or any other suitable facilities for the er’s standard practices in a manner ensuring arrival at destina-
performance of the inspection and test requirements specified tion in satisfactory condition and which will be acceptable to
herein, unless the purchaser disapproves. The purchaser shall the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall comply
with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National Motor
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
Freight Classification rules.
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed
S2.2 Marking— Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed
dance with FED-STD 123G for civil agencies and Military
requirements. Standard 129P for military agencies.
NOTE S1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for NOTE S2—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
389
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
390
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
APPENDIXES
X1. EXAMPLE QUALITY PROGRAM
X1.1 Pipe produced in accordance with this specification is X1.4 The manufacturer maintains records of tests conducted
manufactured using a quality program. The quality program in in accordance with specification requirements for five years or
this appendix is an example only. Manufacturer’s quality for a period acceptable between the manufacturer and the
programs may be different from this example quality program. purchaser.
X1.2 Where quality program information is confidential or X1.5 Quality Control Samples—To determine compliance
proprietary, it is acceptable for the manufacturer to require with specification requirements, the sample and number of
measures to protect confidential and proprietary information specimens required per the test method are tested. For quality
against public disclosure. control purposes, not for determining compliance with
requirements, a one specimen sample is acceptable.
X1.3 The results of tests conducted in accordance with
specification requirements are made available to the purchaser X1.6 Testing Frequency—Materials and pipe are tested at
upon request. frequencies such as those in Table X1.1.
TABLE X1.1 Example Quality Program Tests and Testing Frequencies

Test Description Testing Frequency
Materials
Virgin material cleanliness Each material lot before use
Virgin material density per Test Method D1238 Each material lot before use
Virgin material melt flow rate per Test Method D792 Each material lot before use
or Test Method D1505
Rework material cleanliness Before use
Pipe
Workmanship Hourly or once per length, whichever is less frequent
End cut Each length
Interior cleanliness Each length
Diameter Hourly or once per length, whichever is less frequent
Toe-in Once per production run
Outside surface irregularity At the beginning of the production run and daily during the produc-
tion run
Percent ovality At the beginning of the production run and daily during the produc-
tion run
Wall thickness Hourly or once per length, whichever is less frequent
Inside surface ductility At the beginning of the production run and weekly during the pro-
duction run
Elevated temperature sustained pressure Every six months for pipe made from each material compound
Short-term pressurization At the beginning of the production run; applies to 12-in. and smaller
sizes;
for 3-in. and larger, apparent tensile strength at yield is an alter-
nate test
Apparent tensile strength at yield At the beginning of the production run; applies to 3-in. and larger
sizes;
for 12-in. and smaller, short-term pressurization is an alternate test
Carbon black content Daily during the production run
391
SF-2619/SF-2619M ASME NM.3.1-2018
X2. PRESSURE RATING DESIGN
X2.1 Pipe Pressure Design: TABLE X2.2 Temperature Design Factor (FT) for Use With X2.1.1A
Design Service Temperature FT
X2.1.1 For the purposes of this specification, the design °F °C PE3608 PE4710
pressure for pipe of a given material, diameter, minimum wall #50-60 #10-16 1.16 1.12
thickness, service fluid application and service temperature is >60-70 >16-21 1.08 1.05
determined by: >70-80 >21-27 1.00 1.00
>80-90 >27-32 0.90 0.93
2S 2S >90-100 >32-38 0.82 0.87
P5 3 FS 3 FT 5 3 FS 3 FT (X2.1)
S DO
t
21 D ~ DR 2 1 ! >100-110
>110-120
>120-130
>38-43
>43-49
>49-54
0.75
0.68
0.61
0.65
0.61
0.56
>130-140 >54-60 0.54 0.52
where: A
Table X2.2 factors were derived for the midrange temperature using the LTHS
P = design pressure, psi [MPa], extrapolation formula in PPI TR-3. The temperature design factors in Table X2.2
S = hydrostatic design stress (HDS) at 73°F [23°C], psi are dependent on the PE compound and may or may not apply to PE3608
compounds having HDB’s of 1600 psi [11.0 MPa] at 73°F [23°C] and 800 psi [5.5
[MPa] (Table 1), MPa] at 140°F [60°C], and may or may not apply to PE4710 compounds having
FS = service fluid design factor (Table X2.1 ), HDB’s of 1600 psi [11.0 MPa] at 73°F [23°C] and 1000 psi [6.9 MPa] at 140°F
FT = temperature design factor (Table X2.2), [60°C]. PE materials that have different HDB’s at 73°F [23°C] and at 140°F [60°C]
DO = pipe outside diameter, in. [mm] (Table 2 or 5.2.8), will have different temperature design factors. Before using Table X2.2 factors,
consult with the manufacturer to confirm HDB ratings at 73°F [23°C] and 140°F
t = minimum wall thickness, in. [mm] (Table 3 or Table 4 [60°C] and to determine if the temperature design factors in Table X2.2 are suitable
or 5.2.8), and for use with the manufacturer’s PE compound. See also Note X2.1.
DR = dimension ratio (Table 3 or Table 4 or 5.2.8).
DO
DR 5
t
NOTE X2.1—Formulas for design pressure are published in various
industry documents; however, term nomenclature and definition may vary X2.1.2 Industry experience indicates that polyethylene pip-
depending on the specific formula. The nomenclature FS and FT have been ing that is handled with reasonable care, installed in accor-
chosen for use in this appendix, but these terms are not necessarily the dance with applicable standards, and operated under normal
same as similar terms in other published design pressure formulas. In
particular, similar factors that are applied in design pressure formulas that
service conditions gives satisfactory long-term service at the
use HDB for the design stress term rather than HDS as used in this design pressures determined in accordance with X2.1.1. Other
appendix may have similar meanings but different values. When compar- design pressures may be recommended by the pipe or fitting
ing design pressure obtained using the various published equations for manufacturer or may be determined by the system designer for
pressure rating, the user should also compare the definitions for the terms special or unusual application conditions such as those de-
used in the specific equation. Using factor values for one version of a
design pressure equation in a different version of a design pressure
scribed in X2.1.3.
equation can lead to erroneous results. X2.1.3 Design pressures for a particular application will
NOTE X2.2—Gas gathering lines in the United States may be subject to
regulation in accordance with CFR 49 Part 192 when installed in Class 2, vary from standard ratings depending on actual application
3 or 4 locations as defined in CFR 49 Part 192. Regulated gas gathering conditions. Smaller overall design factors should be applied to
lines are pressure rated (and pressure limited if applicable) in accordance systems operating under special or unusual conditions or where
with CFR 49 Part 192 and Federal Register Vol. 71, No. 50, March 15, the pipe transports fluids or is installed in an environment that
2006. For dry gas gathering in Class 2, 3 or 4 locations in the United States is known to have some degrading effect on the properties of
that are subject to U.S. Department of Transportation regulations per CFR
49 Part 192, contact the manufacturer for assistance in determining design polyethylene, or when specified in Codes or Regulations or by
pressure. the authority having jurisdiction. See Note X2.2. When used at
temperatures above 80°F [27°C], elevated temperature stress
ratings for the material are used to determine design pressure.
TABLE X2.1 Service Fluid Design Factor (FS) for Use With X2.1.1 The actual choice of design factors (and design pressure) for a
particular application rests with the system designer, taking
Service FS
into account applicable Codes and Regulations, transportation
Dry gas gatheringA 1.00
Wet gas gathering 0.50 and on-site handling conditions, the quality of installation, the
Multiphase fluid 0.50 fluid being transported, the external environment, and the
Liquid hydrocarbons 0.50 possibility of deviation from design operating conditions of
Oilfield water 1.00B
A
internal pressure and external load. A further uncertainty factor
Dry gas gathering involves a service fluid that, given the design and operating
conditions of the pipeline, contains no associated hydrocarbon liquids and is above
should be applied at the designing engineer’s discretion where
the hydrocarbon dew point. The service fluid, in this case, may contain measurable warranted by consideration of these or other conditions for the
quantities of water. See Note X2.2. particular application. Users should consult the pipe manufac-
B
Where oilfield water contains significant quantities of liquid hydrocarbons
($2 %), 0.50 is used. turer to confirm Table X2.1 service factors and Table X2.2
temperature factors and for elevated temperature and other
392
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2619/SF-2619M
information relating to pipe performance in various applica- X2.2.1 The design pressure of fittings is determined by the
tions and application conditions. Information is also available fitting manufacturer, and should not be less than the design
from the Plastics Pipe Institute, PPI. pressure of the pipeline system in which they are used.
X2.2 Fitting Pressure Design:
393
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2623
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE OF RAISED

TEMPERATURE (PE-RT) SDR 9 TUBING
SF-2623
quirements in para. 9.1.6, changes from "ANSI" to "ASME" in paras. 2.2 and 3.1, quality assurance requirement in para.
10.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of section 12.)
395
SF-2623 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) SDR 9 Tubing

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for polyeth- tics
ylene of raised temperature (PE-RT) SDR 9 tubing that is D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
outside diameter controlled, and pressure rated for water at moplastic Pipe and Fittings
73°F (23°C), 140°F (60°C) and 180°F (82.2°C). Included are D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
requirements for material, workmanship, dimensions and tol- for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
erances, product tests, and markings for PE-RT tubing. for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
1.2 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, tings Materials
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These D3895 Test Method for Oxidative-Induction Time of Poly-
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall olefins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry
not be considered as requirements of the specification. F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 2.2 ASME Standard:
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
information only. 2.3 Federal Standard:
1.4 The tubing produced under this specification shall be FED-STD-123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
permitted for use in general fluid transport, including hydronics 2.4 Military Standard:
and irrigations systems. MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the 2.5 PPI Standard:
test methods portion, Section 7, of this specification. This PPI TR-4 PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB),
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user (PDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- 3. Terminology
tions prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600, unless otherwise specified. The abbreviation for
2.1 ASTM Standards:
polyethylene of raised temperature is PE-RT. Plastic tubing
denotes a particular diameter schedule of plastic pipe in which
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
outside diameter of the tubing is equal to the nominal size plus
Under Constant Internal Pressure 1⁄8 in. Plastic pipe outside diameter schedule conforms to ASME
B36.10M.
3.2.1 hydrostatic design stress (HDS)—the estimated maxi-
mum tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding
continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the
396
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2623
tube will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal have Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) long-term hydrostatic design
hydrostatic water pressure is applied. stress and pressure ratings at 73°F and 180°F. The ratings at
3.2.2 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum water 140°F are an optional standard.
pressure the tube is capable of withstanding continuously with 5.2 Barrier Layers—PE-RT tubing may incorporate an op-
a high degree of certainty that failure of the tube will not occur. tional interior wall, mid wall or outer wall layer or a combi-
3.2.3 relation between dimensions, hydrostatic design nation of such layers of non-PE-RT material for the express
stress, and pressure rating—the following expression, com- purpose of providing gas barrier properties to the pipe. The
monly known as the ISO equation, is used in this specification tubing shall meet the minimum wall thickness requirements of
to relate dimensions, hydrostatic design stress, and pressure this standard without using the barrier layer thickness in the
rating: determinations. PE-RT tubing with a barrier layer within the
wall of the tubing (neither exterior layer nor interior layer)
2S/P5 ~ D O /t ! 21 (1)
shall demonstrate a hydrostatic design stress (HDS) rating
or equivalent to that of PE-RT tubing without a barrier layer. This
determination shall be made in accordance with policies no less
2S/P5R21 restrictive than those of the PPI HSB and meet the require-
where: ments of this standard.
S = hydrostatic design stress, psi (or MPa), 5.3 Rework Material—Clean rework material of the same
P = pressure rating, psi (or MPa), commercial designation, generated from the manufacturer’s
DO = average outside diameter, in. (or mm), own tubing production shall not be used unless the tubing
T = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm), and produced meet all the requirements of this specification.
R = standard dimension ratio, SDR. 5.4 Classification—Polyethylene materials suitable for use
3.2.4 standard dimension ratio (SDR)—the ratio of outside in the manufacture of tubing under this specification shall be
diameter to wall thickness. For PE-RT-tubing, it is calculated classified in accordance with Specification D3350 and as
by dividing the average outside diameter of the tubing in inches shown in Table 1. The material shall have minimum HDS and
or in millimeters by the minimum wall thickness in inches or pressure ratings as per Table 2. The ratings at 140°F are
millimeters. If the wall thickness calculated by this formula is optional.
less than 0.070 in. (1.78 mm) it shall be arbitrarily increased to 5.5 Tubing Material Designation—The tubing meeting the
0.070 in. except for sizes 1⁄8 in. and smaller. The SDR values requirements of this specification shall be designated PE-RT.
shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5.
3.2.5 standard thermoplastic material designated code—the 6. Requirements
pipe material designation code shall consist of the abbreviation 6.1 Workmanship—The tubing shall be homogeneous
for the type of plastic (PE) followed by Arabic numerals which throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions,
describe the short term properties in accordance with Specifi- or other defects. The tubing shall be as uniform as commer-
cation D3350, the hydrostatic design stress for water at 73.4°F cially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physical
(23°C) in units of 100 psi with any decimal figures dropped. properties.
Where the hydrostatic design stress code contains less than two
figures, a zero is used before the number.
6.2.1 Outside Diameters of Tubing—The outside diameters
4. Tubing Classification and tolerances shall be as shown in Table 3, when measured in
accordance with 7.4 and 7.4.1.
4.1 General—This specification covers one PE-RT tubing 6.2.2 Wall Thickness of Tubing—The wall thickness and
material in one standard dimension ratio, 9.0, and having tolerances shall be as shown in Table 4, when measured in
pressure ratings for water at 73°F and 180°F and optionally at accordance with 7.4 and 7.4.2.
140°F. The pressure ratings decrease as the temperature is
increased. 6.3 Sustained Pressure—The tubing shall not fail, balloon,
burst, or weep as defined in Test Method D1598, at the test
4.2 Standard Thermoplastic Pipe Dimension Ratio (SDR) pressures given in Table 5 when tested in accordance with 7.5.
—This specification covers PE-RT tubing in one standard
dimension ratio (SDR 9) and nominal tubing sizes (NTS) from 6.4 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressure for
1⁄8 in. through 6 in. with a maximum continuous use tempera- PE-RT plastic tubing shall be as given in Table 6, when
ture that shall be 180°F (82.2°C). The pressure ratings are determined in accordance with 7.6.
uniform for all nominal tubing sizes.
TABLE 1 Required D3350 Cell Classifications for PE-RT
5. Materials Physical Properties:
Density 2, 3, or 4
5.1 General—The plastic used to make tubing shall be Melt index 2, 3, 4, or 5
virgin plastic or reworked plastic, as specified in 5.3, and shall Flexural modulus 3 or 4
Tensile strength 2 or 3
Slow crack growth resistance 7
Hydrostatic design basis 3 or 4
397
SF-2623 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 Minimum Hydrostatic Design Basis and Pressure 7.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter of
Ratings for PE-RT SDR 9 Tubing for Water at the tubing in accordance with Test Method D2122. The referee
Different Temperatures
method of measurement is to be by circumferential wrap tape.
Rated Hydrostatic Pressure Rating
Temperature Design Basis for Water
The tolerance for out-of-roundness shall apply only to tubing
°F °C psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
prior to shipment. Averaging micrometer or vernier caliper
73.4 23 1250 (8.62) 160 (1.10)
measurements, four (4) maximum and minimum diameter
140 60 800 (5.52) 100 (0.69) measurements at any cross section, may be used for quality
180 82.2 630 (4.34) 80 (0.55) control checks if desired.
7.4.2 Wall Thickness—Make micrometer measurements of
the wall thickness in accordance with Test Method D2122 to
determine the maximum and minimum values. Measure the
6.5 Oxidative Resistance—PE-RT tubing shall have a mini- wall thickness at both ends of the tubing to the nearest 0.001 in.
mum extrapolated time-to-failure of 50 years when tested and (0.025 mm).
evaluated in accordance with 7.7. 7.5 Sustained Pressure Test—Select the test specimens at
6.6 Bent Tube—PE-RT tubing, up to and including 1 in. random. Test six specimens as per Test Method D1598 in water
nominal diameter, can be installed bent by the technique at 73°F (23°C) and 180°F (82.2°C) as shown in Table 5. If the
described in Appendix X3 provided the following requirements optional 140°F rating is desired, perform an additional test at
are met. Bent tubing, with a radius of 6 times the outside 140°F (60°C) in accordance with Table 5. Each specimen of
diameter and consisting of a continuous bend length inducing tubing shall be at least five times the nominal diameter in
not less than 90° angle, shall meet the 180°F (82.2°C) length and not less than 12 in. (25 cm) or more than 3.0 ft (91
minimum hydrostatic sustained pressure strength requirements cm) between end closures. Maintain the specimens at the
shown in Table 5 when tested in accordance with 7.8. The bend pressures indicated for the appropriate temperatures for a
length and bend angle is kept throughout the testing period by period of 1000 h. Failure of two of the six specimens tested at
rigid secures immediately outside the bend. The minimum test either temperature constitutes failure in the test. Failure of one
duration shall be 1000 h without failure. of six specimens tested at either temperature is cause for retest
NOTE 1—PE-RT tubing, larger than 1 in. nominal diameter, is typically of six additional specimens at that temperature. Failure of one
installed as main distribution lines and is installed in straight runs. Fittings of six specimens tested at either temperature in retest consti-
are used when a change in direction of 90° or greater and a bend radius of tutes failure in the test. Failure of the tubing shall be defined in
less than 6 times the outside diameter is needed. The test procedures in 6.6
are intended to evaluate PE-RT tubing installed in tight bend applications accordance with Test Method D1598.
in accordance with the procedure in Appendix X3. This application
7.6 Burst Pressure—Determine the sample complies with
applies to tubing up to and including 1 in. nominal diameter only.
the minimum burst pressure requirements by testing at least
7. Test Methods five specimens in accordance with Test Method D1599 Method
B. The pressure values are given in Table 6.
7.1 Conditioning—Condition the specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F
(23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less than 40 7.7 Oxidative Resistance—The test shall be conducted and
h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of Practice the extrapolated time-to-failure shall be determined in accor-
D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. In cases dance with Test Method F2023. The test fluid shall be prepared
of disagreement, the tolerances shall be 61.8°F (61°C) and in accordance with 9.1.1 of Test Method F2023. The extrapo-
62 % relative humidity. lated time-to-failure shall be calculated in accordance with
13.3 of Test Method F2023.
7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard labo-
ratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % 7.7.1 Significance—The test need only be performed once
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth- and only once for the original validation of a compound tested
ods or in this specification. In cases of disagreement, the in the form of a tube. A compound is defined as the PE-RT resin
tolerances shall be 61.8°F (61°C) and 62 % relative humid- and the stabilization system. It shall not be required to perform
ity. plant or extrusion line verification testing.
7.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of tubing, as agreed 7.8 Bent Tube Test—Determine in accordance with Test
upon by the purchaser and the seller, shall be selected and Method D1598, except for the following: Test at least six
tested to determine conformance with this specification. In the specimens, from randomly selected specimens assembled per
case of no prior agreement, random samples selected by the the manufacturer’s instructions with at least 5-pipe diameters
testing laboratory shall be deemed adequate. between joints. Test temperature shall be 180°F (82 °C).
7.3.1 Test Specimens—Unless otherwise specified in this
standard or as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller, the 8. Retest and Rejection
quantity and size of the specimens to be tested shall be as 8.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements
specified by the test method referred to in this standard. of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
7.4 Dimensions and Tolerances—Use any length of tubing by agreement between the purchaser and seller. Under such
to determine the dimensions. Measure in accordance with Test agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered,
Method D2122. changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed.
398
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2623
TABLE 3 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PE-RT Tubing

Nominal Tubing Size Average Outside Diameter Tolerances for Average Diameter Out-of-RoundnessA
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
⁄
18 3 0.250 6.35 ±0.003 ±0.08 0.008 0.20
1⁄ 4 7 0.375 9.52 ±0.003 ±0.08 0.008 0.20
5⁄16 8 0.430 10.92 ±0.003 ±0.08 0.008 0.20
3⁄ 8 10 0.500 12.70 ±0.003 ±0.08 0.012 0.32
1⁄ 2 13 0.625 15.88 ±0.004 ±0.10 0.016 0.40
5⁄ 8 16 0.750 19.05 ±0.004 ±0.10 0.016 0.40
3⁄ 4 19 0.875 22.22 ±0.004 ±0.10 0.016 0.40
1 25 1.125 28.58 ±0.005 ±0.12 0.020 0.48
1 1⁄ 4 32 1.375 34.92 ±0.005 ±0.12 0.020 0.48
1 1⁄ 2 38 1.625 41.28 ±0.006 ±0.16 0.024 0.60
2 51 2.125 53.98 ±0.006 ±0.16 0.030 0.76
2 1⁄ 2 64 2.625 66.68 ±0.007 ±0.18 0.038 0.95
3 76 3.125 79.38 ±0.008 ±0.20 0.045 1.14
3 1⁄ 2 89 3.625 92.08 ±0.008 ±0.20 0.046 1.16
4 102 4.125 104.78 ±0.009 ±0.23 0.052 1.32
4 1⁄ 2 114 4.625 117.48 ±0.009 ±0.23 0.059 1.49
5 127 5.125 130.18 ±0.010 ±0.25 0.065 1.65
6 152 6.125 155.58 ±0.011 ±0.28 0.072 1.83
A
The Out-of-Roundness specification applies only to tubing prior to coiling.
TABLE 4 Wall Thickness and Tolerances for PE-RT TABLE 5 Sustained Water Pressure Test Condition for PE-RT
SDR 9 TubingA SDR 9 Tubing
Nominal Minimum Wall Nominal Pressure Required for Test,
Tolerance
Tubing Thickness Tubing Size psigA (MPa)
in. mm in. mm in. mm 140°F (60°C)
in. mm 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C)
⁄
18 3 0.047B 1.19B +0.007 +0.18 (optional) (optional)
1⁄ 4 7 0.062B 1.57B +0.010 +0.25 18 ⁄ 3 600 (4.14) 405 (2.79) 300 (2.07)
5⁄16 8 0.064 1.63 +0.010 +0.25 14 ⁄ 7 515 (3.55) 350 (2.41) 260 (1.79)
3⁄ 8 10 0.070B 1.78B +0.010 +0.25 ⁄
5 16 8 455 (3.14) 310 (2.14) 230 (1.59)
1⁄ 2 13 0.070B 1.78B +0.010 +0.25 ⁄38 10 425 (2.93) 285 (1.97) 215 (1.48)
5⁄ 8 16 0.083 2.12 +0.010 +0.25 ⁄12 13 330 (2.28) 220 (1.52) 165 (1.14)
3⁄ 4 19 0.097 2.47 +0.010 +0.25 58⁄ and 16 and 325 (2.24) 220 (1.52) 165 (1.14)
1 25 0.125 3.18 +0.013 +0.33 larger larger
1 1 ⁄4 32 0.153 3.88 +0.015 +0.38 A
1 1 ⁄2 38 0.181 4.59 +0.019 +0.48 The fiber stresses used to derive these test pressures are:
2 51 0.236 6.00 +0.024 +0.61 at 73.4°F (23.0°C) 1300 psi (8.96 MPa)
2 1 ⁄2 64 0.292 7.41 +0.030 +0.76 at 140°F (60.0°C) 880 psi (6.07 MPa)
3 76 0.347 8.82 +0.033 +0.84 at 180°F (82.2°C) 650 psi (4.48 MPa)
3 1 ⁄2 89 0.403 10.23 +0.035 +0.89
4 102 0.458 11.64 +0.040 +1.02
4 1 ⁄2 114 0.514 13.05 +0.045 +1.14 TABLE 6 Burst Pressure Requirements for Water at Different
5 127 0.569 14.46 +0.050 +1.27
Temperatures for PE-RT SDR 9 Tubing
6 152 0.681 17.29 +0.060 +1.52
A Nominal Minimum Burst Pressures at
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the tubing at any cross section.
Tubing Size Different Temperatures, psigA (MPa)
The maximum permitted wall thickness, at any cross section, is the minimum wall
thickness plus the stated tolerance. All tolerances are on the plus side of the 140°F (60°C)
in. mm 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C)
minimum requirement. (optional) (optional)
B
For tubing sizes of 1⁄2 in. and below, wall thickness minimums are not functions 18 ⁄ 3 880 (6.07) 575 (3.96) 335 (2.31)
of SDR. 14 ⁄ 7 755 (5.21) 490 (3.38) 285 (1.97)
⁄
5 16 8 665 (4.59) 435 (3.00) 250 (1.72)
⁄ 38 10 620 (4.27) 405 (2.79) 235 (1.62)
⁄ 12 13 480 (3.31) 315 (2.17) 180 (1.24)
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre- ⁄ and
58 16 and 475 (3.28) 310 (2.14) 180 (1.24)
larger larger
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this A
The fiber stresses used to derive these test pressures are:
specification. at 73.4°F (23.0°C) 1900 psi (13.10 MPa)
at 140°F (60.0°C) 1240 psi (8.55 MPa)
9. Marking at 180°F (82.2°C) 720 psi (4.96 MPa)
9.1 Marking on the tubing shall include the following,

spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft:
9.1.1 Nominal tubing size (for example, 2 in.). 9.1.5 Pressure rating for water at 73°F (23°C), 140°F (60°C)
9.1.2 The material designation, PE-RT. (optional) and 180°F (82.2°C) established by this specification.
9.1.3 The material designation code as determined per 3.2.5, 9.1.6 ASME SF-2623 or both ASME SF-2623 and ASTM
for example, PE 2706. F2623.
9.1.4 Standard dimension ratio, SDR 9.
399
SF-2623 ASME NM.3.1-2018
9.1.7 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and production 11. Certification

code. 11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1.
9.1.8 Indent marking shall not be permitted.
10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was manu- 12.1 hydronic heating; hydrostatic stress; irrigation; PE-RT;
factured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with this pipe; plastic pipe; polyethylene of raised temperature; PPI;
specification and has been found to meet the requirements of pressure; radiant heating; tubing
this specification.
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
requirements.
inspection.
ment
A1. CERTIFICATION
400
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2623
APPENDIXES
X1. SOURCE OF HYDROSTATIC DESIGN BASIS
X1.1 The hydrostatic design basis recommended by the X1.4 The hydrostatic design basis recommended by the
Plastics Pipe Institute and published in PPI TR4 is used to Plastics Pipe Institute are based on tests made on tubing
pressure rate PE-RT plastic tubing. These hydrostatic design ranging in size from 1⁄2 to 2 in.
basis are: 1250 psi (8.62 MPa) for water at 73.4°F (23°C), 800
psi (5.52 MPa) for water at 140°F (60°C), and 630 psi (4.34 X1.5 Stabilizer Verification —The oxidation induction time
MPa) for water at 180°F (82.2°C). These hydrostatic design (OIT) as described in Test Method D3895 may be used to
basis apply only to tubing meeting all the requirements of this monitor stabilizer content of a PE-RT material or freshly
specification. extruded tubing. Once the initial OIT value has been estab-
lished for a specific compound, subsequent OIT values can be
X1.2 Refer also to Test Method D2837. Additional informa- used to validate the stabilizer level in the tubing or compound
tion regarding the method of test and other criteria used in without the need to run additional temperature tests. It should
developing the hydrostatic design basis may be obtained from be mentioned that OIT tests are not an indicator of life
the Plastics Pipe Institute, 1825 Connecticut Ave., NW Suite expectancy, nor should differences in OIT values between
680, Washington, DC 20009. These hydrostatic design basis compounds be construed to indicate differences in the stabilizer
may not be suitable for materials that show a wide departure effectiveness of respective formulations.
from a straight-line plot of log stress versus log time to failure.
All the data available to date on PE-RT-tubing materials exhibit
a straight-line plot under these plotting conditions.
X1.3 The hydrostatic design basis and pressure ratings in

Table 2 apply to PE-RT SDR 9 plastic tubing meeting the
X2. UV LABELING GUIDELINES FOR PE-RT TUBING
X2.1 PE-RT tubing should be kept in original packaging X2.3 The recommended text may be incorporated into
until time of use, and it should not be used in direct sunlight. existing labels with other information. The universal “no-sun”
To inform customers and users about the need to prevent symbol may be shown in color, black-and-white or grayscale,
accidental overexposure of PE-RT tubing to sunlight (UV and should be positioned close to the recommended text.
light), it is recommended that a UV CAUTION label be applied
X2.4 Caution Label:
to all PE-RT tubing packaging by the manufacturer.
Do not store PE-RT tubing unprotected outdoors.
X2.2 The text and content of the recommended label is as Keep PE-RT tubing in the original packaging or under
shown X2.4. “X” is the maximum cumulative time period as protective cover until time of installation
recommended by the tubing manufacturer for direct sunlight Ensure that exposure to sunlight during installation does not
exposure without harm to the long-term performance charac- exceed the maximum recommended UV exposure time of “X”.
teristics of the PE-RT tubing.
401
SF-2623 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X3. BENDING GUIDELINES FOR PE-RT TUBING
X3.1 Cold Bending of Tubing —PE-RT SDR 9 tubing shall in. (see 3.1). Normal precaution is taken to avoid buckling or
be bent at room temperature without the use of bending tools flattening. Fix the tubing by supports on both sides of the bend
down to a minimum bending radius of 6 times outside at installation.
diameter. Outside diameter is equal to nominal diameter plus 1⁄8
X4. OPTIONAL IN-PLANT QUALITY-CONTROL PROGRAM FOR PE-RT TUBING
X4.1 Scope X4.3.2 Quality-Control Testing—Tubing quality control

X4.1.1 The following program provides a model for perfor- tests should be run for each extrusion line in accordance with
mance qualification and in-plant quality control for PE-RT the requirements of this specification at a frequency agreed
tubing to provide reasonable assurance that PE-RT hot-water upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The pro-
tubing supplied under this specification consistently meets its gram outlined in Table X4.1 is recommended. The test results
requirements. should be recorded and filed for inspection on request. Should
tubing fail to meet the requirement in any test, production
X4.2 Performance Qualifications should be sampled back to the previous acceptable test result
X4.2.1 Performance qualification tests to the requirements and tested to determine which tubing produced in the interim
of this standard should be run initially on each design and do not meet the requirement. Tubing that does not meet the
formulation in accordance with the requirements of this speci- requirements of this specification should be rejected.
fication. The test results should be independently certified and
should be made available to the purchaser on request.
TABLE X4.1 Suggested Quality-Control Program
X4.3 In-Plant Quality Control Property Frequency
Workmanship continuously
The tubing material should be PE-RT as Dimensions hourly
defined in the Materials section of this specification. The Burst Pressure daily
manufacturer, upon request, should so certify. Sustained Pressure 3 months
Bent Tube yearly
402
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE OF RAISED

TEMPERATURE (PE-RT) PLASTIC HOT AND
COLD-WATER TUBING AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
SF-2769
(Identical with ASTM F2769-10 except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revision to para. 5.6
title, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.4.7, revised "ANSI" to "ASME" in paras. 2.2, 2.8, and 3.1, quality as-
surance requirement in para 10.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of section 12.)
403
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Plastic Hot and
Cold-Water Tubing and Distribution Systems
1.1 This specification establishes requirements for polyeth- of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
ylene of raised temperature (PE-RT) plastic hot- and cold- practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
water tubing and distribution systems components made in one tions prior to use.
standard dimension ratio and intended for 100 psig (6.9 bar)
water service up to and including a maximum working
temperature of 180°F (82°C). Components are comprised of 2.1 ASTM Standards:
tubing, fittings, valves and manifolds. Tubing may incorporate D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
an optional polymeric inner, middle or outer layer. Testing of D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Specification F1807 and F2159 fittings and PE-RT tubing to Under Constant Internal Pressure
the requirements of this standard indicate that these fittings are D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
appropriate for use with PE-RT piping systems. Requirements Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
and test methods are included for materials, workmanship, D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
dimensions and tolerances, burst pressure, sustained pressure, tics
oxidative resistance, temperature cycling tests, bend strength D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)
and environmental stress cracking. Also included are tests D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
related to system malfunctions. The components covered by moplastic Pipe and Fittings
this specification are intended for use in residential and D2749 Symbols for Dimensions of Plastic Pipe Fittings
commercial, hot and cold, potable water distribution systems. D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
tings Materials
NOTE 1—Suggested hydrostatic design stresses and hydrostatic pressure
D3895 Test Method for Oxidative-Induction Time of Poly-
ratings for tubing and fittings are listed in Appendix X1. UV labeling olefins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry
guidelines are provided in Appendix X2. Design, assembly, and installa- F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
tion considerations are provided in Appendix X3. An optional perfor- F1282 Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/
mance qualification and an in-plant quality control program are recom- Polyethylene (PE-AL-PE) Composite Pressure Pipe
mended in Appendix X4.
1.3 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be Resistance to Slow Crack Growth of Polyethylene Pipes
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are and Resins
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for F1807 Specification for Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a
information only and are not considered standard. Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the (PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised Tem-
test methods portion, Section 7, of this specification.This perature (PE-RT) Tubing
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, F2023 Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance
404
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
of Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing and Systems 3.3 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
to Hot Chlorinated Water 3.3.1 hydrostatic design stress (HDS), n—the estimated
F2159 Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings Utilizing a maximum tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding
Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the
(PEX) Tubing and SDR9 Polyethylene of Raised Tem- tube will not occur. This stress is circumferential when internal
perature (PE-RT) Tubing hydrostatic water pressure is applied. For materials with
2.2 ANSI Standard: Hydrostatic Strength Classification 3 or 4 per Specification
Z 17.1 Preferred Numbers D3350, the HDS is equal to the hydrostatic design basis (HDB)
2.3 Federal Standard: times the design factor (DF) for water. For this standard, the
FED-STD-123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) design factor is equal to 0.5.
HDS5HDB 3 DF
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage 5HDB 3 0.5 ~ for this standard!
2.5 PPI Standards:
PPI TR-3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro- 3.3.2 relation between dimensions, hydrostatic design
static Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stresses stress, and pressure rating, n—the following expression, com-
(HDS), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design monly known as the ISO equation , is used in this specification
Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) to relate dimensions, hydrostatic design stress, and pressure
Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe rating:
PPI TR-4 PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), 2HDS/P5 ~ D o /t ! 21 (1)
Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis
(PDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings or
for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe 2HDS/P5R21
2.6 NSF Standards:
where:
NSF 14 Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components and
Related Materials HDS = hydrostatic design stress, psi (or MPa),
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Ef- P = pressure rating, psig (or MPa),
fects DO = average outside diameter, in. (or mm),
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm), and
2.7 ISO Standard: R = standard dimension ratio, SDR.
ISO 13760 : Plastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids under
pressure -- Miner’s rule -- Calculation method for cumu- 3.3.3 standard thermoplastic material designated code,
lative damage n—the pipe material designation code shall consist of the
2.8 ASME Standard: abbreviation for the type of plastic (PE) followed by Arabic
B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe numerals which describe the short term properties in accor-
dance with Specification D3350, the hydrostatic design stress
for water at 73°F (23°C) in units of 100 psi with any decimal
3. Terminology
figures dropped. Where the hydrostatic design stress code
3.1 Terminology used in this standard is in accordance with contains less than two figures, a zero is used before the number.
Terminologies F412, D1600, and D2749 unless otherwise 3.3.3.1 Discussion—Further information regarding testing
specified. The abbreviation for polyethylene of raised tempera- and approval can be obtained from the National Sanitation
ture is PE-RT. Plastic tubing denotes a particular diameter Foundation or other accredited laboratory.
schedule of plastic pipe in which outside diameter of the tubing
is equal to the nominal size plus 1⁄8 in. Plastic pipe outside 4. Classification
diameter schedule conforms to ASME B36.10M.
3.2 standard dimension ratio (SDR), n—a specific ratio of 4.1 Tubing—This specification covers one PE-RT tubing
the average specified outside diameter to the minimum speci- material in one standard dimension ratio, 9.0, and by a
fied wall thickness (D0/t) for outside diameter-controlled plas- maximum continuous use temperature that shall be 180°F
tic pipe, the value of which is derived by adding one to the (82°C), and by nominal tubing sizes from 1⁄8 through 6 in. 4.2
pertinent number selected from the ANSI Preferred Number 4.2 Fittings—This specification classifies fittings, including
Series 10. manifolds, intended for use in systems with PE-RT tubing, by
3.2.1 Discussion—For PE-RT-tubing, it is calculated by a maximum continuous use temperature that shall be 180°F
dividing the average outside diameter of the tubing in inches or (82°C) and by nominal sizes from 1⁄8 in. through 6 in. on the
in millimeters by the minimum wall thickness in inches or basis of resistance to burst pressure, hydrostatic sustained
millimeters. If the wall thickness calculated by this formula is pressure, excessive temperature and pressure, and thermocy-
less than 0.070 in. (1.78 mm) it shall be arbitrarily increased to cling.
0.070 in. except for sizes 5⁄16 in. and smaller. The SDR values
shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5
405
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
5. Materials TABLE 2 Pressure Ratings for PE-RT SDR 9 Tubing for Water
5.1 General—The polyethylene used to make tubing shall Rated Minimum Hydrostatic Minimum Pressure
Temperature Design Stress Rating for Water
be virgin plastic or reworked plastic, or both, as specified in °F (°C) psi (MPa) psi (bar)
5.4, that meets the requirements of this standard and shall have 73.4 (23) 640 (4.41) 160 (11.0)
a Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) rating at 73°F (23°C) and 180°F 180 (82.2) 400 (2.76) 100 (6.90)
(82°C). Fitting, manifold and valve materials shall meet the

applicable requirements as described in Specifications F1807
or F2159. Fittings shall be made from materials that are
generally regarded as corrosion resistant. purpose by a testing agency acceptable to the local health au-
5.2 Basic Tubing Materials—PE-RT tubing meeting the thority. The evaluation shall be in accordance with the require-
requirements of this specification are primarily defined by two ments for chemical extraction that are not less restrictive
criteria namely, basic short-term properties, 5.2.1, and long- than those included in NSF Standard 61. The seal or mark of
term hydrostatic properties, 5.2.2. the laboratory making the evaluation shall be included on
5.2.1 Basic Short-Term Properties—This specification cov- the tubing.
ers tubing materials meeting the following requirements: NOTE 2—Further information regarding testing and approval can be
5.2.1.1 Classification—Polyethylene materials suitable for obtained from an accredited certification provider.
use in the manufacture of tubing under this specification shall
be classified in accordance with Specification D3350 as shown 6. Requirements
in Table 1. 6.1 Workmanship—The tubing shall be homogeneous
5.2.2 Long-Term Hydrostatic Strength—This specification throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions,
covers PE-RT tubing which is further defined on the basis of or other defects. The tubing shall be as uniform as commer-
long-term hydrostatic strength tests (Appendix X1). The ma- cially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physical
terial shall have a minimum pressure rating as per Table 2. properties. For tubing that incorporates a barrier layer per 5.3
5.3 Barrier Layers—PE-RT tubing may incorporate an op- each layer shall meet the workmanship requirements per this
tional interior wall, mid wall or outer wall layer or a combi- section.
nation of such layers of non-PE-RT material for the express 6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances:
purpose of providing gas barrier properties to the pipe. The 6.2.1 Compliance with this specification requires that fit-
tubing shall meet the minimum wall thickness requirements of tings contained in Specifications F1807 and F2159 must meet
this standard without using the barrier layer thickness in the the Performance and Test Method requirements of this stan-
determinations. PE-RT tubing with a barrier layer within the dard.
wall of the tubing (neither exterior layer nor interior layer) 6.2.2 Outside Diameters of Tubing—The outside diameters
shall demonstrate a hydrostatic design stress (HDS) rating and tolerances of the tubing including the layers shall be as
equivalent to that of PE-RT tubing without a barrier layer. This shown in Table 3, when measured in accordance with 7.4 and
determination shall be made in accordance with policies no less 7.4.1.
restrictive than those of the PPI TR-3 and meet the require- 6.2.3 Wall Thickness of Tubing—The wall thickness and
ments of this standard. tolerances shall be as shown in Table 4, when measured in
5.4 Rework Material—Clean rework material of the same accordance with 7.4 and 7.4.2.
commercial designation, generated from the manufacturer’s 6.2.3.1 Layer—Tubing that incorporates an inner, middle or
own tubing production shall not be used unless the tubing outer layer shall meet the minimum wall thickness and
produced meet all the requirements of this specification. PE-RT tolerances requirements as specified in Table 4. In addition, the
tubing with a barrier layer shall not be used for rework layer shall not result in the reduction of the total PE-RT
material. material below that specified in Table 4. In the case of tubing
with a middle layer, the total base PE-RT material wall
5.5 Tubing Material Designation—The tubing meeting the
thickness shall be the sum of the inner and outer base PE-RT
requirements of this specification shall be designated PE-RT.
material wall thicknesses.
5.6 Additional Certification for Transport of Potable 6.2.4 Out-of-Roundness—The maximum out-of-roundness
Water —Tubing and fittings intended fo r use in the transport requirements shown in Table 3 for tubing, apply to the average
of potable water shall be evaluated and certified as safe for this measured diameter. Tubing shall be measured prior to coiling.
6.3 Sustained Pressure—The tubing and fittings, assembled
using the manufacturer’s instructions and tested as assemblies,
TABLE 1 Required D3350 Cell Classification for PE-RT
shall not fail, balloon, burst, or weep at the test pressures given
Physical Properties: Cell Classification
Density 3 or 4
inTable 5 when tested in accordance with 7.5.
Melt index 2, 3, 4, or 5 6.3.1 If present, valves shall be tested in the open or
Flexural modulus 3 or higher unrestricted position.
Tensile strength 2 or higher
Slow crack growth resistance 7 6.4 Burst Pressure—The tubing and fittings, assembled
Hydrostatic Strength Classification 3 or 4 using the manufacturer’s instructions and tested as assemblies,
406
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
TABLE 3 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PE-RT Tubing

Nominal Tubing Size Average Outside Diameter Tolerances for Average Diameter Out-of-RoundnessA
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
1⁄ 8 (3) 0.250 (6.35) ±0.003 (±0.08) 0.008 (0.20)
1⁄ 4 (7) 0.375 (9.52) ±0.003 (±0.08) 0.008 (0.20)
5⁄16 (8) 0.430 (10.92) ±0.003 (±0.08) 0.008 (0.20)
3⁄ 8 (10) 0.500 (12.70) ±0.003 (±0.08) 0.012 (0.32)
1⁄ 2 (13) 0.625 (15.88) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.016 (0.40)
5⁄ 8 (16) 0.750 (19.05) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.016 (0.40)
3⁄ 4 (19) 0.875 (22.22) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.016 (0.40)
1 (25) 1.125 (28.58) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.020 (0.48)
1 1⁄ 4 (32) 1.375 (34.92) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.020 (0.48)
1 1⁄ 2 (38) 1.625 (41.28) ±0.006 (±0.16) 0.024 (0.60)
2 (51) 2.125 (53.98) ±0.006 (±0.16) 0.030 (0.76)
2 1⁄ 2 (64) 2.625 (66.68) ±0.007 (±0.18) 0.038 (0.95)
3 (76) 3.125 (79.38) ±0.008 (±0.20) 0.045 (1.14)
3 1⁄ 2 (89) 3.625 (92.08) ±0.008 (±0.20) 0.046 (1.16)
4 (102) 4.125 (104.78) ±0.009 (±0.23) 0.052 (1.32)
4 1⁄ 2 (114) 4.625 (117.48) ±0.009 (±0.23) 0.059 (1.49)
5 (127) 5.125 (130.18) ±0.010 (±0.25) 0.065 (1.65)
6 (152) 6.125 (155.58) ±0.011 (±0.28) 0.072 (1.83)
A
The Out-of-Roundness specification applies only to tubing prior to coiling.
TABLE 4 Wall Thickness and Tolerances for PE-RT SDR 9 TubingA

Nominal Tubing Minimum Wall Thickness Tolerance
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
1⁄ 8 (3) 0.047B (1.19 )B +0.007 (+0.18)
1⁄ 4 (7) 0.062B (1.57 )B +0.010 (+0.25)
5⁄16 (8) 0.064 (1.63) +0.010 (+0.25)
3⁄ 8 (10) 0.070B (1.78 )B +0.010 (+0.25)
B
1⁄ 2 (13) 0.070 (1.78 )B +0.010 (+0.25)
5⁄ 8 (16) 0.083 (2.12) +0.010 (+0.25)
3⁄ 4 (19 0.097 (2.47) +0.010 (+0.25)
1 (25) 0.125 (3.18) +0.013 (+0.33)
1 1 ⁄4 (32) 0.153 (3.88) +0.015 (+0.38)
1 1 ⁄2 (38) 0.181 (4.59) +0.019 (+0.48)
2 (51) 0.236 (6.00) +0.024 (+0.61)
2 1 ⁄2 (64) 0.292 (7.41) +0.030 (+0.76)
3 (76) 0.347 (8.82) +0.033 (+0.84)
3 1 ⁄2 (89) 0.403 (10.23) +0.035 (+0.89)
4 (102) 0.458 (11.64) +0.040 (+1.02)
4 1 ⁄2 (114) 0.514 (13.05) +0.045 (+1.14)
5 (127) 0.569 (14.46) +0.050 (+1.27)
6 (152) 0.681 (17.29) +0.060 (+1.52)
A
The minimum is the lowest wall thickness of the tubing at any cross section. The maximum permitted wall thickness, at any cross section, is the minimum wall thickness
B
For tubing sizes of 1⁄2 in. and below, wall thickness minimums are not functions of SDR.
TABLE 5 Sustained Water Pressure Test Condition for PE-RT SDR 9 Tubing
Pressure Required for Test, psig AA (MPa)
Nominal Tubing Size
For 1250 psi HDB at 73.4°F For 1600 psi HDB at 73.4°F
in. (mm) 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C) 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C)
1⁄8 (3) 595 (4.10) 355 (2.45) 740 (5.10) 355 (2.45)
1⁄4 (7) 515 (3.55) 305 (2.10) 635 (4.38) 305 (2.10)
5⁄16 (8) 455 (3.14) 270 (1.86) 560 (3.86) 270 (1.86)
3⁄8 (10) 425 (2.93) 250 (1.72) 520 (3.59) 250 (1.72)
1⁄2 (13) 330 (2.28) 195 (1.34) 405 (2.79) 195 (1.34)
5⁄8 and larger (16 and larger) 325 (2.24) 190 (1.31) 400 (2.76) 190 (1.31)
A
at 73.4°F (23.0°C) 1300 psi (8.96 MPa) for a 1250 psi HDB material and 1600 psi (11.0 MPa) for a 1600 psi HDB material
at 180°F (82.2°C) 770 psi (5.31 MPa)
shall meet the minimum burst pressure given in Table 6, when 6.4.1 If the manifold has more than one connection size, the
determined in accordance with 7.6. Leakage or separation at test pressure selected from Table 5 shall be based on the largest
any of the fittings tested shall constitute failure of the fitting. nominal tubing connection.
407
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 6 Sustained Water Pressure Test Condition for PE-RT SDR 9 Tubing
Nominal Tubing Size Pressure Required for Test, psigA (MPa)
For 1250 psi HDB at 73.4°F For 1600 psi HDB at 73.4°F
in. (mm) 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C) 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82.2°C)
1⁄ 8 (3) 870 (6.00) 495 (3.41) 1345 (9.28) 495 (3.41)
1⁄ 4 (7) 752 (5.19) 420 (2.90) 1150 (7.93) 420 (2.90)
5⁄16 (8) 660 (4.55) 370 (2.55) 1015 (7.00) 370 (2.55)
3⁄ 8 (10) 620 (4.27) 345 (2.38) 945 (6.52) 345 (2.38)
1⁄ 2 (13) 480 (3.31) 270 (1.86) 730 (5.03) 270 (1.86)
5⁄8 and larger (16 and larger) 475 (3.27) 265 (1.83) 720 (4.97) 265 (1.83)
A
at 73.4°F (23.0°C) 1900 psi (13.10 MPa) for a 1250 psi HDB material and 2900 psi (20.0 MPa) for a 1600 psi HDB material
at 180°F (82.2°C) 1065 psi (7.33 MPa)
6.5 Thermocycling: 6.10 Adhesion Test—Tubing that incorporates an optional

6.5.1 Fittings, assembled using the manufacturer’s instruc- inner, middle or outer layer shall not show any delamination
tions, shall not leak after completion of 1000 cycles between when tested in accordance with Section 9.3.1 of Specification
the temperatures of 60°F(16°C) and 180°F (82°C) when tested F1282.
in accordance with 7.8.1.
6.11 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—The slow crack
6.6 Oxidative Resistance in Potable Chlorinated Water growth resistance of the tubing material shall not be less than
Applications—PE-RT tubing chlorine classification codes shall 500 h when tested in accordance with 7.12.
be determined based on a minimum extrapolated time-to-
failure of 50 years when tested and evaluated in accordance 7. Test Methods
with 7.8 and Table 7.
7.1 Conditioning—Condition the specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F
6.7 Bent Tube—The following requirement applies to tubing (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less than
up to 1 in. nominal diameter. Bent tubing, with a radius of 6 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of Practice
times the outside diameter and consisting of a continuous bend D618, for those tests where conditioning is required. In cases
length inducing not less than 90° angle, shall meet the 180°F of disagreement, the tolerances shall be 6 1.8°F (61°C) and
(82.2°C) minimum hydrostatic sustained pressure strength 62 % relative humidity.
requirements shown in Table 5 when tested in accordance with
7.9. The bend length and bend angle is kept throughout the 7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard labo-
testing period by rigid secures immediately outside the bend. ratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
The minimum test duration shall be 1000 h without failure. relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
ods or in this specification. In cases of disagreement, the
NOTE 3—PE-RT tubing, larger than 1 in. nominal diameter, is typically
installed as main distribution lines and is installed in straight runs. Fittings
tolerances shall be 61.8°F (61°C) and 62 % relative humid-
are used when a change in direction of 90° or greater and a bend radius of ity.
less than 6 times the outside diameter is needed. The test requirements in
6.8 are intended to evaluate PE-RT tubing installed in tight bend
7.3 Sampling—A sufficient quantity of tubing or fittings, as
applications in accordance with the procedure in Appendix X3. This agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller, shall be selected
application applies to tubing up to and including 1 in. nominal diameter and tested to determine conformance with this specification
only. (see Practice D1898). In the case of no prior agreement,
6.8 Excessive Temperature Hydrostatic Sustained— Tubing random samples selected by the testing laboratory shall be
and fittings, when tested as assemblies, shall not fail in less deemed adequate.
than 720 h when tested in accordance with 7.10. If present, 7.3.1 Test Specimens—Unless otherwise specified in this
valves shall be tested in the open or unrestricted position. standard or as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller, the
NOTE 4—Tests applicable to tubing and assemblies (6.4, 6.5, 6.8, 6.7,
quantity and size of the specimens to be tested shall be as
6.8, and 6.9) are intended to be performance qualification tests and not specified by the test method referred to in this standard. If
tests required of each fitting. present, valves shall be tested in the open or unrestricted
6.9 Environmental Stress Cracking—There shall be no loss position.
of pressure in the tubing, when tested in accordance with 7.11. 7.4 Dimensions and Tolerances—Use any length of tubing
to determine the dimensions. Measure in accordance with Test
Method D2122.
TABLE 7 Oxidative Resistance Classification Codes 7.4.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter of
Standard CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 the tubing in accordance with Test Method D2122. The referee
Usage 75% at Reserved 50% at 73°F Reserved 100% method of measurement is to be by circumferential wrap tape.
Ratios 73°F and for future and for future at The tolerance for out-of-roundness shall apply only to tubing
25% at use 50% at 140°F use 140°F
140°F prior to shipment. Averaging micrometer or vernier caliper
measurements, four (4) maximum and minimum diameter
408
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
measurements at any cross section, may be used for quality water shall be alternately cycled over the test specimens
control checks if desired. automatically and returned to the proper reservoirs.
7.4.2 Wall Thickness—Make micrometer measurements of NOTE 5—Automatic cycling may be accomplished by pumping from
the wall thickness in accordance with Test Method D2122 to each reservoir, through a delivery system having timer-actuated valves, to
determine the maximum and minimum values. Measure the a specimen water trough having synchronized, timer-actuated return
wall thickness at both ends of the tubing to the nearest 0.001 in. drains. Any automatic apparatus shall provide for complete immersion of
the test specimen in the trough.
(0.025 mm).
7.4.2.1 Layer—Make measurements of the layer or layers 7.7.3 Sampling and Specimen Preparation— Select at least
using either a video microscope, a microscope with 0.001 inch six joints from randomly selected specimens assembled per the
graduation or optical comparator to determine the maximum manufacturer’s instructions. Close the specimen assembly with
and minimum values. any suitable end closures that allow “free-end” mounting and
will not leak under the thermocycling conditions, and connect
7.5 Sustained Pressure Test——Select the test specimens at the specimen assembly to the pressure source.
random. Test at least six joints and at least six tubing specimens 7.7.3.1 If present, valves shall be tested in the open or
as per Test Method D1598 in water at 73°F (23°C) and 180°F unrestricted position.
(82.2°C) as shown in Table 5. Each specimen of tubing shall be 7.7.4 Procedure—Pressurize the specimen assembly with
at least five times the nominal diameter in length and not less nitrogen or air to 100 6 10 psig (0.69 6 0.069 MPa). Immerse
than 12 in. (25 cm) or more than 3.0 ft (91 cm) between end in 60 6 4°F (16 6 2°C) water to determine if there are any
closures. Maintain the specimens at the pressures indicated for initial leaks. All leaks shall be eliminated before the thermo-
the appropriate temperatures for a period of 1000 h. Failure of cycling test is started. Thermally cycle the specimen assembly
two of the six specimens tested at either temperature consti- either manually or automatically and under an internal pressure
tutes failure in the test. Failure of one of six tubing or fitting of 100 6 10 psig (0.696 0.069 MPa), alternately between 60
specimens tested at either temperature is cause for retest of six 6 4°F (16 6 2°C) and 180 6 4°F (82 6 2°C) by means of
additional tubing or fitting specimens, respectively, at that immersion in water using the following test cycle: Water
temperature. Failure of one of six tubing or fitting specimens immersion at 180°F (82°C) 2 min (min) Air immersion at
tested at either temperature in retest constitutes failure of the ambient 2 min (max) Water immersion at 60°F (16°C) 2 min
tubing or fitting, respectively, in the test. Failure of the tubing (min) Air immersion at ambient 2 min (max) Upon the
or fitting shall be defined in accordance with Test Method completion of 1000 thermal cycles, immerse the specimen
D1598 and leakage or separation at any of the fittings tested assembly again in 60 6 4°F (16 6 2°C) water and check for
shall constitute failure of the fitting. Delamination of the tubing any sign of gas leakage. Any evidence of leakage at the fitting
shall constitute failure of the tubing. or separation of the fitting from the tubing constitutes a failure.
7.6 Burst Pressure—Determine the tubing or fitting com- 7.7.5 Interpretation of Results—Failure of any one of six
plies with the minimum burst pressure requirements by testing joints tested shall constitute failure of this test.
in accordance with Test Method D1599 Method B. Test at least 7.8 Oxidative Stability in Potable Chlorinated Water:
six joints and at least six tubing specimens as per Test Method 7.8.1 The test shall be conducted and the extrapolated
D1599 in water at 73°F (23°C) and 180°F (82.2°C) as shown time-to-failure shall be determined in accordance with Test
in Table 6. Each specimen of tubing shall be at least five times Method F2023. The test fluid shall be prepared in accordance
the nominal diameter in length and not less than 12 in. (25 cm) with 9.1.1 of Test Method F2023. The extrapolated time-to-
or more than 3.0 ft (91 cm) between joints. Leakage or failure shall be calculated using the coefficients from 13.1 of
separation at any of the fittings tested shall constitute failure of Test Method F2023, and using Miners Rule, calculate the
the fitting. estimated time to-failure for a hoop stress corresponding to a
7.6.1 If present, valves shall be tested in the open or sustained internal pressure of 80 psig (551.7 kPa) for the DR of
unrestricted position. the tested specimens at the temperature exposure conditions
7.7 Thermocycling: and usage ratios defined in Table 7 in accordance with ISO
13760.
7.7.1 Summary of Test Method—This test method describes
7.8.2 Significance—The test need only be performed on
a pass-fail test for thermally cycling PE-RT tubing and fittings
representative pipe samples for the original validation of pipe
assemblies over a critical temperature range for a selected
made from a particular compound. A compound is defined as
number of cycles while subjected to a nominal internal
the PE-RT resin and the stabilization system.
pressure. This test method provides a measure of resistance to
failure due to the combined effects of differential thermal 7.9 Bent Tube Test—Determine in accordance with Test
expansion and creep for PE-RT tubing and fittings intended for Method D1598, except for the following: Test at least six
continuous use up to and including 180°F (82°C). specimens, from randomly selected specimens assembled per
7.7.2 Apparatus—A nitrogen or air source capable of main- the manufacturer’s instructions. The test assembly shall be
taining a nominal internal pressure of 100 6 10 psig (6.9 6 constructed so that there is a minimum length of 5 pipe
0.69 bars) within the specimens is required. The immersion diameters between joints. Test temperature shall be 180°F (82
system shall consist of two water reservoirs controlled at 60 6 °C).
4°F (166 2°C) and 180 6 4°F (82 6 2°C). The specimen shall 7.10 Excessive Temperature and Pressure Capability of
be cycled from one reservoir to the other or the hot and cold Tubing and Fittings:
409
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
7.10.1 Determine in accordance with Test Method D1598, 9.1.2 Marking shall be applied without indentation in some
except for the following requirements: permanent manner so as to remain legible under normal
7.10.1.1 Test at least six joints from randomly selected handling and installation practice. Tubing that is difficult to
specimens assembled per the manufacturer’s instructions with mark without indenting shall be so marked provided (1) the
at least 5-pipe diameters between joints. marking does not reduce the wall thickness to less than the
7.10.1.2 Condition tubing and fittings as assemblies in minimum value for the tubing, or (2) it is demonstrated that
accordance with 7.1. these marks have no effect on the long-term strength of the
7.10.1.3 Test temperature shall be 210 6 4°F (99 6 2°C). tubing, or both.
7.10.1.4 The external test environment shall be air. 9.1.3 Markings, shall be required on tubing at intervals of
7.10.1.5 Fill the specimens with water and condition for 2 h not more than 5 ft (1.5 m).
at a temperature of 210 6 4°F (99 6 2°C) and a pressure of 30 9.1.4 Marking on the tubing shall include the following,
6 3 psi (207 6 21 kPa) spaced at intervals of not more than 5 ft:
7.10.1.6 .Pressurize test specimens to the required pressure 9.1.4.1 Nominal tubing size (for example, 2 in.).
and maintain for 720 h. The pressure for PE-RT SDR 9 tubing 9.1.4.2 The material designation, PE-RT.
shall be 150 psi (10.34 bar). 9.1.4.3 The Specification D3350 cell classification for the
7.11 Environmental Stress Cracking Test— Use six ran- material per Specification D3350 and Table 1, for example
domly selected 10-in. (250-mm) long tubing specimens for this PE344373
test. Make a notch on the inside of the tubing wall in the axial 9.1.4.4 A distinctive marking that identify the presence of
direction. The notch depth shall be 10 % of measured mini- an inner, middle or outer layer.
mum wall thickness and the notch length 1 in. (25 mm). Use a 9.1.4.5 Standard dimension ratio, SDR 9.
sharp blade mounted in a jig to make this imperfection. Use a 9.1.4.6 Pressure rating for water at 73°F (23°C) and 180°F
depth micrometer or other means for setting the blade in the jig (82.2°C) established by this specification.
so that the notch depth is controlled as specified. The notch 9.1.4.7 ASME SF-2769 or both ASME SF-2769 and
shall be placed, at its nearest point, at least 1.5 times the ASTM F2769.
nominal diameter away from end closures. Fill the tubing with 9.1.4.8 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and production
the test medium which is 5 % “Igepal CO-630” mixed with 95 code.
% of untreated water. The test is then made in accordance with 9.1.4.9 Certification mark or seal of the laboratory making
7.5, under the pressures given in Table 5, except maintain the the evaluation for this purpose
pressure for 100 h. 9.1.4.10 Chlorine resistance classification codes as appro-
priate based on the tubing meeting the requirements of 6.7, for
7.12 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—The test shall be example, CL1.
conducted in accordance with Test Method F1473 at a stress of 9.1.4.11 Standard designation(s) of the fitting systems(s) for
2.4 MPa with a modification in test temperature. Testing shall which the tubing is recommended for use by the tubing
be performed at 90°C. The average failure time shall be manufacturer.
calculated from two test specimens.
9.2 Fittings-Fittings shall be marked in accordance to the
8. Retest and Rejection requirements of the ASTM standard to which the fittings are
8.1 If the results of any test(s) do not meet the requirements manufactured.
of this specification, the test(s) shall be conducted again only
agreement, minimum requirements shall not be lowered, 10.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was
changed, or modified, nor shall specification limits be changed. manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with
If upon retest, failure occurs, the quantity of product repre- this specification and has been found to meet the require-
sented by the test(s) does not meet the requirements of this ments of this specification.
specification.
9. Marking
9.1 Tubing:
9.1.1 The marking shall be applied to the tubing in such a
manner that it remains legible (easily read) after installation
and inspection.
410
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
11. Certification 12. Keywords

11.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A1. 12.1 hot water; hydrostatic stress; PE-RT; pipe; plastic pipe;
polyethylene of raised temperature; PPI; pressure; potable
water; PERT; tubing
may use his own or any other suitable facilities for the S2.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accordance
performance of the inspection and test requirements specified with Fed-Std-No-123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for
herein, unless the purchaser disapproves. The purchaser shall military agencies.
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed NOTE S2.1—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
requirements.
inspection.
S2. Packaging and Marketing for U.S. Government Pro-
curement
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
411
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIXES
X1. SOURCE OF HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESS OF TUBING
X1.1 The hydrostatic design basis (HDB) recommended by data available to date on PE-RT-tubing materials exhibit a
the Plastics Pipe Institute and published in PPI TR-4 is used to straight-line plot under these plotting conditions.
pressure rate PE-RT plastic tubing. The hydrostatic design
basis at 73°F is defined in Table 1. The hydrostatic design basis X1.3 Stabilizer Verification—The oxidation induction time
applies only to tubing meeting all the requirements of this (OIT) as described in Test Method D3895 may be used to
specification. monitor stabilizer content of a PE-RT material or freshly
extruded tubing. Once the initial OIT value has been estab-
X1.2 Refer also to Test Method D2837 for HDB. Additional lished for a specific compound, subsequent OIT values can be
information regarding the method of test and other criteria used used to validate the stabilizer level in the tubing or compound
in developing the hydrostatic design basis may be obtained without the need to run additional temperature tests. It should
from the Plastics Pipe Institute, 105 Decker Court, Suite 825, be mentioned that OIT tests are not an indicator of life
Irving, TX 75062. The hydrostatic design basis may not be expectancy, nor should differences in OIT values between
suitable for materials that show a wide departure from a compounds be construed to indicate differences in the stabilizer
straight-line plot of log stress versus log time to failure. All the effectiveness of respective formulations.
X2. UV LABLING GUIDELINES FOR PE-RT TUBING
X2.1 PE-RT tubing should be kept in original packaging X2.3 The recommended text may be incorporated into
until time of use, and it should not be used in direct sunlight. existing labels with other information. The universal “no-sun”
To inform customers and users about the need to prevent symbol may be shown in color, black-and-white or grayscale,
accidental overexposure of PE-RT tubing to sunlight (UV and should be positioned close to the recommended text.
light), it is recommended that a UV CAUTION label be applied
to all PE-RT tubing packaging by the manufacturer. X2.4 Caution Label:
Do not store PE-RT tubing unprotected outdoors.
X2.2 The text and content of the recommended label is as Keep PE-RT tubing in the original packaging or under protec-
shown X2.4. “X” is the maximum cumulative time period as tive cover until time of installation.
recommended by the tubing manufacturer for direct sunlight Ensure that exposure to sunlight during installation does not
exposure without harm to the long-term performance charac- exceed the maximum recommended UV exposure time of “X”.
teristics of the PE-RT tubing.
412
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2769
X3. DESIGN, ASSEMBLY, AND INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
X3.1 Design fitting is placed inside the tube and a tool is employed to crimp
X3.1.1 Thermal Expansion—The linear expansion rate for a metallic lock ring around the tubing outside diameter
PE-RT is approximately 1.1 in./10°F temperature change for adjacent to the fitting. This provides a mechanical lock with the
each 100 ft of tubing, or 28 mm/5.6°C temperature change for tubing being wedged securely between the ring and the insert
fitting.
each 30 m of tubing. When installing long runs of tubing, allow
1⁄8 to 3⁄16 in. longitudinal clearance per ft (10 to 14 mm/m) of X3.2.2 The manufacturer should be consulted regarding
run to accommodate thermal expansion. Tubing should not be authorized fittings for use with PE-RT tubing.
anchored rigidly to a support but allowed freedom of move-
ment to expand and contract. X3.3 Installation
X3.1.2 Water Heaters—Components covered by this speci- X3.3.1 Storage and Handling—PE-RT tubing and fittings
fication may not be suitable for use with the instantaneous type should be stored under cover to avoid unnecessary dirt accu-
(coil or immersion) water heater. They are suitable for use with mulation and long-term exposure to sunlight as per X3. Tubing
can be stored in coils of number size and length recommended
storage type water heaters with connections made in an
by the manufacturer. Care should be used in handling to ensure
approved manner.
that unnecessary abuse, such as abrasion on concrete or
X3.1.3 Sweating—Even though the thermal conductivity of crushing, is avoided.
PE-RT is several orders of magnitude lower than that of metal, X3.3.2 Pressure Testing—A pressure test with water at 100
sweating or condensation at a slow rate may occur under psig (6.9 bar) on the system excluding the hot water heater is
certain temperature and humidity conditions. advisable to test for fitting leakage.
X3.1.4 Water Hammer and Surge—A PE-RT hot-water X3.3.3 Repairs—If a leak is discovered, that portion of the
system will withstand repeated pressure surges, well in excess system should be drained and the actual part should be cut out.
of its rated pressure, but water hammer arrestors may be The tubing should be thoroughly dried and mechanical fit-
advisable when solenoid valves or other quick-closing devices ting(s) and if necessary, short length(s) of tubing should be
are used in the system. In designing for such situations, it is installed
advisable to consult the tubing or fitting manufacturer for X3.3.4 Soldering in the Area—Soldered metal fittings
recommended surge pressure limits. Water hammer and surge should not be made closer than 18 in. (460 mm) to an installed
pressure calculations are reviewed in Chapter 7, AWWA plastic-to-metal adapter in the same water line.
Manual M-11, Steel Pipe Design and Installation.
X3.3.5 Hot Bending of Tubing—Hot bending, where the
X3.1.5 Horizontal Support Spacing—The maximum recom- tubing is heated with a hot-air source (for example, heat gun),
mended spacing between horizontal supports is 32 in. (800 is not recommended.
mm) for all sizes in this specification. PE-RT tubing should not
X3.3.6 Cold Bending of Tubing—PE-RT SDR 9 tubing shall
be rigidly secured to a stud or joist but should be secured with be bent at room temperature without the use of bending tools
smooth plastic strap hangers, which permit ease of movement down to a minimum bending radius of 6 times outside
during expansion/contraction cycles. diameter. Outside diameter is equal to nominal diameter plus 1⁄8
X3.1.6 When PE-RT tubing are to be used in sealed central in. Normal precaution is taken to avoid buckling or flattening.
heating systems, the fact that all plastics allow for a certain Fix the tubing by supports on both sides of the bend at
amount of oxygen diffusion should be taken into consideration. installation.
X3.2 Assembly
X3.2.1 Insert Fittings—A number of techniques have been
developed where a fitting is firmly secured to the tubing. The
413
SF-2769 ASME NM.3.1-2018
X4. OPTIONAL PERFORMANCE
X4.1 Scope TABLE X4.1 Suggested Quality-Control Program

Component Property Frequency Requirement
X4.1.1 The following program covers performance qualifi- Workmanship continuously 6.1
cation and in-plant quality control for component design and Dimensions hourly 6.2
manufacture respectively to provide reasonable assurance that Tubing Burst pressure daily 5.5
Sustained pressure 3 months 5.4
PE-RT hot-water distribution system components supplied Bent tube yearly 6.6
under this specification shall consistently meet its require-
ments. Fitting
Dimensions hourly 6.2
Burst pressure daily 6.3
X4.2 Performance Qualifications
X4.2.1 Performance qualification tests shall be run initially
on each component design, size, and formulation in accordance acceptable test result and tested to determine which compo-
with the requirements of this specification. The test results nents produced in the interim do not meet the requirement.
shall be independently certified and shall be made available to Components that do not meet the requirements of this specifi-
the purchaser on request cation shall be rejected. See Table X4.2.
X4.3.3 Marking—A code number shall be included on the
X4.3 In-Plant Quality Control tubing that can be used to identify the manufacturer and the
X4.3.1 Material—The tubing material shall be PE-RT as date of manufacture. Fittings shall be marked to identify the
defined in Section 4.1 of this specification. The manufacturer manufacturer and shall be coded or placed in dated containers
shall so certify. to show the date of manufacture.
X4.3.2 Quality-Control Testing—Tubing and fitting quality-
TABLE X4.2 Test Type Program
control tests shall be run for each extrusion line or mold cavity
in accordance with the requirements of this specification at a Component Property Requirement
Hydrostatic design basis for Test Method D2837
frequency agreed upon between the purchaser and the manu- Tubing each temperature
facturer. The program outlined in Table X4.1 is recommended. Potable water NSF 14
The test results shall be recorded and filed for inspection on Sustained pressure 6.4
Fittings Thermocycling 6.5
request. Should a component fail to meet the specification in Potable water NSF 14
any test, production should be sampled back to the previous
414
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2880
SPECIFICATION FOR LAP-JOINT TYPE FLANGE

ADAPTERS FOR POLYETHYLENE PRESSURE PIPE IN
NOMINAL PIPE SIZES 3/4 IN. TO 65 IN.
SF-2880
(Identical with ASTM F2880-14 except for revised requirements in section 9 and additional requirements in Annex A1,
and revised marking requirements in para. 7.1.3.8.)
415
SF-2880 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Lap-Joint Type Flange Adapters for Polyethylene Pressure
Pipe in Nominal Pipe Sizes 3⁄4 in. to 65 in.
1. Scope responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-

1.1 This specification covers the polyethylene material and priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
dimensions applicable to flange adapters (FAs) used to connect bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
polyethylene pipes to other flanged pipe and components such
as valves and flanged fittings. This standard describes outside 2. Referenced Documents
diameter controlled polyethylene (PE) pipe flange adapters 2.1 ASTM Standards:
(FAs) in diameters ranging from 3⁄4 in. through 65 in. (12 mm D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
through 1600 mm). The flange adapters may be manufactured moplastic Pipe and Fittings
by various methods including injection molding, compression
D2513 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
molding, and machining from billet or thick-wall polyethylene
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
pipe.
1.2 The flange adapter (FA) is the principal component of for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
the lap-joint flanged assembly widely used for several decades for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
in low-pressure to high-pressure polyethylene pipe systems for D3035 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
all types of pressurized flow (gas and liquid) applications. The PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
flange adapter’s physical shape consists of the pipe-like Neck D3261 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
which is monolithic with its Hub. The Neck is intended to be Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and
butt-fused or fusion coupled to the pipe-line; while the Hub Tubing
face is intended to affect the seal when subjected to the
distributed load from the back up ring with its properly torqued
tings Materials
bolt-studs and nuts.
F714 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-
NOTE 1—Polyethylene pipe flange adapters with slip on bolt rings are PR) Based on Outside Diameter
intended for use being bolted to each other or to be bolted to metal flanges F2206 Specification for Fabricated Fittings of Butt-Fused
having (primarily) Class 150 bolt hole patterns such as those presented in
metal flange standards ASME B16.5, ASME B16.47 and AWWA C207. Polyethylene (PE)
F3034 Specification for Billets made by Winding Molten
Extruded Stress-Rated High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE)
and are not considered standard. 2.2 ASME Standards:
B16.5 “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings”
1.4 The use of gaskets and gasket selection are often an
B16.47 “Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through
integral component of the flange adapter assembly. See the
Plastic Pipe Institute Technical Note TN-38 for more informa- NPS 60” Class #150 – Series A
tion regarding HDPE flanged joints. B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B36.19M Stainless Steel Pipe
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
416
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2880
2.3 AWWA Standards: 3.1.2 dimension ratio (DR)—The ratio of a pipe’s specified
C207 “Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks nominal outside diameter to its specified minimum wall
Service, Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through thickness. DR as applied to Flange Adapters is Neck OD ÷
3,600 mm) ; Class #150 /Series B, D & E. neck minimum wall.
C901 “Standard for Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and
tubing, 1⁄2 ” through 3” for Water Service.” 3.1.3 DIPS—Ductile-Iron Pipe Size; the outside diameter
C906 Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and (OD) of plastic pipe that matches the nominal standard
Fittings, 4 In. (100 mm) Through 63 In. (1,600 mm), for diameters of metal ductile iron, or, cast-iron pipes; also
Water Distribution and Transmission commonly referred to as DIOD, Ductile Iron Outside
M55 Polyethylene Pipe - Design and Installation Diameter, previously known as CIOD or cast-iron OD.
2.4 NSF Standards: 3.1.4 flange adapter—One component of the two piece
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 for Plastic Piping Components lap-joint flange assembly; It is a one piece polyethylene device
and Related Materials whose geometry consists of two shapes: the wide, circular,
NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61 for Drinking Water System seal-face disk, with central hole, which transitions along its
Components—Health Effects length into pipe of smaller diameter and wall thickness,
2.5 PPI Documents: matched to the pipe-main to which it is to be joined. (Refer to
TN-38 “Bolt Torque for Polyethylene Flanged Joints” Fig. 1).
TR-3 “Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic 3.1.5 Hub—The disk ring, or collar, extending radially
Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), outward from the pipe OD at the pipe termination.
Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate- 3.1.6 Hydrostatic design stress (HDS)—The maximum al-
rials or Pipe lowable hoop stress in the pipe wall for pipe that is subjected
TR-4 “HDB/HDS/SDB/PDB/MRS Listed Materials” to sustained long-term hydrostatic pressure. The hydrostatic
PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings design stress is determined by multiplying the hydrostatic
design basis by the PPI recommended design factor for water
3. Terminology service. HDS ratings for PE materials are published by PPI in
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: TR-4.
3.1.1 billet, n—a mass formed from a single polyethylene 3.1.7 IPS—Iron Pipe Size (steel pipe) outside diameters;
compound in the approximate shape of a thick-walled cylin- replaced with nominal pipe sizes (NPS) per as listed with the
drical shell (see Specification F3034). plastic pipe standards and B36.10M and B36.19M.
3.1.8 lap-joint flange ring—the loose metal ring that trans-
fers the load from the bolts through the hub to the seal face.
3.1.9 neck—The long barrel of the flange adapter with OD
and wall thickness matched to the pipeline dimensions. The
neck length must be sufficient for fusion joining in the fusion
machine used.
FIG. 1 Polyethylene Flange Adapter Geometry
417
SF-2880 ASME NM.3.1-2018
3.1.10 seal face—The front of the Hub, which contacts the 4.3 Rework—Clean rework pipe-grade polyethylene mate-
mating flange, which radially confines fluid pressure by com- rial derived from pipe and or fittings production by the same
pressive stress when subjected to distributed load from torqued manufacturer are acceptable as part of a blend with virgin
bolts. material for the production of flange adapters provided that (a)
3.1.11 residual sealing stress—The long-term compressive the cell classification or materials designation code of the
stress intensity from the load distributed over the seal face area rework material is the same as the virgin material compound to
which is in contact with a mating flange. which it is added, and (b) the rework materials complied with
applicable requirements as virgin materials.
3.1.12 pressure rating (PR)—maximum sustained internal
water pressure at 80°F (27°C) and lower service temperature 4.4 Potable Water—Materials used for products intended for
with specified maximum allowances for pressure surges. use in the transport of potable water shall be evaluated and
certified as safe for this purpose by a testing agency acceptable
2 3 HDS 3 F T
PR 5 (1) to the local health authority. The evaluation shall be in
~ DR 2 1 !
accordance with requirements for chemical extraction, taste,
where: and odor that are no less restrictive than those included in
HDS = hydrostatic design stress for water at 73ºF, psi (kPa) NSF/ANSI Standard No. 14 or NSF/ANSI Standard No. 61.
FT = temperature factor (1.00 for 80ºF (27ºC) and lower The seal or mark of the laboratory making the evaluation
water service temperature) should be included on the piping per 7.1.3.7.
DR = dimension ratio. Surge pressure allowances are ap-
plied above the sustained internal pressure and are 5. Flange Adaptor Dimensions and Working Pressure
integral to the working pressure rating. Ratings
5.1 General—This standard describes 10 dimension ratios
4. Polyethylene Materials for Flange (DR’s) for nominal flange adapter sizes ranging from 3⁄4 in.
4.1 General—Table 1 contains the list of polyethylene through 65 in. (12 mm through 1 600 mm). Flange adapter
materials that are acceptable for use in manufacture of the outside diameters (ODs) conform to the outside diameter
flange adapters. Usually, the flange adapter material has the dimensions of iron pipe sizes (IPS), or to equivalent outside
same material designation as the specified polyethylene pipe- diameters for ductile-iron (DI) pipe (DIPS). Polyethylene
line material, for the purpose of chemical resistance and flange adapters are classified by dimension ratios (DR’s)
heat-fusion joining. Commercial virgin PE material com- ranging from 7.0 to 32.5. The resultant combinations of PE
pounds shall meet Table 1 physical properties, Specification material designations and DR’s define flange adapters with
D3350 requirements and shall be classified per Specification pressure ratings ranging from 40 to 333 psig (276 to 2 299 kPa)
D3350 as shown in Table 1. The PE material compound shall when conveying water at 80ºF (27ºC) and lower temperatures.
have HDB ratings at 73°F (23°C) and at 140°F (60°C) and Use at temperatures above 80ºF (27ºC) up to 140ºF (60ºC) is
HDS ratings at 73°F (23°C) determined in accordance with acceptable at pressure ratings that are appropriately reduced for
Test Method D2837 and PPI TR-3. the service temperature.
4.2 Color—The PE material in the pipe shall contain color 5.2 Outside diameters—The neck Outside Diameter (OD) of
and ultraviolet (UV) stabilizer meeting the requirements of the flange adapter measured at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) shall
Code C or E per Specification D3350. Code C material shall conform to the applicable OD dimension requirements speci-
contain between 2 to 3 percent carbon black by weight. fied in the related polyethylene pipe standards : Specifications
TABLE 1 Property Values and Specification D3350 Cell Classification for Materials
Materials Designation Code
Property
PE2606 PE2706 PE2708A PE3608A PE3708 PE3710 PE4608 PE4708 PE4710A
Property Values
HDB at 140°F (60°C) per ASTM D 2837 and PPI TR-3, psi C C C C C C C C C
(MPa)
HDS at 73°F (23°C) per ASTM D 2837 and PPI TR-3, psi 630 (4.6) 630 (4.6) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000 800 (5.5) 800 (5.5) 1000
(MPa) (6.9) (6.9)
B
Specification D3350 Cell Classification Values
Density (natural base resin) 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
Melt Index 3-4 3-4 3-4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Flexural Modulus 3-4 3-4 3-4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $5
Tensile Strength at Yield $3 $3 $3 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4 $4
SCG Resistance 6 7 7 6 7 7 6 7 7
Hydrostatic Strength Classification 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4
Color and UV Stabilizer C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E C or E
A
HDB at 140°F (60°C) per ASTM D2837 and PPI TR-3 at 140°F required; contact manufacturer for listed value.
B
Specification D3350 cell classification values reflect typical property values for numerous lots of the material and do not include variability in testing or manufacturing
tolerances. Values for individual material lots can vary from typical values. Contact the manufacturer for information about variability in testing and material manufacturing
tolerances.
418
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2880
F714, D2513, D3035, and AWWA C901 and C906. Measure- thickness by pipe OD and sizing system (IPS & DIPS) are
ments shall be made according to the methods specified in Test tabulated in : Specifications F714, D2513, D3035, and AWWA
Method D2122. The tolerance on outside diameter shall not C901, C906.
exceed 60.45 percent of the average outside diameter, as
5.4 Neck Length—The neck length shall be a minimum
presented in the tables for NPS 4-in. and larger.
length so as to enable holding in the jaws of a heat-fusion
5.2.1 Special Sizes—Where existing system conditions or
machine, or, to enable joining by socket fusion or electro-
special local requirement make other diameters or dimension
ratios necessary, other sizes or dimension ratios, or both, shall fusion coupler. (See Table 2.)
be acceptable for engineered applications when mutually 5.5 Hub Width and Hub OD—The hub width must be
agreed upon by the customer and the manufacturer, if the sufficiently stiff to resist shear, to resist fluid pressure bending
flange adapter is manufactured from plastic compounds meet- moment flexing, to resist pipe beam bending, and to distribute
ing the material requirements of this specification, and the concentrated back up ring load across the seal-face. The hub
strength and design requirements are calculated on the same minimum width shall be at least 1.10 times the nominal neck
basis as those use in this specification. For diameters not shown wall thickness for a specified neck DR. The ratio of the hub
in Table 2, Table 3 or Table 4, the tolerance shall be the same width to neck wall thickness may exceed 1.5 when a lower DR
percentage as that shown in the corresponding tables for the flange adapter is machined into a thinner wall, higher DR
next smaller listed size. flange adapter. Hub width may be the minimum or thicker, as
5.3 Neck Wall thickness—The flange adapter manufacturer specified by the Target Hub Width in Table 3 and Table 4. Table
may provide extra wall thickness to compensate for PE pipe 5 specifies the nominal Hub outside diameters.
toe-in, out of round, and pipe over-wall. Wall thickness 5.5.1 Custom Flange Adapter Hub Width—Custom de-
tolerance above minimum wall as measured and calculated signed flange adapter hub widths are allowable. Specifically
according to Test Method D2122 in any diametrical cross butterfly flange adapters shall have the hub width extended and
section of the pipe shall not exceed 17 percent. The flange chamfered or tapered as needed to clear the rotation of the
adapter’s minimum neck wall thickness measured at 73.4 6 butterfly disk by adding to the minimum hub width of the
3.6ºF (23 6 2ºC) shall conform to the applicable pipe stan- flange adapter. Chamfering or tapering the ID of the minimum
dard’s tabulated wall DR dimension, with a wall thickness hub width for a given flange adapter DR is not acceptable. At
tolerance of - zero, + 17% × min. wall. The minimum wall the butterfly flange adapter seal face, the tapered Hub OD and
TABLE 2 Minimum Neck Length, in. for IPS and DIPS Flange Adapters
NOTE 1—Minimum Neck Length = Nominal Fusion Machine Clamp width + stop-protursion + 1 in. + Back Up Ring
Neck Length may be longer; consult Flange Adapter manufacturer.
Minimum Neck Length
Nominal Pipe Size IPS DIPS DR 7 DR 9 DR 11 -DR 32.5
3⁄4 in. X 2.88 2.88 2.88
1 in X 3.75 3.75 3.75
1 1⁄4 in. X 3.88 3.88 3.88
1 1⁄2 in. X 4.00 4.00 4.00
2 in. X 4.25 4.25 4.25
3 in. X 4.50 4.50 4.50
4 in. X X 5.38 5.38 6.00
5 in. X 6.50 6.50 6.50
6 in. X X 6.75 6.75 6.75
8 in. X X 6.50 6..13 6.13
10 in. X X 6.50 6.13 6.13
12 in. X X 7.38 7.38 7.75
14 in. X X 8.13 7.75 7.75
16in. X X 8.44 8.00 8.00
18 in. X X 8.50 8.13 8.13
20 in. X X 8.94 8.38 8.38
22 in. X 9.03 8.63 8.63
24 in. X X 9.50 8.69 8.69
26 in. X 10.38 10.13 10.13
28 in. X 10.63 10.25 10.13
30 in. X X 10.88 10.38 10.25
32 in. X 11.13 10.88 10.75
34 in. X 12.13 11.50 10.88
36 in. X X 13.13 12.19 11.31
1000mm / 40 in. X * * 12.63
42 in. X X * * 12.63
48 in. X X * * 12.88
54 in. X * * 20.13
1400mm /55 in. * * 20.50
63 in. X * * 20.50
65 in. X * * 21.50
419
SF-2880 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 3 Target Hub Width, in. for IPS Outside Diameter Flange Adapters
NOTE 1—Minimum Hub Width is 1.10 × Neck min. wall, to handles shear and tensile loads. Standardized Width is the target width grouped by DR’s,
for standard bolt lengths.
IPS SIZE Neck OD Standard DR 7 DR9 DR11 DR13.5 DR15.5 DR17 DR19 DR21 DR26 DR32.5
3⁄4 in. 1.05 Std 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 * * * *
1 in. 1.315 Std 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 * * * *
1 1⁄4 in. 1.66 St 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 * * * *
1 1⁄2 in. 1.9 Std 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 * * * *
2in. 2.375 Std 0.437 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 * *
3in. 3.5 Std 0.625 0.500 0.406 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.375
4 in. 4.5 Std 0.875 0.625 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.390 0.390 0.375
5 in. 5.563 Std 0.875 0.875 0.625 0.625 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.390 0.390 0.375
6 in. 6.625 Std 1.188 1.000 0.781 0.781 0.781 0.781 0.781 0.500 0.500 0.500
8 in. 8.625 Std 1.625 1.250 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.750 0.750 0.750
10 in. 10.75 Std 2.000 1.500 1.280 1.280 1.280 1.280 1.280 0.750 0.750 0.750
12 in. 12.75 Std 2.281 1.875 1.540 1.540 1.540 1.540 1.540 0.875 0.875 0.875
14 in. 14 Std 2.500 2.000 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.000 1.000 1.000
16 in. 16 Std 2.875 2.250 1.875 1.875 1.875 1.875 1.875 1.125 1.125 1.125
18 in. 18 Std 3.250 2.500 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 1.250 1.250 1.250
20 in. 20 Std 3.625 2.875 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 1.375 1.375 1.375
22 in. 22 Std 3.938 3.125 2.500 2.500 2.500 2.500 2.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
24 in. 24 Std 4.281 3.360 2.750 2.750 2.750 2.750 2.750 1.625 1.625 1.625
26 in. 26 Std 4.625 3.625 3.000 2.500 2.500 2.500 2.500 1.750 1.750 1.750
28 in. 28 Std 5.000 3.875 3.250 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 1.750 1.750 1.750
30 in. 30 Std 5.375 4.188 3.500 2.750 2.750 2.750 2.750 1.875 1.875 1.875
32 in. 32 Std 5.750 4.500 3.625 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 2.000 2.000 2.000
34 in. 34 Std 6.125 4.750 3.875 3.250 3.000 3.000 3.000 2.125 2.125 2.125
36 in. 36 Std 6.500 5.000 4.125 3.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 2.125 2.125 2.125
1000mm / 40 in. 39.37 Std * 5.500 4.500 3.750 3.250 3.000 3.000 2.375 2.375 2.375
42 in. 42 Std * 5.875 5.000 4.000 3.500 3.125 3.000 2.500 2.500 2.500
48 in. 48 Std * 6.750 5.500 4.500 3.875 3.625 3.250 3.000 3.000 3.000
54 in. 54 Std * * 6.125 5.000 4.500 4.000 3.625 3.250 3.250 3.250
1400mm / 55 in. 55.12 Std * * 6.375 5.250 4.500 4.250 3.750 3.500 3.250 3.250
63 in. 63 Std * * * 5.875 5.125 4.625 4.250 3.750 3.750 3.750
65 in. 65 Std * * * 6.125 5.250 4.875 4.375 3.875 3.875 3.875
TABLE 4 Target Hub Width (Inches) for Ductile-Iron OD Flange Adapters

NOTE 1—Minimum Hub Width is 1.10 × Neck min. wall, to handles shear and tensile loads. Standardized Width is the target hub width grouped by
DR’s, for standard bolt lengths.
NOMINAL Neck OD/ Standard DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR
DIPS SIZE Inches 7 9 11 13.5 15.5 17 19 21 26 32.5
2 in. 2.5 Std 0.5 0.406 0..406 0.406 0.406 0.407 * * * *
3 in. 3.96 Std 0.75 0.625 0.5 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406 * *
4 in. 4.8 Std 0.875 0.688 0.563 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.406 0.406 0.406
6 in. 6.9 Std 1.25 1 0.783 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.406 0.406 0.406
8 in. 9.05 Std 1.625 1.25 1.063 1 1 1 1 0.563 0.563 0.563
10 in. 11.1 Std 2 1.625 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 0.75 0.75 0.75
12 in. 13.2 Std 2.375 1.875 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.781 0.781 0.781
14 in. 15.3 Std 2.75 2.125 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1 1 1
16 in. 17.4 Std 3.125 2.5 2 2 2 2 2 1.063 1.063 1.063
18 in. 19.5 Std 3.5 2.75 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 1.188 1.188 1.188
20 in. 21.6 Std 4 3 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.312 1.312 1.312
24 in. 25.8 Std 4.625 3.625 3 3 3 3 3 1.563 1.563 1.563
30 in. 32 Std 5.75 4.5 3.625 3.625 3.625 3.625 3.625 2 2 2
36 in. 38.3 Std 7 5.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 2.281 2.281 2.281
42 in. 44.5 Std * * 5 4.5 4 3.5 3 2.75 2.75 2.75
48 in. 50.8 Std * * * 5 4 3.75 3.5 3 3 3
54 in. 57.56 Std * * * 5.5 4.75 4.5 4 3.5 3.5 3.5
60 in. 61.61 Std * * * 6 5 4.5 4 3.75 3.75 3.75
64 in. 65.67 Std * * * 6 5.5 5 4.5 4 4 4
Hub Wall shall be sufficiently dimensioned to provide a DR so as to provide full pressure rating. Butterfly flange adapters
pressure rating at least equal to that of the pipe DR to which the are unique for each brand of butterfly valve.
butterfly flange adapter will be joined by heat fusion. If the
5.6 Fillet Radius—Table 6 specifies the target minimum
tapered Hub Wall at the seal face is not sufficiently thick to
radius and tolerance for IPS and DIPS flange adapters.
match the pipe pressure rating, then a sufficiently thick
corrosion resistant metal collar shall be snug-fit over the hub’s 5.7 Seal Face Finish and Flatness—The seal face may be
taper transition section to reinforce the taper portion of the Hub smooth or serrated. Although PE flange adapters do not
420
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2880
TABLE 5 Hub Outside Diameter, in. for Class 150 Bolt Pattern Flanges
NOTE 1—For both IPS and DIPS pipe sizes, as available.

Hub Outside Diameter
Nominal Pipe Size Maximum Nominal Minimum
0.75 2.125 2 1.99
1 2.5 2.375 2.325
1.25 2.875 2.75 2.7
1.5 3.25 3.125 3.075
2 4 3.875 3.625
3 5.25 5 4.5
4 6.75 6.625 5.812
5 7.625 7.5 7.313
6 8.625 8.5 7.937
7 10.875 10.625 10.375
8 10.875 10.625 10.375
10 13.25 12.75 12.5
12 16 15.75 14.937
14 17.625 17.375 16.75
16 20.125 19.75 19.217
18 21.5 21.125 19.875
20 23.75 23.375 22.875
22 25.875 25.5 25
24 28.125 27.75 27.25
26 30.375 30 29.5
28 32.625 32.25 31.28
30 34.625 34.25 33.75
32 36.875 36.75 35.875
34 38.875 38.5 37.875
36 41.125 40.75 39.063
1000MM/40 in. 45.625 45.125 42.83
42 47.875 47.375 46.875
48 54.375 53.75 51.628
54 60.875 60 59.375
1400MM/55 in. 60.875 60 59.375
63 in. 70.25 66.75 66.25
63 - (66) 73.75 72 71.5
65 - (66) 73.75 72 71.5
necessarily require gaskets, serrations may be provided on the 5.10 Workmanship—Polyethylene flange adapters shall be
seal face to assist in gasket retention. Sealing face serrations homogeneous throughout, free from voids, cracks, inclusions
also accommodate surface irregularities and promote sealing if and other defects; and as uniform as commercially practical in
a gasket is not used. Alternately, the seal face may be smooth color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. Surfaces
from molding processes, or, have a sufficiently flat surface shall be free from scratches, voids, blisters, and other imper-
marked with the finish from lathe machining. The seal face fections that may affect wall integrity or joining.
should be sufficiently flat so that it provides essentially uniform
sealing pressure on the hub face when subjected to the 6. Assurance Program
flattening, compressive load from the metal lap-joint flange
ring. The flatness tolerance will be as agreed between the 6.1 General—The manufacturer shall take sufficient mea-
manufacturer and the purchaser. sures to check incoming materials and to produce flange
5.8 Pressure Rating—Refer to Table 7 which presents flange adapters that comply with the requirements of this standard.
adapter PR values by DR. PR represents the design capacity to The actual tests and frequency at which each of these tests are
resist working pressure at the anticipated operating temperature conducted should be determined in the manufacturer’s quality
with sufficient inherent instant strength to endure the repetitive, control program, which shall be designed to ensure compliance
actual, anticipated, instant positive pressure surges above the with the requirements of this standard.
working pressure, for the lifetime of the pipeline. (For a 6.2 Quality control records—The manufacturer shall main-
detailed discussion, including hydraulic surge pressure, hy- tain records of all quality control tests for a period of not less
draulic surge pressure allowance, pressure rating (PR), water than two years and, if requested, shall submit the pertinent
flow rates and flow velocities, refer to the PPI Handbook of
quality control test information to the purchaser.
Polyethylene Pipe, or, AWWA Polyethylene Pipe Manual,
M55.)
7. Marking
5.9 Physical Requirements—Polyethylene flange adapters
shall meet the requirements of this standard and the test 7.1 General:
requirements of Specification D3261. For sizes greater than 48 7.1.1 Marking the product with the designations to which
in., the same test requirements of 14 in. through 48 in. shall the flange adapter is in compliance (that is, AWWA C906,
apply. Specification D3261, Specification F2206, etc.) affirms that the
421
SF-2880 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 6 Fillet Radius for IPS and DIPS Flange Adapters 7.1.3.1 Nominal size and OD “basis” (such as 18-in. IPS, or,
NOTE 1—The manufacturing radius tolerance is ± 0.032 in.
12-in. DIPS)
IPS DIPS
7.1.3.2 Dimension ratio (such as DR 17) or custom wall
Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum thickness or DR.
Diameter Fillet Diameter Fillet 7.1.3.3 Manufacturer’s name or trademark.
Radius Radius
(inches) (inches) 7.1.3.4 Standard materials designation code (such as
⁄ in
34 0.125 PE3608, or, PE4710).
1in. 0.125
11⁄4 in. 0.125
7.1.3.5 Pressure Rating, in psi. at 73°F
1 1⁄2 in. 0.188 7.1.3.6 Manufacturer’s production code, including the date
2 in. 0.25 2 in. 0.44 of manufacture. The manufacturer’s production code shall be a
3 in. 0.25 3 in. 0.44
4 in. 0.38 4 in. 0.44 coded marking that will allow the manufacturer to determine
5 in. 0.38 the location of manufacture, resin lots, pipe or fitting produc-
6 in. 0.38 6 in. 0.44 tion lot, and the date of manufacture. The date of manufacture
8 in. 0.38 8 in. 0.44
10 in. 0.38 10 in. 0.44 may be a numeric code or a combination of text and numerals,
12 in. 0.38 12 in. 0.44 but shall be readily recognizable as a date. Upon request, the
14 in. 0.5 14 in. 0.44 manufacturer shall provide decoding information to the pur-
16 in. 0.5 16 in. 0.44
18 in. 0.5 18 in. 0.44 chaser.
20 in. 0.5 20 in. 0.44 7.1.3.7 The mark of the certifying agency for fittings in-
22 in. 0.5
24 in. 0.5 24 in. 0.5
tended for potable water service.
26 in. 0.5 7.1.3.8 ASME SF-2880 or both ASME SF-2880 and
28 in. 0.5
30 in. 0.5 30 in. 0.5
ASTM F2880.
32 in. 0.5
34 in. 0.5 8. Shipping
36 in. 0.5 36 in. 0.5
1000MM / 0.5 8.1 Pipe, billet, and fittings, unless otherwise specified by
40 in.
42 in. 0.5 42 in. 0.5
the purchaser, shall be prepared for standard commercial
48 in. 0.75 48 in. 0.75 shipment. Care shall be taken during shipment to prevent cuts,
54 in. 0.75 scratches, and other damage.
1400MM / 0.75
55 in.
63 in. 0.75 9. Certification
65 in. 0.75
product has been manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested 10. Keywords
in accordance with those standards and has been found to meet 10.1 back-up rings; bolt rings; flanges; flange adapters;
their requirements. flange joints; HDPE flanges; HDPE; lap-joint flanges; plastic
7.1.2 Markings shall remain legible during normal handling, flanges; polyethylene; polyethylene flanges; polyethylene pipe
storage and installation. The markings shall be applied in a flanges; raised face flanges; stub ends; weld neck flanges
manner that will not reduce the strength or otherwise damage
the flange adapter or detrimentally affect joining with devices
that seal to the outside surface of the product. Molded print,
scribing on the hub OD, paint or ink, or adhesive labels are all
acceptable methods of marking
7.1.3 Required marking for fittings. Unless otherwise
specified, each fitting shall be marked or labeled to include the
following information:
422
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2880
TABLE 7 Flange Adaptor PR Conveying Water at 80°F (27°C) and Lower Service TemperatureA
Materials designation code Specification PE2606, PE2706 PE2708, PE3608, PE3708, PE4608, PE3710, PE4710
D3350 PE4708
Hydrostatic Design Stress, psi (kPa) per 630 (4345) 800 (5517) 1000 (6897)
Table 1
Dimension Ratio Pressure Rating, psi (kPa)
32.5 40 (276) 51 (350) 63 (438)
26.0 50 (348) 64 (441) 80 (552)
21.0 63 (435) 80 (552) 100 (690)
19.0 70 (483) 89 (613) 111 (766)
17.0 79 (543) 100 (690) 125 (862)
15.5 87 (599) 110 (761) 138 (951)
13.5 101 (695) 128 (883) 160 (1104)
11.0 126 (869) 160 (1103) 200 (1379)
9.3 152 (1047) 193 (1329) 241 (1662)
9.0 158 (1086) 200 (1379) 250 (1724)
7.3 200 (1379) 254 (1751) 317 (2190)
7.0 210 (1448) 267 (1839) 333 (2299)
A
For water at 80°F (27°C) and lower, PR is determined in accordance with:
2 3 HDS 3 F T
PR 5
s DR 2 1 d
where:
PR = Pressure Rating, psi (kPa)
HDS = hydrostatic design stress, psi (kPa)
DR = dimension ratio
FT = temperature factor = 1.0 for 80°F (27°C) and lower service temperature.
ANNEX
A1. CERTIFICATION
423
SF-2880 ASME NM.3.1-2018
APPENDIX
X1. CLARIFICATION AND PRECAUTIONS
X1.1 Stub Ends are a different design than flange adapters extend sufficiently through the jaws of at least one size-range
and do not meet the requirements of this standard. Stud-Ends of butt-fusion machine, from every manufacturer. For each
are not included in this standard. pipeline project, check with the supplier of the field fusion
X1.2 Some flange adapters may not have sufficient neck equipment regarding jaw width and the capacity of the specific
length to fit larger size-range butt-fusion machines, which have equipment to fuse the flange adapter having the neck length
wider clamps. All flange adapters have sufficient neck length to supplied.
424
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
SPECIFICATION FOR POLYAMIDE 11 GAS PRESSURE

PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
SF-2945
(Identical with ASTM F2945-12a except for additional requirements in section 9 and Annex A3, update to para. 1.4,
corrected title of 49 CFR 192 in para. 2.3, revised marking requirements in para. 7.1, Note 10, and para. A2.6.1.1,
changes from "ANSI" to "ASME" in paras. 2.2, 3.2, 5.15, X2.3.3, X2.5.1, and X2.6.1, and quality assurance requirements in
para. 8.1 and para. A2.7.1 have been made mandatory.)
425
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
Specification for
Polyamide 11 Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

1.1 This specification covers requirements and test methods 2.1 ASTM Standards:
for the characterization of polyamide 11 pipe, tubing, and D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
fittings for use in fuel gas piping. The pipe and fittings covered Chemical Reagents
by this specification are intended for use in the transport of fuel D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
gases. D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
1.1.1 This specification does not cover threaded pipe. Ge- D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
neric fusion guidelines are given in Appendix X1. Design Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
considerations are discussed in Appendix X2. In-plant quality D789 Test Methods for Determination of Solution Viscosi-
control programs are specified in Annex A1. ties of Polyamide (PA)
1.2 The text of this specification references notes, footnotes, D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and appendixes which provide explanatory material. These and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall als
not be considered as requirements of the specification. D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Under Constant Internal Pressure
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
and are not considered standard. Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
1.4 The following is an index of the annexes and appendixes D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
in this specification: tics
Annexes Subject D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)
Annex A1 In-Plant Quality Control for sizes up to 12 in. D2122 Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Ther-
Annex A2 PA-11 Butt Fusion Fittings moplastic Pipe and Fittings
Annex A3 Certification
Appendixes Subject D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Appendix X1 Butt Fusion Guidelines for PA-11 Piping Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
Appendix X2 Design Consideration
D2774 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplas-
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the tic Pressure Piping
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the D2837 Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
NOTE 1—Heat fusion joining of PA11 pipe and fittings meeting the thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
requirements of this standard is limited to PA11 pipe and fittings meeting Differential Scanning Calorimetry
the requirements of this Standard. Heat Fusion joining of PA11 pipe and D4066 Classification System for Nylon Injection and Extru-
fittings meeting the requirements of this standard is not allowed to pipes sion Materials (PA)
and fittings made from any other thermoplastic materials (for example,
PA12, PEs, PVCs, etc.).
426
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems ISO 22621 Part 1 Plastics piping systems for the supply of
F1025 Guide for Selection and Use of Full-Encirclement- gaseous fuels for maximum operating pressure up to and
Type Band Clamps for Reinforcement or Repair of Punc- including 2 MPa (20 bar)–Polyamide (PA): General
tures or Holes in Polyethylene Gas Pressure Pipe ISO 13478 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of
F1733 Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyamide(PA) fluids- Determination of resistance to rapid crack propa-
Plastic Fitting for Polyamide(PA) Plastic Pipe and Tubing gation (RCP) - Full-scale test (FST)
F1973 Specification for Factory Assembled Anodeless Ris- 2.6 Plastic Pipe Institute:
ers and Transition Fittings in Polyethylene (PE) and PPI TR3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydro-
Polyamide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12 (PA12) Fuel Gas static Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB),
Distribution Systems Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
F2138 Specification for Excess Flow Valves for Natural Gas Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Mate-
Service rials or Pipe
F2145 Specification for Polyamide 11 (PA 11) and Poly- PPI TR4 Hydrostatic Design Bases and Maximum Recom-
amide 12 (PA12) Mechanical Fittings for Use on Outside mended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic
Diameter Controlled Polyamide 11 and Polyamide 12 Pipe Piping Materials
and Tubing PPI TN7 Nature of Hydrostatic Stress Rupture Curves
F2600 Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyamide-11 PPI TR9 Recommended Design Factors for Pressure Appli-
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyamide-11 cations of Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
Pipe and Tubing PPI TR-45 Butt Fusion Joining Procedures for Field Joining
F2897 Specification for Tracking and Traceability Encoding of Polyamide-11
System of Natural Gas Distribution Components (Pipe,
Tubing, Fittings, Valves, and Appurtenances) 3. Terminology
2.2 ASME Standards: 3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
B 16.40 Manually Operated Thermoplastic Gas Shutoffs and nology F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
Valves in Gas Distribution Systems nology D1600, unless otherwise specified.
B 31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems 3.2 The gas industry terminology used in this specification
2.3 Federal Specifications: is in accordance with ASME B31.8 or 49 CFR 192, unless
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) otherwise indicated.
49 CFR 192, Transportation of Natural Gas and Other Gas
3.3 The term pipe used herein refers to both pipe and tubing
by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
unless specifically stated otherwise.
2.4 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage 3.4 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
MIL-STD-1235 (ORD) Single- and Multi-Level Continuous 3.4.1 re-rounding equipment, n—equipment used to reform
Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attri- the pipe and permanently reduce ovality to 5 % or less.
butes 3.4.2 rounding equipment, n—equipment, devices, clamps,
2.5 ISO Standards: and so forth, used to temporarily hold the pipe round while
ISO 75–1 Plastics - Determination of temperature of deflec- out-of-roundness measurements are made, or a joining proce-
tion under load - Part 1: General test method dure (heat fusion, electrofusion, or mechanical) is performed.
ISO 75–2 Determination of temperature of deflection under 3.4.3 standard thermoplastic material designated code,
load - Part 2: Plastics and ebonite n—the pipe material designation code shall consist of the
ISO 179/1eA Determination of Charpy impact properties. abbreviation for the polyamide (PA) followed by Arabic
Non-instrumented impact test numerals which describe the short term properties in accor-
ISO 527–1 Determination of tensile properties - Part 1: dance with Classifications from Table 2 followed by the
General principles hydrostatic design stress for water at 73.4°F (23°C) in units of
ISO 527–2 Determination of tensile properties - Part 2: Test 100 psi with any decimal figures dropped. Where the hydro-
conditions for moulding and extrusion plastics static design stress code contains less than two figures, a zero
ISO 1183 Methods for determining the density of non-
cellular plastics - Part 1: Immersion method, liquid py-
knometer method and titration method
TABLE 1 Sustained Pressure

Test PA 32312 PA 32316
Min Hr.
Temperature Hoop Stress Hoop Stress
73 ± 3.6 F 1000 hr 2800 psi 3200 psi
(23 ± 2 C) (19 MPa) (22 MPa)
176 ± 3.6F 100 hr 1850 psi 1850 psi
(80 ± 2 C) (12.7 MPa) (12.7 MPa)
427
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 2 D4066–94b Classifications (dry as molded)

Classification ASTM Test Method ISO Test Method Designation
PA Polyamide
3 (group) PA11
2 (class) Heat stabilized
3 (grade)
Relative Viscosity, min, D789 1.83
Melting Point, °C D3418, DTA or DSC 185 -195
Specific Gravity D792 ISO 1183 1/03-1.06
Tensile strength, min, (MPa) D638 ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2 48
Elongation (ultimate), %, min. D638 200
Flexural Modulus, Mpa D790 ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2 900
Izod Impact Resistance, J/m2, min ISO 179/ 1eA 55
Deflection temperature, min at 1.8 Mpa, min °C D648 ISO 75-1 and 75-2 40
Moisture, as received, max. D789 0.08
is used before the number. Thus, a complete material designa- request without limitations on disclosure, and shall not subse-
tion code shall consist of two letters and five figures for quently be subject to disclosure limitations when used by
polyamide 11 materials. For example, PA 32316 is a polyamide others. The values obtained are applicable to all pipes with the
11 with a 1600 psi design stress for water at 73.4°F (23°C). The wall thickness of the pipe tested and all thinner wall pipes.
hydrostatic design stresses for gas are not used in this desig-
4.5 Rework Material—Clean PA11 rework material of the
nation code.
same commercial designation, generated from the manufactur-
3.4.4 thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (DR), n—the ratio er’s own pipe and fitting production shall not be used unless the
of pipe diameter to wall thickness. It is calculated by dividing pipe and fitting produced meet all the requirements of this
the specified outside diameter of the pipe, in inches, by the specification. The use of these PA11 rework materials shall be
minimum specified wall thickness, in inches. The standard governed by the requirements of 4.6 and the principals of PPI
dimension ratio (SDR) is a common numbering system which TN-30/2006. In pipe, rework materials shall be limited to a
is derived from the ANSI preferred number series R 10. maximum of 30 % by weight.
3.4.5 toe-in, n—a small reduction of the outside diameter at 4.6 Documentation—A documentation system to allow for
the cut end of a length of thermoplastic pipe. traceability of raw materials including percentage and material
4. Requirements for Materials classification (or designation, if applicable) of rework materials
used in the manufacture of the pipe product meeting the
4.1 General—The polyamide 11 material used to make pipe requirements of this specification shall exist and be supplied to
and fittings shall be virgin or reworked material (see 4.5) and the purchaser, if requested.
shall have a Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) long-term hydrostatic
design stress and hydrostatic design basis rating as determined 5. Requirements for Pipe and Fittings
per PPI TR3 and PPI TR4.
5.1 General—Pipe shall be supplied in either coils or
4.2 Classification—Polyamide materials suitable for use in straight lengths. Any pipe supplied in coils must meet the same
the manufacturing of pipe and fittings under this specification requirements before and after coiling.
shall be classified in accordance with Classification D4066-
94b, as shown in Table 2. 5.2 Workmanship—The pipe and fittings shall be homoge-
neous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign
4.3 Short- and Long-Term Properties—Polyamide 11 pipe
inclusion, blisters, and dents, or other injurious defects. The
and fittings shall be made from a Polyamide 11 material which
pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practi-
also satisfies the combinations of short- and long-term property
cable in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
requirements shown in Table 3.
4.4 Resistance to Rapid Crack Propagation (RCP) for 5.3 Pipe and Tubing Dimensions and Tolerances:
Materials—The material classification (formulation) used in 5.3.1 Dimension—The dimensions shall be specified by
the manufacture of pipe and fittings under this specification wall thickness and outside diameter.
shall be tested for resistance to failure by RCP in accordance 5.3.1.1 Diameters—The outside diameter shall meet the
with 6.6. The data obtained shall be made available upon requirements given in Table 4 or Table 5 when measured in
TABLE 3 Short and Long Term Property Requirements
5.3.1.2 Toe-In—When measured in accordance with 6.5.1.1,
the outside diameter at the cut end of the pipe shall not be more
Short-Term in Long-Term in
PA Material
Accordance with Accordance with than 1.5 % smaller than the undistorted outside diameter.
Designation Code
Table 2 D2837 Measurement of the undistorted outside diameter shall be made
PA32312 PA323 HDB of 2500 psi no closer than 1.5 pipe diameters or 11.8 in. (300 mm),
for 73°F (23°C) whichever distance is less, from the cut end of the pipe.
PA32316 PA323 HDB of 3150 psi
for 73°F (23°C) Undistorted outside diameter shall meet the requirements of
Table 4 or Table 5.
428
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
TABLE 4 Outside Diameters and Tolerances for PA11 Pipe, in. (mm)
Maximum out-of-roundness
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Tolerance
(SDR 13.5 SDR 11)
⁄
12 0.840 (21.3) ±0.004 (±0.102) 0.016 (0.406)
⁄
34 1.050 (26.7) ±0.004 (±0.102) 0.02 (0.508)
1 1.315 (33.4) ±0.005 (±0.127) 0.02 (0.508)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.1) ±0.005 (±0.127) 0.024 (0.61)
2 2.375 (60.3) ±0.006 (±0.152) 0.024 (0.61)
3 3.500 (88.9) ±0.008 (±0.203) 0.03 (0.762)
4 4.500 (114.3) ±0.009 (±0.229) 0.03 (0.762)
5 5.563 (141.3) ±0.010 (±0.254) 0.06 (1.524)
6 6.625 (168.3) ±0.011 (±0.279) 0.07 (1.778)
8 8.625 (219.1) ±0.013 (±0.330) 0.08 (2.04)
10 10.750 (273.0) ±0.015 (±0.381) 0.1 (2.5)
12 12.750 (323.8) ±0.017 (±0.432) 0.1 (2.5)
TABLE 5 Tubing Diameters, Wall Thicknesses, and Tolerances, in. (mm)

Nominal Tubing Size (CTS) Outside Diameter Tolerance Maximum Wall Thickness Wall Thickness Tolerance
⁄
12 0.625 (15.9) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.27) +0.009 (+0.23)
1⁄ 2 0.625 (15.9) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.104 (2.64) +0.010 (+0.25)
3⁄ 4 0.875 (22.2) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.27) +0.009 (+0.23)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.090 (2.27) +0.012 (+0.31)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.099 (2.51) +0.011 (+0.28)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.101 (2.56) +0.012 (+0.31)
1 1.125 (28.6) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.121 (3.07) +0.015 (+0.38)
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.9) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.090 (2.27) +0.011 (+0.28)
1 1⁄ 4 1.375 (34.9) ±0.005 (±0.13) 0.121 (3.07) +0.015 (+0.38)
5.3.1.3 Wall Thickness—The wall thickness shall be as 5.4 Conditioning—For those tests where conditioning is
specified in Table 5 or Table 6 when measured in accordance required, or unless otherwise specified, condition the speci-
with 6.5.1.2. The minimum wall thickness at any point of mens prior to testing for a minimum of 1 h in water or 4 h in
measurement shall be not less than the minimum wall thickness air at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) or in accordance with 6.3. The
specified in Table 5 or Table 6. conditioning requirements of 6.3 shall be used in all cases of
5.3.1.4 Wall Thickness Eccentricity Range—The wall thick- disagreement.
ness eccentricity range shall be within 12 % when measured in
accordance with 6.5.1.3. 5.5 Slow Crack Growth Resistance—PA 11 materials shall
5.3.1.5 Ovality—The ovality (cross section) of 3 in. IPS meet a slow crack growth resistance requirement of 500 hours
(88.9 mm) and smaller pipe shall not exceed 5 % when when tested in accordance with 6.6.
measured in accordance with 6.5.3. Measurements of coiled 5.6 Resistance to Rapid Crack Propagation (RCP)—
pipe shall be made on a sample cut from the coil, and in case Additional testing for resistance to RCP is required when the
of disagreement, conditioned per 6.3. wall thickness of the pipe being produced in accordance with
NOTE 2—Other factors, that is, installation compaction, static soil this standard exceeds that of the pipe used to establish the
loading, and dynamic vehicular loads may increase the ovality; therefore, resistance to RCP. In these circumstances, additional testing for
5 % was chosen as the limit for the amount contributed by manufacturing, resistance to failure by RCP in accordance with 6.6 shall be
packing, in-plant storage, and shipping.
conducted. The data obtained shall be made available upon
(1) Before or during installation, coiled pipe larger than 3
request without limitations on disclosure, and shall not subse-
in. IPS (88.9 mm) shall be processed by the installer through
quently be subject to disclosure limitations when used by
re-rounding equipment that corrects ovality to 5 % or less.
NOTE 3—Ovality is a packaging condition that occurs when roundable
others.
pipe is wound into a coil—the pipe flattens out as it is coiled. Ovality is NOTE 4—The requirements and testing for resistance to RCP do not
corrected when joining equipment is applied to roundable pipe, or by field provide information for all possible conditions of use. The user should
processing roundable pipe through re-rounding and straightening equip- consult with the manufacturer and other appropriate sources such as resin
ment during installation. suppliers, research, academia, etc., to determine that the RCP resistance
provided by the pipe producer is sufficient for the intended use.
5.3.1.6 Length—The pipe shall be supplied in straight
lengths or coils as agreed upon between the manufacturer and 5.7 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure/Apparent Tensile
the purchaser. The length shall not be less than the minimum Strength (Quick Burst)—The pipe or system shall fail in a
length agreed upon when corrected to 73°F (23°C). ductile manner when tested in accordance with Test Method
5.3.1.7 When sizes other than those listed in Table 4, Table D1599 at a hoop stress greater than 3900 psi (27 MPa). For
5 or Table 6 are used, tolerances shall be: for outside diameter, pipe sizes above 4-in. nominal diameter, the testing laboratory
use same tolerance of next smaller size; for wall thickness, use shall be allowed to replace the quick burst test (Test Method
same tolerance percentage as shown in the tables. D1599) by the apparent ring tensile strength test (Test Method
429
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE 6 Wall Thickness and Tolerances for PA11 Pipe, in. (mm)A,B
Nominal Pipe Size (IPS) DRC Minimum Tolerance
⁄
12 9.33 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
3⁄4 D 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
11.0 0.095 (2.41) +0.011 (+0.279)
1 Sch 40 0.113 (2.87) +0.014 (+0.356)
D 0.090 (2.29) +0.011 (+0.279)
17 0.112 (2.85) +0.013 (+0.330)
13.5 0.141 (3.58) +0.017 (+0.432)
Sch 40 0.145 (3.68) +0.017 (+0.432)
11 0.173 (4.39) +0.021 (+0.533)
2 11 0.216 (5.49) +0.026 (+0.660)
9.33 0.255 (6.48) +0.031 (+0.787)
3 13.5 0.259 (6.58) +0.031 (+0.787)
11.5 0.304 (7.72) +0.036 (+0.914)
11 0.318 (8.08) +0.038 (+0.965)
9.33 0.375 (9.53) +0.045 (+1.143)
4 17 0.265 (6.73) +0.032 (+0.813)
13.5 0.333 (8.46) +0.040 (+1.016)
11.5 0.391 (9.93) +0.047 (+1.194)
11.0 0.409 (10.39) +0.049 (+1.246)
9.33 0.482 (12.24) +0.058 (+1.473)
6 17 0.390 (9.91) +0.047 (+1.194)
13.5 0.491 (12.47) +0.059 (+1.499)
11.5 0.576 (14.63) +0.069 (+1.753)
11.0 0.602 (15.29) +0.072 (+1.829)
8 21 0.411 (10.44) +0.049 (+1.245)
17 0.507 (12.90) +0.061 (+1.549)
13.5 0.639 (16.23) +0.077 (+1.956)
11.5 0.750 (19.05) +0.090 (+2.286)
11 0.784 (19.91) +0.094 (+2.388)
10 21 0.512 (13.00) +0.061 (+1.549)
17 0.632 (16.05) +0.076 (+1.930)
13.5 0.796 (20.22) +0.096 (+2.438)
11.5 0.935 (23.75) +0.112 (+2.845)
11 0.977 (24.82) +0.117 (+2.972)
12 21 0.607 (15.42) +0.073 (+1.854)
17 0.750 (19.05) +0.090 (+2.286)
13.5 0.944 (23.98) +0.113 (+2.870)
11.5 1.109 (28.17) +0.133 (+3.378)
11 1.159 (29.44) +0.139 (+3.531)
A
The sizes listed in Table 6 are those commercially available sizes used by the gas industry.
B
C
The DR shown are designations commonly accepted by the gas industry and do not calculate exactly.
D2290). The minimum apparent tensile strength at yield when 5.10 Chemical Resistance—The weight, yield strength, and
determined in accordance with 6.9 shall be 3900 psi (27 MPa). relative viscosity requirements for PA11 pipe when measured
5.8 Sustained Pressure—Using one of the two test condi- in accordance with 6.10 are in Table 7.
tions in Table 1, the pipe or system shall not fail in less than the 5.11 Elevated Temperature Service—Polyamide 11 piping
prescribed hours when tested in accordance with Test Method materials intended for use at temperatures above 100°F (38°C)
D1598. shall have the PPI hydrostatic design basis (HDB) determined
5.9 Outdoor Storage Stability—Black polyamide 11 materi- at the specific temperature in accordance with Test Method
als shall contain 2 to 3 percent well dispersed carbon black, and D2837. The 100 000-h intercept (long-term strength) shall be
due to the absorptive properties of the carbon black, is categorized in accordance with Table 8 and be listed as the
considered to be stabilized against deterioration from unpro- “hydrostatic design basis of XXX psi at XXX °F (C°) for
tected exposure to UV for not less than 10 years. Yellow (compound name).”
polyamide 11 material shall be stabilized and protected against
TABLE 7 Chemical Resistances
deterioration from unprotected UV exposure for not less than 3
years. Yield Strength Relative
Weight Change,
Chemical Change, Viscosity,
NOTE 5—The determination for outdoor storage resistance is often max%
max% %
based on measuring the ductility properties of the pipe material exposed
Mineral Oil +0.5 –12 ±3
to artificial weathering. These requirements and test methods are based on
Tertiary-butyl +0.5 –12 ±3
expected UV exposure levels in North America. Alternate requirements mercaptan (5%)
and alternate determination methods may be appropriate in other regions Methanol +5 –35 ±3
of the world. As an example ISO 4437 standard requires a minimum Ethylene glycol +0.5 –12 ±3
resistance to an accumulation of 3.6GJ for non-black polyethylene Toulene (15%) +7 –40 ±3
materials.
430
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
TABLE 8 Pipe Categories

Test Category
Property
Method A B C D E F G H
Temperature, ... 100 (38) 120 (49) 140 (60) 160 (71) 180 (82) ... ... ...
°F (°C)
Hydrostatic Design D2837 400 (2.8) 500 (3.4) 630 (4.3) 800 (5.5) 1000 (6.9) 1250 (8.6) 1600 (11.0) 2000 (13.8)
Basis, psi (MPa)
Examples: CH – At 140°F the HDB is 2000 psi (13.8 MPa)
5.12 Squeeze Off—This requirement is limited to pipe sizes, 5.14.3 Mechanical Fittings—Mechanical fittings intended
wall thicknesses, squeeze procedures, and conditions deemed for use with PA11 piping systems shall conform to the
suitable for squeeze-off in service by the pipe manufacturer. requirements contained within Specification F2145. Mechani-
There shall be no leakage or visual evidence of splitting, cal fittings shall be installed in accordance with the user’s
cracking, breaking, or reduction in Sustained Pressure require- written procedures and the fitting manufacturer’s installation
ments when pipe is tested as follows: instructions.
5.12.1 Prepare six randomly selected pipe specimens in 5.14.4 Transition Fittings and Anodeless Risers—Transition
accordance with Test Method D1598, except they shall be fittings and anodeless risers intended for use with PA11 piping
unfilled. systems shall conform to the requirements contained within
5.12.2 The squeeze-off shall be affected at the midpoint of Specification F1973.
the test specimen, 90° to the point of the measured minimum 5.15 Valves—PA-11 thermoplastic gas valves shall meet the
wall thickness. Close the squeeze bars to the gap stop in requirements of ASME Standard B16.40.
Specification F1563 and hold in constraint for 4 h. Remove
squeeze bars and reround pipe by closing squeeze bars at a 5.16 Excess Flow Valves—Excess flow valves shall meet the
point 90° for the squeeze area. requirements of Specification F2138.
5.12.3 Immediately upon removal of the squeeze-off tool, 6. Test Methods
fill the specimens with ambient temperature water that is 67 6
10°F (19.4 6 5.0°C), condition, and test in accordance with 6.1 General—The test methods in this specification cover
5.8. plastic pipe and fittings to be used for the transport of fuel gas
NOTE 6—Many design factors for elevated temperature service cannot . Test methods that are applicable from other specifications will
be covered in this specification. Users should consult applicable codes for be referenced in the paragraph pertaining to that particular test.
limitations on pertinent maximum temperatures.
6.2 Sampling—Take a representative sample of the pipe and
5.13 Joints: fittings sufficient to determine conformance with this specifi-
5.13.1 Butt Fusion: cation. About 40 ft (12 m) of pipe is required to perform all the
5.13.1.1 Butt fusion joints of polyamide 11 pipe and fittings tests prescribed. The number of fittings required varies, de-
should be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recom- pending upon the size and type of fitting. A sampling plan shall
mendations and the user’s written procedure. be agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer (see
5.13.1.2 PA 11 butt fusion joining shall be between compo- Practice D1898).
nents (pipes, fittings, or valves) having the same SDR or DR. 6.2.1 Pipe Test Specimens—Not less than 50 % of the test
Butt fusion between unlike SDR or DR components shall be specimens required for any pressure test shall have at least a
allowed only if it has been demonstrated that long term part of the marking in their central sections. The central section
performance is not adversely affected. The minimum require- is that portion of pipe which is at least one pipe diameter away
ment to demonstrate long term performance shall be the from an end closure.
requirements of 5.7 of this specification. The Hydrostatic
Design Basis (HDB) of the PA11 material shall be confirmed 6.3 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition the
using specimens containing butt fusion joints resulting from specimens prior to test at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6
different SDRs or DRs. Pipe/pipe joints of the material that 5 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h, in accordance with
pass shall validate pipe/pipe, pipe/fitting, or fitting/fitting joints Procedure A of Practice D618 for those tests where condition-
of the same SDR ratio for the material. ing is required and in all cases of disagreement.
5.14 Fittings—Fittings shall meet the requirements of the 6.4 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard labo-
applicable ASTM standards. ratory atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 5 %
5.14.1 Butt Heat Fusion Fittings—Butt heat fusion fittings relative humidity, unless otherwise specified.
intended for use with PA11 piping systems shall conform to the 6.5 Dimensions and Tolerances:
requirements of Annex A2 of this standard. 6.5.1 Pipe—Any length of pipe is used to determine the
5.14.2 Electrofusion Fittings—Electrofusion fittings in- dimensions. Coiled pipe shall be measured in the natural
tended for use with PA11 piping systems shall conform to the springback condition, unless specified otherwise.
requirements contained within Specification F2600. Electrofu- 6.5.1.1 Diameter—Measure the diameter of the pipe in
sion joints shall be made in accordance to user’s written accordance with Test Method D2122. The average outside
procedures and the fitting manufacturer’s installation instruc- diameter for nonroundable pipe is the arithmetic average of the
tions. maximum and minimum diameters at any cross section on the
431
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
length of the pipe. For roundable pipe, out-of-roundness temperatures of 100°F (38°C) and higher shall be tested at both
tolerance applies to measurements made while the pipe is 73°F (23°C) and the maximum design temperature. The test
rounded with the manufacturer’s recommended equipment. fiber stress shall be the hydrostatic design basis (HDB) or 80 %
Measure out-of-roundness within one-half pipe diameter or 2 of the 100 000-h intercept of the material, whichever is
in. (50 mm), whichever is closer, of the rounding equipment. greater.
See Test Method D2122 for definitions of nonroundable and NOTE 8—Air, methane, or nitrogen may be substituted for water as the
roundable pipe. test medium.
(1) The pipe surface shall be free of gross imperfections
6.7.2 Maintain the specimens at the pressures required, held
such as, deep scratches, grooves, or high or low (flat) spots
to 610 psi (0.07 MPa), for a period of 1000 h at the test
around the pipe circumference.
temperature 63.6°F (62°C).
NOTE 7—Excessive out-of-roundness may be caused by manufacturing 6.7.3 Failure of two of the six specimens tested shall
irregularities around the circumference of the pipe, such as deep scratches, constitute failure in the test. Failure of one of the six specimens
gouges, flat spots, and high spots. Such defects could detrimentally affect
joining. To simulate field joining of roundable pipe, out-of-roundness is
tested is cause for retest of six additional specimens. Failure of
checked by fitting a rounding device on the pipe, then measuring diameter. one of the six specimens in retest shall constitute failure in the
test. Evidence of failure of the pipe shall be as defined in Test
6.5.1.2 Wall Thickness—Make a minimum of six measure-
Method D1598.
ments at each cross section in accordance with Test Method
D2122. 6.8 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure (Quick Burst)—
6.5.1.3 Wall Thickness Eccentricity Range—Measure in a The test equipment, procedures, and failure definitions shall be
manner such that the maximum, A, and the minimum, B, wall as specified in Test Method D1599. Pressures shall be at a
thickness at single points of each cross section measured are stress greater than 3900 psi (27 MPa) or as calculated (using
obtained. Calculate the wall thickness eccentricity range, E, in the pipe’s actual measured minimum wall thickness, outside
percent for each cross section as follows: diameter, and the applicable fiber stress), whichever is greater.
E 5 @ ~ A 2 B ! ⁄A # 3 100 (1) 6.9 Apparent Tensile Properties—The procedure and test
equipment shall be as specified in Test Method D2290,
6.5.1.4 Length—Measure pipe length and other linear di- Procedure B. The speed of testing shall be 0.5 in. (12.7
mensions with a steel tape or other device, accurate to 61⁄32 in. mm)/min. Cut “ring” specimens from pipe. They shall be 1⁄2 in.
(61 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). (12.7 mm) wide with a 1⁄4 in. (6.3-mm) wide reduced section.
6.5.2 Fittings—Measure the dimensions of fittings in accor- Test a minimum of five specimens. This method is applicable
dance with Test Method D2122. to all pipe of nominal 3⁄4 in. (19.0-mm) outside diameter and
6.5.3 Ovality: larger.
6.5.3.1 Apparatus—A micrometer or vernier caliper accu-
rate to within 60.001 in. (60.02 mm). 6.10 Chemical Resistance—Determine the resistance to the
6.5.3.2 Procedure—Take a series of outside diameter (OD) following chemicals in accordance with Test Method D543.
measurements at closely spaced intervals around the circum- Where available, the test specimen shall be a ring 2 in. SDR 11
ference to ensure that the minimum and maximum diameters pipe cut to the ring dimensions specified in 6.10. For materials
have been determined. that are not readily available as 2 in. SDR 11 pipe, the test
6.5.3.3 Calculation—Calculate the percent ovality as fol- specimen shall be a plaque of material 1⁄4 by 2 by 4 in. (6.3 by
lows: 50.8 by 101.6 mm) with a 1 in. (25.4 mm) wide reduced
section. Test five specimens with each chemical. Weigh the
maximum OD 2 minimum OD
% ovality 5 3 200 (2) specimens to the nearest 0.005 g and completely immerse them
OD minimum 1 OD maximum
in the chemicals for 72 h. On removal from the chemicals, wipe
6.6 Resistance to Rapid Crack Propagation (RCP)—Test in the specimens with a clean dry cloth. Condition in air for 2 to
accordance with ISO 13478 with the following modification. 21⁄4 h and reweigh. Calculate the increase in weight to the
Temperature of cooling for the crack-initiation groove (10.1 of nearest 0.01 % on the basis of initial weight. Test the specimen
ISO 13478:1997): 0 °C as prescribed in ISO 22621-1 Annex C. in tension in accordance with 6.9 within 1⁄2 h after weighing.
6.7 Sustained Pressure Test: Examine the weight and apparent tensile strength of each
6.7.1 Select six test specimens of pipe at random, condition specimen for conformance to the requirement in 5.10 and Table
at the standard laboratory test temperature and humidity, and 7. Warning—Because of the possible toxicity of these
pressure test in accordance with Test Method D1598. reagents, refers to the Material Safety Data Sheet on each of
6.7.1.1 Test specimens shall be prepared so that the mini- these reagents before using or handling them.
mum length of pipe is equal to 5 times the diameter of the pipe
but in no case less than 12 in. (304 mm) for sizes less than 6 7. Marking
in. For sizes 6 in. and larger, the minimum length shall be equal 7.1 Pipe—All required marking shall be legible, visible, and
to 3 times the diameter or 30 in. (762 mm), whichever is permanent. To ensure permanence, marking shall be applied so
shorter. it can only be removed by physically removing part of the pipe
6.7.1.2 Test pressures shall be calculated using the pipe’s wall. The marking shall (1) not reduce the wall thickness to less
actual measured minimum wall thickness, outside diameter, than the minimum value for the pipe, (2) not have any effect on
and the applicable fiber stress. Piping intended for use at the long-term strength of the pipe, and (3) not provide leakage
432
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
channels when elastomeric gasket compression fittings are SF-2945 or both ASME SF-2945 and ASTM F2945, (8) Manu-
used to make the joints. These marking shall consist of the facturer’s lot code (includes date of manufacture in some cases), and
word GAS, ASME SF-2945 or both ASME SF-2945 and (9) Additional information, including date of manufacture, coil
number, sequential footage, third party certification mark etc.
ASTM F2945, the manufacturer’s name or trademark, the
nominal pipe size including the sizing system used (IPS, CTS, 7.2.1 Where applicable, PA 32312 and PA 32316 pipe shall
or OD), DR or minimum wall thickness, material designation, be marked with the elevated temperature code letters in
and date of manufacture. accordance with Table 8, in addition to the marking require-
7.1.1 In addition to 7.1, the pipe marking shall include a ments of 7.1.
coding that will enable the manufacturer to determine the 7.3 All PA11 pipe, tubing, and butt fusion fittings meeting
location of manufacture, pipe production and resin lots, and the requirements of this specification for gas distribution
any additional information which is agreed upon between the systems shall be marked with the 16-character gas distribution
manufacturer and purchaser. The manufacturer shall maintain component tracking and traceability identifier in accordance
such records for fifty years or for the design service life of the with Specification F2897. The 16-character code shall be
pipe, whichever is longer. expressed in alpha-numeric format and Code 128 bar code
7.1.2 All the markings in 7.1 and 7.1.1 shall be repeated at format with a minimum bar thickness value of 0.005 in. or an
intervals not exceeding 2 ft (0.6 m). For indented printing, alternative 1D or 2D bar code symbology as agreed upon
either the indented print line shall be in a color that contrasts between manufacturer and end user. All fittings shall have the
with that of the pipe, or a separate print line shall be in a color 16-character codes marked or affixed to the product, product
that contrasts with the pipe. When color is applied to identify packaging, or any manner agreed upon between manufacturer
gas service, such as with color stripes, color print line, a color and end user.
shell or solid color pipe, yellow color shall be used. 7.4 Butt Fusion Fittings—In addition to the applicable
NOTE 9—Using color to identify piping service is not mandatory, but if requirements above, butt fusion fittings shall be marked in
used, yellow color is required. accordance with Annex A2.
7.2 PA-11 pipe and fittings intended for natural gas service 8. Quality Assurance
at elevated temperatures greater than 73°F (23°C) shall be
marked with additional code letters from Table 8 (the first code
letter to identify the temperature of pressure rating, the second
code letter to identify HDB at highest rated temperature).
NOTE 10—The non-mandatory, preferred order for all the items required
in the print line in the marking sections 7.1 and 7.2 are: (1) Pipe size 9. Certification
including sizing system (IPS, CTS or OD), (2) SDR (DR) or minimum
wall thickness, (3) Manufacturer’s name or trademark, (4) GAS, (5) Pipe 9.1 Certification shall be as required by Annex A3.
material designation code, (that is, PA 32312 or 32316) (6) Elevated
temperature code from Table 8 as per 7.2 where applicable, (7) ASME
S1. Responsibility for Inspection the materials shall be packaged in accordance with the suppli-
S1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase er’s standard practices in a manner ensuring arrival at destina-
order, the producer is responsible for performance of all tion in satisfactory condition and which will be acceptable to
inspection and test requirements specified herein. The producer the carrier at lowest rates. Containers and packing shall comply
shall use his own or any other suitable facilities for the with Uniform Freight Classification rules or National Motor
performance of the inspection and test requirements specified Freight Classification rules.
herein, unless the purchaser disapproves. The purchaser shall S2.2 Marking—Marking for shipment shall be in accor-
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set dance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed 129 for military agencies.
necessary to ensure that material conforms to prescribed NOTE S2—The inclusion of U.S. Government procurement require-
requirements. ments should not be construed as an indication that the U.S. Government
NOTE S1—In U.S. federal contracts, the contractor is responsible for uses or endorses the products described in this specification.
inspection.
ment
433
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
ANNEXES
A1. IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS UP TO AND INCLUDING 12 IN.
NOMINAL DIAMETER
A1.1 Quality Control duction conditions must be carefully chosen to ensure a

A1.1.1 The following in-plant quality control program shall continuous and consistent high quality output. Any interruption
be used to assure compliance with this specification. The pipe (shutdown) or change in resin lot number, percentage rework,
and fittings producers shall maintain records on all aspects of or production conditions outside normal operating variations
this program and supply these to the purchaser, if requested. shall cause sampling to revert to Level 1. A sampling level
change is considered only when approved by a production
A1.1.2 In-Plant Quality Control Test Methods—Test meth- supervisor or authorized quality control personnel.
ods other than those specified in Section 6 are used as long as Level 1 Test one specimen every 8 h. If 16 consecutive
they provide equivalent results. In case of disagreement, those specimens have met requirements, proceed to Level 2.
test methods in the applicable ASTM standard shall be used. Level 2 Collect one specimen every 8 h. After 72 h (3 days)
A1.2 Pipe Tests or portion thereof, test two randomly selected specimens. If
both pass, discard the remaining 7 specimens. If any specimen
A1.2.1 Material and Extrusion Process Qualification— fails to meet requirements, revert to Level 1 (see also Note
Sustained pressure tests shall be made on one pipe size in the A1.1). Product for which a specimen has been collected shall
range of 2 in., or less, and on one pipe size in the range of 21⁄2 not be shipped until after the 72-h time period and randomly
in., or greater. This test shall also be made on pipe from each selected samples have been tested. Continue to test 2 out of 9
particular commercial plastic resin initially and at least twice a specimens for 16 three-day periods (48 days of production),
year thereafter for material and extrusion process qualification then proceed to Level 3. Level 3 Collect one specimen every
and not as a quality control on the product. This test shall be 8 h. After 21 days or portion thereof, test three randomly
made in accordance with 6.7. selected specimens. If all three pass, discard the remaining
A1.2.2 Product Quality Control—The tests in Table A1.1 specimens. If any specimen fails to meet requirements, revert
shall be made per size per extrusion die at the denoted to Level 1 (see also Note A1.3). Product for which a specimen
frequencies and the test results recorded and filed for inspec- has been collected shall not be shipped until after the 21-day
tion on request. time period. Continue testing at Level 3 until production
NOTE A1.1—When the pipe fails to meet this specification in any test, conditions necessitate reverting to Level 1.
additional tests shall be made on the pipe produced back to the previous
acceptable result to select the pipe produced in the interim that does pass A1.3 Fitting Tests
the requirement. Pipe that does not meet the requirement shall be rejected.
NOTE A1.2—For pipe sizes above 4-in. nominal diameter, the quick A1.3.1 The fittings tests listed in the following sub-
burst test (Test Method D1599) may be replaced by the Apparent Ring paragraphs shall be conducted at the frequencies indicated.
Tensile Strength Test (Test Method D2290) if agreed to between the NOTE A1.3—When any fitting fails to meet the requirements of this
purchaser and the manufacturer. specification, or the applicable referenced fitting specification, additional
tests should be made on fittings produced back to previous acceptable
A1.2.3 Burst Pressure Multilevel Plan (see Fig. A1.1)—This result to select the fittings produced in the interim that do meet the
multilevel plan is based on MIL-STD-1235 (ORD), and is used requirements. Fitting that do not meet the requirements shall be rejected.
only when the same product is extruded continuously under the
A1.3.2 Dimensions:
same operating conditions and production is at a steady rate.
A1.3.2.1 Butt Fusion Fittings:
Before this reduced sampling plan is considered, steady pro-
(1) Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness—Once an hour
or one out of ten fittings, whichever is less frequent?
TABLE A1.1 Product Quality Control Tests
A1.3.3 Other Tests:
Property Frequency
A1.3.3.1 At the start of each production run, whenever
Diameter Once every hour or every coil,
production conditions have changed or when the resin lot is
Wall thickness Once every hour or every coil, changed, but not less frequently than once per 500 fittings
whichever is less frequent thereafter, the following tests shall be made:
Ring tensile or burst pressure Once every 8 h or once every coil,
whichever is less frequent, or
multilevel plan described in A3.2.3
434
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
FIG. A1.1 Quick Burst Multilevel Sampling Plan
(1) The knit line strength for at least one fitting from each (1c) Burst testing of the fitting. See Note A1.5.
cavity shall be demonstrated by one of the following tests: (2) The integrity of at least one part from each mold cavity
(1a) Crushing a fitting, or a portion of a fitting, in a manner shall be verified, using a method selected by the manufacturer
that applies load in the direction normal to the knit line. See as appropriate for this specific product and process.
Note A1.4.
(1b) Apparent tensile strength tests of a ring cut from a NOTE A1.4—Separation in the knit constitutes a failure.
fitting, with the load oriented normal to the knit line. See Note NOTE A1.5—In tests 2 and 3 the strength requirements shown in this
A1.5. standard must be met.
A2. REQUIREMENTS FOR PA-11 BUTT FUSION FITTINGS
A2.1 Scope A2.2.1.2 Fittings fabricated by thermal welding are not

included in this Annex.
A2.1.1 This specification covers polyamide-11 (PA-11) butt
fusion fittings for use with pipe (IPS) and tubing (CTS). A2.3 Requirements for Fittings
Included are requirements for materials, workmanship,
A2.3.1 In addition to the fitting requirements of the body of
dimensions, marking, sustained pressure, and burst pressure.
this standard, PA-11 butt fusion fittings shall meet the follow-
A2.1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be ing requirements:
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are A2.3.2 Dimensions and Tolerances:
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for
A2.3.2.1 Outside Diameter—Nominal outside diameters of
information only and are not considered standard. butt fusion fittings shall conform to the nominal iron pipe size
A2.2 Classification (IPS) or copper tubing size (CTS) dimensions at area of fusion.
These dimensions and tolerances shall be as shown in Table
A2.2.1 General—This Annex covers butt fusion fittings A2.1, Table A2.2, and Table A2.3 of this Annex.
intended for use with polyamide 11 (PA-11) gas piping and A2.3.2.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Inside di-
tubing. ameters of butt fusion fittings for tubing at area of fusion shall
A2.2.1.1 Fittings covered by this Annex are normally conform to the dimensions of the tubing being joined. The
molded. Fittings may be machined from extruded or molded dimensions and tolerances for the fittings are shown in Table
stock. A2.3.
435
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE A2.1 IPS Sizing System Outside Diameters and A2.5.1.2 Inside Diameter (CTS Fittings Only)—Inside di-
Tolerances for Fittings for Use with Polyamide-11 (PA-11) Pipe, ameters of butt fusion fittings for tubing at area of fusion shall
in.
conform to the dimensions of the tubing being joined. The
Average Outside
Nominal Pipe
Diameter at Tolerance
dimensions and tolerances for the fittings are shown in Table
Size A2.3.
Area of FusionA
⁄
12 0.840 ±0.008 A2.5.1.3 Wall Thickness—Make a series of measurements
⁄
34 1.050 ±0.008 using a cylindrical anvil tubular micrometer or other accurate
1 1.315 ±0.010
1 1⁄ 4 1.660 ±0.010
device at closely spaced intervals to ensure that minimum and
1 1⁄ 2 1.900 ±0.010 maximum wall thicknesses to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm)
2 2.375 ±0.010 have been determined. Make a minimum of six measurements
3 3.500 ±0.012
4 4.500 ±0.015
at each cross section.
.6 6.625 ±0.018 A2.5.2 Pressure Testing:
8 8.625 ±0.025
10 10.750 ±0.027 A2.5.2.1 Preparation of Specimens for Pressure Testing—
12 12.750 ±0.036 Prepare test specimens in such a manner that each, whether
A
Defined as measured 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) from fitting outlet extremity. individual fittings or groups of fittings, is a system incorporat-
ing at least one length of pipe or tubing. Fuse all fitting outlets
with the appropriate size pipe or tubing. At least one piece of
pipe or tubing in the system shall have a minimum length equal
to five pipe diameters.
A2.3.2.3 Wall Thickness—The wall thicknesses of butt fu- A2.5.2.2 Sustained Pressure Test:
sion fittings shall not be less than the minimum specified for (1) Select the test temperature and pressures from one of
the pipe or tubing. The wall thicknesses and tolerances at the the options offered in Table A2.5.
area of fusion shall be as shown in Table A2.3, Table A2.4, of (2) Select the test specimens at random and condition at the
this Annex. selected option test temperature. Test the fitting specimens with
A2.3.2.4 Measurements—These shall be made in accor- water, in accordance with Test Method D1598 at the selected
dance with Test Method D2122 for roundable pipe. option, stress, and hours of testing.
A2.3.3 Pressure Test Requirements: Note—Other test mediums and test conditions than of-
A2.3.3.1 Short-Term Rupture Strength for Fittings 1⁄2 to 12 fered in Table A2.5 may be used as agreed upon between the
in. and 90 to 315 mm, Nominal Diameter—The minimum manufacturer and the purchaser.
short-term rupture strength of the fitting and fused pipe or (3) Test six specimens at the selected option conditions and
tubing shall not be less than the minimum short-term rupture time.
strength of the pipe or tubing in the system when tested in (4) Failure of two of the six specimens tested shall consti-
accordance with 10.5.3. These minimum pressures shall be as tute failure of the test. Failure of one of the six specimens
shown in Table A2.4 of this Annex. Test specimens shall be tested is cause for retest of six additional specimens. Failure of
prepared for testing in the manner described in 6.8 of this one of the six specimens in retest shall constitute failure of the
specification. The test equipment, procedures, and failures test.
definitions shall be as specified in Test Method D1599. A2.5.3 Minimum Hydrostatic Burst Pressure for Fittings 1⁄2
A2.3.3.2 Sustained Pressure—The fitting and fused pipe or to 12 in. Nominal Diameter—The test equipment, procedures,
tubing shall not fail, as defined in Test Method D1598, when and failure definitions shall be as specified in Test Method
tested at the time, pressures, and test temperatures selected D1599. The hydrostatic pressure shall be increased at a
from test options offered in Table A2.5. The test specimens uniform rate such that the specimen fails between 60 and 70 s
shall be prepared for testing in the manner prescribed in 6.7. from start of the test. Minimum failure pressures are shown in
Table A2.4.
A2.4 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
A2.4.1 The manufacture of these fittings shall be in accor- A2.6 Product Marking
dance with good commercial practice so as to produce fittings A2.6.1 Fittings shall be marked with the following:
meeting the requirements of this Annex. Fittings shall be A2.6.1.1 ASME SF-2945 or both ASME SF-2945 and
homogeneous throughout and free of cracks, holes, foreign ASTM F2945,
inclusions, or other injurious defects. The fittings shall be as A2.6.1.2 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, A2.6.1.3 GAS,
and other physical properties. A2.6.1.4 Material designations (PA32312 or PA32316), and
A2.6.1.5 Date of manufacture or manufacturing code.
A2.5 Test Methods
A2.6.2 Where the physical size of the fitting does not allow
A2.5.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
complete marking, marking may be omitted in the following
A2.5.1.1 Outside Diameter—Measure the outside diameter
sequence: size, date of manufacture, material designation,
of the fittings at the area of fusion in accordance with the Wall
manufacturer’s name or trademark.
Thickness section of Test Method D2122 by use of a circum-
ferential tape readable to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm).
436
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
TABLE A2.2 Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Tolerances for Fittings for Use with Polyamide-11 (PA-11) Tubing
Tubing Type, Nominal Tubing Minimum Wall
0.062 (1.57) ⁄ CTS
12 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.495 (12.58) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.062 (1.58)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.745 (18.92) ... ...
0.090 (2.29) 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.437 (11.10) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.687 (17.44) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.090 (2.28)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.937 (23.80) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.187 (30.14) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.090 (2.28)
DR 11 3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.715 (18.16) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.077 (1.96)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.915 (23.24) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.101 (2.56)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.125 (28.58) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
DR 9.3 1⁄2 CTS 0.625 (15.88) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.483 (12.26) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.067 (1.70)
3⁄4 CTS 0.875 (22.22) ±0.010 (±0.26) 0.679 (17.24) ±0.004 (±0.10) 0.094 (2.38)
1 CTS 1.125 (28.58) ±0.013 (±0.34) 0.873 (22.18) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.121 (3.08)
11⁄4 CTS 1.375 (34.92) ±0.013 (±0.34) 1.069 (27.16) ±0.005 (±0.12) 0.148 (3.76)
A
TABLE A2.3 IPS Sizing System Wall Thickness and Tolerance at the Area of Fusion for Fittings for Use with Polyamide-11 (PA-11) Pipe,
in.A,B,C
Nominal Minimum Wall Thickness
Pipe Size SCH 40 SCH 80 SDR 21 SDR 17 SDR 13.5 DR 10 DR 11.5 SDR 11 DR 9.3 SDR 9
12⁄ 0.109 0.147 ... ... ... ... ... 0.076 0.090 ...
3 ⁄4 0.113 0.154 ... ... ... ... ... 0.095 0.113 0.117
1 0.133 0.179 ... ... ... ... ... 0.119 0.142 0.146
1 1⁄4 0.140 0.191 ... ... ... 0.166 ... 0.151 0.179 0.184
1 1⁄2 0.145 0.200 ... ... ... ... ... 0.173 0.204 0.211
2 0.154 0.218 ... ... ... ... ... 0.216 0.256 0.264
3 0.216 0.300 ... ... 0.259 ... 0.305 0.318 0.377 0.389
4 0.237 0.337 ... 0.264 0.333 ... 0.392 0.409 0.484 0.500
6 0.280 0.432 0.316 0.390 0.491 ... 0.576 0.603 0.713 0.736
8 0.322 ... 0.410 0.508 0.639 ... 0.750 0.785 0.928 0.958
10 0.365 ... 0.511 0.633 0.797 ... 0.935 0.978 1.156 1.194
12 0.406 ... 0.608 0.750 0.945 ... 1.109 1.160 1.371 1.417
A
Tolerance +20 %, 0 %.
B
C
TABLE A2.4 Minimum Burst Pressure Requirements at 73.4°F for

Common PA-11 Fitting SizesA
Wall Thickness, DR, Nominal Minimum Pressure,
A2.6.3 Where recessed marking is used, take care not to or Schedule Diameter psi
reduce the wall thickness below the minimum specified. DR 7 ALLB 1300
SDR 9 ALLB 975
DR 9.3 ALLB 945
A2.7 Quality Assurance SDR 11 ALLB 775
DR 11.5 ALLB 745
A2.7.1 The manufacturer affirms that the product was DR 15.5 ALLB 540
manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance SDR 17 ALLB 495
with this Annex and has been found to meet the re- SDR 21 ALLB 385
DR 32.5 ALLB 250
quirements of this Annex. 0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1⁄2 CTS 860
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 3⁄4 CTS 590
0.062 in. (1.575 mm) 1 CTS 450
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1⁄2 CTS 1315
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 3⁄4 CTS 700
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 1 CTS 650
0.090 in. (2.286 mm) 11⁄4 CTS 540
A
Fiber stress of 3900 psi (27 MPa) for PA32312 and PA32316.
B
Refers to IPS diameters shown in Table A2.1 and Table A2.2.
437
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
TABLE A2.5 Sustained Pressure Test Options, psig (MPa)
SDR/DR Option 1A,B Option 2B,C

73°F (23°C)/1000 h 176°F (80°C)/170 h
DR 7 935 (6.5) 485 (3.3)
SDR 9 700 (4.8) 360 (2.5)
SDR 11 560 (3.9) 290 (2.0)
DR 15.5 385 (2.7) 200 (1.4)
SDR 17 350 (2.4) 180 (1.2)
SDR 21 280 (1.9) 145 (1.0)
A DR 32.5 180 (1.2) 90 (0.6)
B
All psig values were rounded to nearest 5 psig.
C
A3. CERTIFICATION
438
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
APPENDIXES
X1. BUTT FUSION GUIDELINES FOR POLYAMIDE 11
X1.1 General sufficiently long to produce a melt bead of approximately 1⁄16

X1.1.1 The PPI TR-45 referenced butt fusion procedures are –1⁄8 in. The pipe should be held under pressure until cooled to
intended to be used for jointing polyamide 11 (PA-11) piping. the touch.
Critical parameters in the butt fusion process are heater iron
surface temperature, heat soak time, and interfacial pressure X1.2 Butt Fusion Procedure
during the initial contact of the molten pipe ends and during X1.2.1 PPI TR-45 Butt Fusion Joining Procedures for Field
cooling and cooling time. The heat soak time and cooling time Joining of Polyamide-11 (2008) is the recommended procedure
parameters vary as a function of pipe size and wall thickness. for butt fusion joining of PA-11 piping.
As a general guideline, the heat soak time for should be
X2. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
X2.1 General
X2.1.1 The design of a plastic piping system for natural gas Do = average outside diameter, in. (mm), and
service must include consideration of the combined effects of T = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm).
time, internal and external stress, and environment as an X2.2.2 The following expression can be used to determine
overall basis for selecting a specific kind and size of plastic the burst pressure or sustained pressures needed in testing:
pipe. The design stress for plastic pipe used for transport of fuel
gases is regulated by the U.S. Department of Transportation as P b 5 2S y ⁄ ~ DR 2 1 ! (X2.2)
published in 49 CFR 192. The American Gas Association where:
Plastic Materials Committee, the Fuel Gas Division of PPI, and Pb = burst pressure, psig (MPa),
members of ASTM Committee F17 are cooperating with the Sy = yield stress, psi (MPa), and
ASME Gas Piping Technology Committee to provide assis- DR = dimension ratio.
tance in selecting safe design stress levels for the various
kinds of plastic pipe. P s 5 2S f ⁄ ~ DR 2 1 ! (X2.3)
where:
Ps = sustained pressure, psig (MPa),
X2.2 Design Equations Sf = fiber stress psi (MPa), and
X2.2.1 Relationship Between Pipe Stress and Pressure— DR = dimension ratio.
The following expression is used to relate stress, pressure, pipe X2.2.3 Relation between Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB)
size, and wall thickness: and Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS)—The HDS is determined
P 5 2S⁄ ~ DR 2 1 ! or 2S⁄ @ ~ D o ⁄t ! 2 1 # (X2.1)
by multiplying the HDB by a design factor, f. The design
factor, f, has a value less than 1.0.
where:
HDS 5 ~ HDB ! ~ f ! (X2.4)
S = stress in the circumferential or hoop direction, psi NOTE X2.1—The actual choice of design factor for a given installation
(MPa), must be reviewed by the design engineer taking into account federal, state,
P = internal pressure, psig (MPa),
DR = dimension ratio,
439
SF-2945 ASME NM.3.1-2018
and local code requirements. For example, the design factor for gas X2.4.4 Design Pressure:
pipelines under the jurisdiction of the Department of Transportation is X2.4.4.1 The design pressure of plastic pipe is selected by
0.32.
the pipeline operator on the basis of the gas supply system
X2.3 Design Stress and Internal Pressure for Natural operating requirements, the polyamide 11 materials used and
Gas the authority having jurisdiction. In accordance with Eq X2.8
X2.3.1 The design stresses for natural gas pipe are based on the design pressure of PA11 piping depends upon; the PA-
the hydrostatic design basis at 73°F (23°C) obtained in 11HDB, the pipe’s DR; and is reduced by a service design
accordance with Test Method D2837. The hydrostatic design factor, f. US CFR Title 49, Part 192.121 prescribes the use of
basis of the polyamide 11 is 2500 psi at 73°F for PA32312 and the following equation in calculating the design pressures in
3150 psi for PA32316. the design of plastic pipe.
2Sf 2Stf
X2.3.2 The design stresses for natural gas at service tem- Design Pressure, DP 5 or DP 5
peratures above 73°F (23°C) should be based on hydrostatic ~ SDR 2 1 ! ~D 2 t!
design basis of the pipe that are applicable for the particular use (X2.8)
temperature. where:
X2.3.3 The design stresses for natural gas are obtained by S = HDB,
multiplying the hydrostatic design basis by design factors or f = design pressure,
service factors according to the class of location as described in SDR = standard dimension ratio,
Chapter IV of ASME B31.8, or, for gas operators in the D = specified outside diameter, and
United States, Subpart C of the Minimum Federal Safety t = specified wall thickness.
Standards for Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by X2.4.4.2 The design factor, f, is a number less than 1.00 that
Pipeline, Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations. takes into consideration the variables and degree of safety
involved in a properly installed thermoplastic pressure piping
application. The design factor for plastic pipe used for the
X2.4 Thermal Stress
transport of USA jurisdictional natural and other gas is
X2.4.1 Calculate the longitudinal stress (theoretical) in- prescribed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as pub-
duced in a pipe member between fixed points as follows: lished in 49 CFR 192. The federal code currently permits the
S 5 E 3 C 3 ∆t (X2.5) use of a design factor of 0.40 for polyamide 11 gas piping. For
applications not falling under the jurisdiction of Part 192 other
where: design factors may be used. The Plastics Pipe Institute’s TR-
S = stress, psi (MPa), 9 report provides a more thorough discussion of design factors.
E = modulus of elasticity, psi (MPa), instantaneous, at 73°F Table X2.1 lists typical PA-11 design pressure calculations at
(23°C), 73°F (23°C) made in accordance with Eq X2.8.
C = coefficient of expansion, in./in./°F, (mm/mm/°C), and
∆t = maximum temperature minus minimum temperature, X2.5 Installation Procedure
°F (°C).
X2.5.1 It is recognized that certain minimum requirements
X2.4.1.1 The measured stress has been determined to be exist for the support of earth loads from backfill and other
less than that calculated. This difference is caused by the stress external forces. Proper installation techniques can be used with
relaxation in viscoelastic materials. flexible conduit to support relatively large earth loads without
X2.4.2 Calculate the theoretical force sustained at the fixed excessive deflection by mobilizing lateral passive soil forces.
points (typically joints) in a pipe member as follows: Proper installation technique ensures that the necessary passive
soil pressure at the side of the pipe will be developed and
F 5 S 3A (X2.6)
maintained. It is also recognized that internal pressures may be
where: valuable in minimizing the deflection caused by earth loads.
F = force, lbf (N), Installation procedures described in Recommended Practice
S = stress, psi (MPa), and
A = cross-sectional pipe wall area, in.2 (mm2).
X2.4.3 Calculate pipe contraction in unrestrained pipe TABLE X2.1 Typical PA-11 Design Pressures (DP) as Calculated
caused by a reduction in temperature as follows: Using Eq X2.8
∆L 5 k 3 L 3 C 3 ∆t (X2.7) PA-11 Material PA 32316 PA 32312
HDB (psi) 3150 2500
where: Design Factor 0.4 0.4
SDR DP, psig DP, psig
∆L = change in length, 17 158 125
K = 1000 for ∆L (mm), L (m), C (°C-1), ∆t (°C), or 13.5 202 160
K = 12 for ∆L (in.), L (ft), C (°F-1), ∆t (°F), 11 252 200
9.5 296 235
L = original length, 7 420 333
C = coefficient of linear expansion, and
∆t = temperature change.
440
ASME NM.3.1-2018 SF-2945
D2774, ASME B31.8, and the AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas made in the field to prevent pullout, keeping in mind that
Service are recommended. mechanical joints are vulnerable to the effects of internal
X2.5.2 Unrestrained plastic pipe expands and contracts pressure, temperature changes, earth settlement, and ground
from thermal change significantly more than metallic pipe. movement. A somewhat limited alternative is to use long
This ratio may be of the magnitude of ten to one. The typical sleeve-type fittings that permit limited movement without loss
coefficient of thermal expansion for unrestrained polyamide 11 of pressure seal. Otherwise, provisions must be made in the
pipe is 11.0 × 10-5 (in/in)/°F. Mains and service lines installed field to prevent pullout through suitable anchoring at the joint.
by insertion are considered to approximate unrestrained con- X2.5.6 Kinks found in the pipe shall be cut out. Pipe with
ditions inside the casing pipe except at end connections. kinks shall not be placed in service.
Direct-burial pipe is considered to be partially restrained by
passive soil pressures except in the vicinity of joints. X2.6 Repair Considerations
X2.5.3 Internal pressure, earth settlement, ground X2.6.1 Repairs may be made to plastic pipe under appro-
movement, and thermal contraction impose stresses on the pipe priate circumstances. Selection and installation considerations
that can be transmitted to joints. These stresses are additive. for the use of full encirclement band clamps are available in
Installation practices should reflect the need for continuous Guide F1025. Additional information on repair of plastic pipe
support and containment of the pipe through suitable bedding may be found in manufacturers’ literature, the AGA Plastic
and backfilling procedures. Attention should be given to all Pipe Manual for Gas Service, ASME B31.8, and in the ASME
joints, particularly to transition joints between polyamide 11 Guide for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
and metal pipe. Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
X2.5.4 It is desirable to have pipe joints that are as strong as
the pipe itself in the longitudinal (axial) direction. The joint
strength is a function of the assembly procedure, the design of
the fitting, and the pipe material and dimensions.
X2.5.5 For those mechanical devices that are not designed
to restrain the pipe against pullout forces, provisions must be
441
ASME NM.3.1-2018
MANDATORY APPENDIX I
STANDARD UNITS FOR USE IN EQUATIONS
Table I-1 Standard Units for Use in Equations

Quantity U.S. Customary Units SI Units
Linear dimensions (e.g., length, height, thickness, radius, inches (in.) millimeters (mm)
diameter)
Area square inches (in.2) square millimeters (mm2)
3
Volume cubic inches (in. ) cubic millimeters (mm3)
3
Section modulus cubic inches (in. ) cubic millimeters (mm3)
4 4
Moment of inertia of section inches (in. ) millimeters4 (mm4)
Mass (weight) pounds mass (lbm) kilograms (kg)
Force (load) pounds force (lbf) newtons (N)
Bending moment inch-pounds (in.-lb) newton-millimeters (N·mm)
Pressure, stress, stress intensity, and modulus of elasticity pounds per square inch (psi) megapascals (MPa)
Energy (e.g., Charpy impact values) foot-pounds (ft-lb) joules (J)
Temperature degrees Fahrenheit (°F) degrees Celsius (°C)
Absolute temperature Rankine (°R) kelvin (K)
Fracture toughness ksi square root inches (ksi in. ) MPa square root meters
(MPa m )
Angle degrees or radians degrees or radians
Boiler capacity British thermal units per hr watts (W)
(Btu/hr)
442
ASME NM.3.1-2018
MANDATORY APPENDIX II
GUIDELINES ON ACCEPTABLE ASTM EDITIONS
All materials, originating from an ASTM specification, under an ASTM Specification listed in Table II-1 may
allowed by the various construction standards and be used in lieu of the corresponding ASME
used for construction within the scope of their require- Specification as listed in this guideline. Material produced
ments shall be furnished in accordance with the to an ASME or ASTM Specification with requirements
Material Specifications contained within ASME NM.3.1 different from the requirements of the corresponding
and ASME NM.3.2 and this guideline except where other- Specification may also be used in accordance with the
wise provided in Cases or in the applicable ASME above, provided the material manufacturer certifies
Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems (NPPS) Standard. with evidence acceptable to the owner that the corre-
Materials covered by these Specifications are acceptable sponding Specification requirements have been met.
for use in items covered by ASME NPPS Standards only to This guideline lists the Specifications originating from
the degree indicated in the applicable ASME NPPS ASTM, and their acceptable dates of issue as well as
Standard. Materials for use in accordance with this the ASME NPPS Standard in which the specification is
Standard should preferably be ordered, produced, and approved for use.
documented on this basis; however, material produced
443
ASME NM.3.1-2018
Table II-1 Acceptable ASTM Editions

Applicable ASME NPPS Standard Latest Adopted Other Acceptable
Specification NM.1 NM.2 Case ASTM ASTM Editions
SD-1784 x … … 11 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 14 and 15.
SD-1785 x … … 12 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 10.2.1.4, renumbering
of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2116 x … … 07(R12) …
Identical except for revisons in para. 7.1 and section 13, additional requirements in section 14 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
section 15.
SD-2239 x … … 12a …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised requirements in para. 9.1.5, renumbering of section
12, and quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2241 x … … 09 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A2, revised marking requirements in para. 10.1.5, renumbering
SD-2464 x … … 13 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3,
and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2466 x … … 13 …
of section 13 and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2467 x … … 13a …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in paras. 10.2.4 and 10.3,
renumbering of section 13, and quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2513 x … … 14e1 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 9 and Annex A3, revision to para. 1.4, revised marking requirements in paras.
7.1, 7.2 and 7.5, changes from “ANSI” to “ASME” in paras. 2.2, 3.2, and 5.15 and paras. X1.3.4, X1.5.1, and X1.6.1, and quality assurance
requirement in para. 8.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2683 x … … 14 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.5, and quality
assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2737 x … … 12a …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.5, renumbering of
section 12, and quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.
SD-2846/SD-2846M x … … 14 …
444
ASME NM.3.1-2018
Table II-1 Acceptable ASTM Editions (Cont’d)

SD-3035 x … … 14a …
SD-3222 x … … 05(R10) …
Identical except for revisions in para. 7.1 and section 12, and additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 14 and 15.
SD-3261 x … … 12e1 …
SD-3307 x … … 10 …
Identical except for revisions in paras. 5.2, 7.1, and section 10, and additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 12 and 13.
SD-3350 x … … 14 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 14 and Annex A1, and renumbering of section 15.
SD-4101 x … … 11 …
Identical except for changes in section 14, additional requirements in section 15 and Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 16, 17, and 18.
SD-4894 x … … 07(R12) …
Identical except for revisions in para. 7.1 and section 11, and additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 13 and 14.
SD-4895 x … … 10 …
Identical except for revisions in section 11, additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 13 and 14.
SD-4976 x … … 12a …
Identical except for revisions in paras. 3.2, 9.2, and section 13, additional requirements in section 14 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 15 and 16.
SD-5575 x … … 07(R13) …
Identical except for revisions in section 11, additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, and renumbering of sections 13, 14, and
15.
SD-6779 x … … 12a …
Identical except for revisions in paras. 8.1, 11.1.1, and section 12, additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, and renumbering of
sections 14 and 15.
SF-437 x … … 09 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in paras. 10.2.1.5 and 10.3, and
quality assurance requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory.
SF-438 x … … 09 …
445
ASME NM.3.1-2018

SF-439 x … … 13 …
SF-441/SF-441M x … … 13e1 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 10.2.1.5, and quality
SF-442/SF-442M x … … 13e1 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 10.2.1.5, and quality
SF-714 x … … 13 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 8 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.2, changes from “ANSI”
to “ASME” in paras. 1.7 and 2.2 and Tables 5 and 7, and quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory.
SF-1055 x … … 13 …
SF-1483 x … … 12 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.6, quality assurance
requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of section 12.
SF-1673 x … … 10 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 12 and Annex A2, revised marking requirements in para. 10.2.2.5, quality assurance
requirement in para. 11.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of section 13.
SF-1733 x … … 13 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 13 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 11.1.1, and quality
SF-1924 x … … 12 …
SF-1970 x … … 12e1 …
SF-2206 x … … 14 …
SF-2389 x … … 10 …
Identical except for revisions to section 11, additional requirements in Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 12.1.7, and quality
446
ASME NM.3.1-2018

SF-2600 x … … 09 …
SF-2619/SF-2619M x … … 13 …
SF-2623 x … … 08 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revised marking requirements in para. 9.1.6, changes from “ANSI”
to “ASME” in paras. 2.2 and 3.1, quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory, and renumbering of section 12.
SF-2769 x … … 10 …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 11 and Annex A1, revision to para. 5.6 title, revised marking requirements in para.
9.1.4.7, revised “ANSI” to “ASME” in paras. 2.2, 2.8, and 3.1, quality assurance requirement in para. 10.1 has been made mandatory, and
renumbering of section 12.
SF-2880 x … … 14 …
Identical except for revised requirements in section 9 and additional requirements in Annex A1, and revised marking requirements in para.
7.1.3.8.
SF-2945 x … … 12a …
Identical except for additional requirements in section 9 and Annex A3, update to para. 1.4, corrected title of 49 CFR 192 in para. 2.3, revised
marking requirements in para. 7.1, Note 10, and para. A2.6.1.1, changes from “ANSI” to “ASME” in paras. 2.2, 3.2, 5.15, X2.3.3, X2.5.1, and
X2.6.1, and quality assurance requirements in para. 8.1 and para. A2.7.1 have been made mandatory.
447
ASME NM.3.1-2018
MANDATORY APPENDIX III

GUIDELINES ON MULTIPLE MARKING OF MATERIALS
III-1 BACKGROUND III-4 PROHIBITION ON MULTIPLE MARKING

A common inquiry topic is the permissibility of using Dual or multiple marking is not acceptable if two or
material that is identified with two or more specifications more specifications to which the material is marked
(or grades, classes, or types), even if they have different have mutually exclusive requirements.
strengths, or even if one of them is not permitted for use in This prohibition includes more than just chemistry and
the construction standard of application. property requirements.
III-2 GUIDELINES III-5 GRADE SUBSTITUTION

The construction standards individually define what Grade substitution is permitted provided that the
materials may be used in components constructed in substituted material meets all physical, mechanical,
compliance to their requirements. If a material meets and chemical compatibility requirements for the original
all of the requirements for a specification for which it material. An example is the use of PE4710 as PE100.
is marked, including documentation, if any, and if it
meets all requirements for use imposed by the construc- III-6 MARKING SELECTION
tion standard, it may be used. The construction standards,
in general, do not address the case of materials marked If a material is marked with specifications, grades,
with more than one specification, grade, class, or type, so classes, or types, it may be used with the allowable
these guidelines are offered for clarification. stresses or ratings appropriate for any of the markings
on the material, as long as the material specification,
grade, class, and type is permitted by the standard of
III-3 ACCEPTABILITY OF MULTIPLE MARKING
construction governing the component in which the mate-
Dual or multiple marking is acceptable, as long as the rial is to be used. However, once the designer has selected
material so marked meets all of the requirements of all the which marking applies (specification, grade, class, type,
specifications, grades, classes, and types with which it is etc.), the designer shall use all the design values appro-
marked. priate for that selection and shall not mix and match values
All of the measured and controlled attributes of the from any other specifications, grades, classes, types, etc.,
multiple-marked grades or specifications must overlap with which the material may be marked.
(e.g., chemistry, mechanical properties, dimensions,
and tolerances) and the material so marked must III-7 OTHER MARKINGS
exhibit values that fall within the overlaps. Further, the Any other markings, such as marking of non-ASME or
controlled but unmeasured attributes of the specifications non-ASTM material specifications, have no relevance,
or grades must overlap. even if those markings are for materials explicitly prohib-
Many specifications or grades have significant overlap ited by the construction standard being used. That is, as
of chemistry ranges or properties. It is common for mate- long as the one marking, and the documentation required
rial manufacturers to produce materials that satisfy more by the material and by the construction standard, shows
than one specification, grade, class, or type. Examples that it meets all the requirements for use of that material in
include SD-3035 and SF-714, and PE3408 and PE4710. that construction standard, any additional markings are
irrelevant.
448
ASME NM.3.1-2018
MANDATORY APPENDIX IV
GUIDELINE ON THE APPROVAL OF NEW MATERIALS
IV-1 STANDARD POLICY IV-3 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

It is the policy of the ASME Committee on Nonmetallic Together with the specification for the material, the
Pressure Piping Systems (NPPS) to adopt for inclusion in inquirer shall furnish the Committee with adequate
ASME NM.3 only such specifications as have been adopted data on which to base design values for inclusion in
by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM the applicable tables and data sheets.
International) and by other recognized national or inter- For materials that will be used in heat fused or other
national organizations. joining applications, sufficient data shall be provided for
It is expected that requests for standard approval will joined materials to allow ASME to assess the properties of
normally be for materials for which there is a recognized the completed joint in comparison with the base material.
national or international specification and a user demand. If adoption at temperatures below room temperature is
For materials made to a recognized national or interna- requested, and if it is desired to take design advantage of
tional specification other than those of ASTM, the inquirer increased strength at lower temperatures, data on the
shall give notice to the standards developing organization properties shall be provided from room temperature
that a request has been made to ASME for adoption of their to the lowest intended-use temperature at intervals
specification under this Standard and shall request that not exceeding 20°F (or 10°C).
the organization grant ASME permission to reprint the If the material is to be used in components that operate
specification. For other materials, a request shall be under external pressure, compressive stress–strain
made to ASTM, or a recognized national or international curves (for each load direction for anisotropic materials
organization, to develop a specification that can be and as a function of load duration for viscoelastic mate-
presented to the Standards Committee. rials) shall be furnished, for the same temperature range
It is the policy of the ASME Committee on Nonmetallic and intervals for which tensile properties have been
Pressure Piping Systems to consider requests to adopt provided. The stress–strain curves (not load versus exten-
new materials only from nonmetallic component sion) shall be determined using a Class B-2 or better accu-
Manufacturers or users. Further, such requests should racy extensometer as defined in ASTM E83. Numerical
be for materials for which there is a reasonable expecta- data, when available, should be submitted. The data
tion of use in a component constructed to the require- should include the original cross-sectional area of the
ments of one of the ASME NPPS Standards. Requests test specimen and stress–strain curves with units
for new materials shall be accompanied by a communica- marked on them.
tion from an end user or an organization that specifies If the material is to be used in cyclic service and the
materials and contracts for the construction of products construction standard in which adoption is desired
to the requirements of one of the ASME NPPS Standards. requires explicit consideration of cyclic behavior,
The letter shall state the inquirer’s name and status as one fatigue data shall also be furnished over the range of
of these types of organizations. design temperatures desired.
In general, for all mechanical properties, data shall be
IV-2 APPLICATION provided from material meeting all of the requirements of
a specification for at least one product form for which
The inquirer shall identify to the Committee the ASME adoption is desired, for each test at each test temperature.
NPPS Standard in which the new material is to be incor- It is desired that the data represent all product forms for
porated, the temperature range of application, whether which adoption is desired. For product forms for which the
cyclic service is to be considered, and whether external properties may be size dependent, data from products of
pressure service is to be considered. The inquirer shall different sizes, including the largest size for which adop-
identify all product forms, size ranges, and specifications tion is desired, shall be provided.
for which incorporation is desired. Test methods employed shall be those referenced in or
by the material specifications, or shall be appropriate
ASTM test methods or recommended practices for the
properties tested.
449
ASME NM.3.1-2018
Information describing service experience in the IV-6 OTHER PROPERTIES

temperature range contemplated will be useful to the
Committee. The inquirer shall furnish to the Committee adequate
data necessary to establish values for coefficient of
thermal expansion, thermal conductivity and diffusivity,
IV-4 THERMOPLASTIC SPECIFIC MECHANICAL modulus of elasticity (for each load direction for aniso-
PROPERTIES tropic materials and as a function of load duration for
For thermoplastic materials, the data shall include viscoelastic materials), and Poisson’s ratio (for each
values of ultimate tensile strength (if applicable based load direction for anisotropic materials and as a function
on the material type), yield strength (if applicable of load duration for viscoelastic materials) when the
based on the material type), and elongation at yield construction standard in which adoption is desired
and break, from room temperature to maximum requires explicit consideration of these properties.
intended-use temperature at intervals not exceeding Data shall be provided over the range of temperatures
20°F (or 10°C). Additionally, the data shall include for which the material is to be used.
values of hydrostatic design basis (HDB) or minimum The inquirer shall also furnish to the Committee data
required strength (MRS) at room temperature and the necessary to establish the temperature range over which
maximum intended-use temperature. If HDB is not appli- the material may be used (e.g., glass transition tempera-
cable, then an alternative long-term strength methodology ture and heat distortion temperature).
shall be proposed. Where the mechanical properties are
dependent on the product form, the applicable product IV-7 JOINING
form used to produce the mechanical properties
The inquirer shall furnish complete data on the join-
should be identified.
ability of material intended for joining, including data
Toughness (e.g., slow crack growth resistance and rapid
on procedure qualification tests made in accordance
crack propagation resistance) data shall be provided for
with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and
materials for which toughness requirements in this
Pressure Vessel Code (ASME BPVC), Section IX or
Standard would be expected to apply. The data shall
other nationally or internationally recognized code or
include test results for the intended lowest service
standard referenced by the construction standard
temperature and for the range of material thicknesses
where applicable. Joining tests shall be made over the
desired. For construction involving joining, the toughness
full range of thickness in which the material is to be
data shall include the results of toughness tests in accor-
used or as required by ASME BPVC, Section IX where ap-
dance with this Standard for the affected zone for joints
plicable. Pertinent information, such as essential joining
made by the intended joining process(es).
variables, the effect of the joining procedure and affected
zone, and the amount of experience in joining the material,
IV-5 REINFORCED THERMOSET PLASTIC shall be given.
SPECIFIC MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
For reinforced thermoset plastic materials, the data IV-8 PHYSICAL CHANGES
shall include room-temperature values, for cured thermo- For new materials, it is important to know the structural
setting resin, fiber, and other materials, of ultimate tensile stability characteristics and the degree of retention of
strength and elongation at yield and break. Additionally, properties with exposure at temperature. The influence
the data may include values of hydrostatic design basis of fabrication practices, such as forming, extruding,
(HDB) or minimum required strength (MRS) at room machining, joining, thermal treatment, and ultraviolet
temperature and the maximum intended-use tempera- (UV) exposure, on the mechanical properties, ductility,
ture. If HDB is not applicable, then an alternative long- and microstructure of the material are important, parti-
term strength methodology shall be proposed. Where cularly where degradation in properties may occur. Where
the mechanical properties are dependent on the particular temperature ranges of exposure, cooling rates,
product form, the applicable product form used to combinations of mechanical working and thermal treat-
produce the mechanical properties should be identified. ments, fabrication practices, exposure to particular envi-
For the composite material, axial tensile strength, axial ronments, etc., cause significant changes in the mechanical
flexural strength, axial compressive strength, axial 2×1 properties, microstructure, resistance to brittle fracture,
biaxial tensile strength, hoop 2×1 biaxial tensile strength, etc., it is of prime importance to call attention to those
hoop tensile strength, and in-plane shear strength shall be conditions that should be avoided in service or in manu-
developed at 77°F (25°C), 150°F (66°C), and 200°F (93°C). facture of parts from the material.
450
ASME NM.3.1-2018
IV-9 REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL DATA (l) Has physical properties data [coefficient of thermal
expansion, thermal conductivity and diffusivity, modulus
The Committee may request additional data, including of elasticity (for each load direction for anisotropic mate-
data on properties or material behavior not explicitly rials, and as a function of load duration for viscoelastic
treated in the construction standard in which adoption materials), and Poisson’s ratio (for each load direction
is desired. for anisotropic materials, and as a function of load dura-
tion for viscoelastic materials)] been submitted?
IV-10 NEW MATERIALS CHECKLIST (m) Has data necessary to establish the temperature
To assist inquirers desiring coverage for new materials range over which the material may be used (e.g., glass
in this Standard, or extending coverage of existing mate- transition temperature and heat distortion temperature)
rials, the Committee has developed the following checklist been submitted?
of items that ought to be addressed by each inquiry. The (n) Have joining requirements been defined and has
Committee reserves the right to request additional data procedure qualification test data been submitted?
and application information when considering new (o) Has influence of fabrication practices on material
materials. properties been defined?
(a) Has a qualified inquirer request been provided?
(b) Has a request either for revision to existing require- IV-11 REQUIREMENTS FOR REQUESTS FOR ASME
ments or for a Case been defined? ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL
(c) Has a letter to ASTM been submitted requesting SPECIFICATIONS OF RECOGNIZED
coverage of the new material in a specification, and NATIONAL OR INTERNATIONAL
has a copy been submitted to the Committee? ORGANIZATIONS OTHER THAN ASTM
Alternatively, is this material already covered by a spec-
ification issued by a recognized national or international The Committee will consider only requests for specifi-
organization and has an English-language version been cations in the English language and in U.S. or SI/metric
provided? units. The Committee will consider accepting specifica-
(d) Has the construction standard coverage been tions of recognized national or international organiza-
identified? tions, such as, but not limited to, American Petroleum
(e) Has the material been defined as a thermoplastic, a Institute (API), ASTM, American Welding Society
reinforced thermoset plastic, a ceramic, a graphite, or (AWS), Canadian Standards Association (CSA),
other composite, and has the application (product European Committee for Standardization (CEN),
forms, size range, and specification) been defined? International Organization for Standardization (ISO),
(f) Has the range (maximum/minimum) of tempera- and Japanese Standards Association (JIS). Material speci-
ture application been defined? fications of other than national or international organiza-
(g) Has mechanical property data been submitted {ulti- tions, such as those of material producers and suppliers,
mate tensile strength (if applicable), yield strength (if ap- will not normally be considered for acceptance.
plicable), axial tensile strength (if applicable), axial
flexural strength (if applicable), axial compressive IV-12 REQUIREMENTS FOR RECOGNIZED
strength (if applicable), axial 2×1 biaxial tensile strength NATIONAL OR INTERNATIONAL
(if applicable), hoop 2×1 biaxial tensile strength (if appli- SPECIFICATIONS
cable), hoop tensile strength (if applicable), and in-plane
shear strength, elongation at yield and break, and long- Acceptable material specifications will be identified by
term strength [e.g., hydrostatic design basis (HDB), date or edition. Approved edition(s) will be stated in the
minimum required strength (MRS), or other method]} subtitle of the ASME specification. Eventually, acceptable
for appropriate product forms and sizes? previous editions will be listed in ASME NM.3.1 and ASME
(h) If coverage below room temperature is requested, NM.3.2. Minimum requirements that shall be contained in
has appropriate mechanical property data below room a material specification for which acceptance is being
temperature been submitted? requested include such items as name of national or inter-
(i) Have toughness considerations required by the national organization, scope, reference documents,
construction standard been defined and has appropriate process, manufacture, conditions for delivery, chemical
data been submitted? requirements (if applicable), tensile requirements,
(j) Have external pressure considerations been defined forming properties, testing specifications and require-
and have stress–strain curves been submitted for the ments, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection, and
establishment of external pressure charts? rejection.
(k) Have cyclic service considerations and service
limits been defined, and has appropriate fatigue data
been submitted?
451
ASME NM.3.1-2018
IV-13 PUBLICATION OF RECOGNIZED NATIONAL (b) the material is commercially available and can be
OR INTERNATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS purchased within the proposed specification
requirements
Specifications for which ASME has not been given (c) the inquirer shows that there will be a reasonable
permission to publish by the originating organization demand for the material by industry and that there exists
will be referenced on a cover sheet in ASME NM.3.1 an urgency for approval by means of a Case
and ASME NM.3.2. Documents that are referenced in (d) the requests for approval of the material shall
accepted national or international material specifications clearly describe it in specification form, including such
will not be published by ASME. Additions and exceptions items as scope, process, manufacture, conditions for
to the material specification will be noted in the subtitle of delivery, chemical requirements (if applicable), tensile re-
the specification. quirements, forming properties, testing specifications and
requirements, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection,
IV-14 CASE and rejection
The Standards Committee will consider the issuance of (e) all other requirements identified previously under
an ASME Case, permitting the use of a new material, paras. IV-1 and IV-2 apply
provided that the following conditions are met: (f) the inquirer shall furnish the Standards Committee
(a) the inquirer provides evidence that a request for with all the data specified in this Appendix
coverage of the material in a specification has been
made to ASTM or a recognized national or international
organization
452
ASME NM.3.1-2018

Asme NM.3.1-18 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme NM.3.1-18 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme NM.3.1-18 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main standards discussed in the document?

What are the main standards discussed in the document?

What are the requirements for requests for ASME acceptance of material specifications from other organizations?

What are the requirements for requests for ASME acceptance of material specifications from other organizations?

ASME NM.3.

ASME Standards for Nonmetallic

AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD

ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

SUBCOMMITTEE ON NONMETALLIC MATERIALS

NM-2-FRP AND NM-3-NMM SUBGROUP ON MATERIALS

THERMO SUBGROUP ON MATERIALS

As of April 23, 2019

D20 COMMITTEE ON PLASTICS

F17 COMMITTEE ON PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEMS

Secretary, NPPS Standards Committee

Perfluoro-Ethylene-Propylene Copolymer (FEP)

Perfluoroalkoxy Alkane (PFA)

Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT)

Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF)

SPECIFICATION FOR RIGID POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE)

1. Scope 1.4 The text of this specification references notes and

1 Base resin unspecified poly(vinyl chlorinated vinyl co-

SPECIFICATION FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

3. Terminology 5. Materials and Manufacture

psi MPa psi MPa

6.3 Burst Pressure—The minimum burst pressures for PVC

X1. SOURCE OF HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESSES

1 630 320 500 250 390 200 320 160

1 1⁄ 2 470 240 380 190 290 150 240 120

2 400 200 320 160 250 130 200 100

3 370 190 300 150 230 120 190 90

4 320 160 260 130 200 100 160 80

1 4.34 2.21 3.45 1.72 2.69 1.38 2.21 1.10

1 1⁄ 2 3.24 1.65 2.62 1.31 2.0 1.03 1.65 0.83

2 2.76 1.38 2.21 1.10 1.72 0.90 1.38 0.69

3 2.55 1.31 2.07 1.03 1.59 0.83 1.31 0.62

4 2.21 1.10 1.79 0.90 1.38 0.69 1.10 0.55

SPECIFICATION FOR FEP-FLUOROCARBON MOLDING

1. Scope D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

TABLE 2 Detail Requirements for Molded Test Specimens

NOTE 1—All Dimensions are in millimetres.

SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

TABLE 1 Polyethylene Compound Requirements

HDS for water at

TABLE 4 Minimum Burst Pressure for SIDR Pipe

TABLE 5 Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure TestA Requirements

X1. SOURCE OF HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESSES

SPECIFICATION FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

TABLE 1 IPS PVC Pipe—Outside Diameters and Tolerances

3⁄ 4 1.050 (26.67) ±0.004 (0.10) 0.030 (0.76) 0.020 (0.51)

2 2.375 (60.32) ±0.006 (0.15) 0.060 (1.52) 0.024 (0.61)

4 4.500 (114.30) ±0.009 (0.23) 0.100 (2.54) 0.030 (0.76)

10 10.750 (273.05) ±0.015 (0.38) 0.150 (3.81) 0.100 (2.54)

18 18.000 (457.20) ±0.019 (0.48) 0.360 (9.14) 0.180 (4.57)